JP7423001B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally referred to as "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, in pachinko machines, the reliability of the main control board for fraud prevention or fraud detection has been improved.
There is a configuration that increases the amount of time (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2004-81488A

In gaming machines, parts with leads are used in the main control board in order to easily detect unauthorized modification of the main control device that controls the progress of the game. However, the use of leaded components is decreasing in general industry, and it is expected that surface mount components will be adopted for main control devices as well. However, the main control device requires various countermeasures against unauthorized modification by a person who attempts to illegally obtain game balls.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses fraud and damage in a main control device using surface-mounted components .

In the present invention, a plurality of electronic components constituting an electronic circuit for performing control related to a game are provided with a control board fixed with solder, and a special electronic component among the electronic components constituting the electronic circuit is: In the game machine, the special electronic component is fixed by solder to a special board different from the control board, and the special board is housed together with the control board in a sealed board box having sealing means. The special board is an electronic component, and the special board includes a plurality of pads to which electrodes of the plurality of special electronic components are fixed with solder, and any one of the special electronic components constituting the electronic circuit provided on the control board. a plurality of connection terminals for electrically connecting to said electronic component via solder, said pad and said connection terminal being electrically conductive, and said plurality of said special electronic components; At least the special electronic components of the same type are fixed to the pads by solder in the same direction and arranged side by side at predetermined intervals when the surface fixed by solder to the special board is viewed from above. It is characterized in that the pad is formed (for example, see paragraphs 3200 to 3229, FIGS. 328 to 334, etc.).

According to the present invention, unauthorized access to the main control device can be suppressed .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from behind, with the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a left outer frame assembly and a right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of the door frame seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into each main member and seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the lock seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 34(a) as seen from the rear. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Fig. 34 (a) from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a). (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and the handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from behind. FIG. 41(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. 1. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a conventional door frame cut at the same part as (a) and showing the main parts. FIG. It is a top view which expands and shows the part of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of a door frame. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into each main member and viewed from the front and lower. (a) is a sectional view of the production operation unit in a state where the production operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upward moving end position, and (b) is a sectional view of the production operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where it has moved to the raised position. It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downward moving end position. It is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship of the production operation part outer periphery decorative board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and (b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a top view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected in (a). It is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching part is provided between them, and (c) is an illustration in which the plate left decoration unit, the plate right decoration unit, the production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit can be moved back and forth in the front and back direction, and the production operation unit FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact sensing bodies are provided on the front and rear sides of the device. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the door frame left side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from behind. 62(a) is a sectional view taken along the line U--U in FIG. 62(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front. (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. FIG. 66(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). 66A is a cross-sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the door frame as it is and the outer layer is transparent. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in the closed state. It is a front view showing each decorative board of a door frame. It is a top view which shows the decoration board of the part of a production operation unit of a door frame. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of the main body frame of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from behind. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the back. (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 100(a) is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a); It is an explanatory view showing an area where game balls overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine including a tank rail and the like according to another embodiment when viewed from the back and showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail. (a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is a ( It is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of a) seen from behind. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. of FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 107(a) is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carcar line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. (a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. FIG. (a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right back, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 111(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a); FIG. 111(a) is an exploded perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 111(a), viewed from behind. (a) is a sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along the Keke line. 111(a) is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 111(a). FIG. It is an explanatory view showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. (a) is an explanatory view showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in (a). FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board in which a center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 119 viewed from the front right. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 119 viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from a function display unit on the main control board. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the center accessory etc. are made transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. 120 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 119. 120 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 119. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. (a) is a front perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in the front unit, and (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in the front unit. It is a perspective view of an attacker unit seen from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit seen from the back. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the center accessory and the opening of the game panel. (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center accessory, the game panel, and the back left decorative body of the back unit, and (b) is a front view of (a). (a) is a top view of the third distribution device in a center accessory, and (b) is a perspective view of the third distribution device in the center accessory seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the third sorting device of the center accessory, viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the third sorting device of the center accessory, viewed from the front and lower. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the third sorting device in the center accessory. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the protrusion provided in the second V winning opening and the third losing opening in the third sorting device of the center accessory, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the protrusion provided in the second V winning opening and the third losing opening. It is an explanatory view showing the movement of the game ball when no protrusion is provided in the three-loss opening. It is an explanatory diagram showing a flow path of the game ball on the right side in the front unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls circulating through the first guide passage in the guide passage group, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls circulating through the second guide passage in the guide passage group. be. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls accepted into the accessory prize opening, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the third sorting device in (a) from a plane, and (c) FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the parts of the second sorting device in FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the accessory prize opening, the first sorting device, and the second sorting device according to the type of “small win”. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a sectional view taken along the line EE in (a). (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing embodiments of guide passage groups different from those in FIG. 129. (e) and (f) are explanatory views showing further different embodiments of guide passage groups. It is a front view of the back unit in a game board. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate production unit of the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate production unit seen from the back. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern board in the light guide plate production unit from the front. (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is emitted, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of each decorative board of the back front presentation unit in a back unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front presentation unit in the back unit, the sub-status indicator, and the right part of the center accessory, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the right side part of the center accessory in the back unit, and (b) is It is an explanatory view showing from the front the relationship between the back right decorative board, the sub-state display, and the right part of the center accessory of the back front presentation unit in the back unit. It is a wiring diagram showing wiring of some LEDs of the sub-state LEDs on the back right decorative board. (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d) is a back view of the out ball detection unit. (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the back; (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit as seen from a lower right front position; (g) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit viewed from the lower right rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the out-ball detection unit disassembled and seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing the out ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. It is an enlarged sectional view taken from the right side when assembled to a game board and cut vertically at the center of the right sensor at the exit. It is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the exit from the front in a state where the game board is assembled. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second picture is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first picture is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit. 1 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the connection configuration of each board, motor, etc. in the game board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side power-on processing. 169 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 168. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of error display processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting value confirmation display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit in FIG. 174. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is powered on after FIG. 175. FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of payout control unit timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and special electric accessory control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the preliminary determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting port passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpots, (B) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpot types, and (C) is a jackpot symbol determination table used for lottery processing regarding jackpot types. This is a small winning symbol determination table used in the lottery process for . It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the first special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot control process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. This is an example of an error notification mode. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of volume adjustment and sound output suppression in a predetermined frequency band. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a procedure for changing a setting value. This is a variation pattern table used for determining variation patterns. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a right detection sensor is provided in the first guide passage. This is a specific example of a warning effect when a warning effect is executed using the right detection sensor. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in a first guide passage and a second guide passage. This is a specific example of a warning effect when a warning effect is executed using a right detection sensor and a left detection sensor. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a ball clogging elimination hole is provided in a first guide passage and a second guide passage. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a ball clogging elimination hole is provided in a first guide passage and a second guide passage. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage and the second guide passage. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second outlet is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of execution of calculations when an abnormality occurs. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of execution of calculations when an abnormality occurs. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a second outlet and a third outlet are provided separately from the outlet. It is an explanatory view showing the execution state of arithmetic operation when a second outlet and a third outlet are provided separately from the outlet. This is an emission color pattern table in which emission color patterns of a light guide plate are set. It is an explanatory view showing an embodiment in which a plurality of decorations are provided around the display area of the effect display device. This is a specific example of a performance using a light guide plate and a plurality of decorations when performing a light emission performance. This is a pattern displayed on the light guide plate and the performance display device when the imitation performance is executed. This is a specific example of the performance on the light guide plate and the performance display device when performing the imitation performance. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 3 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from a main control board to a peripheral control board. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure for setting information determination processing executed by the main control MPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting value suspension suggestion performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of image data that combines a display mode of a suspension notice effect and a display mode of a setting value suspension suggestion effect. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of setting value continuous suggestion performance. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. This is a table showing the winning probability etc. according to the setting values of the gaming machine. 7 is a time chart illustrating a monitoring state for fraudulent acts during a setting change of setting values. 12 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent acts when fraudulent acts are not monitored during confirmation display of set values. 11 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a part of the screen is partially monitored for fraudulent activity while setting value confirmation display is being performed. 12 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when a part of the display is partially monitored for fraudulent activity while changing settings of setting values. It is a front view of the game board of a modification. This is an example of a table used in lottery processing. This is a modification of the setting value suggestion effect. It is a front view of the game board of 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the center accessory of the front unit in the game board of 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the front left decorative body of the center minor accessory, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the front left decorative body of the center minor accessory, viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. (a) is a front view of the front left decorative body of the center accessory, (b) is a perspective view of the front left decorative body seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the front left decorative body seen from the back. FIG. It is a front view showing the pattern of the front left decorative body. 242 is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 241. FIG. (a) is a front view showing the relationship between the front left decorative body and the front left decorative board, and (b) is a front view showing the relationship between the front left decorative body and the center accessory base. It is a front view of the center lower back unit in the center accessory. (a) is a perspective view of the center lower back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center lower back unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the center lower rear unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the center lower rear unit, viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the center lower rear decorative body of the center lower rear unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center lower rear decorative body of the center lower rear unit viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a developed pattern of the center lower back decoration body. 248 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 248. It is an explanatory view showing attachment of a center lower back ornament to a center lower back front cover in a center lower back unit. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the arrangement of the center lower back decorative board in the center lower back unit. It is a front view of the back production unit in the back unit. (a) is a front view of the back decoration in the back production unit, and (b) is a perspective view of the back decoration seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the back decoration body unfolded together with the pattern. It is a front view of the game board of 4th embodiment. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the front left decorative body of the center minor accessory, viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the front left decorative body of the center minor accessory, viewed from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view. (a) is a front view of the front left decorative body of the center accessory, (b) is a perspective view of the front left decorative body seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the front left decorative body seen from the back. FIG. It is a front view showing the pattern of the front left decorative body. It is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the front left decorative body of the center accessory cut in the horizontal direction. It is a front view showing the relationship between the front left decorative body and the front left decorative board. It is a front view of the center lower back unit in the center accessory. (a) is a perspective view of the center lower back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center lower back unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the center lower rear unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the center lower rear unit, viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the center lower rear decorative body of the center lower rear unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center lower rear decorative body of the center lower rear unit viewed from the back. 267 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 266. It is an explanatory view showing attachment of a center lower back ornament to a center lower back front cover in a center lower back unit. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the arrangement of the center lower back decorative board in the center lower back unit. It is a front view of the back production unit in the back unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back production unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back production unit seen from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit when viewed from behind. (a) is a front view of the back decoration in the back production unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back decoration seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the back decoration seen from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the back decoration body together with a pattern. 274 is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 274. FIG. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear decoration body and the rear decoration lens as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the rear decoration body and the rear decoration body lens assembled from the front. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the relationship between the back decoration and the back decoration lens. FIG. 3 is a front view of the back presentation unit showing the arrangement of the rear back decorative board and the lower back decorative board. It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the game board of the fifth embodiment, cut horizontally and seen from above. It is a front view of the game board of 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the back upper production unit in the back unit. (a) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit in the back unit seen from the back. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the back effect unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the upper back production unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper back production unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back top decoration unit of the back top presentation unit as seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the upper back decoration unit of the upper back production unit as seen from behind. 287 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 286. It is a front view of the front support lens of the back top decoration unit and the back top decoration sheet in the back top presentation unit. (a) is a front view of the back upper left decorative body and the back upper right decorative body of the back upper decoration unit in the back upper production unit, and (b) is a front view of the back upper left decorative body and the back upper right decorative body as seen from the front. (c) is a perspective view of the back upper left decorative body and the back upper right decorative body as seen from behind. It is a front view showing a back upper left decorative body and a back upper right decorative body together with a pattern. It is a front view of the rear support lens of the upper back decoration unit in the upper back production unit. It is a front view showing the back upper production unit in the back unit 3000 together with a pattern. FIG. 3 is a front view of the back and upper presentation unit showing the arrangement of the back and front decorative boards. It is a front view of a slot machine. (a) is a front view of the left side decoration unit of the top cover unit in the door unit of the first embodiment of the slot machine, and (b) is a perspective view of the left side decoration unit seen from the front; c) is a perspective view of the left side decoration unit seen from behind. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from behind. FIG. 301(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ. (a) is a front view of a normal state of the slot machine having the door unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the slot machine of (a) in which the front decoration of the front presentation unit is moved downward. It is a front view shown in a state. It is a front view of the rear effect unit in the door unit of 2nd Embodiment. (a) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 306 seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 306 seen from the back. FIG. 306 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 306 as seen from the front. FIG. 306 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 306 when viewed from behind. 306 is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 306. FIG. (a) is a front view of the rear decorative body of the back and rear effect unit in FIG. 306, (b) is a perspective view of the rear decorative body seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the rear decorative body seen from the back. FIG. 306 is a front view showing the arrangement of decorative boards in the post-effect unit of FIG. 306. FIG. (a) is a front view of a normal state of the slot machine having the door unit of the third embodiment, and (b) is a front view of the slot machine of (a) in which the front decorative body of the front presentation unit is moved downward. It is a front view shown in a state. It is a front view of the rear effect unit in the door unit of 3rd Embodiment. (a) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit in FIG. 314 seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit in FIG. 314 seen from the back. FIG. 314 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 314 when viewed from the front. FIG. 314 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 314 when viewed from behind. 315 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 314. FIG. 314. (a) is a front view of the rear decoration of the rear effect unit in FIG. 314, (b) is a perspective view of the rear decoration seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the rear decoration seen from the back. FIG. 314 is a front view showing the arrangement of decorative boards in the post-effect unit of FIG. 314. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a ROM socket arranged on the peripheral control board according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 322 is a front view of the ROM socket of FIG. 321; FIG. 322 is a top view of the ROM socket of FIG. 321; FIG. 322 is a side view of the ROM socket of FIG. 321; FIG. 322 is a bottom view of the ROM socket of FIG. 321; 322 is a side view showing a state in which the ROM socket of FIG. 321 is mounted on a peripheral control board. FIG. FIG. 7 is a side view showing a state in which a ROM socket according to a modification of the present embodiment is mounted on a peripheral control board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of surface mount components mounted on the main control board. They are (A) a top view, (B) a front view, and (C) a bottom view of a surface mount component mounted on a main control board. FIG. 7 is a plan view of another example of surface mount components mounted on the main control board. FIG. 7 is a plan view of another example of surface mount components mounted on the main control board. FIG. 7 is a plan view of another example of surface mount components mounted on the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a main control board on which surface-mounted components are mounted. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a main control board on which surface-mounted components are mounted. 169 is a diagram showing details of the configuration of the peripheral control board shown in FIG. 168. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of displaying a communication error using the entire screen. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a communication error display displayed in a corner of the screen. It is a schematic diagram showing a longitudinal section of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a longitudinal section of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a longitudinal section of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a longitudinal section of a pachinko machine. It is a diagram showing a state in which the upper part of the pachinko machine is viewed from the upper visibility area. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a connection between a vibration sensor and a main control board. 17 is a diagram showing the configuration of a relay board 1720. FIG.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the Pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the Pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the Pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the back. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. be. Moreover, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame disassembled, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine with the door frame, game board, body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed from the front of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that supports the main body frame 4 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. A game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 89) is driven is provided.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right and extend vertically, and the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20. the outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the outer frame upper member 30 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

Further, when the door frame 3 closes the main body frame 4, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4, and a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is closed. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 195, and when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can operate the performance operation section 301. The player can now participate in the performance, and in addition to the game with the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the performance operation section 301.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a main body frame base unit 500 that is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed; a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500; A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball received by the payout base unit 550. A board unit 620 that includes a payout control board 633 in addition to a power board 630 that includes a payout unit 560 for paying out balls B to the player and a power switch 630a that can power on the pachinko machine 1. , a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. We are prepared.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall in an openable and closable manner at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and a door frame 3 is attached so that the open front side can be closed. is installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) is provided, an effect display device 1600 which is placed in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and an effect display device 1600 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100. A front unit 2000 is provided, and a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units that can perform movable performances and light-emitting performances depending on the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined benefit for the player by accepting or passing the game balls B. (For example, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) is provided with a general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole 2005. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front side of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted into or passes through the general winning hole 2001, first starting hole 2002, normal winning hole 2003, second starting hole 2004, big winning hole 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. Thus, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 195.

In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, and displays a predetermined performance image on the performance display device 1600, The player can be entertained by having the effect unit 3200 perform a light emitting effect.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Moreover, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame seen from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 has a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other left and right and extend vertically, and a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20. The upper outer frame member 30 whose upper ends are connected to each other, the lower outer frame assembly 40 which connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, and the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30. It includes an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 on the same axis. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 includes a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper end of the right side of the left outer frame member 11. and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side of the outer frame left member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear part of the left side surface divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess part 11a that is recessed flat to the right on the right side surface from the part opposite to the recess part 11a. It includes a bulged portion 11b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 11b. The outer frame left member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 11a and the bulged portion 11b, and is reduced in weight due to the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a shape that is bilaterally symmetrical to a right outer frame member 21 of a right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 12a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing part 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing part 12a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 12c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 12b on the left side of the upper lateral fixing part 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 has the lower horizontal fixing part 12c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 11c of the left outer frame member 11, and the horizontal fixing part 12a abutting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11. By screwing a screw from the outside of the left side of the outer frame left member 11 into the lower side fixing portion 12c with the rear lower side fixing portion 12c in contact with the right side of the outer frame left member 11. , is attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, the upper left connecting member 12 has the horizontal fixing part 12a abut against the lower surface of the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing part 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 12a and the upper horizontal fixing part 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 13a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal part that extends upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing part 13a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 13a. The fixing part 13b, the flat plate-like lower lateral fixing part 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper lateral fixing part 13b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 13a, and The contact portion 13d is a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d that extends in a short direction. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 13d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, and also brings the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b into contact with the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 13a aligned with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, screws are screwed into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. It is attached to the left frame member 11. In addition, the lower left connecting member 13 allows the horizontal fixing part 13a to come into contact with the upper surface of the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing part 13c into the notch part 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 13a and the lower horizontal fixing part 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 is attached to the lower left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 has a constant cross-sectional shape and extends vertically, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear part of the right side which is divided into three parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a that is recessed flatly to the left on the left side from a part opposite to the recess 21a. It includes a bulged portion 21b that bulges out in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulged portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recessed portion 21a and the bulged portion 21b, and its weight is reduced due to the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V-shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The right outer frame member 21 is formed to have a left-right symmetrical shape with the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 22a extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-lateral fixing part 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing part 22a, and a horizontal fixing part A pair of flat-shaped lower lateral fixing parts 22c extend downward from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing part 22b on the right side of the upper lateral fixing part 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 has a lower horizontal fixing part 22c on the rear side inserted into the hollow part 21c of the outer frame right member 21, a horizontal fixing part 22a in contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and a front side and by screwing a screw from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21 into the lower side fixing portion 22c with the rear lower side fixing portion 22c in contact with the left side of the outer frame right member 21. , is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the upper right connecting member 22 has the horizontal fixing part 22a abut against the lower surface of the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing screws into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing part 22a and the upper horizontal fixing part 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing part 23a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped upper part that extends upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing part 23a and extends backward from the horizontal fixing part 23a. The horizontal fixing part 23b, the flat lower horizontal fixing part 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b on the rear side of the horizontal fixing part 23a, and the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing part 23b. The contact portion 23d has a flat plate shape and extends briefly to the left. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 brings the rear surface of the contact portion 23d into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and also brings the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b into the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing the screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the outer frame right member 21, with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing part 23a aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. In addition, the lower right connecting member 23 has the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut against the upper surface of the right end side of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing screws into the outer frame lower member 41 through the horizontal fixing part 23a and the lower horizontal fixing part 23c.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are hooked to an outer frame hook 653 of a locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 includes a flat mounting part 24a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat mounting part 24a that extends leftward from the front side of the mounting part 24a. It includes a flat plate-shaped hook portion 24b on which the outer frame hook 653 on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hooking member 25 includes a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the mounting portion 25a. There is a flat plate-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion hole that passes through the hooking piece 25b back and forth and allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted therethrough. The opening 25c is provided.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 18. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. The outer frame upper member 30 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of a lower outer frame member 41 of a lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with notches 30a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted and attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b at the left end portion, the upper surface and the front surface of which are recessed relative to the general surface. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, which will be described later, is attached to this mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart laterally, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 than the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a lower outer frame member 41 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and extends left and right. A box-shaped curtain front member 42 is disposed in front of the member 41 and extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain front member 42. There is also a box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that extends left and right and is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the front. A mechanism 44 is provided.

The outer frame lower member 41 has approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, has a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-right direction, and is made of wood. is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with notches 41a that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted and attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right, and extends from a position near the rear of the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end. This recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain interior space 40a formed by the curtain front member 42 and the curtain rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box with a short depth in the front-rear direction relative to its height. The entire rear side is open. By closing the open rear side of the curtain plate front member 42 with the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to form a part of the curtain plate interior that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain front member 42 is provided with an elongated opening 42a on the front surface near the right end, penetrating back and forth and extending left and right.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front curtain member 42 to its front surface, the rear curtain member 43 cooperates with the front curtain member 42 to form a curtain inner space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right, projects upward, and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a, in the left-right center portion of the upper surface. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end thereof is positioned upwardly toward the rear from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting tube portion 43a in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 of the length of the entire rear curtain plate member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire rear curtain plate member 43. It is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, and the speaker unit It is in communication with the internal space of 620a to form an enclosure 624.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B stays between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent them from being pinched.

The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and includes a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later, is exposed, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting section 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward at the right side of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting section 44a, and A standing wall portion 44d extends upward from the rear side and right side of the placing portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion projects forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and slopes so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. A portion 44e is provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a, and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

This ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 is designed to prevent an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from being inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, which will be described later. The vertical wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized tools from entering. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool were to come into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bend upward, it would come into contact with the forwardly protruding upper end protrusion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from occurring through the portion of the lower outer frame hinge member 60.

By the way, when the rear end of the placing part 44a is provided with the standing wall part 44d, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen onto the placing part 44a for some reason may be removed from the standing wall part. 44d prevents the outer frame 2 from moving backward, making it easier for the game balls B to stay on the placing portion 44a. If the game balls B remain on the mounting portion 44a, the game balls B may be caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is removed between the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first one. Through the discharge port 44b or through the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (to the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 includes a pair of guide members 45 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions on the upper surfaces of the front curtain member 42 and the rear curtain member 43, and closes the opening 42a of the front curtain member 42 from the rear side. A port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth is attached to the inside of the curtain front member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a. , and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 come into contact with the lower ends of the door frame 3 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 has a strip-like shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a plurality of blade portions 46b provided at intervals in the vertical direction. The blade portion 46b is provided in an inclined state so that the front end side is higher than the rear end side (see FIG. 47). This grill member 46 allows ventilation between the inside of the curtain front member 42 (curtain interior space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blade portions 46b.

The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders and communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 through the gap between the blade portions 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is formed of two cylinders having a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. As a result, rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds.

The sealing member 48 is compressed by being sandwiched between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This prevents the sound inside the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the plurality of inclined blades 46b transmit the air vibrations emitted from the curtain plate inner space 40a to the outside by the main body frame speaker 622 to the handle cover unit 290 located diagonally above and in front. The handle unit 180 can be directed into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is accommodated through the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295. As a result, when the player inserts his/her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (game ball B driving device), the main body frame By vibrating the speaker 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is opened toward the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 is emitted forward. Therefore, it is not released from the port member 47 to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 or to other players who are roaming around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since the performance sound can be heard, the interest of the players can be attracted by the performance sound, and a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to the players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 with respect to the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the main body frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to output sound with deeper bass, thereby entertaining the players and preventing them from losing interest.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front top, and FIG. 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 21(a) seen from the front bottom. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and an outer frame upper hinge member 51 that is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a lock member 52 and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing part 51a that is horizontally extended, is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing part 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extension part 51b, a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right side of the front extension part 51b toward the left and right center of the front extension part 51b toward the front and passes through it vertically, and an upper fixing part. A flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left side of the front extension part 51a, and a flat horizontal fixing part 51d extends downward from the left edge of the front extension part 51b to the area where the bearing groove 51c opens around the front side. It includes a flat plate-shaped end wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and a rear end extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock body 52a includes a rod-shaped elastic portion 52c that is elastically deformable and extends obliquely to the left front, and an attachment hole 52d that penetrates vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 at a portion on the rear side of the bearing groove 51c using an attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock main body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is at the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. It extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion of the edge wall 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The front end of the locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction to rotate leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the main body frame hinge pin 512 of the main body frame hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. Then, by operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which its front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retreated from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view. can be in a state where it is completely passed through. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 18. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal part 60a that extends horizontally, and a flat plate-shaped raised part 60b that rises upward from a part on the left side of the horizontal part 60a on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. , an outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal part 60a, and a discharge hole 60d penetrating the horizontal part 60a vertically and having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed into a trapezoid with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed into a truncated cone shape with a narrowed upper end above the center in the vertical direction. This outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a left-side position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the upright portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and to extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U-shape. This discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear part of the horizontal part 60a is placed on the mounting part 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and screws (not shown) are installed. It is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43 by. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b with screws (not shown). This outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge port 44b of the ball-biting prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. To be more specific, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that fell between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually becomes narrower, it rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, and it can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is approximately the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. FIG. 22 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The door frame 3 is approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed into a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached so that the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front via the main body frame 4. It is being The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game balls. It is equipped with a handle 195 that is operated by the player to drive the ball B into the gaming area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 includes a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 with a rectangular outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visually closes the gaming area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 , a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 , a pan unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 , and the upper side of the pan unit 200 . a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit; The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and having a door window 101a penetrating back and forth, and a rear side of the door frame base 101. The speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104 installed near the right end in rear view at the lower rear side of door frame base 101, and the back side of door frame main relay board 104. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side in view, the handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in rear view, the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105. A door frame relay board cover 107 that covers a part of the board 105 from the rear side, a handle rear relay board cover 108 that covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 and is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for feeding the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating a handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, the handle unit 180 moves the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher. 540 to play a game by hitting into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame seen from the front, and FIG. 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit seen from the back. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 on the left side in a front view so that the hinge can rotate, and the front side of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 The gaming area 5a is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a flat door frame base 101 with a rectangular shape extending vertically, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. .

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay board 104 installed at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 when viewed from the rear, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower part of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side and covers the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and a cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. We are prepared.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. A lower frame hinge member 125, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101. and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side in rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a, and a door frame left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangular) shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates the door frame base 101 in the front and back, and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the door window 101a, the upper side forming the inner periphery and both left and right sides are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is located above and below the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at about 1/3 of the height in the direction. In this way, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed into a frame shape with the door window 101a penetrating back and forth. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 has a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.) formed at the lower right corner of the front surface in front view and inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward than the right end side, and a handle mounting seat surface 101b (see FIG. 42, etc.). A cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates back and forth between the seat surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b when viewed from the front. It is provided with a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates in the front and back and allows the entrance 141a and the ball exit 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left of the center in the lateral direction and penetrates in the front and back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball for the lower tray faces forward. A passage opening 101f, an upper plate ball passage opening 101g that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and allow the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward, and the door. The window 101a includes a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner periphery of the window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner (below the upper plate ball passage hole 101g) when viewed from the front and that penetrate through the door frame base 101 in the front and back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the plurality of slits 101i are arranged so that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located in the front, and the main body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. A speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j that penetrates from the front to the rear below the door window 101a and above the handle attachment seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the pan unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later, is inserted through the through hole 101j. It is formed to match the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the sound emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker port 211b of the tray unit base 211, it is possible to guide the player to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player).

Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in front view, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so that it extends to the left end.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 32, 33, and the like. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape extending vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and connects the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (Fig. and FIG. 83) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shape in which a rectangle extending left and right is combined on the right side in front view of the upper part of a rectangle extending vertically. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 in rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame left side lower decorative board. 423, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board etc. of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. It is for relaying the connection, and the rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled, the vertically extending parts of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining portion of the door frame sub relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The handle rear relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The handle rear relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 with the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover/handle rear relay board cover/cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 (the part extending vertically in an inverted L shape) are covered. It covers the rear side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with an open front and left side in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 that cover the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and cannot be opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the left side where it is located and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and carries a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the pan unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and has an opening for passing a wiring cable through near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left and right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 includes a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other, and a left and right reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112 that connect the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached to a position above the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at vertically spaced intervals, and the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are engaged. The hook member 116 is provided with a hook member 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. A plurality of insertion holes are formed in the right reinforcing frame 112, which are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-back direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted through these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right with a vertical width that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is cut out in a square shape downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetration part 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that corresponds to the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetration portion 114b is formed at a position that corresponds to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101, respectively.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 includes a pair of rear pieces that are spaced apart from each other laterally and are formed in the shape of a rectangular flat plate that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and each of the pair of rear pieces facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending forward from the sides in a flat plate shape, and a flat front piece connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extension parts. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed into a convex shape that protrudes forward in a plan view. In the cylinder mounting frame 115, the left rear piece is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating back and forth. A door frame hook 652 of a locking unit 650 is hooked to these hook members 116 .

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcing unit 110, are made by punching metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled with rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a left reinforcing frame 111, a right reinforcing frame 112, and an upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left, right, and upper sides of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 using a plurality of screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch part 114a and the penetrating part 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 are aligned with the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a collar attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular in front view, and flat protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. A mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end extends from the upper side. A horizontally extending portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 between the collar member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending lower end portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. By coming into contact with the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protrusion piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

In the door frame hinge assembly 120, when the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 cannot be inserted into or pulled out from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510. can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 when viewed from the front can be hingedly rotated with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. Thereby, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 allow the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge member]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 includes a flat mounting piece 125a that is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is square in front view, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22, etc.) protrudes downward from the lower surface near the front end of the door frame 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and has a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located at a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. installed.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to hinge relative to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. can be supported.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. Figure 34 (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) seen from the back and front, and (c) is a perspective view of a conventional pachinko machine. FIG. 3(d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in FIG. 1 as seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) taken apart and seen from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) from the front, and FIG. 36(b) shows the state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 34(a). It is an explanatory view of a cylinder lock, and (c) is an explanatory view of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening/closing and locking the frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 includes a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a regular key hole 132 provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates when the key is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed into a cylindrical shape (more specifically, a conical tube shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is formed from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. It has a pair of notches. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and when the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, the rotation is transmitted. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 includes a first cam member 134 that is provided on the rear end side of the cylinder body 131 and rotates when a regular key inserted into the keyhole 132 is rotated, and a cylinder mounting frame 115. A second cam member 135 is attached rotatably around an axis in the front-rear direction at a lower part than the cylinder body 131, and the upper end side rotates at a part to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. A first arm 136 in the form of a band plate, whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a portion to the right of the rotation center of the second cam member 135, and whose upper end side is rotatably attached to the right side of the rotation center of the second cam member 135; A second arm 137 in the form of a band plate is rotatably attached at a position below the center and whose lower end side is rotatably attached at a position below the center of rotation of the second cam member 135. ing.

Further, the cylinder lock 130 is mounted on a cylinder mounting frame so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear except for the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133). Rivets rotatably attach the rear cover 138 attached to the rear cover 115 and both upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. 139.

In the first cam member 134, the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the rear side, and the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115 from the rear side, and the rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side of the cylinder attachment frame 115 so as to be rotatable therewith. The second cam member 135 has the lower end side of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end side of the second arm 137 is attached to the front side ahead of the first arm 136.

In each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated by an angle of 90 degrees around the respective rotation axis. are doing. Further, in each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, a portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is provided at a position farther from the center of rotation than a portion to which the second arm 137 is attached. .

The rear cover 138 has a shaft portion 138a protruding outward from the lower ends of the left and right sides in a cylindrical shape and is locked in the L-shaped locking slit 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the upper end side is fitted with a screw (not shown). It is removably attached to the cylinder attachment frame 115.

In this cylinder lock 130, a cylinder mounting frame 115, a cylinder body 131, a rotation transmission member 133, a first cam member 134, a second cam member 135, a first arm 136, and a second arm 137 are formed of metal. .

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, the conventional cylinder lock 130A will be explained. In the conventional cylinder lock 130A, as shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the cylinder body 131 passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear and the rear end is attached to the front piece. There is. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of a cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 34(c) and 34(d), the conventional cylinder lock 130 has a rotation transmitting member 133 on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment As shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b), a rotation transmitting member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in FIG. At the same time, both upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to positions below the respective rotation centers of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated clockwise and counterclockwise at an angle of 90 degrees from a normal state using a regular key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. It happens. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 should be rotated counterclockwise by the first arm 136. On the other hand, since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 is There is almost no force trying to rotate it clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise. direction, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force acting upward due to the counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is applied to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134, and the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member It is proportional to the distance in the left-right direction from the center of rotation of 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from the normal state, the force acting upward on the first arm 136 becomes smaller, whereas the force acting upward on the second arm 137 decreases. The power to do so increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the force acting upward on the second arm 137 will be larger than that on the first arm 136. , the second cam member 135 is rotated counterclockwise mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated counterclockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(b)).

In addition, when the key is used to return to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state to the normal state by rotating the key 90 degrees clockwise, an action opposite to that described above is used. It will work.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 with the key inserted into the keyhole 132 from a normal state, the upper end side is to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134. The first arm 136 attached to the first cam member 134 moves downward, and the second arm 137 whose upper end is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134 moves upward. At this time, since the upper end side of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, the first arm 136 attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, since the upper end side of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, the second cam member 135 can be rotated clockwise from the second arm 137. There is hardly any force trying to rotate it in the direction of .

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates in the clockwise direction from the normal state, force is transmitted mainly through the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction. The second cam member 135 rotates, and the rotation transmission member 133 rotates together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is transmitted to the portion where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134. and the rotation center of the first cam member 134 in the left-right direction. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from the normal state, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 becomes smaller in the first arm 136, whereas In the arm 137, the force that attempts to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, if the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the clockwise direction from the normal state exceeds 45 degrees, the second arm 137 will rotate the second cam member 135 more than the first arm 136. The force increases, and the second cam member 135 rotates in the clockwise direction mainly via the second arm 137. Then, the key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated clockwise up to an angle of 90 degrees from the normal state (see FIG. 36(c)).

In addition, when the key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state and then rotated 90 degrees clockwise to return to the normal state, the key operates in the opposite manner to the above. I will do it.

As described above, according to the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached with the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 in phase with each other at an angle of 90 degrees. Since the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) is connected at any rotational position, at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is connected to transmit the rotation. By transmitting the rotation, the second cam member 135 (rotation transmitting member 133) can be rotated, and the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 can be locked and unlocked effectively.

Moreover, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, by transmitting rotation by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism, the rotation transmission member 133 ( Since the axis of the transmission cylinder 654) of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be provided at different positions, the position of the cylinder main body 131 in the door frame 3 can be set to any desired position without changing the locking unit 650. The cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) can be provided in a part that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3 can be provided.

Further, as described above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the pachinko machine 1 The increase in costs can be suppressed.

By the way, in the conventional cylinder lock 130A, since the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131, a fraudster who is aware of the configuration may insert a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 from the front. By illegally rotating the rotation transmission member 133 using the tool, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 may be opened and a fraudulent act may be carried out. On the other hand, the cylinder lock 130 of the present embodiment has the rotation transmitting member 133 located at a position away from the axis (backward) of the cylinder body 131, so that a tool cannot be inserted into the rear of the cylinder body 131. Even if an attempt is made to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because the rotation transmission member 133 is not present in the relevant part, and the fraudulent act of opening the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. can be prevented from occurring.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 with respect to the first arm 136, which are separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees. The portion of one arm 136 or the second arm 137 that is attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 is a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Even if it is located above, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the parts furthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. It becomes a state of being. Therefore, by having one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 located at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, rotation from the first cam member 134 is transferred to the second cam member 135. Even if the rotation cannot be transmitted, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. The key inserted into the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly without much resistance being applied to the rotation, making it easy to unlock and lock the lock, and without forcing the key inserted into the keyhole to be rotated. This can prevent the key from being damaged, and can prevent the key from being damaged.

In addition, since the two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position, for some reason Therefore, even if one arm is damaged, rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, and a pachinko machine 1 having a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 can be provided.

Moreover, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133 provided at an eccentric position by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 having a smooth rod shape (band plate shape). Therefore, if the rotation is transmitted by a gear, there is a risk that the gear will rotate and the rotation transmission member 133 will be rotated by hooking the tip of the tool on the teeth of the gear. By making the arm 136 and the second arm 137 rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, the tip of the tool can be made difficult to get caught on the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, and the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 can be moved. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated, and it is possible to reliably prevent the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 from being unlocked due to unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650. be able to.

Note that in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. , but is not limited to this, for example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and rack gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using sprockets and chains, a rotation transmission mechanism using pulleys and belts. , etc.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 37(b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the back. FIG. 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front with the ball feeding unit disassembled, and FIG. 38(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and tamper prevention member removed. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, and can also feed the game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball extraction button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an inlet 141a through which the game balls B are fed from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens on the lower side of the inlet 141a. A game ball enters through the entry opening 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover 141 and the box-shaped front cover 141 with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, penetrating in the front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a batted ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover rotatably supported between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A ball extracting member 143 having a partition part 143a that partitions between an entry port 141a and a ball extracting port 141b on the rear side of the ball extracting member 141, and a rear cover 142 for each game ball B on the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143. A ball feeding member 144 rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feed solenoid 145 is provided.

As shown in the figure, in this ball feeding unit 140, when viewed from the front, a ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance port 141a, and a ball extracting member 143 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143 on the left side of the ball extraction port 141b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 143c of a ball extracting member 143, which will be described later, extends forward from 141c. Further, the front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 The ball removal guiding path 241c is formed so as to close a portion opened to the rear on the upstream end side from the rear side.

The ball extraction member 143 has a partition portion 143a which partitions between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b below the entrance port 141a and whose upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144; Around a shaft that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in a dogleg shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the center of the lower side of the ball extraction port 141b, and has a lower end extending in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b located below the operating rod portion 143c. A weight portion 143d protrudes from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 37(a)). The actuating rod 143c is located at the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is moved downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. (upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking part 144a which is fan-shaped in plan view and is centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, facing toward the entry port 141a and the partition part 143a of the ball extracting member 143, and a blocking part 144a that is fan-shaped in plan view. It includes a ball holding part 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod part 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding part 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to be able to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotational axis by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c, which is located eccentrically from the rotational axis, in the left-right direction.

This ball feeding member 144 has a supply position where the blocking part 144a faces the partition part 143a and at the same time the ball holding part 144b faces the direction in which it communicates with the batted ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding part 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the batted ball supply port 142a and enters onto the partition part 143a from the entrance port 141a. The game ball B is stopped from moving toward the ball holding part 144b (hitting ball supply port 142a) by the blocking part 144a, and remains on the partition part 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding part 144b faces the partition part 143a, and the end of the ball holding part 144b on the rod part 144c side closes the batted ball supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition part 143a is held in the ball holding part 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding actuating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (energized), and a tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. The ball feeding crank 147 rotates around an axis extending in the front-back direction by the movement of the ball feeding member 144, and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operating rod 146 includes an iron plate 146a below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feed crank 147 is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. It is being In the ball feeding operation rod 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward (upward) the ball feeding solenoid 145 by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 starts feeding the ball around the right end. The left end near the crank 147 rotates to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, causing the left end near the ball feed crank 147 to move downward, centering on the right end. It rotates and returns to its initial state. As a result, the left end (tip) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, which is close to the ball feeding crank 147, swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 146, and the ball feeding actuating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b that extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. , a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 38(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 operates a ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding actuating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145. It can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. Now, the ball feeding member 144 is in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the shooting solenoid 542 by the firing control section 633b (see FIG. 166) of the dispensing control board 633.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, either by the ball extracting member 143 which is rotatably supported by a shaft, or by the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball extracting button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since its rotation is restricted, in a normal state, the partition part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b, and the ball extraction opening 141b side is separated from the entrance 141a. The game ball B will not enter the ball.

When the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission section 242b, causing the operation transmission section 242b to move downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmitting part 242b, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition part 143a moves from between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b. The partition is removed. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the tray unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

Note that the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, in which the operation transmitting portion 242b that the operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 comes into contact with, is biased upward by a spring, so that the game ball B is not placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the game ball B is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring through the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball extracting member 143, etc. It can prevent it from bouncing back.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 38(b) etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142 when viewed from the rear. A tamper-proofing member 148 is mounted within the mounting recess 142b. The tamper-proofing member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular outer shape extending left and right when viewed from the front, and has an upper piece part 148a and an upper piece part 148a that are vertically separated approximately at the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece part 148b and an inclined part 148c formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip sides (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece part 148a and the lower piece part 148b. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that its right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-evident member 148. Thereby, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The tamper prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the batted ball supply port 142a. Become.

According to this fraud prevention member 148, an illegal game ball B with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball firing device 540 from the upper tray via the ball feeding unit 140, and attached to the illegal game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the attached string to cause an unauthorized game ball B to enter or exit the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the unauthorized game ball B fired (hitted) by the ball launching device 540 is The force causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is inserted. The ball can be cut at the narrowed part of the shape, and it is possible to prevent illegal acts using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1j. Foal cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. FIG. 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit seen from the front, and FIG. 39(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit seen from the back. Further, FIG. 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 but have not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5, and also guides the game balls B (foul balls) that have been fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reached the gaming area 5a of the game board 5. This is for guiding the game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front side of the unit body 151. 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and communicates the lower normal delivery passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 with the upper ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200. Ball passage 150a, and a full ball receiver that opens rearward at the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full ball dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. A port 150b is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the full ball socket 150b when viewed from the front, and although it is fired by the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4, it does not reach the inside of the game area 5a. A foul ball socket 150c that receives the filled game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open toward the front near the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is received in the full ball socket 150b and the foul ball socket 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges the ball forward and communicates with the lower ball supply port 211c of the dish unit 200 is provided.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball socket 150b, the foul ball socket 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible width is provided.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. A full ball socket 150b and a foul ball socket 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by a unit body 151 and a lid member 152.

The foul cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; A full-fill detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the inside of the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and the game balls B are no longer ejected from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower tray 202 side, this foul cover unit 150 remains in the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates in this manner, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the players, game hall attendants, etc. of this fact and urge them to relieve the lower tray 202 from being full.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening/closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4. The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is provided with which the operating protrusion 613a of 613 can contact (see FIG. 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it goes downward. By abutting the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 with this door opening/closing contact part 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit attachment part 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. This glass unit 160 allows the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be visible from the player side (front) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and also allows the player to view the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. This closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumferential shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment part 101h, and a glass frame 161 whose outer periphery is a glass frame that closes the inside of the frame of the glass frame 161. 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. A mounting member 163 is provided.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate form from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can come into contact with the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end and the rear end of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front and back so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped base 163a that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protrusion 163b. The glass unit attachment members 163 are rotatably attached to the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101, respectively.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. At the top, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit attachment member 163 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is located below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the attachment piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding part 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding part 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally released, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body part 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body part 171, which are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. A pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101 are provided.

The main body portion 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when it is attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the main body portion 171 has an upper end formed in a shape along the lower end of the gaming area 5a on the gaming board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, the upper end of the main body part 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so that it does not protrude into the gaming area 5a when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171 . Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed into a shallow box shape opened to the rear by the main body portion 171 and the rear projection piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 171 is formed so as to align with a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 172 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projection piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game ball B passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This does not impede the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is The removed rear projecting piece 172 is now inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47 and the like. FIG. 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame, and FIG. 41(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame. FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. FIG. 46 is a sectional view taken along line E--I in FIG. 41(a). FIG. 47 is a sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. Note that FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3 with the outer frame 2 and main body frame 4 omitted.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and is operated by the player to control the game ball B in the upper tray 201. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, the handle unit 180 will be explained. The handle unit 180 is rotatably attached to a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290, which will be described later. a plurality of handle guides 196 that are attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by a handle cover base 291 that will be described later; and a disc-shaped handle guide 196 that is attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end side of the handle 195. A cover pedestal 183, a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface, and a handle attached to the cover pedestal 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184. A front lens 185 is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 195, a handle 195 attached to the front end, and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and attached to the outer periphery. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. A handle rotation detection sensor 189 is sandwiched between the base 186 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189.

Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 195 so as to return the handle 195 to the initial rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the sensing shaft 189a of the steering wheel rotation detection sensor 189 is connected to the inner base 186 at one end and the transmission gear 188 through the transmission gear 188. An auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction is provided.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a handle touch sensor 192 whose distal end protrudes outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. An operation sensor 194 is provided.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disc-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a recessed part from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. There are three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylinder portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, and the protrusions 291d are inserted into the three grooves 181c, respectively. When the handle base 181 is inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 includes a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of (three in this case) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at intervals in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of spokes. An annular outer ring part 195c connecting the tips of the parts 195b, and two rings extending in an arc shape around the rotating shaft (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub part 195a in the front-rear direction. It includes a slit 195d and a locking projection 195e that projects rearward from a position inside the rotation center of the slit 195d and locks the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer peripheral surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

The three spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 rotate clockwise and around one spoke portion 195b extending horizontally to the left from the central hub portion 195a when the handle 195 is free (not rotated). Two spoke portions 195b extend counterclockwise from positions at angles of 120 degrees. The three spoke portions 195b extend to a length such that a gap into which a player's finger can be inserted is formed between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is provided coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a constant cross-sectional shape with the rounded side of the U-shape facing forward.

This handle 195 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and is partially plated to be electrically continuous from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect a touch on the handle 195 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, even if the outer ring portion 195c is rotated, the game ball B can be hit.

The handle guide 196 includes a U-shaped guide portion 196a that is open toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. There is. In the three handle guides 196, the attachment stays 196b are attached to the rear side of the spoke portions 195b of the handle 195 such that the guide portions 196a are located behind the outer ring portions 195c of the handle 195. The movement of the handle guide 196 in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of a handle cover base 291, which will be described later, into the guide portion 196a.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed into a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and includes three attachment bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three attachment bosses 183a pass through the slits 195d of the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the cover pedestal 183 passes through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 195d, thereby regulating the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, handle 195 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two on the upper left of the outer circumference, two on the upper right of the outer circumference, and two on the lower side of the outer circumference. (See Figure 72). A 24-bit LED driver 184b having a unique address for causing each LED 184a to emit light is mounted on the handle decoration board 184. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls each group with 3 systems, for a total of 15 systems, so that each of the 10 LEDs 184a divided into 5 groups can emit light in full color. That's what I do.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power for driving the LED 184a and the LED driver 184b, and commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. . When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 184b is divided into five groups according to the command. Each group of the 10 LEDs 184a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

In this way, since this handle decoration board 184 has the LED driver 184b, the light emission of the LEDs 184a, which number is greater than the number of electric wires making up the wiring cable to be connected, is controlled individually (in this case, as a group). Since the number of electric wires can be reduced and the configuration related to electric wiring can be simplified.

The front handle lens 185 has a front surface that bulges out roundly forward, and has translucency. The front handle lens 185 is provided with a three-dimensional lens member made of a transparent member. The front handle lens 185 is decorated with light by appropriately lighting the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes depending on the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540, which will be described later, changes in accordance with the internal resistance, and the rotation of the handle 195 changes. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with a force depending on the angle.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When a player touches the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the static electricity acting on the player and prevents the player from touching the handle 195. To detect. When the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the player's contact, the detection by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the solenoid fires with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 195 in some way without touching the handle 195, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from playing a game by rotating the handle 195 in a way different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The single button operation sensor 194 detects a pressing operation of the single button 193 by the player. When the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, the firing control section 633b of the dispensing control board 633 stops driving the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 195, and the single-shot button By releasing the pressing operation of 193, it is possible to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a again with the driving strength before operating the single button 193.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be explained. The handle cover unit 290 covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 on the rear side than the handle 195, and includes a handle cover base 291 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, and the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291. an inner 292 whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; an annular handle cover decorative board 293 provided on the front side of the inner 292 and on which a plurality of LEDs 293a are mounted; It includes an annular board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front, and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and whose rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 includes a cylindrical front cylinder part 291a that extends back and forth with an inner diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the outer circumferential ring part 195c of the handle 195, and a front cylinder part 291a that has an inner diameter that becomes smaller toward the front from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a. a cylindrical rear cylinder part 291c that penetrates the middle wall part 291b and extends back and forth with an inner diameter that allows insertion of the base 181a of the handle base 181; and an inner periphery of the rear cylinder part 291c. The handle base 181 is provided with a plurality of (three in this case) protrusions 291d that protrude inwardly from the handle base 181 and extend back and forth, and are provided at positions corresponding to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Further, the handle cover base 291 has a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion on the rear side of the front end of the outer periphery of the front cylinder portion 291a, and a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion in the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a. A cylindrical outer tube portion 291f that protrudes forward to 291f, a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a, and a guide piece 291g that protrudes outward from the front tube portion 291a in a region between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e. An opening 291h passing through the lower part of the portion 291a is provided.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arcuate shape with an outwardly bulging cross section from the rear end of the front cylinder portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear end of the rear cylinder portion 291c is attached to the handle attachment surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear cylinder portion 291c is formed to have the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted into the rear cylinder portion 291c. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 can be made relatively unrotatable. The outer cylinder portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction so as to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front cylindrical portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer cylindrical portion 291f to a position closer to the front cylindrical portion 291a. The guide pieces 291g extend in the circumferential direction with a length in a range of about 110 degrees, and are provided in three circumferential directions at angular intervals of 10 degrees. By inserting the rear end side of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 rearwardly than the guide piece 291g through between the guide pieces 291g and rotating the handle 195, the U-shaped guide portion By positioning the guide piece 291g within the guide portion 196a, it is possible to restrict movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195) in the front-rear direction.

The opening 291h has a length in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front cylinder part 291a to the vicinity of the flange part 291e, and has a size within an angle range of about 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and passes through the front cylinder part 291a. .

The inner 292 includes an annular base 292a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and a larger outer diameter than the flange part 291e, and extends rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base 292a. It has a leg portion 292b and a plurality of (four in this case) notches 292c which are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to near the base portion 292a and are spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base part 292a from the front, and the base part 292a is located behind the flange part 291e. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape that swells outward, and its rear end is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The cutout portions 292c are provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange part 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for causing each LED 293a to emit light. The 12 LEDs 293a (full color LEDs) are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into 6 groups: 2 on the lower left from the center, 2 on the left, 2 on the upper left, 2 on the upper right, 2 on the right, and 2 on the lower right. (See Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and is designed to control a total of 18 systems, 3 systems for each group, so that each of the 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can emit light in full color. I have to.

Although not shown, the handle cover decorative board 293 includes two power lines (one is a ground line) that supplies power to drive the LED 293a and the LED driver 293b, and commands and signals from the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected: one control signal line for receiving signals such as address, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. There is. When the LED driver 293b of the steering wheel cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, the LED driver 293b divides the LED driver into six groups according to the command. Each set of the 12 LEDs 293a can emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The board cover 294 includes an annular front plate part 294a having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and approximately the same outer diameter as the outer diameter of the base part 292a of the inner 292, and a front plate part 294a. It has a cylindrical side plate part 294b whose outer peripheral edge extends rearward for a short distance. In this board cover 294, a front plate part 294a is located between the flange part 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and a side plate part 294b extends to the base part 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at the front end that has the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and has a spindle (kamakura-shaped or bowl-shaped) shape that expands toward the rear. , etc.), and is provided with a plurality of cutout openings 295b (four in this case) in the circumferential direction, which are cut out from the rear end toward the front. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner 292, and a plurality of cutout openings 295b are formed to match the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). Specifically, the handle cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface. , circular or radial patterns are formed. That is, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). Note that when molding the handle cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in FIG. 46 etc., the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled into the pachinko machine 1, and the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is placed inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291. The handle 195, the front handle lens 185, and the like are positioned in front of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is connected to the handle mounting seat surface of the door frame base 101 while sandwiching the part that closes the rear end of the rear cylinder part 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. 101b.

The handle 195 of the handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Further, in the handle 195, an outer peripheral ring portion 195c on the outside of the central hub portion 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 by a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. This handle guide 196 has a rear end side of the guide part 196a inserted (locked) between the front cylinder part 291a and the outer cylinder part 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange part 291e and the guide piece 291g. ), and is rotatably supported with movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195 and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, board cover 294, and handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 are formed to have translucency, so that the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293 can emit light. In addition to being able to decorate the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 with light emitting light, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylinder portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be decorated with light emitting light.

Since the handle cover unit 290 has a notch opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other in the handle cover 295 and the inner 292, when viewed from the outside, the handle cover base 291 has a cutout opening 295b and a notch 292c that match each other. It can be made to appear as if there is a hole communicating with the inside of the front cylinder portion 291a. This alleviates the mental anxiety of the player who inserts his/her hand (fingers) into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the space between the central hub part 195a and the outer peripheral ring part 195c of the handle 195. Can be done.

Note that the upper notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper notch 292c of the inner 292) is closed by the dish right decorative unit 275 and the door frame right side unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the inside of the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 into which the rear side of the handle unit 180 is inserted passes through the opening 291h, and the lower side of each of the inner 292 and the handle cover 295 is inserted. It communicates with the notch 292c and the notch opening 295b (see FIG. 47). As a result, even if a liquid such as a drink or a game ball B enters into the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the bottom It can be discharged below the handle cover unit 290 through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the notch openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they will pass through the gap between the front cylinder part 291a and the leg part 292b of the inner 292, and It can be discharged downward from the notch opening 295b.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the cutout 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the cutout opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are formed in the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame 2. It is provided on the extension line of the blade part 46b of the grill member 46 in the solid body 40 in the inclination direction. As a result, the wind (wind pressure) released obliquely upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 is passed through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b to the front cylinder. It is possible to enter the portion 291a. Therefore, when the player inserts his or her finger inside the handle cover 295 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (playing device for driving game ball B), the main body frame speaker By vibrating 622 and sending air into the front cylinder part 291a, the player can be surprised and an unprecedented performance can be performed.

Furthermore, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, you can hook your finger on the right side notch opening 295b and pull it. It can be used as a handle when opening.

In addition, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring part 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect the touch of the handle 195, and even if only the outer ring part 195c is touched, the game ball B can be typed.

In addition, since the handle cover 295 has a notch opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily adjusted by gripping the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b by hooking your fingers on the handle cover 295. It can be fixed, and the game ball B can be continuously driven into the game area 5a with a constant force even if the user does not keep twisting his hand. In this way, since the game ball B can be driven in by rotating the handle 195 in various ways, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the player can select a driving operation suitable for the player.

This handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward than the left end side in plan view, and faces outward (opening side). The handle unit 180 attached through the handle unit 180 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, the tip thereof is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and can perform rotational operations without feeling uncomfortable.

As described above, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 of the present embodiment are provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is closed so as to be visible from the front. At the lower right corner of the door frame 3, there is a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b projecting radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer periphery connecting the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A handle 195 having a ring portion 195c is provided, and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c is provided, so that the handle in a conventional pachinko machine is not provided. The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, which have a shape that has never been seen before, can be seen in the area where the player is playing, giving a strong impact to the player and strongly attracting the player's interest. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play at the pachinko machine 1, and to encourage the players who are roaming around the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to play the game. It is possible to make it easier for players to select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the player's finger can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195, the player can When the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 when operating the handle 195 to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, the player's finger is inserted into the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, when operating the handle 195, it is possible to give the player a feeling different from that of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the player can be entertained and amused by the new sensation of operating the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Then, when the player operates the handle 195 and outputs a performance sound from the main body frame speaker 622 provided in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4, the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 causes the speaker to The air inside the enclosure 624 is vibrated by the box 623, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 is caused by sound pressure through the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2 communicating with the enclosure 624 and the port member 47. It is emitted forward as (sound wind). At this time, the plurality of blades 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 transfer the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 to the notch opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the handle cover. It can be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the opening 291h of the base 291, and into the handle cover unit 290 by passing between the central hub part 195a and the outer ring part 195c. Stimulation by sound pressure can be applied to the finger of the player who is operating the handle 195 with the finger inserted. Therefore, depending on the gaming state in the gaming area 5a, the sound pressure from the port member 47 can be supplied to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. , it is possible to surprise the player, foreshadow the arrival of an opportunity, and change the amount of operation of the handle, thereby entertaining the player and making it difficult for the player to get bored. , it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games.

In addition, since the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main body frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h, the handle cover By making the inside of the unit 290 cool and making the environment around the hands and fingers of the player operating the handle 195 comfortable, the stress on the player can be alleviated and a decline in interest in the game can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, as described above, the handle 195 and The sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 in which the handle cover unit 290 is provided, is absorbed by the grill member 46. Since the stimulation is guided by the plurality of blades 46b, various sensors provided on the handle 195 (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.), the bearing mechanism, etc., it is possible to make the handle unit 180 difficult to damage, and the damage to the handle unit 180 can cause injury to the player. It is possible to avoid giving a pleasant feeling, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer circumferential ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to a steering wheel of a car, so it is similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine. Even if the appearance is significantly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible for the player to intuitively recognize that the operation of the handle 195 is the same as that of a conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, even a player who has seen this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without being confused, and this pachinko machine can be used as a pachinko machine that allows players to play without hesitation. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

Furthermore, a cutout opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided at a downwardly facing portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290 into which a player's finger can be inserted between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Because of the provision of the This makes it possible to give a feeling of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, which reduces the player's anxiety about inserting his or her fingers into the handle cover unit 290, and makes the player feel more comfortable. The handle 195 can be operated without hesitation.

In addition, a penetrating notch opening 295b and an opening 291h are provided in a portion facing downward on the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover unit 290, and a port of the outer frame 2 (outer frame lower assembly 40) is provided. Since the member 47 is opened toward the front, even if liquid such as a drink or the game ball B gets into the handle cover unit 290, it can be discharged downward from the lower notch opening 295b and the opening 291h. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for liquid etc. discharged downward from the notch opening 295b and the opening 291h to enter the port member 47.

Further, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 has a plurality of handle cover 295 having the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c. Since the notch opening 295b is provided, the central hub part 195a allows the handle to be grasped and operated with the hand, similar to the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, and the spoke part 195b allows the operation to be performed using only the fingers. The handle cover unit can be operated by using the portion 195c like a steering wheel of a car, by gripping the outer ring portion 195c and the cutout opening 295b by putting your fingers on the outer ring portion 195c, or by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which operations such as pinching the inside and outside of the ball 290 with fingers can be performed, and various driving operations (handle operations) for driving game balls B can be performed. Therefore, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a in a manner that is easy for the player to operate depending on the game state, the player's state, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to It is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Alternatively, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the notch opening 295b may be gripped with fingers, or the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 may be gripped by straddling the outer ring portion 195c. By doing so, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, it is also possible to perform handle operations that cannot be performed with conventional pachinko machines, making it possible to provide players with a wide variety of handle operations. , it is possible to make steering wheel operations more enjoyable and prevent players from getting bored.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. The pachinko machine 1 can have an appearance in which the handle 290 is integrated with the handle 195, and the pachinko machine 1 can have a good appearance and attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary. By suppressing the upward pressure on the gaming area 5a (door window 101a), it is possible to avoid narrowing the gaming area 5a, and it is possible to make the gaming area 5a relatively large. The large gaming area 5a allows the pachinko machine 1 to stand out, making it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately lighting the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylinder part 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 can be decorated with light. Therefore, even when the player operates the handle 195, the light-emitting decoration of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c is not obstructed by the player's hands, making the handle cover 295 and the outer ring part 195c more noticeable. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can strongly attract the interest of players.

Further, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided at a portion of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing the right side. Therefore, the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Therefore, there is no need to provide the door frame 3 with a handle that would make it look bad, and the door frame 3 can have a good look.

Further, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer circumferential ring part 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, and also includes a flange part 291e and a flange part 291e that restricts movement in the front-rear direction. Even if the outer ring part 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g etc. can restrict the forward movement of the outer ring part 195c. 195c and the spoke portions 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c and the central hub portion 195a are not deformed, and the handle 195 can be prevented from being damaged.

In addition, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to drive the game ball B, only the spoke parts 195b and the outer ring part 195c Even if the handle 195 is touched, the game ball B can be driven in, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made capable of a variety of driving operations (handle operations) as described above. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being hit in a state where the handle 195 is not touched, and it is possible to prevent the handle from being operated using a tool, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the dish unit seen from behind. The pan unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front side of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a tray unit 200 that is arranged below the upper tray 201 and stores game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a. A lower tray 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and a plate base unit 210 attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front of the plate base unit 210. and a performance operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper plate body 212 that is attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201, and a plate unit base 212 on the right side of the upper plate body 212. A mounting base (not shown) that is attached to and protrudes forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) that is attached to the right side of the mounting base, and a ball that is attached to the top of the mounting base. A rental operation unit 220, an upper plate ball pre-extraction unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper plate ball extraction pre-unit, It is equipped with

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate main body 251 which is attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and has the lower plate 202, and the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. a plate unit main body 252, a lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251, a plate left decoration unit 270 and A plate right decoration unit 275 is provided.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a contact operation unit 302 that can be touched and operated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 having a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 housed inside the presentation operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250, and an operation section base 315. An annular production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the top surface, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the production operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320, and an operation part attached to the rear side of the operation part base 315. A relay board unit 330 is provided.

Furthermore, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation unit 350 that can protrude upward from the production operation cover unit 310 and is provided with the production operation unit 301, and a production operation unit 350 that is attached to the operation base 315 to operate the production operation. A production operation part lifting mechanism 360 that supports the production operation part unit 350 so as to be able to rise and fall, and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protrusion force of the production operation part unit 350 by the production operation part lifting mechanism 360. There is.

The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the production operation unit 300 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction so that the top surface of the production operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. An upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the production operation unit 300, and a ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged, and a lower plate 202 is arranged on the left side of the production operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212, and is shaped like a container that bulges forward to a greater extent on the left side than in the left and right center when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion that bulges out most forwardly from the left end to the right at about 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most swollen part to the right side in front view, and has a guiding passage section 201a (FIG. 73) whose depth in the front and back direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201, including the guide passage section 201a, is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage section 201a when viewed from the front sinks below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper tray 201 is assembled into the tray unit 200, its bottom surface extends from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port (not shown). On the other hand, it is inclined so as to become lower toward a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B. As a result, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be transferred from the right end side of the guide passage section 201a. The ball can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port.

In addition, the guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with it (rolls on it), the game ball B can remove static electricity.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of a door frame cut horizontally at the lower plate ball supply port, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view showing main parts. The lower tray 202 is disposed below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed into a container shape capable of storing game balls B, and is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows the game balls B to be discharged. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260.

The lower plate 202 has a substantially rectangular shape extending laterally in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that passes through the lower plate 202 vertically and is arranged near the front end near the right end. This lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300 on the left side with respect to the front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c when assembled to the plate unit 200.

The lower tray 202 can store the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c with the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a closed, and can open the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. The game balls B stored in the tray unit 200 can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (for example, to a dollar box). In addition, when the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it is possible to move forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202b of the lower plate 202 is provided at the front of the center axis. The lower plate ball supply port 211j is formed into a cylindrical shape extending straight forward so that the game ball B released forward from the ball discharge port 150d goes straight to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202b. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

By the way, when the lower plate ball supply port 211j is configured to guide the game ball B straight toward the lower plate ball removal hole 202b, if the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower plate ball removal cover 265, the lower plate ball removal hole 202b is closed. Since the ball extraction hole 202b and the ball supply port 211j are provided near the right end of the lower tray 202, there is a risk that the game balls B will be concentrated in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202. There is. Then, when the game balls B concentrated in the right area in the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B from inside the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are transferred to the lower tray 202 side. As a result, the full tank detection sensor 154 may be activated and the lower tray 202 may be determined to be full even though there is still room on the left side of the lower tray 202. There is.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the left side wall of the lower plate ball supply port 211c is inclined so as to extend obliquely to the left front. To be more specific, the distance between the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 at the portion directly behind the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a is such that at least one game ball B can flow therethrough. It is tilted diagonally forward to the left so that the distance is the same.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located to the left of the central axis line (the line shown by the dashed line) of the rear end of the lower plate ball supply port 211c (the ball discharge port 150d). I am moving it to.

As a result, by moving the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower plate 202 (the part of the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) moves to the left, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a moves to the left. With 202a closed, the game balls B can be prevented from being concentrated and stored on the right side of the lower tray 202. In the lower tray 202, even if a plurality of game balls B are stored from the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the lower tray ball supply is stopped. Since the left side wall of the opening 211c extends diagonally and forms a gap between it and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which the game balls B can flow, the foul cover unit 150 (ball discharge port 150d) and the upper tray ball The game ball B released from the post-ejection unit 240 (ball ejection guiding path 241c) to the lower tray ball supply port 211c is guided to the left side in the lower tray 202 along the diagonally extending left side wall and released. This allows the game balls B to be properly stored throughout the lower tray 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full tank detection sensor 154 from operating and notifying that the tank is full even though there is a sufficient area remaining in the lower tray 202 to store the game balls B.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The pan base unit 210 includes a flat plate unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends from side to side, and an upper plate that is attached to the upper front surface of the pan unit base 211 and has an upper plate 201. It includes a main body 212 and a pan unit relay board 214 attached to the rear surface of the pan unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The pan base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, and an upper plate ball operating unit 220 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220. It includes a pre-pulling unit (not shown) and a post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the pre-bulb removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends from side to side over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is shaped like a box.

The plate unit base 211 has an upper plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth near the upper left corner in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a top plate ball supply port 211a penetrating back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b to which a punching metal is attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the left and right center in front view and extending cylindrically rearward, and a lower plate. A notch 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through, and a cutout 211d that is cut out in the upper right side of the lower ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front. An upper plate ball feeding port (not shown) is provided, which extends vertically through the upper plate main body 212 and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

When the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end opens to the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B put out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (payed out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When the lower plate ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202, and its cylindrical rear end opens the lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are transferred to the upper tray ball feeding port, the entrance port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140, the ball extraction port 141b, and the upper tray by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222. After the ball is removed, the ball is discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removing guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port is located in front of the ball socket (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removal unit 240 when assembled to the plate base unit 210, and The game balls B are supplied from the ball socket of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is removed.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with an open upper and rear side. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end that recedes rearward as it goes from the most forwardly bulging part to the right side in front view, and the depth in the front and back direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above near the right end.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray main body 212 is attached so that the upper closed portion near the right end is inserted under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate main body 212 has a production operation unit attachment part 212a formed in the middle part in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of production operation unit 300 is attached to this production operation unit attachment part 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays connections between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. It is for. The pan unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner on the rear surface of the pan unit base 211. When the plate unit relay board 214 is attached to the plate unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the plate unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be explained mainly with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is an enlarged plan view showing the portion of the ball lending operation unit in the dish unit of the door frame. This ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, and pays cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and the remaining amount of cash and prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine can be displayed. This function is used to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the machine after deducting the amount for the loaned game balls B, to adjust the volume, and to adjust the amount of light.

The ball rental operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 211, an upper dish ball extraction button 222 arranged near the left end of the top surface of the base part 221, and a button on the top surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 with translucent properties is placed on the right side of the upper plate ball extraction button 222, and a ball lending button 224 is placed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, The return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending display section 226 located at the lower rear of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base section 221. It includes a volume adjustment button 227 placed in front and a light amount adjustment button 228 placed on the left side of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball rental button 224 is formed in a circular shape, and has the word "ball" written on its top surface. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball rental display section 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be clearly seen from the player side through the transparent ball rental operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222. Further, when the player presses the ball lending button 224 after inserting cash or a prepaid card with a balance into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display section 226 displays the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Furthermore, an error code is displayed on the ball rental display section 226 when the ball rental machine is out of order.

The volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume of sounds for production such as music, voices, sound effects, etc. output from the top center speaker and top side speaker of the door frame 3 and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. It is for adjustment. This volume control button 227 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The volume control button 227 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The area has a pattern that looks like sound is coming from a speaker. The volume control button 227 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. When the volume adjustment button 227 is pressed on the "+" side, the volume increases, and when the "-" side is pressed, the volume decreases.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is for adjusting the light intensity of the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, and the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. This light amount adjustment button 228 is formed in the shape of a bicircular gourd, which looks like a combination of two circles. The light amount adjustment button 228 has a "+" character at the center of one (upper) circle, a "-" character at the center of the other (lower) circle, and a space between the two circles. The part has a light bulb pattern on it. The light amount adjustment button 228 is formed so that the diameter of the circle on the "+" side is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. This light amount adjustment button 228 becomes brighter when the "+" side is pressed, and becomes darker when the "-" side is pressed.

The volume adjustment button 227 and the light amount adjustment button 228 are of different colors (for example, the volume adjustment button 227 is white and the light amount adjustment button 228 is black), so that it is difficult for the player to confuse them.

By the way, when the volume and light intensity are adjusted using the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301, the player participation type production that requires the operation of the production operation section 301 is not executed. At times, by operating the effect operation section 301 as appropriate, a setting menu for adjusting the volume, light intensity, etc. is displayed on the effect display device 1600, an item to be adjusted is selected, and then the contact operation section 302 is operated. This requires changing the volume of the volume, the brightness of the light amount, etc., and it takes time and effort to adjust the volume and light amount. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be directly adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the effort required to adjust the volume and light intensity is It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be simplified and adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit before upper plate ball removal and the unit 240 after upper plate ball removal in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 49. The upper tray ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to remove the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 when the upper tray ball extraction button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed. This is for discharging B to the lower tray 202.

The upper plate ball post-extraction unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port from the rear, and a rear base 241 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A spring (not shown) that urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241 are provided. ing.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is open toward the front, and has a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball socket (not shown) through which the game ball B can pass. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game ball B received in the socket downward and then backward on the rear surface of the rear base 241; It is provided with a ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the game ball B downward from the position and then guides it to the right in rear view.

The ball socket opens forward through the upper plate ball feeding port of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper plate 201 when assembled to the plate base unit 210. formed in position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entry port 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part of the ball feeding guide path 241b when assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game balls B supplied to the upper tray 201 enter the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion of the ball extraction guideway 241c extending left and right protrudes to the right in rear view than the portion to which the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. It has an opening on the right side when viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion extending left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. When the ball extraction guideway 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion that extends vertically below the ball feed guideway 241b is located in front of the ball extraction port 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end in rear view of the portion extending left and right is connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball extraction slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an actuation receiver (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and a rear surface that is the rear side of the actuation receiver. A protruding operation transmission portion 242b is provided. The operation receiver has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b has an upper surface inclined so as to be positioned downward toward the rear, and a lower surface extending horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operating receiving part penetrates the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an upper plate ball extracting member on the upper surface of the operating receiving part. The lower end of the button 222 is in contact with it. Further, when the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b protruding to the rear of the rear base 241, and the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 has an operation transmitting portion 242b projecting to the rear of the rear base 241. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The upper end of the spring is attached to the rear base 241, and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball extracting slider 242, and urges the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball extraction slider 242 is located at the end of upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, and can be moved downward by resisting the biasing force of the spring.

The upper plate ball removal unit 240 positions the upper plate ball removal slider 242 at the upward movement end due to the biasing force of the spring, and removes the upper plate ball via the operation receiving part of the upper plate ball removal slider 242. The eject button 222 is located at the end of the upward movement. Furthermore, since the upper plate ball extractor slider 242 is positioned at the end of its upward movement due to the biasing force of the spring, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. A partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction opening 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball extraction button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 has a partition between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port. The game ball B can be sent to the ball launching device 540 side from the batted ball supply port 142a via the entrance port 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball extracting button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper plate ball extracting slider 242 moves downward and comes into contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting part 242b of the upper plate ball extracting slider 242. The operating rod 143c of the ball extracting member 143 that is in contact with the ball extractor 143 can now move downward, and the ball extractor 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball extractor 143, and the partition portion 143a is connected to the entrance port 141a. It retreats from between the mouth 141b. As a result, the game balls B that have entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball socket and the ball feeding guide path 241b are ejected forward from the ball extraction port 141b that is open below the entry port 141a. The Rukoto. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b passes through the ball outlet guiding path 241c and is guided from the notch 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and then is lowered from the lower tray ball supply port 211c. The game balls B in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the biasing force of the spring, and the upper plate ball removal button 222 rises and comes into contact with the operation transmission part 242b. The ball extraction member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance port 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction member 143 returns to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 feeds the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball firing device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140, or discharges them to the lower tray 202 side. can do.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 48 and the like. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and a production operation unit 300 is attached from the front in the center in the left and right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 includes a lower plate body 251 that is attached to the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202, and a plate unit base that covers the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. A tray unit body 252 attached to the front surface of the tray unit body 211, a lower tray ball extraction unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251, and a tray attached to the upper front surface of the tray unit body 252 spaced apart from each other to the left and right. A left decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275 are provided.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 50, and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate main body 251 extends from side to side and is formed into a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 has a substantially rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left and right direction protrudes more forward than the right side. In the lower plate main body 251, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the right front end when viewed from above. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by a lower plate ball removal cover 265 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

When the lower plate main body 251 is assembled into the plate decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, when the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is located at the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48, 49, and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 has a bulge such that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and a left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Moreover, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed into a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulge portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction at the top and extends downward and is spaced apart from the left and right, and an upper side bulge portion 252a that extends to the left from the center in the left-right direction at the bottom. is provided with a lower front decoration part 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251.

A plate left decoration unit 270 and a plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the front surfaces of the left and right upper side bulges 252a, respectively.

The dish unit main body 252 has a lower dish opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the left upper side bulge 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted therein, and is formed so that it becomes wider at the top and bottom as it goes to the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

Furthermore, although not shown in the drawings, the dish unit main body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a at the center in the left-right direction, and includes a production operation unit attachment part to which the production operation unit 300 is attached. . The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed to have a width that is approximately ⅓ of the width of the dish unit main body 252 in the left and right direction.

The pan unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front surface of the pan base unit 210 when assembled to the pan unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower pan opening 252d. .

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removal unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 27, 50, and the like. The lower tray ball extraction unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray main body 251, and stores game balls B in the lower tray 202 or discharges game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a. It is intended for the purpose of

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 includes a lower plate ball removal button 263 and a lower plate ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263.

When the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower plate ball removal cover is aligned with the lower plate ball removal button 263. 265 closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, and the game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened, and the ball in the lower plate 202 is inserted through the lower plate ball removal hole 202a. The game ball B can be discharged below the tray unit 200.

Note that when the lower plate ball removal cover 265 is moved by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the lower plate ball removal cover 265 remains in the moved state, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a remains open. Thus, the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, backward and then release the pressure. returns to its normal position, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed. Thereby, game balls B can be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate left decoration unit and plate right decoration unit]
The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 48 and the like. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252. The plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 decorate both left and right sides of the production operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The plate left decoration unit 270 includes a plate left decoration body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right and has translucency, and a plate left decoration body that penetrates the plate left decoration body 271 and has translucency. It includes a lens 272 and a plate left decorative board 273 that is provided on the rear side of the plate left decorative lens 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate left decoration body 271 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The plate left decoration body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and the center axis extends obliquely upward and to the left at the left end, and the center axis extends left and right at the right end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate left decoration body 271 is formed in a milky white color.

The plate left decorative lens 272 extends in the longitudinal direction of the plate left decorative body 271 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, its left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 420. Since the plate left decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate left decoration body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate left decoration board 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate left decoration body 271 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The plate right decoration unit 275 includes a plate right decoration body 276 that has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has translucency, and a plate right decoration body 276 that has translucency and passes through the plate right decoration body 276. It includes a lens 277 and a dish right decorative board 278 which is provided on the rear side of the dish right decorative lens 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The plate right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The plate right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, and has a central axis extending diagonally upward to the right at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that it has a twisted semicylindrical shape. It is formed. This plate right decorative body 276 is formed in a milky white color.

The right plate decorative lens 277 extends in the longitudinal direction of the right plate decorative body 276 while being aligned with the front surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate right decorative body 276 can be decorated with light.

When the plate right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, its right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Since the plate right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the plate right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the plate right decorative body 276 is illuminated. It can be decorated with light emitting light almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

When the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 are assembled to the door frame 3, a portion thereof protrudes upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250. , and the upper side bulging portion 252a can form a step in which the plate left decoration unit 270 and the plate right decoration unit 275 sides are higher. As a result, the player can hook his/her finger using the level difference between the plate left decorative unit 270, the plate right decorative unit 275, and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game balls B in the upper plate 201 can be evened out. It can also be used as a finger rest when operating the performance operation section 301, which will be described later. Furthermore, the difference in level between the plate left decorative unit 270 and the plate right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 52 to 56 and the like. 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and FIG. 52(b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of FIG. 52(a) viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front bottom. be. FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating unsprung holding member is at the upwardly moving end position, and FIG. 55(b) is a sectional view of the performance operation unit from the state of (a). It is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the unit has moved to the raised position. FIG. 56 is a sectional view of the performance operation unit in a state where the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is at the downwardly moving end position.

The performance operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the horizontal direction, and decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by a player to participate in the performance when a player participation type performance is performed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance operation unit 300 includes a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation unit 301 is composed of a contact operation unit 302 that can be operated by touching the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing the player. (vibration), and allows the player to participate not only in the driving operation of the game ball B but also in the performance during the game. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 is provided above a pressing operation section 303. In the production operation section 301, a contact operation section 302 and a press operation section 303 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 of the outer diameter of the production operation unit 300.

The presentation operation unit 300 includes a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is provided on the front surface of the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200 and has a spherical outer shape, and a presentation operation section cover unit 310 which is attached to the outside and is provided on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250. An operation unit base 315 to be attached, and a performance operation unit mounted with a plurality of LEDs 320a provided on the upper surface of the operation unit base 315 and used to decorate the upper part of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 (upper unit cover 312) with light. An outer peripheral decorative board 320, an outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operating unit base 315 so as to cover the production operating unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above, and an operating unit relay board unit attached to the rear surface of the operating unit base 315. It is equipped with 330.

In addition, the production operation unit 300 adjusts the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 having the production operation unit 301, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the production operation unit 350, and the production operation unit 350. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to be movable upwardly and backwardly from the top surface of the production operation section cover unit 310 by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Production operation section cover unit]
The performance operation section cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation section cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting section of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the operation section base 315. The production operation section cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the production operation unit 300 (around the production operation section unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upwardly and backwardly, and an annular structure having an insertion hole 312a provided above the unit lower cover 311 and into which the production operation section 301 is inserted. A unit upper cover 312 is provided. The unit lower cover 311 is formed into a hemispherical shape so as to cover the front and lower portions of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the production operation section cover unit 310 has a substantially spherical outer surface. Incidentally, the performance operation section cover unit 310 of this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The production operation section cover unit 310 is mounted in an inclined state so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is the same as that of the door frame. The distance is approximately 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left and right direction.

The production operation section cover unit 310 has at least a unit upper cover 312 having translucency, and can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of a production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320, which will be described later.

When the production operation section cover unit 310 is assembled to the tray unit 200, its front end protrudes more forward than the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202. Further, the effect operation section cover unit 310 is connected such that a plate left decoration body 271 and a plate right decoration body 276 extend outward from both left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration improves the appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment part 212a of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. The operation unit base 315 is covered with a unit lower cover 311 on the front and lower side, and is covered with a unit upper cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301 on the upper side. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operating unit base 315 includes a substantially cubic box-shaped main body 315a that is open at the top, and a flange 315b that extends outward from the upper end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. ing. The main body portion 315a accommodates a performance operation unit 350 therein. In addition, the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 in a production operation section unit 350, which will be described later, are attached to the bottom wall of the main body section 315a. Further, the main body portion 315a rotatably supports the lower end side of the adjustment screw 384 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. Furthermore, a board base 331 of the operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body section 315a.

On the upper surface of the flange portion 315b, a production operation portion outer peripheral decorative board 320 is placed. Further, an annular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange part 315b so as to sandwich the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 therebetween. A unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is located substantially on the same plane as the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation section relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The operation section relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation section base 315. The operation section relay board unit 330 covers a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation section base 315, an operation section relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and the operation section relay board 332 from the rear. A board cover 333 is attached to the board base 331 as shown in FIG.

The operation unit relay board 332 includes a production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), a button outer decorative board 355, a vibration motor 356, a contact detection sensor main body 358, a button inner decorative board 364, and an operation button. It relays connections between the lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the ejection force detection sensor 375, and the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation section unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The production operation section unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the production operation section cover unit 310, and can function as the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303. It is.

The production operation unit 350 includes a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 whose upper end is closed, a disc-shaped contact detection body 352 attached to the upper part of the button body 351, and a button body 352 that is inserted into the button body 351 from below. The inserted cylindrical button sleeve 353, the disc-shaped button base 354 that is attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be able to be raised and lowered by the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, and the button base 354 arranged above the button base 354. It is provided with an annular outer button decoration board 355 on which a plurality of LEDs 355a are mounted.

The production operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 disposed between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection body 352. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is connected to the button sleeve 353 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. The button body 351 includes a disk-shaped upper surface portion 351a that is curved to bulge upward, a cylindrical portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 351a, and a cylindrical portion 351b. It has a locking part 351c projecting downward from the lower end. The upper surface portion 351a is formed in a shape constituting a part of a spherical surface having the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation section cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular decoration having a diameter approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the performance operation section cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portion 351c is locked to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 of this embodiment has a diameter of about 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer periphery, and is formed into a dish shape with an inner side bulging upward by a certain width from the outer periphery. The contact detection body 352 is a portion below the circular decoration on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, and is bulged obliquely upward and has a flat inner side. This makes the contact sensing body 352 look like a part of the decoration of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has a flat plate-like downwardly extending piece 352a extending downwardly from both left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal. The contact detection body 352 has a plurality of holes in the punched metal, so that the capacitance relative to the entire area is suppressed, thereby preventing false detection. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 is made of punched metal, the light from the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 provided below can be transmitted upward, and the center portion of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 can be easily detected. It can be decorated with light emitting light.

The contact detection body 352 is connected to an external electrode terminal of a connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and can detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the top or side surface of the button body 351. Can be done. That is, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can cause the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation section 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a that extends vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b that extends outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The sleeve body 353a has an outer diameter that is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and a length that is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 can transmit the light from the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is in the shape of a disc having approximately the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351, and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end side of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that are symmetrical with respect to the center and that penetrate vertically, a center hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a center hole 354b that projects from the inner surface of the center hole toward the center. A pair of guide pins 354c are provided. The guide shafts 362 of the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a, respectively. The center hole 354b is formed to have an inner diameter large enough to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c are opposed to each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The button base 354 further includes a flat detection piece 354d that extends downward and is detected by a press detection sensor 373 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. In the button base 354, the locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface. The button base 354 is guided so as to be vertically movable by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 354a. Further, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. The button base 354 has a lower surface in contact with the upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of a production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and is urged upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The outer button decoration board 355 has a plurality of LEDs 355a mounted on its upper surface. The plurality of LEDs 355a are arranged on double concentric circumferences. Specifically, the plurality of LEDs 355a are provided at a portion of the button sleeve 353 slightly outside the sleeve body 353a and at a portion near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 355a of the outer button decoration board 355, the area on the upper surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detection body 352 and the side surface (peripheral surface) of the button body 351 can be decorated with light.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is arranged so that its rotation axis extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is arranged so that the rotation axis extends in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the production operation section 301 moves forward and backward. Further, the vibration motor 356 is provided on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation section 301 (performance operation section unit 350) in the vertical direction. Thereby, vibrations from the vibration motor 356 can be transmitted to the production operation section 301 in a good manner. Moreover, the influence of the vibrations caused by the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362) can be reduced.

The contact detection sensor main body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the contact detection sensor main body 358 supplies power to a sensor IC having a surge protection circuit, a transmission circuit, a detection smoothing circuit, a comparison circuit, etc., an output circuit, and the sensor IC and output circuit. It has a constant voltage circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode contained therein. Further, the connector of the contact detection sensor main body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and the external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 allows the contact detection body 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor main body 358 detects capacitance with a sensor electrode, and outputs an ON signal when a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor is exceeded. Note that in this embodiment, an ON signal is output when a predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but a plurality of levels of signals may be output depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

In the production operation unit 350 of this embodiment, a contact detection body 352 is provided on the lower surface of the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351, and the contact detection body 352 is made to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance by a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 can be detected via the contact detection body 352. In addition, since the contact detection body 352 of the production operation unit 350 has a plurality of downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward, the button body It is possible to detect contact or approach of the object to be detected (player's hand) to the side surface of 351. For this reason, the effect operation section unit 350 can cause the button body 351 to function as the touch operation section 302 using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358.

This production operation section unit 350 is supported by a production operation section elevating mechanism 360 so as to be able to rise and fall in the vertical direction. When the production operation section unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the top surface part 351a of the button body 351 is aligned with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310, and the production operation section unit 350 is not operated. The unit 300 is made to look like one sphere. Then, when the production operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the top surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is in a state that protrudes upward from the top surface of the unit upper cover 312. By pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as the pressing operation section 303.

To be more specific, when the production operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), it does not move further downward even if it is pressed, and is in a state where no pressing operation can be performed. . In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the production operation section elevating mechanism 360. Then, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, and becomes a non-detection state. . Then, when the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 detects the press. Detected by sensor 373. Thereby, the pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303) is detected.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 covers the upper part of the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal with the button body 351, when operating the contact operation unit 302, the top surface of the smooth spherical button body 351 is touched. Therefore, the player does not directly touch the surface of the punching metal which has irregularities due to a plurality of holes, and the player can smoothly operate the contact operation section 302. In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is covered by the button body 351, by forming minute irregularities, multiple lines, etc. on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351, an arbitrary tactile sensation can be provided to the touch operation part 302. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the contact operation section 302, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

In addition, although the button body 351 is transparent in the above, it is not limited to this, and may be opaque or semi-transparent so that the lower side is difficult to see through the button body 351. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, so that the appearance of the production operation unit 350 can be improved. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made opaque, it is desirable to have translucency. As a result, the button body 351 can be decorated with light emitting light using the light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 provided below, the LED 364a of the button inner decorative board 364, etc. can be entertained.

[3-5e-5. Production operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation part elevating mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the operation base 315, and is capable of raising and lowering the performance operation unit 350. The production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 is attached to the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the production operation unit 350, and has a substantially circular outer circumference. A pair of cylindrical columns are arranged symmetrically and have lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354. A guide shaft 362, a disc-shaped upper base 363 that connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and whose outer circumference is smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353, and a disc-shaped upper base 363 that is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and emits light upward. It is provided with a button decoration board 364 on which a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of irradiation are mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively inserted and biasing the button base 354 upward, and a center of the elevating mechanism base 361 and the button base 354. The central shaft 366 extends vertically and has a lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and an upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes an operation button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the lower surface of the elevating mechanism base 361 so that the rotating shaft protrudes upward, and an operating button elevating drive motor 367 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the operating button elevating and lowering drive motor 367. A spur gear-shaped elevation drive gear 368 that meshes with the elevation drive gear 368 and is rotatably attached to the upper side of the elevation mechanism base 361. and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably mounted.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 has a lower end connected to an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough and is rotatably attached to the elevating cam that raises and lowers the button base 354 by rotating. member 371, and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the elevating mechanism base 361 so as to cover the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 includes a press detection sensor 373 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the press operation unit 303, and an elevating cam drive gear member 370 that is attached to the elevating mechanism base 361. An elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the (elevation cam member 371), and a holding member under the elevation spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, which is attached to the elevation mechanism base 361. A protrusion force detection sensor 375 that detects the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 by detecting the elevation of the stage 385 is provided.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a base main body 361a formed in a disc shape, a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base main body 361a, and a lifting spring that passes through the base main body 361a together with a pair of guide shafts 362. 365 through a pair of through holes 361c. The base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protrusion force detection sensor 375 are attached to the top surface of the base body 361a. Furthermore, an operation button elevation drive motor 367, an elevation detection sensor 374, and an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the bottom surface of the base body 361a. In the elevating mechanism base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation portion base 315. As a result, a space is formed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, in which the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is arranged. The pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at positions that are half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and rearward, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c provided in the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward. . The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operating unit base 315, and their upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower projection projecting downward. By bringing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 into contact with the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the elevating cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. can.

A plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the upper surface of the button interior decorative board 364 are full-color LEDs. The button interior decoration board 364 can decorate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by causing the plurality of LEDs 364a to emit light as appropriate.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, and a guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The pair of lifting springs 365 have their lower ends in contact with the lifting spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and their upper ends in contact with the button base 354.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the elevating cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with a lift detection piece 370c which protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape and is cut out at two opposing places and is detected by a lift detection sensor 374. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is rotatably attached by having the central shaft 366 inserted through the center thereof. The elevating cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is provided between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced apart from each other by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer circumferential surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. a second cam 371d extending upward from an end parallel to the axis; a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from an end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b; (See Figure 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a rotates counterclockwise in a plan view of the elevating cam member 371. is formed. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 can be guided by the cam portion 371a, and the button base 354 (effect operation unit 350) is biased upward by the elevating spring 365. can be raised and lowered.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Furthermore, the gear cover 372 has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a portion that faces the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. The gear cover 372 forms a space between the upper base 363 and the elevating mechanism base 361 in which the elevating cam member 371 can be accommodated by bringing the upper protrusion into contact with the lower end of the lower protruding portion of the upper base 363. be able to.

The press detection sensor 373 detects a pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the production operation section unit 350. The press detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 when the production operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state). When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from the normal state by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the pressure detection sensor 373 becomes in a non-detection state because the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates. When the top surface of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the production operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower end of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the press detection sensor 373 detects the button base 350. The detection piece 354d can be detected to detect the pressing operation of the production operation section unit 350 (pressing operation section 303).

The elevation detection sensor 374 detects the elevation detection piece 370c of the elevation cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the elevation cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f connected to the coupling portion 370b of the elevation cam drive gear member 370. The rotational position of is detected.

The ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 in the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit 350 in a vertically movable manner via the button base 354 by a pair of guide shafts 362 arranged in front and rear, and also supports the button base 354 by a pair of elevating springs 365. The performance operation section unit 350 can be urged upward through the above. In addition, the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) relative to the production operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the elevation cam member 371 by the operation button elevation drive motor 367. can be done. Furthermore, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can decorate the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on the button interior decoration board 364 as appropriate.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is latched to a locking portion 371c provided on the lower end side of the elevating cam member 371 (FIG. 55(a) ). In this normal state, the production operation unit 350 is located at the end of downward movement via the button base 354, and even if the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the production operation cannot be performed. The lower unit 350 does not move downward. Therefore, in a normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is not detected. In addition, in a normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit top cover 312 of the production operation section cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 of the production operation section unit 350 match, and the production operation section cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form one sphere.

When the elevation drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevation drive motor 367 in the normal state (the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), it engages with the elevation drive gear 368. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view via the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a that is visible from the front in FIG. 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 371c to the left side of the locking portion 371c in the first cam 371b, and the button base 354 moves slightly downward via the guide pin 354c against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

Then, as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side. Since the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the guide pin 354c moves upward along the second cam 371d. At the same time, the button base 354 rises, and the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position. In this state, since the detection piece 354d is separated from the pressure detection sensor 373, the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

Note that the elevating spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, which the lower end of the elevating spring 365 is in contact with, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. can. Since the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the holding member 385 under the lifting spring, the production operation unit 350 is raised with a protruding force corresponding to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. It can be projected into position.

When the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in FIG. It is in contact with the cam 371e. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevation drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation section unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the button base 354 is restricted. In addition, when the production operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire production operation unit 350 (production operation unit 301) is moved upward, and the top surface portion 351a of the button body 351 is lowered from the top surface of the unit upper cover 312. It also protrudes upward.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) of the production operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the elevation spring 365 in this raised position, the production operation unit 350 presses the elevation spring 365. The button base 354 moves downward against the urging force of the button base 354 and comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 is in the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) is also in the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373, and the button body 351 ( A press on the press operation section 303) is detected.

In order to return the production operation section unit 350 (press operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button raising/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the raising/lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view. In (b), the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c), so the third cam 371e moves the guide pin 354c is pressed downward, and the button base 354 moves downward through the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In addition, when returning the production operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the elevating spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward by the ejecting force adjustment drive motor 381 of the ejecting force adjusting mechanism 380 to reduce the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365. state (see FIG. 56). As a result, the biasing force of the lift spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward becomes weaker, so that the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lift cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 also decreases. This makes it possible to reduce the load on the operation button lift drive motor 367 that rotates the lift cam member 371, and to reduce damage (failure) to the operation button lift drive motor 367. Further, as the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used.

Then, when the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the button base 354 stops moving downward, and the guide pin 354c moves toward the first cam 371b. 371b. After that, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking part 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 354c is inserted into the locking part 371c recessed upward by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the elevation cam member 371 by the button elevation drive motor 367, the production operation unit 350 returns to its original lowered position.

In addition, in the above, in the production operation part elevating mechanism 360, by rotating the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved to the first cam 371b ( Although an example has been described in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is moved from the locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d to project from the lowered position to the raised position at once, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is moved from the lifting cam member. In a normal state in which the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is locked by the locking portion 371c of 371 and moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 moves the lifting cam member 371 in a clockwise direction when viewed from above. It may also be rotated in the circumferential direction. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (the performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 in this embodiment is about 40 mm.

When the elevating cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in a normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 354c to the third cam 371e. It will move upward along. Then, when the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is stopped when the guide pin 354c is in the middle position of the third cam 371e, the button body 351 is caused to protrude upward at any position between the lowered position and the raised position. It can be stopped. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button body 351 is pushed to the pressing operation section 303. It can function as

In addition, when the button body 351 is projected upward by the third cam 371e, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. is desirable. Thereby, the load applied to the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) can be reduced, and the feeling of pressing the button body 351 can be made lighter.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, so that the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the gaming state (for example, the first starting port 2002 or By varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004), it is possible to make the player's expectations for the game suggest.

In addition, at least one shallow recessed portion capable of locking the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371. Thereby, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be stably projected to a position with the same amount of projection, and variations in the amount of projection can be prevented. Furthermore, if a recess is provided at least at one location in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c is locked in the recess, thereby causing the operation button elevating drive motor 367 to stop rotating the elevating cam member 371. There is no need to continue, and the load on the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 can be reduced.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 changes the force (of force) for the production operation unit 350 (press operation unit 303) to protrude upward by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 that urges the production operation unit 350 upward. It is possible to change the ejection force (ejection force). The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 includes an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361, and a pinion gear in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. 382, a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and a gear portion 384a. The adjusting screw 384 has a screw portion 384b extending downward in a cylindrical shape and having a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery, and through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported; 384, a pair of guide shafts 362 pass therethrough, and lower ends of a pair of lift springs 365 are in contact with a holding member 385 under the lift spring.

The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a such that a gap is formed between the elevating mechanism base 361 and the lower surface of the base body 361a. The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotating shaft protruding into the gap between the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 has a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the elevating mechanism base 361 in the vertical direction. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed into a cylindrical shape with a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

The elevating unsprung holding member 385 includes a main body 385a that extends back and forth, a threaded hole 385b that vertically passes through the center of the main body 385a and is threadedly engaged with the screw part 384b, and It has a downwardly recessed spring holding recess 385c provided at both ends and capable of accommodating the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body 385a. . In the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385, the guide shaft 362 passes through the center of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and the gear portion 384a when the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382. The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 to rotate the adjustment screw 384, thereby moving the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 in the vertical direction through the threaded hole 385b that engages with the screw portion 384b. be able to.

In the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, when the lower elevating spring holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the elevating spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, and the amount of compression of the elevating spring 365 is increased. Become. On the other hand, when the lower lifting spring holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, and the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes smaller (see FIG. 56). reference). In other words, by moving the lifting unsprung holding member 385 upward, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 to urge the production operation unit 350 upward can be increased, and the lifting unsprung holding member 385 is moved downward. Accordingly, the urging force exerted by the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation section unit 350 upward can be reduced. Thereby, the upward protrusion force of the production operation section unit 350 can be adjusted by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

The detection piece 385d of the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is raised to the highest level. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 is the largest. As a result, when the ejection force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member 385 is being moved upward by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the elevating and lowering unsprung holding member is moved by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381. By stopping the upward movement of the lifting spring 385, further compression of the lifting spring 365 can be prevented, and damage to the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can be prevented.

Further, as described above, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can adjust the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 as appropriate, so when the production operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detection body 352 detects the button body. 351 is detected, and the performance operation unit 350 is projected by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360 and brought into contact with the detected target. At times, the protruding force of the button body 351 may be varied by appropriately selecting the vertical position of the lifting unsprung holding member 385. As a result, when the button body 351 protrudes upward, it is possible to vary the strength applied to the player's fingers, etc., so that when the button body 351 makes strong contact, something good may happen to the player. It is possible to make the player think that this is the case, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game. Therefore, according to the projecting force adjustment mechanism 380, depending on the gaming state (for example, depending on the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004), the button By increasing or decreasing the protruding force of the main body 351, it is possible to make the player's expectations for the game suggest to him/her.

By the way, as a method of changing the biasing force of the spring, it is possible to change the biasing force by adding twist to the spring. However, in order to make the production operation unit 350 protrude, it is necessary to use a compressed spring (compression coil spring), and if the compression coil spring is twisted to change the biasing force, it will be difficult to use it differently from the original use. This causes stress to act on the compression coil spring, leading to early deterioration of the internal structure and risk of damage. On the other hand, in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 of the present embodiment, the protrusion force of the production operation unit 350 ( Since the biasing force) is adjusted, unreasonable stress is not applied to the lifting spring 365, and early deterioration of the lifting spring 365 can be reduced. Stable protrusion can be achieved over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board, the button outside decoration board, and the button inside decoration board in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the press operation section. FIG. 58(a) is a front view of the pan unit shown in a normal state, and FIG. 58(b) is a front view of the pan unit when the production operation unit is in the raised position. The performance operation unit 300 is formed into a spherical shape as a whole, and includes a performance operation section 301 on the top surface that can be operated by the player. The production operation section 301 is composed of a contact operation section 302 that can be operated by touching or approaching the player's hand, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by pressing. The contact operation section 302 is provided above the press operation section 303 (button body 351).

The performance operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 in such a state that the projection direction of the press operation section 303 (the performance operation section unit 350) which can protrude upward is inclined such that the upper side is positioned forward with respect to the vertical direction. ing. That is, the center of the production operation section 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300. Thereby, the production operation section 301 is easily visible to a player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, the press operation section 303 (production operation section unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the production operation section unit 350 is This corresponds to the spherical surface of the operation section cover unit 310. Further, in a normal state, even if the press operation section 303 is pressed downward, the press operation section 303 (performance operation section unit 350) does not move downward. Therefore, under normal conditions, the performance operation unit 300 appears to the player as a mere spherical decoration, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in FIG. 57, the production operation unit 300 includes a production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 disposed below a unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the press operation section 303 (presentation operation section unit 350). An annular outer-button decorative board 355 is arranged inside near the outer edge of the pressing operation part 303, and an inner-button decorative board 364 is arranged further inside thereof. The production operation unit 300 is arranged outward in the order of the button inner decoration board 364, the button outer decoration board 355, and the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Note that the LEDs 355a inside the inner button decorative board 364 and the outer button decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detection body 352, but since the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, the light transmittance is improved. Therefore, the light from them can be transmitted upward (towards the player) in a good manner.

The performance operation unit 300 can decorate the annular unit top cover 312 with light emission using the LED 320a of the performance operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Furthermore, the vicinity of the periphery of the upper surface of the button main body 351 and the outer circumferential surface can be decorated with light by the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355. Furthermore, the center portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 can be decorated with light by the LED 364a of the button interior decoration board 364.

The plurality of LEDs 320a of the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the outer button decorative board 355, and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the inner button decorative board 364 are arranged in rows on the circumference, so that By sequentially emitting light, a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the center of the press operation section 303 can be shown to the player. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, a light emitting effect in which the light spreads from the center of the press operation part 303 to the outside, and a light emission effect in which the light spreads from the outside to the center of the press operation part 303 can be produced. It is possible to show the player a converging light emission effect.

In the normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. It is in a state. In this state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303 is disabled. On the other hand, the touch operation section 302 can enable touch operations depending on the player participation type performance to be performed.

As a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance) in which the press operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) is not protruded, for example, a performance image that prompts the user to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed. It displays on the device 1600 and outputs audio, sound effects, etc. When the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the process moves to the next presentation stage. Note that when a contact is detected, the button body 351 is decorated with light by emitting light from the LED 355a of the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a of the inner button decorative board 364, thereby recognizing that the player has accepted the contact operation. The contact operation unit 302 may be provided with a feeling of operation. At this time, the player's expectations for the game (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game) are determined by the light emitting color, light emitting brightness, light emitting pattern, etc. of the button body 351. It may be suggested.

Alternatively, when the contact detection body 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. Thereby, it is possible to give a feeling of operation to the touch operation section 302, and it is possible to make the player strongly aware that the touch operation has been accepted. Note that at this time, the vibration motor 356 may be used to give strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm to give the player an indication of their expectations for the game. good.

In addition, as a performance in a normal state (player participation type performance), a performance image that prompts the user to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 may be displayed on the performance display device 1600, or audio, sound effects, etc. may be output. After that, when the contact detection body 352 detects the contact of the player (his/her hand or finger) to the top surface of the button body 351, the production operation section elevating mechanism 360 raises and lowers the button body 351 (production operation section unit 350). The biasing force of the spring 365 causes it to protrude upward (pop up). To be more specific, in a normal state, when the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operating button lifting drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 moves toward the cam portion 371a (first cam). 371b), and due to the biasing force of the pair of lift springs 365, the production operation unit 350 (button body 351, press operation unit 303) together with the button base 354 forcefully protrudes upward to reach the raised position (Fig. 55(b)). In this raised position, the top surface of the button body 351 is located higher than the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 protrudes upward. As the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, the finger touching the button body 351 is pushed upward together with the button body 351, which can greatly surprise the player. It can strongly attract interest.

Thereafter, the game moves to an effect in which the button body 351 (press operation section 303) is pressed, and the player is entertained by pressing the button body 351 (press operation section 303). To be more specific, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and pressing the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (the production operation unit 350) is moved. As the button body 351 moves downward, the top surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. As a result, the pressing operation of the button body 351 (pressing operation section 303) is detected, and the performance can be changed using the pressing operation as an opportunity to entertain the player with a player participation type performance.

In addition, during the above performance, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or weakens the protrusion force (force) that causes the button body 351 to protrude, thereby adjusting the player's expectations for the game depending on the strength of the protrusion force. It is also possible to make it suggest. Furthermore, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351.

In a performance that causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude, when the contact detection body 352 detects that the player's finger or the like approaches within the movement range (within the protrusion range) of the button body 351 that projects upward, the button is activated. The main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. As a result, the button body 351 comes into contact with the player's fingers and the like, giving a shock, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, and the strength of the protrusion force may indicate to the player the level of expectation for the game.

In addition, in a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is projected, the contact detection body 352 detects whether the player's finger or the like is outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351 and within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351. The button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when it is detected that the user approaches the user. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 can be applied to the player's fingers and the like, which can surprise the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 increases or decreases the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, thereby indicating to the player his/her expectations for the game based on the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation section unit 350, the button body 351 (the effect operation section unit 350) may be made to protrude upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detection body 352. At this time, if the button body 351 is made to protrude with a strong protrusion force by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 will protrude forcefully and generate a sound (protrusion sound), so the protrusion sound may surprise the player. Can be done. Furthermore, when the button body 351 is made to protrude with a weak protrusion force using the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the button body 351 protrudes quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice that the button body 351 protrudes. , the player can be surprised by the fact that the button body 351 suddenly protrudes.

For the performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, the urging force of the lifting spring 365 is weakened by the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the button body 351 (press operation unit 303) is It may also be possible to perform an effect that causes the user to perform a pressing operation similar to that of a pressing button. Alternatively, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 to perform an effect that causes the player to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Moreover, as a performance after the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is projected, a performance may be performed in which the protruding button body 351 is touched and operated. At this time, since the contact detection body 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a extending downward, the side surface of the button body 351 may be operated by contact. In addition, at this time, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 by the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380. This makes it difficult for the protruding button body 351 to move, and the button body 351 (contact operation 302) can be easily touched.

In addition, as for the effect of protruding the effect operation part unit 350, in the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button base 354 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Although an example has been shown in which the button base 354 (button main body 351) is projected from the lowered position to the raised position at once by moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b (locking part 371c) to the second cam 371d. It is not limited to this.

For example, in a normal state in which the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked with the locking part 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (production operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifts and lowers. By rotating the elevating cam member 371 clockwise in plan view by the drive motor 367, the guide pin 354c is moved from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the elevating cam member 371 is moved in the middle of the third cam 371e. The button body 351 may be stopped from protruding upward at a position between the lowered position and the raised position by stopping the rotation of the button body 351. At this time, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even when the button body 351 is made to protrude partway through the third cam 371e of the elevating cam member 371, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the press operation section 303. Thus, the player can enjoy the player participation type performance. In this case, since the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied depending on the rotational position of the elevating cam member 371, expectations for the game can be suggested according to the amount of protrusion of the button body 351. , can entertain players.

Furthermore, as an effect of pressing the protruding production operation unit 350 (button body 351), after the production operation unit 350 is protruded, the holding member 385 under the lifting spring is moved downward to compress the lifting spring 365. to its minimum state. As a result, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is at its weakest, so the production operation unit 350 can be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation. Can entertain. In addition, as a performance in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the holding member 385 under the vertical movement spring is moved to an appropriate position in the vertical direction according to the special lottery result, and the biasing force of the vertical movement spring 365 is applied. may be made to have any strength from the strongest to the weakest. This allows the player to press the performance operation unit 350 strongly or weakly, so that the player can be entertained by the difference in the operating force of the performance operation unit 350, and a more variety of functions can be played. It is possible to present effects and make it difficult for players to get bored.

In addition, as a performance using the performance operation unit 300, a contact detection body is installed so that the contact of a player's finger or the like to the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stage). It is also possible to provide a plurality of levels of threshold values according to the capacitance of 352, and change the effect according to each level. In other words, focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 increases as the player's finger approaches the button body 351 (contact sensing body 352), a plurality of threshold values are set for the magnitude of the capacitance. By providing a multi-stage detection, it may be used for production. Specifically, for example, the player's fingers or the like are separated from the button body 351 by a predetermined distance or more, the player's fingers or the like are not in contact with the button body 351 within a predetermined distance from the button body 351, or the game By dividing the presentation into stages such as when the player's hand or finger is in contact with the button body 351, etc., and changing the presentation according to each stage, a variety of presentations can be presented to the player even with a single contact detection sensor body 358. This makes it possible to make it difficult for players to get bored and to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as a normal state of the production operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), as shown in FIG. It may also be in a state where it is moved downward. Thereby, since the lift spring 365 is not strongly compressed in a normal state, early deterioration (fatigue) of the lift spring 365 can be suppressed. Moreover, the urging force of the strongly compressed lifting spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the holding member 385 under the lifting spring.

In this way, according to the performance operation unit 300 of this embodiment, it can be used for various patterns of player participation type performances, so it is possible to entertain the players with a variety of performances, and to keep the players from getting bored. By making it difficult to play, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

By the way, in the production operation unit 300, an annular (combined two circular arcs) production operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 is provided on the top of a spherical production operation part cover unit 310, and a production operation part outer periphery decoration board 320 is provided. A contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided in the performance operation unit 350 that moves up and down inside the decorative board 320. Further, inside the button sleeve 353 of the production operation section unit 350, a button decoration board 364 whose position is fixed is provided. This contact detection sensor body 358 is provided with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, so when the production operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrode ) comes close to the production operation part outer peripheral decorative board 320 and button inner decoration board 364, and as the production operation part outer peripheral decoration board 320 and button inner decoration board 364 approach, the capacitance of the sensor electrode changes and the contact detection sensor There is a possibility that the main body 358 may make a false detection.

Therefore, a conductive shield is connected to the ground (GND) between the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. (For example, punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) may be provided. As a result, even if the distance between the contact detection sensor body 358 and the production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 or button inner decoration board 364 changes by moving the production operation section unit 350 up and down, the contact detection sensor main body 358 A shield connected to the ground (GND) whose distance from the contact detection sensor main body 358 does not change between the production operation part outer circumference decorative board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 allows the production operation part outer circumference decoration board 320 and the button inner decoration board 364 to It is possible to reduce the influence of changes in capacitance due to the proximity of the decorative substrate 364 in the button, and it is possible to prevent false detection in the contact detection sensor body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the dish unit]
Next, a dish unit 200 of an embodiment different from the above will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 59 to 61 and the like. FIG. 59 is a plan view of a production operation unit showing an example in which a plurality of contact sensing bodies are provided in the production operation unit of the production operation unit. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor body, and FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a contact detection sensor body and a plurality of contact detection bodies in It is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a switching section is provided between the plate unit and the plate unit, and (c) is an explanatory diagram that allows the plate left decoration unit, plate right decoration unit, production operation unit, etc. of the plate unit to be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, and the production is performed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which contact detection bodies are provided on the front side and the rear side of an operation unit or the like. FIG. 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact sensing body, and FIG. 61(b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the production operation unit. In addition, in FIGS. 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 59, on the lower side of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right parts, a left contact detection body 390L and a right contact detection body 390R. A left contact detection sensor body 391L and a right contact detection sensor body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, when the player moves his or her fingers from the left side to the right side on the top surface of the button body 351, first, when the player's fingers or the like are located on the left side of the button body 351, The capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes sensing, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-sensing. becomes. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the contact detection sensor body Both 391R on the right are detected. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to the original state, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L becomes non-sensing, and the electrostatic capacity of the right contact detection body 390R decreases. The capacitance has changed and the contact detection sensor main body right 391R continues to detect.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. is determined by the combination of detection and non-detection of the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R by the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R, and the patterns of their changes. can be detected. As a result, it is possible to detect contact operations with a wider variety of movements, and it is possible to present to the player a player participatory performance that allows the contact operation section 302 to perform a variety of contact operations. , the player can enjoy the participatory performance by operating the touch operation section 302. Note that by adding more contact detectors, more complex motions can be detected.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 60(a) is an example in which a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at a plurality of different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 detects contact by a human body or the like on any one of the contact detection bodies 393. can do.

For example, by distributing a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 inside (lower side) of the button body 351, even if the player's fingers or the like touch any part of the surface of the button body 351, any one of them will be detected. Contact can be detected by the contact detection body 393, and detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation section 302 can be improved.

In addition, the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are connected to parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch (for example, parts where the player may get injured, parts that may cause trouble to other players). It may be provided in a certain part, a part where there is a risk of fraudulent activity, etc.), and when any contact detection body 393 detects a human body, etc., a caution or a warning may be issued.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 60(b) is a switch between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, in which only one of the contact detection bodies 393 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. This is an example in which a section 394 is provided. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to any one of the plurality of contact detection bodies 352 using the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact of a human body or the like only at a desired part (contact detection body 352). . Note that the switching unit 394 may be ``a device that is switched by a switching circuit such as a relay or a transistor,'' ``a device that is switched by another electronic circuit,'' or ``a movable member (for example, a movable plate left decoration as shown in FIG. 60(c). unit 270, plate right decoration unit 275, and effect operation unit 300), which are switched as the units move.

For example, in the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are arranged in a distributed manner, and a player participation type performance is executed in which the parts detected by each contact detection body 393 are touched in order. Sometimes, the contact detection body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 may be switched in the order in which they are touched by the switching unit 394, and the contact detection body 393 may detect whether or not the player's finger or the like has touched the contact detection body 393. good. Thereby, it is possible to present to the player a highly game-like, player-participatory performance using the plurality of contact sensing bodies 393, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), when the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300 are made to be able to move forward and backward, the first plate is placed on the front side of the production operation unit 300. In addition to providing the contact detection body 393a, a second contact detection body 393b is provided on the rear side of the plate left decoration unit 270, the plate right decoration unit 275, and the production operation unit 300, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are projected forward, The first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, and when the production operation unit 300 etc. are to be retracted, the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor main body 392 are connected by the switching part 394. It may also be possible to switch it so that it does.

As a result, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is projected (moved) forward, the first contact detection body 393a detects the contact or approach of the player, and the forward movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. is stopped. Make it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the performance operation unit 300 and the like from unnecessarily pressuring the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1, and to avoid causing discomfort to the player. be able to.

On the other hand, when the production operation unit 300 etc. is projected forward, a gap may be formed at the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc., and when the player's finger or the like is inserted into the gap, the production operation unit 300 etc. If the operation unit 300 and the like are moved back to the initial position, there is a risk that the player's fingers or the like may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when moving the production operation unit 300 and the like that have been moved forward to the rear, the switching unit 394 switches so that the second contact detection body 393b is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's hand, etc., the movement of the production operation unit 300 etc. to the rear is stopped and the hand, etc. is removed from the rear side of the production operation unit 300 etc. The player is notified of the guidance, and only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detected, the production operation unit 300 and the like are moved backward to return to the initial state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured due to the gap behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and the safety of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(a), the outer shape of the contact detection body 395 that detects the contact of a player's finger or the like is star-shaped, so that it has decorativeness (design). Note that the shape of the decorative contact detection body 395 is not limited to a star shape, but may include a circular shape, a polygonal shape, a geometric pattern shape, a shape imitating a predetermined character, and a shape imitating a predetermined item. It may be a shape, a shape imitating a predetermined logo, a frame-like shape, etc. As a result, since the contact detection body 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), the appearance of the button body 351 and the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the contact detection body 395 itself. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Further, in the above embodiment, the contact detection body 352 is formed of punched metal, but the contact detection body is not limited to this, and the contact detection body can be formed of a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, It may be formed by metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as above can be achieved. It should be noted that it is desirable to provide the contact sensing element on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers and the like do not touch it directly.This can avoid wear of the contact sensing element and also improve the tactile sensation with the surface member. It can be made smooth.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the button decoration board 364 (LED 364a) is provided below the contact sensing body 352, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 61(b), A contact detection body 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decoration body 398 may be provided below the contact detection body 397. As a result, the decorative body 398 can be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397, so that the decorativeness of the production operation unit provided with the surface member 396 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 61(b), the contact sensing body 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and under normal conditions, the decorative body 398 provided below is not visible due to the metallic luster of the contact sensing body 397. , the decoration 398 may be made visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397 by illuminating the decoration 398 with an LED provided below the contact detection body 397 upon detection of contact with the surface member 396, etc. good.

Further, the contact sensing body 352 may be formed so as to be unrecognizable to the player. Here, examples of the unrecognizable contact sensing body include "one formed of a transparent member" and "one formed so as to be visible integrally with the decoration of a surface member such as a button body". As a result, the production operation unit 301 provided with the contact detection body 352 cannot detect the contact detection body 352, and therefore does not detect the contact of a finger or the like with respect to the player or perform a contact operation. For example, when a predetermined player participation performance is executed and a player's finger or the like touches or approaches the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 moves the button body 351 upward. By protruding to the side, the player becomes aware of the existence of the contact detection body 352 (touch operation unit 302) for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest. Can be done.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65 and the like. 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. FIG. FIG. 63 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is a sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame left side base 421. The decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame has a plurality of first LEDs 422a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and the lower part of the front side of the left side base 421 of the door frame. The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are covered with a plurality of first LEDs 423a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front side. a left side upper reflector 424 attached to the door frame left side base 421; a left side lower reflector 425 attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423; A door frame left side decoration body 426 is attached to the door frame left side base 421 so as to cover the front side of the left side upper reflector 424 and the left side lower reflector 425.

Further, the door frame left side unit 420 includes a left side upper light guide member 427 that guides the light from the first LED 422a of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward, and an upper and lower left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side lower decorative board 423. A left side middle light guide member 428 that guides the light forward from the first LED 423a above the center in the direction, and a first LED 423a below the center in the vertical direction in the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. and a lower left side light guide member 429 that guides the light forward.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed into a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame left side base 421 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, like the handle cover 295 described above, and a part of the inner layer 3a is formed on the outer side. A circular or radial pattern is formed by penetrating the layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the left side base 421 of the door frame are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see FIG. 71(a)). ). In addition, when molding the door frame left side base 421, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 422a. An LED 422b is mounted. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 422c having a unique address for causing the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 12 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 422a and 8 second LEDs 422b, are mounted on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 422a, which has second LEDs 422b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between them) of the second LEDs 422b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 422b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

On the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups. Thus, a total of 15 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, there are two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, and LED driver 422c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. When the LED driver 422c of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of The four first LEDs 422a divided into three groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip, and the right side is formed to be uneven. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 423a. An LED 423b is mounted. Further, a 24-bit LED driver 423c having a unique address for causing the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame.

A total of 18 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b, are mounted on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 423a, which has second LEDs 423b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between) of the second LEDs 423b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 423b is a wide-angle, top-view type LED that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and can emit light in full color from six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups. Thus, a total of 21 systems, 3 systems per set, are used for control.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and LED driver 423c. , one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of electric wires is connected. Then, when the LED driver 423c of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of The six first LEDs 423a divided into four groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The left side upper reflector 424 has a through hole 424a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 422a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 424b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 424a comes into contact with the front surface of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 424a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 422b can be widely diffused forward.

The holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 holds the light guide shaft portion 427a straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, which will be described later. It is. This holding tube 424b is provided at the center between the through holes 424a. As a result, at the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the holding tube 424b, the second part of the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 facing from the through hole 424a on both the upper and lower sides thereof. The light from the LED 422b is irradiated onto the light guide shaft 427a from both the upper and lower sides with an equal amount of light, thereby preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. be able to.

Further, in the left side upper reflector 424, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through hole 425a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and also corresponds to the first LED 423a. A cylindrical holding cylinder 425b extending back and forth is formed at the position. The lower left side reflector 425 is formed such that the rear end around the through hole 425a comes into contact with the front surface of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through hole 425a extends toward the front. It is shaped like a dish that spreads out. Thereby, the light from the second LED 423b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 428a of a left side middle light guiding member 428 and a cylindrical light guiding shaft portion 429a of a left side lower light guiding member 429, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding tube 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. This holds the light guiding shaft portion 428a and the light guiding shaft portion 429a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding cylinder 425b is provided at the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, in the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that penetrate the holding cylinder 425b and protrude forward, the through holes 425a on both upper and lower sides thereof are formed. The light from the second LED 423b of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which is facing closer, is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guide shaft portion 428a and the light guide shaft portion 429a from both the upper and lower sides, and the left side of the door frame is illuminated with equal light intensity. It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 428a and 429a from appearing on the back side of the side decoration body 426.

Further, in the lower left side reflector 425, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame left side base 421 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame left side decoration body 426 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame left side decoration body 426 has a plurality of openings 426a that penetrate vertically at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 and the holding cylinder 425b of the left side lower reflector 425. These openings 426a include a light guiding shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guiding member 427, a light guiding shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guiding member 428, a light guiding shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guiding member 429, The tips of each are inserted from the rear. The door frame left side decorative body 426 is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. Further, the door frame left side decoration body 426 further includes a decoration part 426b that has a certain arcuate shape and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 426a. are doing.

The left side upper light guide member 427 has four light guide shaft parts 427a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 427b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 427a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 427a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 424b of the left side upper reflector 424. Further, the light guide shaft portion 427a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 424b. Each light guide shaft portion 427a passes through the holding cylinder 424b of the left side upper reflector 424 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side upper light guide member 427 can guide the light from the first LED 422a of the left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 427a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

The left side middle light guide member 428 has three light guide shaft parts 428a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 428b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 428a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 428a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three upper holding cylinders 425b of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 428a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 428a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the side decoration body 426. This left side middle light guide member 428 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 428a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be illuminated brightly.

The left side lower light guide member 429 has three light guide shaft parts 429a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 429b that connects the lower ends of the three light guide shaft parts 429a. , made of transparent material. The three light guide shaft portions 429a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the three holding cylinders 425b on the lower side of the lower left side reflector 425. Further, the light guide shaft portion 429a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 425b. Each light guide shaft portion 429a passes through the holding cylinder 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear side and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426, so that the tip end surface is on the left side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the side decoration body 426. This lower left side light guide member 429 can guide the light from the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 429a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 can be made to emit bright light.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial pattern portion on the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the color of the circular or radial pattern portion of the handle cover 295. In addition, the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the left side base 421 of the door frame is formed in the same color as the color of the outer part of the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes slightly forward than a lower portion, and the vicinity of the lower end is gently curved to the right. This door frame left side unit 420 has an upper end located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and a lower end below the door window 101a and the pan unit base 210 of the pan base unit 210. The speaker port 211b is located above the speaker port 211b. Moreover, the upper part of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. The door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3, making it appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded therein.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are placed at a position a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. , the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame left side decoration body 426. The left side decorative body 426 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, light is emitted from the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a of the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided at a position spaced backward from the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame. is guided (guided) forward by the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429. (light), the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame can be made to emit light in a point-like manner brighter than other parts.

In addition, the first LED 422a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guiding shaft part 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, and the middle left side light guiding member 428 The light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side lower light guide member 429 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a are irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b on both sides. Even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the left side decorative body 426 from behind, the shadows will be difficult to see, and the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame will not be evenly spaced. It can be decorated with light emitting light on a surface.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decoration body 426 has a decoration part 426b extending along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, and light guide shaft portion 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 due to the light from the second LED 422b and the second LED 423b, Since the decorative part 426b is provided in the area where the shadow is projected, the shadows of the light guide shaft part 427a, the light guide shaft part 428a, and the light guide shaft part 429a can be made difficult to see. The appearance of the light-emitting decoration of the side decoration body 426 can be improved.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70 and the like. Figure 66 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, and (c) is a front view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from behind. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 69 is a sectional view taken along line A--H in FIG. 66(a). FIG. 70 is a sectional view taken along the O--O line in FIG. 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front side of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and to the upper part of the front side of the door frame right side base 431. It is attached to the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front are mounted, and the lower part of the front of the right side base 431 of the door frame. A lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a installed vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, an upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and a lower decorative board 432 on the lower right side of the door frame. The right side reflector 434 is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the decorative board 433, and the right side reflector 434 of the door frame is attached to the right side base 431 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434. A side decoration body 435.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 forward, and a right side upper light guide member 436 that guides the light from the first LED 423a of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and The lower right side light guide member 437 guides the light from one LED 433a forward.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a having a predetermined shape and penetrating left and right. It is provided between the left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the door frame right side base 431, and is configured to close the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. A right-side left lens 439 having translucent properties and a decorative portion 439a to be fitted thereto, and a plurality of right-side left lenses 439 that are attached to cover the right side of the right side base 431 of the door frame and that penetrate left and right in a predetermined shape. A door frame right side right side decoration body 440 having a decorative hole 440a is provided between the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 and the door frame right side base 431. A right-side right lens 441 having a light-transmitting property and having a decorative portion 441a fitted to close a decorative hole 440a of the decorative body 440 is provided.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a substantially constant width from side to side. Further, the rear end side of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically over the entire height, and the front end side extends downward from the upper end almost straight to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and then curves toward the rear side. After extending diagonally backward, it curves vertically near the bottom and extends vertically to the bottom end.

The door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, a decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (a decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439, and a right side right lens). A plurality of reflector parts 431a are provided at the height where the decorative parts 441a) are provided, and are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extend forward to the front end. These reflector parts 431a have a rear end side that is inside the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a that is inclined toward the side surface side, and a bottom surface that is curved.

In addition, the door frame right side base 431 has a decorative hole 438a and a decorative hole 440a provided on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction in the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The reflector part 431a corresponding to (the decorative part 439a of the right side left lens 439 and the decorative part 441a of the right side right lens 441) is , penetrates in the left and right direction (concave from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the right side base 431 of the door frame reflect light emitted backward from a third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and a third LED 433c of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, which will be described later. The light is reflected in the direction to decorate the decorative portion 439a of the right-side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right-side right lens 441 with light (see FIG. 70, etc.).

The upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 432a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. An LED 432b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 432c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 432d having a unique address for causing a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, and a third LED 432c to emit light is mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 16 full-color LEDs, including 4 first LEDs 432a, 8 second LEDs 432b, and 4 third LEDs 432c, are mounted on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b provided on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between them) of the second LEDs 432b. Further, at least the second LED 432b and the third LED 432c are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light in an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three sets: two from above, three from the third to fifth from the top, and three from the sixth to eighth from the top. It is divided. Further, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, so each first LED 432a, second LED 432b, In order to cause each of the third LED 432c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 21 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 432d on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame can control up to 24 systems, in addition to the 21 systems described above, the LED driver 432d on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, which will be described later, The third LED 433c is divided into two groups, and a total of 24 systems, including three systems for one group on the upper side, are controlled.

Although not shown, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 includes a first LED 432a, a second LED 432b, a third LED 432c, two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, and an LED. Two power lines (one is a ground line) for supplying power to drive the driver 432d, one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and an LED. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires and one clock line for synchronizing the driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510 is connected. Then, when the LED driver 432d of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, two sets of 4 first LEDs 432a divided into 3 groups, 8 second LEDs 432b divided into 2 groups, 4 third LEDs 432c divided into 2 groups, and 2 LEDs on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame. The upper two third LEDs 433c of the divided groups can be caused to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. On the front surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of first LEDs 433a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs are arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. An LED 433b is mounted. Further, on the rear surface of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, a plurality of third LEDs 433c are mounted at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 433d having a unique address for causing a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and a third LED 433c to emit light is mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

A total of 22 full-color LEDs, including 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c, are mounted on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Further, the first LED 433a, which is provided with second LEDs 433b on both upper and lower sides, is provided at the center (center between them) of the second LEDs 433b. Furthermore, at least the second LED 433b and the third LED 433c are wide-angle, top-view type LEDs that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees centered on the optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

In the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, as shown in FIG. 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, two each from the top. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are 3 from the 1st to 3rd from the top, 3 from the 4th to 6th from the top, and 7th to 9th from the top. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces, 10th to 12th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the top. Further, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two.

This door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c, so each first LED 433a, second LED 433b, In order to cause each of the third LED 433c to emit light in full color, there are three systems for one set, for a total of 27 systems. On the other hand, since the LED driver 433d of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame can only control up to 24 systems at the maximum, the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame controls the third LED 433c, which is divided into two groups. Of these, three systems for one set on the upper side are controlled by the LED driver 432d on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the front side, and the third LED 433c on the rear side) 2) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has two wires that supply power for driving the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d. power line (one is a ground line), one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one control signal line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. A wiring cable consisting of four electric wires is connected to the main clock wire. When the LED driver 433d of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to the address from the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control board) via the control signal line, three sets of Each group includes six first LEDs 433a divided into four groups, twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of the two groups. Each can be made to emit light in an appropriate color and intensity.

The right side reflector 434 has a through hole 434a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. At the same time, a cylindrical holding cylinder 434b extending back and forth is formed at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through hole 434a comes into contact with the front surfaces of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the rear end around the through hole 434a contacts the front surface of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The sides are shaped like a saucer that widens toward the front. Thereby, the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b can be widely diffused forward.

A cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of a right side upper light guide member 436 and a cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of a right side lower light guide member 437, which will be described later, are inserted into the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. This is to hold the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a straight in the front-rear direction. This holding tube 434b is provided at the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, the second LED 432b of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame facing from the through hole 434a on both upper and lower sides of the light guiding shaft 436a and the light guiding shaft 437a that penetrate the holding cylinder 434b and protrude forward. The light from the second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is irradiated with an equal amount of light to the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a from both the upper and lower sides, so that the right side decorative body of the door frame It is possible to prevent the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a from appearing on the back side of the light guide shaft 435.

Further, in the right side reflector 434, an attachment hole for attachment to the door frame right side base 431 is provided at the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from appearing on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed in the form of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear. This door frame right side decoration body 435 has a plurality of openings 435a that penetrate vertically at regular intervals back and forth along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 435a are provided at positions corresponding to the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right side decoration body 435 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. Furthermore, the door frame right side decoration body 435 further includes a decoration part 435b that has a certain shape recessed in an arc and extends along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to avoid the plurality of openings 435a. are doing.

The right side upper light guide member 436 has four light guide shaft parts 436a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 436b that connects the lower ends of the four light guide shaft parts 436a. , made of transparent material. The four light guide shaft portions 436a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the four holding cylinders 434b from the top of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 436a extends back and forth with a diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 436a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it coincides with the surface of the decorative body 435. This upper right side light guide member 436 can guide the light from the first LED 432a of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 436a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The lower right-side light guide member 437 has six light guide shaft parts 437a that extend back and forth in a cylindrical shape, and a runner part 437b that connects the lower ends of the six light guide shaft parts 437a. , made of transparent material. The six light guide shaft parts 437a are provided vertically at regular intervals so as to correspond to the six holding cylinders 434b from the bottom of the right side reflector 434. Further, the light guide shaft portion 437a extends back and forth with approximately the same diameter as the inner diameter of the holding cylinder 434b. Each light guide shaft portion 437a passes through the holding cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 from the rear side, is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the tip surface is on the right side of the door frame. It will be in a state where it matches the surface of the decorative body 435. This lower right side light guide member 437 can guide the light from the first LED 433a of the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame forward by the light guide shaft part 437a, and can irradiate the light outward from the tip. The opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 can be made to emit bright light.

The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a front end formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decorative body 435. The door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors from two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, similarly to the above-mentioned handle cover 295 and the door frame left side base 421. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thereby forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and protrudes to the left to decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It has a decorative portion 439a that fits into the hole 438a from the inside (right side). When the decorative portion 439a is fitted into the decorative hole 438a, its surface coincides with the outer (left) surface of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 (see FIG. 70). The right side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration on the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for light-emitting decoration.

Further, the right side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a facing from the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. It looks the same as the part, and is difficult to distinguish from the part of the decorative part 439a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

The door frame right side right side decorative body 440 is formed in a plate shape extending vertically, and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape) passing through in the left-right direction. Further, the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion having a keyhole 132 is inserted at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130. This door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is formed to have approximately the same height in the vertical direction as the total height of the door frame 3. Moreover, the front end side of the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 from the upper end to the cylinder insertion port 440b is formed in a shape along the rear end of the door frame right side decoration body 435.

The right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is molded in two colors from synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). To be more specific, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, like the above-mentioned handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, and door frame right side left side decorative body 438, has an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. It is molded in two colors using two types of resin, and a circular or radial pattern is formed by a part of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (Fig. 71(a)). In addition, when molding the door frame right side right side decoration body 440, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right side) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and protrudes to the right to attach to the right side of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 441a that fits into the decorative hole 440a of the side right side decorative body 440 from the inside (left side). When the decorative portion 441a is fitted into the decorative hole 440a, its surface coincides with the outside (right side) surface of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 (see FIG. 70). The right lens 441 on the right side is made of synthetic resin having a higher light transmittance than the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative part 441a of the right lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector part 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and is connected to the third LED 432c of the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decoration of the right side of the door frame. The light emitted from the third LED 433c of the board 433 can be used for light-emitting decoration.

Further, the right side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a facing from the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame has a radial pattern molded in two colors on the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. It looks the same as the part, and it is difficult to distinguish it from the part of the decorative part 441a decorated with light emission by the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the colors of the circular and radial pattern parts on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are different from those on the handle cover 295 and the door frame left side. It is formed in the same color as the circular or radial pattern part on the side base 421, and the outside of the circular or radial pattern on the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440. The color of the portion is the same as the color of the portion outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, a portion above the center in the vertical direction protrudes more forward than a portion at the same height in the door frame left side unit 420 on the opposite side. This door frame right side unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from the upper end to the lower end. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the right outer side of the door frame top unit 450.

The door frame right side unit 430, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 has a cylindrical fluorescent light. Looks like it's embedded.

The door frame right side unit 430 largely protrudes forward from the top to approximately half the height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine installed adjacent to the right side to see the inside of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) in the island equipment of the gaming hall. Therefore, since the door frame right side unit 430 is formed into a screen shape, it can block the line of sight of players located nearby, making it difficult for other players to see the entire gaming area 5a. By making it difficult for other players to feel like they are being watched, it is possible to let other players play games without worrying about it.

According to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a certain distance backward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435. , the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b mounted thereon is sufficiently spread and illuminated on the back side of the door frame right side decoration body 435. The right side decoration body 435 can be uniformly decorated with light.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a of a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 provided at a position spaced backward from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, and a door frame right side lower decorative board. The light from the first LED 433a of 433 is guided (light guided) forward by the light guide shaft part 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft part 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. The part of the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 can be caused to emit light in a dotted manner more brightly than other parts.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 lights up the third LED 432c of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, thereby changing the reflector part of the door frame right side base 431. 431a, the decorative portion 439a of the right side left lens 439 is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, and the decorative portion 439a of the right side right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 441a of the right lens 441 on the right side can be decorated with light emission. Furthermore, since parts of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right side unit 430 (the parts of the decorative part 439a and the decorative part 441a) can be decorated with light, this pachinko machine 1 can be displayed to other players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can stand out and has high appeal to players.

Further, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of the present embodiment, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432, and the second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433. The first LED 433a and the second LED 433b decorate the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front end side with light emission, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 With the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower decorative board 433, the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 on the rear side of the door frame right side decoration body 435 are illuminated and decorated. Because of the presence of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the light from the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b is transmitted to the rear door. The frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 are illuminated to decorate with light, and the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c illuminates the door frame right side decorative body 435 on the front side. It can be used to decorate or prevent luminescence. As a result, the door frame right side decoration body 435, the rear door frame right side left side decoration body 438, and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 can be completely independently illuminated and decorated with light. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of presenting a player with a light-emitting performance with a higher performance effect.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, a first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and a light guiding shaft portion 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436. and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and second LEDs 433b. As a result, the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a are illuminated with an equal amount of light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b on both sides, so that the right side decoration body 435 of the door frame is illuminated with light. Even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a are projected from the rear, the shadows are difficult to see, and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be evenly illuminated in a planar manner.

Further, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a door frame right side decorative body 435 with a decorative portion 435b extending along the center of the width in the left and right direction so as to connect the plurality of openings 435a. . As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right side decoration body 435 due to the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b, the shadows will not be projected. Since the decorative portion 435b is provided in the area where the light guide shaft 435b is located, it is possible to make the shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 436a and the light guiding shaft portion 437a difficult to see, thereby improving the appearance of the light emitting decoration of the door frame right side decorative body 435. be able to.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29, 30, and the like. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430, respectively.

The door frame top unit 450 covers a door frame top base 451 that is attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decoration body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, and the lower end of the door frame top decoration body 453 and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top and bottom plate (not shown) are connected to the bottom end of the door frame.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top center decorative board 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 is attached to the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decoration body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface; A door frame top right decorative board 457 is attached to the right side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 at the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. (See Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) provided on the front surface of the door frame top base 451, and a pair of top speakers provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers. A top lower cover 465 attached to the lower side of the door frame top decoration body 453 so as to cover the front of the side speakers (not shown), the top center speaker and the top side speakers, and the front side of the door frame top base 451. It includes a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451. There is.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right with substantially the same length as the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape when viewed from above, and has an opening 452a that is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decoration body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. The door frame top decoration 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front end of the top cover 452 when viewed from above. Further, the door frame top decoration body 453 has a front surface formed in a semicircular arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. Thereby, the door frame top decoration body 453 is formed into a half-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending from side to side. A plurality of LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top center decorative board 455 can decorate the central portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 455a as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed into a strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top left decorative board 456 can decorate the left portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 456a to emit light.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. This door frame top right decorative board 457 can decorate the right portion of the door frame top decoration body 453 by emitting light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 457a to emit light.

A pair of top center speakers are provided spaced apart from each other on the left and right sides. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency band. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters and output high-frequency sounds such as voices and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate having numerous through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker, a top side speaker, and a door frame sub-board of the door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the relay board 105.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. The door frame top unit 450 is connected such that both left and right ends of the door frame top decoration body 453 are sunk from the front to a portion behind the inside of the upper parts of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. has been done. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side through a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 22 to 28, FIG. 71, and the like. FIG. 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit showing the outer layer of the two-color molding in the door frame in an opaque state, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a right side view of the door frame right side unit shown in a transparent state. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the unit upper cover 312 and button body 351 of the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top decoration body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are semi-tubular. Because of this, the entire circumference of the door window 101a can be seen as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights to the player.

In the door frame 3, a plate left decoration body 271, a plate right decoration body 276, a unit top cover 312, a door frame left side decoration body 426, a door frame right side decoration body 435, and a door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind or below the top decoration body 453, a plate left decorative board 273, a plate right decorative board 278, a production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, a left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame, a lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and a door frame. Since the right side upper decorative board 432, the door frame right side lower decorative board 433, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, these decorative boards By making the LEDs emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, and a light emitting effect can be shown to the player so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical performance operation unit 300 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper tray 201 is attached at the center in the left-right direction. As a result, since the large spherical production operation unit 300 is located in the center of the dish unit 200, the visual impact can be increased. This allows the operation section 303) to stand out.

In addition, in a normal state, the top surface of the button body 351 as the production operation section 301 is continuously aligned with the top surface of the unit top cover 312, forming one sphere, so that the player It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the performance operation unit 300 consisting of a huge sphere makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable. It is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from a pachinko machine, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the players, and it is possible to increase the appeal to the players. Machine 1 can be easily selected.

In addition, in the dish unit 200, since the center (center) of the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300 is located forward of the apex of the spherical production operation unit 300, the production operation section 301 (contact operation section 302 The upper surface of the pressing operation section 303) faces the head (face) of the player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for the player who recognizes that the huge sphere provided in the center of the dish unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entire performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, and the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen. You can make it look bigger. In addition, it is possible to make the player strongly want to operate the giant spherical performance operation section 301, and it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of a player participation type performance in which the player operates the performance operation section 301. In addition, when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can be made to actively operate the performance operation unit 301, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance by operating the performance operation unit 301, thereby making it more interesting. The decrease can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 of this embodiment has a plurality of circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. In FIG. 71, a door frame right side unit 430 is shown as a part of the exterior of the door frame 3 as an example.

To be more specific, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the outer surface of the door frame 3 are made of two different colors and two types of synthetic resins with different translucency (light transmittance). It is formed by molding. The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, with a portion of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b. By appearing on the outer surface, circular or radial patterns are formed.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in FIG. The honeycomb pattern of the layer 3a is visible, and the opaque outer layer 3b is visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior with an emphasized circular or radial pattern.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71(b), when the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern on the inner layer 3a becomes visible through the outer layer 3b, making it relatively circular and transparent. Radial patterns become difficult to see. In other words, the exterior appearance emphasizes the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a.

In addition, in FIG. 71, in the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 which is molded in two colors as a part of the exterior, the decoration part 441a fitted into the decoration hole 440a is part of the right side right lens 441. Since it is a separate member different from the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the main members constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the material used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b (synthetic By appropriately selecting and combining the color, light transmittance, etc. of the resin (resin), it is possible to make the appearance significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when making a minor change, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed without incurring any cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen.

Alternatively, by changing the colors of the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b for each production lot, and shipping pachinko machines 1 from different lots to the same game hall and installing them in the island equipment, it is possible to create a colorful look for players. It is possible to increase the appeal of

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining the right side right lens 441 with the right side decoration body 440 on the right side of the door frame molded in two colors. The frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the right side right lens 441 may be integrally formed.

Further, in the above embodiments, circular or radial patterns are formed, but the invention is not limited to this, and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the handle cover 295 provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the left side of the right side of the door frame Decorative bodies such as the surface decorative body 438 and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot pattern decoration is created by the two-color molding. Since the decorative body is formed into a desired shape, the desired decoration is also applied to the decorative body at the same time. There is no need to apply desired decorations by painting or the like after the formation, and the effort required for decorations can be omitted and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, since the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (external appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. Specifically, when forming a polka-dot decoration by two-color molding, light is transmitted through the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the circle of the polka-dot pattern and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle. If they are formed using the same color with different ratios, the polka dot circles will be difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b are of the same color, resulting in an appearance as if no polka dot decoration has been applied. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a forming the inside of the polka dot circle is white and the outer layer 3b forming the outside of the circle is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b will cause The polka dot circles become clearly visible, giving the appearance of a pink background decorated with white polka dots. In this way, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. Costs can be reduced.

In addition, as mentioned above, when forming a decorative body, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed. When the combination of synthetic resins used for each lot is changed and pachinko machines 1 from different lots are shipped to the same game hall and installed in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment becomes colorful. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can give a strong impact to players who are roaming around the game hall and can attract players.

Furthermore, a handle cover 295 having decorations molded in two colors from a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances is provided on the outside of the door window 101a where the game area 5a faces forward in the door frame 3, and a door frame left side base. 421, the door frame right side left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side right side decorative body 440, etc. are provided, so the outside of the door window 101a is decorated with the decorative bodies to improve the appearance. Can be done.

Furthermore, since the outer layer 3b of the two-color decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, it is difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. As a result, the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) formed by the inner layer 3a can be seen clearly, and the decoration can be clearly seen.

In addition, since the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b is lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. The inner layer 3a is made transparent so that it cannot be seen from the outside, and when the model is changed, a synthetic resin with high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b so that the inner layer 3a can be seen through. This allows the appearance of the decoration of the decorative body to be greatly changed, and the appearance (decoration) can be easily changed without changing the shape of the decorative body.

In addition, as described above, since the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance can make the inner layer 3a difficult to see, it is possible to create a pattern on the surface of the inner layer 3a (such as a pattern by shape, painting, printing, pasting of a sticker, etc.). In the initial model, an opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance was used to prevent the pattern on the inner layer 3a from being seen through the outer layer 3b. By using a synthetic resin, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be seen through, so the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body can be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body. , it is possible to suppress the increase in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, a third LED 432c of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and a lower decorative board on the right side of the door frame are capable of irradiating light inside the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame. 433 third LEDs 433c, and the inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the others, so that the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side right side decoration body When the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the door frame 440 are made to emit light, the inside of the decorations formed on the surfaces of the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 is illuminated. The part of the layer 3a (the polka dot part) can be decorated with bright light, and the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a can be decorated with light to improve the appearance. The light-emitting decorations of the side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be enjoyed, and a decline in player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be decorated with light by the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c that are irradiated to the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. The entire side left side decorative body 438 and the right side right side decorative body 440 of the door frame can be decorated with light emitting light, and the right side left side decorative body 438 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame can be made to look beautiful for games. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can strongly attract the attention of players.

Further, as described above, the decorations of the decorations such as the door frame right side left side decoration body 438 and the door frame right side right side decoration body 440 are two-color molded (multicolor molding) of a plurality of synthetic resins with different light transmittances. (molding), the LEDs (light emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c may emit light depending on the number of layers up to the surface or the light transmittance of the synthetic resin used. The decoration that is visible when the player is not in use can be made different from the decoration that is visible when the LED is emitting light, and by changing the decoration, it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the player. To explain in detail, for example, taking two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the inner layer 3a at a portion covered by the outer layer 3b, the LED will not emit light. In this state, only the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED is directly irradiated to the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a at the part of the inner layer 3a where the hole is formed, so that the inner layer is exposed to the surface of the outer layer 3b. The shape of the hole in the layer 3a becomes visible, and the surface-exposed portion of the inner layer 3a and the hole portion become visible, and a different decoration is visible than when the LED is not emitting light. Alternatively, for example, when the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED emits yellow light, only the portion of the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration is decorated with light. On the other hand, when the LED emits green (or white) light, both the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b on the surface are decorated with light, so depending on the color of the light emitted by the LED, the decoration is decorated with light. It is possible to change the parts that are decorated with light, and the decoration that is decorated with luminescence can be changed. In this way, the decoration of the decoration body can be made different by emitting light from the LED, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be entertained. In addition, by making the LED light up according to the game status, changes in the decoration of the decorations can alert the player to the arrival of a chance or a change in the hitting operation (for example, hitting right). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be made to suggest and can perform a variety of performances.

In addition, since the amount of protrusion in the front and back direction of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 provided on both left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (gaming area 5a) is made different, Since the impression (view) of this pachinko machine 1 can be made different when viewed from the front left and from the front right, the pachinko machine 1 can be played around the game hall where it is installed. Even if a player passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when approaching the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the player's attention to the pachinko machine 1 will be drawn because the player's appearance will be different from the previous time. This makes it possible to create a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract players who are roaming around the game hall to select a pachinko machine 1 to play to the pachinko machine 1. .

[3-10. LED arrangement and system in door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and FIG. 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the effect operation unit of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by rotating the handle 195 by the player. The handle 195 includes a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b from which the central hub portion 195a extends outward, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the spoke portions 195b. It has an appearance similar to an automobile steering wheel.

In the handle 195, the front side of a central hub portion 195a is covered by a front handle lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on the front surface is provided between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. It is provided. Further, a handle cover decorative board 293 having a plurality of LEDs 293a mounted on the front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

There are 10 handle decoration boards 184 in total: one at the center, three at regular intervals circumferentially on the middle circumference, and six at regular intervals circumferentially along the outer circumference. LEDs 184a (full color LEDs) are mounted in a triple concentric circle. These LEDs 184a are one in the center, three in the middle connected by broken lines in FIG. It is divided into 5 groups: 1, 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery, and 2 on the lower side of the outer periphery. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by 15 systems by an LED driver 184b, and each group of LEDs 184a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, twelve LEDs 293a are provided in a row on the handle cover decorative board 293 at intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are connected by broken lines in FIG. 72: two on the lower left from the center, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, and two on the right. It is divided into six groups: the two on the bottom right and the two on the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by 18 systems by an LED driver 293b, and each group of LEDs 293a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this way, since the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect in which the light rotates around the handle 195 or to direct the light toward the center of the handle 195. A light-emitting effect in which light is concentrated or a light-emitting effect in which light spreads toward the outside of the handle 195 can be shown to the player. Further, the outside and inside of the handle cover 295 can be decorated with light by the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration board 293.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a that extends vertically and is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160 at the center when viewed from the front. The door frame 3 includes the plate left decoration body 271 of the plate unit 200, the plate right decoration body 276, the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430. The right side decoration 435 and the door frame top decoration 453 of the door frame top unit 450 surround the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a.

The plate left decoration body 271, the plate right decoration body 276, the door frame left side decoration body 426, the door frame right side decoration body 435, and the door frame top decoration body 453 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed into a semi-tubular shape. Because of this, it is possible to present to the player a decoration that looks like the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in FIG. 72, a plate left decorative board 273 behind the plate left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a plate right decorative board 278 behind the plate right decorative body 276, Door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 behind door frame left side decorative body 426, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right behind door frame right side decorative body 435 A lower side decorative board 433, a door frame top central decorative board 455 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a door frame top left decorative board 456, and a door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided facing forward.

To be more specific, the plate left decorative board 273 includes four LEDs 273a mounted on the front side in a row in the left-right direction, and an LED driver for causing the LEDs 273a and the LED 273a of the plate right decorative board 278, which will be described later, to emit light. (not shown). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 273a are controlled by six systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 273a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The plate right decorative board 278 includes four LEDs 278a mounted on the front side in a line in the left-right direction. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. These two groups of LEDs 278a are controlled in six systems by the LED drivers on the plate left decorative board 273, and each group of LEDs 278a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, four first LEDs 422a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. It includes eight second LEDs 422b and an LED driver 422c for causing a total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b to emit light. The first LED 422a and the second LED 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 422b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems. The LED 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, six first LEDs 423a are mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two each are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. It includes 12 second LEDs 423b and an LED driver 423c for causing a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light. The first LED 423a and the second LED 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 423b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by the dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems. The LED 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, there are four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a. Eight second LEDs 432b are mounted, and four third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. Further, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame causes a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame to emit light. The LED driver 432d is provided. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the eight second LEDs 432b are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72, the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to It is divided into three groups: the first three pieces, and the first three pieces. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. A first LED 432a divided into two sets, a second LED 432b divided into three sets, a third LED 432c divided into two sets, and a third LED divided into two sets on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. The upper set of third LEDs 433c among the LEDs 433c is controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, and third LED 433c of each set are controlled by an appropriate color. It can emit light in full color.

On the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, there are six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two on the front side arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a. Twelve second LEDs 433b are mounted, four third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, a first LED 433a, a second LED 433b, and two third LEDs 433c on the lower side. and an LED driver 433d for causing the light to emit light. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets, each consisting of two LEDs from the top, as connected by two-dot chain lines in FIG. In addition, the 12 second LEDs 433b are three from the first to third from the top and three from the fourth to the sixth from the top, as connected by a dashed line in FIG. It is divided into four groups: 3 pieces from the 7th to 9th pieces from the top, and 3 pieces from the 10th to 12th pieces from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c on the rear side are divided into two groups, the upper two and the remaining two, as connected by broken lines in FIG. What are the six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower one of the two groups? , 24 systems are controlled by LED drivers 433d, and each set of first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c can emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the door frame right side upper decoration provided on the right side of the door window 101a. The substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame are formed in an asymmetrical shape with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the border. Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, have different shapes in the front-rear direction. .

Note that the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame are The numbers of one LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, second LED 423b and first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, second LED 433b are the same, and the arrangement and system (one point in FIG. Systems connected by chain lines and two-dot chain lines) are arranged symmetrically. Thereby, it is possible to easily create data of an LED lighting pattern for performing a light emission effect.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 has six LEDs 455a mounted on the front side at intervals in the left-right direction, and the LED 455a, the LED 456a of the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457. and an LED driver (not shown) for causing the light to emit light. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by nine systems of LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is provided with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 456a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 456a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is equipped with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front side with openings in the left-right direction. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two groups, two on the left and two on the right, as connected by broken lines in FIG. The four LEDs 457a divided into two groups are controlled in six systems by the LED driver of the door frame top central decorative board 455, and each group of LEDs 457a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, The light from the first LED 433a of the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is transmitted through the light guiding shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, and the lower left side guiding member. The opening of the left side decoration body 426 of the door frame is formed by the light guide shaft portion 429a of the light member 429, the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436, and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437. 426a and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and is irradiated outward (forward). As a result, players can see a light-emitting effect that emits bright light in the form of dots on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The light-emitting effect that flashes brightly in spots can make players ``awk''.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a of the plate left decorative board 273 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the LED 278a of the plate right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the lower left side of the door frame Second LED 423b of the decorative board 423, second LED 432b of the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, second LED 433b of the lower decorative board 433 of the right side of the door frame, LED 455a of the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, top left decorative board of the door frame By making the LED 456a of 456 and the LED 457a of the door frame top right decorative board 457 emit light as appropriate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light, or the light can be produced so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a. can be shown to the player.

In other words, in the door frame 3, a light emitting effect is performed in which spot light is emitted on the front of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 using the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in FIG. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface light emission) using the LED system connected by the dashed line in FIG. 72. Can be done.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is transferred to the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft portion 429a. The shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a guide the light to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decoration 435, and from there forward. Therefore, compared to the general surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, the openings 426a and 435a can be spot-emitted with high brightness and brightness. . At this time, since the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 are arranged outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the opening 426a of the door frame left side decoration 426 Even if the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 is illuminated as a spot with high brightness, the glare will not make it difficult to see inside the gaming area 5a facing from the door window 101a, and the game can be played through the door window 101a. The game balls B, performance images, decorations, etc. in the area 5a can be visually recognized in good condition.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the left side decoration body 426 of the door frame and the right side decoration body 435 are made to protrude forward from the door window 101a (game area 5a), and emit spot light with high brightness. The opening 426a and the opening 435a are connected to the front ends of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 that project forward. Since the light from the spot emission is provided on the vertical line), the light from the spot emission is not irradiated to the rear side (toward the door window 101a side). Therefore, the spot light emitted from the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, and The inside of the gaming area 5a is not difficult to see, and other players can be drawn to the pachinko machine 1 by emitting spot light with high brightness.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, parts that emit spot light are provided on the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which protrude forward and outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot light emitting portion is located at approximately the same position as the vicinity of the outer circumference of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot light emitting part is located outside of the player, so the player will not block the spot light. As a result, when spot light is emitted from the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, the high-intensity spot light is visible even to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to appeal to other players about the existence of this pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of players. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing and can attract players who are playing around the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, on both sides of the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for causing spot light emission on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) belong to the same system. As a result, both sides of the light guide pins (light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a) that guide the light of the spot LED are sandwiched. Since the LEDs for the two surfaces are illuminated in the same manner, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same timing, and the LEDs on the left side of the door frame 426 and the right side decoration 435 of the door frame are illuminated with the same amount of light. The shadow of the optical pin can be made even more difficult to see.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the contact operation section 302 in the production operation section 301 of the production operation unit 300, and has an annular shape with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on the top surface. A production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is provided. This production operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 includes two LED drivers for causing 31 LEDs 320a to emit light. The performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 is divided into two parts: a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen LEDs 320a out of 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decoration board 321 of the production operation section outer periphery decoration board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321, 6 LEDs 320a are provided at intervals on a circumference close to the inner periphery, and 3 are provided at intervals on a circumference between the inner periphery and the outer periphery. The remaining nine are provided at intervals on the circumference near the outer periphery.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decoration board 322 of the production operation section outer peripheral decoration board 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322, four LEDs are provided on the circumference close to the inner circumference, two at intervals near both ends of the arc, and three are provided at intervals between the inner and outer circumferences. They are provided at intervals on the circumference, and the remaining six are provided at intervals of three on the circumference near the outer circumference near both ends of the arc.

The 18 LEDs 320a of the front decorative board 321 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. 73, 6 LEDs on the inner circumference, 3 sets of 2 LEDs each in the circumferential direction, and 3 LEDs on the middle circumference. They are divided into 9 groups in total: 3 groups with 1 piece each, and 3 groups with 3 pieces each in the circumferential direction of the 9 pieces on the outer circumference. Furthermore, the 18 LEDs 320a of the rear decorative board 322 are connected by dashed lines in FIG. The 3 pieces are divided into 3 groups of 1 piece each, and the 9 pieces on the outer circumference are divided into 2 groups of 3 pieces near each end, for a total of 7 groups. That is, in the production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by 48 systems by two LED drivers, and each group of LEDs 320a can emit light in full color as appropriate.

According to this production operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, by appropriately emitting light from 31 LEDs 320a of 48 systems, a light emission production in which the light rotates in the production operation section 301 or a light emission in which light is concentrated in the center can be produced. It is possible to show the player a performance and a light emission performance in which light spreads outward.

Further, according to the door frame 3, the game area 5a extends vertically along the outside of the door window 101a facing the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front and back direction is different from each other on the outside of the left and right sides of the door window 101a. A door frame left side decoration body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decoration body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided, and the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body are provided. 435, a left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and a second LED 422b are mounted, and a lower left side decoration on the door frame on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted. A board 423, a door frame right side upper decorative board 432 on which a plurality of first LEDs 432a and a second LED 432b are mounted, and a door frame right side lower decorative board 433 on which a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b are mounted. is provided, and guides the light from the first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a to the vicinity of the front of the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435 and forwards it. The light guide shaft portion 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427 to be irradiated, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and the right side upper light guide member. Since the light guide shaft portion 436a of 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 are provided, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 423 on the right side of the door frame are provided. By causing the second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b of the upper decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame to emit light, the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame are illuminated. Light emitting decoration (surface luminescence) can be performed in a planar manner, and the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. When the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a are made to emit light, the light irradiated forward is transmitted to the columnar light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, and the light guide shaft. After being guided to the vicinity of the front surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 by the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a, the light is emitted forward from their front ends (front end faces), and the light is emitted forward from the front ends (front end surfaces) of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. Corresponding to the tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a in the frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. It is possible to decorate the area with dots of light (spot light emission).

Therefore, the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the first LED 423a of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame. By appropriately emitting light from the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b, the door frame left side decorative body provided outside the gaming area 5a (door window 101a) 426 and the whole of the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with light emitting light in a planar manner, or a part of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with light emission in dots. Since the entire side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 can be decorated with luminescence in a planar manner, and a part can be decorated with luminescence in a dotted manner, a variety of luminescence effects can be shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and also to keep the player entertained, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

At this time, a system in which the plurality of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b of the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame are separated, and the system on the right side of the door frame. The systems in which the plurality of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b of the upper side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are separated are made bilaterally symmetrical with respect to each other. Since the plurality of first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a and the plurality of second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are in different systems from each other, the left side of the door frame Lighting pattern of the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the decoration body 426 side and the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b on the door frame right side decoration body 435 side When creating the data, for example, the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side may be used as the data for the door frame right side decoration 435 side, or the data for the door frame left side decoration 426 side and the door frame side may be used. Since it is possible to create data with the same flow as that on the right side decorative body 435 side, the effort required to create lighting pattern data can be reduced (with the same creation time) ) It becomes easier to construct data for more complex lighting patterns, and it is possible to show players a variety of lighting effects using lighting patterns. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can exhibit a sufficient lighting effect for the light emitting effects in the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 on both the right and left sides of the door frame 101a.

Furthermore, since the two second LEDs 422b, 2nd LED 423b, 2nd LED 432b, and 2nd LED 433b provided with the 1st LED 422a, 1st LED 423a, 1st LED 432a, and 1st LED 433a in between are of the same system. , first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, light guide shaft 437a). Since the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b provided in the LEDs 422b, 423b, and 433b are always lit at the same time, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, By irradiating light from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a, the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide shaft part 427a and the light guide by the light from the respective second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are irradiated with light from both sides of the light guide shaft part 436a and the light guide shaft part 437a. The shadows of the optical axis portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a become thin so as to be canceled out, and are projected onto the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. The shadows of the light guiding shaft portion 427a, light guiding shaft portion 428a, light guiding shaft portion 429a, light guiding shaft portion 436a, and light guiding shaft portion 437a can be made difficult to see. The right side decorative body 435 can be evenly decorated with light in a planar manner.

In addition, the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, which are illuminated and decorated in a planar manner by the second LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b, are Parts corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shaft portion 427a, the light guide shaft portion 428a, the light guide shaft portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a are decorated with dots of light by the first LED 432a and the first LED 433a. This allows players to see a light-emitting effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines, such as emitting light in a planar manner and partially emitting dot-like light. It is possible to strongly attract the attention of players through light-emitting effects, etc., and the light-emitting effects that emit sparkling spots in the form of dots, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, can make players ``ah-ha''. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower right side of the door frame on the other side (right side). Since the decorative board 433 is shaped asymmetrically with respect to each other, at first glance it appears that the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame. Since the lower side decorative board 433 can be distinguished, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame are assembled in the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to avoid incorrectly attaching the lower right side decorative board 433, improve assembly workability, and suppress increase in cost.

[3-11. Decorative board identification]
Next, identification of various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail using the door frame 3 as an example, mainly with reference to FIG. 74 and the like. FIG. 74 is a rear view showing each decorative board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the plate left decorative board 273, the plate right decorative board 278, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the right decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, which are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, are shown. The upper side decorative board 432, the lower door frame right side decorative board 433, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used as a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, and non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. that are attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. That's what I do. As a result, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board is reflected to the front side, making it possible to decorate the front decorations etc. with brighter light. This makes the decorative board less noticeable.

Note that the white decorative board may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since the pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, different identification parts 7 are provided on the rear surface of each decorative board so that each decorative board can be easily identified (see FIG. 74). ). The identification section 7 includes a character identification section 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabets, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b using different colors (indicated by different shades of shading in FIG. 74). It has .

To be more specific, as the character identification part 7a, the plate left decorative board 273 has the characters "lower left", the plate right decorative board 278 has the characters "lower right", and the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 has the characters "upper left". The lower left decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame has the characters "lower left", the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "upper right", and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame has the characters "lower right". The text is "upper middle" on the door frame top center decorative board 455, "top left" on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and "top right" on the door frame top right decorative board 457. , respectively.

Further, the color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board, and is provided over substantially the front surface of the rear surface. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the color identification part 7b is applied not to the entire rear surface but only partially so as not to interfere with soldering of LEDs etc. mounted on the decorative board. .

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), pasting a sticker, applying paint, or the like.

In addition, in the above description, the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 was explained as an example, but the various decorative boards provided in the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc. Identification parts 7 such as character identification part 7a and color identification part 7b may also be provided on the decorative board.

Further, in the above embodiment, the identification section 7 includes both the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b, but the invention is not limited to this, and only the character identification section 7a may be used. However, only the color identification section 7b may be provided.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the identification section 7 (the character identification section 7a and the color identification section 7b) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED is mounted, it is easy to use a decorative board with a similar shape. This makes it possible to prevent the wrong decorative substrate from being assembled during assembly work, and to improve the workability of assembly.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the front side of the decorative board can be made as white as possible, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative board can be It is possible to reflect the light to the front side on the front side of the decorative board, so that the decorations in front can be decorated with brighter light, and the decorative board can be made less noticeable from the front (from the player's side), improving the appearance. You can make it better.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification part 7b serving as the identification part 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, a desired (desired color) can be determined just by looking at a part of the decorative board. ) can recognize whether it is a decorative board or not. Therefore, even if multiple types of decorative boards overlap during assembly, as long as a part of the decorative board is visible, the desired decorative board can be easily found, reducing the time and effort required for assembly. can be simplified.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification portion 7b has a different color for each decorative board, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, the same color If there is a decorative board provided with the identification part 7b, it can be easily recognized that the same decorative board is prepared in duplicate. Alternatively, if there are not enough colors in the color identification section 7b of the prepared decorative board, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a decorative board that has not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards necessary for assembling the pachinko machine 1, you can easily recognize whether you have prepared extra decorative boards or not enough decorative boards. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prepare the necessary number of decorative boards, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed smoothly, the time required for assembly can be shortened, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1, since the character identification part 7a as the identification part 7 for distinguishing from other boards is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, the operator can read the characters in the character identification part 7a. By doing so, it is possible to easily know which part the decorative substrate belongs to, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear surfaces of each decorative board are white, and the identification part 7 is provided on the rear surface, so that the decorations provided in front of the decorative board have high transparency. Also, the decorative board can be made less noticeable from the front (player side), and the appearance of the decorative body can be improved, and the white front surface of the decorative board can reflect the light from the LED forward. This makes it possible to decorate the decorative body with brighter light, and to entertain the players with the highly effective light-emitting performance, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the functional parts such as the LED driver are provided on the rear surface of the decorative board so that the functional parts are not visible from the front (player side). It is possible to avoid the appearance from becoming unsightly due to visibility, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the decoration (gaming machine). In addition, since the functional parts are hidden from view by providing them on the back of the decorative board, there is no need to color the functional parts white (or yellow) to make them inconspicuous, and the functional parts can be used as they are. Therefore, it is possible to omit the trouble of coloring the functional parts and to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Effects of door frame]
According to this embodiment, with respect to the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at mutually different positions in the pachinko machine 1, the contact detection body 393 provided at a desired part where it is desired to detect approach or contact of a player By switching by the switching unit 394 so that the contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, when a player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at a desired part, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes. Therefore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect changes in capacitance, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player to a desired part. In response to detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392, predetermined control can be executed by control means such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section 1511, and the effect display control section 1512. On the other hand, when the contact detection body 393 of the desired part and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected by the switching part 394, the contact detection body 393 provided in other parts and the contact detection sensor body 392 are connected. will be disconnected, so even if the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 provided at the other part changes due to the player approaching or touching the other part, the contact sensing body 393 will be disconnected. Since the connection is disconnected by the switching unit 394, changes in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 are not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact sensing body 393 at the desired location is reliably detected. can be used to prevent false positive detections.

In this way, from among the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions, the contact detection body 393 to be connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 is appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394. It becomes possible to detect capacitance with one contact detection sensor main body 392 for a plurality of contact detection bodies 393, and the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. In the control means, the number of channels required to detect the approach or contact of a player can be reduced, and the number of channels that can be used for performance can be relatively increased. Therefore, it becomes possible to control more performance means (for example, movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means, and the increase in the number of performance means allows players to enjoy a more diverse range of performances. In addition to making it difficult for the players to get bored, it is possible to fully entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the contact detection bodies 393 are provided at a plurality of parts of the pachinko machine 1 that the player does not want to touch, and the contact detection bodies 393 are set to the desired parts by the switching unit 394 depending on the game state. The contact detection sensor main body 392 is connected to detect the approach or contact of a player to a desired part, and control the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control section 1511, effect display control section 1512, etc. Since it is possible to ignore a predetermined caution or alarm by means of this method, it is possible to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1 with one contact detection sensor body 392, and to relatively reduce the number of channels that can be used for production. The number can be increased, and the same effects as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the capacitance of a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 is detected by one contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are provided separately. Therefore, the sensor body containing electronic components such as sensor ICs and output circuits can be installed in areas that are difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players. can be increased.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor main body 392 has connection terminals for electrically connecting the plurality of contact detection bodies 393 in advance, the wiring from the contact detection bodies 393 can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. The capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 by simply connecting it to the connection terminal of the pachinko machine 1. An increase in the cost of the machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, the contact detection sensor body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and by simply connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor body 392, the contact detection sensor body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected to each other. This reduces the number of parts compared to the case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member. This reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and also eliminates the need to design the layout of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection body 393, and the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor body. 392 can be arranged more freely, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be easily realized.

Further, a switching unit 394 is provided to switch the contact sensing body 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the switching unit 394 can select the contact sensing body 393 to be detected. When a player participatory performance is executed in which a plurality of distributed contact sensing bodies 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detection sensor body 392 at the timing when the player touches them in order. By switching the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detectors 393, it is possible to detect whether or not the player has touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order. This can be realized by the contact detection sensor main body 392, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the production operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350 that can be pressed by the player. Then, the player comes close to the contact detection body 352 made of a metal plate with the player side covered by the button body 351, and the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be detected. It is possible to detect the player's approach or contact with 351 (performance operation unit 350).

In this way, when the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected using the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the outside button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the production operation unit elevating and lowering. Since a predetermined effect is output to the player side through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351 by the effect means such as the mechanism 360, the button interior decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, the player is entertained by the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing the game. At this time, when a player approaches or touches the production operation unit 350, a predetermined production is output, so the production operation unit 350 is activated as a non-contact operation unit or It can function as a touch operation section. Since the performance operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed and operated by the player when it is protruded, the performance operation unit 350 can perform non-contact operation, contact operation, and press operation. Since it is possible to perform a variety of performance operations such as operation, it is possible to easily embody a pachinko machine 1 that has a different appearance from conventional pachinko machines with operation buttons that can only be operated by pressing, and it is possible to make it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that has an appearance different from that of conventional pachinko machines that have operation buttons that can only be operated by pressing. By differentiating the pachinko machine from other machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player according to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358, and the capacitance is determined by the contact detection body 352 (button body 351). Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the capacitance and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and output a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to the time of contact in multiple stages, a performance corresponding to each stage can be output. By doing so, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

In addition, since the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided apart from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor body 358 that detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 is provided separately from the contact detection body 352. The sensor main body 358 can be provided in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for players to see, so that the appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved and its appeal to players can be increased.

In addition, as mentioned above, the operation unit can perform a variety of performance operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and press operation, so it is possible to perform player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations. By doing so, it is possible to entertain players with a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for players to get bored, and also allowing players to enjoy player participation-type performances, which reduces the player's interest in playing games. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358 is made of punched metal made of a metal plate in which a plurality of holes are formed, the plurality of holes prevent the player from touching the button body 351. The capacitance of the contact detection body 352 in the state of approaching or not in contact can be reduced, and the occurrence of false detection by the contact detection sensor body 358 can be avoided. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, arrangement, etc. of a plurality of holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact sensing body 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance. It is possible to widen the range in which the approach or contact of the player to the main body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is detected. As a result, the contact detection body 352 can be enlarged to widen the detection range, so as in the above embodiment, the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that can be pressed by the player is enlarged and , when the contact detection body 352 is made to have the same size as the upper surface part 351a of the button body 351, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) by executing a player participation type performance. When requested, since the contact detection body 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350. The movement distance is shortened, the performance operation unit 350 can be operated quickly, it is difficult to miss the operation timing in a player participation type performance, and the player can be reliably participated in the player participation type performance. This performance can entertain the players and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punching metal, a button as a presentation means provided on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side can be inserted through the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. The light emitting effect from the LED 364a of the medium decorative board 364 can be outputted to the player side, and the player can surely enjoy the light emitting effect, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) that can be operated by pressing is provided with a contact detection body 352, the contact detection body is made of punched metal, which is a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity. 352, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced, and even if the production operation unit 350 (button body 351) is strongly pressed or hit when the player performs a pressing operation, the production operation unit 350 can be reinforced. 350 can be made less likely to be deformed or damaged. Therefore, since the production operation unit 350 can be made difficult to be damaged by the contact detection body 352, the player can press the production operation unit 350 without any hesitation, and can operate the production operation unit 350. To make a player participatory performance more enjoyable and to suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the thickness of the contact sensing body 352 can be made thinner than when the contact sensing body 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space for providing the contact detection body 352, and it is possible to make it easy to provide the contact detection body 352, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased, making it more appealing to players. The pachinko machine 1 can be designed easily.

In addition, since the contact sensing body 352 is made of punched metal, the plate thickness is constant compared to expanded metal, so the contact sensing body 352 can be easily processed into a desired three-dimensional shape by press working. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be easily shaped into an optimal shape for detecting the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

In addition, in the performance operation unit 350, since the player side of the contact detection body 352 is covered with the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by the button body 351 is It is possible to prevent the player from directly touching the button body 351, and it is possible to avoid causing discomfort due to the player touching the contact detection body 352 in which a plurality of holes are formed. In a player participatory performance using the player as an operation part, the button body 351 can be operated without discomfort, and the performance can be enjoyed and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the player side of the contact sensing body 352 made of punching metal is covered with the button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink adheres to the plurality of holes formed in the contact sensing body 352. Therefore, the effort required for cleaning can be reduced, and the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced as the pachinko machine 1 is easy to clean.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact sensing body 352 from the player side. A predetermined performance can be output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351, and the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350). Then, a predetermined effect is output through the plurality of holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit 350, and the effect can be It is possible to reliably enjoy the performance outputted through (via) the operation unit 350 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, the effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, and the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are placed on the opposite side of the contact detection body 352 from the player side. Since it is arranged so that the production means is covered by the contact detection body 352, the contact detection body 352 (production operation section unit 350) and the production means can be compactly integrated, so that the above-mentioned To provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by making it easy to install a performance operation unit 350, a performance means, etc., which have the above-mentioned effects, in a desired part of the pachinko machine 1. It can be made easier.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) that is provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, the performance is activated. Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the operation unit 350 changes, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 to prevent the player from approaching the production operation unit 350. Or contact can be detected. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350, the production operation unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Therefore, if the production operation unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with the production operation unit 350, it will come into contact with (collide with) the player, and the player will be in contact with the production operation unit 350. When the performance operation section unit 350 protrudes, it is possible to present to the player a performance using physical force such as pushing the player. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players with performances that have not been found in conventional pachinko machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the attention of the players to the performance operation unit 350. The protrusion of the performance operation section unit 350 can be surely noticed.

When projecting the production operation unit 350, if the holding member 385 under the elevating spring of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved toward the upper end of the elevating spring 365 (upward), the elevating spring 365 is strongly compressed. When the lifting spring 365 is moved away from the upper end side (downward), the compression of the lifting spring 365 becomes weaker and the urging force can be increased, and the lifting spring 365 is By moving the holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the production operation section unit 350 by the lifting spring 365 can be changed. In this way, since the performance operation unit 350 can be projected with various protruding forces, it is possible to increase the variation of performances based on physical force, making it difficult for players to get bored, and making it possible to control the performance operation. It is possible to enjoy the effect caused by the protrusion of the unit 350, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the protruding force of the production operation unit 350 is changed depending on the gaming state, when the player approaches or contacts the production operation unit 350 with his or her fingers, a strong force is applied to the production operation unit 350. When the 350 comes into contact with the player, a strong impact is given to the player, making him think that something good will happen (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage). It is possible to increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 is configured as a press operation unit 303 that can be operated by pressing, when a player participation type production is executed, the player can press the production operation unit 350 to play the game. The player can participate in the participatory performance, and can enjoy pressing operations on the performance operation section unit 350, thereby suppressing loss of interest.

In addition, since the production operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing, it is possible for players who place their hands or fingers on the production operation unit 350 (the top surface of the button body 351) to be able to perform the press operation at any time. When a player participatory performance in which the performance operation unit 350 is pressed is executed, the performance operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the performance operation unit elevating mechanism 360. Even without providing guidance on the start of execution of the performance, it is possible to quickly make the player aware of the start of execution of the performance with player participation, and increase the desire to press the performance operation unit 350 to start the performance with player participation. You can enjoy it even more.

Furthermore, since the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, compared to the case where the production operation unit 350 is made to protrude using a drive motor. Therefore, the performance operation unit 350 can be easily and forcefully protruded, and the above-described effects can be more easily achieved.

Further, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358, approach or contact of the player to the production operation unit 350 is detected. Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the production operation unit 350 and the player, it is possible to provide a plurality of capacitance thresholds and cause the production operation unit 350 to protrude with a different protrusion force for each threshold. becomes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 to the time of contact in multiple stages. By making the game stand out with a projecting force, it is possible to present a more diverse range of performances to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, by causing the pan unit 200 of the door frame 3 to pop up when a player participation type performance is executed, the player can enter the performance operation unit 350 that is provided so that the player can advance and retreat. When approaches or contacts, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 that the player touches in the performance operation section unit 350 changes. On the other hand, since the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is provided apart from the contact detection body 352 in the performance operation unit 350, detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, it is possible to detect contact due to the approach or contact of the player. Since it is possible to detect changes in the capacitance of the detection body 352, it is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player with the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 is activated by the capacitance. Players can be detected. Then, by detection of the contact detection sensor body 358 or movement (pressure) of the production operation unit 350 by the player, the production operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the outer button decoration board 355, the production operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decoration board A predetermined effect is executed by effect means such as 364, the projection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. In other words, when the player advances or retreats the performance operation unit 350 or approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is executed, so that the player can be entertained by the performance. It is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest in playing games.

At this time, when the player approaches or touches the performance operation section unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation section unit 350 (button body 351) is connected to the performance operation section (non-contact operation section, contact operation section). You can make it work like this. On the other hand, when the player advances or retreats (presses) the performance operation unit 350, the performance is executed, so the performance operation unit 350 can function like a performance operation unit (press operation unit). For this reason, it is possible for the player to perform a variety of performance operations, so by executing a player participation type performance that allows the player to perform performance operations, it is possible to enjoy a variety of performance operations. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the players to get bored, and it is also possible to make the players enjoy the player participation type performance, and it is possible to prevent the players from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the player is detected by the capacitance of a contact detection body 352 provided near the part of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface part 351a). Since the capacitance of the contact sensing body 352 differs depending on the distance between the contact sensing body 352 (button body 351) and the player, a plurality of capacitance thresholds for executing a predetermined performance are provided, and each It becomes possible to perform different effects for each threshold value. Therefore, since it is possible to detect the time (distance) from the approach of the player's hand or finger to the production operation unit 350 in multiple stages, the production can be presented according to each stage. Therefore, it is possible to present a wider variety of performances to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Further, since a predetermined performance is executed by the player's detection by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the performance operation (non-contact operation, It is possible to give a sense of operation to the touch operation (contact operation), and it is possible to make the performance operation more enjoyable for the player.

Furthermore, it includes a performance operation unit 350 that the player can move forward and backward (press), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358 that can detect the approach or contact of the player to the performance operation unit 350. Therefore, in a player participation type performance, the player is required to perform an operation (press operation) to advance or retreat the performance operation unit 350, or an operation to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 with a finger or the like (non-contact operation, contact operation). ), etc., to increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type performance by making it possible to increase the player's desire to participate in the player participation type performance, and to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type performance. Can be done. When a player participates in a player participation type production, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by performing various operations using the production operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor body 358. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player in the participatory performance, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Further, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the production operation unit 350 to the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 in the production operation unit elevating mechanism 360, the production operation unit 350 is locked so that it cannot move forward or backward. Therefore, until a performance such as advancing or retracting the performance operation unit 350 is executed, the performance operation unit 350 is prevented from moving forward or backward by the guide pin 354c and the elevating cam member 371. 350 can be prevented from moving or shaking on its own. Therefore, it is possible to avoid making the player feel distrustful or anxious due to the performance operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, and making the performance by the performance operation unit 350 more enjoyable. You can make it possible to

Furthermore, in the production operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is provided at a position apart from the contact detection body 352, so that the contact detection sensor that has electronic components such as a sensor IC and an output circuit can be used. The main body 358 can be provided in a part that is difficult for players to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the contact detection body 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact detection sensor main body 358 having a sensor IC, output circuit, etc. for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 are separate bodies. Since the shape, material, etc. of the contact detection body 352 can be appropriately selected regardless of the contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection body 352 can be selected according to the shape, form, specifications, etc. of the button body 351 of the production operation unit 350. The pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned functions and effects can be reliably realized.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the player can attach the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covering the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398. When the user approaches or contacts the button body 351 or the surface member 396 with the button outer decorative substrate 355, the inner button decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, the contact sensing element 352 or the contact sensing element 397 The capacitance of the button changes, and a predetermined effect is executed in which light is irradiated to the player side by the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 according to the change. The player's attention can be strongly attracted to the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 by the light irradiated to the button, and the performed performance can entertain the player. At this time, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button outer decoration board 355, the button inner decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398, Since it is formed along the decorative part provided on the surface member 396, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397 is part of the decorative part, and the game It is possible to make it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is for detecting a player.

In this way, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is made unrecognizable from the player side, even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decoration. Even if a part of the body 398 (effect) is blocked, the player will not be concerned about the contact sensing body 352 or the contact sensing body 397, and the outside button decorative board 355, the inside button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 will not be bothered by the player. Even if the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is provided in front of the player, the presence of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 will not make the player feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effects of the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 can be shown to the player in a good condition, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351 or the surface member 396 by the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 covers the outside of the button. Since the decoration board 355, the button inside decoration board 364, or the decoration body 398 is designed to perform a production in which light is irradiated toward the player, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 is connected to the production operation section 301 (contact operation section). 302), and it is also possible to provide the player with a sense of operation using light. Therefore, for example, when executing a player participation type production, the player's fingers or the like are brought close to or in contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, and the contact sensor 352 or the contact sensor 397 approaches or contacts the player's finger or the like. By detecting the contact, the outer button decorative board 355, the inner button decorative board 364, or the decorative body 398 executes the effect, allowing the player to participate in the player participation type effect. You can enjoy the kata performance.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc. Since it is possible to change the effect of the outside button decorative board 355, button inside decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 depending on the distance from the outside button decorative board 355, depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc. It is possible to change the presentation by the decorative board 364 or the decoration body 398 in the button, and it is possible to show a more diverse presentation to the player, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored with the variety of presentation. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Further, changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 are detected, and when the player approaches or touches the button body 351 or the surface member 396, the button body 351 or the surface member 396 and the button Since the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 provided between the outer decoration substrate 355, the button inner decoration substrate 364, or the decoration body 398 changes, the game on the button body 351 or the surface member 396 It is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a person's finger or the like, and it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 is configured to detect a change in capacitance, the contact detection body 352 or the contact detection body 397 can be made of a conductive member, so that, for example, When the contact detection body 397 is made of a metal vapor deposited film, it can be made transparent by making the vapor deposited film thin, and it can be made to look like a part of decoration by making the vapor deposited film thick and have a metallic luster. Can be done. Alternatively, if the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 are made of punched metal with a design such as a star shape or a heart shape, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection body 395 can be made to look like part of the decoration. be able to. For this reason, the contact detection bodies 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable from the player side, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the electrostatic capacitance is increased when the player's finger or the like approaches or contacts the transparent button body 351 covering the upper surface side (front side). As a result of the change, a predetermined effect is produced by the effect presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, the vibration motor 356, the effect operation part lifting mechanism 360, the inner button decorative board 364, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. The contact sensing body 395 (including the contact sensing body 352, the left contact sensing body 390L, the right contact sensing body 390R, the contact sensing body 393, the contact sensing body 397, etc.) for displaying the Since the contact sensing body 395 is formed in the outer peripheral shape, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact sensing body 395 itself, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with a good appearance and high appeal to players. In addition, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351, and the effect is presented according to the change in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger etc. to the contact sensing body 395. Since the means presents a predetermined effect via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., the predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351. Therefore, the button body 351 can function as the effect operation section 301. Since the contact detection body 395 and the like that can be seen through the button body 351 have a design, the production operation section 301 appears to have a design, which is unlike any previous pachinko machine. Since the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the operation section 301, it can give a strong impact to players, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Furthermore, as described above, the touch detection body 395 etc. with a design can give a strong impact to the player, so it is possible to strongly arouse interest in the touch detection body 395 etc. (button body 351). It is possible to increase expectations for the operation of the button body 351 (performance operation section 301), and to make the operation of the button body 351 enjoyable when a player participation type performance in which the button body 351 is operated is executed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

In addition, since the contact detection body 395 and the like that detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc. with the button body 351 are formed in an outer peripheral shape with a design, at first glance, depending on the player, some effects may be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to notice the existence of the performance operation section 301 (button body 351) for presenting the performance by means of means. Therefore, when a player participation type performance in which the performance operation unit 301 is operated is executed, by prompting the player to approach or touch the button body 351, the button body 351 is first activated by the contact detection body 395, etc. It is possible to make the player aware that it is the operation section 301, and it is possible to give a surprise to the player and make the player participation type performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player participatory performance is executed by operating the performance operation section 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 without knowing that it is the performance operation section 301, the contact detection body 395 etc. may become static. Since the capacitance changes and the performance is presented by the performance presentation means, the player can be surprised, and the presented performance can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect is presented by the effect presentation means in accordance with the change in capacitance in the contact detection body 395 etc., the player's finger or the like does not touch the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 etc. Approach and contact can be easily detected, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be easily implemented. In addition, since the effects are presented in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395, etc., contact occurs when the player's hand or finger approaches the button body 351 that covers the contact sensing body 395, etc. Since it is possible to detect the distance up to It is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making it difficult for the user to get bored with the game.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if an inorganic material such as punched metal, expanded metal, wire mesh, etc. is used as the conductive contact sensing body 395 etc., It is possible to impart a design to the contact sensing body 395, etc., to prevent deterioration in appearance due to the contact sensing body 395, etc., and to make the contact sensing body 395, etc. stand out, thereby achieving the above-mentioned effects. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily realized.

In addition, since the outer circumferential shape of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct something with design properties without forming the contact sensing body 395 etc. into a three-dimensional shape. can. Therefore, the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, and the cost for manufacturing the contact sensing body 395 etc. can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dust, food and drink stains, etc. do not adhere to the contact sensing body 395 etc., and the effort required for cleaning is simplified. It can be made into something. To be more specific, since the contact sensing body 395 is made of a material with irregularities like punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drinks tends to adhere to the irregularities, and it takes time and effort to clean the dirt. However, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a material with irregularities such as punched metal, the button body 351 This makes it possible to prevent dirt from adhering to the pachinko machine, and as it is easy to clean, the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, since the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with a transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact sensing body 395 etc., the contact sensing body 395 etc. is made of a metal vapor deposited film or the like. If a material that enhances the design, such as foil stamping, is used, it is possible to prevent premature wear due to contact by a player, and it is possible to increase the durability of the contact detection body 395 and the like.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and as mentioned above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact sensing body 395 etc. Since it is possible to use materials that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player as the sensing body 395, it is possible to increase the flexibility of the materials used for the contact sensing body 395, etc., and to meet the needs. The contact sensing body 395 and the like can be formed from a suitable material.

Furthermore, when the capacitance of the contact sensing body 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger or the like close to or touching the button body 351 covering the contact sensing body 395 etc., the button body 351 and the contact sensing body 395 Since a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., it is possible that the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with a finger or the like due to the effect presented via the button body 351, the contact detection body 395, etc. This allows the player to intuitively recognize the player's actions, and allows the player to enjoy the movements of the fingers and the like.

In addition, the effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection body 395, etc., and when the player's finger approaches or touches the button body 351 covering the contact detection body 395 etc. Since the effects presented to the player are executed via the button body 351, the contact sensing body 395, etc., the button body 351 can function like a contact operation section, and the presented effects can improve the operational feel. can be given, and the operation using the button body 351 (player participation type performance) can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that can perform multiple operations, the player approaches or contacts the button body 351 with his/her finger or the like, and the contact detection body 352 is activated. When the (contact detection sensor main body 358) detects the entry of a finger or the like into the detection area, the plurality of LEDs 355a of the button outer decorative board 355 and the plurality of LEDs 364a of the button inner decorative board 364 emit light to cause the game to be activated through the button main body 351. A light-emitting effect in which a player is illuminated with light, a effect in which the vibration motor 356 vibrates the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact with the button body 351 through (via) the button body 351, and a effect that causes the button body 351 to protrude upwards by the effect operation part elevating mechanism 360. As a result, the button body 351 can function as the contact operation section 302, and the player can enjoy it. You can do it. Also, at this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure are given to the player through the button body 351, so that the effects can surprise the player and entertain the player. This can increase the user's desire to operate the button body 351. Then, with the player's finger or the like touching the button body 351, by moving the finger or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation part 303, so that the contact detection object 352 detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., and the pressing operation of the button body 351 allows the player to enjoy a variety of performance operations, making it difficult for the player to get bored and keeping the player interested. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Further, a detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is composed of a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is provided near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with the detection circuit is placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353 away from the upper surface part 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection body 352 will cause the button main body 351 to It is possible to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like with the upper surface portion 351a of the player, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's finger or the like is configured by the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, the contact detection sensor main body 358 provided with a detection circuit Since the sensor body 358 can be placed on the flange part 353b of the button sleeve 353, which is remote from the upper surface part 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351, the contact detection sensor body 358 can be placed in an inconspicuous area, and the pachinko machine The appearance of 1 can be improved.

In addition, on the back side (lower side) of the button body 351, there are provided an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and a performance operation part lifting/lowering mechanism 360. Effects such as vibration, impact, push-up, and wind pressure can be easily applied, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4. Overall configuration of main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 75 to 81. FIG. 75 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 77 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main members and seen from the back.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player and stores the game ball B used in the game. This is for discharging or discharging the water to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed into a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is removably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall so that it can be opened and closed at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main body frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; Main body frame lower hinge assembly is attached to the lower end of the left side of the base unit 500 when viewed from the front, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3. A solid body 520 is provided.

Further, the main body frame 4 includes a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, so that the game area 5a of the game board 5 can be A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 installed along the upper and left sides of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view, and a payout base unit 550 for shooting the ball B; A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for dispensing game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 is attached to the main body frame base unit 501 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base unit 501, and an outer frame 2, a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502, and a game board locking member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a spherical tank that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape extending left and right and is open upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of an upwardly opened groove, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a distance from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view, and a second rail cover 555 is attached to the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 based on instructions from the payout control board 633. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, a lower full bulb path unit 610 that guides the ball to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be engaged with the door frame 3, and a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A transmission cylinder 654 moves the door frame hooks 652 or the outer frame hooks 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hooks 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is biased and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlock lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 83 and the like. FIG. 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 82(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has its rear part inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame base 501 which is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 to guide a connection cable 503. and a game board locking member 505 that is rotatably attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and holds the game board 5 in a removable manner. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base main body 501a that extends approximately 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b that penetrates from front to back within the height range of It includes a placing part 501c and a game board regulating part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left and right direction of the game board placing part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front view of the base main body 501a, and includes a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540. A cylinder insertion opening 501f passes through the right side of the portion 501e in front and back when viewed from the front, through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion port 501f passes through the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in the front and back when viewed from the front and connects the board unit. The circular speaker opening 501g that allows the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a to face forward and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend left and right. It includes a cable attachment recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, and a cable insertion opening 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable attachment recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used for attaching the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. An upper hinge attachment portion 501k and a lower hinge attachment portion 501l are provided.

The main body frame base 501 also has a door for detecting opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame release switch is installed. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. A detection signal from the door frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 has a main body frame release switch for detecting the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame release switch is installed. There is. When the main body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch is released from its pressure and can detect the opening of the main body frame 4. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b, thereby making it possible to attach and detach the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b.

The cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached to the right side of the speaker opening 501g. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached rotatably around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward on both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a, and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of band-like frame pieces 502b that extend out, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that passes through the guide body 502a in the front and back at both upper and lower ends, and also extends from the left and right sides. A plurality of through holes 502d are arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable attachment recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable attachment recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of a plurality of wiring cords, and one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to relay board 105.

Next, the effects of the connection cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 83 etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is located at an end (right end) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinged and rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 in the left and right direction. ) is attached rotatably around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 and the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has the side connected to the interface board 635 connected to the connection cable guide member. 502, the guide body 502a is brought into contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 assembled in the pachinko machine 1 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 83(a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and passes through the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the hinge is rotated to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2≧β (preferably α/3≧β). (See FIG. 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees), the increase stops. It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward than the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the part of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, so the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the attachment shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not obstruct the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. In addition, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. You can develop a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is applied due to the folding tendency. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding tendency, and also to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is attached to the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a connects the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 to the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a. It can be drawn toward the central axis (axis) of the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

Further, in this embodiment, the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 The angle between the tangent to the circle passing through the rearward protruding part (pressing part) on the center axis (axis) side of the upper frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since the connecting cable guide member 502 can be pressed in the direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached to the door frame.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward into an L-shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. The main body frame upper hinge pin 512 is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion when viewed from the front, and for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. We are prepared.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the main body frame 4 to be attached to the door frame with respect to the outer frame 2. 3 can be mounted rotatably on a hinge.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2. A door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a lower hinge first main body 521, which is a horizontally extending flat plate whose rear part is bent upward into an L-shape, and is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521. The lower hinge second main body 522 is formed by bending the rear part of a horizontally extending flat plate material upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance upwardly from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521 that extends horizontally. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge body 521 .

The lower hinge first body 521 is an outer frame lower part that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion, and into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 is a lower door frame lower body that penetrates vertically near the front end of a horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a regulating piece 522b extending upward from a position on the left side of the horizontally extending portion behind the door frame lower hinge hole 522a and regulating the rotation range of the door frame 3. , is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l on the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It will be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinge-rotatable manner, and also allows the door frame 3 to be attached to the main body frame 4 in a hinge-rotatable manner. The hinge can be mounted rotatably.

[4-4. Main body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80, 81, and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a portion on the rear side extending rightward from the front end that restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically apart from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a on the front side, which is formed in a U-shape with an open right side in plan view, and is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in plan view, and an unauthorized tool can be seen from the left side of the pachinko machine 1. can be prevented from being inserted inside. The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and also strengthens the inside of the body frame 4 from the left side (passed between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4). This prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. FIG. 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the front in the main body frame, and FIG. 84(b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher seen from the back. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the ball launching device 540 is attached to the front lower part of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 is sent to the game board attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of No. 5. The ball firing device 540 can drive the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat launcher base 541 that is attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and to the rear surface of the right side of the launcher base 541 when viewed from the front, and is rotatable. A firing solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a ball mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a ball from near the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is provided with a firing rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the firing rail 544; When the handle 195 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a force corresponding to the rotation angle, and the ball B is hit by the ball hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch rail 544, is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is driven into the game area 5a.

In addition, if the hit game ball B does not reach the gaming area 5a due to the driving force of the game ball B, etc., the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) From there, the ball falls into the foul ball socket 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the back. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 includes a top plate portion 551a that has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends left and right, and a top plate portion 551a that extends downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. the left side plate part 551b that extends downward from the right side of the top plate part 551a when viewed from the front, the right side plate part 551c having approximately the same width in the front-rear direction as the top plate part 551a, and the rear side of the top plate part 551a. The upper back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side to the same position as the lower edge of the right side plate 551c, and the upper back plate 551d extends to the right with a substantially constant width from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate 551b to near the lower end The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner side plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front part of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate part 551g extending to approximately the same position as the right side of the back plate left part 551e, and a connecting plate part 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate part 551g and the lower side of the inner plate part 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open toward the front and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends left and right with approximately the same length as the horizontal width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the dispensing base 551, the front ends of the top plate part 551a, the left side plate part 551b, and the right side plate part 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the dispensing base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is open to the rear and extends vertically by a left side plate portion 551b, a left back plate portion 551e, and an inner side plate portion 551f. Unit 560 is installed. Further, the dispensing base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a ball tank 552 that is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 and is open upward in a box shape extending from side to side, and a portion of the dispensing base 551 extending from side to side. A tank rail 553 is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is attached to a first rail cover 554 attached halfway in the left-right direction at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and to the upper end of the tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in a front view. A second rail cover 555 is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. and a ball stopper 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

The ball tank 552 is formed to have a length approximately half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length shorter in the front-rear direction than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. It is formed. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in a plan view that is diagonal to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front and rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the same depth, it is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

In addition, the tank rail 553 is arranged so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left is steeper from the horizontal than the bottom surface so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is slanted at an angle so that the left end side is lower. The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are designed to prevent the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553. It is something.

The ball rectifying member 556 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and has an end on the first rail cover 554 side with respect to an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Rotatably mounted. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that projects into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 91). By using this rectifier piece 556a to slow down the flow of game balls B on the upper stage side, which are distributed in two stages, upper and lower, and rectify the flow so that they flow in one stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 is This prevents balls from clogging even if the height is lower.

The ball stopper member 557 is attached so as to be slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front, and by sliding it to the left closes the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit side.

Further, the dispensing base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion of the dispensing base 551 extending left and right. The external terminal board 558 is for electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86, 87, and the like. FIG. 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 86(b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 570 that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 to guide the game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570. a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side, and from the ball removal path 580b where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, the ball B is released from the upper full ball path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball extraction passage 580b downward. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides the game balls B released from the ball extraction path 580b. This is to guide the game ball B that has been loaded toward the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The ball guide unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for the purpose of

The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, and a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a closed front side of the guiding unit base 571. A movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and a movable piece member 573 that moves by the game balls B flowing in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. (See FIG. 91).

In the ball guiding unit 570, the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding passage front cover 572 have a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center in the height direction of the guide unit base 571, and then bends to the right and guides the guide unit base 571. The guide unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly being folded back and forth between the widths in the left and right direction of the unit base 571, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that the depth in the front and back right direction and the width in the left and right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. Can be guided in a single line.

In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the top so that it can move forward and backward into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion attached rotatably around an axis extending back and forth at a right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a portion of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do so. This movable piece member 573 is in a state in which when the game ball B comes into contact with the part that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a, so that it does not protrude. becomes.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and the part of the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When the movable piece member 573 is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the dispensing passage of the dispensing device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games can be played in the guiding passage 570a. Ball B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guide path 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guide path 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 to 89 and the like. FIG. 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit taken at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. FIG. 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device taken at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball extraction movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 89(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 89(a). It is. The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581, which has a box-like shape that is open to the rear, and has a dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, a dispensing passage 580b branching from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a, It includes a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 that is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and an attached spur gear-shaped drive gear 585; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; , a second transmission gear 587 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; It has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A dispensing gear member 588, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582, and has a plurality of blade pieces 589a protruding into the dispensing passage 580a; A blade rotation detection sensor 590 is attached to the rear side of the device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Further, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that is attached to a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a and detects game balls B; A movable ball ejecting piece 592 is attached to be able to open and close the ball ejecting passage 580b at a portion where it branches from the dispensing passage 580a by the lid 582, and the ball ejecting movable piece 592 can be held in a position where the ball ejecting passage 580b is closed. It is equipped with a ball extraction lever 593 which is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape extending vertically in plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction as viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 88, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens upward at a position near the right end in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. It opens downward. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward by about 1/3 of the total height from above so as to move little by little to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It is bent at about ⅓ of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, there is a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery. It extends downward in an arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to form an arc, and also extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view.

In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is arranged below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end in the dispensing passage 580a, branches at a part where it bends to the right, and extends perpendicularly to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball extracting movable piece 592 is attached at the part where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extracting passage 580b diverge, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is The main body side guide wall 581a projects backward and forward from each side so as to form a narrower gap than the main body side guide wall 581a, and is formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b when viewed from the rear. and a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the dispensing passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 of the height from the top. It is formed on the left side. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed to mainly constitute a side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. A ball extracting movable piece 592 rotates passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing device body 581 at a portion of the dispensing device main body 581 where the dispensing passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are arranged in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front lid 583. The delivery gear member 588 includes three flat detection pieces 588b that extend outward and are spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is arranged between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The delivery blade 589 includes three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape and spaced apart at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is arranged so that the space between the wing piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passageway is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B at a portion in the payout passageway 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in rear view. It protrudes into the dispensing passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball storage portion 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can prevent the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and rotate in the clockwise direction in rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are coaxially attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and dispensing device front cover 583 so as to be able to rotate together. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball extraction movable piece 592 has an upper end rotatably attached to the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a around an axis extending back and forth. The ball ejecting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape and is attached so that the recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball extraction movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to protrude into the ball removal passage 580b or retreat outside the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between them.

The ball extraction lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction near the upper end of the ball discharging movable piece 592 to the left in rear view. A portion of the ball extraction lever 593 protrudes rearward through the rear lid 582 of the dispensing device, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball extraction lever 593 at the lower end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball extraction movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Moreover, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (see FIG. 89).

When the ball extracting lever 593 is raised to make the ball extracting movable piece 592 rotatable, the game balls B, which have been tied together like a string on the upstream side of the ball extracting movable piece 592, are removed from the ball extracting movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball ejecting passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream side of the dispensing passage 580a flow straight down to the ball discharging passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no thing like the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game balls B, so the game balls B are not allowed to flow from the payout passage 580a side. It will flow down quickly.

In this way, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down inside the ball extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so the ball extracting movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extracting passage 580b The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side vigorously, but the ball ejecting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear cover 582. Since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outward from the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b due to the force of contact. It is not pinched between the wall surface of the ejection passage 580b and the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent strong force from being applied to the ball ejecting movable piece 592 by the game ball B, and the ball ejecting movement due to the collision of the game ball B. Deterioration in durability and breakage of the piece 592 can be suppressed.

For this reason, since the ball extraction movable piece 592 can be made difficult to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment on the downstream side of the ball extraction passageway 580b, so the pachinko player can It is possible to suppress an increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

In addition, when the ball extracting movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball extracting movable piece 592 passes through the ball extracting passage 580b between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, which are narrower than the game ball B. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball extraction movable piece 592 protruding into the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball extraction movable piece 592 when moving outward through the gap, the distance between the game balls B and Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Since the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, the game ball B is separated from the ball extraction movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable ball extracting piece 592 is based on inertia force, strong force does not act on the movable ball extracting piece 592, making it difficult to damage the movable ball extracting piece 592, and also making it possible to prevent the movable ball extracting piece 592 from being damaged. Game balls B do not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the game balls B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full bulb path unit 600 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from behind to the lower side of the dispensing device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back plate 551e of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full bulb path unit 600 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full bulb path unit 600 includes a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has an open rear side, and a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is attached to the rear side of the upper full fill base 601 and has an open front side. , and a dispensing device pressing member 603 that is rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and can press the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes to the right from the right side in front view, and includes a back cover attachment portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

Further, the upper full bulb path unit 600 has an upper payout that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position approximately 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right in front view by about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to about 1/6 of the total height. An upper ball storage passage 600b, an upper normal dispensing passage 600c extending downward from the left side in front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface; An upper full discharge passage 600d extends downward from the right side in the front view from the left-right center of the ball storage passage 600b and opens downward in the lower surface, and an upper full discharge passage 600d opens upward near the right end in the upper surface in the front view and extends downward substantially vertically. The upper ball removal passage 600e extends downward near the right end of the lower surface and opens downward (see FIG. 91).

On the lower surface of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, an upper normal delivery passage 600c, an upper full delivery passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the upstream end of the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device 580, and the upper dispensing ball path unit 600 is assembled into the dispensing unit 560. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. As a result, the game balls B discharged (dispensed) from the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 pass through the upper dispensing ball receiving passage 600a and the upper sphere storage passage 600b, and then pass through the upper normal dispensing passage 600c or the upper full dispensing passage 600d. is emitted downward from either of the Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full bulb path unit]
The lower full bulb path unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the dispensing base 551 in the dispensing base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 side or toward the board unit 620 side. The lower full bulb path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full bulb path unit 610 has a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower bulb removal passage 610c, and has a lower full base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and a lower normal discharge passage 610a and a lower full tank cover 612, which is attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth. A dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b, and a dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 that opens and closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b. A closing spring 614 is provided.

In the lower full ball path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball extraction passage 610c are arranged in order from the left in front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b extend forward in a state in which they are lined up left and right, and open toward the front at the front end of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The lower full tank dispensing passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal dispensing passage 610a. The lower bulb removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b when viewed from the front, and opens toward the right midway in the front-rear direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-fill dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased clockwise in the front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 includes an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a has a short circular arc shape when viewed from the front, centered on the center of rotation of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is slanted so that it protrudes forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening/closing abutting portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full bulb path unit 610 is assembled to the dispensing unit 560, the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower full bulb dispensing passage 610b, and the lower bulb ejection passage 610c, which open upward at the upper end of the rear part, are connected to the upper full bulb passageway 610, respectively. It is located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full discharge passage 600d, and the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the tank ball path unit 600. As a result, the game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b. The game ball B released downward from the upper ball ejection passage 600e flows through the lower ball ejection passage 610c.

In addition, when the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b penetrate the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c is open to face the ball removal guide portion 627 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620, which is open to the left.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4) of the lower full ball path unit 610, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening/closing of the foul cover unit 150. By coming into contact with the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are open, and are in communication with the through ball passage 150a and the full ball socket 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is separated from the door opening/closing contact part 150f of the foul cover unit 150, so that the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotated clockwise in front view by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled to the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejecting lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejecting passage 580b branching from the dispensing passage 580a is closed at the branching portion. Further, in the lower full bulb path unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in an open state.

A ball tank 552 opened upward is filled with a predetermined number of balls from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, based on the detection of ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. Game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state where they are aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B remain upstream of the payout blade 589. becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball break detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This shows that the game balls B are stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 rotates the dispensing blade 589 clockwise in the rear view, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the dispensing blade in the dispensing passage 580a moves. 589 is released downstream. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) are sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

In a normal state, the game balls B sent to the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 pass through the upper ball storage passage 600b and are placed directly below the upper paid ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and then pass through the tray unit 200. The ball is discharged into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 at.

When many game balls B are put out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, so the payout device The game balls B put out from 580 come to stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game balls B are paid out further, there is a gap between the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal discharge passage 600c of the upper full bulb path unit 600 which is in communication with it. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B, when more game balls B are paid out, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicates with the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side. As the game balls B begin to accumulate, the game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game balls B flowing down to the upper full-ball payout passage 600d side pass through the lower full-ball payout passage 610b of the lower full-ball route unit 610, and then pass through the full-ball socket 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. can be accepted. Thereafter, the game balls B received in the full ball socket 150b are discharged into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. Thereby, when the upper tray 201 is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

Note that when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to eject the game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are paid out, the lower tray The game balls B stay and are stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 are filled with game balls B ( In addition to informing the player that the tank is full (for example, "Please remove the ball!"), the system also controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 when the full tank detection sensor 154 is not detecting it. Temporarily stop it until the

When ejecting the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the lower end position. Slide it to the rising end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates clockwise in rear view, and the ball extracting movable piece 592 moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball passes through the gap and is pushed out to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal path 580b branched from the payout path 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal path 580b.

At this time, at the part of the ball extracting movable piece 592, since the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball extracting movable piece 592, the ball extracting movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B discharged downward from the ball ejection passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball ejection passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball ejection path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After passing through the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c and ejected to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejected ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hall is discharged to the island equipment side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96 and the like. FIG. 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92(b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 93 is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from below. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the front, and FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and seen from the back. FIG. 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a includes a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a speaker cover 621 that faces forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and the container-shaped speaker box 623 is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is open to the front. .

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed of a plurality of slits extending vertically and penetrating back and forth near the left end when viewed from the front, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A front space recess 621b is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side when viewed, and a front space recess 621b projects downward from the lower surface of the space front recess 621b and extends in the left and right direction diagonally downward and backward. The connecting portion 621c is open.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Furthermore, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

The speaker box 623 is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the front, and the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in front view, it extends rearward in a step-like manner. It is formed so that the protrusion is small. This makes it possible to secure a sufficient rear space on the right side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front, in which the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. can be placed. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms part of an enclosure 624 that includes a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 to contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, and therefore protrudes rearward as the speaker box 623 moves to the right. Even if it is formed in a step-like manner so that the volume is smaller, a sufficiently wide space is secured to the right of the main body frame speaker 622.

In the speaker unit 620a, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 The space is in communication with the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2. Therefore, an enclosure 624 with a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621 , the speaker box 623 , the front curtain member 42 , and the rear curtain member 43 . The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

Specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side in front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connecting portion 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connecting tube part 43a, the sound output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear can be directly connected to the outer frame lower assembly 40 without attenuating the bass range in particular. In addition, the transmitted low frequency range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47, and can be radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42 is radiated with its phase inverted, so that it is output from the front of the main body frame speaker 622 and is emitted from the dish unit. The sound emitted from the speaker port 211b of the main body frame speaker 622 resonates to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound with deep bass.

That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear deep bass sounds. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2. This allows the player to hear a sound with rich bass.

In addition, the speaker unit 620a has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting part 621a and the space front recess 621b, and the speaker box 623. A through tube 623a that communicates with the through hole 621d, extends in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates back and forth is formed. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent from the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. 620c is attached to the rear base 626.

In addition, the base unit 620b is formed by a front base 625 and a rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. A ball removal guide part 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharged ball receiving part that opens upward in the right side in front view on the downstream side of the ball removal guide part 627 and receives the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game balls B that have passed through the ball extraction guiding part 627 and the discharged ball receiving part 628 downward.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens toward the left in the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens toward the left end side of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball eject guide part 627 faces so that the opening at the upstream end coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejecting passage 610c of the lower full bulb path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the ejected ball receiving section 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long from side to side. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 has a left end in front view that is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejecting guide section 627, and is inclined to become lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 to the right side in front view by the ball extraction guiding section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628, and then Since the liquid is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made larger, allowing the player to hear sound with richer bass than in conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is removably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (Fig. 96). The payout control board 633 operates the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a press operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, etc. This is to control and pay out a specified number of game balls B to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so that traces of opening and closing remain. This makes it possible to detect unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

The interface unit 620e includes a substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and a substrate so as to cover the rear side of the interface substrate 635. an interface board cover 636 attached to a board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at a portion that protrudes most rearward, behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board 1310, a peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and is attached. The right side of the back cover 640 when viewed from the front is rotatably attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the dispensing base 551. and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full bulb path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally, with the right side in front view bent forward, and when assembled on the main body frame 4, the rear surface is aligned with the upper back plate 551d of the dispensing base 551. It is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 passing through it from front to back and extending vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and allows the inside of the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 97(b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked with the outer frame 2, and a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that protrude forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 and can be attached to the door frame depending on the rotation direction. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

The locking unit 650 also includes a locking spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and moves the outer frame hook 653 downward by sliding downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the transmission cylinder 654 controls the rotation of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. It engages with the transmission member 133 and rotates as the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are latched to the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the outside The frame hook 653 is engaged with the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and a corresponding key is inserted into the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotated in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are sloped so as to be tapered. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are attached to the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the locking state is achieved by the biasing force of the locking spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed structure of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 98 to 105. FIG. 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 98(b) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 98(a). FIG. 99 is an enlarged view showing the upper part of a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind. FIG. 100(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank with tank rails and the like assembled as seen from the front top, and FIG. 100(b) is a perspective view of FIG. 100(a) seen from the front bottom. FIG. 101 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 100(a). FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour path in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and removed from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 that is rotatably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5; A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 that is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) extending left and right and is open upward; and a ball tank 552 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and is open upward. A tank rail 553 extending leftward in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball stopper 557; a dispensing device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the dispensing base 551 for dispensing the game ball B to the player; It is equipped with

The spherical tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a that is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, and is inclined so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, and a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that has a bottom wall 552a that is sloped so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, and is formed into a container shape with an open upper side. has been done. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Moreover, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow part 552f cut out from above in the front wall 552b and formed lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery. This overflow part 552f has a length of approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the opposite end (the right wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b. It is formed over a period of time.

When viewed from the front, the right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the spherical tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to move away from the spherical tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed in a width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B so that only one game ball B can flow therethrough. have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In addition, in plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left and right direction parallel to the axis extending in the left and right direction from the right end side, and then extends to the left. It is formed in the shape of a crank, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as the direction advances, and from there extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. . In the tank rail 553, in the main guide portion 553a, a portion extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width, and a first rail is attached to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) in the part where the upper side is closed, and at the downstream end, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end). The ball is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) that allows only one ball to flow through the ball.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to the part where the upper side is closed, and is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging part 553b which bulges out wider than the width of the guiding part 553a and becomes narrower in the width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding part 553a. There is. By this bulging portion 553b, the plurality of game balls B, which are spread out in the width direction on the upstream side, can be aligned so that the width in the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as you go downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to become narrower in the width direction from the upper end toward the lower main guide portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b in a line in the width direction toward the downstream side and the lower side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature located on the inside, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, so in the tank rail 553, there is a slight curve at the border between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b is applied depends on the position of the bulge 553b that comes into contact with it. This changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumping within the bulged portion 553b. To be more specific, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force is always applied from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b in a constant direction to the game ball B circulating inside the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game balls B inside are always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape, and ball jamming (ball jamming) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging part 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging part 553b differs depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside can be circulated. By distributing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make ball jamming (ball jamming) less likely to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if balls become jammed inside the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the location where the balls are jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, so the interruption of the game due to ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in playing due to the interruption of the game can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit, etc., the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gear, belt, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. It is possible to achieve the following effects.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the spherical tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction outside the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552. In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, it is inclined so that the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and the front end side is higher. The overflow surface portion 501m extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b whose upper side is open in the tank rail 553, and the rear end side is low. The part of the game balls B that overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m is inclined so that the side (left side) that is farther from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is lower. and a detour passage 552g for guiding.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the bottom surface A discharge part 551j whose height is lower than the upper open part of the tank rail 553, and a discharge part 551j located at a position lower than the overflow surface part 501m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552g with the discharge part 551j in between. It covers an external terminal board 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), and the upper surface is covered with overflow. The terminal cover 551k extends horizontally at a position higher than the surface portion 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m is shaped like a flat plate extending rearward from a position 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It has extended to The overflow surface portion 501m has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter of the game ball B. A gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface portion 501m and the outer frame upper member 30 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m, and has a flat left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface section 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both sides in the left and right direction, and extend in the front and rear direction like a strip, so that the outer side of the game ball B in the left and right direction is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. It has a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in a row at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-back direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than in the front-back direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 The gap between them is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m matches the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface portion 501m The left end of the right step portion 501o matches the left end of the detour passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o matches the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. In addition, below, the container-shaped area|region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply called the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h that is inclined so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow part 552f and its rear end is lower. and a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 on the left end side (weir portion 552i side) when viewed from the front; It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes towards the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined horizontally in the left-right direction.

When the detour passage 552g is assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear end of the detour path 552g is aligned with the front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour path 552g changes from the oblique rear end so that its distribution direction becomes perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the direction of flow of game balls B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. In addition, since the game balls B are supplied from the detour path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B from the detour path 552g are fed into the tank rail 553. It is possible to make it difficult for balls to become clogged in the 553.

The detour path 552g extends obliquely to the left and right direction so that the rear end moves backward as it goes downstream of the tank rail 553, so the game ball B moves from the detour path 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. By discharging to a wide area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clumps inside the tank rail 553.

Further, the portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour path 552g corresponds to the outside of the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left side of the rear wall 552c in the front view in the tank rail 553. The game balls B that have passed from inside the ball tank 552 through the lower side of the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flow into this region. For this reason, in the part of the tank rail 553 that is behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). (height) cannot be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received at the tank rail 553, and the game ball B will not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending lower to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow part 552f on the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, when viewed from the front, the right end of the guide surface portion 552j extends from the left end of the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction, and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left and right direction. After extending diagonally rearward from the front wall 552b to a position approximately 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it is formed in a shape extending parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

In the spherical tank 552, in a plan view, there is a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The area surrounded by has an opening 552k formed to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending outward in the left-right direction and in the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b, respectively, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir part 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a section 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow part 552f and the upper edge of the two flange parts 552l is the same as that of the upper edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). (upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled together, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. )are doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The ejecting section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When the discharge part 551j is assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge part 551j is installed in the spherical tank 552 so that it becomes lower in a stepwise manner toward the rear from a height lower than the detour passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. It extends rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, and then moves leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends towards the rear.

The external terminal board 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a attached to the rear surface thereof arranged in the left-right direction. This electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal whose grip part opens by operating a lever and can grip the tip of the electric wire. The external terminal board 558 is disposed in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lower, as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner thereof is lower, and the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner thereof is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are each inclined such that the left end side thereof is lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

When the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, they first cross the overflow part 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be allowed to flow out to the outside (front) of the ball tank 552, and the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m. The game balls B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the number of game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing against each other (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking with each other in the ball tank 552.

Moreover, since the detour passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to avoid a strong backward pressing force being applied to the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface portion 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are prevented from clogging. can be prevented. In addition, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m are prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. It can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem in which the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side that is away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) due to the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from being strongly pressed against each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow part 552f is made higher than the overflow part 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is The upper end edge of the left wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the rear end of the overflow portion 552f, that is, the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 over the overflow part 552f to the overflow surface part 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface part 501m to the detour passage 552g are on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour path 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball It is possible to prevent the game balls B from clogging in the tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the ball is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from flowing in from the side (ball tank 552) into the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game balls B in the detour passage 552g is directed from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side to the rear. The flow can be made in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be made to be in a fixed direction. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other and jammed together due to the pressure applied to the game balls B being dispersed, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. It can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guiding part 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding part 553a and are aligned in the left and right direction. Since they are lined up, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in the part where the upper side is open, the game balls released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is made to extend from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, so that the bulging portion 553b is made to extend from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed. Since the game balls B are changed to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they move toward the downstream side within the bulge portion 553b. In addition, since the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side) By circulating the plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction downstream through the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and the game balls B are stacked in multiple stages in the height direction. can be aligned. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide the plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (toward the payout device 580 side) in a state where they are aligned in a line.

Furthermore, since it is provided with an overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, on the opposite side of the bulb tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge part 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which the game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a, etc. , problems such as short circuits or electrical wiring coming off due to contact with the game ball B will not occur.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface 501m, the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 are transferred to the ball tank 552. Even if the ball B bounces on the overflow surface 501m, it can be made difficult to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. The occurrence of such problems can be easily avoided.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface section 501m to the guide surface section 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface section 552j. This can prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game balls B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, thereby preventing the game balls B from clogging in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface section 501m, and rides on the left step section 501n and right step section 501o on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface section 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 103, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface 501m and the detour passage 552g due to their inclinations, and problems can occur due to the game balls B spilling outside the main body frame 4. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 due to the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , the game ball B guided by the detour path 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the The game ball B is not received in the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[4-12. Another embodiment of tank rail, etc.]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 and the like in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 110 and the like. FIG. 106 is an enlarged perspective view of a pachinko machine including a tank rail and the like according to another embodiment when viewed from the back. 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail etc. of FIG. 106 assembled with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the tank rail and the like in FIG. 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the front, and FIG. 108(b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail etc. in FIG. 107 as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc. taken along the carker line in FIG. 107(a). FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing, in cross section, the flow of game balls within the tank rail of FIG. 107. In the tank rail 553A of the embodiment different from the above, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball rectifying member 556A are provided. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are different from each other, and similar structures will be described with the same reference numerals.

The tank rail 553A of this embodiment rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends leftward in the shape of an upwardly open groove. The tank rail 553A includes a first rail cover 554A that closes the upper end side, a second rail cover 555A provided on the left side of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a second rail cover 555A provided on the upper side of the second rail cover 555A. The provided ball rectifying member 556A is attached, and a ball stopping member 557 capable of blocking the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in FIG. 107(a), the tank rail 553A has a meandering portion 553c that meanders in the front-rear direction on the downstream side of the bulging portion 553b. This meandering portion 553c can suppress the distribution speed of game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached to the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) of the meandering portion 553c.

The second rail cover 555A extends in the left-right direction so as to cover the open upper end side of the tank rail 553A from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) including the meandering portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A includes a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, and a pair of protective walls 555b extending upward from both front and rear ends upstream from the center in the left-right direction of the cover portion 555a. It has an opening 555c passing through the cover part 555a between the pair of protection walls 555b. The pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering portion 553c at a portion of the tank rail 553A where the meandering portion 553c is provided. A rectifying piece 556a of a ball rectifying member 556A, which will be described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball rectifying member 556A has an upstream end extending back and forth and is rotatably attached around an axis. The ball rectifying member 556A is provided between the pair of protective walls 555b above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, and projects into the tank rail 553A through the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A. It has a flat rectifying piece 556a. This ball rectifying member 556A contacts the game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the tank rail 553A from above, thereby breaking the stages of the game balls B and making it easier to align them in a line. The game balls B are restrained from moving quickly to the downstream side, thereby preventing ball biting from occurring on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

According to the tank rail 553A and the like of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the ball rectifying member 556A is located below the upper end of the protective wall 555b between the pair of protective walls 555b in the second rail cover 555A. ing. As a result, the electric wire (indicated by a broken line in FIG. 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558 provided on the front upper side of the portion of the tank rail 553A where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, It is possible to prevent contact with the ball rectifying member 556A from above. By the way, when the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, due to the weight of the electric wire, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A may not be able to rotate upward, and there is a risk that the ball rectifying member 556A may not be able to sufficiently exert the rectifying effect on the game balls B. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the pair of protection walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A can prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. When the game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward, sufficiently exerting the rectifying action, and preventing ball biting and balls inside the tank rail 553A. Occurrence of clogging can be prevented.

Further, since the tank rail 553A is provided with the meandering portion 553c, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c. By the way, in the tank rail 553A where the height becomes narrower toward the downstream side, if the upper game ball B among the game balls B stacked in multiple stages moves to the downstream side first, ball biting is likely to occur. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, since the flow velocity of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering portion 553c, it is possible to prevent the upper game balls B from moving to the downstream side first. This can reduce the occurrence of ball biting.

Furthermore, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A, thereby preventing ball clogging. Placing near a terminal board (for example, external terminal board 558) or control board to which electric wires are connected, or placing a terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected near tank rail 553A. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the arrangement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-13. Another embodiment of board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment from the above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 111 to 116 and the like. 111(a) is a front view of the board unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is a front view of the board unit of (a). It is a perspective view seen from the left front. 112(a) is a perspective view of the board unit in FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right back, and FIG. 112(b) is a perspective view of the board unit shown in FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right back. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) as seen from the rear. 115(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Keeke line in FIG. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the Cooke line in (a), and (c) is a ) is a sectional view taken along the Keke line. FIG. 116 is a bottom view showing a portion on the rear side of the door frame in the pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of FIG. 111(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500 in place of the above board unit 620. In the substrate unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620 described above. Here, components similar to those of the above-described board unit 620 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting part 501c, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 660 attached to the rear side of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a dispensing control unit 620d. An interface unit 620e is attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface of the front base 661. An out ball passage 663 is provided between the rear base 662, the front base 661, and the rear base 662, and through which the game balls B ejected downward from the game board 5 circulate, and a game where the out ball passages 663 circulate. an out sensor 664 that detects the balls B one by one; a ball extraction guide section 627 that receives the game balls B released from the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right in front view; The game ball B guided by the ball removal guide part 627 flows, and the ball removal passage 665 provided behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and the rear side of the ball removal passage 665 are closed. a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 in a similar manner.

The front base 661 is formed in the shape of a box that is open to the front and long from side to side. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, and an out ball passage 663 and a ball extraction guide part 627 are formed on the front side of the partition wall 662a. In addition, a bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed into a box shape with the rear side of the partition wall 662a open to the rear.

In the base unit 660, a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 are formed of transparent members. Therefore, the ball removal guiding portion 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal passage 665 are also formed transparently. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guiding section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal discharge passage 665 can be clearly viewed from the upper side or the lower side of the base unit 660, making it easier to check for ball clogging, etc. There is.

The out ball passage 663 is formed in the front side of a flat partition wall 662a extending left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, and is open at the front. The front end is closed by a front base 661.

The out ball passage 663 includes a ball discharge receiving section 663a that is open upwardly at approximately the center position in the left and right direction of the pachinko machine 1 and extends left and right, and a ball discharge receiving section 663a for receiving game balls B received in the ball discharging receiving section 663a. An out ball rectifying section 663b that rectifies the game balls B in a line while meandering greatly in the left and right direction, a downward guiding section 663c that guides the game balls B rectified in a line downward by the out ball rectifying section 663b, and a lower end of the downward guiding section 663c. It has an out ball discharge port 663d that opens downward and discharges the game ball B downward from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 is provided at the rear of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 116).

The ball discharge receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed to have a depth in the front-rear direction of about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving part 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end side is lower.

The out-ball rectifying section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a so that the left end side becomes lower toward the lower side of the ball discharge receiving section 663a. In addition, the depth of the out-ball rectifying section 663b in the front-rear direction becomes narrower as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, it is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. It has depth. In addition, the vertical height of the part of the out-ball rectifying part 663b that is on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving part 663a decreases as it goes downstream (leftward), and near the downstream end, the part of the ball discharge receiving part 663a that is on the left side of the right end of the ball discharge receiving part 663a becomes lower in vertical height. The height is slightly larger than the diameter. Thereby, the game balls B can be aligned in a line in the out ball rectifying section 663b.

The lower guide part 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying part 663b which is below the ball discharge receiving part 663a, and the front wall is on the same plane as the rear wall (partition wall part) in the middle of the vertical direction. It is bent backwards in a small crank-like curve. As a result, the downstream end (out-ball discharge port 663d) of the lower guide portion 663c is located further back than the front surface of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. An out sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guide portion 663c. The downward guide portion 663c is curved so that the portion bent in a crank shape does not have a horizontally extending portion. Even if the game ball B comes into contact with the part where the game ball B is located, it will not jump upward toward the out sensor 664 side, and it is possible to prevent one game ball B from being detected twice by the out sensor 664.

The out sensor 664 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life because the game ball B frequently passes through.

The ball ejection guiding portion 627 is provided to the left of the ball ejection receiving portion 663a in the out ball passage 663. The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opening toward the left at the upper part of the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a downstream side bent rearward and extending to the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. , is connected to the upstream end of the bulb removal passage 665 (see FIG. 115(a), etc.).

The bulb discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall 662a in the rear base 662. The bulb removal passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state that is open to the rear, and the rear end side is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of the ball discharge passage 665 is located approximately one outer diameter of the game ball B ahead of the rear end of the rear base 662. That is, a gap larger than one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The upstream end (left end) of this ball ejection passage 665 is connected to the downstream end of the ball ejection guiding part 627, and has the same slope as the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and is lower than the ball ejection receiving part 663a. A horizontal guide portion 665a extending to the right, a vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide portion 665a to the lower surface of the rear base 662, and a downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide portion 665b. ) and a bulb removal outlet 665c that opens downward. The ball outlet 665c is provided slightly rearward of the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see FIG. 116).

Further, the ball discharge passage 665 has a plurality of protrusions 665d that alternately protrude inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide portion 665b. The ball discharge passage 665 allows the game balls B flowing through the vertical guide portion 665b extending vertically downward to alternately contact the plurality of protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game balls B to flow down in a zigzag pattern. An increase in speed can be suppressed, and the speed of the game ball B discharged downward from the ball ejection outlet 665c can be suppressed.

This ball ejecting passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by the horizontal guide part 665a and the vertical guide part 665b, so when the ball ejecting lever 593 is operated to eject the game ball B from the ball tank 552. , many game balls B can be smoothly guided and ejected.

According to the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a and ejected from the game board 5 is received by the ball ejection receiving part 663a of the out ball passage 663, and then the out sensor 664 The system detects this and discharges it to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to eject (take out) the game balls B from inside the ball tank 552, etc., operate the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 and move the game balls B ejected to the ball removal path 580b side to the out ball path 663. The ball is discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through a ball removal guiding section 627 and a ball removal passage 665, which are separate and independent from the ball removal guide section 627 and ball removal passage 665. As a result, only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so only the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected accurately. can be counted. Therefore, the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 are used to accurately determine the number of game balls B. The pachinko machine 1 can calculate the payout rate (ball payout rate).

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the number of game balls B hit in the game area 5a, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the normal winning hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, The number of game balls B received in the winning holes such as the big winning hole 2005, the accessory winning hole 2006, etc. and ejected from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that are received into the winning hole after being hit into the gaming area 5a. This is the sum of the number of game balls B that were received into the out port 1008 and ejected from the game board 5 without any problem, and the number of game balls B that were hit into the game area 5a (number of fired balls). That's true.

Note that the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes depending on the gaming status, so the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) It is calculated as follows: number ÷ number of out pitches within a predetermined period = payout rate within a predetermined period.

Further, according to this embodiment, the board unit 620A of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is removably attached is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 circulate, and The game ball B circulating in the passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, and since the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, an "out ball" on the game board 5 is detected. There is no need to provide the out ball detection unit 3030, and the configuration of the game board 5 can be simplified and costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, there is a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B between the rear end of the ball ejection passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. As a result, the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are moved away from the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, etc., and the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665 are connected to A pachinko machine 1 in which the influence of electrical noise caused by static electricity, induced current, etc. generated by the circulation of game balls B on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and malfunctions due to the circulation of game balls B are reduced. It can be done.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B whose distribution speed is suppressed by the out ball rectifier 663b of the out ball passage 663, the game ball B is Since the impact applied to the out sensor 664 can be weakened, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball output rate) per predetermined time calculated from the number of safe balls per predetermined time and the number of out balls per predetermined time is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, the game As a player, he wants to pay out many game balls B, so if the displayed payout rate is large, he can immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B. This allows the player to easily select the pachinko machine 1 to play. In addition, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be visually checked by the player, if a fraudulent act that causes a large number of game balls B to be paid out occurs, the displayed payout rate will become larger than normal. The pachinko machine 1 has a high deterrent effect against cheating because other players and the staff of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can easily notice the cheating, making them hesitate to commit the cheating. It can be done.

In addition, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a position that cannot be seen from the player side, the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls may be displayed in a position that cannot be seen by the game hall staff, etc. for the same reason as above. This makes it possible to detect fraudulent activity. In addition, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate is different from the normal value, it is necessary to Since there is a possibility of a malfunction in the board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc., it is possible to respond to the malfunction at an early stage, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Furthermore, since an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow, a configuration for detecting the game balls B discharged to the game board 5 (for example, There is no need to provide an out ball detection unit 3030), and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced, and space is secured on the game board 5 for the configuration for detecting the ejected game ball B. By providing the performance device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5) can be made more enjoyable for players.

In addition, since the ball ejection passage 665 has a vertical guide portion 665b in which a plurality of protrusions 665d alternately protrude, the game ball B can circulate through the vertical guide portion 665b. Since the speed can be suppressed, damage to the inside of the ball ejection passage 665 due to the impact of the circulating game balls B, and damage to the island equipment side of the game hall that receives the game balls B ejected from the ball ejection passage 665, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, a meandering out ball rectifying part 663b is provided in the out ball passage 663, and a vertical guide part 665b from which a plurality of protrusions 665d protrude is provided in the ball ejecting passage 665. Since it is possible to suppress the flow speed of the game balls B, it is possible to reduce the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B flowing in the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection passage 665. The influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. that are present can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

In addition, since the out ball outlet 663d and the ball outlet outlet 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball outlet outlet passage 665 are opened downward, the out ball outlet passage 663 and the ball outlet outlet passage 665 are designed to open downward. Since the game balls B are ejected downward from the pachinko machine 665, it becomes difficult for the game balls B to collide with other pachinko machines or walls installed behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, and other pachinko machines Damage to machines, walls, etc. can be avoided. In addition, since the game balls B are discharged downward from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball removal passage 665, the discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, and on the island equipment side, the game balls B are discharged from the out-ball passage 663 and the ball extraction passage 665. The discharged game balls B can be easily collected.

Furthermore, since the base unit 660 in which the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 are formed is provided below the part of the main body frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 can be By simply ejecting the game ball B hit into the region 5a downward, it becomes possible to deliver it to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. , it is possible to have a simple (easy) configuration, and the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In addition, since the ball removal outlet 665c of the ball removal passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the ball removal outlet 665c and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball outlet passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2. Since the ejected game balls B can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2, the game balls B flowing vigorously through the ball ejection passage 665 and the out ball passage 663 can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2. Damage to the outer frame 2 can be avoided, and a pachinko machine 1 that is not easily damaged can be provided.

In addition, since the ball extraction outlet 665c of the ball extraction passage 665 and the out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 are provided at the rear of the outer frame 2, the part where the game balls B are collected on the island equipment side ( There is no need to advance the out-receiving part, bucket, etc.) to a position overlapping the outer frame 2, and the effort of installing the Pachinko machine 1 and the effort of moving the Pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball ejection in the substrate unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the above board unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117, 118, and the like. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge port of the out ball passage. FIG. 118(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and FIG. 118(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out sensor is removed in FIG. 118(a).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, a guide piece 667 for guiding the game ball B to the rear side is provided at the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. To be more specific, in this embodiment, near the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663, there is a merging portion 663e that merges with the ball-extraction discharge passage 665. The merging portion 663e opens downward, and the opening end thereof serves as an out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward for a short distance from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment of FIG. 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, so that the discharge direction of the game ball B can be directed diagonally backward and downward. . As a result, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of a game hall, the parts for collecting game balls B (out receiving part, bucket, etc.), and the game balls B can be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

Further, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, since the direction of ejection of the game ball B can be directed diagonally rearward and downward by the guide piece 667, the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663 can be connected to the main body frame 4. Even if it is provided at a position close to directly below the game area 5a of the attached game board 5 (a position close to the front side within the island facility), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like within the island facility. Therefore, since it is possible to arrange the out ball passage 663 (out ball outlet 663d) as far forward as possible, it is possible to widen the space behind the out ball passage 663 in the main body frame 4. Therefore, by moving the out ball passage 663 away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., electrical noise due to static electricity, induced current, etc. generated when many game balls B flow through the out ball passage 663 can be avoided. The influence on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with fewer malfunctions due to the distribution of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, an out sensor 664 can be attached to and removed from below at the out ball outlet 663d in the out ball passage 663. In this embodiment, a sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out bulb passage 663 and is open downward to accommodate the out sensor 664, and an out sensor accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f. A sensor cover 668 that restricts downward movement of the sensor 664 is provided.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guide portion 663c connected to the downstream end of the out bulb rectifying portion 663b in the out bulb passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment as well, the base unit 660 is formed of a transparent member, and the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be visually recognized from above or below the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 includes a main body part 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose proximal end side is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, and a sensor cover 668 for detecting the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body part 668a. A through hole 668b through which the game ball B can pass through at a portion that coincides with the hole, and a locking claw portion 668c that is provided on the side opposite to the base end side of the main body portion 668a and is elastically deformable. have.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached at its proximal end to a portion of the base unit 660 on the outside of the sensor attachment recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectifying section 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is locked to a locking portion 663g provided on the outside of the out-ball rectifying portion 663b with respect to the sensor mounting recess 663f in the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is configured such that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward with the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 matches the out ball passage 663. By rotating and closing the locking claw portion 668c to lock the locking portion 663g, the main body portion 668a comes into contact with the lower surface of the out sensor 664, restricts the downward movement of the out sensor 664, and closes the locking claw portion 668c. A sensor 664 can be attached to the base unit 660 (see FIG. 118(a)). In this state, the through hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664, and after the game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 is detected by the out sensor 664, the through hole 668b is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664. through which it is discharged downward. The through hole 668b of this sensor cover 668 also serves as an out ball outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663.

When replacing (removing) the out sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release the locking from the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating and opening the sensor cover 668 around the base end side of the main body part 668a so that the locking claw part 668c moves downward, the main body part 668a of the sensor cover 668 is exposed to the bottom surface of the sensor 664. The out sensor 664 can be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see FIG. 118(b)).

As shown in FIG. 118(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated and opened, the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the object that may be touched (for example, the outer frame 2 A certain amount of clearance is created between the upper end surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the upper end of the connecting cylinder part 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43, etc.), or the lower end of the main body frame 4. ing. As a result, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with an object that may come into contact with it, thereby preventing damage to the sensor cover 668. be able to.

According to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the out sensor 664 detects all the game balls B hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so many game balls B are distributed. However, as mentioned above, by opening the sensor cover 668, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below, making it easy to replace the out sensor 664. can.

Further, according to this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with objects that may be touched, such as the outer frame 2. Therefore, damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented. Specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, many game balls B come in contact with the out sensor 664. There is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to the vibration caused by the sensor cover 668, and the sensor cover 668 may open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during a game and the out sensor 664 falls off, the out sensor 664 will detect the game ball B even though the game ball B has been hit into the gaming area 5a. Therefore, the main control board 1310 etc. will notify the occurrence of an abnormality. In response to this notification of the occurrence of an abnormality, the staff of the game hall or the like will open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in order to confirm the abnormality. Since there is a gap between the sensor cover 668 and the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, the main body frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with the objects that may come into contact with the sensor cover 668, and damage to the sensor cover 668 can be prevented.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 118, the proximal end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at an outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out bulb rectifying portion 663b. In addition, since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly viewed from below. Therefore, when game balls B are jammed in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be visually confirmed from the outside, making it possible to identify at a glance the location where the game balls B are jammed. This allows the game ball B to be freed from clogging at an early stage.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2. Therefore, this pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down to stand upright, and the out sensor 664 can be replaced by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and the out ball passage 663 can be replaced from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660. It is possible to easily perform confirmation work inside the bulb removal passage 665, etc.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, the out sensor 664 can be easily replaced, so a game that has been interrupted due to the out sensor 664 being damaged can be restarted quickly. In addition, it is possible to alleviate the frustration of players due to interruptions in play and suppress a decline in interest, and it is also possible to suppress a decline in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall side. can.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 does not come away from the base unit 660. Since the sensor cover 668 is in a suspended state and does not fall off, it is possible to avoid losing the sensor cover 668.

In addition, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the outer part of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B circulate, around the axis in the front and back direction (horizontal direction). Since the distribution of the downward force applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the circulation of game balls B is limited to the side rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one side It is relatively small on the locking claw 668c side (the other end side) that is locked on the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660. Therefore, even if a downward force is applied to the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to many game balls B passing through the out sensor 664, the force is applied to the sensor cover 668 at one end where it is rotatably attached. Since the locking claw portion 668c on the other end side is difficult to release, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the sensor cover 668 opens and the out sensor 664 falls off. .

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 119 to 129. FIG. 119 is a front view of a game board in which the center accessory and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 120 is a perspective view of the game board in FIG. 119 seen from the front right, FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the game board shown in FIG. 119 seen from the front left, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. . FIG. 123 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. FIG. 124 is a front view of the game board with the center accessory etc. made transparent. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the game board exploded into its main components and viewed from the back. 127 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 119, and FIG. 128 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 119. FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board in which the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle nails.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when the player operates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001 that grants a predetermined benefit to the player (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) upon acceptance or passage of game balls B, a first starting opening 2002, and a regular prize opening. An opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and an accessory winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game balls B are placed in a general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole 2004, a big winning hole 2005, a prize winning hole 2006, etc. in the gaming area 5a. This is for playing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 195 and the distribution of the game balls B within the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted.

The game board 5 includes a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 129, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100. The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 127, FIG. 166, etc.) for controlling the contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 placed at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a performance display device 1600 placed on the rear side of the game panel 1100. A panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. It also has the following.

A production display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the production display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached below the effect display device 1600 on the rear surface of the back unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 includes a main control board 1310, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a big winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor 2513. , first V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first swing Minute solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution drive motor 2560, third distribution left drive motor 2561, third distribution right drive motor 2562, third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563, third distribution It is used to relay connections with the distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, the magnetic sensor 2010, the vibration sensor 3003, the out sensor 664, and the like.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting opening 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the gaming area 5a, and a normal winning opening 2003 that is always open so that game balls B can be accepted at further different positions within the gaming area 5a. , a second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning port 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to 2004, and the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening. Receiving the game ball B into the opening 2004 makes it possible to accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, and the game ball B is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. A first V winning hole 2007 and a second V winning hole 2008 that give an opportunity to accept the game balls B that have been received, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 that detect magnetic fields acting illegally within the gaming area 5a. It is equipped with

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is installed slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and an attacker which is attached to the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a normal winning port 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning port 2005. The unit 2400 is installed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a prize opening 2008 is provided.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning opening 2003, and a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the second starting opening 2004. It is equipped with a big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005. The center accessory 2500 includes an accessory winning hole sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006, and a first V winning hole that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning hole 2007. It includes a sensor 2514 and a first loss port sensor 2516 that detects the game ball B received in the first loss port 2535.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back of the game panel 1100 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the back wall. A locking mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 is provided. In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 provided in the starting hole unit 2100. A first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is provided (see FIG. 166).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a light guide plate production unit 3100 installed in the back box 3010, and a light guide plate production unit 3100 that is attached to the front lower part of the light guide plate production unit 3100. A back lower ball discharge unit 3150 that receives the game balls B and discharges them downward, and a first sorting device 2530 and a second sorting device attached to the front right corner of the light guide plate production unit 3100 and the center accessory 2500. It includes a back right ball ejection unit 3170 that receives the game ball B from the device 2540 and ejects it downward.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 extends along both left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The back front lower left effect unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, the back front lower right effect unit 3400 attached to the lower right side of the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the upper back decoration of the back front effect unit 3200. A sub-state display 3500 is provided near the right end of the display 3211 so as to be visible at all times.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 130. FIG. 130(a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 130(b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel seen from the back.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer circumference of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from a lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, passes the upper end of the center in the left-right direction as seen from the front, and extends to the diagonally upper right corner; The inner rail 1002 is arranged inside the front component 1000 along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left side when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. An out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and slopes downwardly toward the rear.

The front component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that is sloped linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 in front view to near the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher; The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the bottom of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and has an upper part curved inward to the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. A stopper part 1006 is connected to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with the stopper part 1006.

The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front component 1000 and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member can be rotated only between an open position in which the space between the backflow prevention member and the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the circumferential direction, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position. 1007.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center of the frame in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component 1000 is located on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower end extending substantially perpendicularly, on the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and on the outside of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the gaming area 5a from the lower front side of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1103 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it passes through the notch 1010 and the notch 1103 to open the lower full ball path unit 610. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit attachment part 1011 formed at the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp pasting part 1012 formed at the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 130 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see FIG. 129, etc.).

The game panel 1100 is made of a wood board such as plywood with a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape that is approximately the same as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and at a position corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the front component 1000. In addition, a plurality of openings 1102 are formed in the game panel 1100, passing through the front and back to attach the front unit 2000.

The game panel 1100 also includes a cutout 1103 cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1103 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1103. The front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the lower full bulb path unit 610 face forward. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, a decorative sheet with patterns and decorations in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is pasted on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box with an open top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. When assembled to the game board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 from below and from the rear side, and also covers the main control unit 1300 on the back side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the ejecting part 1201 is located directly above the ejecting ball receiving part 628 of the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received, and the bottom The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the lower part to the discharge ball receiving part 628 or the out-ball passage 663 (see FIG. 115). The game balls B discharged to the out ball path 663 are detected (counted) one by one by an out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 166) that controls the game content and payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 (see FIG. 123) that can set the gaming performance, A main control board box 1320 that accommodates a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200 is provided. Note that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 may be integrated into one printed circuit board.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and base body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, it is possible to check the state of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 (whether or not any unauthorized modification has been made). or whether a fraudulent IC is mounted) can be confirmed from outside the main control board box 1320. Moreover, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and traces of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, thereby increasing deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to an interface board 635, a peripheral control board 1510, and a setting change board 1311. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a normal winning opening sensor 2401, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, and an accessory winning opening sensor. 2513, first V winning opening sensor 2514, first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2512, first Distribution solenoid 2532, second distribution solenoid 2545, third distribution drive motor 2560, third distribution left drive motor 2561, third distribution right drive motor 2562, third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563, It is connected to a strikeout left rotation detection sensor 2564, a third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, a magnetic sensor 2010, a vibration sensor 3003, an out sensor 664, and the like.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting values, a setting switch button 1311b that can select and switch the setting values, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (inter-board connection). may be electrically connected via). By making this connector connection (inter-board connection), signals from the setting key switch 1311a and signals from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The setting change board 1311 has a vertical distance between its right side and left side that is almost the same as a vertical distance between the right side and left side of the main control board 1310 , and a horizontal distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 . A center line that is shorter than the distance dimension in the direction and that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line that passes through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311. It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of its vertical distance dimension is located on the center line, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is arranged along the right side of the setting change board 1311. Along the left side of the control board 1310, the center of the vertical distance is located on the center line. A setting key switch 1311a is arranged below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and has a setting key cylinder in which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and a setting key switch 1311a has a press operation section above the center line of the setting change board 1311. A setting change permission lamp that can emit light in a single color (for example, red) is located on the center line of the setting change board 1311 and is located above and to the left of the setting key switch 1311a (bottom left of the setting switch button 1311b), where the switch button 1311b is arranged. 1311c is arranged. A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) connected in a row from the center to the right side is arranged further down, and is located near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a press operation section is disposed at.

In this embodiment, the setting key is at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port is along the vertical direction). In this case, the setting key switch 1311a is set to OFF as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion port, and the setting key can be removed from the insertion port. In this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the setting key inserted into the insertion slot, other The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so that the members of the pachinko machine (or the members of the island equipment of the game hall) and the setting key do not interfere with each other and are not damaged.

By rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON, and this setting key ON signal is set. It is input from the change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Further, by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position and performing a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to the OK key, and the signal of this OK key ON can be turned on. is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is moved so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can be returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned ON to the original position. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. can be turned off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, two completely different functions, the setting key ON function and the enter key ON function, can be realized with only the setting key switch 1311a, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. The operation of turning on the setting key and the operation of turning on the enter key can be performed together using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation part of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f are connected through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Although exposed, "gaps" are formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the press operation part of the setting changeover button 1311b, and the openings corresponding to the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, wire intrusion prevention parts are molded on the cover body for each of these openings. . Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, the cover body is molded transparent as described above. Through the cover body, it is possible to visually confirm the setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of pitches displayed by the base monitor 1310h.

In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch The wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the setting switch button 1311b should be routed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed separately, and the main control board 1310 also connects various signals from the setting key switch 1311a. (In other words, the wiring pattern in which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern in which the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern in which the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted. The wiring pattern (to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are formed so that they do not come close to each other (separated from each other), and the RAM clear switch 1310f The wiring patterns through which signals are transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other).

The setting key switch 1311a, setting switch button 1311b, and setting display 1310g will be briefly explained. First, a case in which setting values are changed will be briefly explained, and a case in which a confirmation display of the current setting values is displayed will be briefly explained. The setting key is an important key that allows you to check the current setting values in addition to changing the setting values, so only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, should possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting values, when turning on the power to the Pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame should be 4 is released, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. A "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on needs to be satisfied. In other words, the person who actually changes the settings should first check that the power is not turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then change the settings to the outer frame 2. Open the main body frame 4, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON to power on the pachinko machine 1. Note that the above-described "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include a condition that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 131Of is operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is opened. The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON, and It may be possible to change the setting value when a "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is satisfied, that is, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

A person who changes the settings should first check that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then move the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Then, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key of the key switch 1311a is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 630a in FIG. 7 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. The set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from off to on.

When a person who changes the settings of a setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to. Every time a person who changes the setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a changes the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. The value is increased by 1 from 1, and when it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, the value is increased by 1 again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When determining the setting value, the person who changes the setting value should rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, move the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key where the setting key is turned ON). Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from its rotational position to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it off. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees counterclockwise and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by the enter key. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and determined setting values in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

Note that by rotating the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, moving the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key was turned on) to the original position (in other words, the setting key When the switch 1311a is returned to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF, the ON signal of the enter key may be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this case, After displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g by pressing the push operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, the set value is determined by simply turning off the setting key switch 1311a, and then the setting key is removed from the setting key cylinder. This improves work efficiency.

The person who changes the setting value should return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the enter key was turned ON to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a was turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and turning it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and from lighting the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turning it off.

The person who changes the setting value takes out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then changes the setting value. complete.

When displaying the currently set setting values, the outer frame 2 , the main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn on the first ON. A "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by being operated. In other words, the person who actually displays the currently set setting values must first confirm that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which the power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage has occurred), and then , open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to open the first By turning on the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key is turned on.

A person who wishes to display the currently set setting values must first check that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on (the state in which power has been restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage), and then Then, insert the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a stores the current setting values (setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM. Among them, the set value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains turned off, and even if the person performing the confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b, this press operation will not work. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value completes the confirmation of the currently set setting value, the person who performs the confirmation display of the currently set setting value moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned on to the original position (that is, Turn off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a state in which setting values are displayed to a state in which they are not displayed.

The person who wants to check and display the currently set setting values removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and then sets the current setting value. Complete the confirmation display of the set values that have been set.

As mentioned above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are as follows: When the power is restored at the time of recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is moved clockwise. While it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by turning the setting key by 60 degrees and performing the first ON operation, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is as described above. 1, or after the power is restored after a power outage (momentary power outage), the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. It is necessary that the setting key is turned ON by inserting the setting key into the insertion port of the key cylinder, rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are such that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a is There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned on by inserting the setting key into the , turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and performing the first ON operation. The difference is that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires "at the time of power restoration," whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires "after power restoration."

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" refers to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, as well as the probability from when the probability changes to the normal It is possible to change the probability for determining the lottery when moving to the next time, the allocation rate to the area that is advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (degree of advantage) of being able to increase the number of game balls B that can be played is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses various tables (for example, a jackpot judgment table in which the ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, A jackpot symbol determination table that specifies the percentage of the decision value for determination, a small hit determination table that specifies the percentage of the small win decision value that indicates winning the small hit, and a percentage of the decision value for the determination of the small win symbol. It is used to select the small winning symbol determination table that will be used, the normal time transition determination table that defines the percentage of the determination value for transition from probability change to normal time, etc.), and various distribution rates that are associated with set values. Various tables (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) are selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations that are associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Note that the various tables used in various lottery decisions are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other, and the various tables used for various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values are different from each other. In some cases, the values may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the other electrical drive source. Some are set to . In addition, the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, but they may be in a smaller range than this, or they may be in a larger range. It may be something. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays setting values, but also allows the main control MPU 1310a to check the contents of its own internal RAM when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, if the power-off processing on the main control side has not completed normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or if the (This is not possible) and displays an error message to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h collects the game balls B launched into the game area 5a through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls B played is displayed. Of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a, the game balls B collected through the out port 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see FIG. 166, etc.), and this detection signal is sent via the panel relay board 1710. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a was not set from the initial position. The setting key switch 1311a' may be configured such that the setting key switch 1311a' can be rotated only within the range up to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on. In this case, move the setting key switch 1311a' counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). By turning the setting key switch 1311a' by 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it OFF, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned on as a decision key, and the signal of this decision key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. (The configuration of the setting key switch 1311a' may be referred to as "modification example (1) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the setting change board 1311 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A wire intrusion prevention part is provided on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. The structure will be molded. When the press operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

Note that the position where the enter key button is placed on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a, or may be near the setting switch button 1311b. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker printed with the name of each button at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b so that the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either one of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with an enter key button and a setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the setting switch button 1311b should be routed. They are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. In the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance from each other). In addition, when a setting key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The mode of the enter key button (which may also include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (2) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a finger is touching the ball, and a detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The signals may be branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on these detection signals, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; When it is not touched, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and/or when the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the enter key is not ON. On the other hand, when the launching of the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (aspects of the handle touch sensor (including the aspect of a single button operation sensor) ) may be referred to as "determination key modification (3)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the firing control section of the payout control board 633, which will be described later, The firing reference pulses are branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the firing timing control circuit 633b and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the firing control board 633. It may also be determined whether or not it is ON. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, while determining that the determination key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “determination key modification (4)”).

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the motion of the player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is detected. If the game board 5 is provided with a distance measurement sensor capable of detecting The signal may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and based on this detection signal, it may be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. The distance sensor detects light emitted by a light emitting part that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving section, thereby making it possible to detect the player's actions. In this case, when the detection signal from the ranging sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and when it determines that there is movement, it turns on the enter key. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON (the mode of the ranging sensor may be described as "modification of the enter key (5)") .

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as serial information. A serial output circuit capable of serial output may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and It is possible to determine which of the OFF signals is being transmitted (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be referred to as "modified example (6) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information conveying the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF is sent to the outside as a pulse signal. A pulse output circuit capable of outputting the pulse may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit was provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead of this, it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or may be provided on the payout control board 633. . For example, the pulse width of the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is set to 1 ms when the information conveys that the setting key is ON, and the pulse width is set to 3 ms when the information conveys that the enter key is ON. If the information conveys OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF (an aspect of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be referred to as "modified example (7) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and performing the first ON operation. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and this enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that it returns from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the key is turned on to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated and then turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be changed from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the enter key was turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the voltage level of the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal are The voltage level of the signal is set between the boards from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2V to 3V from zero V to 5V), and at the main control board 1310. By providing a comparator circuit and inputting the comparison result by the comparator circuit to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control MPU 1310a can turn ON/OFF the setting key ON signal, ON/OFF the enter key ON signal, and OFF signal. It is also possible to determine whether the switch is ON or OFF. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (an embodiment of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be referred to as "modified example (8) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening so that wires etc. cannot enter through the "gap" formed in the opening and modify the dispensing control board 633. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

In addition, the position where the decision key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error cancellation switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, stickers with the names of each button printed are affixed to the positions corresponding to the enter key button and the error release switch, respectively, so that the enter key button and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch (a cover is provided to cover the press operation part of either the enter key button or the error release switch). ), the color of the press operation part may be different, the external shape of the enter key button and the error release switch, or the shape of the press operation part may be adopted. It is also possible to use different types of switches, or to use other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a decision key button and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the payout control board 633 should be routed between the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch. They are formed so as not to approach each other on the control board 633 (separated from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the dispensing control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately, Also on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the enter key button and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch should be routed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). ) is formed. In addition, when a determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. (The mode of the enter key button (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as "Modified example (9) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The signal from the error release switch is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and based on this signal, it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON. Good too. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when the press operation part of the error release switch is operated based on the signal from the error release switch, When the press operation portion of the error release switch is not operated, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on (the mode of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (10) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the dispensing control board 633 has a press operation section. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the signal from the error release switch in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later, and creates a command. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that received this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. As mentioned above, the error release switch is used to release the error displayed on the error LED display, and after the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (when the various control boards are powered on). When the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which no error has occurred (after completing the interrupt processing), there is no need to operate the push operation section of the error release switch. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process to be described later, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the push operation section is being operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and notifies the payout control MPU of that fact. When the command is received, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, but the payout control MPU determines that the press operation part is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch, and receives a command to notify that fact. When this happens, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on (aspect 2 of the error release switch may be referred to as "modified example (11) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched in the payout control board 633 to be put out. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on an operation signal that is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a is input. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns the decision key ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it is determined that the enter key is not ON. Can be done. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on.

The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f. In order to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed between the opening and the corresponding opening and modifying the payout control board 633, a wire intrusion prevention section is attached to the cover body for the opening. The structure is molded into

Note that the RAM clear switch 1310f may be disposed on the payout control board 633 near an error release switch having a press operation section, which will be described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, there is a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (for pressing the press operation part) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or another type of switch that does not have a push operation part may be used as the RAM clear switch 131Of. Other types of switches that do not have a push operation part as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide part, a rotary switch with a rotary operation part, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Various types of switches can be mentioned. In addition, if the payout control board 633 is provided with a RAM clear switch 1310f and an error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for the error release switch should be routed. are formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the payout control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector of the payout control board 633 (terminals of the connector of the main control board 1310) are also formed separately. Also, on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the error release switch are also routed so that they are not close to each other ( formed at a distance). In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a must be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (The mode of the RAM clear switch (which may also include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (12) of the enter key").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned on to the initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting key switch Set key to turn 1311a OFF Turn the cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the cylinder rotation position (rotated position) to turn it OFF, then turn it counterclockwise 60 degrees again) to turn it on (2nd ON operation) By doing so, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning on the enter key, and the signal of this entering key ON is inputted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, and the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the port of the payout control unit power-on processing described later by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633. A command is created by monitoring during the processing, and the command created in the command transmission process of the processing at power-on of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command It may also be determined whether or not the enter key is turned on. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a decision key, and the main control MPU 1310a selects the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later. When the dispensing control MPU determines that the press operation part of is being operated and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON. When the dispensing control MPU determines that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated based on the operation signal and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. As a result, security can be improved depending on whether or not the enter key is turned on. ).

Further, in the embodiment described above, the output left sensor 3032 and the output right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Then, turn the switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return it to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it OFF. By turning the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees toward the other side and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to the OK key, and the signal from this OK key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The input was supposed to be input to the MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the output left sensor 3032 and the output right sensor 3033 are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033. The game balls B fired into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a, as described above. As described above, the game ball B collected through the out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a detects the case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame release switch, and the output port left sensor 3032 or the output port right sensor Based on the detection signal from 3033, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the game ball B is collected by the outlet 1008. On the other hand, if the door frame 3 is not open (that is, closed) with respect to the main body frame 4, and/or based on the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 or the outlet right sensor 3033, When the out port 1008 has not collected the game ball B, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (outlet switch This aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (14) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the output left sensor 3032 and the output right sensor 3033 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on is set. Then, turn the switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return it to its original initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then turn it OFF. By turning the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees toward the other side and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on to the OK key, and the signal from this OK key ON is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. The logic of the detection signals from the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right sensor 3033 is input to the MPU 1310a, but instead of this, the logic of the detection signals from the outlet left sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 is input to the payout control unit power supply by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, which will be described later. The main control board 1310 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the input process, sends the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later to the main control board 1310, and receives this command. The main control MPU 1310a of 1310 may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. As described above, the game balls B fired into the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 are collected by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a. The game ball B collected through the out port 1008 is detected by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033, as described above. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the game ball B is collected by the outlet 1008 based on the detection signal from the outlet left sensor 3032 or the outlet right sensor 3033 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the put-out control MPU determines that this is the case and receives a command to that effect, it can determine that the enter key is ON, while the put-out control MPU determines that the game ball B has not been collected by the out port 1008. When a command to that effect is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (outlet switch Aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (15)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the full tank detection sensor 154 and the out of bulb detection sensor 574, or the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, and is branched at the payout control board 633 and sent to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON, or may determine the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, out of ball detection sensor 574, or delivery detection sensor 591. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 monitors and creates a command in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, and the command created in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later. The command may be transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the setting key switch 1311a' (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modified example (16) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the main body frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, while the body frame 4 remains open with respect to the outer frame 2. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the main body frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in order to turn on the OK key, and after turning on the OK key, close the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. It is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 again.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. The signal of this decision key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the signal from the door frame release switch. Based on the detection signal, it can be determined that the enter key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main body frame 4, while the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main body frame 4. When this is maintained, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (when the door frame is opened). The mode of the switch (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (17) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, and after turning on the enter key, open the door frame 3 to the main frame 4. It is necessary to close the door frame 3 again, remove the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch may be referred to as "modified example (18) of enter key").

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1311 is moved from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the second ON operation. The enter key can be turned ON, and the signal of this enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON to the initial position and then turning it OFF. By inputting the signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input, while determining that the enter key is ON when an OFF signal is input. If it is not present, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on. Aspect 2 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (19)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. The signal of this enter key ON was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control board 1310 has a press operation section. A decision key button may also be provided. In this case, the press operation part of the enter key button is exposed through the opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the enter key button, and the press operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding A structure in which a wire intrusion prevention part is molded on the cover body for the opening to prevent wires from entering through the "gap" formed in the opening and modifying the main control board 1310. Become. When the press operation section of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the OK key is ON when the press operation section of the OK key button is pressed based on the detection signal from the OK key button. When the press operation is not performed, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON.

The enter key button may be placed on the main control board 1310 near the RAM clear switch 1310f. The cover body of the main control board box 1320 has a sticker with the name of each button printed at the position corresponding to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused. (Instead of this sticker, the name of each button may be molded on the cover body.) In addition, in order to avoid confusion between the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that covers the press operation section of either the enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the press operation section) is provided. ), the color of the press operation part may be different, or the external shape or press operation of the enter key button and RAM clear switch 1310f may be changed. A switch having a different shape may be used, or a switch of another type that does not have a press operation part may be used as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a press operation part as a decision key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a slide part, rotary switches with a rotary operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, etc. One example is a switch. In addition, when providing an enter key button and a RAM clear switch 1310f on the main control board 1310, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for the enter key button and the wiring pattern for the RAM clear switch 1310f should be routed. They are formed on the main control board 1310 so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, when a decision key button is provided on the main control board 1310, it is possible to rotate the setting key switch 1311a only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON. (Aspect 2 of the enter key button (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311 a') may be referred to as a "modified example (20) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a is input to the RAM clear switch. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the operation signal from 1310f. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is used when the press operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f). ), when performing a setting change that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a uses a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (RAM Be sure to clear all areas except for specific areas. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the internal RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as the enter key, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is ON when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to whether or not the enter key is turned on. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (RAM clear switch Aspect 3 (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "Modification of enter key (21)"). It should be noted that the period during which the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to the time when the power is turned on of the pachinko machine 1, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted to the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch, which will be described later, the payout control board 633 does not require an error release switch.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the normal winning slot provided on the game board 5 2003 normal winning opening sensor 2401, various sensors of various winning openings (for example, second starting opening sensor 2402, big winning opening sensor 2403, accessory winning opening sensor 2513, general winning opening sensor 3001, first starting opening sensor 3002) , the main control MPU 1310a to which detection signals from the out sensor 664 of the main body frame 4 are input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (various sensors, etc.). This aspect (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modification example (22) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value may open the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 and feed the game ball B into the normal prize opening 2003 in order to turn on the enter key. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the winning opening and to send the game ball B to the out opening 1008.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a controls the stepping motor, DC motor, The operation of the movable body (accessory object) is controlled by controlling the drive of an electrical drive source such as a solenoid, and the operation of the movable object (accessory object) is controlled based on the detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance measurement sensor, etc.). When determining the original position, operating position, etc., the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from this optical sensor. In this case, a setting key switch 1311a' may be used (optical function The aspect of the object sensor (which may also include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modification of enter key (23)"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value must open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to turn on the enter key, so that the optical sensor can detect the original position of the movable object (accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (accessory object) so that the position and operating position can be detected.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, and then turn it OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the figure below. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to detect illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the magnetic sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (24) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the settings needs to move the magnet from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, it is possible to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1. By applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1, the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is changed, and the game ball B is allowed to enter various prize openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5. When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor 3003 that detects a fraudulent act of making balls, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence or absence of a fraudulent act based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003, and also detects the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. The presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on the following. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the vibration sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (25) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the pachinko machine 1 is irradiated with radio waves to control the game. A radio wave sensor is provided on the game board 5 and the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent activities in which the game balls B are fraudulently obtained by causing malfunction of various sensors of the various winning holes provided on the board 5 and various sensors provided on the payout device 580. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a may determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether the enter key is turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned on (the radio wave sensor (The mode (which may include the mode of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example (26) of the enter key"). In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn on the enter key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). Turn the setting key switch 1311a by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, then turn it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it on again) to turn the setting key switch 1311a ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead of this, the press operation section 303 of the production operation section unit 350 A detection signal from the press detection sensor 373 that detects the pressing operation of the , and a detection signal from the contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects the contact of the touch operation section 302 of the production operation section unit 350 are input to the peripheral control board 1510, The signals may be branched at the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is turned on based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON (the production operation button The aspect of the unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified example (27) of the enter key").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body, but the setting change board 1311 is separately housed. The main control board box 1320 may be housed in a body setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body which are caulked with a one-way screw or the like at the caulking portion. This caulking part is a sealing mechanism and includes a plurality of them. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body and the base body using a one-way screw or the like in the caulking part using one sealing mechanism, and then in order to open the main control board box 1320, It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. The structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to each. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like through the "gaps" formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and between the pressing operation part of the enter key button and the corresponding openings. In order to prevent the wire from entering the opening, a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body. Note that if the structure of the setting change board box is different from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above and is configured such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, A setting change board cover body opening/closing switch may be provided that can detect opening of the cover body. In this case, the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. It may be configured so that Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above (setting change board box (This aspect may be referred to as "determination key modification (28)").

Further, in the embodiment described above, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the settings of the setting key switch 1311a are A wiring pattern for transmitting the key ON signal, a wiring pattern for transmitting the enter key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting switch button 1311b. The wiring patterns for transmitting the signals from and to the terminals (main control The connections to the terminals of the connector MSCN of the board 1310 are also formed separately, and the wiring pattern (that is, the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, wiring pattern from which the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and wiring pattern from which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b. However, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal were formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). 1311a, one of the wiring patterns is transmitted via the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately. , the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately (inter-board connection), and the other connector provided on this setting change board 1311 and the main control board may be connected. It may be electrically connected to another connector provided in 1310 via a harness (a mode of routing the wiring pattern may be referred to as "determination key modification (29)").

Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode that is appropriately selected and combined from among the above-described modification examples (1) to (29) of the enter key (the mode of selection combination of the modified examples is referred to as "Modification example (30) of the enter key"). ”).

In addition, with the above-mentioned setting values, in addition to the probability for determining whether it is a jackpot or not, and the probability for determining whether it is a small hit or not, the setting value is also used for determining the lottery when transitioning from a variable probability time to a normal time. It is possible to change the probability of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player (in other words, increasing the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). The probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In this embodiment, as setting values, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 are prepared in advance, and from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) was set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset setting value. In other words, the probability of being advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) exists in advance as a plurality of setting values, such as the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, and the game specifications require setting changes, and the probability of being advantageous to the player is There are game specifications in which the probability (advantage degree) has only a single preset value and does not require any setting changes. However, if the design of the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed in accordance with such game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 Since this depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are not dependent on game specifications, that is, can be used in common without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance and there is no need to change the settings, the probability that the set value will be advantageous to the player (degree of advantage) is Therefore, it is no longer necessary to use the settings as follows, so it is necessary to change the design of the software by assigning settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 as the following contents. Can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its own built-in RAM (area excluding a specific area out of all RAM areas), multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns can be set (after clearing the RAM). This can be used as a setting value (which allows variation in the startup method of the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the setting value 1 is set to "all operations (movable object)" for the operation of the movable object (accessory object) that is the object of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and the lighting of light emitting objects such as lamps and LEDs. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1, which specifies "movement of movable objects (objects), lighting of light emitters)," is assigned, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2, which specifies "movement of movable objects (accessory objects)," is assigned as setting value 2. Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "lighting of the light emitter" is assigned as value 3, and setting value 4 is assigned as "detailed operation of the movable object (accessory) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, etc.)". Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned, which specifies "actions such as interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories), etc.", and setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned that specifies "lighting of the light emitter in units of one port (lighting of the light emitter in units of predetermined output ports (that is, for each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)", and the setting value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 that specifies "No operation" is assigned (a mode of change setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be referred to as "Modification (1) based on common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate the movable body (accessories) and light up the light emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 171) from the main control MPU 1310a, performs peripheral control according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). The board 1510 can operate the movable body (accessory object) that is to be controlled and can light up the light emitting body. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, variations can be provided in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of times from the end of symbol variation until a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for a player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" as setting value 1 is assigned, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" as setting value 3 is assigned. ” is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned which specifies “25 seconds” as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies “30 seconds” as setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 that specifies "35 seconds" as a setting value 6 is assigned. )”). Note that the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting of the time from the end of symbol variation until entering the player waiting state, variations can be given to the time from the end of symbol variation until the demonstration begins.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while waiting for the player) to be performed after the end of symbol variation. In this case, the demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that specifies "comical effect" as setting value 1 is assigned, and the demonstration effect setting pattern that specifies "comical effect, movement effect of movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, and demo production setting pattern 3 is assigned, which specifies "serious production" as setting value 3, and demo production setting pattern specifies "serial production, movement production of movable objects (accessories)" as setting value 4. 4 is assigned, demo production setting pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "historical drama style production" as setting value 5, and demo production setting pattern 5 specifies "historical drama style production, movable objects (actual objects)" as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing and setting the contents of the demonstration performance may be described as "modification example (3) based on common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can perform a demonstration with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting values included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the demonstration presentation are changed and set, variations can be given to the contents of the demonstration presentation that is performed after the variation of the symbols is completed.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows setting a plurality of default volumes adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" as setting value 2, and "volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned. Volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "Volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, Volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "Volume 5" as the setting value 5 is assigned, Volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "volume 6" as setting value 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the default volume may be described as "modification example (4) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a has a default volume set to a volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the minimum volume end by moving the volume adjustment switch in the direction of decreasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to increasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the minimum level, the volume may be muted, or the volume may be set so that the sound can be recognized when the user stops in front of the pachinko machine. Also, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 is moved to the maximum volume end after the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (moved in the opposite direction to decreasing the volume). When the volume is adjusted to the maximum volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. By changing and setting the default volume, it is possible to vary the default volume that is adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of volumes of error notification sounds in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted (that is, they are not dependent on) by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and by setting the volume to the maximum, the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound can be played in a game hall. Although it is easy for staff such as store clerks to notice this, it may be annoying to players who are playing games at other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is a need for a device that can adjust the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" as setting value 2 is assigned. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" as setting value 3 is assigned, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" as setting value 4, and " Error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" as setting value 6 is assigned (error notification volume (The mode of change setting may be described as "Modification (5) based on common hardware configuration"). The setting value ranges from setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, but at which you can recognize the error notification sound if you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set to increase toward a level at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the volume of the error notification sound (error notification volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification can be varied.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of default brightness values for light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light emitting body controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned, default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" as setting value 2, and " A default brightness setting pattern 3 that specifies "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 that specifies "brightness 4" as a setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern that specifies "brightness 5" as a setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned. be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitting body by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the default brightness, and performs lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitting body. The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a is a target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, it is possible to turn on the light emitter, blink it, change the gradation point, etc. Depending on the manner in which the contents of the default brightness are changed and set, variations can be given to the default brightness of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED.

Further, for example, it can be used as a setting value that can set a plurality of brightnesses of a light emitting body such as a lamp or an LED in error notifications such as various malfunctions, bumps, and errors. Error notification brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification brightness 1" as setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp that is the target of control by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2. The specified error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned, the error notification brightness setting pattern 3 is assigned which specifies "error notification brightness 3" as the setting value 3, and the error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 4" as the setting value 4. Brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned, error notification brightness setting pattern 5 is assigned, which specifies "error notification brightness 5" as setting value 5, and error notification brightness specifies "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" as setting value 6. Brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned (a mode of changing the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification may be described as "Modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the lamp's brightness increases from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp does not turn off, but the lamp brightness is low and allows you to recognize an error notification if you stop in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The brightness is set to be high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitter by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later to change the brightness of the light emitter in error notification, and controls lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitter. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, selects the target to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitting body, you can turn on, blink, change the gradation point, etc. of the light emitter. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitting body in error notification is changed, the brightness of the light emitting body, such as a lamp or LED, in error notification can be varied.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the common hardware configuration described above are determined when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met in the setting value confirmation display processing to be described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Although it is sometimes displayed on the setting display 1310g, it may be always displayed on the setting display 1310g from when the power is turned on to when the power is turned off to the pachinko machine 1 (the setting value display (This aspect may be referred to as "Modification (8) based on common hardware configuration").

Furthermore, any one of the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be selected as appropriate and adopted as the above-described modification of the enter key (30).

In addition, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required the setting key to be turned on. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the push operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a clears a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-on process to be described later. Clear the game except for , and then proceed with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In addition, when the above-described predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and stores data in the main control built-in RAM. The game progresses by clearing all areas except for a specific area, and then setting interrupt permission. In other words, when powering on the Pachinko machine 1 while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above are satisfied when the power is restored to the Pachinko machine 1, In either case, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. It happens. Therefore, as the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission condition, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned on by pressing the button, the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed. be).

In addition, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above apply to the outer frame 2 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or after the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage). The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. This required the setting key to be turned on. When this predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a sets and displays the current setting value in a setting value confirmation display process that is performed as a part of the main control side timer interrupt process to be described later. Display on container 1310g. Further, as described above, the RAM clear switch 1310f requires that the press operation section be pressed when powering on the pachinko machine 1, and the period during which it is pressed is limited. Therefore, as the predetermined setting value display permission conditions mentioned above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the power is restored after a power outage (instantaneous power outage), the outer frame 2 is The main body frame 4 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. In addition to the setting key being turned ON, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f does not need to be pressed (when described as "a modification of predetermined setting value display permission conditions") ). In this case, when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the set value confirmation display process as part of the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, and instead In the input process, initial settings and start-up settings for the built-in WDT are performed before the game is started, and after that, interrupt permission settings and the like are performed to proceed with the game. Note that when the predetermined modification of the set value display permission condition is met and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side timer interrupt process because the interrupt permission setting has not yet been performed. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is set to the initial state. The setting key switch 1311a is turned ON by being rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and the first ON operation is performed. The setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as input information to be described later. For this reason, the main control MPU 1310a performs a main body frame opening process to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 when a modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied and setting value confirmation display processing is performed. The detection signal from the switch and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a are read.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, it is possible to prevent When the power is restored after a momentary power outage that occurs, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key is inserted. The press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed on the premise that the setting key is turned ON by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise and performing the first ON operation. Sometimes, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process to be described later to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then performs settings such as enabling interrupts. While the game is in progress, when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on process to be described later, and then The game progresses by setting interrupt permission. By adopting this aspect, the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the setting value confirmation display process once the game starts to progress. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts playing the game by setting interrupt permission or the like, it never displays the current set value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a collects balls by the out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4 through the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned on the game board 5 in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on process to be described later. The number of game balls B collected is counted and outputted to the base monitor 1310h in the port output process of the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. to be displayed. Therefore, the current setting values displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h (this may be described as a "modified example of how to use the base monitor"). . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values set during the period from when the power is restored until the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission settings etc. In addition, when the game is started by setting interrupt permission after the power is restored, the number of game balls B collected through the out port 1008 (out ball passage 663 of the main body frame 4) is displayed. Therefore, there is no need to provide the setting display 1310g, which can contribute to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the modification (30) of the enter key described above.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value change permission condition, the above-mentioned modification of the predetermined setting value display permission condition, and the above-mentioned modification of the method of using the base monitor may be applied as appropriate. It may be selected and adopted in the above-described modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 119 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. This functional display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the gaming status (gaming situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that display the gaming status and the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning slot 2003. It is equipped with a normal symbol display device made up of two LEDs, and a normal reservation display device made up of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B into the normal winning hole 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display device consisting of eight LEDs that displays the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and A first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls B to the second starting port 2004, and a second special lottery result drawn by the reception of game balls B to the second starting port 2004. A second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special pending number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display the number of pending game balls B to be accepted into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the grand prize opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like. Equipped with a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, etc. the provided LED.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 122, 126, and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 houses a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIGS. 166 and 167) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board 1510. A peripheral control board box 1520 is provided. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 for controlling light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control section 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIGS. 166 and 167, etc.) ).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 and 126. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at approximately the center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 when the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding leftward from the left side and one right fixing piece 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. This effect display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and the back box 3010 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner circumferential surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting part 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later. Insert the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism 3020, and see the locking mechanism 3020 in rear view. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it upward.

[5-8. Overall structure of table unit]
The table unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 to 133 and the like. FIG. 131(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 131(b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 132(a) is a front perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, side upper left unit, and attacker unit in the front unit, and FIG. 132(b) is a front perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, side upper left unit in the front unit. , and a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from behind. FIG. 133(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit seen from the front, and FIG. 133(b) is a perspective view of the center accessory in the front unit seen from the back.

The table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100, and a portion of its rear end protruding into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100. There is.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (three in this case) general winning holes 2001 which are capable of accepting game balls B hit into the gaming area 5a and which are always open, and a plurality of general winning holes 2001 which are used for gaming. A first starting port 2002 is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a first starting port 2002 is installed at a further different position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B. a normal prize opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, which can accept the gaming ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the gaming ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, and a first starting opening 2002. Or a grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004, and the first starting opening. 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B, and the accessory prize opening 2006. It is provided with a first V winning hole 2007 and a second V winning hole 2008 through which a chance of receiving the game ball B received in the winning hole 2006 is given.

A plurality of (in this case, three) general winning holes 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction and on the left side with respect to the center in the horizontal direction in the gaming area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 located at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a. The normal winning hole 2003 is located near the right end of the gaming area 5a, lower than the center in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal winning opening 2003. The big prize opening 2005 is arranged between the second starting opening 2004 and the first starting opening 2002 at a slightly lower height than the first starting opening 2002. The accessory winning hole 2006 is arranged above the normal winning hole 2003. The first V winning hole 2007 is arranged at a height between the accessory winning hole 2006 and the normal winning hole 2003. The second V prize opening 2008 is arranged directly above the first starting opening 2002 at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a.

The front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a starting port unit 2100 on the left side when viewed from the front of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 is installed along the inner rail 1002 and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit 2300 is installed slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. , an attacker unit 2400 is attached to the right side of the starting opening unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a special winning opening 2005. They are installed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front. 2008, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 and 132. The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 is located in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, directly above the out-port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward and has a width that can accept only one game ball B.

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first starting port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the first starting port 2002 is opened upwardly, and the first starting port 2002 is opened upwardly. Located directly below the center.

The starting port unit 2100, when attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the back of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the discharge unit 3150.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 131, 132, and the like. The side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general winning holes 2001 that are open to accept game balls B at all times. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning ports 2001 on the right side are open upward, and the general winning hole 2001 on the left side is open toward the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the three general winning holes 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. .

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 131, 132, and the like. The upper left side unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes lower to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flown down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by means of the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be explained with reference mainly to FIGS. 131 and 132. The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 is located to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 141, etc.).

The outer shape of the attacker unit 2400 when viewed from the front is formed into a triangular shape in which the height from the lower side increases toward the right. In this attacker unit 2400, the normal winning opening 2003 is always open upward at the upper right corner. The second starting opening 2004 is provided at the lower left at a distance larger than one game ball B from the normal winning opening 2003, and is always open toward the front. The big prize opening 2005 is provided near the lower end of the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and can be opened and closed toward the front.

The attacker unit 2400 has a normal winning opening 2003 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball B, and a large prize opening 2005 that is approximately 3 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball B in the left and right direction. It has an opening with a width of .

The attacker unit 2400 includes a normal winning hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning hole 2003, a second starting hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second starting hole 2004, and a large It includes a big winning hole sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the winning hole 2005, and a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism (see FIG. 166, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 has a second starting port door 2411 that can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, and a normal lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal prize winning port 2003 using the second starting port door 2411. A starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes depending on the result, a large winning port door 2413 that can open and close the large winning port 2005, and a large winning port door 2413 that connects the large winning port door 2413 to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the game ball B. It includes an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by acceptance.

As shown in FIGS. 141, 142, and 145, the attacker unit 2400 is provided above the second starting port 2004 at the lower left of the normal winning port 2003, and is inclined downwardly toward the left. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 which is provided on the left side of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and which extends vertically. It is provided on the right side of the big prize opening 2005 below the second starting opening right standing wall part 2423 extending downward from the right end, the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422, It is provided with a large prize opening guide shelf 2424 which is inclined so as to become lower toward the left.

The second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 extends from a part to the right of the right end of the second starting port 2004, beyond the left end of the second starting port 2004, and extends to the center between the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 in the left-right direction. It extends to the left until nearby. This second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 prevents the game ball B from being received into the second starting port 2004 from above.

The second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 is provided to the left from the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 at an interval that allows one game ball B to pass through. The second starting port left vertical wall portion 2422 extends vertically from a position higher than the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to a position lower than the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2421 and higher than the lower end of the second starting port 2004. ing. The upper end of the second starting port left vertical wall portion 2422 is bent to the right.

The second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 extends vertically downward from the right end of the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the second starting port 2004. This second starting port right standing wall portion 2423 prevents the game ball B from being received from the right side into the second starting port 2004.

The big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the second starting opening 2004, and one game ball B is placed from the lower end of the second starting opening 2004 from a part to the left of the left end of the second starting opening 2004. It extends in the left-right direction to the left side of the second starting opening left standing wall portion 2422 and approximately the same location as the right end of the big prize opening 2005, with the left end side being lower. As shown in the figure, the right end side of the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 is curved upward, and the angle of inclination becomes steeper toward the right.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 is an attacker that opens toward the left on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 and guides the game ball B to a position lower than the winning opening 2005 below the winning opening guiding shelf 2424. A right passage 2430 is provided.

The attacker right passage 2430 is located between the first opening 2431 which is vertically long and opens toward the left above the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. A second opening 2432 that opens toward the upper left, a third opening 2433 that opens toward the top below the second starting port 2004, and a large opening below the big prize opening guiding shelf 2424. A fourth opening 2434 that is vertically long on the right side of the winning opening 2005 and opens toward the left; and a discharge opening that communicates with the lower end of the fourth opening 2434 and opens toward the left. 2435. The attacker right passage 2430 allows the game ball B to enter through the first opening 2431, the second opening 2432, the third opening 2433, and the fourth opening 2434. It is possible to release the game ball B to the outside only from the inside.

The attacker right passage 2430 is formed in the shape of a plurality of steps with the left side lowered. To be more specific, the attacker right passage 2430 extends downward from an area above the normal winning opening 2003 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, and extends to the left at a position below the normal winning opening 2003. After bending and going around below the normal winning opening 2003, and bending the second starting opening right standing wall part 2423 downward as part of the left wall under the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 It bends to the left again at a lower height than that, and bends downward below the right side of the center of the big prize opening guide shelf 2424 to extend to the lower end of the attacker unit 2400.

The attacker right passage 2430 is provided with a plurality of protrusions 2436, which protrude into the passage and extend from side to side, at intervals in the vertical direction, on the front and rear inner walls of the vertically extending portion. The plurality of protrusions 2436 are provided so that the heights are alternated on the front side and the rear side. When the game ball B comes into contact with these plurality of protrusions 2436, the game ball B can be guided downward in a zigzag pattern while suppressing an increase in the downward speed of the game ball B.

The attacker right passage 2430 is located on the right side of the big prize opening 2005 and has a plurality of protrusions 2436 provided in a vertically long portion where the fourth opening 2434 opens. It has a protrusion 2437 that further protrudes into the passageway (see FIG. 145, etc.). Due to the presence of this protrusion 2437, the game ball B in the attacker right passage 2430 can be prevented from being ejected to the outside (to the left) from the fourth opening 2434, and can also be prevented from passing through the fourth opening 2434. The game ball B can be entered into the attacker right passage 2430 from the outside. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is released from the attacker unit 2400 into the gaming area 5a without having a chance to be accepted into the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005.

In addition, since the attacker right passage 2430 has a fourth opening 2434 opened vertically and long in the part passing through the right side of the big winning opening 2005, game balls released from the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 to the left B hits the plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the big prize opening 2005 and moves the game ball B, which flows above the big winning opening 2005 and to the right of the big winning opening 2005, to the fourth It can be received by the opening 2434 and entered into the attacker right passage 2430. As described above, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is only ejected to the outside from the release port 2435 at the lower end, so it is guided to the right by the obstacle nail N above the big winning port 2005. Due to the existence of the attacker right passage 2430, the game ball B that has been played will not bounce back to the big prize opening 2005 side.

Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is in the open state, if the game ball B released from the big winning hole guiding shelf 2424 is guided to the right side of the big winning hole 2005 by the obstacle nail N, it will enter the attacker right passage 2430. There is no way to enter and be accepted into the big prize opening 2005. For this reason, even if a passage for the game ball B (in this case, the attacker right passage 2430) is provided adjacent to the grand prize opening 2005, the wall of the passage (the fourth opening 2434) faces the grand prize opening 2005. It is possible to provide a passage for the game balls B adjacent to the big winning hole 2005 while suppressing excessive acceptance of the game balls B into the big winning hole 2005 without bouncing back to the big winning hole 2005. , the pachinko machine 1 can have passages that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

The second starting port door 2411 has a plate shape extending left and right from the lower side of the second starting port 2004 to near the second starting port left vertical wall portion 2422, and is moved back and forth by the starting port solenoid 2412. The second starting port door 2411 is inclined to become lower from the left end side toward the second starting port 2004 side on the right, and is also inclined to become lower toward the rear at the second starting port 2004. are doing. This second starting port door 2411 is retracted in a normal state (closed state). Therefore, the game ball B that entered between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422 falls onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 without contacting the second starting opening door 2411. Therefore, it does not enter (accept) the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, in the normal winning state (open state), the second starting port door 2411 is moving forward, so the game ball B that has entered between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left vertical wall portion 2422 The engine contacts the second starting port door 2411, is guided toward the second starting port 2004 by the second starting port door 2411, and enters (is accepted) into the second starting port 2004. In this way, the second starting port 2004 opens and closes as the second starting port door 2411 moves back and forth. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). Let it open.

The big prize opening door 2413 has a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right directions, and is attached to be rotatable around an axis in the left and right direction with one long side as the axis. The large prize opening door 2413 can close the large prize opening 2005 that opens toward the front by keeping the short side upright using the attacker solenoid 2414, and the other long side opens forward. By rotating it so that it moves, the big prize opening 2005 can be opened and the game ball B can be received. This big winning hole door 2413 closes the big winning hole 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the big winning hole 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

In the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2003 is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and then discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. Further, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged onto the lower board holder 1200 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. Furthermore, the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting opening decoration board 2451 for illuminating the second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening decoration board 2452 for illuminating the big winning opening 2005, and an attacker right passage 2430. A table lower right decorative substrate 2453 for illumination decoration is provided (see FIG. 167). The second starting port decoration board 2451 is provided behind the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421, and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted thereon. This second starting opening decorative board 2451 changes the light emitting mode when a "normal win" is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2003, and draws the player's attention to the second starting opening 2004. I try to attract them.

The grand prize opening decoration board 2452 is provided behind the grand prize opening 2005, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted thereon. The big winning hole decoration board 2452 emits light to decorate the big winning hole 2005 when the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern in a "jackpot game" or the like, so that game balls accepted into the big winning hole 2005 can be Makes B easier to see. The table lower right decorative board 2453 is provided below the second starting opening 2004 and to the right of the big winning opening 2005, behind the attacker right passage 2430, and has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted thereon.

This attacker unit 2400 is installed on the front side of the game panel 1100, and the normal winning opening 2003 is located below the two exits of the guide passage group 2520 on the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, which will be described later, and the first starting opening 2002 ( It is located at a higher height than the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500, and the second starting port 2004 is located at the lower left of the normal prize opening 2003 and the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500. It is located at a slightly lower height than the strikeout table 2554, and the big prize opening 2005 is located below the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. In addition, when attached to the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in the areas above the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004 (second starting opening upper guidance shelf 2421), and the big winning opening 2005. It is set up.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 140 and the like. FIG. 134 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the center accessory and the opening of the game panel. FIG. 135(a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the center accessory, the game panel board, and the back left decoration of the back unit, and FIG. 135(b) is a front view of FIG. 135(a). FIG. 136(a) is a plan view of the third sorting device in the center accessory, and FIG. 136(b) is a perspective view of the third sorting device in the center accessory seen from the front. Figure 137 is an exploded perspective view of the third sorting device for the center accessory seen from the top front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the third sorting device for the center accessory seen from the bottom front. It is a diagram. FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the third sorting device in the center accessory. FIG. 140(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the protrusion provided in the second V winning opening and the third losing opening in the third sorting device of the center accessory, and FIG. And it is an explanatory view showing movement of a game ball when a projection part is not provided in the third loss opening.

The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is located above the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, slightly above the center in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed into a frame shape, and includes a production display device 1600 placed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame, a light guide plate production unit 3100 provided in the back unit 3000, and a back-front production unit 3200. , the back front lower left presentation unit 3300, the back front lower right presentation unit 3400, the sub-state display 3500, etc. can be visually recognized from the front.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped center base 2501 attached to the game panel 1100. The center base 2501 includes a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 that has a substantially constant thickness and extends in a plate shape in the front-rear direction, and a plate-shaped front frame portion 2502 that extends from the rear end of the front frame portion 2502 in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction. A frame-shaped rear frame portion 2504 extends rearward in a plate shape with a substantially constant thickness from the rear surface of the flange portion 2503, and a center accessory 2500 that penetrates through the flange portion 2503. A mounting hole 2505 for mounting on the panel 1100 is provided.

The center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500 has a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2503 extending in a direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction with respect to a frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 and a rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it can be reinforced by the flange portion 2503, and the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 are hard to be distorted. Further, in the center accessory 2500, at least the center base 2501 is formed transparent.

The front frame portion 2502 is formed into a frame shape by bending a smooth surface. This front frame portion 2502 has a front frame upper right portion 2502a that is linearly inclined so as to become lower toward the right from a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the frame. . The front frame upper right part 2502a of the front frame part 2502 has an upstream space 2506 of a predetermined width through which the game balls B can flow between it and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. It is something that forms.

The rear frame portion 2504 has a plurality of striped decorations extending in the front-rear direction arranged in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction on the inner peripheral surface side. This makes it difficult to see the opposite side through the rear frame 2504, and the first LED 3222a and second LED 3222b mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 of the back front presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It can be made to appear as if it is emitting light by being irradiated with light from other sources. This rear frame portion 2504 is formed along the inner periphery of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100, the inner periphery of the opening 1102 faces the player. It can be made difficult to see from the front.

The center base 2501 is inserted into the large opening 1102 at the center of the game panel 1100 from the front by inserting the rear frame part 2504 into the mounting hole with the rear surface of the flange part 2503 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100. It is attached to the game panel 1100 by machine screws screwed into the game panel 1100 through 2505. When the center base 2501 (center accessory 2500) is attached to the game panel 1100, the front frame portion 2502 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a However, it is not possible to enter the frame.

Furthermore, when the center base 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100, the rear frame portion 2504 is positioned to cover the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100. The plurality of striped decorations formed on the inner peripheral surface of the rear frame portion 2504 make the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 difficult to see from the player side (front).

At the frame-shaped left side portion of the center accessory 2500 (center base 2501), as shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, a flange portion 2503 extends inside the front frame portion 2502. Further, the inner surface of the front frame portion 2502 generally coincides with the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and a portion thereof is located further outward than the opening 1102. . An attachment hole 2505 for attachment to the game panel 1100 is provided in a flange portion 2503 of the front frame portion 2502 located outside the opening 1102.

In other words, in the frame-shaped left side part of the center accessory 2500, a part of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 protrudes inward to a greater extent than the front frame part 2502, and in this part, the game A center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel 1100.

As a result, at the left side of the frame in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the flange portion 2503 extends inside the front frame portion 2502, and nothing extends outward, so that the front frame portion It becomes possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close to 2502 as possible. Therefore, the area in which the game balls B substantially circulate within the gaming area 5a can be made up to the position in contact with the front frame portion 2502, making the distribution area of the game balls B larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, since the flange portion 2503 extends in a direction perpendicular to the front frame portion 2502 and the rear frame portion 2504 extending in the front-rear direction, the flange portion 2503 2502 and the rear frame part 2504, that is, the entire center accessory 2500, can be reinforced, and by attaching the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 via the flange part 2503, the front frame part 2502 and the rear frame part 2504 can be reinforced. Strength can be further improved. Since the portion of the flange portion 2503 that extends inward of the front frame portion 2502 is also attached to the game panel 1100 via the attachment hole 2505, the game ball B in the game area 5a can be attached to the front frame portion. Even if the flange portion 2503 of 2502 comes into contact with a portion extending inward, the strength of the front frame portion 2502 can be maintained by attaching it to the game panel 1100 through the flange portion 2503 and the attachment hole 2505, and the front frame portion 2502 can maintain its strength. Deformation and damage to the frame portion 2502 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the strength and rigidity of the front frame part 2502 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by the flange part 2503, when the game ball B comes into contact with the front frame part 2502, the front frame part 2502 is elastically deformed and becomes an elastic body. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being bounced like a ball (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from making a strange movement different from the conventional one due to contact with the front frame part 2502, and causing discomfort to the player. It is possible to prevent them from being put away and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the front frame portion 2502, the front frame portion 2502 of the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500 Even if the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 divided by is enlarged, the actual circulation area of the game balls B will not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, by enlarging the frame of the center accessory 2500 while suppressing the distribution area in which the game balls B circulate within the gaming area 5a from becoming substantially smaller, the performance display provided at the rear can be seen through the frame. The effect image of the device 1600 and the first pattern 3110, second pattern 3120, etc. of the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 can be made more visible, and the movement of the game ball B within the game area 5a can be made more visible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the user to enjoy both the above and various effects visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500.

Furthermore, in the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500, as mentioned above, the strength of the front frame part 2502 and the rear frame part 2504 can be increased by the flange part 2503, so the center base 2501 is molded with resin and removed from the mold. It is possible to prevent the molded product from deforming during extraction.

In the above embodiment, the rear frame portion 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is decorated with light emitted from the LED mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. Although the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 is made difficult to see, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, between the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 and the rear frame 2504 of the center accessory 2500, a surface facing the center of the opening 1102 along the inner circumference of the opening 1102. A decorative substrate for an opening on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted may be provided. As a result, the same effects as described above can be achieved, and the inner circumferential surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 can also be hidden by the opening decorative substrate, thereby improving the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a. Can be done. In this case, by making the surface of the decorative board for the opening white, it is possible to make the decorative board for the opening itself less noticeable, and also to decorate the rear frame 2504 with brighter light when the LED is emitted. Can be done. Alternatively, the surface of the decorative substrate for the opening may be colored in a predetermined color that matches the concept of the game board 5, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. Further, a decorative substrate for the opening may be provided all around the opening 1102, and the center accessory 2500 may be made to emit light in a frame shape (ring shape), or it may be used for "right-handed" or "left-handed". By causing the light to circulate in a predetermined direction as if to encourage the player, it is possible to present a variety of light-emitting effects to the players and entertain them.

Moreover, the center accessory 2500 is provided at the upper right corner of the center base 2501, and includes a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game balls B can circulate. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game ball B above the attacker unit 2400.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the middle of one of the guide passage groups 2520, and the first special prize is drawn by lottery when game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the game ball B accepted in the game ball B can be placed in the storage section 2531a side (V prize side) and the A first sorting device 2530 that sorts the game balls B (distributed to the V winning side) accommodated in the storage section 2531a by the first sorting device 2530 to any one of the losing ports 2535, and a first V winning hole. A second sorting device 2540 distributes the game balls B distributed to the second losing hole 2543 by the second sorting device 2540 to either the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2007 and the second losing hole 2543. A third sorting device 2550 that sorts to any of the losing ports 2555 is provided.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes an accessory prize opening door 2511 that can open and close the accessory prize opening 2006, and a prize winning opening door 2511 that allows the reception of the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. A prize winning hole solenoid 2512 that opens and closes according to the first special lottery result or second special lottery result drawn by the prize winning hole sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B accepted in the prize winning hole 2006. , a first V winning hole sensor 2514 that detects the game balls B distributed by the second sorting device 2540 and accepted into the first V winning hole 2007, and a second V winning hole sensor 2514 that detects the game balls B distributed by the second sorting device 2540 and accepted into the first V winning hole 2007; A second V winning hole sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B accepted into the opening 2008 and a first losing hole that detects the game ball B that has been sorted by the first sorting device 2530 and accepted into the first losing hole 2535. A sensor 2516 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 143(a)), a second losing port sensor 2517 that detects the game balls B sorted by the second sorting device 2540 and accepted into the second losing port 2543, It is provided with a third losing hole sensor 2518 that detects the game balls B sorted by the strikeout sorting device 2550 and received in the third losing hole 2555.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIGS. , and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. The guide passage group 2520 (the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522) is formed of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends vertically and briefly downward from the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 and then bends at right angles to the right. When it hits the right rail 1005, it bends downward and connects to the right rail 1005. It extends to the left, bends to the left at around 3/4 of the height from the bottom of the game area 5a, and extends to the left at a gentle angle, lowering the game area from the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. It bends downward at a position to the left of one ball B and extends to the height of the center of the gaming area 5a, then bends to the right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward so that the exit is downward. It is formed in an open shape. The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The accessory prize opening 2006 is provided in a part extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521, extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the part in the left and right direction, and opens upward. ing. The accessory prize opening door 2511 is formed into a plate shape that extends from front to back and left and right so that the left end is lower, and the accessory prize opening 2006 opens upward by moving back and forth. It can be opened and closed. The accessory prize opening door 2511 can close the accessory prize opening 2006 by moving forward, and in the state where the accessory prize opening 2006 is closed, the part extending to the left in the first guide passage 2521 By forming the bottom surface of the guide passage 2521, the game balls B flowing from the upstream side can be guided to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The accessory prize opening door 2511 opens the accessory prize opening 2006 by moving backward by the drive of the accessory prize winning opening solenoid 2512, and transfers the game ball B that has been distributed through the first guide passage 2521 to the accessory prize winning opening 2006. can be accepted. This prize winning port door 2511 closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning port solenoid 2512 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning port solenoid 2512 is ON (when energized). The prize opening 2006 is opened.

The second guide passage 2522 has an entrance opening upward at a position spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 on the right end side of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, bends backward at a position lower than the height of the part where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right, and then A portion bent downward on the rear side of the panel 1100 and aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction, and extending downward on the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the first guide passage 2521. It extends downward so that the left and right directions are substantially aligned, bends to the right in a crank shape at the height of the center of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and After bending forward at a portion lower than the portion extending toward the direction, the portion extends to the lower right side of the first guide passage 2521 with the front-rear direction being on the same plane as the first guide passage 2521. It is bent to the right so as to extend along the lower side of the part, and then bent downward so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, so that the outlet is formed in a shape that opens downward. ing.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are located in a part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends vertically on the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006, and are lined up in the front-rear direction with each other, so that they appear to overlap from the front. It has a section 2520a. In this important part 2520a, since both the game balls B circulating through the first guide passage 2521 and the game balls B circulating through the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly seen from the front, It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine in which passage the game balls B circulating through the weighted section 2520a are circulating.

In the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted 90 degrees around the vertical axis on the upper side of the weighted part 2520a, and on the lower side of the weighted part 2520a, It is twisted 90 degrees in the opposite direction to the upper side around the vertical axis. The respective exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 open downward above the normal winning opening 2003 in the attacker unit 2400.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are each provided with a plurality of protrusions 2520b spaced apart in the direction of flow of the game balls B, and when the game balls B come into contact with the protrusions 2520b, the flow speed increases. (See FIG. 124).

The first sorting device 2530 is provided at a height between the accessory prize opening 2006 and a portion extending to the right on the lower side of the first guide passage 2521. (front surface of the panel 1100).

The first sorting device 2530 has a accommodating portion 2531a that can accommodate only one game ball B on its outer circumferential surface, and includes a sorting rotary body 2531 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a sorting rotary body 2531 that can accommodate only one game ball B. A first distribution solenoid 2532 (see FIG. 166, etc.) for rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 between a state in which the accommodation portion 2531a of A cylindrical peripheral wall part 2533 that covers the outer periphery of the distribution rotary body 2531 and the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 are shaken by penetrating the upper part of the distribution rotary body 2531 in the peripheral wall part 2533. A first distribution guide path 2534 that guides to the upper outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotor 2531 and a lower part of the first distribution guide path 2534 open toward the rear, and are connected to the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531. The first losing port 2535 into which the game balls B that were not accommodated enter, and the right side portion of the distributing rotary body 2531 in the peripheral wall portion 2533 through which the game balls B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distributing rotary body 2531 circulate. a first hit passage 2536 that extends to the right through the first hit passage 2536, and a first loss opening sensor 2516 that detects the game ball B that has entered the first loss opening 2535 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 143(a)). , is equipped with.

The distribution rotary body 2531 is formed into a truncated cone shape with an outer circumferential surface narrowing toward the rear. The right end side of the first hit passage 2536 bends backward, then bends downward, and communicates with the second sorting device 2540 side.

In the first distribution device 2530, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is OFF (non-energized), the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 faces to the right. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guiding path 2534 and comes into contact with the upper part of the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotary body 2531, the outer circumference of the distribution rotation body 2531 Since the surface is formed in the shape of a truncated cone that narrows backward, the game ball B is guided backward by the slope of the outer circumferential surface and enters the first losing port 2535.

On the other hand, when the first distribution solenoid 2532 is ON (energized), the distribution rotary body 2531 rotates counterclockwise, and the housing portion 2531a faces upward (see FIG. 143(a)). reference). In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 passes through the first distribution guide path 2534, only one game ball B is stored in the storage section 2531a. When the game ball B is further guided by the first distribution guide path 2534 from the accessory prize opening 2006 side while the game ball B is stored in the housing part 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531, the game ball After B comes into contact with the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a, it enters the first loss opening 2535 at the rear. The game ball B that has entered the first loss port 2535 is delivered to the back right ball ejection unit 3170 of the back unit 3000, and then is ejected onto the board holder 1200.

When the first distribution solenoid 2532 rotates the distribution rotary body 2531 in the clockwise direction while the game ball B is accommodated in the accommodation section 2531a, and the accommodation section 2531a faces to the right, the accommodation section The game ball B accommodated in 2531a rolls from the storage portion 2531a toward the first hit passage 2536 on the right side, and flows through the first hit passage 2536. The game balls B that have passed through the first hit path 2536 are sent to the next second sorting device 2540.

In this way, in the first sorting device 2530, the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is distributed to either the second sorting device 2540 side (accommodating section 2531a side) or the first losing hole 2535 side. It can be divided into two categories.

As shown in FIGS. 129 and 141, the second sorting device 2540 is provided below the first sorting device 2530 and at the rear near the exit of the guide passage group 2520. The second sorting device 2540 is provided at the rear of the first sorting guide path 2534, first atari passage 2536, etc. of the first sorting device 2530.

As shown in FIG. 143, the second sorting device 2540 distributes the game balls B that have been accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the first atari passage 2536 side. A second sorting guideway 2541 extending vertically, a first V prize opening 2007 opening at the right side of the lower part of the second sorting guideway 2541, and a first V winning opening 2007 extending to the right from the first V winning mouth 2007. a first V winning passage 2542 that extends downward after the opening, and a first V winning opening sensor that is provided within the first V winning passage 2542 and detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. 2514.

Further, the second sorting device 2540 is provided with a second losing port 2543 that opens upward at the lower end of the second sorting guideway 2541, and is provided above the second losing port 2543. A distribution door 2544 that can open and close the loss port 2543, a second distribution solenoid 2545 that moves the distribution door 2544 forward and backward to open and close the second loss port 2543, and a second distribution solenoid 2545 that extends to the left from the second loss port 2543. A second losing passage 2546 that bends downward later; a second losing hole sensor 2517 that is provided at the downstream end of the second losing passage 2546 and detects the game ball B received in the second losing hole 2543; It is equipped with The distribution door 2544 has a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward, and is inclined so that the right side is lower.

In the second sorting device 2540, when the second sorting solenoid 2545 is OFF (non-energized), the sorting door 2544 is retracted and the second loss port 2543 is opened upward. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 side flows down the second sorting guide path 2541, it enters the second losing port 2543, passes through the second losing path 2546, and enters the second losing path 2546. It is sent to the strikeout separator 2550 side.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2545 is ON (energized), the distribution door 2544 is moving forward above the second loss port 2543, and the second loss port 2543 is closed by the distribution door 2544 and the game is played. Ball B cannot be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 side flows down the second sorting guideway 2541, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544, and then the ball B comes into contact with the upper surface of the sorting door 2544. It is guided to the right by the inclination and enters (is accepted) into the first V winning hole 2007. Then, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning hole 2007 flows through the first V winning path 2542 and is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514. is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the.

When the game ball B from the first sorting device 2530 is received by the first V winning hole 2007 and detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514, the big winning hole 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. A “jackpot game” that opens and closes is executed. This second sorting device 2540 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent guide passage group 2520.

In this way, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B accommodated in the housing part 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 are transferred to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second losing opening. 2543 (third sorting device 2550) side.

The third sorting device 2550 is provided at the lower side within the frame of the center base 2501 of the center accessory 2500, as shown in FIG. 133 and the like. The third sorting device 2550 is in communication with the downstream end of the second losing passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540, and the third sorting device 2550 is in communication with the downstream end of the second losing passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540. A croon 2553 is provided at the left end of the distribution guideway 2551 and the third distribution guideway 2551 and releases the game ball B downward while rotating around an axis in the vertical direction. In addition, a second V prize opening 2008 penetrating downward near the front end in the center in the left-right direction is provided, and a third distribution table 2554 on which the game ball B can roll, and a third distribution table 2554 in which the game ball B can roll. Two third losing ports 2555 penetrating downward on both left and right sides of the 2-V winning port 2008, and a third sorting rotating body provided near the rear end of the center of the third sorting table 2554 in the left and right direction. 2556, and a third distribution left rotation body 2557 and a third distribution right rotation body 2558 provided near the front end of both left and right ends of the third distribution table 2554 (FIGS. 136 to 139). etc.).

Further, the third sorting device 2550 is attached to a third sorting base 2559 which is attached to the lower side of the third sorting table 2554 and attached to the center base 2501, and a third sorting base 2559 which is attached to the lower side of the third sorting base 2559. A third distribution drive motor 2560 is attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559 to rotate the third distribution rotation body 2556 and rotates the third distribution left rotation body 2557. A third distribution left drive motor 2561 for rotating the third distribution right rotary body 2558, which is attached to the lower side of the third distribution base 2559, and a third distribution right drive motor 2562 for rotating the third distribution right rotation body 2558. We are prepared. The third distribution middle drive motor 2560, the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right drive motor 2562 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (see FIG. 166). ).

The rotating shaft of the third distribution driving motor 2560 passes through the third distribution base 2559 and projects upward. The third distribution left drive motor 2561 has its rotating shaft passing through the third distribution base 2559 and protruding upward, and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 is attached to the rotating shaft. The third distribution right drive motor 2562 has its rotating shaft passing through the third distribution base 2559 and protruding upward, and the third distribution right rotating body 2558 is attached to the rotating shaft.

Further, the third sorting device 2550 is each attached to a third sorting base 2559, and includes a third sorting rotation detection sensor 2563 for detecting the rotation of the third sorting rotating body 2556; A third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and a third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 for detecting the rotation of the third distribution right rotation body 2558. and a second V winning hole sensor 2515 that detects the game ball B accepted in the second V winning hole 2008, and a third losing hole sensor 2518 that detects the gaming ball B accepted in the third losing hole 2555. It is equipped with These, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the third losing opening sensor 2518, the third distribution middle rotation detection sensor 2563, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564, and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 are panel It is connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board 1710 (see FIG. 166).

Further, the third sorting device 2550 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 2566 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the third sorting drive motor 2560 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559. and a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 2567 that meshes with the drive gear 2566 and is attached to the downwardly protruding shaft portion 2556a of the third distribution rotating body 2556. The transmission gear 2567 has a larger diameter than the drive gear 2566, and reduces the rotation speed of the third distribution drive motor 2560 to transmit the rotation to the third distribution rotation body 2556. Further, the transmission gear 2567 has a detection piece 2567a that extends outward in a flat plate shape and is detected by the third distribution rotation detection sensor 2563.

Furthermore, the third distribution device 2550 includes a left transmission gear in the form of a spur gear that is attached to the rotating shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561 between the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559. 2568, a spur gear-shaped left rotation detection gear 2569 that meshes with the left transmission gear 2568 and is rotatably attached to the third distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, and the third distribution Between the table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559, a right transmission gear 2570 in the shape of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562 meshes with the right transmission gear 2570. A clockwise rotation detection gear 2571 in the form of a spur gear is rotatably attached to the distribution table 2554 and the third distribution base 2559.

The left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. Furthermore, the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 have the same diameter and the same number of teeth. The left rotation detection gear 2569 has a larger diameter than the left transmission gear 2568 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution left drive motor 2561. This counterclockwise rotation detection gear 2569 has a detection piece 2569a that protrudes downward from the middle in the radial direction in a flat plate shape and is detected by the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564. The right rotation detection gear 2571 has a larger diameter than the right transmission gear 2570 and rotates slower than the rotation of the rotation shaft of the third distribution right drive motor 2562. This clockwise rotation detection gear 2571 has a detection piece 2571a that protrudes downward from the middle in the radial direction in a flat plate shape and is detected by the third distribution clockwise rotation detection sensor 2565.

Further, the third sorting device 2550 is provided below the third sorting rotating body 2556 between the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, and can emit light upward. Between the third sorting rotating body decoration board 2572 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, the third sorting rotating body 2556 and the second sorting body A third distribution table decoration board 2573 is provided below the part between the V winning hole 2008 and is equipped with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward.

Further, the third sorting device 2550 is attached to the front end side of the third sorting base 2559, and cooperates with the third sorting base 2559 to receive the prizes into the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. A passage forming member 2575 forming a third distribution ball discharge passage 2574 for guiding and discharging the game balls B, a third distribution medium drive motor 2560, and a third distribution left drive motor. 2561 and a lower cover 2576 attached to the lower surface of the third distribution base 2559 so as to cover the third distribution right drive motor 2562 from below, and a lower cover 2576 that covers the croon 2553 and the third distribution table 2554 from above. A transparent upper cover 2577 (see FIG. 127) is provided.

The third distribution table 2554 is transparent. The third distribution table 2554 has a bullet-shaped outer shape in a plan view, with the rear end side having a semi-circular arc shape, and the length in the front-rear direction being approximately the same length as the diameter of the semi-circular arc. The length of the third distribution table 2554 in the front-rear direction is 2.5 times the diameter of the third distribution middle rotating body 2556. In other words, the diameter of the third sorting rotating body 2556 is 0.4 times the length of the third sorting table 2554 in the front-rear direction. In addition, the diameter of the third sorting rotating body 2556 is about four times the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11 mm), and the length of the third sorting table 2554 in the front and back direction is the diameter of the game ball B. It is about 10.5 times. In addition, the center table 2554a in the third distribution table 2554 has a length (width) in the left-right direction that is approximately five times the diameter of the game ball B, and a length (depth) in the front-back direction that is the diameter of the game ball B. It is 5 to 7 times that of the previous year.

The third sorting table 2554 is provided in front of the third sorting rotating body 2556 at the center in the left-right direction, and includes a substantially rectangular central table 2554a that is inclined so that the front end side is lower, and a central table 2554a. A left table 2554b and a right table 2554c, which are provided on both left and right outer sides of the center table 2554a and are long in the front and back from a position behind the front end of the center table 2554a to a position behind the rear end of the third sorting rotating body 2556; It is provided in front of the center table 2554a, and after tilting lower to the left and right sides with the center in the left and right direction as the border, it bends backward at the left and right outer sides of the center table 2554a to form the left table 2554b and the right table. A recovery table 2554d is inclined to become lower toward 2554c, and the left and right tables 2554b and 2554c are provided one step higher on both left and right outer sides, and are inclined to be lower on the front end side and inside. It has a side table 2554e.

Further, the third distribution table 2554 surrounds a weir portion 2554f that protrudes upward from both left and right sides of the center table 2554a, the rear end sides of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, and the outside of the left and right side tables 2554e. 2554g of the peripheral wall extending upwardly higher than the diameter of the game ball B. The weir portion 2554f restricts the game balls B from coming in and out from both the left and right sides of the center table 2554a. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2554g cooperates with the upper cover 2577 to prevent the game balls B from falling off from the third distribution table 2554.

The length of the central table 2554a in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the diameter of the third distributing rotating body 2556, and the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the rear end side of the central table 2554a extends to a portion in front of the center of the third sorting rotating body 2556, and both left and right sides are bent diagonally toward the third sorting rotating body 2556. ing. The central table 2554a is only inclined in the front-rear direction and horizontal in the left-right direction. Near the front end of this central table 2554a, third losing ports 2555 are opened on both left and right sides with the second V winning port 2008 in the center in the left and right direction in between. The second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are round holes with the same diameter. In addition, the periphery of the hole of the second V winning hole 2008 is rounded and chamfered.

The front end sides of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are the same in the front-rear direction as the front ends of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, and the game ball B is smaller than the same part of the central table 2554a in the front-back direction. It is located at a height about the diameter of the In addition, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are sloped so that in the front-rear direction, the distance between their front ends and the same front-rear end as the rear end of the center table 2554a becomes lower toward the outside in the left-right direction. The rear side is approximately horizontal. Furthermore, in the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, the vicinity of the center of the third sorting rotating body 2556 in the front-rear direction is at the same height as the general surface of the third sorting rotating body 2556, and is higher than that. The rear side is higher than the third distribution middle rotating body 2556. A third distribution left rotation body 2557 and a third distribution right rotation body 2558 are provided on both left and right outer sides of the front ends of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c, respectively.

In addition, the third sorting table 2554 extends back and forth from the rear end to the vicinity of the second V prize opening 2008, at the center of the center table 2554a in the left and right direction, so that the left and right width becomes narrower toward the front. It has a bulging portion 2554h that bulges slightly upward. This bulging portion 2554h allows the rolling direction of the game ball B rolling in the center of the center table 2554a in the left-right direction to be directed outward in the left-right direction, making it difficult to enter the second V prize opening 2008. are doing.

Further, the third sorting table 2554 protrudes upward from the front end sides of the second V winning opening 2008 and the two third losing openings 2555 on the upper surface of the central table 2554a, and extends to the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a protrusion 2554i. The protrusion 2554i is formed in a triangular shape in the second V winning opening 2008, and is formed in a bar shape with a narrow width on the left and right sides in the third losing opening 2555. Further, the protruding portion 2554i of the third loss port 2555 slightly protrudes into the third loss port 2555. Although the details will be described later, these protrusions 2554i cause the game ball B to contact the circular openings of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, roll around the edge of the opening, and then move outward. This is to prevent it from jumping out and entering the other third losing opening 2555 or second V winning opening 2008.

Furthermore, the third sorting table 2554 protrudes lower than the protrusion 2554i at the center in the left-right direction between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 at the front end of the central table 2554a. It has a protrusion 2554j.

The third sorting rotating body 2556 protrudes downward from the disk-shaped center, is rotatably supported by the third sorting table 2554 and the third sorting base 2559, and has a shaft portion 2556a to which a transmission gear 2567 is attached. have. Further, the third sorting rotating body 2556 has three inner protrusions 2556b that protrude in a fan shape near the center, and an outer protrusion 2556c that protrudes in an arc shape higher than the inner protrusions 2556b near the outer periphery. ,have. The inner protrusion 2556b and the outer protrusion 2556c are provided at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and are each provided on the same radial line. The outer protrusion 2556c has a constant width in the radial direction, and the outer circumferential side is aligned with the general surface of the third distributing rotating body 2556, and the outer protrusion 2556c is inclined in the radial direction so that the inner circumferential side is higher. There is. When the third sorting rotating body 2556 is assembled into the third sorting device 2550, its general surface is parallel to the plane of the center table 2554a in the third sorting table 2554 and slightly above the center table 2554a. It is located in This third distribution rotating body 2556 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by a third distribution drive motor 2560 via a drive gear 2566 and a transmission gear 2567.

The third distribution left rotary body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 protrude in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction and have a protrusion 2557a and a protrusion 2558a, respectively, which extend in the axial direction. ing. The protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a are located at the most on each of the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c when the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are assembled to the third sorting device 2550. It protrudes to approximately the center position of the game ball B with respect to the game ball B located on both left and right outer sides of the lowered front end. These protruding pieces 2557a and 2558a have rounded tips, respectively, when viewed from above. Therefore, the protrusions 2557a and 2558a of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 make it difficult to hit the game balls B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c.

Furthermore, when the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the third sorting right rotating body 2558 are assembled in the third sorting device 2550, the lower ends of the respective protruding pieces 2557a and 2558a are connected to the left table 2554b and the third sorting right rotating body 2558, respectively. It is located above the center of the game ball B, which is located on both left and right outer sides of the lowest front end of each right table 2554c. That is, the protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a are provided so as to come into contact with the upper part of the game ball B. As a result, the projecting pieces 2557a and 2558a do not come into contact with each other so as to scoop up the game ball B, making it difficult for the game ball B to jump upward.

The third distribution left rotation body 2557 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the third distribution left drive motor 2561, and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is rotated by the third distribution left drive motor 2561. It is rotated by a motor 2562 in a clockwise direction in plan view. Therefore, the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are used to flip the game balls B on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c backward.

The third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to hold the second V winning opening sensor 2515 and the two third losing opening sensors 2518. In addition, the third distribution base 2559 cooperates with the passage forming member 2575 to guide the game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 and discharge them downward. A sphere discharge passage 2574 is formed. The third sorting ball discharge passage 2574 separates the game balls B received into the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing openings 2555 on both the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008, without merging them with each other. It is formed so as to be guided as it is, and a second V winning opening sensor 2515 and a third losing opening sensor 2518 are provided in the middle of each.

As shown in FIG. 127, the upper cover 2577 is formed so that the rear end side is lower, and when a player seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 looks inside the gaming area 5a, the upper cover 2577 is The first picture 3110 and second picture 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600 are not blocked.

When the third sorting device 2550 is assembled to the game board 5, the front end is located in front of the front of the game panel 1100 and slightly behind the front of the front component 1000, and the rear end is located in front of the front of the game panel 1100 and slightly behind the front of the front component 1000. It is located behind the light guide plate 3102 of the unit 3000 and slightly forward of the front of the effect display device 1600. The collection table 2554d of the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 is located forward of the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The third sorting device 2550 has a third sorting rotating body 2556, a third sorting left rotating body 2557, and a third sorting right rotating body 2558, a third sorting driving motor 2560, a third sorting left rotating body It is constantly rotated by a drive motor 2561 and a third distribution right drive motor 2562. The third distribution rotating body 2556 and the third distribution left rotation body 2557 rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 rotates in a clockwise direction in a plan view. There is.

In this embodiment, the third distribution rotating body 2556 is at a speed of 16.7 rpm, and the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are much faster than the third distribution rotation body 2556. They each rotate at a high speed of 625 rpm. In this way, since the rotational speeds of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are fast, detection pieces are provided on the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558. Even if the presence or absence of rotation is detected by the sensor, the sensor may not be able to reliably detect the detection piece. To be more specific, the sensor that detects the detection piece operates at regular intervals to detect the detection piece, so for example, if the rotation period of the detection piece and the detection period of the sensor are the same, the detection Since it may not be possible to detect any piece at all, it is necessary to make the detection period of the sensor sufficiently shorter than the rotation period of the detection piece. If the detection piece rotates quickly and the rotation period becomes even shorter, the sensor detection period also needs to be further shortened, but if the sensor detection period is shortened, signals will be exchanged frequently between the sensor and the control unit. This increases the load on the control unit, increasing the risk of runaway or malfunction due to overload.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rotation shafts of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 (the third distribution left drive motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562) , after attaching the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570, respectively, and meshing the left transmission gear 2568 and the right transmission gear 2570 with a large diameter left rotation detection gear 2569 and right rotation detection gear 2571, respectively, to detect rotation. A detection piece 2569a and a detection piece 2571a are provided on the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 whose rotation has been decelerated, and the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution clockwise rotation are detected. It is detected by a detection sensor 2565. In this embodiment, the rotational speed of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is set to 250 rpm.

As a result, the rotation speed of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a for detecting the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 becomes slower, so the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution clockwise rotation detection sensor 2565, it is possible to reliably detect the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558. In addition, since the rotation speed of the detection piece 2569a and the detection piece 2571a is slowed down, there is no need to unnecessarily shorten the detection period of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565, An appropriate detection cycle can be achieved, and an increase in the load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

This third sorting device 2550 is supplied with the game balls B sorted to the second losing port 2543 by the second sorting device 2540. To be more specific, the game balls B distributed to the second losing port 2543 are detected by the second losing port sensor 2517, are supplied to the clone 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551, and are sent to the clone 2553 through the third distribution guide path 2551. After turning around the axis in the vertical direction, it falls near the right end of the collection table 2554d in the third sorting table 2554 below. At this time, based on the detection of the game balls B by the second loss opening sensor 2517, an effect corresponding to the distribution of the game balls B by the third distribution device 2550 is executed.

The game ball B that fell from the croon 2553 to near the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the rear right table 2554c, then rolls toward the right part of the lowest front end of the right table 2554c, and rotates. It comes into contact with the protruding piece 2558a of the third right-handed rotating body 2558 that is being rotated. After that, the game ball B that came into contact with the protruding piece 2558a and was repelled backward enters the center table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third sorting rotary body 2556, and enters the center table 2554a, which tilts the center table 2554a. This causes it to roll forward. Then, it is accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a, or it passes beside them and enters the collection table 2554d. The game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the center table 2554a will roll toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the part into which it entered. In addition, the game ball B that rolled from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is bounced by the protrusion 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotating body 2557, similar to the movement on the right table 2554c described above. , it enters the center table 2554a from the rear end side of the left table 2554b through the third sorting rotating body 2556.

In this way, the basic flow of game balls B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 is from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, through the third distribution rotating body 2556. After rolling on the central table 2554a, the game ball B is sent to the left table 2554b or right table 2554c by the collection table 2554d, and the game ball B is accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. It is repeated until.

By the way, in this embodiment, since the third distribution left rotary body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are rotating at high speed, the game ball B is rotated by the protrusion 2557a or the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c. Depending on the timing when the protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a come into contact with the game ball B, the protruding piece 2557a and the protruding piece 2558a are able to graze the game ball B. The force of the game ball B being played back varies depending on the degree of contact between the protruding pieces 2557a and the protruding pieces 2558a.

Therefore, even if the game ball B is bounced backward by the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a, if the contact is weak, it will not be able to climb up the left table 2554b or right table 2554c, which are higher toward the rear. The game ball B may come back and go back and forth on the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c without entering the third sorting rotating body 2556 side. Alternatively, even if the game ball B bounced backward by the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a reaches the third distributing rotating body 2556, the three outer parts of the rotating third distributing rotating body 2556 Depending on the timing at which the protrusion 2556c is positioned, the game ball B may be blocked from entering by the outer protrusion 2556c, and may be returned to the left table 2554b or right table 2554c without being able to move toward the center table 2554a. . Furthermore, when the game ball B enters the third sorting rotating body 2556 from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the third sorting rotating body 2556 is rotating, so that the three external protrusions 2556c Since the parts between are moving, the game ball B may be carried to the opposite left table 2554b or right table 2554c by the rotation of the third sorting rotating body 2556. In addition, if the game ball B is strongly repelled backward by the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a, it may pass through the third sorting rotating body 2556 and enter the left table 2554b or right table 2554c on the opposite side. In some cases, it may enter the side table 2554e. Note that the game ball B that has entered the side table 2554e rolls to the left table 2554b or right table 2554c that is in contact with it.

For this reason, the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c are repelled backward by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558, and the third distribution The game ball B that has entered the middle rotating body 2556 will enter the center table 2554a with a certain probability. At this time, since the third distribution rotating body 2556 is rotating, the game balls B enter the central table 2554a from various positions in the left and right direction depending on the rotation position.

The game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a will roll forward due to its inclination, but it will enter from the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c on both outside sides in the left and right direction through the third sorting rotating body 2556. In addition, since the third distribution rotating body 2556 is rotating, it has a movement vector in the left and right direction, and it rarely rolls straight forward, but sometimes rolls diagonally. Become. At this time, since a bulging portion 2554h bulges upward at the center of the center table 2554a in the left-right direction, this bulging portion 2554h weakens the movement of the game ball B in the left-right direction or returns it to the opposite side. This may result in Then, the game ball B rolling forward on the center table 2554a enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end, or and enter the collection table 2554d.

By the way, on the central table 2554a, depending on the rolling direction of the game ball B that rolls toward the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the gaming ball B may roll toward the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening. By coming into contact with the circular opening of 2555, the game ball B may move like a swing-by, rotating along the edge of the opening. As shown in FIG. 140(b), when there is nothing in the opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B rotates along the edge of the opening, causing its rolling. If the direction is changed and there is another second V winning opening 2008 or third losing opening 2555 before it pops out from the edge of the opening, the game ball enters the second V winning opening 2008 or third losing opening 2555. B may enter. Due to such a phenomenon, for example, when a game ball B enters the second V winning opening 2008, it goes around the edge of the opening and enters the adjacent third losing opening 2555, disappointing the player and losing interest. There is a risk that it will decrease. In addition, due to such a phenomenon, the variation in the acceptance probability (winning probability) of the game ball B to the second V winning hole 2008 in the third sorting table 2554 (third sorting device 2550) becomes large, and the player There is a risk of giving rise to a sense of distrust.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the projection 2554i is protruded from the front end side of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, the game ball B tries to rotate along the edge of the opening. It also comes into contact with the protrusion 2554i on the way and can be flipped from the edge of the opening to the front side or inside of the opening. It is possible to prevent it from entering the third failure port 2555. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the game ball B entering the third loss opening 2555 unnecessarily, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. In addition, since it is possible to prevent game balls B from being unexpectedly accepted into the second V winning hole 2008, variations in the probability of receiving game balls B into the second V winning hole 2008 can be reduced, and the game It is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of distrust to people.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the protrusion part 2554i is made to protrude inside the opening in the third loss opening 2555, the game ball B rolling along the edge of the opening can be reliably flicked. In addition, since the edge of the opening of the second V prize opening 2008 is rounded and rounded, the chamfering makes it easier to direct the movement vector of the game ball B to the outside or inside of the opening, and the game ball B It is made so that it is difficult to turn around the edge of the opening.

When the game ball B rolling forward on the central table 2554a passes between the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a. . At this time, there is a possibility that it will come into contact with a protrusion 2554j that protrudes upward at the front end of the center table 2554a. Depending on how the game ball B contacts the protrusion 2554j, the game ball B may be reflected backward, and depending on the angle of reflection, it may be accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2555. There is sex. On the other hand, if the game ball B comes into contact with the protrusion 2554j and is reflected forward, it will enter the collection table 2554d from the front end of the center table 2554a. In addition, in the central table 2554a, when the game ball B passes between the third losing port 2555 and the weir part 2554f, it enters the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a without coming into contact with the protrusion 2554j. .

In this way, the game ball B that entered the collection table 2554d from the center table 2554a rolls to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c depending on the part where it entered, and the third sorting left rotating body 2557 or the third sorting right rotating body 2558, it passes through the third sorting rotating body 2556 and is sent to the central table 2554a again, and is sent to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. The above-described movement is repeated until the third distribution table 2554 is accepted. In this embodiment, the game ball B is distributed (accepted) to the second V winning hole 2008 with a probability of 1/5.

Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 is guided by the third distribution ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2515, and then discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2555 is guided by the third sorting ball discharge passage 2574, detected by the third losing port sensor 2518, and then discharged downward. The game balls B discharged downward from this third sorting device 2550 are discharged onto the board holder 1200 via the back lower ball discharge unit 3150 in the back unit 3000.

In this way, in the third sorting device 2550, the game balls B sorted to the second losing opening 2543 by the second sorting device 2540 are sent to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. It can be divided into

Further, according to the third sorting device 2550 of this embodiment, the height and amount of protrusion of the protruding piece 2557a of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and the protruding piece 2558a of the third sorting right rotating body 2558 can be adjusted to Since B is made to be difficult to hit, and the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are rotated at high speed, the game ball B enters the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c. At times, it is possible to make it impossible for the player to predict with what force the game ball B will be bounced backwards, and the player's line of sight can be fixed on the game ball B on the third distribution table 2554. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B as it moves back and forth on the third distribution table 2554, thereby increasing expectations for acceptance into the second V prize opening 2008 and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, unless the game ball B is repelled with some force by the protruding piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotary body 2557 or the protrusion piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the center table 2554a will be moved from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c. If the game ball B does not enter the center table 2554a, and even if the game ball B enters the center table 2554a, it is not accepted into the second V winning port 2008 or the third losing port 2555, the collection table 2554d returns the ball to the left table 2554b or the right table. 2554c, the game ball B stays on the third distribution table 2554 for a relatively long time, and the distribution of the game ball B takes a longer time than the Cloon-like distribution device in conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to entertain the player, and by allocating the game balls B to the second V winning hole 2008, expectations for the occurrence of a "jackpot game" can be increased and a decline in interest can be suppressed. In other words, since a "jackpot game" occurs due to the movement of the game ball B, which is the acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008, the effect display device 1600 receives the game ball B from the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004. A case where a "jackpot game" occurs when an image production in which a plurality of symbol rows are displayed in a fluctuating manner to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by acceptance. In comparison, even if it takes a long time to confirm the occurrence of a "jackpot game," it is possible to make it difficult for players to get bored, and it also reduces the feeling of disappointment when "losing" and suppresses a decline in interest. can be done.

By the way, in conventional pachinko machine sorting devices using croons, it is not necessary to accelerate the game ball B in order to reach the sorting destination such as the V winning hole or the losing hole. The structure was such that the game ball B could reach the destination even if no change was given to the game ball B. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, although it is possible to enjoy the movement of the game ball B to a certain extent, the player gets bored with it after getting used to it, and there are other problems as exemplified below. That is, for example, if the rolling path of game ball B is not changed and it is guided to an unfavorable destination, the player's interest will be increased before reaching the destination because the destination can be predicted from the rolling path. There was a risk that this would decrease. Alternatively, even if the rolling path of game ball B is changed by some means, if as a result it is guided to an unfavorable allocation destination, it may be allocated to an advantageous allocation destination (if the rolling path is not changed). By making the player feel that the development that could have been achieved earlier has been thwarted by the means and at a disadvantage, there is a fear that this may create a sense of distrust and reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the third sorting device 2550, the third sorting left rotary body 2557 and the third right sorting rotary body 2558, which rotate at high speed, are used to It is not possible for the player to clearly predict whether the game ball B will be accelerated and repelled, and moreover, the game ball B will be repelled by the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558. The number of times is not limited to once, and after drawing a complicated rolling path on the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B is distributed to either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. Since the player is accepted, it is possible to make the player feel that the destination to which the player is allocated has been selected by random chance. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible not only to enjoy the movement of the game ball B due to its natural flow, but also to select a random distribution destination, without causing the problems in the conventional pachinko machine as described above. This allows the player to enjoy the development of the game, and makes the player have a strong interest and interest in the movement of the game ball B.

In addition, in the third sorting device 2550 of this embodiment, the two third loss openings 2555 are provided side by side on both the left and right sides of the second V winning opening 2008 on the front end side of the central table 2554a. Even if the game ball B is accepted into the loss port 2555, the player can be made to feel that the outcome is advantageous or disadvantageous due to a slight difference. As a result, even if the player is assigned to the unfavorable third losing slot 2555, it is possible to expect the effect of making the player feel disappointed and increasing his desire to continue playing the game.

Further, in the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, one second V winning opening 2008 is provided as an advantageous sorting destination, whereas two third losing holes 2555 are provided as disadvantageous sorting destinations. In the third distribution table 2554, it is shown that it is more difficult to accept the game ball B to an advantageous distribution destination than to an unfavorable distribution destination. By clearly indicating this visually, it is possible to make the player strongly desire to accept the game ball B to a more advantageous destination, thereby increasing the player's interest in the movement of the game ball B and improving his/her interest. You can expect good results.

Furthermore, in the third sorting device 2550 of this embodiment, the central table 2554a is tilted so that the front end side is lower, and the second V prize opening 2008 is provided near the front end, so that no player can enter the central table 2554a. The second V winning hole 2008 is located between the game ball B and the player, and the player can easily see whether or not the game ball B is rolling toward the second V winning hole 2008. This allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B even more. Furthermore, since the game ball B rolls toward the player side (forward) toward the second V winning hole 2008, the player is made to think that the game ball B is being drawn toward the second V winning hole 2008. This makes it possible to increase expectations for acceptance into the second V prize opening 2008 and enjoy the distribution at the third distribution table 2554.

Further, according to the third sorting device 2550 of the present embodiment, the game balls B sorted by the second sorting device 2540 to the second losing port 2543 side are transferred to the third sorting table 2554 by the clone 2553. The game balls are supplied to the collection table 2554d downstream of the V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555, and the game balls are fed to the central table 2554a where the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are provided. In order to reach B, the third distribution right rotation body 2558 (third distribution left rotation body 2557) must be applied with a certain degree of strength to overcome the inclined right table 2554c (left table 2554b). It has the characteristic that it requires contact. Therefore, for example, even if game balls B are supplied from the second sorting device 2540 side when the third sorting right rotating body 2558 and third sorting left rotating body 2557 have stopped rotating for some reason, It will remain at the front end side of the right table 2554c, which is the lowest position on the third distribution table 2554, via the croon 2553, and will not go to the center table 2554a where the second V winning opening 2008 is provided. Game balls B will not be fraudulently accepted into the second V prize opening 2008.

The center accessory 2500 of this embodiment is provided between the lower side of the frame-shaped center base 2501 and the third distribution device 2550, and includes a front center decorative board 2591 that can emit light forward, and a guide path. A table upper right decorative board 2592 provided above the accessory prize opening 2006 in the group 2520, and a table provided between the accessory prize opening 2006 and the first hit passage 2536 of the first distribution device 2530. It includes a right center decorative board 2593 and a table lower right decorative board 2594 provided below the second losing passage 2546 of the second sorting device 2540 (see FIGS. 124, 167, etc.).

A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on each of these front center decorative board 2591, front right upper decorative board 2592, front right middle decorative board 2593, and front lower right decorative board 2594. By emitting light from the LED mounted on the front center decorative board 2591, the lower side of the center base 2501 can be decorated with light. When the LEDs mounted on the table upper right decorative board 2592, the table middle right decorative board 2593, and the table lower right decorative board 2594 are made to emit light, the guide passage group 2520, the first distribution device 2530, and the second distribution device 2540 The game balls B in circulation are made to be decorated with light emission so that they can be easily seen from the player's side.

The table center decorative board 2591 and the table upper right decorative board 2592 are connected to the effect relay board 3026, respectively, and the table right middle decorative board 2593 and the table lower right decorative board 2594 are connected to the table upper right decorative board 2592. That is, the table right middle decorative board 2593 and the table lower right decorative board 2594 are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the table upper right decorative board 2592.

[5-8f. Flow of game balls within the gaming area]
Next, the flow of the game balls B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 129, 141 to 145, and the like. FIG. 141 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. FIG. 142(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the first guide path in the guide path group, and FIG. 142(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls flowing through the second guide path in the guide path group. It is a diagram. FIG. 143(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls accepted into the accessory prize opening, and FIG. 143(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the third sorting device in (a) from a plane. c) is an explanatory diagram showing the parts of the second sorting device in (a). Moreover, FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the timing of the operation of the accessory prize opening, the first sorting device, and the second sorting device according to the type of “small win”. FIG. 145(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the attacker unit, and is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 145(a).

When assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided near the upper right of the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a region to the left of and below the center accessory 2500, and in a region between the attacker unit 2400 and the center accessory 2500. has been done. Further, on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300, a windmill W is provided which rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 are arranged so that the game ball B driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enters the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W. It is adjusted so that it will enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability than these. The windmill W captures many of the game balls B that have entered to the right side of the center by a plurality of obstacle nails that are lined up in a row below the center accessory 2500 and become lower toward the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a. N, and the rest flows down to the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300.

A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a row on the lower side of the center accessory 2500 so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. The game ball B is adjusted to be accepted into the first starting port 2002 with a higher probability than the game ball B.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the lower end of the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500 and the normal winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 are the game which circulated through the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. Ball B is adjusted so that it enters the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430, the normal winning opening 2003, and the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a similar probability, and the second guide passage. It is adjusted so that the game ball B that circulated through 2522 enters the normal winning hole 2003 and the left side of the normal winning hole 2003 with a higher probability than the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430.

In the game area 5a, a game ball B is guided by an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 and is driven into the upper part along the periphery of the game area 5a from the left side. When the game ball B is driven so as to flow on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into the gaming area 5a, as shown in FIG. Due to N, it is mainly guided to enter the part to the right of the center of the windmill W, and is guided to enter the part to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability.

The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. The game ball B accepted into the general winning hole 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then delivered to the back lower ball ejection unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, and is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. The game ball B guided to the left side of the center of the windmill W is almost never received by the first starting port 2002.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W is moved to the center in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) side and may be accepted into the first starting port 2002. In addition, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the windmill W may pass between a plurality of obstructing nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the general winning slot 2001. There is almost no possibility that the game ball B that circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the gaming panel 1100, and then delivered to the back lower ball ejection unit 3150 of the back unit 3000, where it is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002. and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game balls B are detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a first special lottery result is drawn and benefits such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out are provided. Then, the game balls B that are not accepted into either the general prize opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2002 are discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, if the game ball B is placed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the gaming area 5a, there is no possibility that it will be accepted into the normal prize opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004, and in rare cases, it will not be accepted into the opened grand prize opening 2005. It may be accepted.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004 is higher than the probability that the game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be accepted into the second starting port 2004. The probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002 is set higher.

In contrast to the above, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upper right part 2502a of the front frame of the center accessory 2500 (upstream space part 2506), , the game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To explain in detail, the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B that has come into contact with the stopper 1006 enters the first guide path 2521 (see FIG. 142(a)). The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening door 2511 that closes the accessory prize opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then passes through the guide passage group. It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the attacker unit 2400 side below.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the attacker unit 2400 and the normal winning prize. The player is guided to enter either the opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 with a similar probability.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it is twisted backward and passes through the first guide passage in the weighted part 2520a. After being lined up in the front-back direction with 2521, it is twisted forward and discharged from the exit on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 toward the attacker unit 2400 below.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is moved to the normal winning opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N installed between it and the attacker unit 2400. In rare cases, the attacker is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the right passage 2430 of the attacker.

Then, the game ball B that entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is sent onto the lower right rail 1004 from the release opening 2435 which is below the big winning opening 2005. It is released and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the normal winning hole 2003 is detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 and is discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the normal winning hole sensor 2401, a normal lottery is held and benefits such as a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out are given.

In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 further comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N, and flows down onto the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 may rarely pass through the second opening 2432 between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and enter the attacker right passage 2430. It may enter. Then, the game ball B that has flown down onto the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 passes between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422 and flows down onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424. .

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted into the normal prize opening 2003 and a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result, the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, so the second starting opening 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has passed between the upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall portion 2422 will be received into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, it is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, a second special lottery result is drawn and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B is paid out is provided.

The game ball B that passed between the second starting opening upper guiding shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422 and flowing down onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 flows from the left end of the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 to the big winning opening 2005. is released to the upper part of the body. Then, when the game ball B is released from the big prize opening guide shelf 2424, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and is used as the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When a "big hit" is drawn, or when game ball B is accepted into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. The game ball B released to the left from the opening guiding shelf 2424 will be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the gaming area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by this big prize opening sensor 2403, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of game balls B is given. In addition, the game ball B released to the attacker unit 2400 side through the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is accepted into any of the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 2005. If not, it is discharged from the outlet 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a to the lower part behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

In addition, although the case where the game ball B is hit to the right has been described above, the game ball B may also be hit with such force that it jumps over the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens near the right end of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame. , enters the first guide passage 2521, resulting in the same result as above.

As mentioned above, due to the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that passed through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521 , the possibility of being accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 is high.

By the way, if the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small win" is drawn as the first special lottery result or the second lottery result, the game ball The provided accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the sorting rotary body 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 and the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when a "small win" is drawn, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes, so in order for the player to receive the game ball B into the accessory prize opening 2006, the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened and closed. "Right-handed hitting" can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 in which the opening 2006 is provided.

In this embodiment, a "small win" has a higher probability of being drawn than a "big win", and a "small win" includes a "first small win," a "second small win," and a "third small win." Three patterns are set, and in each pattern, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes roughly twice.

First, the opening and closing of the accessory prize opening 2006 for each "small win" will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 144, in the "first small win", after a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of execution, the accessory prize opening 2006 is open for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a short period of time (1252 ms) has elapsed, it is again in the open state for a short period of time (80 ms) and then in the closed state, completing the process. In the "second small win", after a certain period of time (3000ms) has passed from the start of the execution, the accessory prize opening 2006 is open for a short time (80ms), and then closed, and from the "first small win". After a long time (5420 ms) has elapsed, the open state is reached for a long time (9414 ms), and then the closed state is completed. In the "third small win", after a certain period of time (3000ms) has passed from the start of execution, the accessory prize opening 2006 is open for a short time (80ms), and then closed, and from the "second small win" After a long time (19366 ms) has elapsed, the open state is reached for a long time (9404 ms), and then the closed state is completed.

The second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "first small win" is started after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "first small win". In addition, the second opening state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third small win" is started after the time from the start of execution to the completion of the "second small win."

In addition, in FIG. 144, in the second long open state in the "second small win" and "third small win", the open state (80 ms) is repeated 8 times at constant intervals (1252 ms). . That is, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for the "first small win" and nine times for the "second small win" and the "third small win".

Next, the operation of the distribution rotary body 2531 of the first distribution device 2530 in the "small win" is to rotate counterclockwise at the same time as the start of execution, and for a predetermined period of time (3020 ms) to direct the storage section 2531a upward. When a predetermined period of time (4560 ms) has elapsed since the storage section 2531a is rotated clockwise and turned to the right, the storage section 2531a is rotated clockwise and the storage section 2531a is turned to the right. After being in the accommodable state for a short time (500 ms), the accommodating state becomes the third accommodating state for the same time as the second time (13446 ms), and then becomes the unaccommodable state.

The first accommodating state of the sorting rotary body 2531 ends midway through the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "small win" and becomes the unaccommodating state. Further, the distribution rotary body 2531 becomes ready to be accommodated for the second time after the time when the "first small hit" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "first small hit", the control of the distribution rotary body 2531 is completed before the second storage possible state is reached, and the second and third storage possible states are not executed. This sorting rotating body 2531 is configured such that the second accommodation state is started before the second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "second small win", and the second open state is the closed state. After that, it becomes uncontainable.

Further, the distribution rotary body 2531 becomes ready for storage for the third time after the time when the "second small win" is completed from the start of execution. Therefore, at the time of the "second small win", the control of the distribution rotary body 2531 is completed before the third accommodation possible state is reached, and the third accommodation possible state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotary body 2531 is in a state where it can be accommodated once when the "first small win" occurs, twice when the "second small win" occurs, and three times when the "third small win" occurs. This distributing rotary body 2531 starts the third accommodation state before the second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third small win", and the second open state ends. After it becomes closed state, it becomes unaccommodating state.

Next, the operation of the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 in the "small win" is the first closed state in which it protrudes forward at the same time as the execution starts and closes the second loss opening 2543 for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After that, it moves back and enters the open state where the second winning opening 2543 is opened (the state where it can be distributed to the third distribution device 2550) for a predetermined time (23006 ms). ), the second closed state is reached for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is reached.

The first closed state of the sorting door 2544 ends midway through the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "small win" and becomes the open state. In addition, the second sorting device 2540 starts the second closed state of the sorting door 2544 from the middle of the second open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "third small hit", and After the second open state in 2006 changes to the closed state, the distribution door 2544 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closing state of the sorting door 2544 is executed only when there is a "third small hit", and when there is a "first small winning" or "second small winning", the distributing door 2544 is closed for the second time. The second closing state of the branch door 2544 is not executed.

For this reason, in the "first small hit", the opening and closing of the accessory prize opening 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time, so the game circulating in the first guide passage 2521 by "right hit" It is unlikely that the ball B will be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. In addition, since the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small win" is also for a short time, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. is low. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the sorting rotating body 2531 in the first sorting device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "small win" 2006, the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is placed in the storage section of the sorting rotary body 2531 when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for the first time. The possibility of being accommodated in 2531a is even lower. Since the first accommodating state of the sorting rotary body 2531 and the first closed state of the sorting door 2544 in the second sorting device 2540 end at the same time, the distributing rotary body 2531 ends at the same time. At the time of the first accommodation possible state, the game balls B accommodated in the accommodation section 2531a are not distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 side.

On the other hand, since the second opening state of the accessory winning hole 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small winning" takes a long time, the game ball B passes through the first guide path 2521 and enters the accessory prize. There is a high possibility that the application will be accepted by the customer 2006. At this time, the sorting rotating body 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 becomes a state where it can be accommodated before the accessory prize opening 2006 goes into the open state, and then the accessory prize opening 2006 changes from the open state to the closed state. After that, the game ball B becomes unaccommodating, so there is a high possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodating part 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531. .

In this way, in this example, it is unlikely that the game ball B will be accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 in the first open state of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the "second small win" and "third small win". In addition, when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 will be accommodated in the housing section 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 is even lower. Nevertheless, at the same time as the start of execution of the small winning game state, the distributing rotary body 2531 is rotated counterclockwise to bring the housing section 2531a into an upwardly accommodating state, and the housing section 2531a is held for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After facing upward, it is rotated clockwise to bring the housing portion 2531a to a rightward unaccommodating state. That is, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, although there is a low possibility that the distribution rotary body 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first hit path 2536 side, the distribution rotary body 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first hit path 2536 side. The distribution operation by the distribution rotating body 2531 is shown in advance by executing the distribution operation to the 2536 side.

Similarly, immediately after the start of the small winning game state, it is unlikely that the distribution rotary body 2531 will distribute the game ball B to the first hit path 2536 side, but at the same time as the execution of the small winning game state starts, the second distribution By protruding the distribution door 2544 of the device 2540 forward and closing the second losing port 2543, it becomes possible to distribute to the first V winning port 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has elapsed, it moves back and closes the second losing port 2543. When 2543 is opened, it is arranged to be distributed to a third distribution device 2550. That is, immediately after the start of the small winning gaming state, although there is a low possibility that the distribution door 2544 will distribute the game balls B to the first V winning slot 2007 side, the distribution door 2544 will distribute the game balls B to the first V winning slot. The distribution operation by the distribution door 2544 is shown in advance by executing the distribution operation to the 2007 side.

In this example, the distribution rotary body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 are activated at the same time as the start of the execution of the small winning game state, that is, the performance at the start of the small winning game state (the opening performance of the small winning game state, for example, Aim for 2006, etc.), which operates during the execution of a game explanation etc. in a small winning game state), and after the distribution rotary body 2531 and distribution door 2544 operate, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens for the first time. is in the open state. This reduces the possibility of the distribution rotary body 2531 distributing the game balls B to the first hit passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 distributing the game balls B to the first V prize opening 2007 side. are doing. In addition, there is no possibility of the distribution rotary body 2531 distributing the game balls B to the first hit passage 2536 side and the distribution door 2544 distributing the game balls B to the first V prize opening 2007 side. Alternatively, if it is as low as possible, the accessory prize opening 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time as the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 operate.

Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotating body 2531 and the distribution door 2544 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, among the plurality of movable parts (distributing rotating body 2531, distributing door 2544) that distribute the winning game balls B in the accessory prize opening 2006, some movable parts are operated in advance to show the distributing operation. , other movable parts may not be operated in advance. For example, the distribution door 2544, which is likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning hole (in this example, the first V winning hole 2007) by operating it (high expectation of V winning), should not be operated in advance. In advance, only the sorting rotary body 2531 that has a lower possibility of entering the game ball B into the V winning opening (second V winning opening 2008 in this example) than the sorting door 2544 (low expectation of V winning) You may also make it work. As a result, although it is possible to know in advance some of the destinations to which the game ball B that won the prize winning hole 2006 will be distributed, the other distribution destinations can be kept unknown, and the other distribution destinations are clear. When the game ball B is distributed, the number of destinations to which it is distributed increases, which can surprise the players and increase their expectations.It also makes it possible to draw attention to the game ball B that is distributed and enjoy its movement, thereby reducing the decrease in interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

In addition, the movable part (distributing door 2544) with high expectations for winning V prizes is not operated in advance to conceal its existence and make the player think that game ball B will enter the third distributing device 2550. When the "third small win" is executed, the movable part (distributing door 2544) with high expectation of winning V operates and moves the game ball B to the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). By allowing the ball to enter, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise and to improve the interest in the game by allowing the game ball B to enter an unexpected destination. In addition, the allocation to the first V winning opening 2007 side as the allocation destination is hidden, making it possible to make people think that there are only two allocation destinations: the first losing opening 2535 side and the third distribution device 2550 side, Even if a ``second small win'' with a lower V winning expectation than ``V'' is executed and game balls B are distributed to the third distribution device 2550 side, the player is not disappointed.

Furthermore, in this example, the distribution rotary body 2531 is arranged in such a manner that it can be easily recognized by the player, whereas the distribution door 2544 is shaped like a flat plate that moves forward and backward from the game board 5, and has an area on the front side. Because the area is narrow, it is difficult to notice the movement even if it is operating. Furthermore, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the first V prize opening 2007 side, which can be entered by the distribution door 2544 protruding forward. Therefore, when the distribution door 2544 operates and the game ball B enters the first V prize opening 2007 in the case of a "third small hit", it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball B, and the game ball It is possible to give the player a feeling as if a 15R jackpot has been executed because a V prize suddenly occurs without making the player aware that B has entered the first V prize opening 2007.

In addition, by operating the distributing rotary body 2531 in advance during the opening performance of the small winning game state, the distributing rotary body 2531 can be used in addition to the instruction content in the opening performance, for example, "Aim for the accessory prize opening 2006." This action also allows the player to easily recognize where to hit the ball, that is, where to aim during the small winning game state.

As the "small win" is drawn as described above, when the accessory prize opening 2006 becomes open, the game ball B flowing down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006. After being detected by the accessory prize opening sensor 2513, it is sent to the first distribution guide path 2534 of the first distribution device 2530. When the game ball B is detected by the accessory prize opening sensor 2513, a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided.

Among the "small wins", in the "second small win", when the accessory prize opening 2006 is open for the second time, the distribution door 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 is in the open state, so the distribution rotation When the body 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first atari path 2536 and enters the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. flows down, flows through the second loss passage 2546 from the second loss port 2543 at the lower end, is detected by the second loss port sensor 2517, and is sent to the third sorting device 2550 side.

The game ball B sent to the third sorting device 2550 side is supplied to the croon 2553 through the third sorting guideway 2551, and after turning inside the croon 2553, falls to the third sorting table 2554 below. do. The game ball B that fell from the croon 2553 to near the right end of the collection table 2554d rolls to the rear right table 2554c, then rolls toward the right part of the lowest front end of the right table 2554c, and rotates. It comes into contact with the protruding piece 2558a of the third right-handed rotating body 2558 that is being rotated. After that, the game ball B that came into contact with the protruding piece 2558a and was repelled backward enters the center table 2554a from the rear end side of the right table 2554c through the third sorting rotating body 2556, and enters the center table 2554a. This causes it to roll forward.

Is the game ball B that entered the central table 2554a from the third sorting rotating body 2556 accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a? , and enters the collection table 2554d by passing beside them. The game ball B that has entered the collection table 2554d from the center table 2554a will roll toward either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, depending on the part into which it entered. Then, the game ball B that rolled from the collection table 2554d to the left table 2554b is bounced by the protrusion 2557a of the rotating third distribution left rotating body 2557, similar to the movement on the right table 2554c described above. , it enters the center table 2554a from the rear end side of the left table 2554b through the third sorting rotating body 2556.

In this way, the basic flow of game balls B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 of the third distribution device 2550 is from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, through the third distribution rotating body 2556. After rolling on the central table 2554a, the game ball B is sent to the left table 2554b or right table 2554c by the collection table 2554d, and the game ball B is accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555. The third distribution table 2554 is repeatedly circulated until the third distribution table 2554 is reached.

Then, the game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 passes through the third sorting ball discharge passage 2574, is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2515, and is discharged from the back unit 3000. It is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the unit 3150. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the third losing port 2555 passes through the third sorting ball ejection passage 2574, is detected by the third losing port sensor 2518, and is then sent to the back lower ball ejecting unit 3150 of the back unit 3000. is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 via the. When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2515, a privilege is given in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

On the other hand, in the "third small win", when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for the second time, the sorting door 2544 of the second sorting device 2540 is in the closed state, so the sorting rotary body 2531 When the ball B rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a passes through the first atari passage 2536 and flows down the second distribution guide path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540. Then, it comes into contact with the upper surface of the closed sorting door 2544, is guided to the right, and enters (is accepted) into the first V winning opening 2007. The game ball B that entered the first V winning hole 2007 passes through the first V winning path 2542 and is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514, and then passes through the back right ball ejection unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 to the board. It is discharged onto the holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514, a privilege is given in which the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

For this reason, in order to open and close the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 must receive the game ball B to generate a "small hit", "big hit", etc. It is necessary to have the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn. When the game ball B is hit so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500, there is a chance of receiving it in the first starting port 2002, but there is no chance of receiving it in the second starting port 2004.

On the other hand, when hitting the game ball B so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500, on the right side of the center accessory 2500 there is a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two guide passages, a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522. Even if you pass through the passageway, there is a chance that it will be accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 for opening and closing the second starting hole 2004, but it is easier to drive by "right-handed" to make the first guide. If the game ball B is distributed through the passage 2521, there is a possibility that the attacker enters the right passage 2430 where it is sent to the out exit 1008 without having a chance to be accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 etc., and the game ball B is circulated through the second guide passage 2522. In order to achieve this, it is necessary to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B. In addition, in order to make the second starting port 2004 accept the game ball B, it is necessary to make the normal winning port 2003 accept the game ball B and derive the normal lottery result of "normal win", so the game ball B The acceptance probability of the second starting port 2004 is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player should drive the game ball B so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002. The game ball B can be operated and the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown to allow the user to enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1. This can increase expectations for acceptance.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 and a "small win" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes, so the game ball B enters the accessory prize opening 2006. In order for the ball B to be accepted, the driving operation for the game ball B can be changed to "right-handed hitting" and the game ball B can be driven into the first guide passage 2521 where the accessory prize opening 2006 is provided. This can increase expectations for receiving the game ball B into the accessory prize opening 2006.

Even if the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006, there is a possibility that it will be accepted into the normal prize opening 2003 on the downstream side. There is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the second starting slot 2004, which is opened according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B, and a "small hit" or "big hit" will be generated as the second special lottery result. may be selected by lottery.

When the game ball B hit into the first guide path 2521 is received in the accessory prize opening 2006, it is sent to the first sorting device 2530, so the game ball B is placed in the storage section 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531. It is possible to make players nervous and nervous depending on whether or not they are accommodated.

When the game ball B sent to the first sorting device 2530 is stored in the accommodating part 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531, the game ball B is sent to the next second sorting device 2540. Depending on which of the first V winning hole 2007 and the second losing hole 2543 the game balls B are sorted into in the sorting device 2540, the player can be excited and nervous. In this second sorting device 2540, even if the game ball B is sorted to the second losing hole 2543, the game ball B passes through the second losing path 2546 and passes through the third playing hole equipped with the second V winning hole 2008. Since it is sent to the distribution device 2550, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the second V winning hole 2008, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

The game balls B distributed to the second losing port 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 are supplied from the clone 2553 of the third distribution device 2550 to the third distribution table 2554. Then, it is repelled by the third sorting left rotating body 2557 and third sorting right rotating body 2558 of the third sorting table 2554, passes through the third sorting rotating body 2556, enters the central table 2554a, and moves forward. The player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the game is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008 when the game is rolled, and the player can enjoy the game.

When the game ball B is accepted into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, or when the game ball B is received into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, the first special When a "jackpot" is drawn as the lottery result and the second special lottery result, the big prize opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, giving rise to an opportunity to pay out many game balls B. A driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be performed so that the game ball B is received in the opening/closing grand prize opening 2005.

At this time, the probability that the game ball B will reach the big prize opening 2005 is higher when circulating through the second guide passage 2522 than when circulating through the first guide passage 2521. The driving force can be adjusted so that the game ball B enters the second guide path 2522 while refraining from "hitting it to the right," and the driving operation of the game ball B can be enjoyed.

By the way, since the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 has a weighted part 2520a in which the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, the weighted part Looking at 2520a, it is difficult to determine in which passage the game ball B is circulating, so the player should have hit the ball into the second guide passage 2522, but instead it entered the first guide passage 2521. It is possible to make the player think that the game balls B circulating through the guide passage group 2520 can be drawn to attention. Furthermore, when the game ball B is hit into the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, the player can be excited depending on whether or not the game ball B will come out from the exit of the second guide passage 2522. , it is possible to heighten expectations for the game, and when the player comes out from the unexpected exit of the first guide passage 2521, it can give surprise to the player and amuse the player. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[5-8g. Another embodiment of distribution passage group for center accessories]
Next, the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 146 and 147. 146(a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment of a guide passage group different from that in FIG. 129, and FIGS. 147(e) and (f) are explanatory diagrams showing a further different embodiment of a guide passage group. It is. Note that in FIGS. 146 and 147, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 146(a), as compared to FIG. This is what I did. This guide passage group 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 146(b), the angle of the blocking portion 1006 in the front component 1000 is adjusted so that the game ball B that comes into contact with it is likely to rebound toward the entrance side of the second guide passage 2522. In addition, the area between the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 in the upper right part 2502a of the front frame is changed so that the second guide passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It is tilted. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second guide path 2522 side, and the adjustment range of the driving strength of the game ball B when the game ball B enters the second guide path 2522 becomes wider. The driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 can be easily performed.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 146(c), in the guide passage group 2520 of FIG. 129 and FIGS. 146(a) and (b), the respective entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are directed upward. Whereas the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are opened, the upstream sides of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are extended to the vicinity of the center in the left and right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances are arranged vertically. It is designed so that it opens toward the left in this state.

In this embodiment, a part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the gaming area 5a) constitutes a part of the first guide passage 2521, and a part of the front frame upper right part 2502a constitutes the second guide passage 2522. constitutes a part. Further, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space 2506 between the front frame upper right portion 2502a and the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the gaming area 5a) is the third This is the length up to the respective entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space 2506 shown above in FIG. 129 and the like.

In this embodiment, in order for the game ball B to enter the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving force must be enough to contact the narrow part of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame on the left side of the entrance of the second guide passage 2522. , it is necessary to drive the game ball B with a driving force such that it directly enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 that opens toward the left. The adjustment range for the driving force of ball B becomes narrower. In addition, the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2506 to the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 partitions the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. If the game ball B hits the left end of the wall (the part between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space 2506 depending on the leftward momentum and angle of the rebounding game ball B. In other words, even if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2506, it will not deviate leftward from the upstream space 2506 and enter either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. For this reason, the difficulty level of the driving operation of the game ball B increases, so that the player's motivation for the driving operation of the game ball B can be increased, and the player can be encouraged to drive the game medium. It is possible to make the operation more enjoyable and suppress a decline in interest.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 146(d) is the embodiment shown in FIG. 146(c) in which a branch part 2524 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and communicates with the second guide passage 2522 in a one-way manner. It is. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above a portion of the second guide passage 2522 that extends left and right (front frame upper right portion 2502a) and is bent downward from the right end. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the first guide path 2521, depending on the driving force (if the driving force is weak), the game ball B may reach the second guide path 2524. Since it branches to the guide path 2522 side, the difficulty level of the distribution of game balls B to the second guide path 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 146(c).

In addition, in order to make the game ball B enter the second guide path 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a weaker driving force than that of the game ball B that enters the first guide path 2521. Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the downwardly bent portion of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B that enters the second guide passage 2522 will not be able to reach the downwardly bent portion. It does not jump upward (toward the branching part 2524 side) and does not pass through the branching part 2524 and enter the first guide passage 2521 side. In other words, the branch portion 2524 communicates from the first guide passage 2521 to the second guide passage 2522 in a one-way manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when entering the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 that has a branch part 2524 in the middle and flowing through the first guide passage 2521, at the part of the branch part 2524, the first guide passage 2521 side Or, since it branches to either side of the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B can make the player nervous and nervous depending on which side the game ball B branches to at the branch part 2524, and the first guide It is possible to enjoy the flow of game balls B in the passage 2521 and suppress a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second guide path 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the first guide path 2521. , there is a possibility that the first guide passage 2521 branches to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branching part 2524. Therefore, depending on whether or not to branch to the second guide passage 2522 side at the branching part 2524, the player may be left in suspense. It is possible to make the player's heart pound and have fun, and when the branch part 2524 branches to the second guide path 2522 side, mistakes in the player's input operation are covered up, and the desired second guide path 2522 is avoided. The game balls B will be distributed, making the players feel like they have won, and preventing the players from losing interest in the game.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 147(e), the second guide passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 that traverses the frame of the center accessory 2500. In this embodiment, the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right portion 2502a of the front frame. Therefore, all the game balls B hit into the upstream space 2506 above the front frame upper right part 2502a will flow through the first guide path 2521. According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the bypass section 2525, the game ball B crosses within the frame of the center accessory 2500, so the player's side Since it is possible to make the distribution of game balls B noticeable, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen after the game ball B circulates through the bypass section 2525. The player can perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 having the bypass portion 2525, and it is possible to enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B and suppress a decrease in interest. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 147(f), the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided behind the first guide passage 2521, and the respective entrances are lined up in the front-rear direction. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is provided on the front side of the front of the game panel 1100, and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 is provided on the rear side of the front of the game panel 1100. In this embodiment, the front surface of the game panel 1100 is inclined to the right rear in the vicinity of the blocking part 1006 of the front component 1000 in the upstream space 2506, and the game balls that have been distributed along the front surface of the game panel 1100 are B is guided to the second guide passage 2522 side. Further, the blocking portion 1006 of the front component 1000 is inclined so that the portion near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 moves to the right as it goes rearward, and the part near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 The game ball B hit with great force can be reflected toward the entrance side of the second guide path 2522. In this embodiment, since the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 appear to line up and overlap in the front-back direction, the game inserted into the upstream space 2506 above the center accessory 2500 It is possible to make it difficult to determine into which passage the ball B has entered, and to attract the attention of the player.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 148 to 152 and the like. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and FIG. 150 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the front, and FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into its main members and seen from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500 and the effect display device 1600 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 includes a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning holes 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a third sensor provided in the starting port unit 2100. It includes a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a vibration sensor 3003 that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and has a box shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a back box 3010 that is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A locking mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the cage effect display device 1600 and a locking mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the rear surface below the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 to connect the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The panel relay board 1710 being relayed, the panel relay board cover 3025 attached to the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of the panel relay board 1710, and the rear surface below the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. A production relay board 3026 is installed on the right side and relays connections between the peripheral control board 1510 and various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and a back box is installed to cover the rear side of the production relay board 3026. 3010 and a production relay board cover 3027 attached to it.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat frame-shaped frame projecting rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed toward the left from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch 3010d is provided from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center in the left-right direction of the right side of the box 3010 to which the locking mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. This fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. formed at appropriate positions for mounting the light guide plate effect unit 3100 and the like. A vibration sensor 3003 is attached to a portion of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a.

In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a light guide plate production unit 3100 installed in the back box 3010, and a light guide plate production unit 3100 attached to the lower front surface of the light guide plate production unit 3100. A back lower ball discharge unit 3150 that receives and discharges the game balls B downward, and a first sorting device 2530 and a second sorting device attached to the front right corner of the light guide plate production unit 3100 and the center accessory 2500. It includes a back right ball ejection unit 3170 that receives the game ball B from the device 2540 and ejects it downward.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 extends along both left and right sides and the upper side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the back front effect unit 3200 is attached to the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. The back front lower left effect unit 3300 attached to the lower left on the front side, the back front lower right effect unit 3400 attached to the lower right side of the front side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100, and the upper back decoration of the back front effect unit 3200. 3211, and a sub-state display 3500 provided near the right end of the sub-state display 3500.

[5-9a. Light guide plate production unit]
Next, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 153 to 155. FIG. 153(a) is a perspective view of the light guide plate presentation unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 153(b) is a perspective view of the light guide plate presentation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 154 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the pattern board in the light guide plate presentation unit from the front. FIG. 155(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the first pattern of the light guide plate is emitted, and FIG. 155(b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the second pattern of the light guide plate is emitted.

The light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The light guide plate production unit 3100 includes a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 attached to the unit base 3101, and a unit base 3101 above the light guide plate 3102. A first picture board 3103 is attached to the unit base 3101 on the left side of the light guide plate 3102, and a first picture board 3103 is mounted with a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3102. , and a second pattern board 3104 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the left side of the light guide plate 3102 are mounted.

The light guide plate production unit 3100 also includes an upper board cover 3105 attached to the upper side of the unit base 3101 so as to cover the front of the first picture board 3103, and a unit to cover the front of the second picture board 3104. A left board cover 3106 is attached to the left side of the base 3101, and a left cooling fan 3107 and a right cooling fan 3108 are attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction.

The light guide plate 3102 includes a first pattern 3110 (see FIG. 155(a)) formed by numerous uneven first reflecting portions that reflect only light from above forward, and a first pattern 3110 (see FIG. 155(a)) that reflects only light from above. A second pattern 3120 (see FIG. 155(b)) is formed of a countless number of uneven second reflecting portions that reflect the light forward. In other words, the light guide plate production unit 3100 can display the first pattern 3110 by emitting light when the LED on the first pattern board 3103 is made to emit light, and when the LED on the second pattern board 3104 is made to emit light, the second pattern can be displayed. 3120 can be displayed by emitting light.

The light guide plate 3102 serves as a reflective portion that constitutes the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, and has dotted light emitting portions 3102a (shaded portions in FIG. 155) that emit light in a dotted manner by light irradiated from corresponding directions. , a linear light emitting section 3102b (the cross-hatched part in FIG. 155) that emits light in a linear manner by light irradiated from the corresponding direction, and a spectroscopic light emitting section that separates cocktail light irradiated from the corresponding direction and emits light. 3102c (the part with a mottled pattern in FIG. 155). That is, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 are formed by appropriately combining the dotted light emitting portions 3102a, the linear light emitting portions 3102b, and the spectral light emitting portions 3102c. Although not shown in the drawings, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can also be formed by varying the density of the point light emitting portions 3102a, the linear light emitting portions 3102b, and the spectral light emitting portions 3102c. There is.

Here, cocktail light is light of a color that includes two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when a cocktail of yellow light, which is a mixture of red and green light, is irradiated to a spectroscopic light emitting section, the yellow light component is split into red light and green light, and the red and green light components are split into red and green light. A green-looking part will appear. Alternatively, when white light is irradiated as a cocktail light to the spectroscopic light emitting part, the white light component is split into red light, green light, and blue light, and the parts of the part that look red, green, or blue. , light of an appropriate mixture of these colors will appear, producing sparkling rainbow-colored light. Note that when this spectroscopic light emitting section is irradiated with light of only one color of the three primary colors of light, the light does not have a component to be spectrally divided, so it will emit light of that color. For this reason, the spectroscopic light emitting section can emit light in a single color or in multiple colors, depending on the color of the light emitted, making it possible to create a more diverse range of light effects. can.

The light guide plate 3102 has countless first reflecting parts forming the first pattern 3110 and countless second reflecting parts forming the second pattern 3120, each of which has fine irregularities. When the LEDs on the first picture board 3103 and the second picture board 3104 are not emitting light, they appear transparent, and the effect image etc. displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side. , can be visually recognized in good condition.

The first pattern 3110, as shown in FIG. 155(a), is a pattern consisting of the words "decisive battle". This first pattern 3110 has a part where the shadow of the word "decisive battle" extends radially outward, with the word "decisive battle" in the center, and a plurality of arc-shaped parts arranged radially outside of that part. ing. In the first pattern 3110, the part of the text "Decisive Battle" is formed by dotted light emitting parts 3102a, and the part in the shadow outside the text of "Decisive Battle" is formed by the linear light emitting part 3102b, and the part outside of the part is formed by the linear light emitting part 3102b. An arc-shaped portion is formed by a spectral light emitting section 3102c and a linear light emitting section 3102b.

The second pattern 3120 is a pattern imitating a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 155(b). The second pattern 3120 includes a central pattern portion 3121 consisting of a character, a radial pattern portion 3122 extending radially outward from the central pattern portion 3121, and petals scattered outside the central pattern portion 3121 like dancing petals. It has a scattered picture pattern part 3123. The central pattern portion 3121 is formed by a point-like light emitting portion 3102a surrounded by a spectral light emitting portion 3102c. The radiation pattern section 3122 is formed by a spectral light emitting section 3102c bordered by a linear light emitting section 3102b. The scattered pattern section 3123 is formed by the spectral light emitting section 3102c.

The radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 is formed so as to be continuous with the radial decorative portion 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the radial decorative portion 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front presentation unit 3200, which will be described later. (See Figure 165). As a result, when the second pattern 3120 is displayed by emitting light, the radiation pattern part 3122, the radiation decoration part 3212b, and the radiation decoration part 3213b appear to be connected. 3212b and the radial decoration part 3213b projecting forward, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the second pattern 3120, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player.

The light guide plate 3102 also includes a lower notch 3102d cut upward from the lower side, and a right notch 3102e cut leftward from the right side. The lower notch 3102d is for preventing the center accessory 2500 from coming into contact with the third sorting table 2554 of the third sorting device 2550 and the upper cover 2577, and the right notch 3102e is for the center accessory 2500. This is to prevent contact with the second guide passage 2522 twisted backward in the guide passage group 2520 of 2500.

The first pattern board 3103 is divided into three parts in the left and right direction, such as a light guide plate upper left decorative board 3103a, a light guide plate upper middle decorative board 3103b, and a light guide plate upper right decorative board 3103c. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the bottom surface of the device to emit light downward. The first picture board 3103 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026. A left decorative board 3103a on the light guide plate, a middle decorative board 3103b on the light guide plate, and a right decorative board 3103c on the light guide plate are connected to the production relay board 3026 in this order in a daisy chain (see FIG. 167).

The second pattern substrate 3104 is divided into two parts in the vertical direction, such as a light guide plate upper left decorative board 3104a and a light guide plate lower left decorative board 3104b. Equipped with full-color LEDs. The second picture board 3104 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the effect relay board 3026. A light guide plate lower left decorative board 3104b and a light guide plate upper left decorative board 3104a are connected to the effect relay board 3026 in this order in a daisy chain (see FIG. 167).

The two left cooling fans 3107 and right cooling fan 3108 attached to the lower side of the unit base 3101 are the third distribution middle drive motor 2560 of the third distribution device 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the third distribution left drive This is for cooling the motor 2561 and the third distribution right drive motor 2562. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and are mounted obliquely toward the front of the center in the left and right direction. The left cooling fan 3107 and the right cooling fan 3108 have a left fan motor 3107a and a right fan motor 3108a, respectively, which are connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the production relay board 3026 (see FIG. 167). .

This light guide plate production unit 3100 includes a back lower ball ejection unit 3150, a back right ball ejection unit 3170, a back front display unit 3200, a back front lower left display unit 3300, and a back front lower right display on the front surface of the outer periphery of the unit base 3101. unit 3400 is attached. That is, all the effect units in the back unit 3000 are attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100. As a result, when assembling the back unit 3000 (gaming board 5), by attaching all other production units of the back unit 3000, such as the back lower ball ejection unit 3150, to the light guide plate production unit 3100, the light guide plate production By simply attaching the unit 3100 to the back box 3010, all the production units can be attached to the back box 3010.

The light guide plate effect unit 3100 is formed into a unit by attaching a light guide plate 3102, a first picture board 3103, a second picture board 3104, etc. to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101. As a result, when assembled into the light guide plate production unit 3100, the light guide plate 3102 can be handled by holding the unit base 3101 without touching the light guide plate 3102, so that the operator can handle it during assembly etc. It is possible to avoid fingerprints, dirt, scratches, etc. on the light guide plate 3102 by touching the light guide plate 3102, and the light guide plate 3102 can be handled easily.

By the way, if a decorative body that emits light is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate, the light from the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body will be irradiated through the light guide plate to the player in front. Parts of the light guide plate may appear to be glowing, or a pattern displayed on the light guide plate may be visible. If the light guide plate lights up or the pattern is visible, it will overlap with the decorative body decorated with light at the rear, making it difficult to see the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body, and the effect of the light-emitting decoration may be reduced. There is. In addition, if the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body provided behind the light-guide plate allows the pattern to be displayed by light-emitting light on the light-guide plate to be visible in advance, when the pattern on the light-guide plate is actually displayed by light-emitting light, the player may There is a possibility that the impact given by the light guide plate will be reduced, and the effect of the light guide plate may not be sufficiently obtained. In addition, when a decorative body is provided behind the light guide plate, when a pattern is displayed on the light guide plate by emitting light, the rear decorative body appears to overlap through the pattern, so depending on the shape and color of the decorative body, There was a risk that it would be difficult to see the pattern on the light guide plate that was displayed by luminescence.

On the other hand, when the light guide plate performance unit 3100 of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, it is located at the rearmost position in the back box 3010, and is lower than the light guide plate performance unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102). There are no decorations on the rear side. In other words, since the back front effect unit 3200, the back front lower left effect unit 3300, and the back front lower right effect unit 3400 are provided in front of the light guide plate 3102, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and Even if the back right decorative body 3213 and the like are decorated with light, the light can be made difficult to reach the light guide plate 3102.

Therefore, even if the decorations such as the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are decorated with light, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) appears to be shining. Since this can be suppressed, the luminous decoration of the decorative body will not be difficult to see, and the luminous decoration of the decorative body can be seen in good condition, and the performance effect of the luminous decoration of the decorative body can be fully exhibited. be able to.

Furthermore, even if the decorations such as the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are decorated with light, the light guide plate 3102 (the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120) appears to be shining. Since the first symbol 3110 and the second symbol 3120 are visible to the player before the first symbol 3110 and the second symbol 3120 are displayed with light, the first symbol 3110 and the second symbol 3120 are visible to the player. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the impact given to the player when the second symbol 3120 is displayed in a luminescent manner, and it is possible to fully exhibit the production effect of the luminescent display of the first symbol 3110 and the second symbol 3120. can.

Furthermore, since a decorative body such as the back side decorative body 3211 is not provided behind the light guide plate 3102, even if the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 are displayed by emitting light on the light guide plate 3102, the first picture 3110 and the second picture are not displayed. The decorative body does not overlap on the back side of the second pattern 3120, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be seen in good condition. The effect can be fully demonstrated.

In addition, as described above, the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, the back right decoration 3213, etc. do not overlap and appear behind the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120, so that Since the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in good condition, the first pattern is 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be shown in good condition. Therefore, the shapes and colors of the decorations such as the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, the back right decoration 3213, etc. are made in consideration of the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102. This is not necessary, the degree of freedom in designing the decoration can be increased, and a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a decoration with a higher decorative effect can be provided.

Furthermore, since the light guide plate production unit 3100 is provided at the rearmost side in the back box 3010 and the light guide plate 3102 is brought as close as possible to the production display device 1600, the light from the production display device 1600 is Since the direction of the light is approximately perpendicular to the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 does not appear to partially shine, and the first pattern 3110 and second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 do not appear to shine. However, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the light guide plate 3102 is placed as close as possible to the effect display device 1600, depending on the effect image (including the color of the screen) displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate 3102 that is displayed as a luminescent The first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be made to stand out or stand out, and the presentation effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be further enhanced. Further, by bringing the light guide plate 3102 close to the effect display device 1600, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are made to appear as the effect image of the effect display device 1600, and the effect of the effect display device 1600 is It is possible to create an illusion that the image is the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, and it is possible to present a more diverse effect to the player.

Note that the effect display device 1600 may be attached to the rear side of the light guide plate effect unit 3100. As a result, when the effect display device 1600 is attached to the light guide plate effect unit 3100, the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is covered by the effect display device 1600, so that the light guide plate 3102 can be made more difficult to touch. Similar effects can be achieved.

[5-9b. Back lower ball ejection unit]
Next, the back lower ball ejection unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152 and the like. The lower back ball ejection unit 3150 is attached to the front lower part of the unit base 3101. The lower back ball discharge unit 3150 receives the game balls B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below. It is. The lower back ball ejection unit 3150 connects the general winning opening sensor 3001 that separately detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. It has a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the accepted game ball B.

In addition, the back lower ball ejection unit 3150 receives the game balls B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 and ejected downward in the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500. , and is discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

Further, the back lower ball ejection unit 3150 has an out ball detection device located below the opening for receiving the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to detect the game ball B received in the out port 1008. It has a mounting portion 3155 to which the unit 3030 can be mounted. By attaching the out ball detection unit 3030 to this attachment part 3155, the game ball B received in the out port 1008 can be detected.

[5-9c. Back right ball ejection unit]
Next, the back right ball ejection unit 3170 of the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152 and the like. The back right ball ejection unit 3170 is attached to the lower right side of the unit base 3101. This back right ball ejection unit 3170 receives the game ball B received in the first losing port 2535 of the first sorting device 2530 and the first V winning port 2007 of the second sorting device 2540 in the center accessory 2500. It is for discharging to the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-9d. Back-front production unit]
Next, the back and front presentation unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152, FIG. 156, and the like. FIG. 156 is a front view showing the arrangement of each decorative board of the back and front presentation unit in the back unit. The back and front presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate presentation unit 3100.

The back and front presentation unit 3200 is formed in a U-shape that opens downward when viewed from the front, and includes a decoration base 3201 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate presentation unit 3100, and a decoration base 3201 on the front side of the upper side of the decoration base 3201. A back top decoration 3211 is attached and extends left and right, a back left decoration 3212 is attached to the front of the left side of the decoration base 3201 and extends vertically, and a back left decoration 3212 is attached to the front of the right side of the decoration base 3201. A back right decorative body 3213 is attached and extends vertically.

In addition, the back front presentation unit 3200 is provided between the back top decoration body 3211 and the decoration base 3201, and includes a back top decoration board 3221 for illuminating the back top decoration body 3211, and a back left decoration body 3212. A back left decorative board 3222 is provided between the back left decorative body 3213 and the decorative body base 3201 and is provided between the back right decorative body 3213 and the decorative body base 3201 for illuminating the back left decorative body 3212. A back right decorative substrate 3223 is provided for decorating the right decorative body 3213 with light emission.

Furthermore, the back-front production unit 3200 indicates the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and also indicates the result of the first special lottery and the second special lottery result. A sub-status display 3500 is provided to display the number of reservations. The sub-state display 3500 is provided near the right end of the upper back decorative body 3211.

The upper back decorative body 3211 has translucency as a whole. The upper back decoration 3211 includes a logo part 3211a in which three circles are arranged in a horizontally overlapping state, and a logo decoration part 3211b in which small spheres are arranged in a bead shape along the outer periphery of the logo part 3211a. have. In the logo portion 3211a, letters of a predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are formed as a relief. The front surface of the upper back decorative body 3211 is inclined so as to protrude forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, a part of the logo decoration section 3211b constitutes the sub-state display section 3501 of the sub-state display 3500.

The back left decorative body 3212 has translucency as a whole. The front side of this back left decorative body 3212 is inclined so as to protrude forward as it goes leftward. The back left decorative body 3212 includes a main decorative part 3212a that is formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape to imitate a flame over the entire surface, and a main decorative part 3212a that extends radially around the right outer side so as to cross the main decorative part 3212a. It has a radiation decoration part 3212b. The main decorative part 3212a is formed so that a colorless (transparent) part, a red part, and a yellow part are mixed together. The radiation decorative portion 3212b is colorless (transparent). The radiation decorative portion 3212b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is displayed by emitting light on the light guide plate 3102.

The back right decorative body 3213 has translucency as a whole. This back right decorative body 3213 has its front facing substantially leftward, and is slightly inclined with respect to the plane in the front-rear direction so that its front side is located slightly to the right rather than its rear side. The back right decorative body 3213 has a main decorative part 3213a formed in a three-dimensional uneven shape to imitate a flame over the entire surface, and a main decorative part 3213a that extends radially centering on the left outer side so as to cross the main decorative part 3213a. It has a radiation decoration part 3213b. The main decorative portion 3213a is formed in red. The radiation decoration part 3213b is formed colorless (transparent). The radiation decorative portion 3213b is formed so as to be continuous with the radiation pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 when the second pattern 3120 is displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 3102.

The upper back decorative board 3221 is a flat plate whose top and bottom are substantially constant and extends left and right, and is provided in an inclined state along the front surface of the upper back decorative body 3211, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface. ing. The upper back decorative substrate 3221 has a white surface. This back upper decorative board 3221 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back left decorative board 3222.

The back left decorative board 3222 has a flat plate shape extending vertically, is attached with the board surface facing in the front-rear direction, and has a white surface. This back left decorative board 3222 includes a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the main decorative part 3212a of the back left decorative body 3212, and a plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted behind the radiant decorative part 3212b of the back left decorative body 3212. It has a second LED 3222b. The first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are each full-color LEDs. The back left decorative board 3222 is connected to the effect relay board 3026. This back left decorative board 3222 can decorate the main decorative part 3212a of the back left decorative body 3212 by emitting light when the first LED 3222a is made to emit light, and can decorate the back left decorative body 3212 by emitting light when the second LED 3222b is made to emit light. The portion 3212b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3222b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction) of each radiation decoration part 3212b at the site of each radiation decoration part 3212b.

The back right decorative board 3223 has a flat plate shape extending vertically, is attached with the board surface oriented in the left-right direction, and has a white surface. This back right decorative board 3223 includes a first LED 3223a mounted on the right side of the main decorative part 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213, and a first LED 3223a mounted on the right side of the radiant decorative part 3213b of the back right decorative body 3213. It has two LEDs 3223b. The first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are each full-color LEDs. The back right decorative board 3223 is connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the back upper decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222. This back right decorative board 3223 can decorate the main decorative part 3213a of the back right decorative body 3213 by emitting light when the first LED 3223a is made to emit light, and can decorate the back right decorative body 3213 by emitting light when the second LED 3223b is made to emit light. The portion 3213b can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of second LEDs 3223b are arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction or front-back direction) of each radiation decoration part 3213b (see FIG. 157(a)).

Further, the back right decorative board 3223 is mounted on the board surface facing right, and includes a plurality of third LEDs 3223c capable of illuminating the right part of the center accessory 2500. This third LED 3223c is a full color LED. When the third LED 3223c emits light, the accessory prize opening 2006 in the center accessory 2500, the first sorting device 2530, etc. can be brightly illuminated.

Further, in the back right decorative board 3223, a plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 for displaying sub-designs and the like in the sub-state display 3500 are mounted on the upper board surface facing left. The sub-state LED 3510 is a side-view type LED that emits light in a direction parallel to the surface of the board on which it is mounted. The light from each sub-state LED 3510 is guided by a light guide pin 3520 to the sub-state display section 3501 at the right end of the logo decoration section 3211b of the upper back decoration 3211, and is radiated forward. The sub-state LED 3510 includes one first sub-symbol LED 3511 consisting of a full-color LED for indicating the first special lottery result, and one second sub-symbol LED 3512 consisting of a full-color LED for indicating the second special lottery result. , two first sub-reservation number LEDs 3513 consisting of single-color LEDs for displaying the number of reservations for the first special lottery results, and two second sub-retention number LEDs 3513 consisting of single-color LEDs for displaying the number of reservations for the second special lottery results. It has a sub-pending number LED 3514.

This back and front presentation unit 3200, when assembled on the game board 5, is connected to the guide provided at the rear through the space surrounded by the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213. To make the first picture 3110 and second picture 3120 displayed by light emission on the light guide plate 3102 of the light plate production unit 3100, the production image displayed on the production display device 1600, etc. visible from the front (player side) in good condition. Can be done. In addition, the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 can decorate the first pattern 3110, the second pattern 3120, and the area around the performance image, improving the appearance of the game area 5a. can be improved.

Further, according to the back front presentation unit 3200, by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs mounted on the back upper decorative board 3221, the back left decorative board 3222, and the back right decorative board 3223, the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left The decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 can be decorated with light emitting light, and a light emitting effect using them can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, according to the back front presentation unit 3200, the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative board 3222 and the second LED 3222b of the back right decorative board 3223 are activated in accordance with the light emitting display of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate presentation unit 3100. By making the LED 3223b emit light and decorating the radiation decoration part 3212b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the radiation decoration part 3213b of the back right decoration body 3213 with light emission, radiation is emitted to both left and right outside of the radiation pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120. The decorative portion 3212b and the radial decorative portion 3213b can appear to be continuous.

In addition, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front presentation unit 3200 are tilted so that the front end side protrudes forward as it goes from the center side of the gaming area 5a to the outside in the left and right direction. A sense of depth can be given to the second pattern 3120 by the radiant decorative portions 3212b and 3213b that are continuous with the radial pattern portion 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light plate 3102.

For this reason, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front presentation unit 3200 allow the player to enjoy a wide and large light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) that spreads from side to side. Because it can be shown as a game, it can have a strong impact on players, attracting their attention, and make them think that something good will happen to them. This can increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the back left decorative body 3212 of the back front presentation unit 3200 is located behind the left side of the center accessory 2500 when assembled on the game board 5, the first LED 3222a of the back left decorative board 3222 and the first When the second LED 3222b is made to emit light, the rear frame part 2504 of the center accessory 2500 can be illuminated and decorated by the light, and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100 can be made difficult to see from the player side (front). Can be done.

[5-9e. Back front lower left production unit]
Next, the back front lower left effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152, FIG. 156, and the like. The back front lower left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the left cooling fan 3107 on the left side of the front lower part of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate effect unit 3100.

The back front lower left decoration unit 3300 guides the back lower left decorative body 3301 with translucent back lower left decorative body 3301 in which the character “Katsu” is formed in a relief shape and protrudes diagonally upward. A decorative body base 3302 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light plate production unit 3100 is provided between the decorative body base 3302 and the back lower left decorative body 3301, and the character “Katsu” on the back lower left decorative body 3301 is provided. A back lower left upper decorative board 3303 is attached to the lower surface of the decoration base 3302 and is used to decorate the outer periphery of the back lower left decorative body 3301 with luminescent decoration. 167).

The lower back upper left decorative board 3303 and the lower back lower left decorative board 3304 have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of each of the lower back upper left decorative board 3303 and the lower back lower left decorative board 3304. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower left upper decorative board 3303 and the lower back left lower decorative board 3304, the part of the back lower left decorative body 3301 with the character "Katsu" can be decorated with light, or It is possible to decorate the outer periphery of the part with the characters ``'' or to decorate the entire back lower left decorative body 3301 with luminescence.

[5-9f. Back front lower right production unit]
Next, the back front lower right production unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152, FIG. 156, and the like. The back front lower right presentation unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the right cooling fan 3108 on the right side of the front lower part of the unit base 3101 in the light guide plate presentation unit 3100.

The back front lower right production unit 3400 includes a back lower right decorative body 3401 with translucent properties in which the word "war" is formed in a relief shape and protrudes diagonally upward, and a back lower right decorative body 3401. A decorative body base 3402 attached to the unit base 3101 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 is provided between the decorative body base 3402 and the back lower right decorative body 3401. A back lower right upper decorative board 3403 for luminescent decoration of the character part, and a back lower right lower decorative board 3404 attached to the lower surface of the decoration base 3402 and for luminescent decoration of the outer periphery of the back lower right decorative body 3401. (See FIG. 167).

The back lower right upper decorative board 3403 and the back lower right decorative board 3404 have white surfaces. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the upper surface of each of the back lower right upper decorative board 3403 and the back lower right decorative board 3404. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower right upper decorative board 3403 and the back lower right decorative board 3404, the part of the back lower right decorative body 3401 with the word "war" can be decorated with light. The outer periphery of the character "WAR" can be decorated with luminescence, or the entire back lower right decorative body 3401 can be decorated with luminescence.

[5-9g. Sub status display]
Next, the sub-status display 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157(a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the back right decorative board of the back front presentation unit in the back unit, the sub-status display, and the right part of the center accessory in a left side cross section, and FIG. a) It is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the relationship between the back right decorative board, the sub-state display, and the right part of the center accessory of the back front presentation unit in the back unit. FIG. 158 is a wiring diagram showing the wiring of some of the sub-state LEDs on the back right decorative board.

In the effect display device 1600, the sub-state display 3500 displays information about the result of the lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, in addition to the effect image for suggesting the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. Displays suggestive of the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, or display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. It also displays the number of pending items.

The sub-state display 3500 is provided near the right end of the upper back decorative body 3211 in the back-front presentation unit 3200 so as to be visible from the front (player side) at all times. The sub-state display 3500 includes a sub-state display section 3501 forming a part of a logo decoration section 3211b in which small spheres of the back top decoration 3211 of the back front presentation unit 3200 are arranged in a rosary shape, and a back front presentation A plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 mounted on the upper left surface of the back right decorative board 3223 of the unit 3200 and a plurality of light guide pins 3520 that guide light from the sub-state LEDs 3510 to the front end of the sub-state display section 3501 It is equipped with.

The sub-state display section 3501 extends vertically in an arc shape along the outer periphery of the logo section 3211a on the back decoration 3211. Further, the sub-state display section 3501 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward.

The plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are arranged vertically on the back right decorative board 3223, and are side-view type LEDs that emit light in a direction parallel to the surface of the board on which they are mounted (here, forward). Since the plurality of sub-state LEDs 3510 are mounted on the back right decorative board 3223, they are connected to the effect relay board 3026 via the upper back decorative board 3221 and the back left decorative board 3222, and are connected to the effect relay board 3026. Light emission is controlled by a connected peripheral control board 1510.

The sub-state LED 3510 includes one first sub-symbol LED 3511 consisting of a full-color LED for indicating the first special lottery result, and one second sub-symbol LED 3512 consisting of a full-color LED for indicating the second special lottery result. , two first sub-pending number LEDs 3513 consisting of single-color LEDs for displaying the number of pending results of the first special lottery result, and a single-color LED (for example, a red LED) for displaying the number of pending results of the second special lottery result. and two second sub-reservation number LEDs 3514.

The light guide pin 3520 has a rear end located in front of the sub-state LED 3510, and a front end that passes through one sphere in the sub-state display section 3501 and is located near the front end of the sphere.

This sub-state display 3500 displays the light emission mode (on, off, blinking, emitted light color, etc.) of the sub-state LED 3510 as a sub-pattern. Specifically, when suggesting the first special lottery result or second special lottery result, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are blinked in red for a predetermined variable time. In this embodiment, turning on and off is repeated every 2F (2/30 seconds).

When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "lose", the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are lit in red as a "lose" symbol. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win", the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are lit in green as a "win" symbol.

In addition, the display of the pending number of the first special lottery result and second special lottery result on the sub status display 3500 is based on the first sub pending number LED 3513 and the second sub pending number, which are arranged vertically. The number of pending items is displayed by a combination of the lighting states of the LEDs 3514. Specifically, when the number of reservations is "0", the top and bottom lights are turned off, when the number of reservations is "1", the top is lit and the bottom is turned off, and when the number of reservations is "2", the lights are turned off. The top and bottom are lit; when the number of reservations is "3", the top flashes and the bottom lights, and when the number of reservations is "4", the top and bottom lights flash. In this way, the number of reservations is displayed by a combination of the lighting states of the two LEDs in the first sub-reservation number LED 3513 and the second sub-reservation number LED 3514, respectively.

By the way, in this embodiment, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, but as described above, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 emit red or green light as sub-symbols. It does not emit blue light. Therefore, in the back right decorative board 3223, as shown in FIG. 158, the anodes and cathodes of the blue light emitting elements of the first sub-pattern LED 3511 and the second sub-pattern LED 3512 are connected and short-circuited. As a result, even if some malfunction occurs, electricity is not supplied to the blue light emitting element, and the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 will not emit blue light. Therefore, the sub-symbols are not displayed in blue color, which does not normally emit light, and it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. can. In addition, since the anode and cathode of the unused blue light emitting element are connected and short-circuited, it is possible to avoid static electricity from being accumulated in the light emitting element. The sub-design LED 3512 can be prevented from being damaged and the sub-design can be reliably displayed.

In this way, according to the sub-status display 3500 of the present embodiment, a sub-symbol that suggests the special lottery result (the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result) drawn on the sub-status display 3500 is displayed. Therefore, even if you miss the display of the main symbol by the performance image on the performance display device 1600 or cannot clearly understand the suggestion of the special lottery result by the main symbol, you can see the special lottery result by looking at the sub-designs. Players can be made aware of the lottery results.

In addition, in the sub-state display 3500, since the sub-state display section 3501 forms a part of the logo decoration section 3211b of the upper back decoration 3211, the sub-state LED 3510 is made to emit light to display the sub-design etc. Then, the logo decoration part 3211b looks like it is decorated with light, but when the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is drawn, the light emitting mode of the sub-state display section 3501 in the logo decoration section 3211b changes. Thereby, the player can be made to recognize that the light emitting mode is changing according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the player can be made to recognize the sub-symbols. At this time, the sub-status display section 3501 forming a part of the logo decoration section 3211b is decorated with a sub-pattern that suggests the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. The sub-symbols do not look inorganic as in the technique described above, and the sub-symbols can be blended into the decoration, making it possible to improve the appearance of the sub-status display 3500 and, by extension, the inside of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the light from the sub-state LED 3510 mounted on the back-right decorative board 3223 is guided by a light guide pin 3520 to the sub-state display section 3501 provided at a position away from the back-right decorative board 3223. Therefore, light can be guided to the front end of the sub-state display section 3501 in a good condition to display sub-designs and the like. In addition, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guiding pin 3520, the logo decoration part 3211b provided along the outer periphery of the logo part 3211a of the back upper decoration body 3211 can be The light can be guided to the position of the sub-status display section 3501, which is a part of the sub-state display section 3501, and the sub-pattern can be blended into the decoration of the back decoration 3211 to improve its appearance.

In addition, a first LED 3223a and a second LED 3223b for illuminating the back right decorative body 3213 and a center accessory 2500 are mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 on which the sub status LED 3510 for displaying a sub pattern etc. are mounted. Since a third LED 3223c for illuminating the first sorting device 2530 and the like is further mounted, the back right decorative body 3213 is decorated with light emitting light, and the first sorting device 2530 is brightened and distributed as game balls. B can be made more visible.

In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the sub-symbol for indicating the special lottery result was displayed using red light and green light, but the present invention is not limited to this, and red light The sub-design may be displayed using green light and blue light, or the sub-design may be displayed using green light and blue light. Further, the sub-symbols may be displayed using only one of red light, green light, and blue light. At this time, the same effect as described above can be achieved by connecting the anode and cathode of a light emitting element of a color that is not used (does not emit light) in the full color LED to short circuit. Note that it is desirable to short-circuit the anode and cathode of the light-emitting element of the color that is not used and then connect it to GND (ground), so that static electricity can be dissipated by dropping it to GND.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the sub-status display 3500, as shown in FIG. 158, the anode and cathode of the unused light emitting element among the three light emitting elements of the full color LED are connected to short-circuit. Although an example of use is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration body may be decorated with light emission, a predetermined part may be illuminated, or the first pattern 3110 and second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 may be displayed with light emission. The present invention may be applied to full-color LEDs such as . Specifically, for example, if a decorative body that does not transmit light of a specific color or a decorative body that has a part that does not transmit light of a specific color is decorated with full-color LEDs, the light of the color that does not transmit Since there is no need to emit light, the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of the color are connected and short-circuited. As a result, it is possible to avoid the luminescent decoration of the decorative body from looking unnatural due to emitting light in a color that does not need to be emitted due to malfunction, etc., and it is possible to achieve the same effect as above. .

More specifically, for example, the parts formed in red in the back top decoration 3211, back left decoration 3212, and back right decoration 3213 in the back front presentation unit 3200 (main decoration 3212a and main decoration 3213a) ) so that only red and green light can pass through, and when the full-color LED (first LED 3222a and first LED 3223a) provided corresponding to the part emits blue light, the part becomes blue. However, adjacent parts of a different color will be decorated with blue light, and the unintended luminous decoration will not be able to achieve the intended effect. There is a risk that you will not be able to perform to your full potential. On the other hand, by connecting and short-circuiting the anode and cathode of the blue light emitting element to the full color LED that is provided corresponding to the part that does not transmit blue light, the full color LED can be It is possible to avoid unintentional lighting decoration of parts adjacent to the relevant part due to malfunction, and it is possible to prevent unnatural lighting effects from being performed. A production effect can be exhibited, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the sub-state LED 3510 is mounted on the back right decorative board 3223, but the present invention is not limited to this. The sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the state display board (status display board), or the sub-state LED 3510 may be mounted on the back decorative board 3221.

[5-9h. Out ball detection unit]
Next, the out-ball detection unit 3030 that can be attached to the mounting portion 3155 of the back lower ball ejection unit 3150 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 163 and the like. FIG. 159 (a) is a front view of the out ball detection unit in the back unit, (b) is a right side view of the out ball detection unit, (c) is a rear view of the out ball detection unit, and (d ) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the front, (e) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit seen from the back, and (f) is a perspective view of the out ball detection unit viewed from a position near the lower front right. (g) is a perspective view of the out-ball detection unit viewed from the lower right rear. FIG. 160(a) is an exploded perspective view of the out ball detection unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 160(b) is an exploded perspective view of the out ball detection unit as seen from the back.

Further, FIG. 161(a) is a perspective view showing the relationship between the game panel and the out ball detection unit, and FIG. 161(b) is a perspective view showing the out ball detection unit in contact with the game panel. FIG. 162 is an enlarged sectional view taken from the right side when assembled to a game board and cut vertically at the center of the right sensor at the exit. FIG. 163 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the exit from the front when assembled on the game board.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 for detecting the game ball B received in the out port 1008 is formed so that it can be attached to the attachment part 3155 of the back lower ball ejection unit 3150. When the game board 5 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 of the first embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 may or may not be attached.

This out ball detection unit 3030 is driven into the gaming area 5a, and includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a normal winning opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and an accessory winning opening 2006. This is to detect game balls B that have not been accepted (game balls B that have not been given a benefit, also referred to as "out balls"). In this embodiment, the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is detected.

The out ball detection unit 3030 is inserted from the rear into the out recess 1101 in the game panel 1100, and includes a unit main body 3031 attached to the front of the light guide plate production unit 3100, and an out exit left sensor attached to the unit main body 3031. 3032 and an outlet right sensor 3033, and a cover 3034 attached to the unit main body 3031 so as to cover the rear sides of the left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033.

The unit main body 3031 includes a cylindrical cylindrical part 3031a that is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100 and extends cylindrical in the front-rear direction, and a partition part 3031b that divides the inside of the cylindrical part 3031a into left and right parts. , a flange portion 3031c protruding from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a in a flat plate shape in the left-right direction, and a flange portion 3031c that is recessed toward the front from the rear end side of the cylindrical portion, into which an out-port left sensor 3032 and an out-port right sensor 3033 are inserted. An insertion recess 3031d. The cylindrical portion 3031a has a front end approximately the same size as the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000, is long in the left and right directions, and has a lower inner surface inclined so as to become lower toward the rear side.

The partition portion 3031b is provided near the rear end of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and is partitioned into a size that allows one game ball B to pass through on both left and right sides. The front end side of the partition portion 3031b is curved so as to protrude forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and protrudes forward. The insertion recess 3031d is inclined so that the front side thereof is perpendicular to the lower inclined inner surface of the cylindrical portion 3031a, and moves rearward as it goes upward.

The out-port left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the partition portion 3031b within the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. The out-port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B that has passed through the right side of the partition portion 3031b within the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031. The left outlet sensor 3032 and the right outlet sensor 3033 are non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches.

The cover 3034 is curved so as to guide the game ball B that has passed the exit left sensor 3032 and the exit right sensor 3033 downward, and has a partition plate 3034a in the center in the left-right direction.

In this out-ball detection unit 3030, the flange portion 3031c of the unit body 3031 is attached to the attachment portion 3155 on the front side of the back lower ball ejection unit 3150 (see FIG. 162). Furthermore, when the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled to the game board 5, the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit body 3031 is inserted into the out recess 1101 of the game panel 1100, and the front surface of the flange portion 3031c is inserted into the game panel 1100. (See FIGS. 161 and 162).

When the out ball detection unit 3030 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper front end of the cylindrical portion 3031a of the unit main body 3031 protrudes forward beyond the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (FIG. 162). ). That is, the rear end of the out-guiding part 1003 is inserted into the cylindrical part 3031a of the unit main body 3031. Further, the lower end of the cover 3034 passes through the ejection part 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and protrudes below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200 (see FIG. 162).

This out ball detection unit 3030 detects that the game ball B guided backward by the out guiding section 1003 after flowing down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the gaming area 5a. It is supplied into the cylindrical portion 3031a, detected by either the left outlet sensor 3032 or the right outlet sensor 3033, and then discharged downward by the cover 3034. The out ball detection unit 3030 discharges the game ball B to the island equipment side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, without making it come into contact with the board holder 1200.

According to the out ball detection unit 3030 of this embodiment, when the ball is hit into the gaming area 5a, the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the normal winning hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and Since it is possible to detect game balls B that have not been accepted into any of the accessory prize openings 2006 ("out balls"), for example, acceptance of game balls B into a specific prize opening is continuously detected. If an "out ball" is not detected despite the presence of a player, it means that a fraudulent act is being carried out with respect to a specific winning hole, and it is possible to notify that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

In addition, by detecting "out balls", the number can be counted, so the general winning hole 2001, the first starting hole 2002, the normal winning hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the accessory The ratio of "safe balls" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known from the number of "safe balls" counted by detecting the game balls B received in the winning hole 2006 and the number of "out balls".

Furthermore, in the out ball detection unit 3030, since the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor 3033 provided on the left and right sides are partitioned by the partition part 3031b, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the out-port left sensor 3032 side, and the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be guided to the out-port right sensor 3033 side. The game ball B that has flown down the left side of the object 2500 can be mainly detected, and the game ball B that has flown down the right side of the center accessory object 2500 can be mainly detected by the outlet right sensor 3033. Therefore, based on the number of game balls B detected per hour by the out-door left sensor 3032 and the out-door right sensor 3033, it is determined whether the player tends to "hit the ball left-handed" or "hit the right-hand ball." Based on this determination, it is possible to prompt the player to perform the most suitable input operation for the game situation, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the intended game.

In addition, since the forward protrusion of the partition portion 3031b is shortened to make it easier for the game balls B to climb over, when many game balls B enter the outlet 1008 per time, the game balls in the partition portion 3031b are relatively easy to climb over. The game balls B can be released to the left side or the right side where the amount of B flowing is small, and the game balls B can be discharged without being delayed at the outlet 1008.

In addition, since the lower end of the cover 3034 is made to protrude below the discharge part 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the normal winning opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005, and the game ball B (“safe ball”) received in the accessory prize opening 2006 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows backward in the out ball detection unit 3030 and is detected by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor. 3033 can be prevented from being detected, and only "out balls" can be accurately detected.

In this embodiment, the out ball detection unit 3030 is attached to the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out ball detection unit 3030 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1101, the out ball detection unit 3030 can be attached, so it is compatible with the existing game panel 1100 that has an out recess 1101. In addition, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

In addition, on the game board 5, all the game balls B ("all balls") hit into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B ("all balls") ejected from the game area 5a are detected. ), the out ball detection unit 3030 detects only "out balls", so the numbers of "out balls", "safe balls", and "all balls" are compared. This makes it possible to detect the occurrence of ball jamming within the game board 5.

[5-10. Performance on game board]
Next, the main performances on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 164 and 165. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second picture is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first picture is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the light guide plate performance unit of the back unit. The game board 5 has a light guide plate effect on the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The unit 3100, the back front effect unit 3200, the back front lower left effect unit 3300, and the back front lower right effect unit 3400 perform predetermined light emission effects.

Specifically, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs shown in the figure are made to emit light, and the first pattern 3110 is decorated with light emission. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and at the rear of the back-front effect unit 3200, the characters "Decisive Battle" are illuminated and decorated, thereby suggesting to the player that an opportunity has arrived. This makes it possible to make the player think that something good is going to happen, increase expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a light emission effect using the light guide plate effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light. As a result, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a predetermined character that is in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed with light, which can surprise the player and have a strong impact on the player. In addition, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state such as a "jackpot game" will occur, and it is possible to increase expectations for the game.

When displaying the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 by emitting light, if the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front presentation unit 3200 are decorated by emitting light, the radiation pattern part of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 3122 and the radial decorative portions 3212b and 3213b of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 appear to be continuous, and together they constitute one pattern (special pattern). Therefore, a large picture pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 that constitute the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body Since the decoration 3213 is located in front of the second pattern 3120, a sense of depth can be given to the special pattern, and the special pattern can be made to look three-dimensional. Therefore, since it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest in the special symbol, to entertain the player, and to give the player something This can make the player think that something good is going to happen, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 3102 as described above and the light emitting effect of the decorative body can be combined as appropriate, and the effect displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be combined as appropriate. It can also be combined with images (display effects). As a result, by appropriately combining light emitting effects, display effects, etc., it is possible to present a variety of patterns of effects to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored, and also making it possible to keep the players entertained through various effects. It is possible to keep the player entertained and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. 166 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the connection configuration of each board, motor, etc. in the game board. The main control structure of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, as shown in the figure. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls gaming operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that controls. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control section 633a that controls the payout of the game balls B, and a launch control section 633b that controls the launch of the game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that includes a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and RAM that temporarily stores data. MPU1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. The circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and errors, and a section on the game board 5. It is equipped with a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also includes a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), etc. It also has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in main control") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This nonvolatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code that is given a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. This ID code once assigned is stored in non-volatile RAM and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an incoherent content, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a as being affected by electrical noise. This is a reset circuit. The forced reset by such a built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control side power-on process described later. I will do it. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM will always occur as described later, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( clear). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a will not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 will remain activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also operates a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as a "main control built-in hardware It has a built-in random number circuit. This hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range from 0 as the minimum value to 65535 as the maximum value is preset), and The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical value range are extracted one after another without duplication at high speed, and the values within the predetermined numerical value range are extracted. When all the values in the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a jackpot determination random number. It is designed to be set as .

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from its various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that is

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a second starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. mouth sensor 2402, general winning hole sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B accepted in the general winning hole 2001, normal winning hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B accepted in the normal winning hole 2003, accepted in the big winning hole 2005 The big winning hole sensor 2403 detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, the prize winning hole sensor 2513 detects the game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006, and the game ball B accepted in the first V winning hole 2007. The first V winning a prize opening sensor 2514 detects, the first losing opening sensor 2516 detects the game ball B accepted into the first losing opening 2535, and the second detecting the gaming ball B accepted into the second V winning opening 2008. V winning opening sensor 2515, third losing opening sensor 2518 that detects the game ball B received in the third losing opening 2555, out sensor 664 (or out opening left) that detects the gaming ball B discharged from the gaming board 5 Detection signals from the sensor 3032 and the right exit sensor 3033), the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects illegal magnetism in the gaming area 5a, the vibration sensor 3003 that detects vibrations acting on the gaming board 5, etc. are the main control inputs. The signal is input through a circuit to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, respective detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting changeover button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame release switch and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, via the payout control input circuit and the payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When the signals are input to the main control board 1310 (as they are without any intervention), they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Note that the respective detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through another board, and are input to the main control board 1310 directly. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via an input circuit. On the other hand, each detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 3001, the normal winning hole sensor 2401, the accessory winning hole sensor 2513, the big winning hole sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 2010, and the vibration sensor 3003 is sent to the panel relay board 1710. , that is, indirectly, to the main control board 1310, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the main control solenoid drive circuit to activate the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. , the respective drive signals to the prize winning opening solenoid 2512, the first distribution solenoid 2532, and the second distribution solenoid 2545 are output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or the predetermined From the output terminal of the output port, the status display of the function display unit 1400, normal symbol display, normal reservation display, first special symbol display, first special reservation number display, second special symbol display, second special The respective drive signals to the pending number display and the round display are directly output without going through another board. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311 by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (gaming information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information regarding the game (gaming information) from the output terminal of its predetermined output port. By outputting a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power outage clear signal) can be output to the power outage monitoring circuit, and the game ball B can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted, a firing permission signal that conveys that the firing of the game ball B is permitted is outputted to the payout control board 633. The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission for launch is set to launch permission logic when the launch is permitted, and launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when the launch is not permitted. is set to Note that the logic of the firing permission signal is that, as an initial value (default), the firing permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is started after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). Up to this point, the device is constructed of hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so as to be set to firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is an inversion of the firing permission logic.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the Non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first loss opening sensor 2516, the second V winning opening sensor 2515, the third losing opening sensor 2518, and the out sensor 664, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3001 A contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the normal winning port 2003, so the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port Detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2401 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the normal winning port sensor 2401.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently, so the game ball is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big prize opening sensor 2403 as well. In addition, since a large amount of the game balls B fired into the game area 5a are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a that is sectioned on the game board 5, the out sensor 664 frequently detects the game balls B. occurs in For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used also for the out sensor 664. On the other hand, in the general winning hole 2001 where the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of a proximity switch. Incidentally, regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not, a proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long life may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to control of game performance and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although the detailed explanation will be given later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although detailed explanation will be given later. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") that serves as a backup power supply to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. ). This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is turned off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors drops in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages become lower than the power failure warning voltage, outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a firing solenoid 542 that performs firing control, and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that performs ball feeding control. A control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch that has a push operation unit that releases the error displayed on the error LED display, and a ball A ball extraction switch for discharging the game balls B in the tank 552, the tank rail 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starting the ball extraction operation. , is equipped with.

[6-2a. Payout control section]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls regarding payouts on the payout control board 633 is a microcomputer that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout control MPU as a processor. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information related to games (gaming information) and various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port. In addition to inputting the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the dispensing control I/O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the out of ball detection sensor 574, the dispensing control I/O port, etc. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

Detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the payout device 580 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I/O port. Input to MPU.

Further, detection signals from the door frame release switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame release switch that detects the release of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the dispensing control input circuit, It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Further, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, a power outage of the main control board 1310, A power failure notice signal from the monitoring circuit and an error release signal from the error release switch are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , sends commands to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner to output commands to the error LED display or to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out is outputted to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the games of the players by keeping track of the number of game balls B put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is reported that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is reported that there is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, the connection between the main control board 1310 and When the number "1" is displayed, it will notify you that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "playing for balls" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, it notifies that the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate; When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a malfunction has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it will notify you that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the ball is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and sent to the payout control MPU. is input. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B lent out, and outputs a display signal of the remaining balance to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal The information is input and displayed on the ball rental display section 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 633b performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at fixed time intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. a firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit; a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse; The ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the gaming area 5a per minute, and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is the firing reference pulse multiplied by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and detects whether or not the launching of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will. The detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. Further, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input as a CR connection signal to the firing control input circuit, and then to the firing timing control circuit. A firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys permission to fire the game ball B is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the intensity with which the game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 195 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

The firing timing control circuit connects the CR unit to the CR unit connection terminal board based on the CR connection signal when firing condition 1 is established that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192. If the firing condition 2 that the game ball B is electrically connected is satisfied, and the firing condition 3 that the game ball B is allowed to fire based on the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B For example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

This firing solenoid drive circuit generates a driving current to launch the game ball B toward the gaming area 5a with a launch intensity commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 195, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189. In response to the input, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, thereby controlling the game balls stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200. One ball B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is transferred to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

In this embodiment, the firing control board 633 is provided with a firing control unit 633b that performs firing control using the firing solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. The signal may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that is not connected to the power supply board 630.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 166, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control section 1511 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control section 1511. and an effect display control section 1512 that performs drawing control.

[6-3a. Peripheral control section]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip, although detailed illustration is omitted. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voices, and sound effects that are referenced by this sound source IC. It is equipped with a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip, and when it receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it controls the peripherals based on these various commands. The CPU of the control IC sends game board side light emission data to the lamp drive board serial I/O for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and for outputting drive signals to the drive motors that operate various presentation units provided on the game board 5 is sent to the game board decoration drive board. Drive signals are sent from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or to the vibration motor 356 provided in the door frame 3, the operation button elevation drive motor 367, the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, etc. It consists of door-side drive data for outputting the door-side drive data, and door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LEDs etc. provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The door side driving light emission data to be displayed is sent from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame 3 side, and the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 is sent to the serial I/O port for the display control unit. In addition to sending data from the I/O port to the performance display control section 1512, it also outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

A detection signal from the second loss opening sensor 2517 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 is input to the peripheral control IC. Further, detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, the pressure detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, and the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the production display control unit 1512 that indicates that the production display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the production display control unit The operation of 1512 is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs sound information from the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. installed in the door frame 3, main body frame 4, etc. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, By sending a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic production) than before.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is out of control.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control section 1512 are executed by a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting and blinking commands, game board side lighting and blinking commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side are multiple serial input/outputs different from display commands. The bit rate is set to 250 kbps in this embodiment.

[6-3b. Performance display control section]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the production display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied. We are prepared.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I/O port, serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. is under control. Note that, if the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify that fact. Further, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the display control ROM stores schedule data corresponding to control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, and the control data (display commands). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM, including screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 as the schedule data progresses.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged chronologically in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one starting from the first screen data and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and generates the drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform the effect. Note that the VDP uses a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line's worth of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data held in this line buffer is transferred to the effect display device 1600. This is a method to output to.

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can also be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the positions where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by pasting together a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be expressed using one sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters arranged, for example, 2 horizontally x 3 vertically. can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially performs main scanning to set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in a direction intersecting that one direction. It is driven by the sub-scanning to be performed. When the effect display device 1600 receives one line of drawing data output from the effect display control unit 1512, the effect display device 1600 sequentially draws one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as a main scan. output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the drawing data for the next line is As main scanning, each of the pixels for one line is outputted sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 129, FIG. 141 to FIG. 145, etc. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, game balls B are stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 by the player rotating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3. is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more clockwise the handle 195 is rotated, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and when the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the game ball The downward speed of the ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Moreover, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view (the left side of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame). , it flows down the area to the left of the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N. Then, the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 passes through the windmill W, and passes above or below the plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. supplied to either side.

The game balls B supplied above the plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are placed at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction along the row of the obstacle nails N. If the center part is guided to the center and released below the row of the trouble nails N, there is a high probability that the center part will reach the first start port 2002 because the center part is located directly above the first start port 2002. Accepted. When game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game balls B supplied above the plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, There is a possibility that it will be accepted into the large prize opening 2005 which is open.

By the way, the game balls B supplied to the lower side of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted diagonally in a row along the lower side of the center accessory 2500 are not allowed to move by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 or the obstacle nails N. There is a possibility that it is brought to the center side in the left-right direction and accepted into the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, etc. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a is on the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (upstream above the upper right part 2502a of the front frame). When it enters the space 2506), it passes through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and is released above the normal prize opening 2003 of the center accessory 2500. , after coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the normal winning hole 2003, it is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the blocking portion 1006, and an entrance which opens at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. A second guide passage 2522 is provided. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with such force that it hits the stopper 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), it enters the first guide passage 2521, enters the upstream space 2506, and hits the stopper 1006. If the game ball B is hit with a force that does not make contact (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that the game ball B will enter the second guide path 2522. That is, the game ball B driven into the upstream space 2506 flows through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 depending on the driving strength.

In this embodiment, it is configured so that the second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 and detected by the normal winning hole sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls are issued from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. While the ball B is paid out to the upper tray 201, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result is "normal win", the closed second starting port in the attacker unit 2400 2004 remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery that is performed when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the time when the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). This suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 becomes open after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 after the game ball B is received into the normal winning slot 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result may be started. Since this is not possible, the start of suggesting the normal lottery result is suspended until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result ends. Further, the maximum number of normal lottery results that can be held is set at four, and for more than that, even if game balls B are accepted into the normal winning slot 2003, they are discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

The game ball B that entered the attacker right passage 2430 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 has no chance of being accepted into the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, and is released onto the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000, It is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 passes between the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting opening left standing wall part 2422, and then passes through the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424. , passes in front of the closed grand prize opening 2005 and is released onto the lower right rail 1004.

Then, when the game ball B passes between the second starting port upper guide shelf 2421 and the second starting port left standing wall part 2422, the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B in the normal winning port 2003 is " When the second starting port door 2411 is moving forward in "Normal hit", the game ball B is guided by the second starting port door 2411 and the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. When game balls B are received into the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B that was not guided by the second starting opening door 2411 falls onto the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424, passes from the left end of the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 to the front of the closed winning opening door 2413, and passes to the right. It is released onto the lower rail 1004 and is ejected from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

On the other hand, although the game ball B was guided to the second starting port 2004 side by the second starting port door 2411, the second starting port door 2411 retreated on the way and was not accepted into the second starting port 2004. The attacker enters the right passage 2430 from the third opening 2433 on the lower side of the starting opening 2004, is released onto the lower right rail 1004 without passing in front of the closed big winning opening door 2413, and exits from the out opening 1008. It is discharged outside the game area 5a.

In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the normal winning opening 2003 and the second starting opening upper guide shelf 2421, and the second opening 2432 of the attacker right passage 2430 is open, so The game ball B passing through the left side of the normal prize opening 2003 enters the attacker right passage 2430 through the second opening 2432 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2430 is discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the gaming area 5a without involving the big prize opening 2005.

Because of the above, the game balls B that have circulated through the first guide passage 2521 are not often accepted into the normal winning opening 2003, so by receiving the gaming balls B into the normal winning opening 2003, they are transferred to the second starting opening 2004. It is rare that a normal lottery result in which the ball is in an open state is derived, and the game balls B are not often accepted into the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, since the game ball B that has passed through the second guide path 2522 is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide path 2521, the game ball B that has passed through the normal winning hole 2003 is accepted into the second starting hole 2003. There is a high possibility that a normal lottery result (“normal win”) will be drawn in which the button is open, and there is also a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

For this reason, since the player performs a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, the driving force with which the game ball B enters the upstream space 2506 is increased. And, the driving strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is driven into the gaming area 5a with the driving strength that allows the game ball B to enter the second guide path 2522. It won't happen. As a result, it is possible to give variation to the driving operation of the game ball B, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and making the driving operation of the game ball B enjoyable for the player, suppressing a drop in interest. can be done.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. ”, “Small win”, and “Time saving (time saving) win”) A special lottery result will be drawn. Then, the special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In addition, the special lottery results that are drawn when game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "lose", "first small hit", "second small hit", and " There are "3rd small hit", "2R jackpot", "15R jackpot", etc. In this embodiment, the lottery probability of "small win" ("first small win", "second small win", "third small win") is higher in the second special lottery result than in the first special lottery result. is set high.

If the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are "small hit", "small hit" The accessory prize opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern depending on the type of item (see FIG. 144). The accessory prize opening 2006 is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, so if a "small win" is drawn, hit "right" and enter the first guide passage. Hit game ball B at 2521.

When the "small win" is the "first small win", the opening/closing time of the accessory prize opening 2006 is short, and it is almost impossible to accept the game ball B. In the case of "second small win" or "third small win", the time when the accessory prize opening 2006 is in the open state is long, and the game ball B is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 by "hitting right". Probability is high. When the game balls B are accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

If the game ball B is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 when the "small win" is "second small win" or "third small win", one of the accepted game balls B will be distributed to the first distribution. It is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 in the device 2530. When the "small hit" is a "second small win", the game ball B accommodated in the housing section 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 passes through the second sorting device 2540 and passes through the third sorting device 2550. is supplied to the third distribution table 2554 via the clone 2553. The game ball B supplied to the third distribution table 2554 is bounced by the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, from the left table 2554b or right table 2554c to the center table 2554a, It rolls in a circulating manner from the central table 2554a to the left table 2554b or right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 provided in the central table 2554a. You can be sorted. When the game ball B is accepted (distributed) into the second V winning hole 2008, a "15R jackpot" is executed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is accepted into the third loss port 2555, the "15R jackpot" etc. are not executed and the state returns to the previous state.

On the other hand, if the "small win" is the "third small win", the game ball B accommodated in the housing part 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 is transferred to the first V prize opening 2007 side in the second sorting device 2540. The winnings are distributed and a "15R jackpot" is executed.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008, and the receiving of the game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004, and the second 2. If the special lottery result is "2R jackpot" or "15R jackpot", a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the grand prize opening 2005 is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern A "jackpot" game is executed in which a game (referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds, for example, 2 rounds or 15 rounds).

Since this big prize opening 2005 is mainly located on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the player is not allowed to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. Can be done. When the game ball B is received in the big prize hole 2005 while the big prize hole 2005 is in an open state, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 send a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13 balls) from the payout device 580. game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, by allowing the grand prize opening 2005 to accept the gaming balls B when the grand prize opening 2005 is enabled to accept the gaming balls B, it is possible to pay out many gaming balls B and entertain the players. can.

Note that in the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is easier to perform the driving operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side, but on the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 Since the possibility of being accepted into the big prize opening 2005 is lower than that from the side, it is possible to let the player choose which passage to aim at, and to make it difficult for the player to get bored with a variety of games. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the case of a "15R jackpot" or a "2R jackpot" during the time saving state, after the "jackpot" game ends, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 to be drawn by lottery. The variation time of the special symbol for indicating the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is made shorter than usual until a predetermined number of variations (for example, 100 times) is reached, and then the next To speed up the time until a "win" is drawn.

In addition, in the "jackpot" game where you aim for the big winning hole 2005, the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 exist on the way to the big winning hole 2005 when the game ball B reaches the big winning hole 2005. There is a high possibility that the game ball B received by the player will be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and if the next "big win" or "small win" is drawn during the "big hit" game, an advantageous gaming state will be created in which the player is advantageous. This will continue for a long time, making it possible for the player to enjoy the game even more.

In this embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 receive game balls B from the start of the special lottery until the special lottery result is suggested. Once the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. It will be put on hold. The maximum number of reserved special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than 4, Even if game balls B were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without holding the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 suggest the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three stop-displayed pattern rows form a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the player operates the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301. In the player participation type performance, the push operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lift drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. using the front effect unit 3200, etc. as appropriate, and it is possible to entertain the players with various effects, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly.

[8. Main functions and effects of the game board]
In this way, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a along the periphery from the left side is placed in the first position in the guide passage group 2520 on the right side of the center accessory 2500. When it passes through either the guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 and is accepted into the normal prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 provided on the downstream side, a predetermined benefit (with the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, Since a normal lottery is given to determine whether to open or close the second starting hole 2004, the player is required to perform a driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 where the normal winning hole 2003 is located. You can play games.

The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are twisted in positional relationship so that they are lined up in the front-back direction at the weighted part 2520a in the middle of the line in the left-right direction. On the upper entrance side, the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 are lined up in the left-right direction, and the respective first guide passages 2521 and second guide passages 2522 can be clearly distinguished. The driving operation of the game ball B can be made easier to perform the sorting, and the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the desired first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 can be enjoyed.

On the other hand, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the weighted parts 2520a are twisted so that they are lined up in the front and back direction, so that the player cannot This makes it difficult to distinguish which guide passage is being circulated, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game ball B that is circulating through the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. can. These first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522 allow the game balls B being guided (distributed) to be seen from the front, and the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are formed of a transparent member. Because of this, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 appear to overlap in the weighted portion 2520a, which is lined up front and rear, so it is difficult to recognize the route of each guide passage at first glance. can be taken as a thing. Furthermore, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are twisted so as to be aligned in the left-right direction on the exit side of the lower part of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, each of the exit side Although the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be clearly distinguished, since they are twisted twice on the upstream side, the alignment of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the entrance side , the relationship with the arrangement of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 on the exit side may be difficult to distinguish and may be unclear.

Therefore, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, when the game ball B is hit (entered) into one of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, it is difficult to tell where it will come out from, and the guide path It is possible to make it difficult to recognize what the game result will be after circulating the group 2520, and if you hit the game ball B into which guide path among the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522, you will normally win a prize. Since it is difficult to know whether there is a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted into the slot 2003, when the game ball B is hit, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which guide path the game ball B is circulating through, and to encourage the player to It is possible to draw attention to the game ball B that is playing.

In addition, by paying attention to the game ball B circulating through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, the player can determine which of the guide passages (the second guide passage It is possible to make the player nervous depending on whether or not the game ball B will come out from the exit of the passageway 2522), thereby increasing the expectation for the game, and also to avoid unexpected exits (the exit of the first guide passageway 2521). ), it is possible to surprise the player by adding surprise, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

In addition, in order for the game ball B to enter the second guide passage 2522 that has an exit that is likely to be accepted into the normal winning hole 2003, it is necessary to adjust the driving force of the game ball B, so the player It is possible to adjust the driving force of the game ball B against the ball B and allow the game ball B to be hit. Therefore, it is possible to give a level of difficulty to the driving operation of the game ball B, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by changing the driving operation of the game ball B. It is possible to enjoy the input operation of B, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 have weighted portions 2520a that are lined up in the front-rear direction, the width of the guide passage group 2520 in the left-right direction can be adjusted in this part. Since it can be made as narrow as possible, it is relatively easy to secure a space on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the accessory prize opening 2006, the first sorting device 2530, etc. are arranged in the secured space. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of this embodiment, the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, which is provided with the game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven, is provided with a frame-shaped frame that partitions the game area 5a. In addition to the center accessory 2500 being attached, a third sorting device 2550 whose front end protrudes further forward than the game panel 1100 is provided on the lower side of the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make the sorting device 2550 stand out and attract the attention of the players, and it is also possible to make the third sorting device 2550 have a strong interest in sorting the game balls B. The present Pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a Pachinko machine to play, and it is possible to provide a Pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. In addition, since the third sorting device 2550 is provided at the lower side of the inner periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that partitions the inside of the game area 5a, the third sorting device 2550 can be placed inside the game area 5a. without interfering with the game balls B being distributed, and it is possible to enjoy both the game with the game balls B in the game area 5a and the distribution of the game balls B by the third distribution device 2550. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in playing the game.

In the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is placed on the right table among the left table 2554b and right table 2554c provided on the left and right sides with the center table 2554a in between. 2554c via the collection table 2554d, it rolls toward the lowered front side of the right table 2554c and hits the protruding piece 2558a of the third right-handed rotating body 2558 provided on the front side of the right table 2554c. It will be hit and move to the rear. At this time, depending on the timing at which the game ball B is hit by the projection piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 and the timing at which the game ball B reaches the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the third distribution right rotation body 2558 The strength and conditions with which the projecting piece 2558a of the rotating body 2558 hits the game ball B vary. Therefore, when the hit by the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotary body 2558 is strong to some extent, the game ball B climbs the right table 2554c towards the rear side, passes through the third distribution middle rotary body 2556, and goes to the rear side. It will enter the central table 2554a which is in communication with the central table 2554a. At this time, in the third distribution rotating body 2556, since the degree of communication between the center table 2554a and the right table 2554c (left table 2554b) is changed by rotation, the protrusion of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 2558a and reaches the rear third sorting rotating body 2556, depending on the rotation timing of the third sorting rotating body 2556, the game ball B enters the central table 2554a side. It may be returned to the right table 2554c without doing so. Furthermore, since a left table 2554b and a right table 2554c are provided on both the left and right sides of the central table 2554a, when the game ball B is strongly hit rearward by the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotating body 2558, the second During a strikeout, the ball may pass through the rotating body 2556 and enter the left table 2554b on the opposite side.

On the other hand, if the impact by the protruding piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is weak, the game ball B will return without being able to climb the right table 2554c to the rear side, and the timing of returning to the front side and the third Depending on the timing of the protruding piece 2558a of the right distribution rotating body 2558, the game ball B may be hit weakly again and move back and forth between the rear side and the front side of the right table 2554c. Then, when the game ball B is hit by the protrusion 2558a of the third right-handed rotating body 2558 and enters the center table 2554a from the rear side through the third middle-distributing rotating body 2556, it moves toward the front side of the center table 2554a. and rolls, and is accepted into either one of the second V winning openings 2008 and two third losing openings 2555 provided near the front end of the central table 2554a, or is not accepted by either of them. The center table 2554a passes through the collection table 2554d from the front end of the central table 2554a, enters the front side of either the left or right table 2554b or the right table 2554c, and then returns to the protrusion 2558a (or , it will be struck by the protruding piece 2557a) of the third distribution left rotating body 2557 and will move to the rear side.

In this way, the game balls B supplied to the third sorting device 2550 are transferred to the protruding piece 2557a of the third sorting left rotating body 2557 or the third sorting right rotating body 2558 on the front side of the left table 2554b or right table 2554c. By being hit rearward by the protruding piece 2558a, it enters the center table 2554a from the rear side of the left table 2554b or right table 2554c through the third sorting rotating body 2556, and moves the center table 2554a to the front side. The center table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the center table 2554a, and the recovery table 2554d are sequentially supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c via the recovery table 2554d. This will be repeated until it is accepted in either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 that is open on the table 2554a.

Therefore, by the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the game ball B is hit and passed from the left table 2554b or right table 2554c through the third distribution rotation body 2556. Since the game ball B is sent to the central table 2554a where the second V winning hole 2008 and the third losing hole 2555 are open, what happens when the game ball B is supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c? It is possible to make it impossible for the player to predict whether the game ball B will be hit with such force to the rear side, and the player's line of sight can be moved back and forth between the left table 2554b, the right table 2554c, and the center table 2554a. It is possible to have fun by nailing the game ball B.

Also, at the timing when the game ball B reaches the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558 If conditions such as the timing of hitting and the timing of the third sorting rotating body 2556 that makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the center table 2554a are met, the game ball B will move from the left table 2554b or right table 2554c to the center table 2554a. In addition, depending on the strength of the impact of the game ball B by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the third distribution Since it may pass through the middle rotating body 2556 and enter the right table 2554c or left table 2554b on the opposite side, the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the protrusion of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 2558a can make it difficult to predict the movement of the game ball B when it is hit to the rear side, and can make the player nervous depending on whether or not the game ball B enters the center table 2554a. In addition to entertaining the players, it also gives a sense of premium to the central table 2554a, and makes the players have a strong interest and interest in the game ball B that has entered the central table 2554a. You can do it. At this time, since the game ball B enters the central table 2554a through the third sorting rotating body 2556, the rotation of the third sorting rotating body 2556 when the game ball B enters the central table 2554a Depending on the position, the game ball B will be sent to the center side in the width direction of the central table 2554a or to the end side, and the game ball B can be guided in various directions on the central table 2554a, and can be guided in various directions. The player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B rolling along a smooth path, and can also make it difficult for the player to get bored, and can suppress a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Then, when the game ball B that has entered the center table 2554a is accepted into the second V prize opening 2008 that is open near the front end of the center table 2554a, the player receives a benefit (here, a "jackpot game") that is advantageous to the player. ), it is possible to make the player strongly hope that the game ball B that entered the central table 2554a from the third sorting rotating body 2556 will be accepted into the second V prize opening 2008, Depending on whether or not the prize is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited and increase his/her expectations for acceptance into the second V winning hole 2008. It is possible to arouse a strong interest in the distribution of the game balls B in the device 2550, and it is possible to enjoy the distribution of the game balls B and suppress a decline in interest.

Moreover, unless the game ball B supplied to the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c is hit with some force by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558, In addition to not reaching the third sorting rotating body 2556, depending on the rotational position of the third sorting rotating body 2556, the game ball B does not enter the central table 2554a, and even if the game ball B enters the central table 2554a, the second If it is not accepted in either the V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555, it will be returned to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c from the front side of the center table 2554a via the collection table 2554d, so it will take a relatively long time. , the game ball B stays in the third sorting device 2550, and it is possible to enjoy the sorting of the game ball B for a longer time than with a sorting device such as a clone in a conventional pachinko machine, and the player's playing time is improved. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest in.

Furthermore, as described above, it is impossible for the player to predict with what force the game ball B will be hit by the third distribution left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558. Above, the number of times the game ball B is hit by the protrusion 2557a of the third distribution left rotary body 2557 or the protrusion 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is not limited to one time, and the ball B has a complicated rolling path. To make the player feel strongly that the destination to which the game ball B is allocated has been selected by random chance, since it is accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 after passing through Can be done. Therefore, even if the time (sorting time) until the game ball B is accepted into either the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2555 in the third sorting device 2550 becomes long, it will not be possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing down naturally. Not only can the movement of the game ball B be enjoyed, but also the development through the selection of random destinations (rolling destinations) can be enjoyed, and the player can have a strong interest and interest in the game ball B, thereby preventing the player from getting bored. It can be made difficult to do so.

In addition, after the game ball B has been rolling for a relatively long time between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the center table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d, it has been accepted into the third loss port 2555 ( As mentioned above, even if the game ball B was distributed by the third distribution device 2550, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that the distribution of the game balls B was random. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to accept the distribution results, and it is possible to prevent players from becoming disappointed and losing interest in the game.

In addition, the game ball B moves back and forth between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, or circulates between the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, the center table 2554a, and the collection table 2554d. Even if it takes a long time to be accepted into either the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 and the distribution is confirmed, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided, the second V winning opening 2008 The player's interest will not decrease due to expectations of acceptance, and the player can be kept entertained, and the player will not get bored easily. Therefore, even if the game is accepted into the third losing port 2555, the feeling of disappointment can be alleviated, and a decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, if the game ball B that entered the center table 2554a and rolled forward is not accepted into either the second V winning hole 2008 or the third losing hole 2555, the game ball B enters the center table 2554a and rolls forward. Since it enters the collection table 2554d and is guided to either the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c on both the left and right sides, is the game ball B guided to the desired left table 2554b or right table 2554c on the collection table 2554d? It is possible to make the player excited depending on whether or not the game is true, and to enjoy the movement of the game ball B, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

In addition, since the protruding piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the protrusion piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are designed to contact and hit the game ball B above the center, When the game ball B is hit by the strikeout left rotation body 2557 or the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the game ball B can be made difficult to lift off the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c, and the third distribution device It is possible to prevent the game ball B from jumping out from the ball 2550. In addition, the protruding piece 2557a of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the protrusion piece 2558a of the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are made to protrude into the left table 2554b and the right table 2554c with approximately the same length as the radius of the game ball B. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chance that the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a will just meet the game ball B, and the game ball B will be unnecessarily hit and the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c (third sorting device 2550) Since it is possible to prevent the game ball B from jumping out from the center table 2554a, and because the protruding piece 2557a or the protruding piece 2558a easily scrapes the game ball B, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to enter the center table 2554a, and the left table 2554b Also, the game ball B can be easily moved back and forth between the rear side and the front side on the right table 2554c.

In addition, since the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are provided with a projection 2554i at the front end, the game ball B can be inserted into the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555. Even if the game ball B attempts to rotate along the edge of the opening, it will come into contact with the protrusion 2554i on the way, and by contacting the protrusion 2554i, the game ball B can be flipped from the edge of the opening to the front side or inside the opening, It can be prevented from jumping out from the edge and being accepted into the third losing opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's disappointment due to the game ball B being unnecessarily accepted into the third loss port 2555, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in playing the game.

In addition, the protrusion 2554i prevents the game ball B from going around the edge of the circular opening of the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 and being accepted into the third losing opening 2555 or the second V winning opening 2008. Since this can be prevented, the probability of acceptance into the second V winning hole 2008 can be made almost the same as the designed one, and the variation in the probability of acceptance into the second V winning hole 2008 for each pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made such that it is difficult to give players a sense of distrust.

Furthermore, a third sorting device 2550 is provided at the lower part of the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500, and the center table 2554a, left table 2554b, and right table 2554c are arranged side by side so that the rear side is higher. Because it is tilted, the third sorting device 2550 is located below the eye level of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, so the center table 2554a of the third sorting device 2550 and the left The table 2554b and the right table 2554c can be easily seen by the player, the game ball B rolling on the center table 2554a, the left table 2554b, and the right table 2554c can be easily seen, and the second V prize opening 2008 or the It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 in which the player can enjoy the movement of the game balls B distributed to the three losing ports 2555.

In addition, since the center table 2554a is tilted so that the rear side is higher, the game ball B that has entered the rear side of the center table 2554a from the left table 2554b or the right table 2554c and is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Since the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 are located between the player who is The movement of the game ball B can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and the movement of the game ball B can be made more enjoyable, and the player can be made to think that the game ball B is being drawn toward the second V prize opening 2008. , it is possible to increase expectations for acceptance into the second V prize opening 2008 and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the center table 2554a etc. are tilted so that the rear side is higher so that the game ball B rolls forward, the center table 2554a Since the width of the left and right sides can be widened, the rolling path of the game ball B on the central table 2554a can be made more diverse, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to enjoy the movement of the game ball B more. .

Furthermore, in the third sorting device 2550, the game balls B are first supplied to the right table 2554c via the collection table 2554d, and in order to receive the game balls B into the second V prize opening 2008, Since the hitting of the game ball B by the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is a necessary condition, when the third distribution right rotation body 2558 etc. are stopped for some reason, the right table 2554c of the third distribution device 2550 Even if an attempt is made to illegally accept the game ball B into the second V prize opening 2008 by supplying the game ball B to the central The game ball B does not enter the table 2554a, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from being improperly accepted into the second V prize opening 2008.

In addition, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 detect the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third It is possible to detect the presence or absence of rotation of the right-hand distribution rotating body 2558, and also to detect the presence or absence of rotation of the rotation body 2556 during third distribution by the rotation detection sensor 2563 during third distribution via the transmission gear 2567. Therefore, it is detected that the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557, third distribution right rotation body 2558, third distribution middle rotation body 2556, etc. has stopped due to some reason, and the rotation has stopped. It is possible to notify players, game hall staff, etc.

In addition, the rotation of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571, which are rotated by decelerating the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, is The presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is detected by the minute rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565. Therefore, even if the rotational speed of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is increased, the presence or absence of rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 cannot be determined. Since the left rotation detection gear 2569 and right rotation detection gear 2571 for detection are rotated while the rotations of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are decelerated, Since the rotation speed is slower than the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and the third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 detect the gear for left rotation detection. 2569 and the clockwise rotation detection gear 2571, the rotation of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation can be detected through the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the clockwise rotation detection gear 2571. The presence or absence of rotation of the body 2558 can be detected.

Furthermore, even if the rotation speed of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 is increased (high speed), the rotation speed of the left rotation detection gear 2569 and the right rotation detection gear 2571 is is slower than the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558, so the detection period of the third distribution left rotation detection sensor 2564 and third distribution right rotation detection sensor 2565 is unnecessary. There is no need to shorten the detection period to a suitable period, and an increase in the load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

For this reason, in this embodiment, the rotational speeds of the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 are increased (high speed), so that the third distribution device 2550 The third sorting left rotary body 2557 and the third right sorting rotary body 2558 that rotate at high speed can surprise the player, and the player will have a strong interest in the sorting of game balls B by the third sorting device 2550. can be used. In addition, by rotating the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 at high speed, the third distribution left rotation body 2557 and the third distribution right rotation body 2558 hit the game ball B. It is possible to make it more difficult to predict the timing of hitting the game ball B, and even a slight deviation in the position or timing of the game ball B will cause the game ball B to be grazed, making it difficult to hit the game ball B with force. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the following effects.

Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, nothing is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, and the back provided near the periphery The decorations on the back top decoration 3211, back left decoration 3212, and back right decoration 3213 of the front production unit 3200 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the back top decoration 3211, back left decoration 3212, and The pachinko machine 1 is decorated with a back right decorative body 3213 to improve its appearance. In this normal state, when the back top decoration 3211, back left decoration 3212, and back right decoration 3213 are decorated with light, the outer peripheral side of the light guide plate 3102 can be decorated with light when viewed from the front, and the back top decoration The light-emitting decorations of the body 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 make the pachinko machine 1 stand out, and the players' attention is drawn to the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration. It can be attracted to the decorative body 3213. On the other hand, when the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed by emitting light in a normal state, the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 becomes visible from the player side, and the outer peripheral side Since the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are not decorated with light, the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 appear dark, and the relative In other words, the first picture 3110 or the second picture 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 appears brighter, and the player's interest can be drawn to the first picture 3110 or the second picture 3120 on the light guide plate 3102.

Then, when the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed by emitting light, and the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 are also made to emit light, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decoration body 3212, and the back right Since the decoration of the decoration body 3213 together forms one pattern (special pattern), a large pattern can be shown to the player. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 that constitute the outer peripheral side of the pattern are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body Since the decoration 3213 is located in front of the second pattern 3120, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the special pattern and make the special pattern look three-dimensional. Therefore, since it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest in the special symbol, to entertain the player, and to give the player something This can make the player think that something good is going to happen, heighten expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Further, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 has a radiation pattern portion 3122 that reaches the periphery of the light guide plate 3102, and the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 have radiation pattern portions. 3122, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed by emitting light, and the back left decoration is displayed in the back unit 3000. When the body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 (at least the radiant decoration part 3212b and the radiant decoration part 3213b) are decorated with light, the radiant pattern part 3122, the radiant decoration part 3212b, and the radiant decoration part 3213b appear to be continuous. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity between the radial pattern part 3122, the radial decoration part 3212b, and the radial decoration part 3213b. The special picture composed of the body 3213 can be displayed without any discomfort, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, as described above, since the sense of unity of the special pattern can be enhanced by the radiation pattern part 3122, the radiation decoration part 3212b, and the radiation decoration part 3213b, after the second pattern 3120 is displayed by emitting light on the light guide plate 3102, , By making the radiant decoration part 3212b and the radiant decoration part 3213b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 emits light, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the second pattern 3120 spreads outward, It can surprise the players. At this time, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are provided on the left and right sides of the second pattern 3120, the second pattern 3120 appears to spread horizontally and become a special pattern, so it is wide. A three-dimensional special picture can be shown to a player, and the player can be entertained by the powerful special picture and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 that constitute the special pattern are inclined so as to protrude forward as they move toward the outer periphery, the inner side of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 The light guide plate 3102 (second pattern 3120) located at the back appears to be recessed to further enhance the sense of depth of the special pattern composed of the second pattern 3120 and the decorations of the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213. Thus, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, when the second pattern 3120 is displayed by emitting light using cocktail light in the light guide plate 3102 of the light guide plate production unit 3100, the part of the spectral light emitting part 3102c in the radiation pattern part 3122 etc. of the second pattern 3120 constitutes the cocktail light. Since the light is decomposed into its components and emitted in multiple colors, it is possible to change the light emitting mode of the second pattern 3120 (first pattern 3110), which increases the player's interest. can be attracted. To be more specific, for example, when yellow light consisting of red light and green light is irradiated as cocktail light from the circumferential surface of the light guide plate 3102, the portion of the second pattern 3120 excluding the spectral light emitting portion 3102c In this case, the light is emitted in yellow, but in the part of the spectroscopic light emitting section 3102c in the second pattern 3120, the yellow light is split into red light and green light, and the light is emitted glitteringly so that red and green are mixed. As a result, the second pattern 3120 is displayed by emitting light from a portion emitting yellow light and a portion emitting a mixture of red and green light. On the other hand, when light of one of the three primary colors of light (for example, red light) is irradiated from the circumferential surface of the light guide plate 3102, the light cannot be separated into any more at the part of the spectroscopic light emitting section 3102c in the second pattern 3120. Since this is not possible, the second picture 3120 will emit light in the same color, and the entire second picture 3120 will be displayed in the same color. In this way, the light emitting mode of the second pattern 3120 (first pattern 3110) that is displayed as a light emitting device can be changed depending on the color of the light irradiated onto the circumferential surface of the light guide plate 3102, so that more diverse light emitting effects can be created. This provides a pachinko machine 1 that can make it difficult for players to get bored, and can also entertain players by making the spectral light emitting section 3102c sparkle in a plurality of colors, providing a higher performance effect. can do.

In addition, since the spectroscopic light emitting unit 3102c uses the difference in refractive index due to the difference in color (wavelength) of light to perform spectroscopy, for example, when yellow light is irradiated from the peripheral surface of the light guide plate 3102, the player Depending on the position from which the second picture 3120 is viewed, one point of the spectroscopic light emitting section 3102c appears red, green, or yellow between red and green. Since one point of the spectral light emitting section 3102c on the light guide plate 3102 is very small, even the slightest movement of the player can cause one point of the spectral light emitting section 3102c to appear red or green, or to change the color between red and green. As a result, the spectral light emitting section 3102c appears to be shining in a plurality of colors, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. For this reason, when white light containing all three primary colors of light is irradiated from the circumferential surface of the light guide plate 3102, the spectral light emitting section 3102c appears to sparkle in rainbow colors, giving a strong impact to the player. It is possible to show a player a light emitting performance with a high performance effect.

Further, a spectral light emitting part 3102c is provided in the radiation pattern part 3122 of the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 which is continuous with the radiation decoration part 3212b and radiation decoration part 3213b of the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213. Therefore, when the cocktail light is irradiated from the circumferential surface of the light guide plate 3102, the radiation pattern part 3122 glitters in a plurality of colors. The light emission mode is similar to that of the decoration, and the sense of unity between the radiation pattern part 3122, the radiation decoration part 3212b, and the radiation decoration part 3213b can be further enhanced, and the sense of discomfort of the special pattern displayed as one can be reduced. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain players.

Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of this embodiment, the light guide plate performance unit 3100 having the light guide plate 3102 is provided behind the game panel 1100, and the outer periphery of the light guide plate 3102 in the light guide plate performance unit 3100 The upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 of the back front presentation unit 3200 are attached to the front side of the frame-shaped unit base 3101 holding the light guide plate 3102. At the same time, an effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 3101 via a back box 3010. Therefore, in a normal state, the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are visible through the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back left decoration 3212 are visible. Since the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is visible inside the back right decorative body 3213, when the effect image is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern are displayed on the light guide plate 3102. Even when 3120 is not illuminated and displayed, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. At the same time, by decorating the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 with light emission, they can be made to stand out and attract the attention of the players.

At this time, since the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration Even if the decorative body 3213 is decorated with light, the light from the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 will not pass through the light guide plate 3102 and be irradiated forward, and the back It is possible to reduce the fact that the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 shine and stand out due to the light emitted by the light emitting decorations of the top decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 3102 until the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 of the light plate 3102 are displayed by emitting light. In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are in a state as close as possible, so that the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display Diffuse reflection of light between the device 1600 and the device 1600 can be made difficult to occur, and it is possible to reduce the appearance that the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 shine and stand out due to the diffused reflection. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 3102, the LEDs on the first picture board 3103 and the second picture board 3104 are made to emit light, so that the first picture on the light guide plate 3102 By displaying the light guide plate 3110 and the second pattern 3120, the player notices the existence of the light guide plate 3102 for the first time, which can greatly surprise the player, and may bring something good to the player. It is possible to raise expectations for the game by making people think that there is no such thing, and it is also possible to suppress a decrease in interest by entertaining the first picture 3110 and second picture 3120 that are displayed with light emission. can be fully demonstrated.

In addition, since the back upper decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, the light guide Even if the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of 3102 are displayed by emitting light, the light does not brightly illuminate the front surfaces of the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213, and the light does not illuminate the front surfaces of the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration The back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 are not seen through the light plate 3102, and the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 can be displayed with light in good condition. Therefore, unlike in the past, the back of the light guide plate becomes bright due to the luminescent display of the picture on the light guide plate, which prevents the player from seeing the luminescently displayed picture. The picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be visually recognized and enjoyed in good condition, and the presentation effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be fully exhibited.

In addition, since a back top decoration body 3211, a back left decoration body 3212, and a back right decoration body 3213, which can be used for luminescent decoration, are attached to the front side of the unit base 3101 so as to surround the light guide plate 3102, the back top decoration The body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213 can decorate the surroundings of the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 that are displayed on the light guide plate 3102, so that the first picture 3110 and the second picture The pattern 3120 can be highlighted to strongly attract the player's interest, the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed, and the backside decoration can be By appropriately embellishing the body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, and the back right decorative body 3213, a variety of effects can be created using the back upper decorative body 3211, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the light guide plate 3102. can be shown to the players, making it difficult for the players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, a back top decoration 3211, a back left decoration 3212, and a back right decoration 3213 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102, and the decorations of the back left decoration 3212 and the back right decoration 3213 are arranged on the light guide plate 3102. Since it is related to (or continuous with) the second pattern 3120 that is displayed by emitting light, the back left decorative body 3212, the back right decorative body 3213, and the second pattern 3120 can be seen as one. , the second picture 3120 displayed by light emission can be made to look larger, and the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 on the outside of the second picture 3120 are located in front of the light guide plate 3102. Therefore, a sense of depth can be given to the second pattern 3120, and the second pattern 3120 can be made to look three-dimensional. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the players and make them think that something good is going to happen to them, thereby increasing their expectations for the game and suppressing a decline in interest. Can be done.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, as described above, it is possible to make it difficult to cause diffused reflection of light between the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to reduce the fact that the front surface of the effect display device 1600 is illuminated due to diffused reflection, making it difficult to see the effect image, and the effect image can be viewed in good condition. Therefore, both the effects based on the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 and the production based on the production image on the production display device 1600 can be shown to the player in good condition, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided on the rear side of the light guide plate 3102, when the first pattern 3110 and the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 are displayed by emitting light, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be darkened. , the first picture 3110 and the second picture 3120 can be made more visible, and the presentation effect of the light guide plate 3102 can be fully exhibited. In addition, the effect display device 1600 may display an effect image (for example, an imitation pattern) of the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern 3120 that is displayed by the light guide plate 3102, or the first pattern 3110 or the second pattern of the light guide plate 3102 may be displayed. By displaying a performance image that is integrated with the second pattern 3120, it is possible to present a more diverse range of performances to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest. .

The unit base 3101 of the light guide plate production unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 with the upper back decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, and the back right decoration 3213 in between, and the rear side of the unit base 3101 Since the performance display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010, the back top decoration 3211, the back left decoration 3212, the back right decoration 3213, and the game panel 1100 are provided on the front side of the light guide plate 3102. At the same time, the rear side of the light guide plate 3102 is closed by the effect display device 1600, so when handling the light guide plate effect unit 3100 (pachinko machine 1 or game board 5), an operator cannot access the rear side from the front side or the rear side. The light guide plate 3102 can also be made difficult to touch, and the light guide plate 3102 can be prevented from getting dirty or scratched.

Therefore, during manufacturing, the light guide plate 3102 can be made less likely to get dirt or scratches without having to be very careful not to get the light guide plate 3102 dirty or scratched. The production unit 3100 (light guide plate 3102) can be easily handled, improving work efficiency during manufacturing, and reducing the occurrence of defective products due to scratches during manufacturing, reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1. can suppress the increase in

Furthermore, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in a game hall or maintaining the pachinko machine 1 in a game hall, it is difficult for an operator to touch the light guide plate 3102, thereby making it difficult for the light guide plate 3102 to get dirty or scratched. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play the game on the pachinko machine 1 with the light guide plate 3102 free of dirt and scratches, and the first pattern 3110 and the The second picture 3120 can be shown in a good condition, and the presentation by the light guide plate 3102 can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing loss of interest.

Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of this embodiment, the transparent center accessory 2500 is attached via the flange portion 2503 to the game panel 1100, which is provided with the game area 5a through which the game balls B circulate on the front side. At the same time, a frame-shaped rear frame part 2504 is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening part 1102 from the flange part 2503 to the opening part 1102 of the game panel 1100, and this rear frame part 2504 has a certain cross-sectional shape. Since the frame is decorated with a plurality of rows of unevenness extending in the front-rear direction in the circumferential direction of the frame, light is diffusely refracted due to the lens action of the decoration, and light passes through the rear frame part 2504 to the opening 1102. The inner circumferential surface appears unclear. In addition, the decorative portion consisting of a plurality of concave and convex portions can be used to illuminate light from LEDs and production display devices 1600, etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and light from other pachinko machines. By reflecting light from the rear frame 2504, the rear frame portion 2504 appears to sparkle. In this way, the lens effect and reflective effect of the decoration of the rear frame part 2504 can make it difficult to see the inner circumferential surface (cut surface) of the opening 1102 through the rear frame part 2504, thereby suppressing deterioration in appearance. can.

In addition, the outside of the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is used as the game area 5a where the game balls B circulate, and the center accessory 2500 is made transparent, and the rear frame portion 2504 is formed approximately along the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102. Since the size of the inner periphery of the rear frame portion 2504 approaches the size of the opening 1102, the range where the rear of the game panel 1100 can be seen can be at least the same size as the opening 1102, Rear visibility can be improved. Therefore, the range in which the back and front presentation unit 3200, light guide plate 3102, presentation display device 1600, etc. provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 can be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be made wider than before. , the back and front presentation units 3200 and the like can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and the presentation effects of the back and front presentation units 3200 and the like can be fully exhibited.

Furthermore, the front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 allows the front surface of the game panel 1100 (game area 5a) to be clearly divided into an area where game balls B circulate (outside the frame) and an area where game balls B do not circulate (inside the frame). Therefore, the back and front performance unit 3200, light guide plate 3102, performance display device 1600, etc. provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 can be used to control the game balls B circulating in the game area 5a outside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy playing games with game balls B within a game area 5a without obstructing visibility, and that can suppress a decrease in player's interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration consisting of a plurality of concave and convex portions on the rear frame portion 2504 allows light from the LEDs and effect display device 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1, and the game in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since light in the hall, light from other pachinko machines, etc. can be reflected, the rear frame part 2504 and front frame part 2502 of the center accessory 2500 appear to shine, and the pachinko machine It is possible to provide a highly appealing Pachinko machine 1 that can improve the appearance of the machine 1 and attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 in the game panel 1100 can be made difficult to see from the player side by the rear frame 2504 of the center accessory 2500. Even if plywood is used whose inner peripheral surface (cut surface) is not clean, deterioration in appearance can be suppressed. Therefore, relatively inexpensive plywood can be used as the game panel 1100, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

By the way, if the rear frame 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is a certain distance from the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102 that can be seen through the transparent rear frame 2504 will be separated from the rear frame. Since it appears shifted relative to the portion 2504, it becomes easier for the player to notice the existence of the inner circumferential surface. In contrast, in this embodiment, the rear frame 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is brought close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, so the opening 1102 is visible through the transparent rear frame 2504. The inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102 appears to substantially match the rear frame 2504, creating an illusion that the rear frame 2504 and the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102 are integrated. By making it difficult for the user to notice the presence of the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102, deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rear frame 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is brought close to the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 that can be seen through the transparent rear frame 2504 is The rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 appear to be substantially aligned with the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102, giving the illusion that the rear frame portion 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 are integrated to the player. By making it difficult to notice the presence of the image, it is possible to suppress deterioration in appearance.

In addition, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b of the back left decorative board 3222 in the back front presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 that emits and decorates the rear frame portion 2504 are provided at the rear of the game panel 1100, the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are provided. By decorating the rear frame part 2504 of the center accessory 2500 with the back left decorative body 3212 by emitting light from the two LEDs 3222b, the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102 is made difficult to see by the light-emitting decoration of the rear frame part 2504. In addition, by lighting the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b appropriately according to the gaming situation (gaming state) and decorating the rear frame 2504 with light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect, and the game It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b are provided behind the game panel 1100 to decorate the rear frame 2504 with light, the LEDs are mounted between the rear frame 2504 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1102. Compared to the case where a decorative substrate is provided, the rear frame portion 2504 can be brought as close as possible to the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1102, so that the frame can be removed without passing through the transparent center accessory 2500. The range that can be seen through the interior can be expanded, and rearward visibility can be improved.

In addition, since the first LED 3222a and second LED 3222b for illuminating the rear frame 2504 are provided at the rear of the game panel 1100, the light for illuminating the rear frame 2504 of the center accessory 2500 is directed forward. Therefore, the light from the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b can easily reach the player's eyes, and the rear frame portion 2504 can be decorated with brighter light. Since the plurality of irregularities forming the decoration extend in the front-rear direction, the rear frame portion 2504 is decorated with light from the first LED 3222a and the second LED 3222b, and also the first LED 3222a The light from the second LED 3222b can be guided to the front end of the rear frame section 2504, and the front surface of the center accessory 2500 and the front frame section 2502 can also be decorated with light emitting light, making it possible to improve the appearance.

In addition, since the rear frame portion 2504 has a decoration in which a plurality of unevenness having a constant cross-sectional shape and extending in the front-rear direction are arranged in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction of the frame, the center accessory 2500 is molded with resin. When removing the center accessory 2500 from the mold, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the mold by simply pulling it out in the front-rear direction, so there is no need to use a complicated mold for molding the center accessory 2500, and the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the mold. This increase in cost can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, on the front side of the game panel 1100 having the opening 1102 penetrating from front to back, the center accessory 2500 is partitioned to prevent the game ball B from entering inside. In the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 of the center base 2501, a flange portion 2503 that extends inward from the rear end of a portion that extends at least vertically and is located outside the opening portion 1102 is used for playing games. Since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 by attaching it to the panel 1100, nothing extends to the outside (playing area 5a side) at the part of the front frame part 2502 where the flange part 2503 extends inward. It means that it is not. Therefore, since it is possible to plant the obstacle nail N at a position as close as possible to the front frame part 2502 of the center accessory 2500, the substantial play area 5a can be placed in the front frame part 2502. Even if the size of the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 is the same, the gaming area 5a can be made larger.

In addition, in the gaming area 5a, an area outside (on the left side) of the vertically extending portion on the left side of the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 of the center accessory 2500 is an area where the gaming balls B mainly flow downward. Since the front frame part 2502 has a flange part 2503 extending inwardly at the corresponding part, the width in the left-right direction of the area where the game ball B flows downward (the area on the left outer side of the center accessory 2500) can be made larger. Therefore, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted in that area make it possible to make the game ball B flow down while moving it greatly in the left and right direction, so it is possible to give the game ball B complex movements and to play the game ball B. The falling time of the ball B can be increased or reduced, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B itself, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, the flange portion 2503 is installed by extending inward from a portion of the front frame portion 2502 that is located outside the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, and the flange portion 2503 is attached to the side opposite to the game area 5a. Since it extends to the side, the game ball B always flows over the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B can circulate in a stable state without exhibiting strange behavior. To be more specific, for example, the flange part attached to the game panel in the center accessory extends inside the opening of the game panel, and the peripheral wall part extends forward from the inner end of the flange part. By doing so, it is possible to enlarge the gaming area outside the peripheral wall portion. However, in the above case, since there is no game panel behind the part located inside the opening in the flange part, if the game medium flows (rolls) through the part in the flange part, There is a possibility that the part vibrates and behaves strangely different from the game media flowing on the game panel, or that the flange part becomes fatigued and damaged early due to the vibration. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, since the game ball B always circulates on the game panel 1100, the game ball B does not behave strangely and can circulate in a stable state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful due to strange behavior of the game ball B, and also because the game ball B does not flow on the flange portion 2503 extending inward. , the corresponding part of the flange portion 2503 will not be fatigued and damaged early due to the circulation of the game ball B.

In addition, since the flange portion 2503 extends inward from a portion of the front frame portion 2502 located outside the opening 1102, the flange portion 2503 can be reliably attached to the game panel 1100, as described above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that exhibits effects.

In addition, a part of the flange portion 2503 that attaches the center accessory 2500 to the game panel 1100 extends inward from the front frame portion 2502, so that the game ball B can circulate over the corresponding portion of the flange portion 2503. Therefore, the transparent flange portion 2503 will not become dirty or scratched due to the circulation of the game balls B, and the transparency will not deteriorate, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming bad. The effect of the product 2500 can be exerted continuously.

Furthermore, in the part of the front frame part 2502 of the center accessory 2500 where the flange part 2503 extends inward, the front frame part 2502 can be reinforced from the inside of the frame by the flange part 2503. Even if the game ball B contacts (abuts) the relevant part of the front frame part 2502, the strength of the front frame part 2502 can be maintained by the flange part 2503, and the deformation of the front frame part 2502 (center accessory 2500) can be prevented. and damage can be prevented.

In addition, as mentioned above, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall part can be increased by the mounting part, when the game medium comes into contact with it, the peripheral wall part elastically deforms and holds the game medium like an elastic body (rubber or spring). It can prevent it from being bounced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game media circulating in the game area from making strange movements different from those in the past due to contact with the peripheral wall, and it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable. This can prevent a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, since the strength and rigidity of the front frame part 2502 can be increased by the flange part 2503, it is possible to maintain the strength and rigidity of the center accessory 2500 equivalent to that of conventional products, and the center accessory 2500 It is possible to prevent deformation of the molded product when it is molded with resin and removed from the mold, and it is possible to increase the yield and suppress the increase in cost.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, it is possible to make the front frame part 2502 etc. difficult to see from the player, giving the player the illusion that the gaming area 5a through which the gaming balls B circulate is large. This makes it possible to differentiate the pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines by making the game area 5a look larger.

In addition, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, light from LEDs etc. provided in the pachinko machine 1, light in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, etc. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting player's interest by making a center accessory 2500 appear to shine and improving the appearance within a game area 5a by reflecting the objects. be able to.

Furthermore, since the center accessory 2500 is transparent, even if the front frame 2502 is located outside the edge of the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100, the front frame 2502 remains in the same position as the edge of the opening 1102. This creates the illusion that the game ball B is distributed, and the game area 5a where the game balls B circulate can be made to appear larger than it actually is.

In addition, as described above, since the gaming area 5a can be enlarged by extending the flange portion 2503 inward, the frame-shaped front frame portion 2502 is enlarged and the position from which the flange portion 2503 is extended is adjusted. By making some efforts, it is possible to increase the size of the frame while preventing the size of the game area 5a from becoming smaller. Therefore, through the frame of the center accessory 2500 and through the opening 1102, the light guide plate production unit 3100, back front production unit 3200, production display device 1600, etc. provided at the rear of the game panel can be seen by the player in a good condition. To allow the user to enjoy both the game using the game ball B in the game area 5a and the performance using the light guide plate performance unit 3100, the back-front performance unit 3200, the performance display device 1600, etc. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is capable of

Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of this embodiment, the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) in the back front presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 has a main decorative part that can transmit only two of the three primary colors of light. 3212a (main decorative part 3213a), the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a) is colored in a predetermined color. Even if the body 3213) is not decorated with light emitting, the color of the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a) can make the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) stand out, and the back left decorative board 3222 (back A highly appealing pachinko machine capable of attracting players' attention even when the first LED 3222a and second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) consisting of full-color LEDs on the right decorative board 3223) are not emitting light. 1 can be provided. When a game is played in the gaming area 5a by the player's operation, the plurality of first LEDs 3222a mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) and The second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) emits light as appropriate, and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is decorated with light. ) can be displayed beautifully, attracting players' interest strongly, and making players aware of changes in the gaming situation and thinking that something good might happen. This can increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

When this back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is decorated with light, the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) consisting of a full color LED corresponding to the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a) is Since the anode and cathode of the light-emitting element that emits a color that does not pass through the decorative portion 3212a (main decorative portion 3213a) are connected and short-circuited, the light-emitting element will not emit light due to malfunction. Therefore, due to the malfunction of the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) corresponding to the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a), the radiation decorative part 3212b ( Since it is possible to prevent the radiation decoration part 3213b) from being decorated with light in an unintended color, the back left decoration 3212 (back right decoration 3213) can be reliably decorated with light in the intended color. The decorative effect of the luminescent decoration of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be fully exhibited.

In addition, in the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) consisting of a full-color LED corresponding to the main decoration part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a), in one of the full-color LEDs, the anode and cathode of the light emitting element of the color that does not emit light are connected. Since the light emitting element is short-circuited, it is possible to avoid static electricity from being charged in the light emitting element, and the charged static electricity may adversely affect other light emitting elements in the same package, causing the first LED 3222a (first LED 3223a) to Damage can be prevented, and the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can be decorated with light emission in a good condition.

In addition, since the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a) of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) can transmit only two of the three primary colors of light, the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a) ) The second LED 3222b (second LED 3223b) consisting of a full-color LED corresponding to the radiant decoration part 3212b (radiant decoration part 3213b) adjacent to the main decoration part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a) is colored in a color that does not transmit When the light is emitted, the radiation decoration part 3212b (radiation decoration part 3213b) adjacent to the main decoration part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a) can be decorated with bright light. Therefore, even if there is no light-blocking partition (for example, a reflector) provided between the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) and the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223), the main decorative part 3212a (main decoration part 3213a) and the adjacent radiant decoration part 3212b (radiant decoration part 3213b) can be clearly separated and decorated with light, and the back left decoration body 3212 (back right decoration body 3213) can be decorated with light. By simplifying the configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the surface of the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) is white, the first LED 3222a and second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a) mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) are white. The light from the second LED 3223b) can be reflected by the surface of the white back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223), making the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) a brighter light-emitting decoration. can be done. In addition, since the surface of the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) is white, the main decorative part 3212a (main decorative part 3213a) in the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is colored. It is possible to improve the color development of the area where the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213) is located, and to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the back left decorative body 3212 (back right decorative body 3213). Through this, the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) can be made less noticeable from the player side (front), and deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first LED 3222a and second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) consisting of a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223), all the first LEDs 3222a And since it becomes possible to make the second LED 3222b (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) a full-color LED, all the first LED 3222a and second LED 3222b mounted on the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) By using (first LED 3223a and second LED 3223b) full-color LEDs of the same type (model number), the cost for manufacturing the back left decorative board 3222 (back right decorative board 3223) can be reduced by unifying parts. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven includes a production display device 1600 provided in the center and a first starting port that can receive the game ball B. 2002, the back right decorative body 3213 of the back front presentation unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 adjacent to each other, and the center accessory 2500 as a special distribution area where the game balls B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 can be distributed. A first sorting device 2530 and a sub-state display section 3501 of a sub-state display 3500 that is continuous with the logo decoration section 3211b of the back decoration 3211 are provided, and the game can be changed by the player's operation. When the game ball B hit into the area 5a is accepted into the first starting port 2002 (second starting port 2004), the main control board 1310 displays the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result). A lottery is held, and predetermined benefits are awarded according to the special lottery results, so in order to obtain the benefits, the player is required to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002. It can be fun to operate.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 (second starting port 2004) and a special lottery result is drawn, the result of the lottery is displayed on the effect display device 1600 provided in the center of the gaming area 5a. In accordance with the special lottery result, a symbol suggesting the special lottery result (also referred to as a main symbol) is displayed, and the sub-state LED 3510 on the back right decorative board 3223 emits light as appropriate, and the light is transmitted by the light guide pin 3520. The light is guided to the sub-state display section 3501, and the sub-symbol is displayed on the sub-state display section 3501.

Therefore, in addition to allowing the player to recognize the special lottery result drawn by the main symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the sub-state display section 3501 (sub-state display device 3500) on which a predetermined decoration is formed , sub-symbols that suggest the special lottery results are displayed, so even if you miss the display of the main symbol or don't understand the main symbol's suggestion of the special lottery result, you can still use the sub-symbols. By looking at it, the player can recognize the special lottery result.

In this sub-state display section 3501, since a predetermined decoration (the same decoration as the logo decoration section 3211b) is formed, the display of the sub-pattern makes the decoration look like a luminescent decoration. When a game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is drawn, the lighting mode of the decoration changes. It is possible to make the player recognize that the light emitting mode is changing according to the special lottery result drawn, and it is possible to make the player recognize the sub-symbol (suggestion of the special lottery result drawn). At this time, since the sub-symbols indicating the special lottery results drawn in the sub-status display section 3501 are decorated, the sub-symbols do not look inorganic like in conventional pachinko machines, and the sub-symbols are decorated. This can improve the appearance of the sub-status display section 3501 (sub-status display 3500) and, ultimately, the inside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, a first LED 3223a and a second LED 3223b for illuminating the back right decorative body 3213 and a first sorting device 2530 are mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 on which the sub status LED 3510 for displaying the sub pattern is mounted. Since a third LED 3223c for illuminating etc. is further implemented, the back right decorative body 3213 is decorated with light emission, and the first sorting device 2530 is brightened to make it easier to see the game balls B in circulation. can do. In addition, compared to the case where the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a, the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c are mounted on separate boards, only one back right decorative board 3223 is required, which takes up the space required. Therefore, the secured space allows you to enlarge the back right decoration 3213, the first sorting device 2530, etc., or place other decorations, accessories, etc., making the game even more enjoyable. A pachinko machine 1 that can entertain players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 on the back right decorative board 3223 is guided to the sub-state display section 3501 by the light guiding pin 3520, the sub-state display section 3501 is separated from the back right decorative board 3223. Even if the sub-symbol is provided in a different position, the light guiding pin 3520 can guide the light to the sub-state display section 3501 in a good condition and display the sub-symbol. In addition, since the light from the sub-state LED 3510 can be guided to an arbitrary position by the light guide pin 3520, the part where the sub-pattern is displayed can be set to a position that matches the shape of the decoration. The design can be blended into the decoration to improve the appearance.

In addition, the substrate surface on which the sub-state LED 3510, the first LED 3223a, the second LED 3223b, and the third LED 3223c are mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 is turned to the back in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (left-right direction). The right decorative board 3223 is provided, and the side surface in the thickness direction of the back right decorative board 3223 faces the front-rear direction, making it difficult to see the back right decorative board 3223 from the front. It is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming unsightly due to the decorative board 3223 being visible, and to improve the appearance within the game area 5a.

In addition, since the surface of the back right decorative board 3223 is white, the light from the first LED 3223a, second LED 3223b, and third LED 3223c mounted on the back right decorative board 3223 is transferred to the white back right decorative board 3223. It can be reflected by the surface, and the back right decorative body 3213 can be decorated with light emitting light more brightly, the first sorting device 2530 of the center accessory 2500 can be illuminated more brightly, and the back right decorative board 3223 can be illuminated more brightly. It can be made less noticeable from the front, and deterioration in appearance can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the back right decorative board 3223 is provided between the back right decorative body 3213 and the first sorting device 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first LED 3223a is placed on one board surface of the back right decorative board 3223. and the second LED 3223b are mounted, and the third LED 3223c is mounted on the other board surface, and the light from each is not blocked by the back right decorative board 3223 and irradiated to the opposite side. When the first LED 3223a and the second LED 3223b are made to emit light, the first sorting device 2530 is illuminated, and when the third LED 3223c is made to emit light, the back right decoration body 3213 is decorated with light emission. The body 3213 and the first sorting device 2530 can be decorated and illuminated with light emission separately in a clear state, and it is possible to present a natural light-emitting effect to the player, and to fully enjoy the effect of the light-emitting effect. This allows players to enjoy themselves and prevent them from losing interest.

In addition, since the special distribution area is provided with the accessory prize opening 2006 and the first sorting device 2530, when the third LED 3223c of the back right decorative board 3223 is made to emit light, the accessory prizes provided in the special distribution area are displayed. Since the winning hole 2006 and the first sorting device 2530 are brightly illuminated, the player's attention can be directed to the prize winning hole 2006 and the first sorting device 2530, and the prize winning hole 2006 It is possible to make the user think that the player will open the game ball B so that it can receive the game ball B, and to make the user perform the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the accessory prize opening 2006. Then, when the accessory prize opening 2006 becomes available for acceptance and the game ball B is accepted and sent to the first sorting device 2530, the first sorting device 2530 receives the game ball B according to the special lottery result. Since the game is distributed to either the first loss port 2535 side or the first hit path 2536 side, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game is distributed to the first hit path 2536, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest. At this time, by making the third LED 3223c emit light and illuminating the first sorting device 2530, it is possible to make it easier to see the game ball B in the first sorting device 2530. You can enjoy the distribution.

Furthermore, the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and the second sub-symbol LED 3512 in the sub-state LED 3510 are made into a full-color LED in which three red, green, and blue light-emitting elements are combined into one, and the anode of the blue light-emitting element is The anode and cathode of the blue light-emitting element, which does not need to emit light, are connected and short-circuited, so even if some malfunction occurs, the light emission will not occur. No electricity is supplied to the element, and it does not emit light in the relevant color (blue). Therefore, the sub-symbols are not displayed in colors that do not normally emit light, and it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. can.

In addition, the first sub-design LED 3511 and the second sub-design LED 3512 are full-color LEDs, and in one full-color LED, the anode and cathode of a light-emitting element of an unused color (blue) are connected and short-circuited, so that the light-emitting element This makes it possible to avoid static electricity from being charged, and prevents the charged static electricity from damaging other light emitting elements in the same package and damaging the full color LED. It can be displayed.

In addition, in one full-color LED, the anode and cathode of the light-emitting element of the color that is not used are connected and short-circuited, so there is no need to connect the light-emitting element to the LED driver for driving (light-emitting) the LED. Therefore, the number of LED driver channels can be saved by the number of short-circuited (anode and cathode connected) light emitting elements. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of LED drivers relative to the number of full-color LEDs to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, or to reduce the number of LED drivers by using the remaining channels in the LED driver to drive another LED. It can be used effectively without waste.

In addition, full-color LEDs are used as the first sub-symbol LED 3511 and second sub-symbol LED 3512, and full-color LEDs are also used for the first LED 3223a, second LED 3223b, and third LED 3223c, so the type of LED used is single. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is composed of two guide passages, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, but is not limited to this. The guide passage may be composed of two or more guide passages.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guide passage group 2520 is twisted 90 degrees and then twisted 90 degrees in the opposite direction, so that the inlet and outlet lines are the same, but the invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be twisted so that the inlet and outlet lines are different. Alternatively, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 may be twisted multiple times so that they form a spiral.

Further, in the above embodiment, the opening 426a and the opening 435a are provided in the door frame left side decoration 426 and the door frame right side decoration 435, respectively, and the opening 426a and the opening 435a are provided in the opening 426a and the opening 435a, respectively. Although the optical axis part 427a, the light guide axis part 428a, the light guide axis part 429a, the light guide axis part 436a, and the light guide axis part 437a are shown as being inserted therethrough, the present invention is not limited thereto. Recesses recessed from the rear are provided at the openings 426a and 435a of the decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435, and a light guide shaft portion 427a, a light guide shaft portion 428a, and a light guide shaft are provided in the recesses. 429a, a light guide shaft part 436a, and a light guide shaft part 437a may be inserted. Alternatively, in addition to the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 that are not provided with the opening 426a and the opening 435a, the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, and the light guide shaft 429a , the light guide shaft portion 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a may extend forward to the rear surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435. As a result, the surfaces of the door frame left side decoration body 426 and the door frame right side decoration body 435 are made into a clean surface without the openings 426a and 435a, and the light guide shaft part 427a, the light guide shaft part 428a, and the light guide shaft part 428a, The optical axis portion 429a, the light guide shaft portion 436a, and the light guide shaft portion 437a can cause spot light emission in a dotted manner, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the second pattern 3120 of the light guide plate 3102 is provided with the radiation pattern part 3122, and the back left decoration body 3212 and the back right decoration body 3213 are provided with the radiation decoration part 3212b and the radiation pattern part 3212b that are continuous with the radiation pattern part 3122. Although the decoration part 3213b is provided and one large pattern is displayed by the radial pattern part 3122, the radial decoration part 3212b, and the radial decoration part 3213b, the present invention is not limited to this. 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 may be omitted, and a light guide plate may be provided whose left and right ends are curved so as to protrude forward. As a result, by displaying a predetermined pattern on the light guide plate, it is possible to display a special pattern whose outer periphery protrudes forward with respect to the center, creating a wide feeling that spreads from side to side. High-quality special symbols can be displayed with light emission, giving an extremely strong impact to players. In addition, since the light guide plate installed in conventional pachinko machines is not curved but flat, the curved light guide plate can surprise the players greatly and attract the attention of the players. It is possible to strongly attract people and suppress a decline in interest. At this time, it is desirable to curve the light guide plate in an arc shape or an elliptical arc shape centered on the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

[9. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 166 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 168, and FIG. 170 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process, FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of an error display process, and FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting value confirmation display process. First, we will explain the various random numbers used for game control, followed by the movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, and setting value confirmation. Display processing will be explained.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination used to determine the initial value of this special random number. A determined random number, a random number for reach determination for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when a jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a first special symbol display and a second special of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern used to determine a variable display pattern of special symbols that are variably displayed on a symbol display, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot game state. A symbol random number used to determine the jackpot symbol or small win symbol derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the hit type), and a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used to determine the initial value of this symbol random number. etc. are available. In addition to these random numbers, there is also a random number for determining a normal symbol hit, which is used to determine whether or not to open/close the movable piece that allows the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B, and a random number for determining a normal symbol hit. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determination, and the normal symbol is used to determine the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Random numbers and the like for symbol fluctuation display patterns are prepared.

Among the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and quickly generates a random number in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1, thereby counting up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

Note that in this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated at power-on, or when the main control side power-on processing described below The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the information as numerical values and calculating the sum is the same as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). If the main control MPU 1310a clears only a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the main control MPU 1310a clears the initial value determination random number for determining a normal symbol hit, the main control MPU 1310a uses the ID from its built-in non-volatile RAM. The code is extracted, and based on the extracted ID code, an initial value derivation process is executed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination, and this derived fixed value is set. The system is such that In other words, the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that once the ID code is stored, it cannot be rewritten even with an external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. The second security measure is to derive the same fixed value based on the ID code, and the second security measure is to prevent the ID code from being analyzed.

Here, the advantage of extracting the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination will be explained. For example, a person who is trying to illegally obtain game balls B that are paid out as prize balls may somehow obtain the game board 5, disassemble it, and use the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to illegally obtain the ID code and grasp the timing when the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value, the ID code is unique to identify the individual. Since the ID code is given a code, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in other game boards 5'. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination matches the normal symbol hit determination value is also completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', that is, other pachinko machines 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball B is passed through the normal winning opening 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to cause the game ball B to enter the second starting opening 2004. Unable to generate an acceptable gaming state.

[9-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer can, for example, indicate the address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after ending a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 168 and 169. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). In this power outage clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether a power outage notice signal from the power outage monitoring circuit is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). has been done.

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is to be cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated. , when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that RAM clearing is to be performed and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is being operated. Note that since the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing that is this routine to the determination in step S14 is extremely short, in reality, the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

In the determination of step S14, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state where it can perform a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and includes game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls). This flag indicates whether or not to erase various information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.), and is set to the value 1 when the various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not erased. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned on (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a receives the detection signal from the main body frame release switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and the detection signal from the main body frame release switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. , the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and the first ON operation is performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a on. The setting key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch, and the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be turned on by the setting key ON signal. By determining that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 due to the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. and/or by determining that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination at step S18, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S18 that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, it sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area (setting value exclusive area in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the settings to be changed (values set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time of the first ON operation), and the settings of the setting values are changed. The value is set to 1 when the setting value is allowed to be changed, and the value is set to 0 when the setting value is not allowed to be changed. Note that the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system waits until the system that controls drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where it can receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) at the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. Note that at the time when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510. ) is in a state where it can receive various commands from.

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that a power outage warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation will be given later regarding the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

In the determination in step S24, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that no power outage warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and to a value of 0 when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted.

In the determination in step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. (Step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when various information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the various information is not to be erased. In the determination in step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not to be deleted, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total thereof.

Following step S28, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in main control side power-off processing (power-off time), which will be described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM during main control side power-off processing, which will be described later, for game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. A detailed explanation of , will be given later.

In the determination in step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1. (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, error display processing is performed (step S33) and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

Note that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is moved from its initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). After performing the first ON operation by rotating the machine 60 degrees clockwise, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, is started again. In the determination in step S18 described above, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch, and also determines that the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and also that the setting key is By determining that the setting key of the switch 1311a is turned on, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, and in step S20A described above, the value 1 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG. In order to set the setting value, in the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, it is determined that the setting change of the setting value is permitted, and the setting change process in step S37, which will be described later. Subsequently, in the process of step S38, which will be described later, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (see below). (described as "first RAM error release method").

As an alternative method to this first RAM error release method, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the push operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f, thereby resuming the main operation. The main control side power-on process, which is a routine, is started. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated in the determination in step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In the determination in step S26, it is determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1, that is, it is determined that various information is to be erased, and in the process of step S38, which will be described later, a specific area out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is By clearing the RAM error, it is possible to cancel the RAM error and proceed with the game (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error cancellation method").

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, an error display is performed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM is When informing that there is an abnormality in the content stored in the memory (or that it cannot be trusted), there are two methods of clearing the RAM error: the first RAM error clearing method and the second RAM error clearing method. It is now possible to do so. As a result, if there is no need to change the settings at all, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RAM clear switch 1310f.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power-off processing has been normally completed, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main control internal A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after being cut off, as well as the state in which power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage. This also includes a state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset by irradiating the main control board 1310 with high frequency waves from a hidden high frequency output device (hidden high frequency output device), and then returns to normal operation.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed after this, so the main control side power-off process (described later) is successfully completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted. (Step S37). In this setting change process, a detailed explanation of which will be given later, the press operation part of the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311 is pressed based on the detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1311. Each time, the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation, the determination key from the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. Based on the signal, the changed setting value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, the main control MPU 1310a All areas except for a specific area are cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a performs this by writing the value 0 into a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area among all areas of the main control built-in RAM). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (the value is 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, and when the setting change process is finished, the main control built-in RAM is (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (area excluding the specified area among the whole area of the main control built-in RAM)). Here, the "specific area" refers to a setting value dedicated area where setting values are stored, and the number of game balls B collected through the outlet 1008 provided in the gaming area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. It consists of an area dedicated to out pitch counting where the counting results (total number) are stored. The setting value dedicated area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described later, and the out ball counting dedicated area stores the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 that are counted in the ball counting process described later. The result of counting the number of pitches (total number) is stored.

Note that the main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a uses the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f to instruct RAM clear and when erasing various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side If the power-off processing has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is retrieved, and the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated based on the retrieved ID code. An initial value derivation process is performed to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and this fixed value is used as the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to use the above-mentioned initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination. Set to determined random number.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and, for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set to the initial value of 0. Further, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the "WDT control register"), the main control built-in WDT is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT starts, and by the time the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a ( If a timer clear setting value is not set in the WDT clear register (hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement is started again. In this way, by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and starting time measurement again, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a can be performed normally. It is possible to monitor whether the

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633, serial input/output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510, ), the transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed, parity is present, etc., and the transmission serial port control register is configured to initialize the transmitting circuit, enable transmission, etc.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization settings (step S46). Here, at a gaming machine testing institute, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation settings for the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, a special random number used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is updated by hardware, so the random number is input to the hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Settings such as latching and acquisition are performed, and settings such as activation of the built-in hardware random number circuit for the main control are set in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical value range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values one after another without duplication. Note that when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and when this latch signal is input, the main control built-in hardware The random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power restoration) based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 when setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. A status command at power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are created and sent as transmission information to the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. to be memorized. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM may read out various information from the game backup information and store various commands corresponding to this various information. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed explanation will be given later regarding the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. Ru. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it performs a non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining initial values for jackpot symbols, random numbers for determining initial values for small winning symbols, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to winning/losing determination (jackpot determining) are updated by software. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, random numbers for normal symbol fluctuation display patterns, etc. are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If the power outage warning signal has not been input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. and repeat steps S54 to S56. Note that the processing from step S54 to step S56 is referred to as "main processing on the main control side."

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). This setting prevents the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, prevents writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protects the above-mentioned rewriting of various information including game information and other information.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as that for starting output of the power outage clear signal in the power outage clearing process in step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals being output to, for example, the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S41, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and time measurement starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process, and then executes the main control side power-on process again. . In other words, since the main control side power off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored, so the previous The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off, and the checksum value calculated in step S28 when the built-in reset circuit performs a forced reset and restarts. value (sum value) cannot match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM will always occur, and in the process of step S38, the check sum (sum value) of the main control built-in RAM is It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, and when the power is subsequently restored, this main control side power-on process is performed.

In addition, in step S30, it is checked whether the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S32, it is checked whether the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the game backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the determination in step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when changing the setting value is permitted, the setting change process in step S37 is performed, In the process of step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). In other words, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, all areas of the RAM with built-in main control are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area in the process of step S38. In this way, when the press operation part is operated when the power is restored (more precisely, when the power of the Pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the setting value is changed and determined. When changing the settings that can be performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change processing), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This means that when the press operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the pachinko machine 1 will be in a state advantageous to the player (for example, probability fluctuation) when the game hall is closed. If the above game backup information is to be erased (cleared) before the start of the next operation, the staff such as the clerk of the game hall should press the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part. In addition, when deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value before the setting change process is performed) It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information, including various information such as game information, from the main control's built-in RAM.As mentioned above, in addition to changing the setting values, the setting key can also be used to Because it is an important key that allows you to check the setting values, only a limited number of people, including the game hall manager, are allowed to possess it, and the number is limited to 2 to 3 people.In this embodiment, the setting value Even if no changes are made to the information, that is, even if there is no setting key that only a limited number of people possess, staff such as game hall clerks can erase (clear) game backup information from the RAM. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the clear switch 1310f, the game backup information can be erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Here, a description will be given of the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22. First, regarding the problem when there is no determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time waiting process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. We will explain the problems in .

As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the electric charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2. DC +5V is applied over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power outage or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V, so that the power supply to the island of the game hall is cut off. The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power from the equipment is cut off. This is because a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main processing on the main control side or timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. When the power from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed reliably.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 when the power is restored, the wait time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots) is 2.5 seconds), and if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs just before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the electric charge charged in is applied as DC +5V, interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so that the main control side, which will be described later, Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing may not be completed. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the calculated checksum value based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process in step S22 is completed without an instantaneous power outage or power outage, and then, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM When the value calculated based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs in step S30, it is found that the checksum values should match. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall, and the RAM is forcibly stored in the built-in RAM of the main control even if the staff such as the staff member at the game hall does not express an intention to clear the RAM. There is a problem in that the above-mentioned game backup information that is currently stored must be erased (cleared).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal is being input, The process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated. This makes it impossible to proceed with the game. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (gaming information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and when a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, step When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter, etc.) This prevents the checksum from being updated, and thus prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. This allows the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to determine that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and memorized value in step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the gaming information immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage from being initialized.

Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24, and if the power outage warning signal has not been input (that is, in step S22) (When it is determined in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game, the pachinko machine 1 Even if the power to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, the electrolytic capacitor MC2 supplies power to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control board performs the main control-side power-off process, which is a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process are Since it is determined that the calculation result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM Information is never initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started after being restored to the gaming information that existed immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the contents of the main control built-in RAM by using the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power-off processing can be started again without updating the The main control side power-off processing can be reliably completed within the "instantaneous power outage or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by the standard hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, when power is cut off from the island equipment of the gaming hall due to an instantaneous power outage or power outage while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms due to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2, the processing immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and if the power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is made. By repeatedly doing this, it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

Such software makes it impossible to proceed with the game, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, initial settings for interrupts are performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). The contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball count information output determination We have adopted a mechanism that can avoid updating various information (including information indicating the value of the counter). In this way, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (gaming information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment The contents of the main controller built-in RAM (gaming information, By configuring the system by dividing it into two parts: a part covered by hardware, and a part covered by hardware so that other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output judgment counter) will not be changed at all. , to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. is now possible.

Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, information indicating that the power has been turned on (restored) is determined based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey this information, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter notification command for determining the main prize ball count information output at power-on are created and sent to the main control as sent information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, we will discuss the problem when the main control return destination command upon power-on does not include information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. The following describes a problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on does not reserve a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game state screen (for example, a jackpot game performance screen) in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 controls the main control board 1310 in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred, and the attacker solenoid 2414 starts to be driven and the grand prize opening 2005 opens and closes. The state changes from being closed by the member to being open.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will control the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to display which round it is at all. That is, for example, when a game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the main prize is the big winning hole 1 count display command that tells the number of game balls B that entered the big winning hole 2005. Even if the control board 1310 sends the data to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball B that entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state it is in at all.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2414 and opens the big prize opening 2005 by the opening/closing member when finishing the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot gaming state, for example. The main control board 1310 sends a grand prize opening 1 close display command that instructs the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, to start closing the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 between rounds) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) in the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the jackpot 2005 from the closed state by the opening/closing member. The main control board 1310 sends a command to display the fifth opening of the big winning opening to instruct the main winning opening to move to the current state (that is, start opening the fifth round of the big winning opening 2005) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, for example, a screen may be displayed that informs the player that the gaming state is such that the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and that the gaming state is advantageous to the player. While the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen that informs the user in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece and perform the second start. If an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs while the port 2004 is in the state of opening, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power restoration information set in the work area, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage occurred, and the starting port solenoid 2412 is started to be driven to close the movable piece. A transition will be made to a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state advantageous to the player, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and time-saving state specified by the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to return by displaying in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the game state is such that the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 is unable to display any screen that conveys this information in the display area of the effect display device 1600. For this reason, the player seated at the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power outage or power outage has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball B is thrown into the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs. In some cases, the game ball B may be forgotten to be in a gaming state where it can be accepted, and in such a case, the game ball B is returned to the gaming state where it can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state when the power is restored. Even though the power is restored, a screen instructing a game (that is, a screen instructing a game in which the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. As a result, there was a problem in that the player did not know what kind of game to play.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power outage could not be returned to immediately after the power was restored. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. There was a problem.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 turns on the power (in addition to turning on the power, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power failure occurs), the main control board 1310 uses the power-on status command. In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on status command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the fourth round of the jackpot gaming state, When a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 returns to start driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the big prize opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening/closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen that indicates what round it is). cannot be displayed in the display area of the production display device 1600, but the screen informs that the jackpot game state is in progress and the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to be driven and the jackpot opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "You have won the jackpot. The grand prize opening is open. Please play the game so that game ball B enters the grand prize opening.") can be displayed in the display area of the pachinko machine to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball B is placed in the big prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. , when the game state is such that the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power outage or power outage occurs, and then when the power is restored, the main control As the return destination of the board 1310, a screen informing you that the starting port solenoid 2412 has started driving and the movable piece has been opened has opened the second starting port 2004 (for example, "The movable piece is open"). The peripheral control board 1510 displays a message on the display area of the production display device 1600 (a screen that tells the player "Please play the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting port."). A player seated at the front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play a game in which the game ball B is entered into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions as to where the peripheral control board 1510 should return when power is restored after a momentary power outage or power outage occurs. Therefore, after the power is restored, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. In other words, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the power is restored, a player seated in front of a pachinko machine will see the pachinko machine system in a frozen state, mistakenly thinking that it has malfunctioned. This can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, the checksum in step S28 is checked when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be explained. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM in step S28, it is not executed in step S30. In the comparison and determination, there is no way that the checksum values match, and in step S38 all areas of the RAM with built-in main control, except for a specific area, must be cleared.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on status command categorized as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on By creating a counter notification command for output determination and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball at power-on are generated. Only three commands, namely the counter notification command for determining the number information output, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, these commands first send a power-on status command, then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and then a main control return destination command when the power is turned on. A counter notification command for information output determination is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on status command is used when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). Information that instructs when clearing the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, as well as when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage), the above-mentioned information is added. Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return to among low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state, low probability non time saving state, and high probability non time saving state (probability and time saving state) and the model code of the pachinko machine. It consists of the information shown. Here, a problem occurs when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

When creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine is determined based on which work's copyright it corresponds to. What kind of game specifications (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs), as well as a game specification in which the number of changes of special symbols is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether the game specifications (such as a so-called ST machine) are such that a probability change occurs in a state where

In the manufacturing line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works may coexist. Then, workers on the production line can determine which of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) has ownership over the copyright. You may not know whether the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of a work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is being sent to the manufacturing line to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also a misconception or misunderstanding that it is flowing down the production line.

Therefore, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the production line worker will It is not possible to confirm which work's copyright belongs to the manufactured main control board 1310, and even if the copyright of the same work belongs to which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm what type of game it is (type of game) and what kind of game specifications (game specifications or ST machines in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist. 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes attached a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there was a problem in that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreased.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 inputs the model code of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, this also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). In order to send a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are sent in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 can turn on the power to the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from and sweet digital type, the series code to identify which type it is, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state will be changed. In addition to game specifications in which the state continues until the occurrence of a special symbol, a game specification code for specifying a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in the special symbol (ST machine, etc.); By visually checking detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on What type of machine is it (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game specifications (if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs) It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or an ST machine.

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of multiple types of works coexist, the main control board inspection process of the production line By being able to visually check the inspection monitor and accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the operator can classify the copyright of the work by main control board 1310 and perform subsequent work. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can reliably attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 corresponding to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improving the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[9-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 168 and 169.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches register banks as shown in FIG. 170 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks, a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is changed from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction processing, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to a variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4ms. However, when the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. Note that these various times and ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a, for example, detects a detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, and a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402. detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2516, second Detection signal from V winning opening sensor 2515, detection signal from third losing opening sensor 2518, detection signal from out sensor 664 (or out opening left sensor 3032 and out opening right sensor 3033), detection signal from magnetic sensor 2010 , operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), detection signal from the door frame release switch, detection signal from the main body frame release switch, signal from the setting key switch 1311a, signal from the setting change button 1311b, out sensor 664 and a payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later, and input the main information as input information. It is stored in the input information storage area of the control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 are read, the corresponding starting port prize command classified into others is sent as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. In other words, when there is a detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, the corresponding starting port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second starting port sensor 2402. When there is a detection signal, the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process is started, the state in which input is being input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to empty terminal processing) is , are each read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a third time, and the third and second reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the results are not the same, they are read again a fourth time, and the fourth and third reading results are compared. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if the game ball B did not enter or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state in which inputs are being made to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those for which empty terminal processing has been performed) is performed from the first to the third time. By performing a total of two readings, one for comparing the two readings and the second reading for comparing the second to fourth readings, it is possible to avoid false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to do so, the detection signal from the normal winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, Detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, detection signal from the accessory winning opening sensor 2513, detection signal from the first V winning opening sensor 2514, detection signal from the first losing opening sensor 2516, second V winning opening sensor Detection signal from 2515, detection signal from third loss sensor 2518, detection signal from out sensor 664, detection signal from magnetic sensor 2010, operation signal from RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), door frame release switch Detection signal from the main body frame release switch, signal from the setting key switch 1311a, signal from the setting switch button 1311b, detection signal from the out sensor 664, prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described later It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has normally received the payout control board 633.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing is determined based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the ground (GND) as a vacant terminal process, so that the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether the logic state of the input terminal to which vacant terminal processing has been performed among the input terminals of various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal that is being processed as an empty terminal is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a displays a notification indicating that a problem has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. The malfunction command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs win/loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-mentioned symbol random number is updated. In addition to these random numbers, random numbers for determining the initial value for jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing to further enhance randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to winning/losing determination (hit/losing determination), each counter counts up only every time this winning/losing random number update process is performed. In addition, the above-mentioned random numbers for normal symbol hit determination and initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol hit determination are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is, as mentioned above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. The range from 1 to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then it is counted up from the minimum value toward the initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the initial value determining random number for hit determination is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determining random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process in which a value of 1 is drawn from a fixed numerical value range of a counter that updates the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are used as the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The winning/losing random number updating process and the winning/losing random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine are updated, but each time the interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs pitch counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the exit left sensor 3032 is inputted to form a game area 5a on the game board 5. When the out-port left sensor 3032 detects game balls B collected through the out-port 1008 provided in A calculation is performed to add (increment) 1, and a detection signal from the right sensor 3033 of the out port is input, and the game ball B is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the gaming area 5a sectioned on the game board 5. When the out-port right sensor 3033 detects, an operation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of a collected ball counter that counts the number of game balls B collected by the out-port 1008. In other words, in the ball count process, when the left sensor 3032 detects the game ball B collected by the out port 1008 and the right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B collected by the out port 1008. In this step, an operation is performed to add the value 2 to the value of the recovered ball counter. The main control MPU 1310a uses the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, in an area dedicated to out ball counting in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Furthermore, when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, each time the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, the main control MPU 1310a issues a ball collection command to notify that fact. It is created and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535), and the value of the recovered ball counter is further added (incremented) by 1, The value of the counter overflows and becomes the value 0, and an operation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls B is created based on this input information, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the board and the board. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, and the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is 10 balls. has been reached, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check is performed to check the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A command is created and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10 balls. In this case, a main prize ball count information output command classified into others is created to convey that fact, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize pitch number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize pitch number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read from the input information storage area mentioned above, that is, the general winning hole 2001 provided on the game board 5, the normal winning hole 2003, Based on the game ball B that entered various winning holes (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5") such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, and the big winning hole 2005. This counts the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls, and is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. ing. In the prize ball control process in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter that has been read is The number of game balls B to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value by reading input information from the input information storage area mentioned above and based on this input information, and the value indicating this added number of balls is the value. When the number exceeds 10 (that is, when the number of game balls B scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls), a main prize ball number information output command is created and sent to notify that fact. It is stored as information in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. It is supposed to be done.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays (for example, frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a formats the commands normally received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is checked. If it is determined that a fraudulent act by radio wave emission (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave emission") is being carried out, the value of the radio wave emission counter is incremented by 1. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio waves have been emitted during the fraud detection process, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a radio wave irradiation notification command classified into a notification display notifying that the radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnet counter is incremented by 1. The value of this magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that a radio wave irradiation goto has been performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is initialized. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process). ), a magnet notification command classified into a notification display to notify that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, by using such a mechanism to reliably detect and notify magnet spots, it is possible to contribute to the ability of staff such as game hall clerks to discover magnet spots at an early stage. It has become.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the jackpot game state is not (big winning opening In the event of an abnormal winning in the big winning hole (such as when game ball B enters the ball in 2005), a winning abnormality display command that is categorized as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and is stored in the transmission information storage area mentioned above as transmission information. do.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation spot and/or the magnet spot are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud detection; When no fraud is detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, indicating that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as the initial value. Further, even when the occurrence of abnormal winning in the big winning opening is detected, the value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs firing permission signal setting processing (step S113). In this firing permission signal setting process, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines that when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG has a value of 0, that is, no fraud has been detected, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above. Sometimes, the launch permission logic is set as the logic of the launch permission signal and stored in the output information storage area mentioned above as output information, while when the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value is 1), that is, fraud is detected. When it is determined that the firing permission signal is detected, the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set as the logic of the firing permission signal, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. Note that the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input and the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4. If the door frame release switch detects that the door frame release switch is open, or if the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input and the main body frame release switch detects that the main frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, The logic of the launch permission signal is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the launch permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. As an initial value (default), the logic of the firing permission signal is set such that the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine is performed after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 (after the power is restored). It is constituted by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is an inversion of the firing permission logic, is set until the firing is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. The random number is obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number is set as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random number obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It determines whether or not to generate a gaming state (referred to as "special lottery") and updates the symbol random number.The value of the counter is taken out and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance according to the jackpot type or small win type. It is determined whether or not the winning type matches any of the winning type determination values (determining the winning type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special map 1 synchronization effect are created, while the judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the second starting port sensor 2402. , create various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and determine the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol based on the random number for the fluctuation display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is changed so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening Nth display command, jackpot opening 1 closing display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening 1 opening display command, jackpot opening command, jackpot opening command, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal is sent to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening/closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the big prize opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state is 2, the 2nd round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. A lighting signal is set to be output to the second round indicator lamp so that the round indicator lamp is lit, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of rounds is 15, the round indicator of the function display unit 1400 is The function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp so that the 15th round indicator lamp lights up, stores it in the output information storage area as output information, and lights it in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not time saving has occurred. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning hole winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment mentioned above is extracted and used as the normal winning opening winning information built in the main control. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

This normal winning opening winning information storage area is provided with 0th section to 3rd section (4 sections), and the normal winning opening is arranged in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, when the normal winning hole winning information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the normal winning hole winning information storage, when the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, it is normal. The winning hole winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning hole winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this normal winning slot winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the second winning opening winning information is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning slot winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, and the normal winning opening winning information of the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. Shifted, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning slot winning information is stored in the first section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is the normal winning opening winning information. The regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage is shifted to the 0th compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage, and the regular winning slot winning information in the second compartment of the regular winning opening winning information storage is shifted to the first compartment of the regular winning slot winning information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section for storing the winning information of the normal winning opening are empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is held and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. In order to light up the hold display, the output of the lighting signal for the normal hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal winning opening winning information, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area mentioned above.

Following the normal winning hole winning process, the normal winning hole winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted from the read normal winning hole winning information, and the main control It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (result of a normal lottery), it is determined whether the movable piece is to be opened or closed. When the opening/closing operation is performed based on this determination, the movable piece is in the opening operation state, resulting in a gaming state in which the game ball B can be received into the second starting port 2004, resulting in a gaming state advantageous to the player. The fluctuating display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the fluctuating display pattern of the regular symbol mentioned above, various commands classified as related to the synchronized production of the common symbol are created, and the above-mentioned transmission information is stored as the transmission information. At the same time, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern, and output information is stored in the area. is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above.

In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit judgment matches the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role performance are created and sent. In addition to storing information in the transmission information storage area, the output of a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. When the value of the random number for symbol hit determination does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, a normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. , creates various commands related to the common pattern synchronization performance, stores them in the above-mentioned sending information storage area as sending information, and lights up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause the function display unit 1400 to do so, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning normally) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S117). In this setting value confirmation display process, detailed explanation will be given later, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information, a process is performed to detect opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch, and the setting key cylinder is at the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to turn off the setting key switch 1311a). ) is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the outer frame to turn on. By determining that the body frame 4 is open for 2 and determining that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met. On the other hand, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined to be open due to the setting key ON signal. By determining that the setting key is not turned on, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display process, when the set value display permission condition is met, a lighting signal is sent to display the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, while if the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends and returns to the main routine.

Following step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area mentioned above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on output information, the main control MPU 1310a sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633. When in the jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starting opening solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, small hit information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting opening winning information Outputs various information (gaming information) signals related to games such as output signals to the payout control board 633, and outputs a launch permission signal set to the launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633. or outputs a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008, or stores it in a set value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. It outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronized performance, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronized performance, and various commands classified as related to jackpot created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine. Various commands (for example, a big winning hole 1 count display command corresponding to the big winning hole count command based on the detection signal from the big winning hole sensor 2403 when the game ball B entering the big winning hole 2005 is detected) ), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general figure synchronization performance, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role performance, various commands classified as notification display, and various commands classified as status display. Various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others (for example, the main control board 1310 pays out prize balls based on the game ball B that has entered the various winning holes provided on the game board 5). Each time the number of game balls B to be put out reaches 10 balls, it is instructed to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal to that effect as main prize ball number information to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. main prize ball number information output command, etc.), and various commands categorized into specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies you every time the number of game balls B collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10 balls, Setting change command to notify that the setting value has been changed, error display command to notify that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), main control built-in RAM (such as a setting key ON operation command for confirming a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area, which will be described later, in a specific area of , etc.) is stored. One packet of the main cycle serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main cycle serial data includes a status that indicates the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode that indicates a variation of the effect that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value and calculating the sum value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, when a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. The main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a at least transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. is now possible. When powering on the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs after the power is turned on, the transmission is sent at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 169. In order to notify that the power has been restored, a power-on state command categorized as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information at power-on are set to notify that the power has been restored. Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main cycle serial data consists of the status, mode, and sum value that make up the power-on status command. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the command to return to the main control when the power is turned on, are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main prize ball count information when the power is turned on. The output determination counter notification command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the gaming backup information and the data is stored according to this various information. In some cases, various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands according to the game information among various information, then the status command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize ball number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command will be transmitted.

Furthermore, whenever the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510, For each received ball collection command, the number of game balls B collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and the ball collection information (the counted value (i.e., the out port In step 1008, the information that associates the total number of game balls B collected with the updated date and time is updated. Note that if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off at the end of the game hall's business hours without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the exit 1008) Ball recovery information that associates the total number of balls (B) with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall starts operating, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 transfers the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) to the pachinko machine 1 for operation. Ball recovery information is created again from the day it started, and the ball recovery information is stored as ball recovery history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). Note that the counted value stored and held as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or the value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the values counted so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT. Then, by restarting time measurement by the built-in main control WDT, the main control MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset by the built-in main control WDT.

Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 performs the backup function described above for storing game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and when the power is restored, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process was executed as the destination for the main control board 1310 to resume playing the game. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are electrical drive sources, by the port output processing of step S118 in this routine. It is now possible to do so. That is, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM when setting the work area of A main control return destination command when the power is turned on and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and step S120 in this routine is performed. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main serial data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command, and then the main control return destination at power-on is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the status, mode, and sum value are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which constitute the main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command when the power is turned on. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored based on the main control return destination command at power-on from the main control board 1310 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It can be displayed in effect. As a result, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while a player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the gaming state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage is restored after the power is restored. At the same time, it is possible to notify the destination of the return of the game progress by the main control board 1310 by displaying an effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600, which prevents the system of the pachinko machine 1 from being in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from seeing something and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding that a malfunction has occurred.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process that is the inspection process of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area are necessarily cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be sent at power-on is performed in step S50 of the same process shown in FIG. By creating a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, and storing them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, when the power is turned on. A state in which only three commands, the status command, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and the counter notification command for determining the output of main prize ball number information when the power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 of this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, are sent to the inspection equipment in the main control board inspection process as main serial data in the order of Then, when the power is turned on, the main control return destination command is sent to the inspection equipment of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then when the power is turned on, the main prize ball number information is output. A determination counter notification command is sent to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection step configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code to identify the model type among the Max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of changes in special symbols (ST Detailed machine type information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for specifying the machine (such as machine).

[9-4. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be explained. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation values as shown in FIG. 171 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out, but when the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values, and is the checksum performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as calculating .

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power off process (power off) in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether the checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is the value 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 168, respectively. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is used to store game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power-off process, which will be described later. This is a flag that indicates whether or not it has been stored in the RAM. It is set to 1 when the main control side power off processing has been completed normally, and set to 0 when the main control side power off processing has not been normally completed. be done.

In the determination of step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. (value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it is determined whether the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be changed as a setting value, and in this embodiment, setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value It is preset to a value up to 6. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are within the normal range. It is determined whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is not within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a sets the initial value, ie, the setting value 1, to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In addition, in the determination in step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is one of the setting values 1 to 6 that is within the normal range. However, without performing the determination in step S208, in the determination in step S204, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process may proceed to step S210 and set the setting value 1, which is an initial value, to the setting value acquired in step S200.

In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, in the determination in step S208, the main control When the MPU 1310a determines that the setting change is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button 1311b is operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b and determining whether or not the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is being operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is input, whereas the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated when the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b is not input. It is determined that 1311b is not operated.

In the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b is operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the set value to update it (step S218). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The value 1 will be added (incremented) to the set value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Following step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key is turned ON when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. When the key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees (that is, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON to the original position, which is the initial position (in other words, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) The setting key switch is turned OFF by turning it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the rotation position (rotated position), and then turning it OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to the second ON operation. 1311a determines that the enter key has been operated based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and when the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, When the enter key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key is not operated.

In the determination of step S222, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the enter key is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S216 and determines whether the setting switching button 1311b is operated. In the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button 1311b has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs the processing of step S218 and step S220 again, and makes the determination of step S222, and determines that the enter key has not been operated. If it is determined that there is no such button, the process returns to step S216, and each time the setting switch button 1311b is operated, the setting value is incremented by 1 and the setting is updated until the enter key is operated. If the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting value that was updated when the setting switching button 1311b was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Note that even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or instantaneous power outage will be used for main control. Since it is not stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded, and the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when determining in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a stores the updated setting value in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is retrieved and set in a predetermined area, this predetermined area The updated setting value is returned to the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the RAM with built-in main control. Even if a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs and the power is restored after the process of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the enter key was operated before the power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs will be stored in the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in a setting value dedicated area in a specific area of .

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, when the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the switch 1311a OFF, and by performing the OFF operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, whereas the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input. Sometimes, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

In the determination of step S226, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination of step S226 and repeats the determination of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, when determining in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to the value 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is in the first This is a flag indicating whether or not to allow changes to the settings (values set among settings 1 to 6 at the time of operation), and when permission is given to change settings. The value is set to 1, and the value is set to 0 when changing the setting value is not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing the setting value from being changed from now on.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, the "normal range" is set to set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value. It is preset to a value up to 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU 1310a confirms that the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the value is within the range of set value 1 to set value 6, and if it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initial settings (step S234), then creates a settings change command and sets transmission information (step S236), Next, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This process is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, which is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238. The data is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial serial data, but this is given priority before the command to be sent at power-on is reserved in step S50 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed using a setting change command. Note that the setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). do.

On the other hand, in the determination at step S233, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[9-5. Setting value confirmation display processing]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be explained. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 170.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 (step S350), as shown in FIG. 172. This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the value is 1, the setting Each is set to the value 0 when the value is not displayed for confirmation.

In the determination in step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not displayed for confirmation. (Step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, sends a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). When the setting key switch 1311a is rotated once and the first ON operation is performed, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a causes the main body frame 4 to move relative to the outer frame 2. By determining that the setting key switch 1311a is opened and that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. , it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame release switch, and/or the setting key switch 1311a is determined that the setting key is not turned on due to the setting key ON signal. Based on this determination, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a immediately ends this routine, while the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the setting value is to be displayed for confirmation, the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 1 (step S354), and the current setting value is subsequently obtained (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the set value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process in FIG. The values are set in advance to value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a checks the setting value acquired in step S356 (that is, in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM) in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It is determined whether the set value (stored in the set value stored in do.

In the determination of step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting value is within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360 ), this routine ends. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key ON operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process that is this routine has started (that is, confirming the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM). This is a command to convey.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 reads the setting key ON operation history information (when the setting value was confirmed information that associates the date and time).

Further, upon receiving the setting key ON operation command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 generates the above-mentioned ball recovery history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information. A predetermined condition for permitting display of specific history information is established, which allows display of specific history information such as . The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who checks the specific history information to rotate the touch operation section 302 and press the press operation section 303 in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied. By doing this, control is performed to switch from the image that has been displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays specific history information and to display it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the determination key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, and when the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, if the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is not input, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it ends this routine as is, but if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it does not display the setting value for confirmation. The confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to 0 (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g is stopped. Then, the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. , sets the setting key OFF operation command (step S368), and ends this routine. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process of this routine has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). This is a command that conveys.

Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the CPU enters a state in which the above-described predetermined specific history information display permission condition is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 controls the CPU immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. Control is performed to switch to the image that was displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and return to the original image.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is not within the normal range, it sets interrupt disallowance (step S370). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 170, which was repeatedly performed every 4 ms, is stopped.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which the main control built-in WDT continues to be cleared (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control built-in WDT to continue to be cleared, but since the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped once started, the main control built-in WDT cannot be stopped by continuing to clear the main control built-in WDT. By setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built in the control MPU 1310a, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and by restarting the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT, the main control by the main control built-in WDT is started. The MPU 1310a does not have to be forcibly reset. Furthermore, due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be explained in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted), and an error message is displayed to notify that fact. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the alphabet E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

[9-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be explained. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168, and a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 172), and the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG.

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal, as shown in FIG. 173 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal is to notify the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted, and when the logic is set to the launch permission logic, the launch permission signal is activated. On the other hand, if the logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that launch is to be stopped (non-permitted). .

The error display process that is this routine is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168 or a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171), the main control MPU 1310a interrupts the step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. Since the permission setting cannot be performed, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 170 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process of step S113 in the same process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, so when the power is restored, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inversion of the firing permission logic.

Therefore, the error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168 or the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. When the main control MPU 1310a starts as one process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the process has started, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and the prescribed output port is It is output from the output terminal of the main control output circuit with a reset function to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633.

When the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. 172, the main control MPU 1310a In the determination, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 169, the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting shown in FIG. Since interrupts are not permitted in step S370 in the setting value confirmation display processing, when the error display processing of this routine is finished, an infinite loop is entered as described above, so that the main control side shown in FIG. 170 Timer interrupt processing cannot be performed, and firing permission signal setting processing in step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when the error display process that is this routine is started as the process performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. In order to reliably prevent game ball B from being fired under certain conditions, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (launching non-permission logic) and reset from the output terminal of the specified output port. It is output to the firing control section 633b of the paying-out control board 633 via the functional main control output circuit.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the alphabetical character E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets the transmission information in step S406. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main cycle serial data (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial settings in step S406 are the same as the serial communication initial settings in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 171 and the serial communication initial settings in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 171 and the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 170. This processing is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. The error display process that is this routine is the process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 168, and the process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 172) and the process performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display process has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot be played at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initial settings are performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is sent to the peripheral control board as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. It is sending to 1510.

Note that the error display command is a command that informs that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 generates error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time of reception) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). ) to update.

In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays a message in the display area of the effect display device 1600 with a blue background image saying "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff." In addition to controlling the display of a message image in white text, the system also adjusts the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the staff" by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Control is performed such that the volume is forcibly set to be the maximum volume without depending on the volume set, and is played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main body frame speaker 622, etc.). The process of notifying the RAM error using the error display command is the process with the highest priority. Give top priority to error notification.

[10. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 166 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 174 to 177. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the process when the power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, and FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be explained, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be explained.

[10-1. Payout control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. 174 to 176. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the interrupt priority of the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed preferentially.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power outage notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power outage (a phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops and when it becomes lower than the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input as a power outage warning from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds ( ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch, and when the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is HI, it is determined that it is not an instruction to clear the RAM. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that it is an instruction to clear the RAM, and the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the switch is being operated.

In the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch is operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from the time the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch is not operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to the value 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in , and the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S514 and step S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs settings to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, it is possible to access the payout control built-in RAM, and, for example, write (storage) or read payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets a stack pointer (step S520). For example, the stack pointer can indicate an address placed on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or it can temporarily indicate the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after exiting a subroutine. It indicates the address loaded onto the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is loaded. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the register contents, return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In the determination of step S522, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not to be deleted, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum thereof.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off), which will be described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU determines that they match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value has been stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off processing described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and the value is set to 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

In the determination of step S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed, the payout control MPU uses the payout control built-in RAM as the power restoration. A work area is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 0, power restoration information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM), and when the power is restored, Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage areas, etc. (for example, the prize information stored in the prize ball information storage area, Ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area; Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (inconsistency counter reset judgment time, etc.) stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state where the power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state where the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU When it is determined that the power-off processing of the payout control unit has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is for setting the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or there is a power outage or instantaneous power outage, as described above, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In the determination of step S540, when the dispensing control MPU determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing that is processed every 2ms, which will be described later.When 2ms has passed, the value is 1, and when 2ms has not passed, the value is 0. Set.

In the determination of step S542, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, the dispensing control MPU returns to step S540, and the dispensing control MPU receives the input power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2ms have elapsed, the payout control MPU sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544 ).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this various information, various signals are outputted from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU. The output information storage area includes, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received from the main control board 1310, and drive control for the payout motor 584. Various information such as drive information, prize ball number information of the number of balls B actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED indicator are stored, and the payout is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or, the number of game balls B actually put out by the payout motor 584 is outputted to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls Every time B is paid out, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558.

Specifically, a counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is provided to determine whether or not to output the prize ball number information. The number of game balls B actually put out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550, which will be described later. The information is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (not shown) for monitoring the number of balls.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls B actually put out by the payout motor 584, a counter for outputting prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The memory is updated by adding the number of game balls B actually put out by the payout motor 584 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the read value of the prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( In other words, when the number of game balls B actually put out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10 balls, the prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the number of balls B that has exceeded the number of balls is The indicated value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control described above as the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter.), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals inputted to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a RAM clear switch operation signal (RAM clear signal), a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, Reads the BRDY signal, CR connection signal, main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that indicates that the main control board 1310 has successfully received various commands sent in the command transmission process described later, and inputs them as input information. Store in the information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball jamming state has occurred due to the dispensing blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and the skip determination time is set as the determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls B. During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether the number of game balls B taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574. In addition to managing the time such as the ball outage judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls B received and put out by the ball storage part 589b of the payout blade 589 and the number of game balls B actually put out It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game ball B is repeatedly paid out inconsistently due to the discrepancy between the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 591 and the number of balls detected by the detection sensor 591. At that time, the judgment conditions and the set mismatch counter reset judgment time are time-managed. For example, when the ball jam judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, so each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jam judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is the value By setting it to 0, the ball jam judgment time is accurately measured. Note that these various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, various information stored in the various information storage areas. etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc.) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information regarding payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

Through this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power outage or power outage, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. to the values immediately before the instantaneous power outage or power outage. As a result, even if it becomes impossible to continue the putting-out operation due to a momentary power outage or power outage while the putting-out device 580 is performing the putting-out operation of the game balls B, the putting-out operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls B can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, when the payout control MPU is paying out game balls B to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and the CR Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit is interrupted and it is not possible to continue paying out game balls B, the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, and inconsistency counter INCC will be displayed when power is restored. By restoring the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage, which are stored as payout backup information. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a momentary power outage or power outage can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls B can continue to be performed. It looks like this.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit exchange various signals, even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, when the power is restored, the exchange will be restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or stoppage. This prevents various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the influence of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the RAM with built-in payout control, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the RAM with built-in payout control in step S530. For example, if the PRDY signal output setting information read by the lever is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that indicates that a payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is used for payout control. Output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as a part of the main operation setting process, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information. Based on this, it is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is an abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1, and in the payout ball gag operation determination setting process. As a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit, is set to the PRDY signal. It is set as output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after power restoration, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. output to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of game balls B by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state will be restored when the power is restored. At an early stage, it is possible to output a PRDY signal to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to inform the CR unit that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. It can be communicated that the payout operation of the game ball B by 580 is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a wasteful ball lending request signal, at an extremely early stage after the power is restored.

In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the PRDY While the logic state of the signal is set to HI and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW to convey that the payout operation for paying out rental balls is impossible. output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port to the CR unit. The logic state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and is communicated with the payout control board 633. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and out of ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball out check process, input information is read from the input information storage area mentioned above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is stored in the game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the tank is full of game balls B, and the number of game balls B taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. It is determined whether or not. For example, it is determined whether or not the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls B by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms and using the full tank detection sensor 154 in the current full tank and out of ball check process. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 turns OFF during the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the full tank sensor 154 changes from OFF to ON. When the transition is made to , the timer update process of step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and out of bulb check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls B, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. Remember. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls B, and full tank information indicating this fact is stored in the status information storage area.

The determination of whether the number of game balls B taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number also uses the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check whether the ball is full or out of balls. When the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch turns ON during processing, and the detection signal from the out-of-bulb switch turns OFF during the previous full charge and out-of-bulb check process (2 ms ago), that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball detection sensor 574. When transitions from OFF to ON, the timer starts counting the above-mentioned ball outage determination time in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the ball outage determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball outage determination time has come, the detection signal from the ball outage detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball outage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls B taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than a predetermined number, and a ball is sent to that effect. While the cut information is stored in the status information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls B taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. If not, the ball outage information indicating that fact is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received normally, payer ACK information that conveys the fact is stored in the output information storage area mentioned above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, there is a connection error that indicates that there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals). The information is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize ball, rental ball, ball removal, and ball holding are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-mentioned status information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and is stored as LED display information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. For example, if the above-mentioned ball outage information is read from the status information storage area and the number of game balls B taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than a predetermined number, based on this ball outage information, the appropriate action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command sending process, various types of information are read from the status information storage area mentioned above, and various commands classified into status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created based on this various information. and transmits it to the main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls B taken into the guide path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, the frame state is One command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, value A, value B, and value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines whether or not the power outage warning signal has been input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. In step S548, port output processing is performed. In step S550, port input processing is performed. performs timer update processing in step S554, performs CR communication processing in step S556, performs full tank and bulb out check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main processing".

The processing contents of the payout control section main processing vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. There is. Thereby, the payout control MPU secures enough processing time to perform other fluctuating processing.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned payout information from being rewritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls B is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting value A, value B, and value C in watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to the value 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared and set because the value A, value B, and value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. Note that the processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power-off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power outage or momentary power outage, and the payout control unit performs power-on processing when the power is restored thereafter.

In addition, in step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal or not, and then in step S528, it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. is being inspected. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is examined whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[10-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control section timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 174 to 176.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saved) the register, as shown in FIG. 177 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described main processing of the payout control unit is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control section timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2ms, and the value is 1 when 2ms have passed, and the value is 0 when 2ms have not passed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (returns) the register (step S594). In this return, the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is switched to a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control section main processing, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control section timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[11. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 166 will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 182. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, we will explain the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and then we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, the priority of interrupt processing is set to the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. The order is set as V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[11-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 178. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control section power-on processing is performed as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, the process of determining hot start/cold start, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, the process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), etc. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required to initialize the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs commands related to control of game effects, which are output from the main control board 1310. The pachinko machine 1 is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands regarding the status of the pachinko machine 1 and the status of the pachinko machine 1.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information that specifies the year, month, and day and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current time information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. Further, after performing this current time information acquisition processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to the value 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute peripheral control section steady processing, which will be described later.When executing peripheral control section steady processing, the value is 1; When not executed, each is set to the value 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, which indicates that the screen data (information that defines the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the above. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, after setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), it returns to step S1006 again and determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is entered until the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Furthermore, after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset. ing.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing is to be executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. A value of 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed, and is set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1ms interrupt timer is activated to execute the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, and the number of times this 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized by setting the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process to be described later, the contact detection sensor main body 358, the press detection sensor 373, the elevation detection sensor 374, which are provided in the performance operation unit 300, Rotation (rotation direction) and pressing operation of the contact operation section 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the protrusion force detection sensor 375 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300") Various information obtained from operations of the section 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the touch operation section 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300, and press operation section 303) operation history information, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the rotation direction of the contact operation section 302 and the presence or absence of operation of the press operation section 303 are monitored, and the rotation direction of the contact operation section 302 and the operation status of the press operation section 303 are monitored. It is appropriately determined whether or not the state of the operation 303 is to be reflected in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the production operation unit information acquisition processing, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the generation schedule data. As a result, the volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance progresses with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the production operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of an LED used as direct light, the brightness of an LED used as indirect light, and Set each. While the performance is in progress, the lamp palette setting process is executed, and the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the performance operation section 301 (contact operation section 302, press operation section 303), and the first When a specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-mentioned floor set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set to the specified brightness value. It is now possible to update the information.

Here, the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly explained. The specified brightness value can be set to one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off) to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, respectively. The player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the 31st brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. One specified brightness value can be set up to the specified value.

For example, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise, the current brightness is temporarily set to the 0th (zero) brightness, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). When the brightness is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed along a tone curve (or a spline tone curve) to increase the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of LED used as direct light is changed, while the touch operation unit 302 is When rotating clockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear (or a spline-like tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to become lower. When a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) rotates the touch operation section 302 to select a desired brightness and presses the press operation section 303, the selected desired brightness is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance in which the player (or a staff member such as a clerk at the game hall) can set the brightness while the performance is in progress. A staff member such as the above can set the desired brightness by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. In addition, when a player (or an employee such as a clerk at a game hall) operates the touch operation section 302, a specified brightness value from a first brightness value to a 31st brightness value is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600 while the performance is in progress. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate as an image the desired brightness level of the player (or the staff such as a clerk at the game hall). It is now possible to do so. Further, in this embodiment, the 14th specified brightness value is set as the initial value (default).

Normally, the palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. be. Normally, the palette value is selected from 17 stages in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%), and the brightness described above is selected. The pallet value corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one brightness designation among the 32-level range from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designation values mentioned above. (100%), and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) written in parentheses is the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the brightness specified value mentioned above. This is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness designation in the 32-step range up to the 31st brightness designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are irradiated with direct light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and are irradiated with direct light, the palette The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

The special palette value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information of the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in a light guide plate that is irradiated with indirect light. The special palette value differs from the normal palette value in that it has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value. Palette values corresponding to the brightness designation are set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value that is set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate is emitting light using indirect light at the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (lights out). The lowest possible brightness is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value. Among them, the palette value corresponding to one specified brightness value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. When setting the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is set by the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303. While the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) can use the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section. The brightness is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specified value by the operation 303. As a result, when a player feels that the brightness of the LED used as a direct light is dazzling and sets it by operating the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 to reduce the brightness, the player can use the LED as a direct light. The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off), and the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level), and Therefore, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light was also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) specified brightness value, which is the minimum brightness (turns off)). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value almost equal to the 18th specified brightness value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The lowest brightness that allows the light guide plate to visually recognize the state in which it emits light by indirect light is set.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards installed on the game board side and various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, in contrast to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if you do not set it, you can set the lighting mode that follows the flow of the performance, and the flow of the performance depending on the lighting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. After looking at this, set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a particular decorative board that is too bright (or the effect would be better achieved with a slightly darker brightness), and set the other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative board, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed extremely easily. In other words, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the operable performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. Even if one brightness specification value that extends up to the brightness specification value is set, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board. , For other decorative boards, one luminance specified value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set respectively, so the relationship between the mutually set luminous modes (bright or dark) The brightness can be adjusted extremely easily without destroying the relationship (

Furthermore, although it is difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate compared to direct light, special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (in other words, independent from the normal palette values) are required for LEDs used as indirect light. You can now set the brightness. As a result, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is managed by special palette values, and the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is managed by normal palette values. The brightness of the LED and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and generates one screen on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC. (one frame worth) of drawing data is output to the liquid crystal output board. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. There is. This makes it possible to prevent delays in processing time, but although so-called dropped frames may occur, various speakers such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622 are (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), the system is designed to prioritize production using production sounds such as music and sound effects that match various productions.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the set output channel. . As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, out of the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, it is necessary to instruct which screen data, starting from the first screen data, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC. , update the pointer.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is used to indicate which light emitting data is to be output from the first light emitting data among the light emitting data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emitting mode. Update.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds, which are arranged in chronological order and constitute the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated to instruct which number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the electric drive source schedule data, which drive data is to be output from the first drive data? Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data, is generated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt, which is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated in motor and solenoid drive processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed every time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is performed. Updates the pointer to the data, and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process, so if for some reason the pointer points to the original point in the motor and solenoid drive process, Even if the drive data that is supposed to be used instructs other drive data, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that was originally supposed to be used.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the various received commands are analyzed and used for various settings of the performance. Random numbers (for example, random numbers used for effects related to pending prefetching) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and in this received command analysis processing, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Analyzes various commands. Based on the analyzed various commands, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. from the peripheral control ROM. (Extract it) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specified value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and set respectively. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emitting modes from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and performs lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an employee such as a clerk at the game hall) operates the production operation section 301 (touch operation section 302, press operation section 303) to change the brightness from the first specified brightness value to the maximum brightness. When a single luminance specification value up to the 31st luminance specification value is set, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC so that the set luminance specification value is used. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a command from the main control board 1310 in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, a starting opening winning command for instructing the start of a starting opening winning presentation, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of reservations (0 to 4), and a variation pattern for instructing the start of a variation display such as a variation display of a decorative symbol on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of a special symbol. The command, the symbol memory command that is output when the starting pending number changes, and the grand prize opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball B is accepted into the grand prize opening 2005 are analyzed, and which one is currently displayed? Recognize whether it is in a gaming state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC in the received command analysis processing. Analyzes various commands. Various commands include various commands related to special figure 1 synchronized production, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronized production, various commands related to jackpot, various commands classified to power on, and general commands. Various commands classified as figure synchronization performance related, various commands classified as normal electric role performance related, various commands classified as notification display, various commands classified as status display, various commands classified as test related, etc. There are various other types of commands. Additionally, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process regarding notices etc. based on the received command, and based on the lottery results, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

Note that the peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the effect display control section 1512, and the like. Various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, schedule data for generating light emission modes for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sounds for generating production sounds such as music and sound effects. There are schedule data for generation, and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging light emission mode data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. , and a track number for instructing in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by chronologically arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification display, the abnormality display mode is set to execute various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In addition, in warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification will be performed in the order of priority registered in advance, and the system will automatically move to other abnormality notifications that remain after the abnormality has been resolved. It is supposed to be done. This makes it possible to monitor multiple abnormalities at the same time without losing information that the first abnormality has occurred because another abnormality occurs after the first abnormality occurs and before that abnormality is resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are updated. Through this RCT acquisition information update processing, hours, minutes, and seconds, which are time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, are updated, and calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information. The date will be updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is transferred to the peripheral control ROM. It is read out from (extracted from) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 based on the input screen data. (one frame worth) of drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer is selected from among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data. , set the output channel to use according to the output channel number.

In addition, in the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is adjusted based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. has been identified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch, and outputs the output set in the sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018. Output sound data from the channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matching various performances are played from various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into a value in 1024 steps up to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music is output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. and sound effects are played. In this way, music and sound effects can be played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. It has become.

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is installed, and the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC have production sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data and its volume, the sound data and volume of the notification sound that is used to notify the hall staff, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. Includes subvolume values.

Specifically, for production sound, the above-mentioned board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for notification sound, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the production sound is determined during a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the device (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the variable pattern command was received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern started, or 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the peripheral control unit received the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern has elapsed. ) can be adjusted by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example operates for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral Until 0.5 seconds elapse after the control unit receives the fluctuation pattern command and the decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner, or after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and 0.5 seconds after the final display of the decorative pattern. By operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch can be applied to the board in the sound data creation process. The volume is converted into 7 levels of values from 0 to 6, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is used to operate the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume and setting the board volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels of the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC are Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized production sound is Actually, the volume is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and audio It is designed to be output as data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized performance sound is at its maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the top center speaker on the side of the door frame 3, The volume of the sound coming from the top side speaker and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the The speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4 are amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume, and this amplified performance sound is serialized and output as audio data, and the notification sound is is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the sound data of the notification sound built into the track being used and the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track being used. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. The amplified notification sound is amplified to the master volume value that corresponds to the volume of the sound being played, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, if the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 may occur or To briefly explain the control that plays a notification sound to notify the hall staff of fraudulent activity, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is installed is forcibly set to mute, and the sound effect is set to mute. This synthesizes the sound data of the track that was created, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track that incorporates the notification sound, and the sub-volume value that sets the volume of the notification sound to the maximum volume. A master volume value that sets the volume of the synthesized performance sound and the volume of the notification sound to the volume actually flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. The amplified performance sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, only the maximum volume notification sound is actually heard from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. At this time, the performance sound is muted, so it is not played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, but the performance sound is the same as the above-mentioned sound. It is progressing according to the generation schedule data.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds) from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the side of the door frame 3, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the performance sound that is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been forcibly set to mute will be changed to the sub-volume value by rotating the volume adjustment switch. (At this time, if the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by operating the touch operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set again. ), and is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, a problem may occur in the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine 1 When a notification sound is played to notify the hall staff of fraudulent activity, the volume of the performance sound is muted and the notification sound is transmitted to the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass sound on the main body frame 4. However, this muted performance sound is played from the main frame speaker 622 of the door frame 3, but since it is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side after a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass in the main body frame 4, the production sound does not start playing again from the point where the notification sound started, but the sound generation continues until a predetermined period of time has passed after the notification sound starts playing. The flow will start again from the point where it progressed according to the schedule data.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are played without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the peripheral control by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. It is now possible to control and adjust the IC's sound source. The volume adjusted by this program can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if a staff member such as a clerk in a game hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume to a low level, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers will be reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs or when a player is committing a fraudulent act, a notification sound set at a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff such as clerks at the game hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or fraudulent activity by a player.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to the backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Copy it to the backup area for regular processing and back it up.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, and when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1, steps S1008 to The process of S1038 is performed and the process returns to step S1004 again. In this manner, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the processes in steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing."

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts by setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1 in step S1008, indicating that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed.In step S1010, a 1ms interrupt timer activation process is started. , performs each process in steps S1014, . Become. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1006. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC can be accepted is sent from the VDP of the peripheral control IC to the peripheral control IC. The value 1 is set in peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, and which is executed upon input to the CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[11-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the peripheral control IC is ready to accept screen data from the CPU is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC. I will explain about it. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, this steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 178 is being executed; Each is set to a value of 0 when the execution of the process is completed.

In the determination of step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC continues to perform the normal processing. End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination in step S1045, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB - Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050) and end this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value is 1, and the value is 1, and the peripheral control They are each set to a value of 0 when no stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether the peripheral control section steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control section steady processing is executed. When it is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1 in step S1050, but this is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady state processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 178. In order to forcibly cancel the process midway through and start executing the peripheral control unit steady process from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 1, the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing in this routine is informed that the peripheral control section steady processing is being executed. By setting the steady processing flag SP-FLG to the value 0 in step S1038 in the process when the peripheral control unit is turned on (peripheral control unit steady processing), the peripheral control unit in this routine By transmitting the information to the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control section V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, the peripheral control section steady processing. It is determined whether the execution has been completed or not. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the routine processing of the peripheral control section cannot be completed between the input of the V blank signal and the input of the next V blank signal, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, if the processing cannot be completed in approximately 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next It is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, it takes about 66.6 ms to execute the current peripheral control section steady processing that has failed. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed repeatedly every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 178. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process will be executed 64 times. It is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the steady processing of the peripheral control unit fails, the progress state of the effect caused by the steady processing of the peripheral control unit and the progress state of the effect caused by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably matched.

[11-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 178. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 180 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer being activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 178. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33 fps. .3ms (=1000ms÷30fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3ms, after starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before it is executed. Specifically, when the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit, first the first 1ms timer interrupt occurs, then the second, etc., and then the 32nd 1ms timer interrupt are sequentially generated. This will occur.

In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that when the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is immediately terminated. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has priority over the peripheral control unit V blank signal. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is smaller than 33, it adds a value of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN (increments step S1102). By adding the value 1 to this 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitutes the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid according to the drive data, and updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer every time this motor and solenoid drive process is executed. do. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various presentation units provided in the game board 5, etc.) ) are driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a moving body information acquisition process (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various production units provided on the game board 5 based on the history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Understand the movable position by setting or obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs production operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this performance operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, contact operation unit (rotation (rotation direction) history information of 302, operation history information of press operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The rotating direction of the touch operation section 302 and whether or not the press operation section 303 has been operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation section 301, the volume of the performance sound output from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be adjusted, It is possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the frame 3 and the game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. Copy and back up to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the performance from step S1104 to step S1108 are executed as the performance progresses within a period of 1ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 178, various processing related to the effect from step S1014 to step S1032 is executed as the progress of the effect within a period of approximately 33.3 ms. There is. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. , this routine ends as is, so even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to occur earlier than the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt After forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the steady processing of the peripheral control unit due to the generation of the V blank signal, peripheral control is started again by the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. In other words, the consistency between the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute section V blank interrupt processing, the start of peripheral control section 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes somewhat, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. This makes it possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[11-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses this as an opportunity to send the main circuit serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC by 1 byte (8 bits). ) is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated using this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main cycle serial data, one packet consists of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values and are summed as the 3rd byte. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 181 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received among the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In the determination in step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives information of 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the period in which reception is possible, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC. Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data is taken out from the reception buffer, and when the status, which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the value is 1, which is the mode, which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data. When taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, it takes the value 3. Note that the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this judgment, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, are sequentially read from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In the determination in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC selects a mode when the reception counter SRXC is not the value 3, that is, the status is still the second byte of the main serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data. , and when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received is set.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the status in the 2nd byte of the main serial data following the status which is the 1st byte of the main serial data. When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, have been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, which has already been taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, are regarded as numerical values, and their sum (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main frequency serial data among the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls B from the island equipment of the game hall, and when the game balls B rub against each other and become charged, they discharge static electricity and generate noise. It is under the influence of the environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. and calculates the total (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not the main frequency serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has changed to different from normal main frequency serial data due to the influence of noise. can be determined.

In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status is assigned as the first byte of the received main cycle serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216). ), exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives 1 byte (8 bits) of the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the period in which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is immediately terminated.

[11-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control block power outage warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in FIG. 182, and checks whether the power outage warning signal is input. (Step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, it immediately ends this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer activated in step S1300 has elapsed for 2 microseconds. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 macro seconds have not elapsed, the CPU of the peripheral control IC returns to step S1302, determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input. If it is determined, this routine is immediately terminated, while if it is determined that a power outage warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

In the determination in step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control section power outage warning signal interrupt processing that is this routine, the CPU of the peripheral control IC executes the power saving process. (Step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the production display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off the lights of various LEDs. By suppressing this, even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being sent by the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 waits for at least a period of 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the commands being sent. It is set to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control section command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clearing process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, the CPU returns to step S1312 again and determines whether the power outage warning signal has been input. Determine whether In other words, it continues to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been inputted indefinitely. By continuing to make the determination indefinitely in this way, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has not been input in the determination in step S1312, it will no longer be able to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, if it is determined in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and clears the peripheral control IC. The CPU is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 178 is restarted.

In this way, if the input of the power outage notice signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314, so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset immediately before the power outage occurs. It is designed so that it does not take too long. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process is not executed, so the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing of this routine is mistakenly started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds and passes the determination in step S1302, the step If it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power outage warning signal is not continued in the infinite loop and is canceled, the WDT clearing process in step S1314 is not executed and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. It is now possible to deal with such noise by automatically returning to reset.

[12. Main control board control processing]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first starts the process using the first starting port sensor 3002, as shown in FIG. 183. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S231), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the RAM. A first starting opening passage process such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S232). Further, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (ball has entered the second starting port 2004) (step S233), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second starting opening passage process is executed, such as acquiring it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol retention storage area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled is set (step S235), and if the jackpot execution flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. A jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed. In addition, in the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", 15R A process for controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 2005 is executed according to the jackpot game state. Furthermore, when a mode indicating a "2R jackpot" is reached, a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot 2005 according to the 2R jackpot gaming state.

In the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the big winning opening 2005, each set process of the time saving flag and the time saving number counter is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect, and the 2R jackpot game is based on the fact that the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops changing during the time saving state becomes a mode that suggests a "2R jackpot". It is set when ending the 15R jackpot game state during the time saving state and the non-time saving state. Then, the time saving flag is activated when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time saving number counter reaches "0", the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 194, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) Reset during processing.

In addition, the time saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable displays of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time saving state continues, and is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. In this case, when the jackpot game state is ended, the number of times the time saving state continues is set. The time saving counter counts down every time the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner until the counter value reaches 0, but the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches 0. Sometimes, it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 194 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later.

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0". (Step S237), executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S238), and executes the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the first special symbol fluctuates. On the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S237), the second special symbol including the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S239). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232).

Now, in the process of step S231, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002, the process shown in FIG. As the process of step S241, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether the first pending storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) "4" or not (step S242). In the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S243 to The process of S245 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S243, the first special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S244, each random number acquired in step S241 is stored in a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S241. whether or not to be a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing a performance preliminary determination process in which preliminary determination information such as the type of variation pattern is determined before starting a variable display according to the starting prize (step S245), the process ends.

However, in the process of step S242, if it is determined that the first pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the first hold memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first hold. At the same time, the command for instructing the first pending memory number (first pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0 ~4)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the first pending number designation commands 0 to 4 (special symbol 1 memory commands 0 to 4). It looks like this.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the performance advance determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the performance pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S241 above, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 or not. The mode type of game performance is specified (step S261).

Then, the specified preliminary judgment information (whether or not there will be a jackpot, if it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it will not be a jackpot, whether or not to execute a reach effect as a game effect to be executed on the effect display device 1600, (e.g., the type of game performance to be performed), the type of the obtained special random number (first special random number), and the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the pending number counter). Set the prejudgment command. For example, in the production advance judgment process regarding the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first starting gate passage process, the specified preliminary judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the 1 (value of the special reservation number counter), and a first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding to the value is set (step S262).

Then, by transmitting a preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), the command is stored in correspondence with the first starting port 2002 where the starting prize has occurred. In addition to the number of retained memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of special symbols based on the starting winning that has occurred is regarded as a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot. A peripheral control installed in the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether a reach effect is to be executed as a game effect to be executed or prior determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed before starting variable display according to the starting prize. You will be able to understand IC.

Note that when the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reservation storage area that stores advance determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first pending storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of pending memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (earliest) storage area. Store in order starting from the area. Then, when a preliminary determination command is received when preliminary determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the preliminary determination information notified to the n+1th (n=1 to 3) storage area. , and upon receiving the first variation pattern command that notifies the start of variation display of the first special symbol, the advance data stored in the first storage area of the first pending storage area is stored in accordance with the received first variation pattern command. Discard the judgment information and move the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1st (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). (shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the advance determination information of the first special symbol is stored in such a manner that the order in which the start of variable display is suspended can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest advance determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (on hold), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is ), it will be possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new pending display is output, or when a shifted display of a pending display is displayed in accordance with the expiration of the pending display. .

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234).

Now, in the process of step S233, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has entered the second starting port 2004, the process shown in FIG. As the process of step S251, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value). ) is "1" (step S252). In the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S253 to The process of S254 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S253, the second special reservation counter is counted up (increased by 1). Next, as the process of step S254, each random number acquired in step S251 is stored in a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

However, in the process of step S252, if it is determined that the second pending storage number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

In addition, when the second hold memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number display in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second hold memory number. The command for instructing the second pending memory number (second pending number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 ~1)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second pending memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second pending number designation commands 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory commands 0 to 1). It looks like this.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on the entry of game balls B into the first starting port 2002 is set to "4", while the upper limit of the number of game balls B entered into the second starting port 2004 is set to "4". The upper limit of the second retention memory number based on the entry of ball B is set to "1". In addition, the second starting port 2004 allows a large number of game balls B to enter during the time saving state, and since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shorter than in the normal state, the second pending memory number Even if the upper limit is set to "1", if the period in which the second special symbol is not displayed fluctuating continues for a long time, or if the period in which the number of second pending memories is at the upper limit continues for a long time, the second starting port 2004 This prevents the player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to get a chance to win a jackpot even if the game ball B enters the ball.

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S238). It should be noted that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and the random numbers used for determination are the same. Since only the table and table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode of the first special symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped. Symbol normal processing (step S280)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281 )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process for
4. A first special symbol variation process (step S283) that waits until the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the first special symbol is displayed as follows (step S284)

In addition, the said 1st special symbol process flag is operated in the said main control side power-on process (refer FIG. 168) so that it may indicate that the said 1st special symbol normal process (step S280) should be performed.

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in a pending state, then as a process of step S302, the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S303 and S304, the first special reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reservation number counter is Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol retention storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a starting winning occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1st (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and are stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Move various random numbers to the N-1st (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the above-mentioned first special symbol occurred is memorized in a specifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

Thereafter, as the process of step S305, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process regarding the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. Thereafter, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) so as to proceed to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process is ended.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table shown in FIG. If the second special symbol normal processing is being executed, the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing is compared with the second special random number (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in FIG. 190(A) is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of first special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and three types of first special random numbers that are different from the jackpot determination value are found. Each of the first special random numbers is set so that the first special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, and the first special random number of 315 types matches the loss judgment value indicating that the first special random number is a loss. (Jackpot probability: 1/319, small win probability: 3/319). In addition, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the second special random number, one type of second special random number is a jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won. A loss determination indicating that the 144 kinds of second special random numbers that match and are different from the jackpot determination value have won the small hit and that the 174 kinds of second special random numbers that match the small hit determination value and are different from the jackpot determination value are the above-mentioned losses. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability: 1/319, small hit probability: 144/319). That is, the determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured so that the probability of determining a small hit is higher than the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number. , when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002. The situation is now considered to be more advantageous to the player.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing). As a result of the comparison with the random number), if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S312), a jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a jackpot is set (step S313), and the hit determination process is ended.

In addition, as a result of comparing the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read out in the second special symbol normal processing), If it is determined that the fluctuation is a small win (step S314), a small win flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won as a small win is set (step S315), and the hit determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if neither the jackpot nor the small hit has been won, that is, if it is determined that it is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and includes a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the time-saving state, and a reach determination table in the time-saving state that is used when the gaming state is in the non-time-saving state. It is equipped with a reach determination table in the state. In the reach judgment table in the time saving state, one type of reach random number matches the reach judgment value indicating reach, and 71 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating no reach. A random number is associated with each.

In addition, in the reach judgment table during the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach judgment table during the time saving state match the reach judgment value indicating reach, The above-mentioned reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach judgment value indicating that there is no reach. In this manner, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost (step S317) as a result of comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read out in step S302 (step S316). A reach flag indicating that the game is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S318).

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 191, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S321) and whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 190(B). The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol (stop symbol of the first special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S322).

in particular,
1. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have won in the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is set 15 times. (15 rounds) By repeating this, the game ball B is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and after the jackpot game state ends, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are created. 15R jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state that ends if there is no jackpot before the fluctuation display is executed 77 times.2. After opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have won in the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is set twice. By repeating (2 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the big winning hole 2005, and if it is controlled to the time saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is achieved. After the end of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed 77 times, if there is no jackpot, the time saving state will be terminated, and before the start of the 2R jackpot game state. One of the two types of jackpots is determined: a 2R jackpot, which is controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot game state if the game state is controlled to a non-time saving state.

In addition, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 8 determination values are distributed for a 15R jackpot, and 192 determination values are distributed for a 2R jackpot. That is, when a jackpot lottery result is obtained by the lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% probability that it will be a 15R jackpot, and a 96% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 196 determination values are assigned for a 15R jackpot, and 4 determination values are assigned for a 2R jackpot. That is, when a lottery result based on the second special random number is obtained as a jackpot, there is a 98% probability that it will be a 15R jackpot, and a 2% probability that it will be a 2R jackpot. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of determining a 15R jackpot is higher in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number than in the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 is executed more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002, the game The situation is now advantageous to those who

Moreover, when the type of jackpot is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the jackpot flag is not set in step S131, if the small hit flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 reads it in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The type of small hit is determined by comparing the first symbol random number and the small winning symbol determination table shown in FIG. 190(C), and when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stopped. The mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (step S325).

in particular,
1. Executing the opening/closing pattern twice in which the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed, the game ball B is controlled to a small winning game state in which it is possible (easily) to enter the accessory prize opening 2006, By guiding all of the game balls B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning gaming state to the first loss opening 2535, the game balls B are accepted into the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008. The first small hit is difficult 2. Execute an opening/closing pattern in which the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed nine times to control the small winning game state in which the game ball B can (easily) enter the accessory prize opening 2006, By guiding one game ball B of the game balls B that entered the prize winning opening 2006 during the small winning game state to the third sorting device 2550 after closing the prize winning opening 2006, the second V It is possible to accept the game ball B into the winning hole 2008, and when the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time after the small winning game state (for example, 29 seconds) or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have entered the big winning hole 2005, the opening/closing pattern is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) and the game ball B is large. Control is made into a 15R jackpot game state where it is possible (easily) to enter the winning hole 2005, and until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times after the end of the jackpot game state. 2. A second small win that is controlled to a time-saving state that ends if there is no jackpot in between.3. By executing an opening/closing pattern in which the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed 9 times, the game ball B is controlled to a small winning game state in which it can (easily) enter the accessory prize opening 2006. , one game ball B of the game balls B that won the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning game state is guided to the first V prize opening 2007 after the accessory prize winning opening 2006 is closed, and the game ball Based on B being accepted into the first V winning hole 2007, 10 game balls B are entered into the big winning hole 2005 after opening the big winning hole 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) after the corresponding small winning gaming state. The opening/closing pattern that closes when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that the winning hole is detected is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) to control the 15R jackpot game state in which the game ball B can (easily) enter the big winning hole 2005. However, after the end of the jackpot game state, the third control is performed to a time-saving state that ends if a jackpot does not occur until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 77 times. One of the three types of small wins is determined.

In addition, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 199 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit, and 1 judgment value is distributed in the case of the third small hit. ing. In other words, if a lottery result based on the first special random number results in a small win, there is a 99.5% probability that it will be a second small win, a 0.5% probability that it will be a third small win, and so on. You won't win a small prize. On the other hand, in the small hit symbol determination table that is compared with the second symbol random number, 20 judgment values are distributed in the case of the first small hit, and 130 judgment values are distributed in the case of the second small hit. , 50 judgment values are distributed in the case of a third small hit. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number results in a small win, there is a 10% probability that it will be the first small win, a 65% probability that it will be the second small win, and a 25% probability that it will be the second small win. This will be the third small hit. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the small winning symbol determining table that is compared with the second random symbol is compared with the first symbol random number, and the small winning symbol determining table that is compared with the second random symbol is compared with the first symbol random number. By guiding one game ball B out of the game balls B to the first V prize opening 2007, the probability of being determined to be the third small win, which will always be in the 15R jackpot game state after the small win game state ends, increases. When the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting prize in the second starting hole 2004 is executed more than the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning in the first starting hole 2002, the game The situation is now advantageous to those who

Further, when the type of small hit is determined, a stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small winning is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, if it is determined to be a second small hit, the second small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol, and if it is determined to be a third small winning symbol, the third small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol. . In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), if it is determined to be the first small hit, the first small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol, and if it is determined to be the second small winning, the small winning symbol is If it is determined to be a third small winning symbol, the third small winning symbol is determined as the small winning symbol.

If neither the jackpot flag nor the small hit flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the symbol is a losing symbol (step S327). After the process of determining the stop symbols has been performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S328, in which the lottery result (type of jackpot, small hit, out of reach, out of reach) is selected. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may also be an instruction for the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328 ). After that, as the process of step S329, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displays the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and changes the display from left decorative symbol to right decorative symbol to middle). The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative patterns (in some cases, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are the same pattern, are synchronously displayed in a variable manner, and are stopped and displayed at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies a small hit from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop pattern) when the decorative pattern displayed on the production display device 1600 stops changing, the peripheral control unit 1511 detects a small hit. If the symbol ("Final Battle") is determined and a 2R jackpot is specified, a 2R jackpot symbol (a combination where the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are the same even number symbols from "0" to "9") ), and when a 15R jackpot is specified, a 15R jackpot symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols from "0" to "9") is determined. In addition, when a reach miss is identified, a miss symbol with a reach (a combination of the same symbols with left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; a miss reach symbol) If the pattern is determined and a miss is identified, it is determined to be a miss symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols), and the variation is determined. When the variable time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game performance), the determined stop symbols are controlled to be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to control the time saving state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times after the jackpot game state. The time saving state may be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after the shift control is performed. Specifically, if the jackpot game state is controlled to the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state, and a jackpot has occurred a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) after that, the time saving state is not controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state for the predetermined number of times. , it may be controlled to a normal state. Further, even if the number of jackpot occurrences is less than a predetermined number, the control may be made to be in a non-time saving state during the jackpot gaming state, and the time saving state may be controlled again after the jackpot gaming state.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 192, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S341), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S342), and the small hit flag is set. If it is set (step S343), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small hit corresponding to the type of small hit determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S344). If the reach flag is set (step S345), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S346), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal If it is a loss (a loss without performing the reach effect), a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S347).

Then, the fluctuation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S348), and the surroundings for starting the determined fluctuation pattern are determined. A variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set in correspondence to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the performance control is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variable time determined in this way.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of pieces of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in a form that is associated with each fluctuating random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination results based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S302 of the first special symbol normal process. The variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by comparing the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, a lottery process regarding the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Note that the variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with the fluctuation random number. . For example, among the reach performances, the super reach performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance, and when the super reach performance is executed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot game state increases.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol fluctuation display control is started, then in step S351, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time saving number counter, in which the number of continuations of the time saving state is set, is "0". do. If this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S352), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short time number counter is "0" (step S353). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is to be ended is set (step S354).

If it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S351, and if it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S353, at that point Then, the process moves to step S355. Then, at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process is ended.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a miss, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol, which is set to about 1 second in the time short state, is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), The special symbol fluctuation pattern is set in such a way that the special symbol fluctuation time information, which is set to about 12 seconds in the non-time saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). . In other words, the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the time-saving state is such that the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol is extremely short compared to the fluctuation pattern at the time of failure selected in the non-time-saving state. Fluctuation time information of the above special symbol is set.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process, a variable timer in which a variable time is set according to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process for the variable pattern (step S282) is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S372), the process moves to step S373. That is, in the process of this step S373, this process ends at the time when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S284).

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the processing, display control is performed to display the stop symbols determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400, and the display control is performed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the first special pattern (step S382).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S384) and resets the time saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 77 times), the time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is ended and the non-time-saving control is performed. (normal state control) starts.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start a jackpot game (step S387), and starts the jackpot game. The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, in step S388, a process is also executed in which the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to a jackpot number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot number counter reaches "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a specified number of rounds have been executed. Then, the jackpot game is controlled to end. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described later, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S401) and the jackpot opening processing (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot number counter reaches "0", and the jackpot opening process (step S402) is repeatedly executed. When the round is ended in the opening process (step S402), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1, and based on the fact that it becomes "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process (step S403) and the jackpot game ends. Execute control to

Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed is set (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. Thereby, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. Also, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, similarly, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot, 2R jackpot). It has become.

In addition, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress is set when the jackpot game is completed, specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the jackpot opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A). Opening/closing control of the grand prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the grand prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when 10 game balls B have been won in the grand prize opening 2005, the grand prize opening sensor 2403 It is reset when the opening/closing control (opening/closing control that repeats the opening/closing pattern that closes when detected twice or 15 times) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), and the first It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set (step S386), and if the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates to start a small win game. A small winning start command is set (step S391), and a waiting time until the small winning game starts (a time for displaying a message indicating that the small winning game is to be started, etc.) is set in an interval timer (step S392). Then, a small winning execution flag indicating that a small winning game is being executed is set (step S393). Note that the small winning start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually depending on the type of small winning. In step S391, a small hit start command (first small hit start command, second small hit start command, third small hit) according to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) start command). Thereby, the effect of the small win game according to the type of small win instructed by the small win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. Also, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (first small hit) corresponding to the type of small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) A winning start command, a second small winning start command, a third small winning starting command) are set.

In addition, when the small winning game is finished, the small winning flag indicating that the small winning game is being executed is set in the small winning process (step S411) of the small winning control process (step S236A), which will be described later. ) to end the opening/closing control of the accessory prize opening 2006 according to the type of small win (for example, the opening/closing control in which the opening/closing pattern of opening the accessory prize opening 2006 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it is repeated two or nine times). It will be reset when By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114), while the small hit control process (step S236A) is not executed in the function display unit 1400. It becomes possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

In addition, if the small hit flag is not set, that is, if you lose, set the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next variable display of the special symbol starts to be displayed in the interval timer. (Step S394), the process moves to step S395.

When the processes of steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is transferred to the initial value of the first special symbol normal process. (Step S395), this process ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the state will shift to the jackpot game state based on the state in which the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop varying and display becomes a jackpot symbol. 1510 or until the start of the next round (step S401)
2. The big winning hole 2005 is controlled to be open based on the fact that the state when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped becomes a jackpot symbol, or the big winning hole 2005 is controlled to be opened based on the start of the next round. After the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds), or when the big winning hole sensor 2403 detects that 10 game balls B have won in the big winning hole 2005, the big winning hole 2005 is closed. Big prize opening opening process (step S402)
3. A post-opening process for jackpot opening that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the jackpot gaming state ends when all rounds are finished (step S403).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S401) should be performed in the process of step S42. In addition, in the above-mentioned big winning hole opening process (step S402), at the start of a round to control the big winning hole 2005 in an open state, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the big winning hole 2005 is closed. At the end of the round controlled by the state, a jackpot round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game performance according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. This is performed using a device 1600, a lamp/LED, a speaker, and the like.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S236A). In the small winning process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small winning process flag.

1. Small win start processing (step S410) that executes a setting process for starting a small win gaming state
2. Small win processing that monitors the entrance and release time of game ball B during the small win gaming state (step S411)

In addition, the said small hit process flag is operated in the process of said step S42 so that it may indicate that the said small hit start process (step S410) should be performed. In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into a specific area is detected during the small hit process, the jackpot execution flag is set and the number of rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state (15 rounds in this example) is set to the jackpot. Set the number of times in the counter and end the process. As a result, the jackpot game state is started following the small win game state.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal by the normal winning hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that the game ball B has passed through the normal winning hole 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Execute the oral winning process.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal processing (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and based on the read normal random number, a lottery process regarding the display mode of the normal symbol when the fluctuation control is stopped is performed.
2. A normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed based on the regular symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) that waits until the variable display of the above-mentioned normal symbols on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The above-mentioned normal symbol is set so that the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped. Normal symbol stop processing to stop the fluctuating display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the normal symbol is in a mode that suggests "normal symbol hit", the second starting port door 2411 moves back and the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. Normal electric accessories release processing (step S807) that executes processing to enable acceptance of

The normal symbol process flag is operated in the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 168) to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed.

[13. Game in small hit game state]
Next, the game in the small winning game state will be explained. As described above, in this example, when the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a small win, the small win game is played in which an opening/closing pattern is executed a predetermined number of times in which the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed. All the game balls B that enter the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning game state and are detected by the accessory prize winning opening sensor 2513 are sent to the first loss opening sensor 2516 and the third losing opening sensor 2518. , the first V winning opening sensor 2514, and the second V winning opening sensor 2515, that is, when the accessory is discharged from the inside of the winning opening 2006 to the rear of the game board 5, a small winning game state is established. It is supposed to end. In addition, the game ball B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning game state is accepted into the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008, and the first V prize opening sensor 2514 and the second V prize winning opening are received. When detected by the mouth sensor 2515, the small winning gaming state is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the game ball B that entered the accessory winning slot 2006 during the small winning gaming state enters the first losing slot 2535 or the third winning slot. 2555 and detected by the first loss sensor 2516 or the third loss sensor 2518, after the small win game state is controlled to the normal state or time saving state according to the control state before the small win.

In addition, as described above, in this example, the first small hit is controlled so that all the game balls B that have entered the accessory prize opening 2006 are guided to the first loss opening 2535, and the game that has won the accessory prize opening 2006. One game ball B out of the balls B is controlled to be guided to the third sorting device 2550 and circulates in the third sorting table 2554, and then the second V prize opening 2008 and the two third losers. The second small win is controlled so that it is accepted in any of the openings 2555 and one game ball B among the winning balls B in the accessory winning opening 2006 is guided to the first V winning opening 2007. The third small win is controlled as follows, and the third small win game state is controlled as follows.

In addition, in the first small hit, the number of openings and closings of the accessory prize opening 2006 is smaller than in the second and third small winnings, and in addition, all game balls B that have entered the prize winning hole 2006 are entered into the prize winning hole. Since it is guided from the opening 2006 to the nearest first losing opening 2535 and detected by the first losing opening sensor 2516, the execution period of the small winning gaming state (the period from the start to the end of the small winning gaming state) is short. In the third small hit, one game ball B out of the game balls B that won in the prize winning hole 2006 is placed in the first V winning hole 2007 whose distance from the prize winning hole 2006 is the next closest to the first losing hole 2535. Since it is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2514, the execution period of the small winning game state is the second shortest after the first small winning. On the other hand, in the second small hit, one game ball B among the game balls B that entered the prize winning hole 2006 is guided to the third sorting device 2550 which is the farthest from the prize winning hole 2006, and After the game ball B guided by the strikeout distribution device 2550 is circulated within the third distribution table 2554, the game ball B accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2515. , the game ball B received in the third loss port 2555 is detected by the third loss port sensor 2518, so the execution period of the small win game state is the longest among the three types of small wins.

In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if it is determined to be a small hit based on the first special random number, it is determined as a second small hit. In the normal state, the second small hit is executed in most cases, but in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, the small hit is executed based on the second special random number. When it is determined that the third small hit is executed, the ratio of the third small hit is increased compared to the normal state, and in the time saving state, the third small hit is executed at a rate of one out of every four small wins. .

That is, in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, if the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 during the small hit game state, it is advantageous for the player to be in a time saving state after the 15R jackpot game state. In order to control the transition to the state, one game ball B of the game balls B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 during the small winning game state is circulated within the third distribution table 2554. While the audience is excited to see whether it will be accepted into the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555 for a certain period of time, the small winning game is played in the fluctuating display of the second special symbol that is executed in a time-saving state. Even if the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning hole 2008 during this state, the time saving state will be re-entered after the 15R jackpot game state. If one game ball B circulates within the third distribution table 2554, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, in this example, in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, by increasing the ratio of the third small winning, which has a short execution period of the small winning gaming state, the small winning gaming state is shortened during the time saving state. It is designed to end in time.

In addition, as described above, in the third small hit, when the distribution rotary body 2531 rotates from the accommodating state to the unaccommodable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodating part 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 is It flows down the second distribution guiding path 2541 of the second distribution device 2540 through the passage 2536, comes into contact with the top surface of the closed distribution door 2544, is guided to the right, and enters the first V prize opening 2007. do. Therefore, in the case of the third small hit, the game balls B distributed to the first hit path 2536 are discharged to the rear of the game board 5 in a short time by rotating the distribution rotating body 2531 from the accommodating state to the unaccommodating state. The player is unable to see the player. In addition, the first V prize opening 2007 can be entered when the distribution door 2544 is moving forward above the second losing opening 2543, but the distribution door 2544 operates in the front and back direction. Therefore, it is difficult to visually check the operating status. In other words, the presence of the distribution door 2544 is difficult for the player to recognize (hard to see), and the game balls B distributed to the first V prize opening 2007 by the distribution door 2544 are quickly transferred to the game board 5. Coupled with the fact that it is ejected backwards, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the existence of the first V winning hole 2007, so the player does not realize that the game ball B has been guided to the first V winning hole 2007, in other words, the first V winning hole 2007 It is difficult to notice that game ball B passes by. In this way, in order to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game ball B has been guided to the first V prize opening 2007 when the third small win occurs in the time saving state, the The small winning game state is executed without being conscious of the lottery (whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the V winning hole (first V winning hole 2007, second V winning hole 2008)), and the corresponding small winning game is played. After the state ends, a 15R jackpot gaming state can be executed. As a result, the small win game state and the 15R jackpot game state occur consecutively in a short period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when it becomes a second small hit and distributes the game ball B to the third distribution device 2550, and when it becomes a third small hit and distributes the game ball B to the first V prize opening 2007, the effect is different. The presentation of the small winning game state executed on the display device 1600 is different. Specifically, in the case of a second small hit, whether the game ball B distributed to the third sorting device 2550 enters the second V winning opening 2008 or the third losing opening 2555; On the other hand, in the case of a third small hit, an effect that does not make the user conscious of the rotation of the distributing rotating body 2531 is performed (for example, in the case of a third small hit, there is a big hit). By giving the same notification as when the third small hit occurs (for example, notifying that it is a jackpot instead of a small hit when the third small win occurs), the player is made aware that a small win gaming state will be executed. In order to make it more difficult, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball similar to the small winning game state is executed before the start of the jackpot game state as a special bonus chance where you can obtain a prize ball different from the prize ball that can be obtained in the jackpot game state. As a result, a player who recognizes that he or she has won the 15R jackpot may be given a special bonus chance before the start of the 15R jackpot gaming state, which is different from the 15R jackpot gaming state. Since prize balls can be won, the game becomes more interesting.

In addition, if the time to reach the V winning hole is shorter for the 3rd small hit than the 2nd small hit, the path taken by the game ball B guided by the 2nd small hit until it is accepted into the V winning hole. The length of the (first path) and the path (second path) taken until the game ball B guided by the third small hit is accepted into the V winning hole becomes longer in proportion to the time it takes to reach the V winning hole. Regardless of the game ball, if the time taken to reach the V-winning hole is longer than the third small hit, the route (first route) for the game ball B guided by the second small hit until it is accepted into the V-winning hole. It may be made shorter than the path (second path) for the game ball B guided by the third small hit to be accepted into the V winning hole. For example, by providing a deceleration means to reduce the rolling speed of the game ball B in the first path, it may take longer for the game ball B to reach the V winning hole than the game ball B passing through the second path.

In addition, in the above example, a plurality of V winning holes such as the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are provided, and in the variable display of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, the accessory winning hole 2006 One game ball B out of the winning game balls B is distributed to the third sorting device 2550 having the second V winning hole 2008, and in the variable display of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state, it is used as an accessory. By guiding one game ball B out of the winning game balls B from the winning opening 2006 to the first V winning opening 2007 which is the closest distance from the accessory winning opening 2006 to the first losing opening 2535, the small Although the execution period of the winning game state is configured to be different, the distance to the V-winning slot and the number of V-winning slots are not limited to those described above. For example, a gaming machine with only one V-winning slot may be used. The technical idea of the present invention can also be applied to. Specifically, for example, a means (obstruction) for inhibiting or delaying the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning hole, such as allowing the game ball B to be accepted into the V winning hole after circulating in the third distribution table 2554. etc.), the second small hit takes a long time to reach the V winning hole, and there is no means to obstruct or delay the reception of the game ball B to the V winning hole (at least less than the second small hit). As long as the number of pieces provided is small), the third small win that takes a short time to reach the V winning hole, and the normal state (the first special symbol) depending on the time to reach the common V winning hole. You may make it change the execution rate in a time saving state (variable display) and a time saving state (variable display of the second special symbol).

[13-1. Error notification in small hit gaming state]
Next, error notification in the small winning gaming state will be explained. In this example, in the small winning game state, the time until the winning game ball B is ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006 is monitored, and if it is not ejected even after a predetermined period of time, an error notification is performed. .

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit start process (step S411). In the small win start process, a setting process for starting a small win game state is executed.

When the small hit start process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer set in step S392 of the first special symbol stop process or the second special symbol stop process (step S421), and then starts the interval timer. When it times out (step S422), that is, when the waiting time from the stop display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to the start of the small winning game state has elapsed, the small winning gaming state is started. An initial value "0" is set to an elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time since the start (step S423).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects opening/closing pattern data corresponding to the type of small win being executed (first small win, second small win, third small win) (step S424), and selects Control of the accessory prize opening 2006, the sorting rotating body 2531, and the sorting door 2544 is started based on the opening/closing pattern data (step S425), and the process is transferred to the small winning process (step S411) as described above. When the small winning process flag of is updated (step S426), this process ends. On the other hand, if the interval timer has not timed out in step S421, the process ends without executing subsequent processes.

The opening/closing pattern data is provided for each type of small win, and indicates the operation mode of the accessory prize opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 according to the elapsed time from the start of the small win game state. It is something. In this example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the accessory prize opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 based on the opening/closing pattern data corresponding to the small winning type selected in step S424. Then, the accessory prize opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 come to operate in the manner shown in FIG. 144.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit process (step S412).

When the small winning process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first adds 1 to an elapsed timer that measures the elapsed time since starting the small winning gaming state, and also sets an emission monitoring timer to be described later. If so, the timer value of this discharge monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 (step S431). When the elapsed timer is incremented by 1, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects the opening/closing pattern corresponding to the elapsed timer (time elapsed from the start of the small winning game state) among the opening/closing pattern data selected in step S424 of the small winning start process. The data is read out, and the opening/closing control of the accessory prize opening 2006, the distribution rotating body 2531, and the distribution door 2544 is controlled based on the read opening/closing pattern data (step S432).

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 if the accessory prize opening sensor 2513 is on (step S433), that is, the accessory prize winning opening 2006 is activated. If the game ball B is accepted, a remaining ball counter that counts the remaining balls that have not yet been ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006 among the game balls B that have entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is incremented by 1 (step S434). .

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls when the game ball B is first received in the accessory prize opening 2006 after the small winning game state is started (when the first game ball B enters the ball). (Step S435) is provided corresponding to each small hit type as the longest period expected until all the game balls B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 including this game ball B are discharged. The assumed longest period is set in the discharge monitoring timer (step S436).

In this example, in the case of the first small hit, the game balls B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 are not distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotary body 2531 and are all sent to the second loss opening 2543. In order to enter the game, the shortest period among the three types of small wins is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 10,000 ms). In addition, in the case of a second small hit, one of the game balls B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is distributed to the first hit passage 2536 by the distribution rotary body 2531, and In order for the game ball B that has entered the third sorting device 2550 through 2536 to go around the third sorting table 2554 and then enters either the second V winning opening 2008 or the two third losing openings 2555. , the longest period among the three types of small wins is set as the assumed longest period (for example, 180000 ms). In addition, in the case of a third small hit, one of the game balls B received in the accessory prize opening 2006 is distributed to the first hit path 2536 by the distribution rotary body 2531; In order to accept the game ball B that has passed through the hit path 2536 into the second V prize opening 2008 without entering the third sorting device 2550, the shortest period after the first small hit is set as the expected longest period ( For example, 60000s).

The discharge monitoring timer is decremented in step S431, and the discharge monitoring timer times out when the number of game balls B entered into the prize winning hole 2006 and the number of game balls B discharged from the prize winning hole 2006 do not match. If the process continues until later, it is determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring.

In addition, we monitor the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game state, and if this elapsed time reaches the expected maximum period according to the type of small winning that is being executed, it is possible that some abnormality (error) or fraudulent activity is occurring. Alternatively, the elapsed time from the first opening timing of the accessory prize opening 2006 in the small winning game state may be monitored and this elapsed time may be determined as the expected maximum period according to the type of small winning that is being executed. It may be determined that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraud is occurring when At the start of the small winning game state, the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) and the accommodating portion 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 is facing upward, and then the first distribution solenoid 2532 is turned OFF (non-energized). The timing at which the accommodating portion 2531a of the distributing rotary body 2531 operates to face the right side (the timing of the first distributing operation of the distributing rotary body 2531) when the distributing rotary body 2531 is in a state of energization), and the distributing rotary body After the first sorting operation timing of 2531, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned on from the state in which the housing portion 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 is facing upward. The timing when the accommodating part 2531a of the distribution rotary body 2531 operates to face the right side when it is in the OFF (non-energized) state (the second distribution operation timing of the distribution rotation body 2531), the third small hit is After the second sorting operation timing of the minute rotating body 2531, the first sorting solenoid 2532 is turned ON (energized) again, and the first sorting starts from the state in which the accommodating portion 2531a of the sorting rotary body 2531 faces upward. Progress from the timing when the solenoid 2532 is turned off (de-energized) and the housing portion 2531a of the distribution rotor 2531 operates to face right (the third distribution operation timing of the distribution rotation body 2531) It may be possible to monitor the time and determine that some kind of abnormality (error) or fraudulent act is occurring when the elapsed time reaches the expected maximum period according to the type of small win being executed.

In addition, when detecting the ejection of the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006, that is, when the first loss opening sensor 2516 detects when the game ball B received in the accessory prize winning opening 2006 is discharged, When the game ball B is detected by any of the V winning hole sensor 2514, the second V winning hole sensor 2515, and the third losing hole sensor 2518 (step S437), the residual ball counter is subtracted by 1 (step S438). ).

Then, whether the remaining ball counter is "0" or not, that is, whether the number of game balls B accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 and the number of game balls B discharged from the accessory prize opening 2006 match. It is determined whether or not (step S439), and if the remaining number counter is "0", it is assumed that no abnormality or fraudulent act has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S442.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is not "0", it is determined whether or not the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in order to determine whether an abnormality or illegal act has occurred (step S440). . As mentioned above, the discharge monitoring timer is set corresponding to each small winning type as the longest period expected from the start of the small winning gaming state until all the game balls B are ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006. This indicates the remaining period of the expected maximum period. If the discharge monitoring timer has not timed out in step S440, the process ends without executing subsequent processes. As a result, when the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114) of the main control side timer interrupt process is executed again, the small hit process is executed and the remaining ball counter is monitored until the discharge monitoring timer times out. It becomes like this.

Further, if the remaining ball counter is not "0" and the discharge monitoring timer has timed out in step S440, it is determined that an abnormality or illegal act has occurred, and a discharge error is notified (step S441). It is designed to end the hit process. Ejection error notification includes an error display on the effect display device 1600, output of notification sound from the main body frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc., and a predetermined mode using lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. In this example, a message such as "Ejection abnormality" is displayed in a part of the effect display device 1600, and output from the main body frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. is not allowed. In other words, the state in which the remaining ball counter is not "0" mostly indicates a minor abnormality such as the game ball B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 not being ejected, so an abnormality in the gaming machine is notified. Displays that may make players uncomfortable or anxious are avoided. After notifying the discharge error in step S441, by terminating the small winning process without updating the small winning process flag, next the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of the main control side timer interrupt process (step When S114) is executed, the small hit process is executed again. That is, either all of the game balls B accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 are ejected, or the RAM clear switch is operated by the game clerk and the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is completely erased. The small winning game state does not end until it is reset (until it is reset), and the ejection error notification is executed.

If it is determined in step S439 that the remaining ball counter is "0", it is determined whether the game ball B has entered the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 (step S442). In step S442, if the game ball B has not entered the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008, that is, the game ball B has entered the first losing hole 2535 or the third losing hole 2555 and the first losing hole has occurred. If it is detected by the mouth sensor 2516 or the third loss mouth sensor 2518, a small win end command is set to instruct execution of the performance at the end of the small win game state (step S443), and the small win start process (step S411) is performed. ) When the small win process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to (step S447), this process ends.

If the game ball B enters the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008 in step S442 and is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2514 or the second V winning hole sensor 2515, the jackpot game starts. After setting the waiting time until the interval timer (step S444), the small hit execution flag is reset and the jackpot execution flag is set (step S445). In addition, a V winning jackpot start command is set (step S446) that instructs the execution of the performance at the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first V winning opening 2007 and the second V winning opening 2008, and the above-mentioned small When the small win process flag is updated (step S447) so that the process is transferred to the win start process (step S411), this process ends.

In this way, in this example, when the game ball B is accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is incremented by 1, and each time the game ball B is ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006, the value of the remaining ball counter is increased. By subtracting 1 from , it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B remaining without being ejected from the accessory prize opening 2006 (center accessory prize opening 2500). In addition, the period until the ejection error notification is executed (estimated longest period) is made different depending on the small hit type, in other words, the destination of the game ball B, and the game ball B that has passed through the first hit path 2536 is In the third small win, which is accepted in the second V prize opening 2008 without entering the three-way sorting device 2550, the game ball B is entered into the third sorting device 2550 and the first one is circulated within the third sorting table 2554. The period (estimated longest period) until the discharge error notification is executed is shorter than that for the second small win. That is, the period until the ejection error notification is executed is shorter for the small win which takes a shorter time (distance) to reach the V winning hole.

Normally, there is no game ball B remaining in the accessory prize opening 2006, so if the game ball B remains in the accessory prize opening 2006 for a long period of time, some abnormality ( error) has occurred. In addition, if it is detected that more game balls B have been ejected than the number of game balls B that have entered into the accessory prize opening 2006, a fraudulent act such as illegally placing game balls B into the accessory prize opening 2006 has been committed. It can be determined that there is a possibility that the The pachinko machine 1 of this example monitors the occurrence of these abnormalities and fraudulent acts, and issues an ejection error notification if any of these is suspected.

In addition, in this example, it is detected whether the game balls B remain in the accessory prize opening 2006 or that a larger number of game balls B than the game balls B that entered the prize winning opening 2006 have been discharged. Therefore, even after the ejection error notification is performed based on the ejection monitoring timer timing out when the remaining ball counter is not "0", a small error occurs every time the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed without stopping the game. Execute the winning process and monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, and if the value of the remaining ball counter becomes "0", that is, if it returns to the normal state, the first V winning hole 2007 and the second The system automatically returns to a state in which it is determined whether the game ball B enters the 2V winning hole 2008, and the small winning game state is ended.

In addition, in this example, even if the value of the remaining ball counter does not become "0" after executing the ejection error notification in step S441 of the small hit process, if a more serious abnormality occurs, Error notification regarding this serious abnormality is executed with priority. Serious abnormalities include, for example, when one of the plurality of magnetic sensors 2010 detects magnetic field acting illegally within the gaming area 5a (magnetic detection error notification), or when radio wave irradiation is detected (radio wave detection error notification). ), when it is detected that the door frame 3 has been opened (door opening error notification), and other situations in which there is a high possibility that fraudulent activity is being carried out. If such a serious abnormality occurs, the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning gaming state is terminated, and error notifications related to these serious abnormalities (magnetic detection error notification, radio wave detection error notification, magnetic detection error notification) are executed. etc.), and the discharge error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state may be resumed after the error notification related to the serious abnormality ends, or the error notification related to the serious abnormality may be restarted in the small winning gaming state. By overwriting and executing the ejection error notification in step S441, the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state is displayed on the production display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc. Although it is not reflected in the output or lighting/flashing of lamps/LEDs etc. installed on the game board 5 or door frame 3 (executed in a visible/audible manner) (executed behind the scenes), it is a serious abnormality. The content of the ejection error notification progresses over time while the error notification related to the serious abnormality is being performed, and when the error notification related to the serious abnormality ends, the ejection error notification can be viewed or listened to with the progressed content. This is reflected in the display on the effect display device 1600, the output of the main frame speaker 622, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, etc., and the lighting/blinking of lamps/LEDs etc. provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3. (For example, if an error notification related to a serious abnormality is started 5 seconds after starting the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state and this error notification is executed for 30 seconds, a serious abnormality After finishing the error notification related to the small winning game state, the content is restarted from 35 seconds after starting the ejection error notification in step S441 in the small winning game state).

Further, the mode of ejection error notification may be made different depending on whether the remaining ball counter is "1" or more in step S439 of the small hit processing and when it is less than "0". If the remaining ball counter is "1" or more, it only indicates a slight abnormality in that the game ball B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is not ejected, while if the remaining ball counter is less than "0". In this case, it indicates a serious abnormality in which more game balls B are ejected than the number of game balls B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006, and game balls B are illegally entered into the accessory prize opening 2006. There is a possibility that Therefore, when a slight abnormality occurs such that the game ball B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is not ejected, the ejection error notification 1 is displayed in a part of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. Error sound is not output by displaying a message such as "Abnormal" and continuing to output sound from the main body frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. A part of the LED is made to emit light partially, and when a serious abnormality occurs in which more game balls B are ejected than the number of game balls B that have entered, the ejection error notification 2 is emitted, for example, in the entire area of the effect display device 1600. ``A fraud has occurred!'' is displayed on the screen, and the volume of the performance sound is suppressed from the main body frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc., and an error sound saying ``A fraud has occurred!'' is displayed loudly. The occurrence of fraudulent activity may be notified by outputting at a loud volume and further causing the entire door frame 3 to emit light by causing all of the LEDs provided in the door frame 3 to emit light.

In addition, in this example, the detection signal of the second loss opening sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guide path 2551 is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and in the second small winning game state, the second distribution device 2540 When the game ball B guided to the sorting guide path 2551 is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third sorting guide path 2551, the peripheral control unit 1511 activates the effect display device 1600 and the main body frame speaker. 622, the game ball B that circulates within the third distribution table 2554 in the third distribution device 2550 by controlling the top center speaker, top side speaker, lamps/LEDs, etc. provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3. An effect is performed to excite which of the second V winning opening 2008 and the third losing opening 2555 will be accepted.

In addition, the detection signal of the second loss sensor 2517 provided in the middle of the third distribution guideway 2551 may be input to the main control board 1310. In this case, the detection signal of the second loss sensor 2517 may be input to the main control board 1310. Depending on the detection of B, it may be determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred. For example, if game ball B is detected in a V winning hole or losing hole that is different from the V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled according to the small winning type in the above small winning process, or depending on the small winning type. If there is a possibility that the game ball B will be detected in a V winning opening or losing opening that is different from the planned V winning opening or losing opening (different from the planned passage or winning opening depending on the small hit type) When the game ball B heads towards the passage or the winning opening), it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and the distribution error notification may be executed in step S441 of the small winning process.

Specifically, as the V winning opening and losing opening scheduled according to the type of small hit, the first losing opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the first small winning, and the second losing opening 2535 is scheduled in the case of the second small winning. A V winning opening 2008 or a third losing opening 2555 is scheduled, and in the case of a third small win, a first V winning opening 2007 is scheduled. Then, in the case of the first small hit, if it is detected that the game ball B has been accepted into any of the first V winning hole 2007, the second V winning hole 2008, and the third losing hole 2555 during the small winning process, In the case of the second small hit, if it is detected that the game ball B has been accepted into one of the first loss opening 2535 and the first V winning hole 2007 in the small winning process, in the case of the third small winning, the small winning is in progress. If it is detected in the process that the game ball B has been accepted into any of the first loss opening 2535, the second V winning opening 2008, and the third loss opening 2555, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 200, a message such as "Illegal occurrence has occurred" is displayed in the entire area of the effect display device 1600, and the volume of the effect sound is suppressed from the main body frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc., and an error sound is emitted. ``Fraud is being committed.'' is outputted in a loud volume, and all of the LEDs installed in the door frame 3 are made to emit light to notify the user of the occurrence of fraud. It is also possible to perform error notification for each minute. In this case, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be immediately notified, and fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

In addition, a second distribution detection sensor is provided in the middle of the second distribution guideway 2541 to detect the game balls B circulating inside the second distribution guideway 2541, and a detection signal of the second distribution detection sensor is provided. may be input to the main control board 1310, and in the case of the first small win, the game is entered into any of the first V winning hole 2007, the second V winning hole 2008, and the third losing hole 2555 during the small winning process. When there is a possibility that the ball B will be accepted, that is, when the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B and determines that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guide path 2541, the second distribution detection sensor In the case of a small hit, although the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B during the small hit process, the second distribution detection sensor 2517 cannot detect the game ball B, so the ball passes through the second distribution guide path 2541. When it is determined that the game ball B is heading towards the first V winning hole 2007, in the case of the third small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B in the small win process, and then the second losing hole sensor detects the game ball B. When it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second sorting guide path 2541 is heading towards the third sorting device 2550 by detecting the game ball B at 2517, the scheduled V prize opening such as If there is a possibility that the game ball B will be detected in a V winning hole or a losing hole different from the losing hole, it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred and a distribution error notification may be executed. In this case, it is possible to notify when a situation where a fraudulent act is likely to occur, and it is possible to detect a fraudulent act at an early stage.

Note that the mode of distribution error notification may be changed depending on the degree of abnormality (fraud level). For example, when the second distribution detection sensor detects game ball B in the case of the first small hit, If it is determined that the game ball B has entered the second distribution guide path 2541, or in the case of a second small hit, the second distribution detection sensor detects the game ball B during the small win process, but the second loss occurs. If it is determined that the game ball B passing through the second sorting guide path 2541 is heading towards the first V prize opening 2007 because the mouth sensor 2517 cannot detect the game ball B, the degree of abnormality is high. Based on the judgment, for example, a message such as "Fraud has occurred!" is displayed in the entire area of the production display device 1600, and a loud sound saying "Fraud has occurred" is displayed from the main body frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. The second sorting detection sensor detects the game ball B by outputting this to notify the occurrence of fraud by outputting a second small hit in the small winning process and in the case of the third small winning in the small winning process. If it is later determined that the game ball B passing through the second distribution guide path 2541 is heading towards the third distribution device 2550 by detecting the game ball B with the second loss opening sensor 2517, an abnormality is detected. If it is judged that the degree of error is low, for example, a message such as "Ejection abnormality" is displayed in a part of the effect display device 1600, and the output from the main body frame speaker 622, top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. is not performed. The occurrence of an abnormality other than fraudulent activity may be reported. In other words, if the game ball B is passing through a path in which the game ball B enters the V winning hole at a higher rate than the entering ratio of the game ball B to the V winning hole that is preset according to the small winning type. (If the V winning expected level is higher than the V winning expected level that is preset according to the type of small win being executed), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high and fraudulent activity is being carried out. The game ball B passes through a route in which the game ball B enters the V winning hole at a lower rate than the entry rate of the game ball B into the V winning hole that is preset according to the small winning type. (If the V winning expected level is lower than the V winning expected level that is preset according to the type of small win being executed), it is determined that the degree of abnormality is low and the fraudulent act is performed. The occurrence of an abnormality different from the above may be notified. In addition, if the V winning expectation level is lower than the V winning expectation level that is preset according to the type of small win being executed, the player himself will suffer a disadvantage, but the gaming parlor will suffer no damage. Since this does not occur, distribution error notification may not be performed when the degree of such abnormality is low.

In addition, if the game ball B is detected in a V winning opening or losing opening that is different from the scheduled V winning opening or losing opening according to the small winning type, or if the game ball B is detected in a V winning opening or losing opening that is scheduled according to the small winning type. During the period in which the distribution error notification is being performed based on the possibility that game ball B may be detected in the V winning opening or losing opening, which is different from the winning opening or losing opening, the accessory winning opening is Even if it is determined that a slight abnormality has occurred in which the game ball B that entered 2006 has not been ejected, the V winning opening or losing opening is different from the scheduled V winning opening or losing opening depending on the type of small hit. Based on the fact that game ball B has been detected and that there is a possibility that game ball B will be detected in a V winning hole or losing hole that is different from the planned V winning hole or losing hole depending on the type of small hit. The distribution error notification that is currently being executed will continue to be executed without being terminated. However, the ejection error notification 1 based on the determination that a slight abnormality has occurred in which the game ball B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is not ejected during the small winning process is visible and viewable. Although it is not executed, it is executed behind the scenes, and the contents of the discharge error notification 1 are advanced as time passes. In addition, in this case, if the game ball B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is discharged and the value of the remaining ball counter becomes "0", there is a slight possibility that the game ball B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 has not been discharged. The discharge error notification 1 based on the determination that an abnormality has occurred ends. In this way, even if a minor abnormality occurs during the period in which an error notification (distribution error notification in this example) is performed based on the occurrence of a major abnormality, an error notification (distribution error notification in this example) is performed based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality. In this example, the discharge error notification 1) is not executed in a visible or audible manner. However, it is quietly executed behind the scenes of error notification based on the occurrence of a major abnormality (in this example, distribution error notification), and when a minor abnormality is resolved, an error notification based on the occurrence of a minor abnormality (this In the example, the discharge error notification 1) is terminated.

In this example, even in a state where a small hit game state or a jackpot game state is not occurring, the accessory winning hole sensor 2513, the first V winning hole sensor 2514, the first losing hole sensor 2516, the second V winning hole sensor 2515, The detection of the game ball B by the third loss opening sensor 2518 is monitored, and if the game ball B is detected by any of these, it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out and the occurrence of a fraudulent act is notified. It looks like this. In addition, in a state where a small hit game state or a jackpot game state is not occurring, the detection of the game ball B by the second distribution detection sensor or the second loss opening sensor 2517 may be monitored, and the second distribution If the game ball B is detected by either the detection sensor or the second loss opening sensor 2517, it is determined that the degree of abnormality is high, that is, a fraudulent act is being carried out, and the occurrence of a fraudulent act is notified. good. In other words, in a state where a small winning game state or a jackpot gaming state is not occurring, regardless of the degree (high or low) of the rate at which the game ball B enters the V winning hole, the player can play any passage in the accessory prize opening 2006. Even if ball B is passing, it may be determined that a fraudulent act is occurring, and the occurrence of a fraudulent act may be notified.

In addition, in the above example, when the discharge error notification is executed in step S441, or when the game ball B is detected in a V winning hole or a losing hole that is different from the V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled depending on the small winning type. Also, a distribution error notification is made based on the possibility that the game ball B will be detected in a V winning hole or a losing hole that is different from the V winning hole or losing hole that is scheduled depending on the small winning type. In this case, the small winning process is repeatedly executed to monitor the value of the remaining ball counter, but the progress of the game may be stopped without monitoring the value of the remaining ball counter. In addition, even if the progress of the game is not stopped, the value of the remaining ball counter is monitored and when the value of the remaining ball counter becomes normal ("0"), the abnormal state is automatically restored and a small win is achieved. The gaming state may not be ended. This makes it possible to reliably grasp the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, after the distribution error notification is performed, if game ball B is detected in the V winning opening or loss opening (regular receiving opening) scheduled according to the small winning type, When the game ball B rolling on the scheduled route (regular route) is detected (for example, when it is detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 in the case of a second small hit), the distribution error notification is terminated. You may also do so. In addition, after the ejection error notification is performed, if game ball B is detected in the V winning opening or loss opening (regular receiving opening) scheduled according to the small hit type, or when the game ball B is When the game ball B rolling along the route (regular route) is detected (for example, when detected by the second loss opening sensor 2517 in the case of a second small hit), the ejection error notification is terminated. Good too. In addition, the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer, which causes the discharge error notification to be executed, is determined by detecting the game ball B rolling on the scheduled route (regular route) according to the type of small hit (for example, the second small In this case, the discharge monitoring timer is measured again after the reset, and the measured value of the discharge monitoring timer is determined to be the same as the one during execution. It is only necessary to enable the discharge error notification to be executed when the expected maximum period according to the small winning type is reached.

[14-1. Volume adjustment]
The volume adjustment switch is used for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or the special symbol display (the For a certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit controls the fluctuation pattern when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device). (from receiving the command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, or from receiving the stop display command in the peripheral control unit until 0.5 second has elapsed after the final display of the decorative pattern) The volume of the performance sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass body frame speaker 622 on the body frame 4 is controlled by rotating the volume adjustment switch. This allows it to be adjusted. As mentioned above, the resistance value of the volume adjustment switch is changed by rotating it, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter changes the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch. The divided voltage is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023.

In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-level value is divided into seven parts and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. At board volume 0, the volume is set to mute, and at board volume 6, the volume is set to maximum, and the volume is set so that it increases from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source IC is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and effects are output from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. Sound is flowing. In this way, music, sound effects, etc. can be produced from the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass frame speaker 622 on the main body frame 4 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the volume adjustment switch. Sound is flowing.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, in addition to production sounds such as music and sound effects, a notification sound is also used to notify the hall clerk, etc. of the occurrence of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity with respect to the pachinko machine 1. (For example, the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be made more powerful, or the player may be notified that there is a high possibility of transitioning to an advantageous game state.) (etc.) is also played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, but the notification sound and notification sound are output by adjusting the volume adjustment switch. It has a mechanism that allows the flow to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on rotational operation, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the peripheral control IC by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned board volume which is divided into 7 levels, and can be changed into 5 levels from mute to maximum volume. As a result, even if, for example, a clerk in the hall rotates the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the bass sound on the main body frame 4 Although the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from the main body frame speaker 622 of the machine are reduced, the volume becomes louder when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when a player is cheating (in this embodiment, , maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the performance sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for the hall staff etc. to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the fraudulent activity of a player.

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) or a special A certain period of time (in this example, peripheral control Until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variable pattern command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and after the final display of the decorative pattern. In addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the volume control switch, the volume of the music and sound effects is adjusted by rotating the volume control switch. The period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and special symbol displays (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the fluctuating display (in this example, 0.5 seconds after receiving the fluctuating pattern command in the peripheral control unit and starting the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol) (until 0.5 seconds elapse after the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command and the final display of the decorative pattern), and furthermore, the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 set in the variable production. Except for the operation period of the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 (the valid period for accepting operations of the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 in so-called button production), etc. By operating the operation unit 303, the volume of the music and sound effects can be adjusted. Specifically, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (the first A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the special symbol display (special symbol display, second special symbol display) (in this example, the peripheral control unit uses the fluctuation pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, or from the time the peripheral control unit received the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the final display of the decorative pattern), and The operation period of the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 set in the variable production (valid period for accepting operations of the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 in so-called button production), etc. Except for, when the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated, an indicator composed of a plurality of scales is displayed on the production display device 1600, and the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated. You can change the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume (from the minimum volume of 1 to the maximum volume of 5).

Specifically, the contact operation section 302 is rotated clockwise without operating the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, and when the rotation amount of the contact operation section 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the production sound is reduced to 1. The volume is changed to a higher level, the contact operation section 302 is rotated to the left without operating the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, and when the amount of rotation of the contact operation section 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the production sound is changed to a higher level. The volume will be changed to one level lower.

FIG. 201 shows the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame for bass on the main body frame 4, depending on the rotational operation of the volume adjustment switch and the rotational operation of the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300. With the volume of the effect sound output from the speaker 622 set to volume 5, a variable effect in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner is started on the effect display device 1600, and during this variable effect, the effect operation unit 300 is pressed. It is a timing diagram showing an example when the part 303 is pressed and then the contact operation part 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated.

As shown in FIG. 201, in order to change the volume of the effect sound from volume 5 to volume 4 during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600, the pressure operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is not operated. When the contact operation unit 302 is rotated to the left and the rotation amount of the contact operation unit 302 reaches a predetermined rotation amount, the volume of the performance sound is lowered by one level from volume 5 to volume 4, and the rotation of this contact operation unit 302 Changes according to the operation are immediately reflected in the effect sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. That is, in order to change the volume of the effect sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated. At the timing t1 of the rotation operation, the volume after this change is reflected in the output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. .

Further, the scale of the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is changed according to the rotational operation of the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300. This allows you to visually determine the current volume setting. Further, in this example, an indicator displayed in response to a rotational operation of the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed on the performance display device 1600 where a performance using decorative patterns or the like is executed. Further, this indicator is displayed at the top of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed semitransparently, so that images such as variable effects performed on the back can be recognized. It should be noted that a sub-display device different from the effect display device 1600 on which variable effects such as decorative patterns are executed may be provided. The indicator may be displayed on a sub display device. Furthermore, in this example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the end of the operation of the contact operation section 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 is made to disappear. Note that after displaying the indicator on the effect display device 1600 based on the rotation operation of the contact operation section 302, the indicator displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears based on the operation of the press operation section 303. You may also do so. The above-mentioned indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or the lower right display area that does not overlap with the effect image etc. in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be partitioned, and the indicator may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. An indicator may be displayed in the lower display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and an indicator may be displayed on this display device.

In addition, when the scale of the indicator and the volume of the production sound of music or sound effects change by rotating the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300, a specific sound (such as "beep") corresponding to the changed volume will be heard. Electronic sounds) are output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sounds on the main body frame 4. As a result, when the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 is rotated, the production sounds such as music and sound effects are transmitted to the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker for bass on the main body frame 4. 622, while checking the actual volume by checking the specific sound output from the top center speaker, top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. Volume can be adjusted. Note that the specific sound may not be output while the variable performance is being performed. That is, during execution of the variable performance, a performance sound corresponding to the content of the variable performance is output, and the actual volume can be confirmed without outputting a specific sound. As a result, it is possible to prevent a specific sound unrelated to the contents of the variable performance from being output during the variable performance, thereby inhibiting the variable performance in progress and reducing the game's interest.

This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of production sounds such as music and sound effects is incorporated among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC. However, it is not reflected in the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned notification sound or notification sound.

As described above, in this embodiment, the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the volume adjustment switch, and the volume of the production sound of music and sound effects is adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch directly. Adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch according to the operation. There are two methods: Since the volume adjustment switch is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. In this case, only the hall clerk can turn the volume control switch. However, the volume adjusted by the hall staff may feel too small for the player, making it difficult to hear the music or sound effects, or may feel too loud for the player, making the music or sound effects too loud. be. Therefore, when the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of the production sounds of music and sound effects can be adjusted to the desired volume. It looks like this. This allows the player to adjust the volume of music and sound effects to the desired volume, so if the player feels that the volume adjusted by the hall staff is too low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects. The user can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, and can also feel the volume adjusted by the hall staff to be louder and listen to the production sounds of music and sound effects. If you find it too loud, you can reduce the volume to a desired level by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 continues to be in a state where no game is played for a predetermined period of time, enters a customer waiting state, and repeatedly performs a demonstration using the performance display device 1600 (for example, 10 times), the previous The volume adjusted by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 while playing the game is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the volume adjustment switch. As a result, if a player who played the game while sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted volume is too low and has difficulty hearing the music or sound effects, this time, A player who plays a game while seated on the pachinko machine 1 can increase the volume to a desired level by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300. If the player who is playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is too loud and the production sound of the music and sound effects is noisy, the player who is sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game may adjust the production operation unit 300. The volume can be lowered to a desired level by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303.

[14-2. Adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated, a predetermined value is added or subtracted from the volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch. In addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume, it is also possible to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band. Specifically, it is possible to suppress (or mute) the sound output in the high frequency range (above a predetermined frequency band).

That is, for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display (the first special symbol Display unit, second special symbol display unit) for a certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, the peripheral control unit receives a variation pattern command) until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, or until 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the reception of the stop display command in the peripheral control unit after the final display of the decorative design), and further fluctuating effects. The operation period of the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 set in (the valid period for accepting the operation of the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 in so-called button production), etc. Except for this, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, an environment change mode is set for setting various environments of the pachinko machine 1 (such as whether or not high-pitched sound is output, whether or not the LED of the door frame 3 lights up, etc.). The screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the screen for performing the environment change mode, a list of environments that can be changed (the presence or absence of high-pitched sound output, the presence or absence of light emitting from the LED of the door frame 3, etc.) is displayed, and any changes can be made using the touch operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300. By operating the press operation unit 303 with one of the environment settings selected, it becomes possible to execute a process for changing the environment setting. In this way, by operating the touch operation section 302 and press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 according to the environment change mode screen, you can suppress the sound output of a specific frequency band, rotate the volume adjustment switch, etc. It is possible to output the sound at a set volume according to the rotational operation of the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300. Although the environment change mode screen is displayed at the top of the images displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is displayed semitransparently so that the image on the back can be recognized.

Specifically, when the press operation section 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the production display device 1600. Then, when the touch operation section 302 is operated to select the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band, the press operation section 303 is pressed to suppress the sound output of the specific frequency band. A selection screen is displayed between the state in which the sound output is not suppressed (for example, a mini-character for setting the volume is displayed, and "treble cut-on" or "treble cut-off" is displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble, and touch operation is performed. (The display is switched each time the touch operation unit 302 is rotated by a predetermined amount), a state in which the sound output in a specific frequency band is suppressed by operating the touch operation unit 302 again, and a state in which the sound output in a specific frequency band is not suppressed. By pressing the press operation section 303 with one of the ``There is a cut in the high range'' or ``There is no cut in the treble range''). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the decision screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears, thereby ending the environment change mode. Note that after the decision screen is displayed, the decision screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be made to disappear based on the press operation section 303 being operated. Note that the screen for performing the environment change mode, the selection screen, and the decision screen may be displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, or the effect image or the above effect in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. A lower left display area that does not overlap with the display of the indicator when adjusting the sound volume may be divided, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a determination screen may be displayed in this lower left display area. Further, a display device for displaying various settings of the pachinko machine 1 is provided separately from the effect display device 1600, and a screen for performing the environment change mode, a selection screen, and a decision screen are displayed on this display device. It's okay.

Note that by pressing the press operation section 303 without rotating the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300, a screen for performing the environment change mode is displayed on the production display device 1600, and then the touch operation is performed. Even if the section 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment of the performance sound is disabled, and no indicator is displayed on the performance display device 1600. After the environment change mode ends, if the touch operation section 302 is rotated without pressing the pressure operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300, the volume adjustment of the production sound becomes effective and an indicator is displayed on the production display device 1600. will be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 201, the volume of the effect sound in a specific frequency band can be adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch or rotating the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 during the variable effect executed by the effect display device 1600. When the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to suppress the volume from the volume set according to the operation, the touch operation of the production operation unit 300 is performed at timing t2 when these operations are completed. Changes made in accordance with the operations of the section 302 and the press operation section 303 are not reflected in the effect sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. Then, at the timing t3 when the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600 ends (on the basis of receiving a stop display command from the main control MPU 1310a that instructs to derive and display the display result of the decorative pattern, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped). In other words, the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band can be changed by adjusting the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band. The volume is suppressed more than the volume set according to the rotational operation of or the rotational operation of the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300.

In addition, after the timing t2 when the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is completed in adjusting the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the fluctuating performance, the volume adjustment of the performance sound of the specific frequency band is invalidated. Ru. Then, at the timing t3 when the variable performance ends, when the change in the volume adjustment of the performance sound of a specific frequency band according to the operation of the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is reflected, a specific The volume adjustment of the performance sound of the frequency band becomes effective. In addition, in this example, even if the volume adjustment of the production sound of a specific frequency band is disabled, if the pressure operation part 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation part 302 of the production operation unit 300, the environment Although a screen for performing a change mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to select volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. In addition, during the period when the volume adjustment of the production sound of a specific frequency band is disabled, the environment change mode is performed even if the press operation part 303 is pressed without rotating the contact operation part 302 of the production operation unit 300. The screen may not be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 or the press operation is used to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600. When the section 303 is operated, the changes corresponding to these operations are not reflected immediately, but are reflected after the variable effect being executed on the effect display device 1600 ends. Normally, from the start to the end of the variable performance, the effect sound corresponding to the content of the variable effect is continuously output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. Therefore, if you want to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during a fluctuating production (the continuously outputted production sound will momentarily interrupt, then the volume of the specific frequency band will be suppressed). This may give the player a sense of discomfort (for example, if the output of the performance sound that has been suppressed or the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band is not suppressed is restarted).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band in the middle of a variation production, the variation production is By not reflecting the change according to this operation until the end of the fluctuating performance and reflecting it after the fluctuating performance ends, the performance sound that is played continuously during the fluctuating performance will be output with the preset content, and the change will be reflected after the fluctuating performance ends. After the production ends and the output of the production sound that has been played continuously according to the contents of the variable production stops, the volume of a specific frequency band is changed by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300. To make it possible to output a performance sound that reflects the adjustment, so as not to give a sense of discomfort to a player. In other words, during a fluctuating performance where the performance sound is continuously output, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected, and the continuously output sound is stopped and the next performance sound is started. By reflecting the change at the switching timing before outputting, it is possible to change the performance sound according to the adjustment without feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in order to adjust the volume of the effect sound of a specific frequency band during a period when the variable effect is not performed, this operation The corresponding changes are immediately reflected, and a performance sound with the volume of a specific frequency band adjusted is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. .

In this way, while the volume adjustment of the performance sound during the fluctuating performance is reflected immediately, the volume adjustment of the performance sound in a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected. In other words, with regard to sound-related information that could have a negative impact on the performance planned for the fluctuating performance that is currently being executed, such as by giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to changes in the performance sound, changes during the fluctuating performance are prohibited to reduce the performance effect. It is designed to be suppressed.

Furthermore, if the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not immediately reflected, the player may be notified of this by displaying it on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during a variable performance, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band is Although it is not reflected immediately, the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band is adjusted by displaying a mini-character for volume setting on the performance display device 1600 and displaying a standby message such as "Please wait a moment" in the speech bubble of this mini-character. The player may be notified that the operation of the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 for playing the game is normally accepted. In addition, a standby display that notifies the player that the operation of the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band is being specified. The change may be made according to the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band.For example, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a message saying "Wait a moment" is displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble. The player displays a standby display 1 such as "Yes" to indicate that the player is normally receiving operations on the touch operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 for adjusting the volume of production sound in a specific frequency band. After notifying the user, if the remaining time until the timing to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band reaches a predetermined time, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and a message is displayed in the speech bubble of this mini-character. A standby display 2 that counts down "3", "2", "1", etc. may be performed. Furthermore, when the time has come to adjust the volume of the performance sound in a specific frequency band, a notification to that effect may be provided. For example, a mini-character for volume setting is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and this mini-character is A reflection display such as "Start reflecting selection!" may be displayed in a speech bubble.

In addition, in the above example, as the volume adjustment for a specific frequency band, equalizer setting patterns A that does not suppress the volume of the specific frequency band, and an equalizer setting B that suppresses the volume of the specific frequency band are set in advance. By adjusting the volume of the performance sound in the specific frequency band and switching between equalizer setting A and equalizer setting B, the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed, and the specific frequency It is designed to switch between two stages (on and off): a state where the volume of the band is suppressed, and a state where the volume of the band is suppressed. Note that by storing multiple equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in a specific frequency band as equalizer setting patterns in advance, and switching between these multiple equalizer settings, you can create multiple equalizer settings with different degrees of volume suppression in a specific frequency band. The state may be changed. For example, an equalizer setting A in which the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and an equalizer setting B in which the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed by rotating the volume adjustment switch or the production operation unit 300. An equalizer setting C in which the volume is suppressed to half the volume set according to the rotational operation of the contact operation section 302 (for example, if the set volume is volume 6, it is changed to volume 3); The volume of the specific frequency band can be changed by storing it as a setting pattern, and switching between equalizer setting A, equalizer setting B, and equalizer setting C by adjusting the volume of the performance sound of the specific frequency band. A state in which the volume is not suppressed, a state in which the volume of a specific frequency band is muted, and a state in which the volume of a specific frequency band is set according to the rotational operation of the volume adjustment switch or the rotational operation of the touch operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300. It may also be possible to switch between three levels: a state in which the volume is suppressed to half the volume that is currently being played; This makes it possible to make settings that suit the tastes of various players.

In addition, the production sound of a specific frequency band is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, but also includes the audio frequency band and low frequency range, etc. For example, it is possible to adjust the volume of dialogue uttered by characters etc. during variable production. (If there are multiple characters, it may be adjusted all at once or individually), or the volume of the bass range may be adjustable. Furthermore, it may also be possible to adjust the performance sound (confirmation sound) for notifying the confirmation of a jackpot, the payout sound when paying out prize balls, and the like. Further, the volume of a plurality of frequency bands as a specific frequency band may be adjusted, for example, the volume of both the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted. In this case, the treble range and the bass range may be adjusted individually (for example, by switching between not suppressing the treble range and suppressing the treble range, and by switching between the state where the treble range is not suppressed and the state where the bass range is suppressed). (for example, switching between not suppressing the high range and suppressing the high range and suppressing the low range) The operation for switching to one of the states and the operation for switching to one may be performed separately. That is, the player may be able to select one of a plurality of setting modes (treble cut, payout sound cut, jackpot confirmation sound cut, etc.). This makes it possible to make settings that suit the tastes of various players.

In addition, in the case of outputting continuous sound effects during the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the volume of the sound performance can be adjusted by using the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame. While it is immediately reflected in the output from the main frame speaker 622 for bass sound of No. 4, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band may be reflected after the jackpot game state and the small win game state are completed. As a result, the volume of a specific frequency band can be adjusted between the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body frame at the switching timing until the continuous production sound output stops and the next production sound is output. By reflecting this in the output from the bass body frame speaker 622 of No. 4, it is possible to change the production sound according to the adjustment without feeling any discomfort. In addition, during the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the player's attention to the performance content is lower compared to the fluctuating performance, so the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also done in the same way as the volume adjustment of the above-mentioned performance sound. It may be immediately reflected in the outputs from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the third side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4.

In addition, when outputting continuous effect sound in a gaming state different from the normal state such as a time saving state, the volume of the above effect sound can be adjusted by using the top center speaker on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker, and the main body. The performance operation unit 300 is used to immediately reflect the output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass sound in frame 4, and to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during the variable performance. When the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated, the change according to this operation is not reflected until the variation effect ends, but is reflected after the variation effect ends, and the change effect is performed. When the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band when there is no sound, the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side , it may be immediately reflected in the output from the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4. In other words, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected during the execution of the fluctuating performance, which attracts the most attention of the player, but is reflected after the fluctuating performance is completed, so that it can be adjusted when the player is not paying much attention. It may also be possible to reflect the volume adjustment of the frequency band so that the effect sound can be changed in accordance with the adjustment without any discomfort.

In addition, even if the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected, the effect sound is actually output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. The changed performance sound will not be output until the change is made. Therefore, if the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the fluctuating production, the specific frequency Even if the band volume adjustment is reflected, the changed performance sound will be output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4 after the start of the next variable performance. be done. That is, the actual output is performed after the lottery process (winning determination lottery, etc.) for starting the next variable performance is performed. Similarly, when the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of the performance sound of a specific frequency band during a period when a demonstration is being performed on the performance display device 1600, will immediately reflect the volume adjustment of the performance sound in a specific frequency band, but if the performance sound is not output as a demonstration, the changed performance sound will be affected by the door frame 3 until the next variable performance starts. The sound is not output from the side top center speaker, top side speaker, and bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4, but is output after the start of the variable performance.

Further, the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is initialized at the same time as the volume of the performance sound is initialized. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 continues for a predetermined period of time in which no games are played, enters the customer waiting state, and repeatedly performs the demonstration using the production display device 1600 (for example, 10 times), the front of the pachinko machine 1 The volume adjusted by the player who was playing the game while seated is canceled, the volume is initialized, and at the same time the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is also initialized (the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed). state).

In addition, the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section of the production operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume of the production sound of a specific frequency band during the execution of error notification in which the notification sound is output at a high volume (the maximum volume may be used). 303 is operated, it may be set as appropriate whether or not the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound depending on the degree of abnormality (incorrect level) that caused the error notification. good.

For example, when a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B as shown in FIG. When the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band during the full tank error notification that is executed, a sound will immediately notify the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band. If a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band will continue to be reflected in the notification sound, and the notification sound will continue to reflect the volume adjustment of the specific frequency band. The changed notification sound may be output from the speaker, the top side speaker, and the bass frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. In this example, as a full tank error notification, the sound output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side (for example, "Please remove the bulb!") will reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band. (for example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice is output; if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice is output).

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 203, when a serious abnormality (door open error) such as detecting that the door frame 3 has been opened occurs, the volume of a specific frequency band may be changed during the door open error notification. When the touch operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is operated to adjust the volume, or when a serious abnormality (door open error) occurs after adjusting the volume of a specific frequency band, The volume adjustment may not be reflected in the notification sound. In this example, it is possible to adjust the volume in a specific frequency band of the sound (for example, "The door is open!") output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side as a door open error notification. (for example, if the volume of a specific frequency band is not suppressed, a female voice is output, and if the volume of a specific frequency band is suppressed, a male voice is output), but there are serious abnormalities. When this occurs, the volume adjustment in the specific frequency band is disabled and a notification sound whose volume in the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output.

That is, as shown in FIG. 202, when a slight abnormality (full tank error) occurs, such as when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B, During the tongue error notification, if a rotation operation is performed on the contact operation section 302 of the production operation unit 300 to adjust the volume, the operation will be accepted as valid, but this volume adjustment will not be reflected in the notification sound. The volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is reflected in the notification sound, and the changed notification sound is output from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 203, when a serious abnormality (door opening error) occurs such as detecting that the door frame 3 has been opened, the production operation unit 300 is used to adjust the volume. When the rotation operation of the touch operation unit 302 is performed, the operation is accepted as valid, but not only is the volume adjustment not reflected in the notification sound, but also the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band is not reflected in the notification sound. It looks like this. In this way, by appropriately setting whether or not to reflect the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band in the notification sound depending on the degree of abnormality (improper level) that caused the error notification, serious abnormalities can be reliably detected. become discoverable.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 203, the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 are operated to suppress the volume of a specific frequency band, and the top center speaker and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side are If a serious abnormality occurs while the changed performance sound is being output from the main body frame speaker 622 for bass on the main body frame 4, the environment change mode or a specific mode according to the operation of the performance operation unit 300 is activated. Suppression of the volume of a specific frequency band is forcibly canceled (turned off) without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, and a notification sound in which the volume of the specific frequency band is not suppressed is output. As mentioned above, the notification sound is output for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when restarting the production sound output after the notification sound has stopped, a specific Without adjusting the volume of the frequency band, the suppression of the volume of the specific frequency band that was forcibly canceled is set (turned on) again, and the production sound with the volume of the specific frequency band suppressed is displayed on the door frame 3 side. The sound is output from the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the bass body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example makes it possible to adjust the volume of a specific frequency band, and reflects the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by operating the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300. In cases where it is possible to immediately output production sounds and notification sounds, and when the volume adjustment of a specific frequency band by operating the touch operation section 302 or press operation section 303 of the production operation unit 300 is not immediately reflected in the output of production sounds. Depending on the state of the pachinko machine 1 (playing state, error state, etc.), it is set as appropriate whether the timing is delayed and the changed performance sound or notification sound can be output. This makes it possible to suppress deterioration in performance effects and to reliably discover serious abnormalities.

[15. Changing settings such as winning probability]
An example of changing the probabilities of jackpots, small wins, etc. in the pachinko machine 1 according to set values will be described. In the following, it is assumed that operation signals from the setting key, setting change switch, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board are output to the payout control board 633. In this example, the setting board is connected to the payout control board 633, but it may be connected to the power board 630 inside the power board cover 631, or the setting board may be connected to the main control board 1310. Further, the setting board may not be an independent board, but may be a part of the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310. That is, a setting key, a setting change switch, a setting confirmation switch, and a setting display may be mounted on either the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, or the main control board 1310.

The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a setting board for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The setting board is connected to the payout control board 633 of the board unit 620, and the payout control unit 633a obtains the operation status of each switch provided on the setting board, and displays a setting display that displays the set or selected setting value. control the device.

The setting board includes a setting key for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode, a setting change switch for changing setting values, a setting confirmation switch for firmly inputting the changed setting values, and , a setting display that displays set or selected setting values is provided, and functions as a setting change operation section that accepts settings change operations. As described above, the setting board is provided on the board unit 620 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row on a game island in a game parlor, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. This makes it possible to change settings.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key, setting change switch, and setting confirmation switch on the setting board are taken into the payout control unit 633a. Further, the setting display is controlled by the payout control section 633a. The finalized settings are sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a uses them as a table (a hit determination table, a jackpot symbol determination table, a small win symbol determination table, etc.) to be used in a special lottery, etc. according to the settings. Select the table you want. Note that the tables used in the special lottery etc. are provided for each setting, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 204, in this example, "Jackpot probability", "Small hit probability", "Small hit type", "Normal symbol hit probability", and "Second hit probability according to the normal symbol hit type" The opening/closing pattern of the starting port is set corresponding to each of set values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (the ratio of the jackpot judgment value that indicates winning the jackpot in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each setting value, and setting value 1 is "1/319" and setting value 2 is "1/319". Setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 and setting value 6 is "1/279", and setting value 5 is "1/289". In this example, for setting values 1 to 5, the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability, but at setting value 6, which is the highest setting value, the jackpot probability is lower than setting value 5. There is. Note that the jackpot probability may be increased in proportion to the set value, and in this case, the jackpot probability may be set so that the higher the set value is from set value 1 to set value 6, the higher the jackpot probability.

In addition, the small hit probability (the ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table) is set to a different value for each set value, and in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, Setting value 1 to setting value 4 is "1/100", setting value 5 and setting value 6 is "1/90", and in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, setting value 1 to 4 is "1/100". Setting values up to 5 are "50/100", and setting values 6 are "66/100". In this example, in the case of high setting values (setting value 5 and setting value 6), the probability of small winning is increased compared to other setting values (low setting value), thereby indirectly increasing the frequency of occurrence of jackpot game state. It has become. In this way, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, by changing the small hit probability according to the set value, the set value is estimated based on the winning frequency of the small win in the normal state, while the second special symbol In the table used for the special lottery, the small winning probability is set to be approximately the same for all set values, so that when the time is short, it is possible to enjoy the continuation of the short time (renchan).

In addition, in the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol, which is mainly executed during the normal state, the small hit probability of setting value 5 and setting value 6 is set higher than setting value 1 to setting value 4. On the other hand, in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol that is mainly executed during the time saving state, only the small hit probability of set value 6 is set higher than set values 1 to 5. Therefore, with setting value 4 and setting value 5, although the special lottery for the first special symbol that is executed during the normal state is drawn with different small hit probabilities, the special lottery for the second special symbol that is executed during the time saving state is drawn. A small winning lottery is held with the same probability. However, the jackpot probability and the determination ratio of the small hit type described later are set so that setting value 5 is higher than setting value 4, and overall setting value 5 is more advantageous than setting value 4. has been done.

In addition, while the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is high, the probability of a small win is low, so while there is a high probability that the hit that triggers the transition to the time-saving state is a "jackpot" as in setting value 4, " A game where there is a low possibility of winning a jackpot through a "small hit", and a game where there is a low probability of a "jackpot" winning as a trigger to be controlled to shift to a time-saving state as in setting value 5, but a "small win". To provide a new game property in which a game in which there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot can be realized by changing a set value, and the set value is guessed according to the type of win as a trigger for shifting to a time saving state. Can be done.

Note that the small hit probability may be increased in proportion to the set value, and in this case, the setting value may be set such that the higher the set value is from the set value 1 to the set value 6, the higher the small hit probability becomes. . In addition, the small hit probability according to some of the setting values from setting values 1 to 6 is lower than the small hit probability according to any of the setting values lower than this part of the setting values. You may also do so. For example, the small hit probability for setting value 4 may be set to 1/100, and the small winning probability for setting value 3, which is lower than setting value 4, may be set to 1/90. In this case, when a small hit occurs, the ratio determined for the advantageous small hit type (in this example, the third small hit) can be set so that the setting value 4 is higher than the setting value 3. The setting value 4 may be more advantageous than the setting value 3.

In addition, as a result of the above-mentioned special lottery (hit determination process (step S305)), the determination ratio when determining the small hit type based on the fact that it has been decided to be a small hit (set in the small hit symbol determination table) is also determined. (selection ratio), different values are set for each setting value. In this example, when it is decided to make a small win as the special lottery result of the first special symbol, the second small win is decided at a rate of 9/10 for setting values 1 to 3, and it takes 10 minutes. At a rate of 1, the third small hit is determined, and at a set value of 4 and 5, the second small hit is determined at a rate of 8/10, and the third small hit is determined at a rate of 2/10. , with a setting value of 6, the first small hit is determined at a rate of 1/10, the second small hit is determined at a six-tenths rate, and the third small hit is determined at a three-tenths rate. It looks like this.

In addition, when it is decided to make a small win as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small win will be determined at a ratio of 3/10 for setting value 1 and setting value 2, and 6/10. The second small win is determined by the ratio, the third small win is determined by the ratio of 1/10, and the first small win is determined by the ratio of 2/10 for setting value 3 and setting value 4, and 10 minutes. A ratio of 6 is determined as the second small hit, a ratio of 2/10 is determined as the third small hit, and a set value of 5 and 6 is determined as the first small hit with a ratio of 1/10. , the second small win is determined at a rate of 6/10, and the third small win is determined at a rate of 3/10.

In addition, as described above, the first small hit is to guide the game ball B accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 to the first losing opening 2535, and there is no possibility of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, or a jackpot gaming state. The possibility of this occurring is extremely low. In this example, if it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the first special symbol, the first small hit will be selected only when the set value is 6, and the other set value (set value 1 to set value 5) are not selected, so that if the player receives a small win in a state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the normal state, which is a time-saving state, the set value 1 to set value 5 will always result in a jackpot game. It is possible to generate a second small win or a third small win that has a possibility of occurrence of a state, and to create a small win game state while creating expectations for a jackpot game state. In other words, in the case of set values 1 to 5, if a small win occurs in a state that is disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, which is a time-saving state, we focused on the small win game state with the expectation of a jackpot game state. However, when the player realizes that all the game balls B accepted into the accessory winning slot 2006 are guided to the first losing slot 2535, and there is no possibility of a jackpot gaming state occurring, the player becomes very disappointed. By generating at least a second or third small win that has the possibility of generating a jackpot gaming state, during the small winning gaming state, it is possible to arouse expectations for the jackpot gaming state and draw attention to it, which increases the enjoyment of the game. The decline can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the setting value is 6, the first small hit may be selected, but by executing the first small hit in the normal state, it can be determined that the setting value is 6, which is the highest setting value. , it is possible to give the player a joy that is more than the disappointment of winning the first small prize, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when it is determined to be a small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, the first small hit is selected. In the time saving state, the small winning probability is increased compared to the normal state, so that the small winning game state is executed more frequently. Therefore, when the first small hit is executed and all the game balls B accepted into the accessory winning hole 2006 are guided to the first losing hole 2535, it is recognized that there is no possibility of a jackpot game state occurring. will not disappoint players. In addition, when it is decided to make a small hit as the special lottery result of the second special symbol, a low setting value (setting value 1 or setting value 2) increases the determination ratio of the first small winning, and a high setting value The decision ratio for the first small hit has been reduced. In other words, with a high setting value, when it is determined to be a small win as a special lottery result of the second special symbol, the proportion of small winnings that are disadvantageous to the player is determined to be lower than with a low setting value. Therefore, a high setting value is more advantageous to the player than a low setting value.

In addition, as mentioned above, the third small hit is to guide the game ball B accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 to the first V prize opening 2007, and being determined as the third small hit means winning the jackpot. The situation is almost the same as what happened. In other words, an increase in the probability of winning the third small hit is synonymous with an increase in the probability of winning the jackpot. By increasing the ratio, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state is indirectly improved.

In addition, the winning probability of the normal lottery (the ratio of the normal symbol per judgment value indicating a normal win among the random numbers for normal symbol per winning judgment) is set to a different value for each setting value, and for setting values 1 to 5, The setting value is "1/2", and the setting value 6 is "1/1". Therefore, with the setting value 6, when a game ball B is accepted into the normal winning opening 2003 and a normal lottery is held, the second starting opening door 2411 is always moved forward to a state where the gaming ball B can be accepted into the second starting opening 2004. This is a situation that is more advantageous to the player than other setting values.

In addition, in this example, if it is decided to make a normal win as the normal lottery result, normal symbol per A (normal pattern per pattern A) and normal pattern per B (normal pattern per pattern B (normal pattern per pattern B1 ~ It is designed to determine one of the multiple normal symbol per type of normal symbol per symbol B5)) and normal symbol per symbol C (ordinary symbol per symbol C), and according to the determined normal symbol per type. The modes (symbol A per normal pattern, pattern B per normal pattern, pattern C per normal pattern) are derived and displayed on the normal pattern display. Further, the opening/closing manner of the second starting port door 2411 is made different for each set value. Specifically, when it becomes A per normal symbol in the normal state, the opening/closing mode of "executing 0.1 s opening once" is executed with all setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and the time saving state If it becomes A per normal symbol, execute the opening/closing mode of "execute 6s open once" with all setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and if it becomes B per normal symbol in normal state Execute the opening/closing mode "0.1s open twice" with odd set values (set value 1, set value 3, and set value 5), and with even number set values (set value 2, set value 4, and set value With the value 6), execute the opening/closing mode of "execute 0.1s open once", and if the normal symbol per hit becomes B during the time shortening state, from set value 1 to set value 3, "execute 6s open once" At set value 4 and set value 5, the opening/closing mode "3s open is executed twice" is executed, and at set value 6, the opening/closing mode "3s open is executed once" is executed.

In addition, in the case of setting value 1 to setting value 5, one of the two types of normal symbol per type, normal symbol per A and normal symbol per B, is determined as the normal symbol per type. , in the case of the setting value 6, the type per normal symbol is determined as one of the three types per normal symbol: per normal symbol A, per normal symbol B, and per normal symbol C. . Then, if the normal symbol hits C in the normal state, the opening/closing mode of "execute 0.1s release 6 times" is executed with the setting value 6, and if the normal symbol hits C in the time saving state, set With a value of 6, the opening/closing mode of "executing 1 s opening 6 times" is executed.

In this way, the operating mode of the second starting port door 2411 (the opening/closing mode of the second starting port 2004) that opens the second starting port 2004 based on the normal lottery result being a normal win is changed for each set value. Therefore, the current setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be suggested by the operation mode of the second starting port door 2411.

The above setting key is used to maintain the short-circuited or open state of the contacts by inserting the specified key into the keyhole (key insertion part) and turning the key to the setting position, which triggers the change to the setting change mode. This is a switch that outputs a signal. Note that another switch may be used instead of providing a setting key. In this case, by operating (holding down) the setting change switch for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer, the setting change mode will start, and by holding down the setting change switch while in the setting change mode, the setting change mode will be ended. It's okay.

Furthermore, the setting change mode may be started and ended by operating the RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Furthermore, the setting change mode may be ended by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch during the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not own the setting key can change the settings, making it easier to handle the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Furthermore, since the operation time of the setting change switch is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation at the falling edge of the setting change switch.

The setting change switch is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to sequentially switch and select setting values (1 to 6). That is, when the setting change switch is pressed once, the set value increases by 1, and when the setting change switch is operated when the set value=6, the set value becomes 1. Note that the setting value may be selectable by operating a RAM clear switch without providing a setting change switch. Note that the set value is not limited to 6 levels, but may be set to a smaller number (for example, 2 levels) or a larger number (eg, 8 levels).

The set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device (that is, the winning probability of the special symbol), and the set value = 1 has a low winning probability, and the set value = 6 has a high winning probability. In addition, depending on the setting value, the percentage of variable jackpots, the percentage of time saving (ST) after jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of jackpots, the probability of winning a normal figure, the prize ball of the general prize opening, starting opening, and big winning opening. The number of prize balls that the player can obtain may be changed by changing various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls.

The setting confirmation switch is, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by operating the setting change switch and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary switch. It is preferable that the setting change switch and the setting confirmation switch have different operating methods (operating directions) and shapes to avoid operating both switches by mistake. For example, the setting change switch may be a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch may be a momentary toggle switch.

Note that the selected setting may be confirmed by returning the setting key to the normal position without providing a setting confirmation switch. Alternatively, the selected setting value may be determined based on the operation of other switches or sensors provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, operation of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, contact detection by the handle touch sensor 192 due to touching the handle 195, operation of the single button operation sensor 194, operation of the ball loan button, operation of the return button, The selected setting may be determined by detecting winning of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, etc. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for playing games) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

In other words, in order to set the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 in this example, three switches (including a setting key) are provided on the setting board, but it is sufficient to provide one or two switches on the setting board. .

Furthermore, neither a setting key, a setting change switch, nor a setting confirmation switch may be provided, and the setting change operation may be made possible only with a RAM clear switch. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch, and then continuing to operate the RAM clear switch for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (long press). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch is less than a predetermined time, RAM clear processing is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) during the setting change mode, and instead of the setting confirmation switch, the setting value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). By the above operation (long press), the set value can be determined. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by long-pressing the RAM clear switch after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and displays a setting value selected by operating a setting change switch, and displays a current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, operating a setting key). Note that the setting display may be configured with a settable number of LEDs instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout control board 633 is provided with an error type display using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of payout error. The set value or current set value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is preferable to change the display mode so that the error type display and the setting value display can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be lit when displaying the setting value. Further, the error type may be displayed by a lighting display (not blinking), and the setting value may be displayed by a blinking display.

[15-1. Setting change processing]
Next, processing related to setting changes will be explained. FIG. 205 is an explanatory diagram showing the procedure for changing the setting value.

In this example, the main control side power-on process is executed based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 1, and if the conditions for starting the setting change mode are satisfied in the main control side power-on process, The above setting values can be changed.

Specifically, after the main control MPU 1310a performs the initial value setting and start-up setting of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on process (step S12), the main control MPU 1310a determines the state of the setting key, and determines whether the setting key is turned on. If it has been operated, a setting change mode for changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. When the setting key is operated, a setting key operation signal is output from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key is turned on when receiving the setting key operation signal. . Note that the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 is being operated, the handle 195 is touched and detected by the handle touch sensor 192, or a prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit (there is a balance on the prepaid card). , the setting change mode may not be started if there is a balance inserted into the cash sand. Further, the setting change mode may not be started even if there is a possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a magnetic error is detected).

When the setting change mode is started, the main control MPU 1310a uses data other than the game status (for example, probability change status, time saving status, information regarding prize balls) in the game control area (also referred to as specific area) of the built-in RAM. Then, a first RAM clearing process is executed to clear data indicating the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, setting values 1 to 6 are switched by performing a setting change operation. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a finishes the first RAM clear process, it sends a first RAM clear process end command to the payout control unit 633a, and upon receiving the first RAM clear process end command, the payout control unit 633a displays the setting value on the setting display. The initial value (for example, set value 0) is displayed blinking, and the set value displayed on the setting display is switched each time the setting change switch is operated (loop from set value 1 to set value 6).

Note that when the main control MPU 1310a executes the first RAM clearing process, the set value is cleared and becomes an unset state. In addition, the settings change mode cannot be exited when the settings have not been set, so if the power is turned off during the settings change mode and the settings are not set, the power will be turned on again. Then the settings change mode will be activated. At this time, if the setting key is turned off, a loop process is performed that monitors the setting key status until the setting key is turned on, and the setting change mode is activated in response to the setting key being turned on. will be started.

Further, the payout control unit 633a checks whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, that is, whether the main body frame release switch is off, and the main body frame release switch is turned on (the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2). (not released), the process loops until the main body frame release switch is turned off, and no operation of the setting confirmation switch is accepted. That is, the setting change operation is not completed until the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2.

When the main body frame opening switch is off, or when the main body frame opening switch is off and the setting confirmation switch is operated, the dispensing control unit 633a confirms the setting value displayed on the setting display ( (The flashing display is ended and the display is turned on.) Then, a setting change end command indicating the final setting value is sent to the main control MPU 1310a.

When the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting change end command, it stores the setting value indicated by the received setting change end command in the game control area of the built-in RAM. As a result, a lottery process or the like is performed according to the determined set value.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clearing process (step S14) when the conditions for ending the setting change mode are satisfied, that is, when the setting key is turned off.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting values are changed by the above-described process.

Note that when the setting change mode ends, that is, when the setting key is turned off, the payout control unit 633a ends the display of the setting value on the setting display (does not display the setting value). It's okay. Furthermore, if the setting key is turned on after the setting change mode ends, the setting change mode is not executed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting display. This allows the game store clerk to understand the current setting value and then change the setting value.

Furthermore, when the setting change mode is to be executed, a notification to that effect may be provided. For example, when it is determined that the setting key is turned on, a setting change mode start command is sent to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify the peripheral control unit 1511 to start the setting change mode, and upon receiving the setting change mode start command, Based on this, the peripheral control unit 1511 may perform a predetermined display (settings are being changed, etc.) on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the setting change mode is to be ended, that is, when the setting key is turned off, a setting change mode end command is sent to the peripheral control unit 1511 to notify the peripheral control unit 1511 that the setting change mode is to be ended, and the setting change mode is terminated. The peripheral control unit 1511 may end the predetermined display being performed on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the change mode end command. It should be noted that the set value that has been determined as a predetermined display or the set value that is displayed on the setting display may be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and in this case, it may be made to disappear when the setting change mode ends. good.

Furthermore, in conjunction with notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a may also notify the setting change mode. For example, the display on the function display unit 1400 may be a special display that does not appear during normal gaming (for example, all special symbol displays are turned off or turned on).

On the other hand, after performing the initial value setting and startup setting (step S12) of the main control built-in WDT in the main control side power-on processing, the state of the setting key is determined, and if the setting key is not turned on, step Processing from S14 onwards is executed.

Then, in the main control side power-on process, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, that various information is to be erased, or the determination in step S30 When it is determined that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S32, or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (value is 0) in the determination of step S32, that is, the main control side power-off processing If it is determined in step S38 that data other than the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 in the game control area is data about the game status (for example, information regarding the probability change status, time saving status, and prize ball). ) After executing the second RAM clearing process to clear the data indicating the data, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set (step S40). In this way, unlike the first RAM clearing process, the setting value information is not initialized in the second RAM clearing process. That is, by turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clear process can be executed and the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be cleared, and by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on, the second RAM can be cleared. By executing the process, it is possible to clear information regarding the gaming state (for example, information regarding the probability change state, time saving state, and prize ball). Also, after turning on the setting key when the power is turned on, the first RAM clearing process is executed to clear the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1, and then the RAM clearing switch is operated to execute the second RAM clearing process to play the game. Clearing the information regarding the state (for example, the variable probability state, time saving state, information regarding the prize ball), that is, the information regarding the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 and the information regarding the gaming state (for example, the variable probability state, the time saving state, the information regarding the prize ball) It is also possible to clear both. In this way, one or both of the first RAM clearing process and the second RAM clearing process can be selectively executed depending on the information to be cleared.

In this example, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key is operated, but the payout control unit 633a may determine. In addition, the setting key operation signal sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310 may be sent by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (pulses of a predetermined frequency a predetermined number of times), or a setting key operation signal sent from the payout control unit 633a to the main control board 1310. A signal at an intermediate potential that is not a voltage may also be output. In order to prevent unauthorized acts such as short-circuiting the terminals of the setting key and activating the setting change mode, the control unit 633a sends a signal related to the operation of the setting key to the main control board 1310 using a signal that cannot be generated by shorting the terminals. This is because it is preferable to send the information to .

[15-2. Variable effects according to setting values]
Next, a description will be given of variable effects according to each set value. FIG. 206 is a variation pattern table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (first variation pattern setting process, second variation pattern setting process).

In this example, a variation pattern table is provided for each set value, and the type of variation pattern to be selected differs depending on the set value of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, when the first special lottery result is out of reach in the normal state, the special symbol 1 is out of reach variation pattern table (which is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the first variation pattern setting process) In FIG. 206(A), for example, a mini-character to suggest settings is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and messages such as "Maybe it's low?" or "Maybe it's one of 1, 2, or 3?" are displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble. By doing so, the error variation pattern 25 that executes the "low setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is one of 1, 2, and 3 can be selected from setting values 1 to 3. For example, by displaying a mini-character to suggest settings on the effect display device 1600, and displaying messages such as "Maybe expensive?" or "Maybe one of 4, 5, or 6?" in the mini-character's speech bubble, the performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. The outlier variation pattern 26 that executes a "high setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value is 4, 5, or 6 can be selected from set values 4 to 6. Therefore, when the "high setting suggestion performance" is executed in the variable performance, the player can recognize that the setting value is at least 4 or more, and therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, for example, by displaying a mini-character to suggest settings on the performance display device 1600, and displaying "Maybe an even number?" or "Maybe one of 2, 4, or 6?" in the mini-character's speech bubble, the pachinko machine 1 The outlier variation pattern 27 that executes the "even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the set value of is either 2, 4, or 6 can be selected with the set value 2, the set value 4, and the set value 6, for example. By displaying a mini-character to suggest settings on the performance display device 1600, and displaying messages such as "Maybe an odd number?" or "Maybe one of 1, 3, or 5?" in the mini-character's speech bubble, the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed. The outlier variation pattern 28 that executes the "odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests that is one of 1, 3, and 5 can be selected with a setting value of 1, a setting value of 3, and a setting value of 5. Therefore, when the "even number setting suggestion performance" is executed in the variation performance, the setting value is 2, the setting value 4, or the setting value 6, and when the "odd number setting suggestion performance" is executed, the setting value is 1, the setting value is 3. The player will be able to recognize that the setting value is either 5. In addition, it is possible to estimate the setting value by combining it with the execution history of "low setting suggestion effect" and "high setting suggestion effect". That is, if the "odd number setting suggestion performance" and the "low setting suggestion performance" are executed, the setting value is 1 or the setting value 3, and the "odd number setting suggestion performance" and the "high setting suggestion performance" are executed. If so, the setting value is 5, and if the "even number setting suggestion performance" and "low setting suggestion performance" are executed, the setting value is 2, and the "even number setting suggestion performance" and "high setting suggestion performance" are executed. If this is executed, it can be inferred that the setting value is 4 or 6. In this way, this example provides a new game feature in which the setting value is guessed by a combination of executed setting suggestion effects out of a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

In addition, in this example, for example, a mini-character for suggesting settings is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and messages such as "Maybe the best?" or "Maybe 6?" are displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble, so that the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 can be adjusted. The error variation pattern 29 that executes the "highest setting suggestion effect" that suggests that the setting value is 6 is selectable only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "maximum setting suggestion performance" is executed in the variable performance, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest setting value, 6, and his/her enjoyment of the game increases. In addition, in the case of setting value 6, it is possible to select a loss variation pattern 31 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" when the result is not a reach or when the reach is out of reach. It is possible to notify the player that the highest setting value of 6 has been determined, and to make the player aware that the highest setting has been determined, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the first special lottery result is a small hit in the normal state, the special symbol 1 small hit fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 206 In (B)), for example, a mini-character for suggesting settings is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a message such as "Maximum setting confirmed!" or "6 confirmed!" is displayed in the mini-character's speech bubble to set the pachinko machine 1. The small winning variation pattern 33 and the small winning variation pattern 34 that execute the "highest setting confirmation performance" which notifies that the value is 6 can be selected only at the set value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect when a small hit occurs, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest setting value 6, and the game's interest increases. .

In addition, when the first special lottery result is a jackpot in the normal state, the special symbol 1 jackpot variation pattern table (Figure 206 (C )), the jackpot variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmed effect" can be selected only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect when a jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that the setting value is the highest setting value 6, and the jackpot game state is executed. By doing so, it is possible to give double pleasure to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, when the second special lottery result is a small hit in the time saving state, the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation pattern table (Fig. 206 In (D)), the small winning variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" can be selected only at the setting value 6. Therefore, when the "highest setting confirmation effect" is executed in the variable effect in the case of a small hit, the player can recognize that the set value is the highest setting value 6, and also By guiding the game ball B entered in 2006 to the first V prize opening 2007 and winning the third small win that generates a jackpot game state, double joy can be given to the player. Increases interest in games.

As described above, in this example, the small hit probability is changed depending on the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. In other words, in the normal state, set values 1 to 4 have a small hit probability of "1/100," while set values 5 and 6 have a higher probability of winning in 90 minutes than set values 1 to 4. No. 1”. Similarly, in the time saving state, set values 1 to 5 have a small winning probability of "1/10", while set value 6 has a higher probability of hitting "1/9" than set values 1 to 5. It is said that

In addition, the small winning variation pattern 34 that executes the "highest setting confirmation effect" that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small winning in the time saving state is a small winning variation pattern 34 that executes a "highest setting confirmation effect" that can be selected in the second variation pattern setting process when the second special lottery result is a small winning. The variation time is longer than the variation time of the variation patterns that can be selected with setting values 1 to 5, which are lower than setting value 6. In addition, at the setting value 6, the selection rate of the small winning variation pattern 20, which has a longer variation time than the small winning variation patterns 1 to 3, is made higher than the setting value 1 to the setting value 5, which is lower than the setting value 6. That is, at the setting value 6 where the small hit probability is higher than the other setting values, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation performance executed in the time saving state is long. As mentioned above, with setting value 6, the probability of a small hit is higher than with setting values 1 to 5, and furthermore, when a small hit occurs, the game ball B that entered the accessory prize opening 2006 is transferred to the first V prize opening. Since the ratio determined for the third small hit that leads to 2007 and generates a jackpot game state is also set higher than the set value 1 to set value 5, it becomes possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls in a short time. . Therefore, in the case of setting value 6, by increasing the selection rate of small winning fluctuation pattern 20 and small winning fluctuation pattern 34, which have a longer fluctuation time than other small winning fluctuation patterns, than setting value 1 to setting value 5. The number of executions of variable effects per unit time is suppressed to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience.

In addition, in this example, although the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern are distributed in the same way for all the setting values, in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6, the fluctuation patterns unique to the setting value 6 (deviation fluctuation pattern 29 to deviation fluctuation pattern 31, small hit fluctuation pattern 33, small hit fluctuation pattern 34, and jackpot fluctuation pattern 34), the random numbers for determining the fluctuation patterns are distributed differently. Therefore, in this example, only the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern assigned to a specific fluctuation pattern (adjustment fluctuation pattern) in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6 are adjusted to distribute the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern. In this way, only the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern assigned to a specific fluctuation pattern are adjusted without changing the allocation of the random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern for each of all the fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the setting value 6. This reduces the burden of adding and deleting variable patterns, making it easier to design the gaming machine. Note that a specific variation pattern is one that maintains a frequency of appearance above a certain level even if the number of distributed random numbers for variation pattern determination is decreased, and at least It may be adjusted so that it is 60% or more of the number of distributions, and the appearance rate is not excessively lowered compared to other setting values.

In this way, in this example, the small hit probability and the variable time of the variable performance that is executed when the special lottery result is a small win are varied according to the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, thereby creating a balance with the gambling experience. is taking.

In addition, for the above setting suggestion performances (low setting suggestion performance, high setting suggestion performance, even number setting suggestion performance, odd number setting suggestion performance, highest setting suggestion performance, highest setting confirmation performance), the first special lottery result in the normal state is off. Or, it is most likely to be executed when the reach is off, and there are many types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed. On the other hand, if the second special lottery result in the time-saving state is off or out of reach, or the special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) in the normal state and time-saving state are a small hit or a jackpot. In this case, it is difficult to execute compared to the case where the first special lottery result in the normal state is a loss or a reach loss, and there are fewer types of executable setting suggestion effects. In other words, by reducing the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion performance during the time saving state or when a small hit is achieved compared to when the game is out of reach or out of reach in the normal state, attention is drawn to the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening. ing.

[16. Guide passage group consisting of the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
[16-1. Regarding the case where the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide path]
As an embodiment different from the above, FIG. This will be explained with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 207 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in the first guide passage 2521, and FIG. 208 is a specific example of a warning performance when executing a warning performance using the right detection sensor 2404. .

As shown in FIG. 207, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, slightly below the entrance (near the entrance). This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B entering the first guide path 2521 will definitely pass through. In other words, when the game ball B enters the upstream space 2506 and hits the stopper 1006 with such force (so-called hitting to the right), it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. When the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521, the game ball B will be detected by the right detection sensor 2404. On the other hand, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2506 and does not come into contact with the blocking part 1006 (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide passage 2522. , when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided inside the first guide passage 2521, so the game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404. There isn't.

The right detection sensor 2404 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404 is input to the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passage of the game ball B. If passage of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521.

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the way the game ball B is hit (launch intensity) depending on the game state, and to vary the area and path where the game ball B is hit. First, during the small winning game, the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521 becomes open, and the game ball B is allowed to enter the accessory prize opening 2006 that is in the open state. is required. Therefore, during a small winning game, the game ball enters the upstream space 2506 and hits the stopper 1006 so that the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520. It is necessary to hit B (so-called right-handed hit).

Also, during a jackpot game, the jackpot 2005 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 becomes open, and it is required to enter the game ball B into the jackpot 2005 that is in the open state. However, the game ball B is configured so that it has a higher probability of entering the big prize opening 2005 when it is ejected from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 than from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. ing. In addition, during the time saving state, based on the ball entering the normal prize opening 2003 provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500, the second starting port 2004 also provided at the lower right of the center accessory 2500 is opened. state, and the game ball B is required to enter the second starting port 2004 which is in the open state. It is configured such that the game ball B discharged from the exit has a higher probability of entering the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004. Therefore, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520, so that it enters the upstream space part 2506 and does not come into contact with the blocking part 1006. It is preferable to hit the game ball B with a force that is somewhat weaker than that of a right-handed ball.

Further, during the normal state, it is required that the game ball B enter the first starting port 2002 provided below the center accessory 2500. Therefore, during the normal state, the highest point on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 is set so that the game ball B flows down the left side area of the center accessory 2500 where the ball can enter the first starting port 2002. It is necessary to hit the game ball B with such force that it enters the left side in front view (left side of the upper right part of the front frame 2502a) than the part where the game ball B hit (so-called left-handed hitting).

In this embodiment, it is necessary to change the way the game ball B is hit (launch strength) depending on the game state, and to vary the area and path where the game ball B is hit. If the ball B has not been hit, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or path. Specifically, when it is not the gaming state in which the game ball B should be hit into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the passing of the game ball B. If the detected state continues for a predetermined period of time, the player is alerted.

First, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 When it detects the passage of game ball B, it determines that game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if 5 game balls B are hit in 5 seconds) (detected above), the player is warned that he should hit the game ball B into the second guide path 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a first warning effect that notifies a message "Please type in the second guide path." As a result, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and contact the blocking portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), and the second guide The player can understand that he should hit the game ball B into the passage 2522. If the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passage of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the execution of the first warning effect, the game ball B is placed in the first guide path 2521. It is determined that the state in which the mark has been entered has been resolved, and the first warning effect is ended.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B during a jackpot game or time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring timer is activated. At the same time, the count value is incremented every time the right detection sensor 2404 detects the game ball B during the monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the monitoring timer starts, if the state in which game balls B are hit into the first guide path 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if 5 or more game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), In contrast to executing the first warning effect, if the state does not continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, if the detection ends when less than 5 game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), the first warning effect is executed. Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, the first warning performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. In addition, if the game state changes from a jackpot game or a time-saving state after the monitoring timer starts, and the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the second guide path 2522, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. are doing. After the first warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the first warning effect is activated. In addition to ending the first warning performance assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the guide path 2521 has been resolved, the second guide path 2522 The first warning performance is ended because the game ball B is no longer in the state in which it should be hit.

Also, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the left area of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 prevents the game ball B from passing. When detected, it is determined that the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 or more game balls B are detected in 5 seconds), The player is warned that he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208(B), the effect display device 1600 executes a second warning effect that notifies the user of the message "Please hit left." As a result, during the normal state, the force of hitting changes to the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view (left side of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame). Thus, the player can understand that he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. If the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the state where the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 is resolved. It is determined that the second warning performance is terminated.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B during the normal state, it determines that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and starts a monitoring timer. During the monitoring by the monitoring timer, the count value is incremented each time the right detection sensor 2404 detects the game ball B. Then, after the monitoring timer starts, if the state in which game balls B are hit into the first guide path 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if 5 or more game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), In contrast to executing the second warning effect, if the state does not continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, if the detection ends with fewer than 5 game balls B being detected within 5 seconds), the first guide path 2521 Assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, the second warning effect is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Also, if the gaming state changes from the normal state after the monitoring timer starts and the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the left area of the center accessory 2500, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. are doing. After the execution of the second warning effect, a monitoring timer is started, and if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the first warning effect is activated. In addition to ending the second warning effect assuming that the state in which the game ball B has been hit into the guide path 2521 has been resolved, the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 also ends when the game state changes from the normal state. The second warning effect is terminated because the game ball B is no longer in the state in which it should be hit.

As described above, when it is not the gaming state in which the game ball B should be hit into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the passing of the game ball B. When the detected state continues for a predetermined period of time, a warning screen (first and second warning performances) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the content of the warning changes depending on the gaming state. As a result, even if the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 when the game state is not such that the game ball B should be hit into the first guide path 2521, the recommended area or path is The player can accurately grasp whether or not the game exists.

On the other hand, during a small winning game, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 If the passing of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide path 2521 The player is warned that he should hit the game ball B at the target. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208(C), the effect display device 1600 executes a third warning effect that notifies the message "Please type in the first guide path." As a result, during a small winning game, it is learned that the game ball B should be hit into the first guide path 2521 by changing the way it is hit so that it enters the upstream space 2506 and hits the stopper 1006. The player can understand this. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 has been resolved, and the third warning effect is ended. That's what I do.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during a small winning game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring is performed. Starting a timer. If the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) after the monitoring timer starts, the third warning effect is executed. If the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 has been resolved. 3 Warning performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Furthermore, even when the game state is switched from a small winning game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in a state where it should be hit into the first guide path 2521, the information of the monitoring timer and the like is cleared. After the third warning performance is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, the state is that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521. In addition to ending the fourth warning performance assuming that the problem has been resolved, if the game state is switched from a small winning game, the third warning performance is performed because it is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the state in which it should be hit into the first guide path 2521. The warning performance has ended.

In this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 is always It may be located at any position through which the first guide passage 2521 passes, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, or an inside of the first guide passage 2521.

Further, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided upstream of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but is provided downstream of the accessory prize opening 2006. It may be arranged so that it is provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 during the small winning game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the accessory prize opening 2006 that is in the open state. Therefore, the frequency of the game ball B passing through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from passing excessively and causing a problem in the right detection sensor 2404.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning performances are exemplified as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but in each game state, in which mode the game ball B is displayed. When separately displaying a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-hand hitting display consisting of a right arrow image or a left-hand hitting display consisting of a left arrow image) so that the player always knows what to hit, this It is desirable to execute the first to third warning effects so as not to obstruct the display of the input area instruction. For example, a "display area for displaying input area instruction display" is partitioned and provided in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a display area of the effect display device 1600 that is separate from that area is provided. It is desirable to divide and provide a "display area for displaying the first to third warning effects" in the upper left part of the screen so that each guide does not overlap and become obstructed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first to third warning effects are shown as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but such warnings may be realized as audio effects instead of displays. In that case, the priority level of allocation to a limited number of channels for outputting audio will be higher than the various performance sounds set during the normal state, jackpot game, or time saving state. It is desirable to set this so that output can be made as much as possible even in a situation where there are no vacant (unused channels) among the limited number of channels provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to effectively prevent a player who is not accustomed to the game, which has a variety of types of shots of the game ball B, from being disadvantaged.

[16-2. Regarding the case where detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage and the second guide passage]
As an embodiment different from the above, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting a game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and a game ball B that has entered the second guide path 2522 is provided. A case in which a left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting a game ball B that has been played is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 209 and 210. FIG. 209 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which detection sensors are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and FIG. This is a specific example of performance during execution.

As shown in FIG. 209, a right detection sensor 2404 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), and a second A left detection sensor 2405 capable of detecting passage of the game ball B is provided at the upper end of the guide passage 2522, slightly below the entrance (near the entrance). This right detection sensor 2404 is provided at a position where the game ball B entering the first guide path 2521 will definitely pass through. In other words, when the game ball B enters the upstream space 2506 and hits the stopper 1006 with such force (so-called hitting to the right), it enters the first guide passage 2521 of the guide passage group 2520. When the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521, the game ball B will be detected by the right detection sensor 2404.

On the other hand, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided at a position where the game ball B entering the second guide path 2522 will definitely pass through. In other words, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2506 and does not come into contact with the blocking part 1006 (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide passage 2522. , when the game ball B enters the second guide passage 2522, the game ball B will be detected by the left detection sensor 2405.

The right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 receives detection signals from the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. has been entered. Then, the peripheral control MPU monitors whether or not the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the right detection sensor 2404, and also monitors whether or not the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 based on the detection signal from the left detection sensor 2405. Based on this, it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is hit into the second guide path 2522. Specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B, the peripheral control MPU determines that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B. When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B is hit into the second guide path 2522, and the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passage of the game ball B. Then, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522.

In this embodiment, as described in detail above, it is necessary to change the way the game ball B is hit (launch strength) depending on the gaming state, and to vary the area and path where the game ball B is hit. If the game ball B is not hit into the recommended area or passage, the player is alerted to hit the game ball B into the recommended area or passage. Specifically, since the right detection sensor 2404 is provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, it is normal to hit the game ball B into the left area of the center accessory 2500. A state in which either the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide passage 2521 or the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide passage 2522 detects passage of the game ball B is a predetermined state. If the game continues for a certain period of time, it is possible to alert the player.

More specifically, during the normal state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the left area of the center accessory 2500, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the game ball B. When the passage of the game ball B is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has been hit into the first guide path 2521, and when the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide path 2522 detects the passage of the game ball B, It is determined that the game ball B is hit into the second guide path 2522, and this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, the game ball B is hit in the second guide path 2522 for 5 seconds by one or both of the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405. If five or more balls B are detected), the player is warned that he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 210(A), a fourth warning effect is executed on the effect display device 1600 to notify a message "Please hit left." As a result, during the normal state, the force of hitting changes to the left side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 in front view (left side of the upper right part 2502a of the front frame). Thus, the player can understand that he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. When the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect passage of the game ball B for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 It is determined that the state in which the game ball B has been hit has been resolved, and the fourth warning performance is ended.

More specifically, when the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 detects passage of the game ball B during the normal state, when the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522, It is determined that there is a game ball B, and a monitoring timer is started, and a count value is incremented each time a game ball B is detected by the right detection sensor 2404 or the left detection sensor 2405 during monitoring by the monitoring timer. Then, after the monitoring timer starts, if the state in which game balls B are hit into the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, if 5 or more game balls B are detected within 5 seconds) In contrast, if this state does not continue for a predetermined period of time (for example, if less than 5 game balls B are detected within 5 seconds), the fourth warning effect is executed. Assuming that the state in which the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 has been resolved, the fourth warning performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. Also, if the gaming state changes from the normal state after the monitoring timer starts and the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the left area of the center accessory 2500, information such as the monitoring timer and count value is cleared. are doing. After the execution of the fourth warning effect, a monitoring timer is started, and if the state in which the right detection sensor 2404 and the left detection sensor 2405 do not detect the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) In addition to ending the fourth warning effect as if the state in which the game ball B was hit into the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 has been resolved, if the game state is switched from the normal state In this case, the fourth warning effect is ended because the game ball B is no longer in the condition to be hit into the left side area of the center accessory 2500.

In addition, during the small winning game, it is recommended to drive the game ball B into the first guide path 2521 of the guide path group 2520, but the right detection sensor 2404 provided in the first guide path 2521 detects the game ball. If the passing of the game ball B is not detected, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the first guide path 2521 The player is warned that he should hit the game ball B at the target. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 210(B), the effect display device 1600 executes a fifth warning effect that notifies the user of the message "Please type in the first guide path." As a result, during a small winning game, it is learned that the game ball B should be hit into the first guide path 2521 by changing the way it is hit so that it enters the upstream space 2506 and hits the stopper 1006. The player can understand this. Then, when the right detection sensor 2404 detects the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 has been resolved, and the fifth warning effect is ended. That's what I do.

More specifically, if the right detection sensor 2404 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during a small winning game, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the first guide path 2521, and the monitoring is performed. Starting a timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the fifth warning effect is executed. If the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 has been resolved. 5 Warning performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Furthermore, even when the game state is switched from a small winning game after the start of the monitoring timer and the game ball B is no longer in a state where it should be hit into the first guide path 2521, the information of the monitoring timer and the like is cleared. After the fifth warning performance is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the right detection sensor 2404 detects passage of the game ball B, a state where the game ball B is not hit into the first guide path 2521 is detected. In addition to ending the fifth warning performance assuming that the problem has been resolved, if the game state is switched from a small winning game, the fifth warning performance is also performed assuming that the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the first guide path 2521. The warning performance has ended.

On the other hand, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is recommended to hit the game ball B into the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520, but the left detection sensor 2405 provided in the second guide path 2522 does not detect the passing of the game ball B, it is determined that the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522, and if this state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the second The player is warned that he should hit the game ball B into the guide path 2522. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 210(C), the effect display device 1600 executes a sixth warning effect that notifies the user of the message "Please type in the second guide path." As a result, during the jackpot game and the time saving state, the hitting method is changed to a strength that does not enter the upstream space portion 2506 and contact the blocking portion 1006 (a strength that is somewhat weaker than right-handed hitting), and the second guide The player can understand that he should hit the game ball B into the passage 2522. When the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passage of the game ball B, it is determined that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522 is resolved, and the warning performance is ended. ing.

More specifically, if the left detection sensor 2405 does not detect the passing of the game ball B during the jackpot game and the time saving state, it is determined that the game ball B has not been hit into the second guide path 2522. and starts the monitoring timer. Then, after the start of the monitoring timer, if the state in which the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522 continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the sixth warning effect is executed. If the left detection sensor 2405 detects passage of the game ball B within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is assumed that the state where the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522 has been resolved. 6 Warning performance is not executed, and information such as the monitoring timer is cleared. Furthermore, after the monitoring timer starts, if the gaming state changes from a jackpot game or a time saving state and the game ball B is no longer in the state where it should be hit into the second guide path 2522, the information of the monitoring timer etc. is cleared. . After the sixth warning effect is executed, a monitoring timer is started, and if the left detection sensor 2405 detects the passing of the game ball B, the state is that the game ball B is not hit into the second guide path 2522. In addition to ending the sixth warning performance assuming that the problem has been resolved, when the game state is switched from a jackpot game or a time saving state, it is assumed that the game ball B is no longer in the state to be hit into the second guide path 2522. The 6th warning performance has ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance) which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, but the game ball B entering the first guide passage 2521 is always It may be located at any position through which the first guide passage 2521 passes, for example, an entrance at the upper end of the first guide passage 2521, an outlet at the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, or an inside of the first guide passage 2521. Similarly, the left detection sensor 2405 is provided slightly below the entrance (near the entrance), which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, so that the game ball B entering the second guide passage 2522 will definitely pass through. For example, it may be provided at an entrance at the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, an outlet at the lower end of the second guide passage 2522, or inside the second guide passage 2522.

Further, in this embodiment, the right detection sensor 2404 is provided upstream of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, but is provided downstream of the accessory prize opening 2006. It may be arranged so that it is provided. In such a case, when the game ball B is hit into the first guide path 2521 during the small winning game, there is a high possibility that the game ball B will enter the accessory prize opening 2006 that is in the open state. Therefore, the frequency at which the game ball B passes through the right detection sensor 2404 located on the downstream side is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the right detection sensor 2404 from malfunctioning due to excessive passage of the game ball B.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, detection sensors (right detection sensor 2404, left detection sensor 2405) are provided in both the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 among the guide passage group 2520; One detection sensor may be provided at a position where the game ball B entering the passage group 2520 always passes through. For example, one detection sensor may be provided in the passage before the game ball B that has entered the upstream space 2506 branches into either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, so that the guide It becomes possible to detect whether the game ball B enters the passage group 2520 with one detection sensor. In other words, when one detection sensor detects the passage of game ball B, it is determined that game ball B has been hit into the guide path group 2520, and one detection sensor detects the passage of game ball B. If not, it can be determined that the game ball B is not hit into the guide path group 2520. Even in such a case, if the state in which one detection sensor detects the passing of the game ball B continues for a predetermined period of time when the game ball B should be hit into the left side area of the center accessory 2500, By alerting the player, the player can at least understand whether or not he should hit the game ball B into the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning performances are exemplified as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600, but in each game state, in which mode the game ball B is displayed. When separately displaying a driving area instruction display (for example, a right-hand hitting display consisting of a right arrow image or a left-hand hitting display consisting of a left arrow image) so that the player always knows what to hit, this It is desirable to execute the fourth to sixth warning effects so as not to obstruct the display of the input area instruction. For example, a "display area for displaying the input area instruction display" is partitioned and provided in the upper right part of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and a display area of the effect display device 1600 that is separate from that area is provided. It is desirable to divide and provide a "display area for displaying the 4th to 6th warning effects" in the upper left part of the screen so that each guidance is not overlapped and obstructed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth to sixth warning effects are shown as displaying a predetermined warning screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but these warnings may be realized as audio effects instead of displays. In that case, the priority level of allocation to a limited number of channels for outputting audio will be higher than the various performance sounds set during the normal state, jackpot game, or time saving state. It is desirable to set this so that output can be made as much as possible even in a situation where there are no vacant (unused channels) among the limited number of channels provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to effectively prevent a player who is not accustomed to the game, which has a variety of types of shots of the game ball B, from being disadvantaged.

[16-3. Regarding the case where the ball clogging elimination hole is provided in the weighted part where the first guide passage and the second guide passage are lined up in the front-rear direction]
As an embodiment different from the above, in a weighted part 2520a where a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, a ball can be removed from a ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side. A case where the clogging hole 2523 is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212. FIGS. 211 and 212 are explanatory diagrams showing an embodiment in which ball clogging elimination holes 2523 are provided in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

Although the details have been described above, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in front and back directions in a part of the first guide passage 2521 that extends vertically on the left side of the accessory prize opening 2006. It has a weighted portion 2520a that appears to overlap from the top. In this weighted portion 2520a, the second guide passage 2522 is located on the rear side of the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212(A), a predetermined rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 into the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction. A ball clogging hole 2523 is provided, which can be inserted into the ball clogging hole 2523 and into which a ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side can be removed by inserting the rod-shaped member. Specifically, the ball clogging hole 2523 is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 and at a portion adjacent to the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522. In addition, the ball clogging hole 2523 provided in a portion where the rear side of the first guide passage 2521 and the front side of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other is provided on the front side of the first guide passage 2521 when viewed from the front. It is located at a position that coincides with the ball clogging release hole 2523, and is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Thereby, the rod-shaped member can be smoothly inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. In other words, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side can be closed. The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game balls B that are clogged with balls, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the front-back direction, the ball jam in the second guide path 2522 can be removed.

Note that when a cover member is provided on the front side of the guide passage group 2520 consisting of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the cover member also includes the first guide passage when viewed from the front. The ball clogging hole 2523 may be provided at a position that coincides with the ball clogging hole 2523 provided on the front side of the ball clogging hole 2521. Thereby, when ball clogging occurs in the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be inserted from the front side of the cover member toward the second guide passage 2522 without removing the cover member.

Further, the ball clogging release hole 2523 is formed in a circular shape with a slightly larger diameter than the rod-shaped member. With this, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be freely moved not only in the front-rear direction but also in the vertical direction and left-right direction. . In other words, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, by moving the rod-shaped member not only in the front-back direction but also in the vertical and horizontal directions, the ball jam in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed. be able to.

In addition, a plurality of ball clogging holes 2523 are provided at predetermined intervals in a portion extending vertically of the weighted portion 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction. As a result, even if a ball jam occurs at any position in the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted portion 2520a, the rod-shaped member can be inserted through the ball jam clearing hole 2523 provided near the position. , the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be easily removed.

Of the guide passage group 2520, the first guide passage 2521 is curved only in the left-right direction, whereas the second guide passage 2522 is a complicated passage whose passage is curved not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-back direction. The second guide passage 2522 is more likely to be clogged with balls than the first guide passage 2521. Moreover, the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction has an entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and an outlet which is the lower end. Since the rod-shaped member is located far away from the entrance or exit and is bent from the entrance or exit, even if the rod-shaped member is inserted from the entrance or exit, the rod-shaped member will not reach that region. In this respect, it is possible to insert a rod-shaped member from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are arranged in the front-rear direction. A possible ball de-clog hole 2523 is provided. As a result, by inserting the rod-shaped member, even when a ball is clogged not only in the first guide passage 2521 on the front side in the weighted part 2520a but also in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side, the rod-shaped member can be inserted. Ball jams can be easily removed.

In the above, in the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, a ball is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522. Although a clogging hole 2523 is provided, another example of the ball clogging hole 2523 that can remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 on the rear side will be shown below.

As a first alternative example, as shown in FIG. 212(B), on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 in the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, A ball clogging hole 2523 is provided in which a predetermined rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, and by inserting the rod-shaped member, ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed. It's okay. In such a case, when a ball is clogged in the second guide passage 2522, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the left side of the second guide passage 2522, a rod-shaped member can be inserted into the game ball B that is jammed in the second guide passage 2522. The members can come into contact with each other, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 can be removed. Note that in this embodiment, a transparent plate-shaped light guide plate 3102 is provided on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 consisting of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522; It is located behind the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, and allows the rod-shaped member to be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 without being obstructed by the light guide plate 3102.

As a second alternative example, as shown in FIG. 212(C), in the weighted part 2520a where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, there is a A ball clogging hole 2523 is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction toward the second guide passage 2522, but the shape of the ball clogging hole 2523 is not a circular shape but a slit shape extending in the vertical direction. may be formed. In such a case, when a rod-shaped member is inserted from the front side of the first guide passage 2521 toward the second guide passage 2522, the rod-shaped member can be moved greatly in the vertical direction, and the ball in the second guide passage 2522 can be moved. Blockages can be removed easily.

Further, near the entrances that are the upper ends of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided side by side in the left-right direction. As a third alternative example, as shown in FIG. 212(D), at a location where the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are lined up in the front-rear direction, a predetermined rod-shaped member is inserted into the second guide passage 2522. A ball clogging hole 2523 may be provided that can be inserted from the left side of the ball and that can remove ball clogging in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (rear side) by inserting the rod-shaped member. In other words, the ball clogging hole 2523 may be provided so as to penetrate from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 toward the first guide passage 2521 in the left-right direction. In such a case, when a ball is clogged in the first guide passage 2521, a rod-shaped member can be inserted from the left side of the second guide passage 2522 to remove the ball jam in the first guide passage 2521 on the right side (back side). The rod-shaped member can come into contact with the game ball B that has been rolled, and by moving the rod-shaped member in the left-right direction, the ball clogging in the first guide path 2521 can be removed.

In addition, when the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 as in the first alternative example and the third alternative example, the ball clogging elimination hole 2523 is provided from the left side of the second guide passage 2522. Although it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522 by inserting a rod-shaped member through the second guide passage 2523, it is possible to remove the ball clogging in the second guide passage 2522. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball-clogging hole 2523, there is a possibility that the rod-shaped member comes into contact with the light guide plate 3102. If the light guide plate 3102 is scratched by the rod-like member, when the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated with a pattern (first pattern 3110, second pattern 3120), the scratched area unrelated to the pattern may also be damaged. Light is guided (light is reflected), but if the scratched area overlaps the pattern, there is a problem that the pattern becomes difficult to see. For this reason, it is preferable not to provide a light guide decoration area in which a pattern is displayed in the right area of the light guide plate 3102, which is a portion adjacent to the second guide path 2522. The light guide plate 3102 is attached to a square frame-shaped unit base 3101 attached to the front end of the back box 3010, and the light guide plate 3102 is manually moved to the left so that the light guide plate 3102 is separated from the second guide passage 2522. When the rod-shaped member is inserted through the ball clogging hole 2523, the rod-shaped member can be moved to a position where it does not come into contact with the light guide plate 3102 as a preliminary step. You may. Further, on the left side of the second guide passage 2522, there is a movable member that can move between a position where the ball clogging release hole 2523 provided on the left side of the second guide passage 2522 is concealed and a position where it is not concealed. When inserting a rod-like member through the ball jam elimination hole 2523, the movable member may be configured to be able to move to a position where it does not hide the ball jam elimination hole 2523. In such a configuration, when there is no need to remove a ball jam in the second guide passage 2522, the movable member is located at a position that hides the ball jam clearing hole 2523, so that the player can visually recognize the ball jam clearing hole 2523. This has the advantage that the decorativeness of the entire structure including the second guide passage 2522 is not impaired.

[16-4. Regarding the ball clogging prevention structure near the exits of the parallel first and second guide passages]
As explained in FIG. 142(a), the game ball B is hit with such force that it contacts the stop portion 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a ( When the ball B hits the stopper 1006, the ball B enters the first guide path 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory prize opening door 2511 that closes the accessory prize opening 2006 in the middle of the first guide passage 2521, and then passes through the guide passage group. It is discharged from the outlet on the right side of the lower end of 2520 to the attacker unit 2400 side below. Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is moved to the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 by the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between it and the attacker unit 2400. The player is guided to enter either the normal winning hole 2003 or the left side of the normal winning hole 2003 with a similar probability.

On the other hand, as explained in FIG. 142(b), when the game ball B hit into the upstream space 2506 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and flows through the second guide passage 2522, it twists backward. After being lined up in the front-rear direction with the first guide passage 2521 in the weighted portion 2520a, it is twisted forward and released from the exit on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 toward the attacker unit 2400 side below. Then, the game ball B released downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is moved to the normal winning opening 2003 or the left side of the normal winning opening 2003 by the plurality of obstacle nails N installed between the attacker unit 2400 and the attacking unit 2400. In rare cases, the attacker is guided to enter the first opening 2431 of the right passage 2430 of the attacker.

In addition, the game ball B that entered the attacker right passage 2430 through the first opening 2431 on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003 is placed on the lower right rail 1004 from the release opening 2435 which is lower than the big winning opening 2005. It is released and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a.

At the lower end of the guide passage group 2520, the exits of the first guide passage 2521 are located on the right side and the exits of the second guide passage 2522 are located on the left side. In the vicinity of the exits of the passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, a large amount of game balls B discharged from these exits flow in in a short period of time, and ball clogging is likely to occur below these exits. In this regard, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003; When the game ball B enters, it is guided to the out port 1008 through the attacker right passage 2430. As a result, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, some of the game balls B ejected from those exits are guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. The game balls B are less likely to stay near the exit of the game ball, and ball clogging can be prevented from occurring. Furthermore, even if ball clogging occurs below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B discharged from those exits are guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from piling up inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

In this way, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522; The outlet of the first guide passage 2521 is located closer to the outlet of the first guide passage 2521 than the first guide passage 2521. Inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided an accessory prize opening 2006 which becomes open during the small winning game. When the game balls B are piled up to the position of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the guide passage 2521, more game balls B than expected will flow into the opened accessory prize opening 2006, causing the player to cheat. You will be able to earn a huge profit. In this regard, since the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided so that the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is closer to the outlet of the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is Even if ball clogging occurs below the exit of the second guide passage 2522, the game balls B near the exit of the first guide passage 2521 can be efficiently guided from the first opening 2431 to the out port 1008. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being piled up to the position of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521.

In addition, in this embodiment, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, there is an attacker right side that can guide the game ball B to the out opening 1008. Although the first opening 2431 of the passage 2430 is provided, an outlet other than the outlet 1008 is provided in the attacker right passage 2430, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is It may also be discharged from the outlet to the outside of the game area 5a. Even in such a case, some of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided out of the gaming area 5a from an outlet other than the outlet 1008. This makes it difficult for the game balls B to stay near these exits, and it is possible to prevent balls from clogging.

In addition, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, there is an attacker right passage that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 at a position close to the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Although the first opening 2431 of 2430 is provided, there is also a passage close to the exit of the second guide passage 2522 that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 or to the outside of the game area 5a. An outlet other than the outlet 1008 through which the game ball B can be ejected may be provided. Even in such a case, some of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided outside the gaming area 5a, and some of the game balls B discharged from the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 can be efficiently guided outside the gaming area 5a. Game balls B are less likely to accumulate, and ball clogging can be prevented from occurring.

In the above, near the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 is provided. However, near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, there are also passages that can guide the game ball B to the out port 1008 and eject the game ball B out of the gaming area 5a. An outlet other than the possible outlet 1008 may be provided. Below, another example of the case where a second out port 1013 is provided near the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, which can discharge the game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a, will be described. show. FIG. 213 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet 1013 is provided near the entrances of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522.

As shown in FIG. 213, between the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the gaming area 5a. A second outlet 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2506 and contacts the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), there is a high probability that the ball B will enter the first guide path 2521. A part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide path 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2506 and does not come into contact with the stopper 1006 (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide path 2522. However, a part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide path 2522. In other words, a part of the game ball B that has been hit into the upstream space 2506 enters the second out port 1013. As a result, even if the player aims at either the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 or the entrance of the second guide passage 2522, one of the game balls B hit so as to enter the upstream space 2506 Since the game balls B are guided out of the game area 5a from the second out port 1013, fewer game balls B enter the inside from those entrances, and the balls B enter the inside of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522. It is possible to prevent clogging from occurring.

In addition to the above, the out port 1008 is capable of ejecting the game ball B outside the game area 5a only when a ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522. Another outlet may be provided. Below, another example will be shown in which a second outlet 1013 is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521, which allows the game ball B to be discharged out of the game area 5a. FIG. 214 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet 1013 is provided near the exit inside the first guide passage 2521.

As shown in FIG. 214(A), slightly above the exit which is the lower end of the first guide passage 2521, there is a front surface of the game area 5a (game board 5) which is the same surface as the rear surface of the first guide passage 2521. A second out port 1013 is provided which can open and discharge the game ball B out of the game area 5a. In addition, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided a prize winning opening 2006 that is open during the small winning game, but the second out opening 1013 is on the downstream side of the prize winning opening 2006. It is located in a certain position. In such a configuration, if ball clogging does not occur below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide path 2521, when the game ball B enters the first guide path 2521, the second out The ball does not enter the opening 1013 and passes directly in front of the second out opening 1013.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 214(B), if a ball jam occurs below the second out port 1013, such as below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game will reach the position of the second out port 1013. When the balls B are piled up, the game balls B that have passed through the first guide path 2521 will enter the second out port 1013. That is, inside the first guide passage 2521, the game balls B are not piled up to a position above the second outlet 1013. As described above, inside the first guide passage 2521, there is provided an accessory prize opening 2006 which becomes open during a small winning game. When the game balls B are piled up to the position of the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide passage 2521, more game balls B than expected flow into the accessory prize opening 2006 which is in the open state. Players will be able to obtain illegal profits. In this regard, on the downstream side of the accessory prize opening 2006 inside the first guide passage 2521, only when a ball jam occurs inside the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B can be discharged outside the game area 5a. Since the second out port 1013 is provided, even if a ball jam occurs near the exit of the first guide path 2521, the accessory prize opening 2006 provided inside the first guide path 2521 will be closed. A situation may occur in which the game balls B can be ejected from the second outlet 1013 to the outside of the gaming area 5a before the game balls B are piled up to the position where the player can gain illegal profits. can be prevented.

[17. About exit detection when an abnormality occurs]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, after the power is turned on, the ball enters the entrance holes provided on the game board 5 (first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006, etc.). When the game balls B enter the game ball B and when the game balls B enter the out port 1008, the number of balls entered is counted and predetermined calculations are performed, and the calculation results are used as information regarding the pachinko machine 1. The information is displayed on a predetermined display device (for example, the base monitor 1310h). In addition, when an abnormality occurs, whether the calculation is continued or stopped depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe, and if a severe abnormality occurs, the calculation is stopped. I am trying to cancel (stop) it. The execution state of calculations when such an abnormality occurs will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of execution of calculations when an abnormality occurs.

First, in the main control board 1310, the ball entrances provided on the game board 5 include a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2003, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a special winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening 2005. When the game ball B enters the winning hole 2006, the general winning hole sensor 3001, the normal winning hole sensor 2401, the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2402, the big winning hole sensor 2403, and the accessory winning hole sensor are activated. The mouth sensor 2513 detects the game balls B and adds them to the corresponding ball entry counters. With such an incoming ball counter, it is possible to grasp the number of incoming game balls B that have entered each ball entry hole among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a.

In addition, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the out port 1008 provided on the game board 5, either the out port left sensor 3032 or the out port right sensor 3033 detects the game ball B. are detected and both are added to the out number counter. With this out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B that have entered the out port 1008 among the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a.

The main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using an incoming ball counter and an out number counter. As a specific example, by adding up all of the input ball counters, the total number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance provided on the game board 5, out of the game balls B that have been hit into the game area 5a. can be calculated. Furthermore, by adding up all of the ball entry counters and the out number counter, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated.

The above calculation results are displayed on a predetermined display device as information regarding the pachinko machine 1. However, the information displayed on the predetermined display device is the number of game balls B that entered each ball entry port and out port 1008 based on the respective entry number counters and out number counters. It is also possible to output. Further, examples of the predetermined display device include a performance display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, a hall computer managed by the hall side externally, and the like. Alternatively, a monitor (base monitor 1310h) may be mounted on the main control board 1310 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the information may be displayed on the monitor (base monitor 1310h). Among these, when information is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it can be grasped from a position where both the player and the hall side can visually recognize it, whereas When information is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, it can be grasped at a position that is visible only to the hole side.

Further, as information displayed on a predetermined display device, the total number of game balls B that entered the ball entry hole provided on the game board 5 and the total number of game balls B that entered the out port 1008 were displayed. In such a case, it can be determined from these ratios whether the degree to which the game ball B enters the ball entry port or the ball exit port 1008 is within a normal numerical range. When a normal game is being played, the game balls B hit into the game area 5a enter the ball entry hole at a predetermined rate. If the ratio of the total number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance is too high, it can be suspected that the ball is being entered into the ball entrance through an illegal act. However, if the total number of game balls B that entered the out port 1008 is too large, it can be suspected that the balls are entered into the out port 1008 by fraudulent activity.

In addition, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is paid out from the payout device 580, the payout detection sensor 591 detects the game ball B and adds it to the payout number counter. With this payout number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B paid out to the player. Since the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, calculated by all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter, is the total number of game balls B used by the player, the player The net increase in the number of game balls B can be calculated by calculating the difference between the number of paid out game balls B, and the net increase in the number of game balls B can be displayed on a predetermined display device. Can be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the ball entrance or exit port 1008 provided on the game board 5 passes through the ball discharge port 629 provided on the main body frame 4 to the pachinko machine 1. A frame-side out-port sensor is provided that can detect the game ball B passing through the ball discharge port 629, which is discharged to the rear outside (to the island equipment side of the game hall) (see FIG. 93). . When this frame-side out-port sensor detects the game ball B that has passed through the ball discharge port 629, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, after the game balls B enter the ball entrance and exit 1008 provided on the game board 5, when the joined game balls B are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the frame side out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the frame side out number counter. With this frame-side out number counter, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are also transferred to the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower full ball passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600. After passing through the lower ball ejection passage 610c of the path unit 610 and being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guide part 627 of the board unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving part 628 and the ball ejection port 629. It is discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the island equipment side of the game hall), and not only the game balls B hit into the game area 5a are discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580. The frame-side out-port sensor is also configured to detect the game ball B that has been played. Here, considering the purpose of ascertaining the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a, the number of game balls B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is as follows. It is strongly desired to eliminate (invalidate) the following in various calculations. In response to this, in a configuration in which the frame-side out-port sensor also detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball-extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580, the game ball B is placed upstream of the frame-side out-port sensor and separately. A ball removal detection sensor (not shown) is provided, and this ball removal detection sensor detects the game ball B discharged downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580. It is desirable that the number of game balls B played is subtracted from the out number counter. As a result, the game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 is detected by the ball removal detection sensor, is once subtracted from the out number counter, and is then detected by the frame side out port sensor. The number of game balls B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 can be effectively prevented from being reflected in the out number counter. Note that this form is applicable when the game ball B is ejected downward from the ball ejecting passage 580b of the payout device 580 when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized (when the ball ejecting action of the payout device 580 is performed). There is no problem because neither the ball removal detection sensor nor the frame side out exit sensor can perform the detection itself, but when the game is played downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 while the pachinko machine 1 is energized, When the ball B is ejected (when the action of ejecting the ball from the dispensing device 580 is performed), or when the game ball B is ejected downward from the ball ejecting passage 580b of the dispensing device 580 when the pachinko machine 1 is not energized. This is to solve the problem that occurs when the Pachinko machine 1 is energized during the ball removal (when the ball is removed from the payout device 580). Further, the game ball B hit into the game area 5a and the game ball B discharged downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 are passed through separate passages to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 without merging them. It may be configured such that the ball is discharged to the outside (to the side of the island equipment of the game hall), and only the game ball B hit in the game area 5a can be detected by the frame side out-port sensor. With such a configuration, there is no need for a configuration that subtracts the number of game balls B detected by the above-mentioned ball removal detection sensor from the out number counter.

As described above, the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be grasped by the frame-side out number counter, but the number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can also be determined by the out number counter. The total number of balls B can be calculated. That is, in a state where no game is being played and the game ball B is not hit into the game area 5a, the frame-side out number counter will match the numerical value of the out number counter. On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes the detection sensor provided at the ball entrance and the ball out port 1008, the ball is placed at the frame side which is a predetermined distance away. Since the ball passes through the mouth sensor, the value obtained by adding all of the input ball counters and the out number counter will remain slightly larger than the out number counter on the frame side.

In this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs, whether the addition to the counter or calculation is continued or stopped depends on whether the abnormality is mild or severe. As shown in FIG. 215(A), when a slight abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation continue without being interrupted (stopped). This slight abnormality may be caused by a situation where the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and the game balls B cannot be put out from the payout device 580, or a game state where the game balls B should be hit into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500. , a state in which the player is not hitting right-handed. In these states, an effect is executed to warn the player to guide the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, or to warn the player to hit the game ball B to the right. In addition, in these states, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are not released from the outer frame 2, and the ball entry and exit ports 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are not opened. Therefore, it is not possible to artificially enter the game ball B. Therefore, if a minor abnormality occurs, the incoming ball counter and out number counter will not increase due to illegal acts, and the addition to the counter and calculation will continue without stopping (stopping). There is.

On the other hand, when a severe abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped). This severe abnormality includes a state in which the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In these conditions, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2, and the ball entry and exit ports 1008 provided on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 are artificially opened. This is a state in which the game ball B can be entered. Therefore, when a serious abnormality occurs, addition to the counters and calculations are stopped (stopped) to prevent the incoming ball counter and the out number counter from increasing due to illegal acts.

In addition, if a severe abnormality occurs, addition to the counter and calculation are stopped (stopped), but the detection sensors installed at the ball entry and exit ports 1008 do not prevent the game ball B from passing. Detected. In addition, if a serious abnormality occurs, the numerical values of the counters such as the incoming ball counter and the out number counter, and the calculation results before the occurrence are retained, and the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 are replaced by the outer frame 2. Addition to the counter and calculations are restarted after a severe abnormality, such as being closed for a period of time, is resolved. In addition, if a serious abnormality occurs and the addition to the counter or calculation is stopped (stopped), the addition to the counter or calculation can be stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from a speaker. A cancellation effect is being executed to notify that the event has been cancelled.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 215(B), addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor 3033 and calculations related to the out number counter are performed when a severe abnormality occurs. Until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter continue without stopping (stopping), and when the predetermined time elapses, the out number counter Addition to and calculations related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). As a result, in the event of a severe abnormality such as the door frame 3 being released from the outer frame 2, it is possible to know the number of game balls B entering the out port 1008 until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. .

For example, if the game balls B become grape-shaped in the gaming area 5a and the balls become jammed, normal gaming cannot be performed, so the person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and the grape-shaped game balls B However, there is a high possibility that the removed game ball B will directly flow into the outlet 1008 at the lower end. Such a grape-shaped game ball B is originally a game ball B that would have been highly likely to have been ejected from the outlet 1008 if it had not become grape-shaped. In this regard, when the door frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 in order to remove the grape-shaped game ball B, additions to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter are performed until a predetermined time elapses. Since this continues without stopping (stopping), the number of grape-shaped game balls B that have flowed into the out port 1008 can be determined, and the reliability of information regarding the out port 1008 can be increased. Note that after the predetermined time has elapsed, there is a low possibility that the grape-shaped game ball B will flow into the out port 1008, and it is suspected that the ball is being entered into the out port 1008 by an illegal act, so the out number counter is The calculations related to the addition to and the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 215(C), addition to the out number counter corresponding to the detection by the out exit left sensor 3032 and the out exit right sensor 3033 and calculations related to the out number counter are performed when a severe abnormality occurs. Addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter continue without stopping (stopping) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, but the predetermined time has elapsed. Even if it is before, if the out exit left sensor 3032 or the out exit right sensor 3033 detects a large number of game balls B continuously in a short period of time, at that point, the number of outs is added to the out number counter or the out number counter is The calculation related to the error has been canceled (stopped). In such a case, when the door frame 3 is opened, there is a possibility that more than the number of entering balls that are expected to flow into the out port 1008 may have flowed into the out port 1008 by removing the grape-shaped game balls B. Since it is suspected that the ball is entered into the out port 1008 by an illegal act, addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 215(D), when the door frame 3 is opened when a severe abnormality occurs, the output number counter corresponding to the detection by the outlet left sensor 3032 and the outlet right sensor 3033 is With regard to addition and calculations related to the out number counter, addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped) until a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the door frame 3 was opened. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is opened, the addition to the out number counter and the calculation regarding the out number counter are stopped (stopped) at that point. This is because when the door frame 3 is opened, it is opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game balls B from the game area 5a, whereas when the main body frame 4 is opened, the game ball B is opened from the game area 5a. This is because the body frame 4 is opened, which does not need to be opened for the purpose of removing the grape-shaped game ball B. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is opened for another purpose such as removing jammed balls on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so addition to the out number counter and calculations related to the out number counter are stopped (stopped). I am planning to do so.

As described above, in this embodiment, after the game balls B enter the ball entrance or exit port 1008 provided on the game board 5, the joined game balls B are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. When the frame side out port sensor detects the game ball B, as shown in FIG. 215(E), the number of outs on the frame side corresponding to the detection by the frame side out port sensor is Regarding addition and calculations related to the frame-side out number counter, when a severe abnormality occurs, addition to the frame-side out number counter and calculations related to the frame-side out number counter are stopped (stopped). For this reason, when a person on the hall side opens the door frame 3 and removes the grape-shaped game ball B, the out port corresponding to the detection by the out port left sensor 3032 and the out port right sensor 3033 is detected in a predetermined period. While addition is made to the out number counter, addition to the out number counter on the frame side corresponding to the detection by the out exit sensor on the frame side is not performed, so all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter are The number of grape-shaped game balls B that are removed when the door frame 3 is opened can be determined by the difference between the added value and the value of the out number counter on the frame side. The number of such grape-shaped game balls B entered can be displayed on a predetermined display device as information regarding the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as described above, when no game is being played and the game ball B is not hit into the gaming area 5a, the frame-side out number counter is equal to all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter. It will match the value obtained by adding . On the other hand, in a state where the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, after the game ball B passes the detection sensor provided at the ball entrance and the ball out port 1008, the game ball B is placed at the frame side which is a predetermined distance away. Since the ball passes through the mouth sensor, the value obtained by adding all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter will remain slightly larger than the out number counter on the frame side. In this way, as long as the game is being played normally, there is a possibility that the total number of balls entered and the number of outs will differ by a predetermined number or more compared to the number of outs on the frame side. Therefore, by monitoring whether or not a predetermined number of differences or more have occurred, it is possible to determine whether or not a normal game is being played.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 216, if there is a difference of more than a predetermined number in the value obtained by adding all of the incoming ball counters and the out number counter compared to the out number counter on the frame side, a special It is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the counter and calculations are canceled (stopped). In addition, if a special abnormality occurs and the addition to the counter or calculation is stopped, the addition to the counter or calculation is stopped by displaying an image on a predetermined display device or outputting audio from the speaker. A cancellation effect is running to notify you that the event is cancelled. If there is a difference of more than a predetermined number with respect to the total value of the incoming ball counter and the out number counter compared to the out number counter on the frame side, for example, if there is a difference of more than a predetermined number on the game board 5 due to an illegal act. Objects other than the game ball B are allowed to pass only through the entrance and exit ports 1008 provided, and objects other than the game ball B are passed through the detection sensors provided at the entrance and exit 1008. It can be suspected that the ball is jammed before it passes the frame-side outlet sensor. As a result, the occurrence of malfunctions such as illegal acts or jammed balls can be detected at an early stage, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in this embodiment, a state in which the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 is exemplified as a severe abnormality, but the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 is not limited to this. Even if the game is not released from the outer frame 2, if it detects a situation in which it is assumed that the game is progressing due to an illegal act, additions to various counters and calculations will be stopped (stopped). You may also do so. For example, it is determined that the game is not being played normally if a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or if a predetermined vibration (impact) is detected on the game area 5a. An example of this is to stop (stop) additions to various counters and calculations. In addition, when abnormal magnetism or vibration is detected when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2, Although additions and calculations to various counters are stopped (stopped), fraud is detected only if illegal magnetism or vibration is detected while the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is not released from the outer frame 2. It may be determined that the progress of the game including the firing of the game ball B is immediately stopped.

[17-1. About exit detection when multiple exits are provided]
As an embodiment different from the above, in addition to the out port 1008 provided on the downstream side of the gaming area 5a, a second out port 1013 is provided on the upstream side, and a third out port 1014 is provided on the midstream side. A case where a detection sensor capable of detecting the ejected game balls B is provided will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. FIG. 217 is an explanatory diagram showing an embodiment in which a second outlet 1013 and a third outlet 1014 are provided separately from the outlet 1008. FIG. 218 is an explanatory diagram showing the state of execution of calculations when a second outlet 1013 and a third outlet 1014 are provided separately from the outlet 1008.

As shown in FIG. 217, between the entrance which is the upper end of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance which is the upper end of the second guide passage 2522, it is possible to discharge the game ball B out of the gaming area 5a. A second outlet 1013 is provided. In such a configuration, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2506 and contacts the stop portion 1006 (so-called right-handed hit), there is a high probability that the ball B will enter the first guide path 2521. A part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the first guide path 2521. Similarly, if the game ball B is hit with such force that it enters the upstream space 2506 and does not come into contact with the stopper 1006 (a force that is somewhat weaker than when hitting right-handed), there is a high probability that it will enter the second guide path 2522. However, a part of the hit game ball B enters the second out port 1013 adjacent to the entrance of the second guide path 2522. In other words, a part of the game ball B that has been hit into the upstream space 2506 enters the second out port 1013.

Further, below the exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522, on the right side of the normal winning opening 2003, the first opening 2431 of the attacker right passage 2430 is provided. A third out port 1014 separate from the out port 1008 is provided, and the game ball B entering from the first opening 2431 is discharged from the third out port 1014 to the outside of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the effect of providing the second out port 1013 around the entrance of the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522 in the guide path group 2520, and the fact that the third out port 1014 is provided around the exit. Although the details of the effects have been described above, the provision of the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 prevents balls from clogging inside the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522. can be prevented from occurring.

In this embodiment, a second outlet sensor capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the second outlet 1013 and a second outlet sensor capable of detecting the game ball B discharged to the outside from the third outlet 1014 are used. A third outlet sensor is provided, which is capable of detecting. When this second out port sensor detects the game ball B entering the second out port 1013, its detection signal is input to the main control board 1310, whereas the third out port sensor detects the game ball B entering the second out port 1013. When the game ball B entering the out port 1014 is detected, the detection signal is input to the main control board 1310. Then, in the main control board 1310, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the second out port 1013, the second out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the second out number counter. On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged to the outside from the third out port 1014, the third out port sensor detects the game ball B and adds it to the third out number counter. The second out number counter measures the number of game balls B that entered the second out port 1013, while the third out number counter measures the number of game balls B that entered the third out port 1014. It is possible to grasp the number of balls entering the field.

Note that the main control board 1310 performs predetermined calculations using not only the incoming ball counter and the out number counter, but also the second out number counter and the third out number counter. As a specific example, by adding the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, out of the game balls B hit in the game area 5a, the number The number of game balls B ejected to the outside can be calculated without entering the ball entrances such as the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Further, by adding the incoming ball counter, the out number counter, the second out number counter, and the third out number counter, the total number of game balls B hit into the game area 5a can be calculated.

In this embodiment, when the game balls B are hit in the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) are the second out. It is designed to prevent the ball from entering the mouth 1013. Therefore, in the time saving state or jackpot game state, the second out number counter is used to check whether the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored and if the number of players exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 218(A), when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game by audio output from a speaker. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 becomes less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, if the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the input ball B located downstream of the second out port 1013 in the right area of the gaming area 5a is Opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball openings (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, accessory winning opening 2006) are reduced, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player. becomes. In this regard, if the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is more than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to discover at an early stage that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, in the time saving state and the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. The number of game balls B that entered the second out port 1013 and the number of balls that entered the ball entry ports and out ports downstream of the second out port 1013 (out port 1008, third out port 1014) The ratio between the number of game balls B and the number of balls entered may be calculated, and whether or not the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio may be monitored. Even in such a case, if the entry rate of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

Similarly, in a state where game balls B are hit into the right side area of the game area 5a, a predetermined number or more per unit time (for example, 30 or more balls out of 100 balls that can be fired per minute) are sent to the third out port 1014. It is designed to prevent the ball from entering the ball. Therefore, in the time saving state or the jackpot game state, the third out number counter is used to check whether the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. It is monitored and if the number of players exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, it is determined that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 218(B), when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 exceeds a predetermined number per unit time, an image is displayed on a predetermined display device. A warning effect is executed to warn that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game by audio output from a speaker. This warning effect is terminated when the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 becomes less than a predetermined number per unit time.

For example, if the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number per unit time, the input ball B located downstream of the third out port 1014 in the right area of the gaming area 5a is Opportunities for the game ball B to enter the ball openings (normal winning opening 2003, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005) are reduced, resulting in a disadvantageous situation for the player. In this regard, if the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is more than a predetermined number per unit time, the game board 5 may have been tampered with. As a result, it is possible to discover at an early stage that it is difficult to play a normal right-handed game, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In the above, in the time saving state or the jackpot game state, it is monitored whether the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number per unit time. Ratio between the number of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 and the number of game balls B entering the ball entry port or out port 1008 downstream of the third out port 1014 It may be possible to calculate the ratio and monitor whether the ratio is equal to or higher than a predetermined ratio. Even in such a case, if the entry rate of game balls B entering the third out port 1014 per unit time is too high, it can be determined that it is difficult to perform a normal right-handed game.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time saving state or the jackpot game state, when the number of game balls B entering the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 is equal to or more than a predetermined number per unit time, Although addition to the second out number counter and third out number counter and calculations related to these out number counters are continued, as in the above embodiment, when the number reaches a predetermined number per unit time or more, , it may be determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the addition to the second out number counter and the third out number counter and the calculations regarding these out number counters may be stopped. With such a configuration, even if the game ball B is entered into the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014 by an illegal act, the second out number counter and the third out number counter will not increase. , the reliability of information regarding the second outlet 1013 and the third outlet 1014 can be increased.

Further, in this embodiment, in the normal state, the game ball B should be hit in the left side area of the game area 5a, but when the game ball B is hit in the right side area of the game area 5a, the game ball B is hit in the right side area of the game area 5a. A game ball B may enter the second out port 1013 or the third out port 1014. Therefore, in the normal state, when the second out port sensor or the third out port sensor detects the game ball B, the image display on a predetermined display device or the audio output from the speaker will change the game ball B from right-handed to left-handed. It is executing an instructional performance that instructs the user to change to .

[18. About the light emission history after the light emission effect using the light guide plate]
In this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner based on the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. During the variable display, the effect display device 1600 The light guide plate 3102 provided in front of the display area is decorated with light emitting light multiple times, and the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is changed stepwise in the multiple times, thereby emitting light that suggests the degree of jackpot expectation for the variable display. It makes the performance possible. In addition, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the back top decoration body 3211 of the back front presentation unit 3200 provided around the display area of the presentation display device 1600 (around the opening 3010a of the back box 3010), the back left decoration The body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 are made to emit light with the same emission color as the light guide plate 3102, but even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is displayed. It is possible to perform a history effect in which the back decorative body 3211 and the like continue to emit light in the immediately previous emitted color.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command in the command analysis process of step S601, it determines whether to execute a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102 based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. to decide. In addition, when it is decided to perform a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light emission color pattern table is referred to based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command, and the emission color of the light guide plate 3102 in the light emission effect is determined based on the variation pattern specified from the variation pattern command. One of a plurality of types of luminescent color patterns set multiple times is determined.

In addition, the light guide plate 3102 has a first pattern of white, green, blue, or red by changing the light emitting color of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to decorate the pattern 3110 (see FIG. 165) with light emitting light, but in the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is illuminated three times with the light emitting color set in the light emitting color pattern. I try to decorate it with light at the right time. In addition, the time for which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one time is a short time (for example, less than 1 second), and after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the light is turned off until the next time the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. The amount of time it takes is longer. Furthermore, although the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at one timing is only one, the light guide plate 3102 may be decorated with light emission multiple times at each timing.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, but it is executed at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed. For example, one to three of the three times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light may be performed at the timing during the reach effect after the reach is formed.

Furthermore, while it is possible to make the plurality of LEDs mounted on the first picture board 3103 disposed above the light guide plate 3102 emit light to decorate the first picture 3110 with light, Although it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 disposed on the left side of the second pattern when viewed from the front, it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light emission. Here, the first pattern 3110 is decorated with light emission. This makes it possible to clearly understand that the three light-emitting decorations of the first pattern 3110 in the light-emitting effect are a series of effects.

Next, a light emitting color pattern table in which the light emitting color pattern of the light guide plate 3102 is set will be described with reference to FIG. 219. Note that the emission color pattern table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 219 is a light emission color pattern table in which light emission color patterns of the light guide plate 3102 are set.

As described above, a plurality of types of light emitting color patterns are set in the light emitting color pattern table, and each light emitting color pattern includes a light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 corresponding to the number of times the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light. It is set how it will change. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, a light emission pattern is set in the light emission color pattern table so that the light guide plate 3102 can be changed twice after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a predetermined light emission color.

Further, the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 set in the emitting color pattern is set to be decorated with one of four colors: white, green, blue, and red. When determining the emitting color pattern from the emitting color pattern table, the expectation level of jackpot is set so that the order of white → green → blue → red increases as a result of the emitted light color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end. has been done. In other words, when the lottery result identified from the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot, a light emitting color pattern is determined with high probability as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102, which is a light emitting color (for example, red) with a high probability of winning the jackpot, When the lottery result specified from the fluctuation pattern is a loss (loss, reach loss), a light emitting color pattern with a low probability of winning the jackpot (for example, white) is selected as the final light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 with a high probability. A decision is to be made. As a result, when the final luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a luminescent color with a high expectation of a jackpot, the player's expectations for a jackpot are increased.

Note that the light emitting color pattern is such that the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 does not change in the reverse order from white → green → blue → red, so that the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light and then the next time the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light. The color is set so that the emitted light color is maintained or the emitted color has a high probability of winning a jackpot. As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting light in a light emitting color with a low expectation of a jackpot, there remains a possibility that the light guide plate 3102 will change to a light emitting color with a high probability of a jackpot unless the three timings of the light emitting effect are completed. This makes it possible to draw attention to the emitted light color of the light guide plate 3102 with anticipation until the light emitting effect ends.

Furthermore, the light emitting color pattern does not necessarily require that the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 changes in the order of green → blue → red after being decorated with white light, but it is possible to start with a light emitting color other than white, or to It is also set to skip the above emission colors and change to the next emission color (for example, change from white to red). As a result, even if the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a light emitting color with a low probability of winning a jackpot, it is not possible to predict which light emitting color the next light emitting color will change to, and the light guide plate 3102 remains until the light emitting performance ends. It is possible to draw attention to the luminescent color of 3102 with anticipation.

Next, the back decorative body 3211 and the like provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be explained with reference to FIG. 220. As described above, in the front view of the back and front presentation unit 3200, the back decorative body 3211 of the back and front presentation unit 3200 surrounds the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, that is, surrounds the display area of the presentation display device 1600. , a back left decorative body 3212, and a back right decorative body 3213. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 220, in the back left decorative body 3212 and the back right decorative body 3213 on both the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, each of the three radial decorative parts 3212b and the three radial decorative parts 3213b , is divided into four parts. Here, these will be collectively referred to as decorative bodies 3210. Therefore, four decorations 3210 are provided on both left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600 so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. Further, behind these decorative bodies 3210, a decorative board is provided on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light forward are mounted. In addition, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 can be decorated with light in any one of white, green, blue, and red, similar to the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102.

When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in a light emission effect, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 provided around the display area of the effect display device 1600 are arranged to emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. In addition, in the light emission production using the light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at predetermined timings, but even after the light emission decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off at each timing, multiple decorations are displayed. 3210 light emission is maintained. In this way, when performing a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, a history effect is created in which a plurality of decorations 3210 continuously emit light in the color immediately before that of the light guide plate 3102, as the history of the light emission color of the light guide plate 3102. Running.

Specifically, at the first or second time when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in a light emission effect, a plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are emitted with the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102, and the next time after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission. The plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are kept emitting light until the timing for emitting decoration. In addition, at the third timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, a plurality of decorative bodies 3210 are emitted with the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102, and after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. The plurality of decoration bodies 3210 continue to emit light until the display is completed. As a result, although the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light at one time, it is only a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the light guide plate 3102 emits light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102, and the plural decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same color as the light guide plate 3102. By maintaining this, even if the luminescent color is missed when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with luminescent light, the luminescent color can be grasped after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with luminescent light.

Furthermore, the number of decoration bodies 3210 is provided in a number corresponding to the number of luminescent colors that can decorate the light guide plate 3102 with luminescent effects. In addition, the number of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light is made to vary depending on the luminous color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210, and the more the light guide plate 3102 and the decorative body 3210 have a high expectation of a jackpot, the more The number of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light increases in order from the bottom of the decorative bodies 3210. Specifically, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 decorated with light emitting light in the light emitting effect is white, which is the emitting color with the lowest jackpot expectation, four lights are displayed on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600. Among the decorative bodies 3210, one of the lower decorative bodies 3210a is set to emit white light. Further, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is green, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are set to emit green light. Further, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is blue, the lower three decorative bodies 3210a to 3210c are set to emit blue light. Furthermore, when the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, which is the emitting color with the highest probability of winning a jackpot, all of the four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are set to emit red light. Thereby, even if the expected degree of jackpot cannot be determined from the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the decoration 3210, the expected degree of jackpot can be easily determined from the number of decorations 3210 that are emitting light.

Further, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102, and are capable of emitting light toward the front. When the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, a plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are emitted with the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102, but since the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 are located behind the light guide plate 3102, The light guide plate 3102 is irradiated with light not only by the plurality of LEDs for decorating the light guide plate 3102 with the first pattern 3110 but also by the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emitting light. As a result, the first pattern 3110 decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 becomes more emphasized, and the effect using the light guide plate 3102 can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, the light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102 is executed during the normal fluctuation before the reach is formed during the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern, but during the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102, Other preview effects using the effect display device 1600 are not newly started. In other words, other preview effects using the effect display device 1600 are started at a timing when the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light. As a result, although the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 does not obstruct the visibility of other preview effects, and other preview effects can be started. Even so, you won't miss it. In other words, it is possible for the player to clearly understand the light-emitting effect in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light and the other preview effects.

Next, a specific example of the effect performed by the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorations 3210 during execution of the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 221. FIG. 221 shows a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the plurality of decorations 3210 when performing the light emission effect. In addition, in FIG. 221, a second pattern 3120 is shown as a pattern in which the eyes (pupils) of a predetermined character are enlarged.

In FIG. 221, a case will be described in which a light emitting color pattern is determined in which the light emitting color for decorating the light guide plate 3102 changes from white to green to red in the light emitting effect. First, as shown in FIG. 221(A), variable display of decorative symbols is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that, as shown in FIG. 221(B), at the first timing to decorate the light guide plate 3102 with light emission, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a second pattern 3120 in white, and the effect display device 1600 Among the four decorations 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, the lower decoration 3210a emits light in white, which is the same color as the light guide plate 3102. . As shown in FIG. 221(C), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 goes out in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decoration 3210a that is already emitting white light Until the second timing, the white light emission is maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 221(D), at the second timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a second pattern 3120 in green, and the effect display device 1600 is decorated with light emission. Among the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, the lower two decorative bodies 3210a and 3210b are increased in number to emit light, but the emitted light color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits green light. As shown in FIG. 221(E), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decoration 3210 and the decoration that are already emitting green light 3210b maintains its green light emission until the third timing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 221(F), at the third time when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission in the light emission effect, the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission in red on the light guide plate 3102, and the effect display device 1600 is decorated with light emission. Among the four decorative bodies 3210 on both the left and right sides of the display area, all four decorative bodies 3210a to 3210d are increased to emit light, but the emitted light color is the same as that of the light guide plate 3102. It emits a certain red color. As shown in FIG. 221(G), the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off in a short time (for example, less than 1 second), but the decorations 3210 to 3210 that are already emitting red light As for 3210d, as shown in FIG. 221(H), the red light emission is maintained until the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

In this embodiment, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light in the light emission effect, the plurality of decorative bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminous color as the light guide plate 3102, but at that point, the light guide plate does not emit light. From the time when the light-emitting decoration 3102 is turned off, a plurality of light-emitting bodies may be made to emit light in the light-emitting color immediately before the light guide plate 3102. Even in such a case, the color of the light emitted from the light guide plate 3102 can be determined after the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light is made to vary depending on the light guide plate 3102 and the light emitting color of the decorative body 3210, and the greater the number of decorative bodies 3210 that emit light, the higher the probability of a jackpot. Although this indicates that the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light, it may also indicate the number of times the light guide plate 3102 has already been decorated with light among the three timings at which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light. For example, at the first timing to decorate the light guide plate 3102 with light emission in a light emission effect, among the four decoration bodies 3210 on each of the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 1600, one decoration body 3210a on the lower side is set to emit light. Then, at the second timing, the lower two decorations 3210a and 3210b will emit light, and at the third timing, the lower three decorations 3210a to 3210c will emit light. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission three times at predetermined timing in the light emission effect, but the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first timing, but at the second and third timings, the light guide plate 3102 A pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is not decorated with light emission or a pattern in which the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission at the first and second timings but not at the third timing may be provided. In such a case, it is not known how many times the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 will continue in the light-emitting effect, and it is also possible to draw attention to how many times the light-emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 will have a chance to change.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, a light emitting effect is performed using the light guide plate 3102 as an effect indicating the expectation level of a jackpot for the variable display of the decorative pattern. Alternatively, light emission using the light guide plate 3102 can be performed over multiple fluctuations from the time when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met) until the decorative pattern is displayed in a varying manner due to the ball entering. It may also be possible to perform a performance. For example, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met), the main control board 1310 transmits a preliminary determination command, and the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the preliminary determination command. When receiving this, it determines whether or not to perform a light emitting effect using the light guide plate 3102, and the color of the light emitted by the light guide plate 3102 when it is determined to perform a light emitting effect, based on the fluctuation pattern specified from the advance determination command. The structure may be configured so that it is determined. In addition, in a light emitting display using such a light guide plate 3102, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emitting light a plurality of times, each at a predetermined timing among multiple fluctuations, and even after the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light. The configuration may be such that the plurality of light emitters continue to emit light in the color immediately before 3102. In such a case, it is possible to draw attention with anticipation to how the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 changes over the course of multiple variations until the light emitting effect ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a light emission effect using the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first picture board 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 are made to emit light, and the first picture 3110 is decorated with light emission. However, if a failure or the like occurs and multiple LEDs stop emitting light, the light guide plate 3102 will not be decorated with light at the timing when it is decorated with light, and the expected level of jackpot indicated by the color of the light emitted will be grasped. I can't. In this regard, after the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light emission, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 emit light in the same luminescent color as the light guide plate 3102, so even if the light guide plate 3102 cannot be decorated with light emission, the plurality of decoration bodies 3210 The expectation level of a jackpot can be grasped by the emitted light color of the decorative body 3210.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an abnormality (error) occurs, a warning effect is executed to notify that the abnormality has occurred, giving priority to other effects. For example, it is determined that the game is not being played normally when a level of magnetism that attracts the game ball B is detected in the vicinity of the game area 5a, or when a predetermined vibration (impact) is detected on the game area 5a. and executes a warning effect. In this regard, if an abnormality (error) occurs at the timing when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light by executing the light emission effect, priority is given to the warning effect and the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light and the plurality of decorations 3210 are illuminated. However, when the abnormality is resolved after the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with light (before the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern ends), the plurality of decorations 3210 are made to start emitting light. There is. In this way, even if the warning effect is executed with priority over the light emission effect, the expectation level of a jackpot can be grasped based on the emitted light color of the plurality of decorations 3210 after the abnormality is resolved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the expectation level of a jackpot is suggested by the light emitting color of the light guide plate 3102 and the emitting color of the plurality of decorations 3210 in the light emitting effect and the history effect. The configuration may be such that the set value is suggested based on the emitted light color of the light guide plate 3102 or the emitted light color of the plurality of decorations 3210. In such a configuration, for example, when determining a luminescent color pattern from a luminescent color pattern table, as a result of the luminescent color of the light guide plate 3102 changing to the end, the set value is higher in the order of white → green → blue → red. You can set it to indicate that. In other words, among the setting suggestion effects, a high setting suggestion effect executes a light emission pattern in which the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 is red, and a low setting suggestion effect executes a light emission pattern in which the final emission color of the light guide plate 3102 becomes red. What is necessary is to execute a light emission pattern that becomes white. As a result, if the light guide plate 3102 or the plural decorations 3210 are decorated with a light emitting color that suggests a high setting value, the player's response to the high setting value (setting value 6) Expectations can be raised.

[19. Regarding image production similar to light-emitting decoration of light guide plate]
In this embodiment, a light guide plate 3102 is provided in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600. By displaying a pattern in a visual recognition mode similar to the pattern decorated with light emitting light on the light plate 3102, it is possible to perform an imitation effect that makes it appear as if there are a plurality of light guide plates. In this imitation effect, a pattern that is decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 and a pattern that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and by finally displaying one of the patterns, , the reach effect executed after that is different.

Specifically, when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 (starting conditions are met), a variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control board 1310. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command in the command analysis process of step S601, a variation pattern is identified from the variation pattern command, but a variation pattern for executing the first reach effect is identified. In this case, the pattern to be decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and finally the pattern is decorated with light on the light guide plate 3102. By executing the performance, the first reach performance is then proceeded to. On the other hand, when a variation pattern for executing the second reach effect is specified, the pattern decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. By finally executing an imitation performance in which a pattern is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600, the second ready-to-reach performance is then proceeded to.

The imitation performance described above is executed during the normal variation before the reach is formed during the variation display of the decorative symbols. Moreover, the first reach effect among the reach effects is set so that the jackpot expectation level is higher than the second reach effect. As a result, in the imitation performance during normal fluctuations, when the light guide plate 3102 is finally decorated with a pattern that emits light, it will progress to the first reach performance with a high expectation of jackpot, so the pattern will eventually be displayed on the light guide plate 3102. It is possible to draw attention to whether or not the light is decorated with light.

Next, the patterns displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 during execution of the imitation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 shows a pattern displayed on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when the imitation effect is executed. In addition, in FIG. 222, the second pattern 3120 is shown as a pattern consisting of the characters "CHANCE!".

As shown in FIG. 222(A), the light guide plate 3102 during the execution of the imitation performance has a second pattern 3120 with the text "CHANCE!" in the center and an effect pattern around it decorated with light emitting light. . Note that the first pattern 3110 can be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 disposed above the light guide plate 3102; Although it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 disposed on the left side of the second pattern when viewed from the front, it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light emitting light. In this case, only the luminescent decoration of the second pattern 3120 is used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 222(B), in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the imitation effect, the characters "LUCKY!" are displayed in the center as an imitation pattern 1600a, and an effect pattern is displayed around it. it's shown. Although it is possible to display a moving image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, during execution of the imitation effect, a still image is displayed like the imitation pattern 1600a described above.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the words "CHANCE!" as a second pattern 3120, while the characters "LUCKY!" are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as the imitation pattern 1600a. However, the characters of the imitation pattern 1600a have the same line thickness, font type, and size as the characters of the second pattern 3120. In this way, in the imitation effects, since the characters have the same form, it can be difficult to determine which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is being used.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with an effect pattern as a second pattern 3120, while the effect pattern is displayed as an imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect pattern that is a part is the same as the effect pattern that is a part of the second pattern 3120. In this way, in the imitation presentation, since the effect pattern is displayed in common as part of each pattern, it can be made difficult to grasp which of the light guide plate 3102 and the presentation display device 1600 is being used.

Further, on the light guide plate 3102, a second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emitting light in a single color using a plurality of LEDs, whereas an imitation pattern 1600a is similarly displayed in a single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the light guide plate 3102, when the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light, the light emission decoration of the second pattern 3120 has shading depending on the distance from the plurality of LEDs. The pattern 1600a is displayed with shading. Furthermore, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with the second pattern 3120, a black image without any information is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area, a black image is displayed as the background image. In this way, in the imitation performance, since the visual recognition mode of the pattern is the same as a whole, it can be made difficult to grasp whether the light guide plate 3102 or the performance display device 1600 is being used.

Further, the light guide plate 3102 is located in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the size of the light guide plate 3102 is configured to be larger than the display area of the effect display device 1600. The region 3102 where the second pattern 3120 is illuminated and decorated is approximately the same as the region where the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this manner, in the imitation effect, since the areas in which the patterns are displayed are approximately the same, it can be difficult to determine which of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is being used.

In addition, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 that is decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed. The time is the same for both. Furthermore, during execution of the imitation effect, predetermined audio is output from the speaker at the timing when the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a are displayed, and the surroundings of the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 are displayed. Although a complex performance is performed in which the installed members are operated in a predetermined manner (for example, lighting of lamps provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5, movement of movable members, etc.), Even at the timing of displaying the picture, a common effect is executed as a composite effect. However, at the timing of displaying the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, the lamps provided on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are lit, but the emitted light colors are different. It's okay. In this way, in the imitation performance, there is no difference in performance between when the second pattern 3120 is used as a light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate 3102 and when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600. This can make it difficult to determine which of the light plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 is being used.

Next, a specific example of the performance on the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 when performing the imitation performance will be described with reference to FIG. 223. FIG. 223 shows a specific example of the effect on the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 when performing the imitation effect. In addition, in FIG. 223, the second pattern 3120 is shown as a pattern consisting of the characters "CHANCE!".

In FIG. 223, a variation pattern is determined to perform either a chance reach performance as the first reach performance or a lucky reach performance as the second reach performance, and an imitation performance is performed before executing these reach performances. We will explain when to execute it. First, as shown in FIG. 223(A), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, variable display of decorative symbols is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 223(B), when the imitation performance is started, the light guide plate 3102 has the text "CHANCE!" in the center as a second pattern 3120, and an effect pattern is placed around it for a predetermined period of time ( (for example, less than 1 second), the display is decorated with red light. Then, as shown in FIG. 223(C), when the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3102 is turned off, the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the imitation pattern 1600a along with the words "LUCKY!" in the center. An effect pattern is displayed in blue around the area for a predetermined period of time (for example, less than 1 second). Note that the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102.

As described above, while the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. In this manner, in the imitation performance, the light guide plate 3102 and the performance display device 1600 are Although it is difficult to determine which one is being used, it is possible to determine from the display color whether the second pattern 3120 or the imitation pattern 1600a is being displayed.

In addition, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately repeated a plurality of times (for example, 5 times). However, after the display is repeated multiple times, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out and a black image that does not display any information is displayed, as shown in FIG. 223(D). There is. This makes it possible to draw attention to which of the second pattern 3120, which is decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the presentation display device 1600, stops as a result of the imitation presentation. can.

As shown in FIG. 223(E), after blacking out the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the light guide plate 3102 is decorated with a second pattern 3120 that emits light in red, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern can reach After forming, the chance reach effect (first reach effect) will proceed as the reach effect corresponding to the second symbol 3120. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 223(F), when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600 after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. After the reach is formed, the lucky reach effect (second reach effect) will proceed as the reach effect corresponding to the imitation pattern 1600a. Furthermore, the display time for displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 223(F) is also the same as the display time for displaying the second pattern 3120 on the light guide plate 3102 in FIG. 223(E). (for example, 3 seconds).

Note that in this embodiment, characters and effect patterns are displayed using the second pattern 3120 that is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is only necessary to display patterns that are similar in visual recognition so that they match in terms of elements. For example, a pattern of a character with a similar drawing style may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102, and the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. However, after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, neither the second pattern 3120 nor the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed, and the first reach effect and the second You may set a pattern that does not proceed in any way with the reach effect. In such a case, it is possible to draw even more attention to what kind of result will be notified after the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out as a result of the imitation effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, at the start of the imitation performance, the second pattern 3120 that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are selected. Although the pattern starts from the light emitting decoration 3120, a pattern may be set that starts from displaying the imitation pattern 1600a. In addition, in the imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emitting light in red on the light guide plate 3102, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. When the color is generated, a pattern may be set in which a different color is used. In this way, when an imitation performance is performed with a display or color different from normal, the expectation level of jackpot for the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is set to be high, so that the light emitting decoration on the light guide plate 3102 is It is possible to attract attention not only to which one of the two patterns 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 stops, but also to the contents of the effect.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the imitation performance is executed, the second pattern 3120 that is decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a that is displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 are alternately displayed. However, in addition to imitation effects, effects using the light guide plate 3102 are also performed. For example, as a performance other than the imitation performance using the light guide plate 3102, a performance in which the second pattern 3120 is suddenly decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 is performed without displaying the imitation pattern 1600a in the display area of the performance display device 1600. can do.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the imitation performance, the second pattern 3120 is illuminated in red on the light guide plate 3102, whereas the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition to this pattern, there is a pattern in which the second pattern 3120 is decorated with light emitting light in blue on the light guide plate 3102 so as to reverse the color development, while the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in red. It is set. In these patterns, red color indicates that the expectation of jackpot is higher than blue color, and for example, when the second pattern 3120 is decorated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, it is more likely to hit the jackpot than when it is decorated with blue light. Similarly, when the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in red in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is notified that the expectation level is higher than when it is displayed in blue. In this manner, in the imitation effect, since it is possible to display both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a in blue and red, it is possible to display both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a in blue and red. This can make it difficult to understand whether the user is using the

Further, in this embodiment, as an imitation effect, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 and the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are alternately displayed, and the final By displaying one of the symbols, it suggests the reach effect that will be executed later, but by executing the imitation effect as the setting suggestion effect mentioned above and finally displaying one of the symbols, , the setting value may be suggested. In such a configuration, for example, as a high setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects, an imitation effect is executed in which the second pattern 3120 is finally decorated with red light on the light guide plate 3102, and as a low setting suggestion effect, the final imitation effect is executed. What is necessary is to execute an imitation effect in which the imitation pattern 1600a is displayed in blue in the display area of the effect display device 1600. As a result, when the second pattern 3120 is finally decorated with red light on the light guide plate 3102 during execution of the imitation effect, the player's expectations for the high setting value (setting value 6) can be increased.

Further, in this embodiment, in the light guide plate 3102, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern board 3103 arranged above the light guide plate 3102 are made to emit light, so that the first pattern 3110 can be decorated with light. On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the second pattern 3120 with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the second pattern board 3104 disposed on the left side when viewed from the front; The player can change the setting of the brightness by operating the press operation section 303. In other words, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be weak, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 becomes a dark display mode, whereas the brightness of the plurality of LEDs is set to be strong. When set, the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emission on the light guide plate 3102 becomes a bright display mode. In the imitation effect, when the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 is in a dark display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a dark display mode. On the other hand, when the second pattern 3120 decorated with light emitting light on the light guide plate 3102 is in a bright display mode, the imitation pattern 1600a displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a bright display mode. In this way, in the imitation effect, since the effect is executed so that the brightness corresponds to both the second pattern 3120 and the imitation pattern 1600a, the light guide plate 3102 and the effect display device 1600 This can make it difficult to understand whether the user is using the Note that when adjusting the brightness, when the player operates the press operation unit 303, the settings for both the brightness of the plurality of LEDs on the light guide plate 3102 and the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 are changed. Good too.

[20. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, some of the various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 224 to 226. FIG. 224 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIGS. 225 and 226 show continuations of the various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 224. It's a table.

[20-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands have a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 224 to 226, they have a status indicating the type of command that has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), It consists of a mode that shows variations of effects and has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

In addition, various commands include, as shown in Figures 224 to 226, special figure 1 synchronized performance related, special figure 2 synchronized performance related, jackpot related, power on, general pattern synchronized performance related, normal electric role performance related, notification display. , status display, and others.

[20-1-1. Special figure 1 synchronized production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named ``Start synchronized performance'', ``Specify special pattern 1'', ``End special pattern 1 synchronized performance'', and ``Specify state during fluctuation''. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 1 synchronized performance start command (variation pattern command) is to instruct the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 designation command is used for winning, specific jackpot, The command specifies a non-specific jackpot, the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronized performance, and the variable state designation command instructs the gaming state. The gaming state is composed of a time saving state indicating that the game is in a time saving state, a definite variable state indicating that it is a variable probability state, and a normal state indicating that it is neither the time saving state nor the variable probability state. has been done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special figure 1 synchronized performance start command (variable pattern command) and a special figure 1 synchronized performance end command are provided for each set value of the pachinko machine 1. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 1 synchronized production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronized production end command, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 1 synchronized production start command (fluctuation pattern command) and the special figure 1 synchronized production end command to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Select and send a command according to the stored setting values. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the peripheral control board 1510 can Setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically sent to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 side can grasp the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. It looks like this.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 variation starts, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts, and the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is sent when the special symbol 1 synchronization production starts. The performance end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[20-1-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named ``Start synchronized performance'', ``Specify special pattern 2'', and ``End special pattern 2 synchronized performance''. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special pattern 2 synchronized performance start command (variation pattern command) is to instruct the start of the special pattern synchronized performance with the performance pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 designation command is used for winning, specific jackpot, This is to designate a non-specific jackpot, and the special figure 2 synchronized performance end command is to instruct the end of the special figure 2 synchronized performance.

In addition, similar to the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command (fluctuating pattern command) and special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command (variable pattern command) and special figure 2 synchronized performance end command are applied to the pachinko machine 1. is provided for each setting value, and when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 2 synchronized production start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronized production end command, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM is provided. A command corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area is selected and transmitted. It should be noted that the special figure 2 synchronized performance (fluctuation performance of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004) is mainly performed in the probability change state and the time saving state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by changing the modes of the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command (variation pattern command) and the special figure 2 synchronized performance end command that have been used conventionally, the peripheral control board 1510 can control the pachinko The setting value information of the machine 1 can be transmitted, and the setting value information is periodically transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 even in the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the peripheral control board 1510 side controls the pachinko machine 1. The setting values can be understood.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 variation starts, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts, and the special pattern 2 synchronization production start command is sent when the special pattern 2 synchronization production starts. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variable time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in Figure 224, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot opening 1 Nth opening display, jackpot opening 1 closing display, jackpot opening 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and small jack opening. It consists of commands named , small win release display, small win count display, and small win ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of the jackpot opening, and the display command for the Nth opening of jackpot opening 1 in rounds 1 to 15 (the Nth round of jackpot opening 2005). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command instructs the closing of the grand prize opening 1 between rounds (opening or starting to close the grand prize opening 2005 between rounds). The big winning hole 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls B with a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403). The jackpot ending command instructs to start the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs to display jackpot symbol information.

In addition, the small win opening command instructs the start of the small win opening, and the small win opening display command instructs the start of the small win opening (during the opening of the accessory prize opening 2006 or the start of opening at the time of the small win). The small win count display command is used to display the small hit medium/large prize opening winning presentation (during the small winning, when the game ball B that enters the accessory prize opening 2006 is detected by the accessory prize winning opening sensor 2513 The V passing command is used to instruct the V winning opening winning presentation (game ball B that won the accessory winning opening 2006 during the small hit will enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008). The small win ending command instructs the start of the small win ending. In addition, the V passing command corresponding to the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 (the first V winning hole command when the game ball B is detected by the first V winning hole 2007, the second A second V winning hole command for when the game ball B is detected by the V winning hole 2008 may be provided.

Regarding the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 15th rounds (big winning slot 2005). The grand prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the grand prize opening 1 is closed (starting closing of the grand prize opening 2005), and the grand prize opening 1 count display command is sent when the grand prize opening 1 is closed. Transmitted when the winning hole 1 is opened and when the count changes to the big winning hole 1 (when the big winning hole 2005 is opened and when the game ball B that entered the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403) The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot opening is opened (when the jackpot opening 2005 is opened).

In addition, the small winning opening command is sent when the small winning opening starts, and the small winning opening display command is sent when the small winning opens (when the accessory prize opening 2006 is opened at the time of small winning), and the small winning count is displayed. The command is sent when the small hit medium/large prize opening is won (when the game ball B that entered the accessory winning hole 2006 is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2513 during the small winning), and is sent as the small winning ending command. is sent at the start of the small winning ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-4. Power on]
As shown in Figure 225, the power-on classification includes names such as power-on state, main control return destination at power-on, setting key ON operation command, setting key OFF operation command, setting change command, and error display command. It consists of commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used to control the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. Information that instructs when the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, there is also information when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). ) includes information indicating which state to return to among the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

In addition, when creating the model code of a pachinko machine, for example, when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, it is necessary to check which work's copyright it corresponds to, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation In addition to game specifications in which when a jackpot game state occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game in which probability fluctuations occur with the number of changes in the special symbol being limited (for example, 30 or 70 times). This specifies whether the pachinko machine has a plurality of setting values or only one setting value. In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine includes the series code to identify the machine type among the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, and the series code to identify the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, in addition to the game specifications that when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, the probability change with a limited number of changes of special symbols) It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the following occurs, and a setting value code for determining whether the pachinko machine 1 has one or more setting values.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412, and information instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414 and the accessory winning port solenoid 2512.

The setting key ON operation command instructs to check the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the control built-in RAM, and the setting key OFF operation command instructs to check the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the control built-in RAM. This indicates that confirmation of the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area has been completed.

The setting change command is used to instruct the changed setting value and the fact that the setting value has been changed. In this example, setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 can be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 by changing the mode of the setting change command, and the peripheral control board 1510 side controls the pachinko machine according to the received setting change command. The setting values of machine 1 can be grasped. Note that the setting change command may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on, regardless of whether or not the setting value has been changed, or if the setting value has not been changed when the power is turned on, the current setting value may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Alternatively, a setting notification command may be sent to instruct. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to know the latest setting values every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

The error display command indicates that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM.

The transmission timing for these commands is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, it also includes when the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous power outage occurs). Specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when the machine recovers from a power outage or instantaneous power failure, the main control built-in RAM sends the command by setting a reservation for the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side game control main processing. The command is stored in the information storage area, and the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-5. Futu synchronization related]
The normal pattern synchronization performance related is based on the detection signal from the normal winning hole sensor 2401, and as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named , common pattern designation, common pattern synchronization performance end, and state specification during fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The common pattern synchronization performance start command (common pattern variation pattern command) instructs the start of the common pattern synchronization performance with the production pattern specified in the mode (common pattern fluctuation pattern), and the general pattern designation command A jackpot or a non-specific jackpot is specified, a general pattern synchronized performance end command is used to instruct the completion of a general pattern synchronized performance, and a fluctuation state specification command is used to designate a gaming state. Note that, as described above, the gaming state includes a time saving state indicating that the game is in the time saving state, and a normal state indicating that the time saving state is not present.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the common pattern synchronization effect start command is sent at the start of normal pattern fluctuation, the common pattern designation command is sent immediately after the basic pattern synchronization effect starts, and the general pattern synchronization effect end command is: Normally, it is sent when the symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the fluctuation state designation command is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning/losing information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric role effect related is related to the second starting door 2411 that is moved forward and backward by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2412, and its classification includes, as shown in FIG. 225, normal electric opening, normal electric open display, It consists of a command named ``Fuzu Hitori Ending''. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general power opening command is for instructing the start of normal power opening, and the general power release display command is for starting during normal power opening (the second starting port door 2411 is protruded forward by the activation of the starting port solenoid 2412). The ending command for normal drawings instructs the start of the ending for normal drawings.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal power opening command is sent at the start of normal power opening, and the normal power release display command is transmitted when the general power is released (when the second starting port door 2411 drives the starting port solenoid 2412). (when the robot protrudes forward), and the normal pattern ending command is sent when the normal pattern ending starts. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[20-1-10. others]
Other classifications include, as shown in Figure 226, starting opening winning, variation reduction operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type pre-reading, variation pattern pre-reading 1, variation pattern pre-reading 2, variation pattern It is composed of commands named pre-reading 3, variable pattern pre-reading 4, variable pattern pre-reading 5, variable pattern pre-reading 6, normal winning opening winning, and normal symbol storage. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). (This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The starting hole winning command instructs the start of the starting hole winning performance, and starts the performance when the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002. and the start of the performance when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402.The fluctuation reduction operation end designation command is , which instructs the state transition from the fluctuation reduction operating state to the fluctuation reduction non-operation state. The first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (pending number) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the special symbol 2 memory command is used to display special symbol 2 pending 0. ~4 pieces (game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 indicates the number of balls that have not been used yet (pending number)) The special symbol type pre-read command reads in advance and pre-reads the special symbol 1 pending before the special symbol 1 pending is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The display results (losing symbols, jackpot symbols) on the first special symbol display and the special symbol 2 pending are pre-read before they are used for the variable display of special symbols on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The results displayed by the second special symbol display based on the special symbol 2 reservation (small winning symbol, jackpot symbol) are respectively specified.

Further, the variable pattern pre-reading command 1 to the variable pattern pre-reading command 6 pre-read the special symbol before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. The variation pattern used in the variation display of the special symbol based on the 1 hold and the special symbol 2 reserve is read in advance and the special symbol is The variable pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the symbol 2 hold is specified, and the variable pattern pre-read command 1 is a command according to the setting value 1 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variable pattern pre-read command 2 is a command according to the setting value 2 of the pachinko machine 1, the variable pattern pre-reading command 3 is a command corresponding to the setting value 3 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variable pattern pre-reading command 4 is a command according to the setting value 4 of the pachinko machine 1. The variable pattern pre-reading command 5 is a command corresponding to the setting value 5 of the pachinko machine 1, and the variable pattern pre-reading command 6 is a command corresponding to the setting value 6 of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, commands including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 described above (special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, setting change command) ) is just an example, and other commands may also be provided for each set value.

In addition, the normal winning hole winning command is for instructing the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is for instructing the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003. The number of balls (pending number) which has not yet been used is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in the variable display of the normal symbols.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting hole winning command is transmitted at the time of starting hole winning (when game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, or when the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002) When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, the notification to that effect is mainly made by voice from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the failure stop period has elapsed), and the special symbol 1 memory command is sent when the special symbol 1 memory command is sent. 1 When the number of reserved balls changes (when game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of reserved balls increases, or from the number of reserved balls, it is used to display changes in special symbols on the first special symbol display. The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls changes when the special symbol 2 is activated (when the number of reserved balls increases after game ball B enters the second starting port 2004). , when the number of reserved balls is decreased by using the second special symbol display to display a variable number of special symbols), and the special symbol type look-ahead command is sent when special symbols 1 and 2 activate the number of reserved balls. (when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the number of reservations increases), and the variable pattern pre-reading command is sent immediately after the special symbol type pre-reading command is sent. Ru. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

In addition, the normal winning hole winning command is sent when the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of normal symbols activated pending balls changes (when the game ball B is received into the normal winning hole 2003). This message is sent when the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the normal symbol display to display fluctuations in normal symbols from the number of reservations. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as mentioned above, the starting hole winning command is used when the starting hole is won (when the game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 3002, or when the second starting hole is won). When the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402), the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main body frame speaker 622 mainly notify the effect by voice. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the main body frame speaker 622 are used not only to notify by voice, but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, other pachinko machines have specifications in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the starting opening winning command, but does not notify the machine by voice from the top center speaker, top side speaker, or body frame speaker 622.

[21. Setting information error notification]
Next, processing is performed to notify when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal based on a command that includes setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 among the various commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 described above. I will explain about it. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting information determination process executed when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310 in the received command analysis process (step S1022).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting information determination process, it determines whether a setting abnormality notification flag, which will be described later, is set (step S1500). The setting abnormality notification flag is a flag that is set when a setting value abnormality is notified. If the setting abnormality notification flag is set in step S1500, it is determined that a setting value abnormality is being notified, and the process proceeds to step S1507. If the setting abnormality notification flag is not set in step S1500, the setting value abnormality is detected. It is determined that the notification has not been made and the process advances to step S1501.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the received command is the above setting change command (step S1501), and if the setting change command is received, the pachinko machine indicated by the setting change command is The setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is stored in the setting information storage area based on the setting value information of 1 (step S1502), and the process ends. As a result, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 that were set when the power was turned on are stored in the setting information storage area, and the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side.

In addition, if the received command is not the above setting change command (in this example, special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, variation pattern If prefetch command 1 to variable pattern prefetch command 6 are received), the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502. (step S1504), and if they do not match, it is notified that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information (step S1504), and a setting abnormality notification flag indicating that an abnormality in the setting value information is being reported is set. is set, and the process ends (step S1505).

Further, if it is determined in step S1500 that the setting abnormality notification flag is set, that is, if the setting value information is being notified of an abnormality, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command and the setting value information in step S1502 are set. It is determined whether or not the setting value information stored in the information storage area matches (step S1507), and if they do not match, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is continued.

On the other hand, if the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the received command matches the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area in step S1502, the abnormal notification of the setting value information is ended (step S1508). , resets the setting abnormality notification flag and ends the process (step S1509).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, by sending a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed on the peripheral control board 1510 side. If there is an abnormality in the setting value information indicated by the command containing the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310, specifically, if the setting value information has not gone through normal processing (setting value change processing). Regardless, if the setting value is changed, it is determined that an error or fraud has occurred, and a process is executed to notify that fact. Note that the game continues even while the setting value information abnormality is being reported, and the effect display device 1600 executes variable effects and the like. Therefore, the abnormality notification of the setting value information is performed so as not to interfere with the execution of the variable performance executed by the performance display device 1600. Specifically, there is control to display "Setting Abnormality!" etc. in an area that does not overlap with the variable effect being executed on the effect display device 1600, and a control that allows the variable effect being executed on the effect display device 1600 to be visually recognized. Control for translucently displaying "Setting error!" etc. in the area that overlaps with the variable effect, control for outputting "Setting error has occurred" audibly from the top center speaker, top side speaker, and body frame speaker 622, Game board 5 Controlling the lamps, LEDs, etc. provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined manner (for example, flashing red), etc., or a combination of one or more of these controls is executed.

Note that if there is an abnormality in the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be executed or the abnormality notification of the setting value information may be executed. In addition, the system prevents the performance that suggests the setting values of Pachinko machine 1, which will be described later, from being executed, and if the performance that suggests the setting values of Pachinko machine 1 is being executed, the execution of this performance is stopped. You may also do so. That is, a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 may be affected by noise or the like, and the setting value information indicated by this command may change to an abnormal value, or the peripheral control board 1510 may The settings of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the command sent from the main control board 1310 may be changed due to the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area changing to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise etc. When there is an abnormality in the consistency between the value information and the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510, if a performance suggesting the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed, the reliability of this performance will be reduced. descend. Therefore, in such a case, it may be possible to prevent the performance that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 from being executed, and also to stop the performance if it is currently being executed to suppress the decrease in reliability. .

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information, and in this case, it is possible to stop the game when an abnormality occurs in the setting value information. You may also do so. For example, when a setting value is changed in a setting value change process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stores the setting value in a reference area different from the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. also stores the changed setting value, and stores the setting value in the setting value dedicated area at any timing (for example, the timing of sending the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command or the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, etc.) and for reference. It may be determined whether or not the setting values stored in the area match, and if it is determined that they do not match, the game may be stopped and an abnormality notification of the setting value information may be performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after starting the notification of an abnormality in the setting value information, when the abnormality is resolved, the notification of the abnormality in the setting value information is automatically ended without any operation by the game store clerk. Therefore, if a command containing setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 sent from the main control board 1310 is changed to an abnormal value due to the influence of noise, etc., the command that includes the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is changed to an abnormal value, the command is stored in the setting information storage area. After starting the abnormal notification of the setting value information due to the setting value information not matching, if a command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received in a normal state, the setting value information is immediately set. It is possible to terminate abnormal notification of value information.

Note that in the above example, when a setting value is changed in the setting change process, a setting change command indicating the changed setting value is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting value specified by the command is transferred to the peripheral control board 1510 side. The configuration is configured to determine whether an abnormality has occurred in the setting value information depending on whether or not it matches the stored setting value. The determination method is not limited to this. For example, when a command including setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 is received from the main control board 1310, the setting value information indicated by the command and the setting indicated by the previously received command including the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 It may be determined whether or not the values match, and if they do not match, an abnormality of the setting value information may be notified. In this case, when a setting change command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on a change in the setting value is received, an abnormality notification of the setting value information may not be performed.

In addition, in connection with the variable performance, the main control board 1310 sends commands containing setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 multiple times, and if at least some of the commands do not match, an abnormality of the setting value information is notified. You may also do so. Specifically, the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 indicated by the above-mentioned special figure 1 synchronized performance start command and special figure 2 synchronized performance start command and the special figure 1 synchronized performance end command and special figure 2 synchronized performance end command It may be determined whether or not the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 matches, and if the setting value information does not match, an abnormality of the setting value information may be notified.

In addition, in the above example, the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, and variable pattern look ahead command are set to the pachinko machine 1 setting values. However, if the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is to be notified from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 can be sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The command to notify is provided separately from the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, and variation pattern look ahead command, and the main control Whenever a command is sent from the board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, or when a specific command is sent, a command for notifying the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 may also be sent. For example, setting notification command 1 to setting notification command 6 that notify setting value information of pachinko machine 1 are provided, and the setting notification command (setting value 1 If so, setting notification command 1, setting value 2, setting notification command 2, setting value 6, setting notification command 6) may be sent to the peripheral control board 1510. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the command design for each model (one with multiple setting values and one with only one setting value), and the design effort can be saved.

In this case, commands (for example, a special figure 1 synchronized performance start command, a special figure 1 synchronized performance end command, Special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, special figure 2 synchronized performance end command, variable pattern pre-reading command, etc.) are not limited to the transmission of commands that are not involved in the performance executed by the performance display device 1600 (for example, normal winning opening winning command, etc.) ), a command to notify the setting information of the pachinko machine 1 is also sent, and the setting value information indicated by the command is consistent with the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. It may be determined whether or not there is an abnormality. With this configuration, it is possible to frequently determine whether or not the setting value information stored in the setting information storage area of the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal, thereby avoiding problems caused by noise etc. The accuracy can be further improved.

[22. Pending notice performance]
Next, the pending notice effect will be explained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the first hold memory number changes based on the entry of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, the command (first hold memory number) instructing the first hold memory number changes. Set the number designation command 0 to 4) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 to display the first pending memory number on the production display device 1600, and based on the fact that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. When the second pending memory number changes, a command (second pending number designation command 0 to 1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0 to 1)) instructing the second pending memory number is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The second pending storage number is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is determined that the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, and based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402. When the above-mentioned special symbol type pre-reading command and variable pattern pre-reading command are received from the main control board 1310 based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the special symbol type pre-reading command and the variable pattern pre-reading command are executed. The display modes of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed in accordance with the special lottery results for which the start of suggestion is suspended based on the special lottery results. It is now possible to execute a pending notice performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot at the time of execution of the suggestion.

In this example, the first pending memory number instructed by the first pending number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 or the second pending memory number instructed by the second pending number storage command, the variable pattern look-ahead command, and the special Peripheral control board 1510 according to each of the advance determination information (loss, small hit, jackpot, etc., or information that can notify the type of jackpot such as probability variable jackpot or normal jackpot) instructed by the symbol type look-ahead command. is equipped with a pending notice determination table for determining the presence or absence of a pending notice and the type of pending notice pattern when executing a pending notice.

Then, when a decision is made to execute a suspension notice and the type of suspension notice pattern to be executed is determined, the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed from normal ones. Display in a display mode (in this example, a display color different from normal). In this example, the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are normally displayed in white, which is the basic color, and when a pending notice is to be executed, they are displayed in blue, green, red, or a ladybug pattern. do. Furthermore, the display modes of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern.

In addition, when it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot as preliminary judgment information, a pending notice pattern with a high probability of a jackpot (for example, red color or a ladybug pattern) is determined as the final pending display mode with a high probability. When it is determined that the lottery result is a loss as judgment information, the final pending display pattern is determined with a high probability to have a low jackpot expectation (for example, blue). When a mode in which the jackpot expectation level is high is displayed, the player's expectation level for the jackpot gaming state increases.

In addition, in the hold notice pattern, every time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)) during the execution of the hold notice effect (each time the hold is expired), the effect is displayed. It is set how the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the device 1600 will change. In addition, in the suspension notice pattern, the display mode of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is reversed from the order of white → blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. It is set so that the order does not change (that is, the jackpot expectation level does not decrease), and every time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)), the suspension is The display mode of the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change) or becomes a mode with high expectation of jackpot. It is set as follows. Therefore, even if the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are displayed on the production display device 1600 in a display mode with low expectation of jackpot, the suggestion of the special lottery result that is the target of the pending notice starts. Until the end, there remains a possibility that the mode of the pending display changes to a mode with a high expectation of a jackpot, and it is possible to draw attention to the mode of the pending display with anticipation until the end.

In addition, the suspension notice pattern does not necessarily require displaying the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a in white (basic color) and then changing them in the order of blue → green → red → ladybug pattern. Start from an intermediate display mode (for example, display the first pending memory 1700c in red based on the fact that the game ball B entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002 ), the display mode changes to the next one without going through the intermediate display modes (for example, when the first reservation memory 1700d is displayed in white, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result is displayed. It is also set so that when the first pending memory 1700d is moved to the first pending memory 1700c in response to the start of the first pending memory 1700c, the color changes from white to a ladybug pattern. For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (number of reservations) for the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a to change, the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memories 1700a to 1701a are Two pending memories 1701a can be displayed. In addition, even if the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with low jackpot expectation, it is impossible to predict which display mode will change next, and the first It is possible to draw attention to the display modes of the pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a with anticipation until the end.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, together with the above-mentioned pending notice effect suggesting the jackpot expectation level, or independently, the display mode of the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a is changed to a display mode different from the above-mentioned pending notice. By changing the setting value to , it is possible to execute a setting value suspension suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 determines the presence or absence of setting value retention suggestion performance and executes the setting value retention suggestion performance in accordance with the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the fluctuation pattern prereading command transmitted from the main control board 1310. A setting value suspension suggestion determination table is provided for determining the setting value suspension suggestion pattern type in the case of a setting value suspension suggestion pattern type. Then, when a decision is made to execute the setting value suspension suggestion performance and the type of setting value suspension suggestion pattern to be executed is determined, the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a are displayed on the performance display device 1600. is displayed in a different display mode than usual (in this example, in a different shape from normal).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 228(A), the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are normally displayed as a circle, which is the basic shape, and when performing the setting value pending suggestion effect, It is displayed as a square shown in the first reservation memory 1700c in FIG. 228(B), a triangle shown in 1700c in FIG. 228(C), or a star shown in 1701a in FIG. 228(D). Furthermore, the display modes of the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are such that the degree of expectation for the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 (the degree of expectation for the high setting value) increases in the order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set as follows.

In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 5 or 6 based on the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, the setting value is held in a manner with high expectations for the high setting value (for example, a star) as the final pending display mode. When the suggested pattern is determined with a high probability and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 3 or 4, the setting value is such that the final pending display mode is a mode (for example, a triangle) in which the degree of expectation for the high setting value is medium. When the hold suggestion pattern is determined with a high probability and the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is specified as 1 or 2, the setting value is such that the final hold display mode has the lowest expectation level for the high setting value (for example, a square) By determining the hold suggestion pattern with a high probability, when a mode with high expectations for the high set value is displayed as the final hold display mode, the player's expectation level for the high set value increases. There is.

In addition, in the set value retention suggestion pattern, each time a special lottery result suggestion (fluctuating display of decorative symbols (fluctuating display of special symbols)) is performed while the set value retention suggestion effect is being executed (each time the retention is ), it is set how the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 will change. In addition, in the set value retention suggestion pattern, the display mode of the first retention memories 1700a to 1700d and the second retention memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is in the reverse order from the order of circle → square → triangle → star. It is set so that it does not change (that is, the expectation level for the high set value does not decrease), and each time a special lottery result is suggested (variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols)), the suspension is (each time) the display mode of the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained (the display mode does not change), or the expectation level for the high setting value is It is set to have a high aspect. Therefore, even if the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode in which expectations for high setting values are low, special Until the suggestion of the lottery result starts, there is a possibility that the pending display mode will change to a mode with high expectations for the high set value, and it is not possible to draw attention to the pending display mode until the end with anticipation. can.

In addition, the setting value retention suggestion pattern does not necessarily require displaying the first retention memories 1700a to 1700d and the second retention memory 1701a in a circle (basic shape) and then changing them in the order of square → triangle → star; Starting from the display mode (for example, displaying the first pending memory 1700d as a square based on the fact that the game ball B entered the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002), Changes to the next display mode without going through the intermediate display modes (for example, when the first reserved memory 1700d is displayed as a square, the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts) It is also set so that when moving the first pending memory 1700d to the first pending memory 1700c, the square changes to a star). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of reservations) to change the display format of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a, the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700a are displayed in a display format with high expectations for the high setting value. 1700d and second reserved memory 1701a can be displayed. Furthermore, even if the first reserved memories 1700a to 1700d and the second reserved memory 1701a are displayed in a display mode with low expectations for the high setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode will change next. , it is possible to draw attention to the display modes of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a with anticipation until the end.

Furthermore, since the pending notice pattern of the above-mentioned pending notice performance and the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestion performance are determined separately, the number displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the pending notice pattern of the held notice performance is determined separately. The display modes of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are changed to a mode with high expectations for the high set value, and the settings are displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the setting value pending suggestion pattern of the setting value pending suggestion effect. When changing the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a to a mode with high expectations for the high setting value, and when changing the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a to a mode with high expectation level for the high setting value, and when changing the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a, the display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold notice pattern of the hold notice effect. The effect display device 1600 changes the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a high setting value, while changing the display mode of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a to a mode with a high degree of expectation for a high setting value. When maintaining the display mode of the first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a displayed on the screen, and the first pending memories 1700a to 1700a to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pending notice pattern of the pending notice effect. The first pending memories 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a are displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the setting value holding suggestion pattern of the setting value holding suggestion effect while maintaining the display mode of the setting value holding memory 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a. There is a case where the display mode of the setting value is changed to a mode with high expectations for the high setting value.

For example, when the display mode of the suspension notice effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value suspension suggestion effect is "circle," the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the When moving the second hold memory 1701a, the display mode of the hold notice effect is changed from ``white'' to ``red'', and the display form of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed from ``circle'' to ``square'' (color and shape first suspension memory 1700a that is displayed on the performance display device 1600 after the suspension is expired when the display format of the suspension preview performance is "red" and the display format of the set value suspension suggestion performance is "circle" When moving ~1700d or the second hold memory 1701a, the display mode of the hold notice effect is maintained as "red" without changing, while the display form of the set value hold suggestion effect is changed from "circle" to "square". (Maintaining the color and changing the shape), when the display mode of the pending preview effect is "white" and the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect is "triangle", the pending is expired and displayed on the effect display device 1600. When moving the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a, the display form of the holding notice effect is changed from ``white'' to ``blue'', while the display form of the setting value holding suggestion effect is changed to ``triangular''. Sometimes it is maintained without changing (changes color and maintains shape).

That is, in this example, the process of determining the pending notice pattern for the pending notice performance and the process of determining the setting value pending suggestion pattern of the setting value pending suggestion performance are performed separately, and the special lottery result is suggested ( The display of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a displayed on the effect display device 1600 every time the variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of special symbols) is performed (every time the hold is exhausted) Either the display mode is maintained (the display mode is not changed), or it is changed to a mode with high expectations for the high setting value.

In addition, the final display mode of the suspension notice performance and the setting value suspension suggestion performance is determined separately, and a scenario in which the display format of the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a changes according to the determination results is shown. Any one of a plurality of types of change patterns may be executed.

In addition, the start timing of the setting value retention suggestion effect (the timing of displaying the display mode in a different manner than usual) is based on the fact that the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is not limited to the timing of displaying the pending memories 1700a to 1700d or the second pending memory 1701a, but also the subsequent timing (timing after displaying in the basic shape, for example, when the suggestion of the special lottery result ends and the next special lottery result starts. It is also started when moving the first pending memories 1700b to 1700d to the first pending memories 1700a to 1700c, etc.). Thereby, even if the setting value suspension suggestion effect is not executed, the first suspension memories 1700a to 1700d and the second suspension memory 1701a can be made to pay attention to the end with anticipation.

Note that the execution frequency of the setting value suspension suggestion performance is set to be lower than the above-mentioned suspension notice performance. That is, the pending preview performance is executed based on the advance determination information, and when a special lottery result is suggested based on the winning lottery result based on the pending memory that is executing the pending preview performance, the contents of the pending preview performance are reset. On the other hand, since the contents of the setting value suspension suggestion presentation continue without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, the execution frequency of the setting value suspension suggestion presentation is lower than that of the suspension notice presentation. This setting prevents the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

Furthermore, as shown in the first suspension memory 1700c in FIGS. 228(A) and 228(B) and the second suspension memory 1701a in FIG. 228(D), the setting value suspension suggestion performance is executed at the same time as the above-mentioned suspension notice performance. In addition, as shown in the first suspension memory 1700c in FIG. 228(C), the setting value suspension suggestion effect may be executed alone. Note that the suspension notice pattern may include a change pattern in the display mode of the setting value suspension suggestion performance, and in this case, a suspension notice determination table may be provided for each setting value of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 229, the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a plurality of types of image data that combine the display mode of the above-described hold notice effect and the display mode of the set value hold suggestion effect, and the hold notice of the above-mentioned hold notice effect. The target pending memory is displayed based on image data corresponding to both the pattern and the set value pending suggestion pattern of the set value pending suggestion performance. That is, after determining the color as the display mode of the pending preview effect of the target pending memory and the shape as the display mode of the setting value pending suggestion effect, a display mode is generated by combining these, and this combined display mode is generated. is displayed as retained memory.

Specifically, in the example of FIG. 229(A) in which a pending memory in which only a pending notice effect is executed and a setting value pending suggestion effect is not executed, the first pending memories 1700a and 1700b are displayed as "composite pattern white 1". '', and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of ``composite pattern blue 1''. In addition, in the example of FIG. 229(B) in which a pending memory in which both a pending notice performance and a setting value pending suggestion performance are displayed, the first pending memories 1700a and 1700b are used as image data of "synthetic pattern white 1". The first pending memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern blue 2". In addition, in the example of FIG. 229(C) in which a holding memory in which only a holding notice effect is executed and a holding memory in which only a setting value holding suggestion effect is executed are displayed, the first holding memory 1700a is The first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "Blue 1", the first reserved memory 1700b is displayed based on the image data of "Composition pattern white 1", and the first reserved memory 1700c is displayed based on the image data of "Composition pattern white 3". is displayed.

Further, in the second suspension memory 1701a, the suspension notice performance and the setting value suspension suggestion performance are executed, and the suspension memory in which both the suspension notice performance and the setting value suspension suggestion performance are executed is displayed (FIG. 229(D)). In the example, the second pending storage 1701a is displayed based on the image data of "composite pattern red 4".

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example controls the display of the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d and the second holding memory 1701a in a manner different from normal, so that the pachinko machine 1 can display the holding notice effect that suggests the expectation of a jackpot and the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to perform a setting value suspension suggestion effect that suggests a setting value. It should be noted that while the suspension preview performance is executed based on the prior determination information, the setting value suspension suggestion performance is not based on the prior determination information. That is, while the pending notice performance can be executed by obtaining the pending special lottery results in advance, the set value pending suggestion performance cannot be executed without obtaining the pending special lottery results in advance. be.

Note that this is not limited to displaying the special lottery results for which the start of suggestion is pending on the effect display device 1600 as the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d or the second pending memory 1701a, and the special lottery result for which the suggestion is being executed. The pending memory according to the result may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as pending memory during execution. In this case, the final display form of the above-mentioned suspension notice performance and setting value suspension suggestion performance may be displayed in the suspension memory during execution, and by configuring this way, the special lottery result is suggested. Since it is possible to attract attention to the suspension notice performance and set value suspension suggestion performance until the time of execution, and create expectations for a jackpot or a high set value, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above example, the display color of the pending memory is changed as the display mode of the pending preview effect, and the shape of the pending memory is changed as the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect, but the setting value pending suggestion effect is It is not limited to the above as long as it is possible to determine that it is being executed. For example, as the display mode of the pending notice effect, the display color of the pending notice effect may be changed, and as the display mode of the set value pending suggestion effect, the numerical value or pending memory according to the set value that is suggested without changing the shape of the target pending memory. Additional information such as the effect mode (sparkling effect or flame effect) around the image may be displayed in association with the reserved memory.

In addition, when displaying the first holding memory 1700a to 1700d based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, or when displaying the second holding memory 1700a to 1700d based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, When displaying the pending memory 1701a, when updating and displaying the first pending memory 1700a to 1700d and the second pending memory 1701a based on the completion of the pending (the first pending memory 1700b to 1700d is displayed in the first pending memory 1700a to 1700c, or when moving the first pending memory 1700a or the second pending memory 1701a to the active pending memory), a sound effect may be output to suggest the setting value of the pachinko machine 1. . For example, when suggesting that the setting value is "1", a sound effect (for example, "beep") corresponding to the setting value "1" among multiple types of sound effects is output, and when the setting value is "2", the sound effect corresponding to the setting value "1" is output. When suggesting that the setting value is ``5'', a sound effect corresponding to the setting value ``2'' among multiple types of sound effects (for example, ``pippi'') is output, and ... it is suggested that the setting value is ``5''. If the setting value is "6", output the sound effect corresponding to the setting value "5" (for example "pipipipipipi") among the multiple types of sound effects, and if the setting value is "6", output the sound effect corresponding to the setting value "5". Among the sounds, a sound effect (for example, "pan paka paan") corresponding to the set value "6" may be output.

In addition, when a reservation notice performance or a setting value reservation suggestion performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level and the setting of the pachinko machine 1 are set according to the operation of the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation section 301 in the performance operation unit 300. In this case, after displaying on the effect display device 1600 an operation instruction image that instructs the operation of the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300. The jackpot expectation level and the set value of the pachinko machine 1 may be suggested in response to the operation of the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the production operation section 301 in the production operation unit 300. In addition, the same operation instruction image may be used when maintaining the jackpot expectation level and the suggested setting value and when further increasing the jackpot expectation level and the suggested setting value. It becomes impossible to determine whether or not the jackpot expectation level and the suggested set value are increased by the performance that is a precursor to the execution of the pending suggestion performance (the performance that displays the operation instruction image), and the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is contacted. It is possible to encourage the user to actively operate the operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303.

Further, during a demonstration (demonstration performance performed while the player is in a waiting state), it may be possible to select the presence or absence of a reservation notice performance and the presence or absence of a setting value reservation suggestion performance. This makes it possible to execute performances that match the player's preferences, and even for players who do not want suggestions about their jackpot expectation level, setting values of the pachinko machine 1, etc., a suspension notice performance and a setting value suspension suggestion performance can be executed. It is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation level or the set value of the pachinko machine 1 from being suggested.

In addition, we will provide a demonstration (such as the fact that this is a mode that suggests the setting value of Pachinko machine 1 and not a mode that suggests the jackpot expectation level) regarding the mode suggested by the setting value suspension suggestion effect (such as that it is a mode that suggests the setting value of Pachinko machine 1, but is not a mode that suggests the jackpot expectation level). It may also be executed when a demonstration performance is being performed) or when a special lottery result is suggested (during a variable display of decorative symbols). Thereby, when the setting value suspension suggestion performance is executed, it can be prevented from being mistaken as a jackpot expectation level and increasing the jackpot expectation.

In addition, during execution of the time saving state or the variable probability state, advance judgment is instructed by the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command and special symbol type pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002. Pre-judgment that is instructed by the fluctuation pattern pre-reading command and special symbol type pre-reading command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 without executing the hold notice performance based on the information. It may also be possible to execute only the hold notice effect based on the information. In addition, even during execution of the time saving state or the variable probability state, the set value is held in relation to the first holding memories 1700a to 1700d displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the entry of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002. Suggestive effects may also be performed. Thereby, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 during the time saving state or the probability changing state, it is possible to create expectations for the setting value retention suggestion performance.

[23. Set value continuous suggestion performance]
Next, the continuous setting value suggestion effect will be explained. In this example, it is possible to perform a continuous setting value suggestion performance that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 over a plurality of variable displays of decorative patterns. Note that the variable display of decorative symbols is not limited to one that is executed once for one variable display of a special symbol, but is executed multiple times for one variable display of a special symbol (so-called pseudo-continuous display). (variation) is also included.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 continuously suggests the setting value in accordance with the setting value information of the pachinko machine 1 instructed by the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command and the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command transmitted from the main control board 1310. A set value continuous suggestion effect table is provided for determining the presence or absence of the effect and the type of set value continuous suggestion effect pattern when executing the set value continuous suggestion effect. Then, when the decision is made to execute the set value continuous suggestion effect and the type of set value continuous suggestion effect pattern to be executed is determined, the set value is One of a plurality of setting suggestion characters 1702 having different display modes depending on the setting is made to appear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 230(A), when the effect display device 1600 starts displaying a decorative pattern in a variable manner, "1" is drawn on the head as a setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value 1. The selected setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 230(C), when the next variable display of the decorative pattern is started on the effect display device 1600, "3" is drawn on the head as a setting suggestion character 1702 according to the setting value 3. The setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value 4 is displayed, and when the next variable display of the decorative pattern starts on the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. A setting suggestion character 1702 with a "4" drawn on its head is displayed.

In addition, when the setting value of Pachinko machine 1 is specified as "6" based on the special figure 1 synchronized performance start command and the special figure 2 synchronized performance start command, the setting suggestion corresponding to the setting value "6" is used as the final mode. A setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern that becomes the character 1702 is determined with high probability, and when the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is identified as 1, the setting becomes the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "1" as the final mode. By determining a continuous value suggestion performance pattern with a high probability, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the high setting value is displayed as the final setting suggestion character 1702, the player's expectations regarding the high setting value are The intensity is increasing.

In addition, the setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern includes a change in the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started during the execution of the setting value continuous suggestion performance. It is set whether it changes to. In addition, in the setting value continuous suggestion performance pattern, the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the performance display device 1600 does not change in the reverse order of 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 ( In other words, the level of expectation for the high setting value does not decrease), and the display mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 displayed on the effect display device 1600 each time the variable display of the decorative pattern is started is maintained. (the display mode does not change), or it is set so that the mode corresponds to the high setting value. Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a display mode corresponding to the low setting value, the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 remains the same as the high setting value until the setting value continuous suggestion effect ends. There is still a possibility that the mode changes depending on the setting suggestion character 1702, and it is possible to draw attention to the mode of the setting suggestion character 1702 with anticipation until the end.

In addition, in the setting value continuous suggestion production pattern, it is not necessarily necessary to display the setting suggestion character 1702 in a manner corresponding to the setting value "1" and then change it in the order of 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6; (For example, start the setting value continuous suggestion effect and first display the setting suggestion character 1702 with the setting value "2"), and change to the next display mode without going through the intermediate display modes. (For example, when the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "2" is displayed, the setting suggestion character 1702 corresponding to the setting value "4" is displayed in response to the start of the next variable display of the decorative pattern. It is also set to allow Therefore, even if the setting suggestion character 1702 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the low setting value, it is not possible to predict which display mode the setting suggestion character 1702 will change to next. It is possible to hold attention to the story with anticipation till the end.

Note that the execution frequency of the set value continuous suggestion performance is set lower than that of the suspension notice performance, similar to the setting value suspension suggestion performance described above. That is, the pending notice performance is executed based on the advance determination information, and when a special lottery result is suggested based on the winning lottery result based on the pending memory that is executing the pending notice performance, the contents of the pending notice performance are reset. On the other hand, the content of the continuous setting value suggestion effect continues without being reset until the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, so the execution frequency of the continuous setting value suggestion effect is lower than that of the pending notice effect. This setting prevents the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 from being specified.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the setting value continuous suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is executed by displaying the setting suggestion character 1702 over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative pattern. I'm starting to get it. It should be noted that since the set value continuous suggestion performance is not based on prior determination information like the above-mentioned set value suspension suggestion performance, it can be executed without obtaining the special lottery result in advance.

Note that the setting value continuous suggestion effect that displays the setting suggestion character 1702 may be executed beyond the upper limit of the number of pending memories (the upper limit of the number of first pending memories is 4, and the upper limit of the number of second pending memories is 1). (for example, over five or more variations of the decorative pattern). In addition, if the number of pending memories becomes 0 during the execution of the set value continuous suggestion effect, the decorative pattern will change based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. When the display starts, the setting value continuous suggestion effect may be restarted to display the setting suggestion character 1702. In this case, the setting value suggestion character 1702 may be displayed until the setting value continuous suggestion effect is restarted. It may be configured to continue displaying on the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous setting value suggestion performance is continuing and allow the player to continue playing the game, and even if the player quits playing, a new player can be informed that the continuous setting value suggestion performance is continuing. It is possible to arouse an interest in the game machine and induce the player to play games on the game machine.

Further, the setting value continuous suggestion performance may be executed in parallel with the setting value suspension suggestion performance. Thereby, it is possible to provide a new game in which the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 is inferred from both the performance mode in the setting value suspension suggestion performance and the performance mode in the setting value continuous suggestion performance. Further, a plurality of types of setting suggestion characters 1702 may be provided, and one of the setting suggestion characters 1702 may be displayed depending on the jackpot expectation level.

[24. Use of surplus settings other than jackpot probability and small hit probability]
In this embodiment, it is possible to change the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) by pressing the pressing operation part of the setting switching button 1311b in a state where the setting value can be changed. There is a table that corresponds to the determined set value as a table used in a special lottery etc. (a hit determination table, a jackpot symbol determination table, a small win symbol determination table, etc.). In the embodiment described above, the table corresponding to each setting value includes "Jackpot probability", "Small hit probability", "Small hit type", "Normal symbol hit probability", and "Normal hit probability" The opening/closing pattern of the second starting port is set to have different combinations, but as another example, even though the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same setting value, the "jackpot probability" and "small As information other than "winning probability", a different fraud monitoring system may be set.

As described above, in the fraud detection process in step S112, various types of fraud are monitored. Specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, and to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. ) is provided, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors any fraudulent activity using the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibrations are applied to the pachinko machine 1, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 is changed and the game ball B is moved to the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent acts such as entering the various prize openings and gates (gates), the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. and monitor fraudulent activities caused by vibration. In this example, as a fraud monitoring system, the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraud can be changed, and the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraud can be changed. ) can change the part (target area) that is determined to be fraudulent activity, or change the conditions for canceling the error state when it is determined to be fraudulent behavior and the error state is entered. There is.

As shown in FIG. 231, in this example, "Jackpot probability", "Small win probability", and "Misconduct monitoring system" are set to the respective setting values of setting values 1 to 3 and setting values 1' to 3'. are configured accordingly.

Specifically, as the jackpot probability (ratio of the jackpot judgment value indicating winning the jackpot in the hit judgment table), set value 1 and set value 1' are set to "1/319", set value 2 and set value 2' is set to "1/309", and set value 3 and set value 3' are set to "1/299". In this example, the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 1' to 3' are set so that the higher the setting value, the higher the jackpot probability.

In addition, as the small hit probability (ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won in the hit judgment table), the table used for the special lottery of the first special symbol has a setting value of 1 to 3, a setting value of 1 While '1/100' is set for each of '~3', in the table used for the special lottery of the second special symbol, set values 1~3 and set values 1'~3' are set respectively. is set to "50/100". Note that each of the setting values 1 to 3 and the setting values 1' to 3' may be set so that the higher the setting value is, the higher the small hit probability is.

Further, as a monitoring system for fraudulent acts, "fraud monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, and "fraud monitoring B" is set to setting values 1' to 3'. In this example, the monitoring system of "Unauthorized Monitoring A" is set to be stronger than that of "Unauthorized Monitoring B."

In this example, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are the same for setting value 1 and setting value 1', setting value 2 and setting value 2', and setting value 3 and setting value 3'. However, the fraud monitoring system is set to either "Fraud Monitoring A" or "Fraud Monitoring B." For example, if it is possible to set six setting values on the setting change board 1311 provided with the setting key switch 1311a, etc., and it is necessary to set only three types of "jackpot probability", three types In addition to the three setting values corresponding to the "jackpot probability", three surplus setting values will be generated. In this way, if the setting change board 1311 that can set six setting values is used for other gaming machines, surplus setting values may be generated. By using the values to change the fraud monitoring system, the surplus settings can be used effectively and changes to the program can be kept to a minimum.

In addition, as the display mode of the selected setting value during the operation related to setting change, for settings 1 to 3, "1", "2", and "3" are displayed on the setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display. At the same time, the 7-segment LED normally blinks, but in settings 1' to 3', the setting display 1310g displays "1", "2", and "3", and the 7-segment LED blinks. The segment LED is displayed to blink at high speed (blinking faster than settings 1 to 3). Thereby, when the operator changes the settings of the setting values, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting values being changed are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'. However, when the setting value is determined after the setting value has been changed, the display mode of the setting value may be normal blinking or high-speed blinking of the 7-segment LED for both settings 1 to 3 and settings 1' to 3'. It has stopped blinking and is displayed normally. Therefore, when the operator determines the setting values after changing the settings, it is unclear whether the setting values are settings 1 to 3 or settings 1' to 3'.

In addition, as another example of the above, regarding the display mode of the selected setting value during the operation related to setting change, in settings 1 to 3, the setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display shows "1" and "2". ” and “3.”, whereas in settings 1’ to 3’, the setting display 1310g displays “1.”, “2.”, and “3.”, compared to settings 1 to 3. You can also add dots. In such a different case, even if the 7-segment LED blinks normally during the change, it is clearly distinguishable whether the setting value being changed is setting 1 to 3 or setting 1' to 3'. be able to. In addition, when the setting value is determined after changing the setting value, even if the 7-segment LED stops blinking normally and is displayed with normal lighting, the determined setting value will be changed to the setting 1. It is possible to clearly distinguish whether the setting is 1' to 3' or the setting 1' to 3'.

Next, specific monitoring systems for "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B" include first to fifth specific examples. In this example, any one or more of the first to fifth specific examples may be executed as "fraud monitoring A" and "fraud monitoring B." First, as a first specific example, a case will be described below in which the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraud are made to differ.

As a first specific example, "Fraud Monitoring A" increases the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent acts, whereas "Fraud Monitoring B" increases the detection sensitivity of the detection sensors that detect fraudulent acts. The detection sensitivity of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) is lowered. If the detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity detects excessive amounts of fraud due to individual differences in the pachinko machines 1 or the installation location within the hall, selecting "Fraud Monitoring B" will prevent such excessive detection. be able to. On the other hand, if the detection sensor that detects fraud is slow in detecting it, selecting "Fraud Monitoring A" can prevent the slow detection. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnet goths and vibration goths, by selecting "Fraudulent Act A", it is possible to strengthen the monitoring of fraudulent acts due to magnet goths and vibration goths.

In addition, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when the detection signal is input from the detection sensor (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detects fraud, the time for which the detection signal is input is short, or the detection signal In contrast, "Fraud Monitoring B" determines that it is fraudulent even if the number of times the detection signal is input is small, whereas "Fraud Monitoring If there are many cases, it may be determined that the act is fraudulent. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be obtained when the detection sensitivities of the detection sensors for detecting fraudulent acts are made different.

Next, as a second specific example, a case will be described below in which the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent acts determine different parts (target regions) of fraudulent acts.

In this example, the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is used as a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor and a gaming area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the gaming area 5a located on the front side of the gaming board 5 are provided. Depending on the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit, the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a may be monitored to see if a magnet approaches the area where it is installed, and the settings can be changed by a person other than the person who changes the setting value or displays confirmation. We monitor fraudulent activities such as attempts to change or display confirmations. On the other hand, depending on the gaming area magnetic sensor, the magnet approaches the area in front of the gaming area 5a, and changes the course of the gaming ball B flowing down the gaming area 5a. We monitor fraudulent activities such as allowing balls to enter the winning slot or gate section.

Similarly, as a vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration, the setting operation unit vibration can detect the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A sensor and a game area vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. Depending on the setting operation section vibration sensor, the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided may be monitored to see if vibration is applied, and anyone other than the person who changes the setting value or displays the confirmation We monitor fraudulent activities such as attempts to change settings or display confirmations. On the other hand, depending on the game area part vibration sensor, it monitors whether vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, changes the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550, and changes the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550, We are monitoring fraudulent activities such as allowing game ball B to enter the ball.

As a second specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", all of the detection sensors that detect fraud (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) are used to increase the number of parts that are judged to be fraudulent. , "Fraud Monitoring B" uses only the setting operation unit magnetic sensor and setting operation unit vibration sensor, which are part of the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent activity, to detect fraudulent activity. The number of parts to be judged is reduced. In other words, "fraud monitoring A" not only detects the occurrence of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, but also detects the occurrence of magnetism in the gaming area located on the front side of the game board 5. While it is possible to detect the occurrence of magnetism and vibrations in front of the game board 5a, "fraud monitoring B" detects magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. It is possible to detect only the occurrence of vibration. For example, if a malfunction occurs in the gaming area magnetic sensor or gaming area vibration sensor, and such detection sensors frequently detect fraudulent activity even though no fraudulent activity has occurred, "Fraud Monitoring B" may be used. By selecting this, it is possible to prevent such frequent detection. In addition, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnet goths and vibration goths, by selecting "Fraud Monitoring A", the area in front of the gaming area 5a will also be monitored for fraudulent acts, and fraud caused by magnet goths and vibration goths will be monitored. monitoring can be strengthened.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010 are provided as the magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent activities using magnets, a setting operation section magnetic sensor and a gaming area magnetic sensor. (Is it around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5?) Two magnetic sensors 2010 may be provided. Similarly, two vibration sensors 3003 are provided to detect fraudulent activity due to vibrations: a setting operation unit vibration sensor and a game area vibration sensor. (Is it around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5) It is also possible to provide one vibration sensor capable of Even in such a case, "Fraud Monitoring B" detects fraud only when it is identified that magnetism or vibration has occurred around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. By determining that there is, the same effect as above can be obtained.

Next, as a third specific example, a case will be described below in which the conditions for canceling the error state when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and shifts to the error state are different.

As a third specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", if it is determined to be fraudulent activity and the system goes into an error state, it is possible to clear the error state by turning the power back on. , "Fraud Monitoring B" makes it possible to automatically release the error state after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 minutes) has passed when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the error state is entered. ing. In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, the hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and operates the power switch 630a. The error state cannot be canceled unless the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again. Note that if the detection sensors (magnetic sensor 2010, vibration sensor 3003) that detect fraudulent activity detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the state shifts to an error state, and the output from the images, lamps, and speakers of the production display device 1600 is As a result, an abnormality occurrence effect is executed that notifies the player of an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, making it difficult to properly understand the progress of the game. Therefore, if "Fraud Monitoring A" is selected, when it is determined that there is a fraudulent act and the situation shifts to an error state, the hall clerk will be required to perform the work, and it will be difficult for the hall clerk to understand the fraudulent act. As a result, it is possible to increase deterrence against fraudulent acts. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnets and vibrations, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen the monitoring of fraud using magnets and vibrations.

Next, as a fourth specific example, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, information regarding the error state is transmitted to a pachinko hall installed in the game hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. A case in which whether or not to output to the computer is changed will be described below.

As a fourth specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when it is determined that a fraudulent act has been committed and the situation shifts to an error state, information regarding the error state is sent to the game hall via the external terminal board 558 of the Pachinko machine 1. In contrast to the system that outputs information to a hall computer installed on the side, in "Fraud Monitoring B", even if it is determined that there is a fraudulent act and the error state occurs, information regarding the error state is output to the hall computer. I try not to. In other words, with "Fraud Monitoring A," when it is determined that a fraudulent act is occurring and the situation shifts to an error state, the hall clerk can immediately grasp the fraudulent act even if he or she is not present at the time. Deterrent power can be increased. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnets and vibrations, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen the monitoring of fraud using magnets and vibrations.

Next, as a fifth specific example, when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, whether or not information regarding the error state is externally notified by an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or an output from a speaker. A case where the values are different will be explained below.

As a fifth specific example, in "Fraud Monitoring A", when it is determined that there is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, magnetism and vibrations are generated by the images of the performance display device 1600, the lamps, and the output from the speakers. In contrast, "Fraud Monitoring B" determines that it is a fraudulent act and displays an error state. Even if the error state is changed to , information regarding the error state is not broadcast externally. In other words, in "Fraud Monitoring A," when it is determined that a fraudulent act has occurred and the situation shifts to an error state, the fraudster is warned by external notification of information regarding the error state, which increases the deterrence against fraudulent behavior. can do. Furthermore, if you want to strengthen the countermeasures against magnets and vibrations, you can select "Fraud Monitoring A" to strengthen the monitoring of fraud using magnets and vibrations.

In this example, "Unauthorized Monitoring A" is set for setting values 1 to 3, "Unauthorized Monitoring B" is set to set values 1' to 3', and the main control MPU 1310a directs the peripheral control board 1510 to By transmitting information regarding the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine whether it should stand by in "Unauthorized Monitoring A" or "Unauthorized Monitoring B." Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a sends information regarding the error state as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 when it is determined that the act is fraudulent and the state shifts to an error state, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, It is possible to determine whether or not to externally report information regarding the error state.

In addition, in "Fraud Monitoring B", when it is determined that it is a fraudulent act and the state shifts to an error state, information regarding the error state is externally reported. The output of "Fraud Monitoring A" may be executed in a more suppressed (less conspicuous) manner than "Fraud Monitoring A". For example, in "Unauthorized Monitoring B", when informing the outside of information regarding an error state, output from lamps and speakers may be stopped and only the image of the effect display device 1600 may be displayed. Even in such a case, the same effect as described above can be obtained when whether or not to externally report information regarding the error state is varied.

In the above, a case has been described in which the setting change board 1311 capable of setting six setting values is used, only three types of "jackpot probability" need to be set, and three surplus setting values are generated. In other words, for setting values 1' to 3', even though the "jackpot probability" and "small winning probability" are the same as setting values 1 to 3, the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A". Although "fraud monitoring B" is set for setting values 1 to 3, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, setting values 1 to 5 corresponding to five types of "jackpot probability" may be set. , if one surplus setting value occurs, the fraud monitoring system may be set differently for that one surplus setting value. For example, with setting value 1', which is one surplus setting value, even though the "jackpot probability" and "small winning probability" are the same as setting value 1 among setting values 1 to 5, fraud monitoring is not possible. For setting values 1 to 5 where the system is set to "Fraud Monitoring A", "Fraud Monitoring B" may be set. Even in such a case, the surplus setting values can be effectively utilized.

Additionally, in the above, either "Fraud Monitoring A" or "Fraud Monitoring B" is set as the fraud monitoring system, but "Fraud Monitoring A" and "Fraud Monitoring B" have different fraud monitoring systems. ” or “Fraud Monitoring C” may be set. Additionally, monitoring of fraudulent activities is strengthened in the order of "Fraud Monitoring C," "Fraud Monitoring B," and "Fraud Monitoring A." For example, to explain the case where setting values 1 and 2 corresponding to two types of "jackpot probability" are set and four surplus setting values occur, a setting where the fraud monitoring system is set to "fraud monitoring A" For values 1 and 2, even though the "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same setting values, the setting values 1' and 2' set for "fraud monitoring B", "jackpot probability" and "small hit probability" are the same. The setting values 1'' and 2'', which are set for the ``fraud monitoring C'' even though the ``probability'' is the same setting value, may be set as the surplus setting values. Even in such a case, the surplus setting values can be effectively utilized.

Above, we explained the case where the fraud monitoring system is set to be different even though the "big hit probability" and "small win probability" are set to the same value. As other information, all or some of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 may be set to have different operating systems. A case in which the operation systems of some of the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are set to be different will be described below as a sixth specific example.

As shown in FIG. 232, in the sixth specific example, the operating system of a specific accessory (specified movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is set. The fact that values 1 to 3 are set to ``specified official object movement'' and setting values 1' to 3' are set to ``no specified official object movement'' is the first point in time when the ``misconduct monitoring system'' is set. This is different from the specific example to the fifth specific example. In other words, in the sixth specific example, the "big hit probability" and "small hit probability" are set for setting value 1 and setting value 1', setting value 2 and setting value 2', and setting value 3 and setting value 3'. Although the setting values are the same, the operation system of the specific accessory object (specified movable object) is set to either "with specific accessory object movement" or "without specific accessory object movement." Note that the plurality of accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 can each be operated using a drive source such as a drive motor or a solenoid. The accessory consists of the performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 described above, and the performance operation unit 300 can be moved up and down by the operation mechanism described above. Since the performance operation unit 300 can be operated by direct contact with the player, it is more likely to malfunction or malfunction than other accessories. In "Specific character object movement", the specific character object is controlled to move at a predetermined timing during the execution of a movable object performance that involves the movement of the specific character object (the effect operation unit 300 moves up and down). On the other hand, in the case of "no specific character object movement", the specific character object is controlled not to move without performing a movable object performance accompanied by the movement of the specific character object. For example, if there is a problem with the movement mechanism of a specific accessory and the specific accessory no longer operates properly, you can select "No specific accessory movement" to stop the specific accessory's movement midway. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game becomes difficult to continue due to the game being overwritten.

In addition, in this example, when determining a variation pattern in which execution of a movable animal effect accompanied by the movement of a specific character is set among multiple variation patterns, "with specific character movement" While a specific role object is controlled to move at a predetermined timing during the execution of a movable object performance that involves movement, in ``no specific role object movement'', a movable object performance that involves the movement of a specific role object is executed. It is controlled so that specific functional objects do not operate. On the other hand, the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern may be changed between "with specific role object movement" and "without specific role object movement." For example, for ``with specific role object movement,'' , among multiple variation patterns, it is possible to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of a movable animal effect accompanied by the movement of a specific role object is set, whereas in ``no specific role object movement'', the movement of a specific role object is Control may also be performed so as not to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of the movable object effect accompanied by the movement is set. In such a case, "No specific character object movement" can produce the same effect as above by controlling the specific character object so that it does not move without performing a movable animal production that involves the movement of the character object. can be obtained.

In addition, in this example, if the operation system of the specific accessory object (specified movable object) is set to a setting value 1 to 3 that indicates "specific accessory object movement", the specific accessory object will be activated when the power is turned on (after changing the settings). The initial movement of the object is performed, but if you set the setting value 1' to 3', which is "no specific function object movement," the initial movement of the specified function object will be performed when the power is turned on (after changing the setting). I'm trying to prevent it from happening. This makes it possible to once again recognize that the specific accessory (specified movable object) among the plurality of accessory objects (movable object) is excluded from the action target. In addition, it is possible to confirm whether or not the settings are the ones intended by the operator regarding the operation of the specific function object (specified movable object), thereby preventing situations in which the operator makes a mistake with settings that are not intended. be able to.

Different from the above, if priority is given to confirming whether or not there is a problem with the movement of a specified role object (specified movable object), in order to accurately notify the problem, it is necessary to select "specific function object movement" and "no specified function object movement". Regardless of which setting is made, the initial operation of the specific accessory may be performed when the power is turned on (after the setting is changed).

In addition, whether "with specific role object movement" or "without specific role object movement" is set can be confirmed by the setting value displayed on the setting display 1310g, but other than the setting display 1310g. However, it may be possible to notify. For example, when the setting change of the setting value is completed, the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the performance display device 1600 may be used to notify that "Specific character object movement has been set/Specific character object movement has been set to not exist." Whether a specific role object (specified movable object) among multiple role objects (movable object) is the target of the operation, or by displaying a standby screen during the period when the game is not being played, and notifying the user of this fact. can recognize what

In addition, in this example, it is possible for the operator to set either "with specific role object movement" or "without specific role object movement" by changing the setting value, but such initial After setting, it may be possible for the player to change the initial setting to another setting. For example, while the standby screen is displayed during a period when no game is being played, the player may be allowed to change the mode to either "with specific accessory action" or "without specific accessory action". That is, the setting values 1 to 3 are set to "specific role object movement" and the setting values 1' to 3' are set to "no specific role object movement," and the main control MPU 1310a directs the peripheral control board 1510 to the setting. By sending information regarding the value as a command, the peripheral control board 1510 side executes one of the settings as the initial setting, but if the player changes to another setting after the initial setting, On the peripheral control board 1510 side, settings changed by the player are executed with priority over initial settings.

Further, the specific accessory (specified movable object) among the plurality of accessories (movable object) is not limited to the production operation section unit 350 in the production operation unit 300, but may be provided on the game board 5 or the door frame 3, It may operate from outside the front of the screen of the effect display device 1600 toward the front of the screen. In addition, in this example, by changing the setting value, it is possible to change the operating system of a specific accessory (specified movable object) among multiple accessory objects (movable objects), but it is not limited to specific accessory objects. It is possible to change the movement system of multiple characters (movable objects) or all characters, and set the target character to either "with character movement" or "without character movement". You can do it like this. Further, accessories (movable objects) may be provided not only on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, but also on the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and it is also possible to change the operating system of such accessories. It can also be used as a target.

[25. Fraud monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraud are monitored in the fraud detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 1 to change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, and to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. ) is provided, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010, and monitors any fraudulent activity using the magnet. ing. In addition, by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1, vibrations are applied to the pachinko machine 1, and the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined by the game board 5 is changed and the game ball B is moved to the game board 5. By providing a vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent acts such as entering the various prize openings and gates (gates), the main control MPU 1310a determines whether there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3003. and monitor fraudulent activities caused by vibration. Regarding the monitoring of these fraudulent activities, the manner in which the monitoring is performed is different depending on whether it is normal or when a setting change or confirmation display of a setting value is being performed.

[25-1. Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]
First, monitoring of fraudulent activities during normal times will be explained below. Here, the normal state is a state in which the main body frame 4 is closed, and the setting value is not changed or the setting value confirmation display is not performed, and symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. This refers to the state in which it is possible to play games.

In this example, the magnetic sensor 2010 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is used as a setting operation unit that can detect the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. A magnetic sensor and a gaming area magnetic sensor capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the gaming area 5a located on the front side of the gaming board 5 are provided. In normal times, a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is monitored for fraudulent activity using the setting operation section magnetic sensor. In other words, under normal circumstances, the magnetic sensor of the setting operation unit generates a magnetic field that should not originally be generated (magnetic force caused by unauthorized access) on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. ) has occurred (i.e., whether a magnet has approached), and monitors for fraudulent activities such as attempts by a person other than the person who is responsible for changing the setting value or displaying confirmation. An example of a fraudulent act against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet is when a metal illicit device is placed inside the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (inside the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). A magnet that indirectly manipulates a metal illicit device is installed, and the magnet and metal illicit device are inserted through a small gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island equipment or an opening made by destroying a part of the pachinko machine 1. It is conceivable that the user may operate the machine to illegally access the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the fraud detection process in step S112, when a detection signal from the setting operation section magnetic sensor is input, it is determined that fraud using a magnet has occurred in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is determined that this is being done.

Similarly, during normal times, a gaming area magnetic sensor is used to monitor a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 for fraudulent activity. In other words, under normal circumstances, the gaming area magnetic sensor monitors whether magnetism that should not have occurred (magnetism due to unauthorized access) has occurred in the area in front of the gaming area 5a (whether a magnet has approached). , illegal acts such as changing the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and causing the ball to enter various prize openings or gates provided on the game board 5 are monitored. In addition, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the gaming area magnetic sensor is input, it is determined that fraudulent activity using a magnet is being carried out in the area in front of the gaming area 5a. ing.

In this example, two magnetic sensors 2010 are provided as magnetic sensors 2010 for detecting fraudulent activities using magnets, a setting operation section magnetic sensor and a gaming area section magnetic sensor. The part magnetic sensor and the game area part magnetic sensor may have the same performance. In other words, although not shown, these two magnetic sensors 2010 are composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and the first magnetic sensor 2010 has a highly sensitive directivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. It is now possible to perform magnetic detection within the area and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection area, which has strong directivity with strong sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side, which is the opposite side. ing. Note that "high sensitivity in the vertical direction" means that the sensitivity is stronger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to each side, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side is a wide area surrounded by a sphere. The gaming area magnetic sensor is arranged such that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body extend in the left-right direction or the vertical direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, Wide area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, normal winning port 2003, big winning port 2005, and other main parts of the ball flow path) ) can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation part magnetic sensor is configured so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body described above spread in the front and back direction when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1; The magnetic detection area is arranged to cover the back side of the pachinko machine 1, so that the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

It should be noted that an embodiment may be adopted in which the two setting operation part magnetic sensors and the gaming area part magnetic sensor do not have the same performance. For example, instead of the setting operation part magnetic sensor and the game area part magnetic sensor, the place where magnetism is generated (around the setting change board 1311 or setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5), It is also possible to provide one magnetic sensor 2010 that can identify the area in front of the game area 5a (located in front of the game area 5a). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the gaming area 5a. .

In addition, in this example, the vibration sensor 3003 that detects fraudulent activity due to vibration is configured to be able to detect the occurrence of vibration around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5. An operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 are provided. Under normal circumstances, a vibration sensor on the setting operation unit is used to monitor fraudulent activity. In other words, under normal conditions, the setting operation part vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not have occurred (vibrations due to unauthorized access) are applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are installed. However, unauthorized acts such as attempts by a person other than the person responsible for changing or confirming setting values are monitored. In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal from the setting operation part vibration sensor is input, it is determined that a fraud using vibration is performed in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. It is judged that

On the other hand, during normal times, only during small winning games, the gaming area vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activities, and other than small winning games, the gaming area vibration sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activities. In the small winning game, the third sorting device 2550 distributes the game balls B distributed to the second V winning hole 2008 side by the second sorting device 2540 to either the second V winning hole 2008 or the losing side. However, when vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550, the course of the game balls B in the third sorting device 2550 is changed and the game balls are distributed to the second V prize opening 2008. This is to prevent such illegal acts, since it would be possible for B to enter the ball. In other words, during normal small winning games, the game area vibration sensor monitors whether vibrations that should not have occurred (vibrations due to unauthorized access) are applied to the third sorting device 2550. However, fraudulent acts such as changing the course of the game ball B in the third sorting device 2550 and allowing the game ball B to enter the second V prize opening 2008 are monitored. In addition, in the fraudulent activity detection process of step S112, when the detection signal from the gaming area vibration sensor is input, it is determined that a fraudulent activity using vibration is being performed on the third sorting device 2550.

In this example, two vibration sensors 3003 are provided as the vibration sensors 3003 for detecting fraudulent activities caused by vibrations: a setting operation part vibration sensor and a game area part vibration sensor. (Is it around the setting change board 1311 and setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or around the third sorting device 2550 of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5?) One vibration sensor 3003 that can be specified may be provided. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether vibration is applied to the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether vibration is applied to the third sorting device 2550. can.

In addition, in normal times, in the firing permission signal setting process of step S113, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to notify the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted, and the player It is possible to shoot the game ball B when the handle 195 is operated.

In addition, in normal times, when the game ball B wins in a winning hole such as the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the normal winning hole 2003, or the big winning hole 2005, a detection signal is generated from the detection sensor corresponding to each of the winning holes. is input by the main control MPU 1310a, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. Specifically, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the symbol change is not performed and the game ball B On the other hand, when the detection of game ball B is enabled, when game ball B enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the symbol change is not performed. At the same time, the game ball B can be paid out.

In addition, during normal times, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. are This makes it possible to adjust the amount of light output from the light emitting member. Specifically, after displaying an image for adjustment on the effect display device 1600 by operating the press operation section 303, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by rotating the contact operation section 302. In addition, during the period when the effect using the touch operation part 302 or the press operation part 303 is being executed during the symbol change, the touch operation part 302 or the press operation part 303 is on standby for the effect. Therefore, even if the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated, the volume and light intensity cannot be adjusted during the prohibited period.

[25-2. Regarding unauthorized monitoring while changing settings]
Next, monitoring of fraudulent activity during setting change of setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 233. FIG. 233 is a time chart illustrating the monitoring status of fraudulent acts during the setting change of setting values.

When changing the settings, first open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 while the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off). (timing t1), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), the setting value becomes in a state in which it is possible to change the settings (change permission state). In such a change permission state, it is possible to change the setting value (setting value 1 to 6) each time the press operation section of the setting switch button 1311b is pressed, and then the setting key cylinder can be rotated counterclockwise. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a by 120 degrees toward , and performing the second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the OK key, and then the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the OK key was turned ON to the original position. The setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return the setting key cylinder to the OFF position (timing t4). In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), and after timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value can be changed. It becomes impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), a state in which it is possible to play the game is established. Become.

In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 168 and 169), but turns off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4. Until then, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and the subsequent The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. Since the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 170) is not started until the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, the switch input processing in step S104 and the fraud detection in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt processing are performed. The process, such as the firing permission signal setting process in step S113, is not executed and is in a standby state. In other words, for the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is possible to change the setting value (change permission state), but monitoring for fraudulent activity is not performed, and the A special period is set in which firing is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins in the winning hole. In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, information regarding the setting value being changed is output to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. This allows hall staff to know that settings are being changed.

Specifically, during the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, there is monitoring for fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section, and overall monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the gaming area section. I try not to run it. This is because in the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b, and the person other than the authorized worker who changes the setting value is using the magnet. This is because there is no room for fraudulent acts using In addition, when changing the setting values, even if the authorized worker who changes the settings has something that can generate magnetism, this will prevent it from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress interference with regular setting change work.

Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit and overall monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the gaming area are performed. I try not to. This is because in the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a or the setting changeover button 1311b, and a person other than the authorized worker who changes the setting value is fraudulently caused by vibration. This is because there is no room for action. In addition, even if an authorized worker applying vibration when changing settings is prevented from being detected as a fraudulent act due to vibration, it is possible to prevent legitimate settings changes from being detected. inhibition can be suppressed.

Also, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is not set. and prohibits the firing of game ball B. Thereby, even if the authorized worker who changes the settings of the set values touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being ejected, and it is possible to suppress interference with the authorized setting changing work. Further, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the change permission state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

In addition, the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, includes winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, normal winning opening 2003, and big winning opening 2005, and various gate parts (gate ), when the game ball B enters the ball, the main control MPU 1310a does not input detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor may not be performed, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be inputted but treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lottery, symbol change, and the detection of the game ball B Neither payout is performed, and as a result, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of changing the setting value, , it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Although not shown, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU 1310a inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning openings, gates, etc. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the out port 1008 is disabled, for example, the detection of the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the base monitor 1310h described above. It becomes possible to exclude it from the target (target for addition to the number of outs counter), and the game ball B that remained in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) etc. is detected in the change permission state and is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation where the output is counted (added to the out number counter).

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the touch operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member cannot be adjusted.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting change notification (setting change related notification) is being executed to notify that the setting is being changed. The settings change notification includes a voice repeating "Settings are being changed", a message saying "Settings are being changed!", and a lamp flashing in a color corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6 during the selection process. It is said that This setting change notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change permission state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame opening notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (display or voice saying "Frame is open", etc.), but in the change permission state, the main body frame open notification is not performed. The setting change notification is given top priority without the need for any changes. Note that the main frame opening notification and the setting change notification are executed in parallel, and the setting changing notification is given priority over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the setting changing notification is finished. The form can also be exemplified.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the output from the image, lamp, and speaker of the effect display device 1600, a notification from the function display unit 1400 is also sent as the above-mentioned setting change notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, and a second special In addition to the symbol display, the second special reservation number display, and the round display, there is a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state). A confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED is provided to indicate that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state). In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting change indicator in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the other LEDs are turned off. Thereby, in the change permission state, it is possible to understand through the notification from the function display unit 1400 that the game will not proceed.

Furthermore, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting change process in step S37 in the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 168 and 169) is completed (in step S222 of the setting change process, the setting key switch 1311a is It is determined that the switch 1311a has been turned off), and the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is performed. Then, it becomes possible to start the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 170), which includes the switch input processing in step S104, the fraud detection processing in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting in step S113. Processing etc. will be carried out. However, in this embodiment, until the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), the shooting of the game ball B is not permitted or the game ball B is detected when it enters the prize opening. It does not allow signal input, and maintains a state in which the game cannot be started. In other words, the period from timing t4 to timing t5 is a period in which even if the game ball B is won in the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, no detection signal is input and no illegal profits can be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the body frame 4 may be subject to impact from closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, it is necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor in the setting operation section, and to detect fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor in the gaming area. Monitoring, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation section, and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the gaming area section are in a standby state with no execution yet performed.

In addition, from the timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, it is possible to launch the game ball B, and it is possible to play games such as symbol variations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. state, and begin monitoring for various types of fraudulent activity as explained above in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times].

Further, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify you of this (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from timing t5, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. are started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An image (gaming start notification) is displayed to notify that the game is now available.

In addition, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the game ball B is not fired. Although the logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, in consideration of checking the firing operation using the handle 195 in the change permission state, The logic of the firing permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the permission is limited to the firing of game ball B. It is desirable to prevent the game from proceeding unfairly by preventing the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B enters the various prize openings or gates (gates). .

In addition, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the game ball B is not fired. The logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the firing of the game ball B is started from timing t5 (or timing t4). However, when the handle 195 is operated (touched on the handle 195) for the first time after the change permission state is ended and the firing of game ball B is permitted, the setting value is changed in the change permission state. A notification is being executed after the settings have been changed. The notification after a setting change is made by making a sound saying ``Settings have been changed,'' displaying a message saying ``Settings have been changed,'' and flashing a lamp. In addition, this post-setting change notification also applies when a person other than the authorized worker who changes the setting value changes the setting value due to fraudulent activity. 195). As a result, if a legitimate worker who changes the setting value executes a notification after changing the setting value even though the setting value has not been changed, the setting value will be changed due to fraudulent activity. This makes it possible for the outside party to know what has happened, thereby increasing deterrence against fraudulent acts.

In addition, in this example, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), the game ball B is not fired. The logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the firing of the game ball B is started from timing t5 (or timing t4). However, if you have been operating the handle 195 (contacting the handle 195) before allowing the game ball B to be launched, you must release the handle 195 once after the game ball B is authorized to launch. Unless the user touches (operates) the handle 195 again (by turning off the contact detection), the game ball B will not be launched. That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 has been ON before timing t5, unless the contact detection for the handle 195 detects an edge that changes from OFF to ON after timing t5, the contact to the handle 195 that has continued is ON. The game ball B is restricted from being ejected by invalidating the contact of the game ball B. As a result, even if a regular worker who changes the setting value touches the handle 195 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not shot out carelessly, and losses to the player can be surely prevented.

In addition, different from the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of the game based on the end of the change permission state, when the handle 195 is operated from the time before the launch of game ball B is permitted, the change to the handle 195 is While the contact is continued, the continued contact with the handle 195 may be made valid so that the game ball B can be fired from the time when the game ball B is allowed to be fired. In such a case, prepare to launch the game ball B by operating the handle 195 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can now start playing.

In addition, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from timing t5 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, and games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, and small win games can be played. Although it is assumed that the game can be played, it may be possible to play the game immediately at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, from timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the game ball B can be fired, and games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, and small win games can be performed, and the above-mentioned [normal Monitoring of fraudulent activities may be performed in accordance with the content explained in [Regarding fraud monitoring at times]. In such a configuration, during the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small An image (game start notification) may be displayed to notify that it is now possible to start a game such as a winning game.

As another example, after the power is turned on and before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 are performed. The configuration may be such that corresponding processing is performed in advance. With this configuration, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value is being changed (change permission state), but fraudulent activity is not monitored, and the game balls are not monitored. In addition to not allowing the ball B to be fired, the input of the detection signal may not be made valid when the game ball B enters the prize opening.

Further, in the above-described other example, the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 (the period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5) may include the magnetic sensor 2010, Although the vibration sensor 3003 is used to monitor fraudulent activity, it may be configured such that when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, the abnormal state is not notified. In addition, under normal circumstances, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being carried out, the value of the magnet goto counter or vibration goto counter is incremented by 1, but from timing t3 to timing t4. During the change permission state (which may include the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5), the magnet is The configuration may be such that the values of the goto counter and the vibration goto counter are not added. Even with this configuration, even if the authorized worker who is changing the settings brings a magnet close to the user or applies vibration, fraud due to the magnet or vibration may occur. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent monitoring of fraudulent acts from becoming an obstacle when changing the setting value.

Note that the various processes related to the above-mentioned change permission state may have various needs depending on the environment of the gaming parlor, so it may be possible to select and set them for each gaming parlor. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of a normal RAM clear switch instead of the change permission state, a state is created in which an operator at the game parlor can select which setting to perform various processes related to the change permission state; When the change permission state occurs thereafter, various processes related to the change permission state are executed using the selected settings. As a result, in the game hall A, touching the handle 195 is set to be valid even though unauthorized monitoring is not monitored in the change permitted state, and in the game hall B, unauthorized monitoring is set in the change permitted state. It can be set to non-monitoring and to disable contact with the handle 195, depending on the needs of the game center, such as whether or not you want to check the firing operation using the handle 195 in the change permission state. You will be able to match it.

[25-3. Regarding unauthorized monitoring while displaying setting value confirmation]
In the above, we explained that we do not monitor fraudulent activities while changing setting values, but regarding monitoring fraudulent activities while displaying confirmation of setting values, The system may be configured to have either a state in which fraudulent activity is not monitored while setting values are being displayed for confirmation, or a state in which fraudulent activity is partially monitored. First, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 234 in which fraudulent activity is not monitored during setting value confirmation display. FIG. 234 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraudulent activity when fraudulent activity is not monitored during confirmation display of setting values.

When displaying a confirmation of the currently set values, first check that the Pachinko machine 1 is powered on and that no symbol changes are being made (no holds are made). , open the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5), then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and press the clock in the same way as when changing settings. The setting key switch 1311a is turned on by turning the setting key switch 1311a by 60 degrees toward the direction and performing the first ON operation (timing t6). At this time, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time). do. Then, by turning the setting key switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees to return it to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key was turned ON, and turning it OFF (timing t7), the setting display is displayed. The setting value for 1310g is switched from being displayed to being hidden. In other words, during the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the setting value is displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), and after timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the setting value is confirmed. The display is not displayed (unconfirmable state). Then, by removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t8), a state in which it is possible to play the game is established. Become.

In addition, at timing t6 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, the current setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g unless there is no payout of game balls B such as prize balls. ing. In addition, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, game balls B such as prize balls will not be paid out. If the setting key switch 1311a is put out, the setting key switch 1311a may not be turned on (the setting key remains OFF), or the setting key switch 1311a may be turned on after the payout of game balls B such as prize balls is completed. The setting key may be turned on to display the current setting value on the setting display 1310g.

In addition, as another example, when displaying a confirmation display of the currently set setting values, in the same way as when changing the settings, the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on). Insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, turn the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and perform the first ON operation. By turning the key switch 1311a to the setting key ON and operating the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1, it is configured to enter a state in which confirmation display of the set value can be performed (confirmation display state). It's okay. In addition, when powering on the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a, if the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch, the state changes to a state where setting values can be changed (change permission state). On the other hand, it may be configured such that when the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch, the system shifts to a state (confirmation display state) in which a confirmation display of the set value can be performed. In such a configuration, by turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON and turning on the power without operating the RAM clear switch, a state in which the setting value confirmation display is performed (confirmation display state) is entered. , the state in which confirmation display of the set value is performed (confirmation display state) corresponds to the period from timing t6 to timing t7.

In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the setting value is displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), but monitoring for fraudulent activity is not performed, and the game ball B It is set as a special period in which the firing of the game ball B is not permitted and the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B wins in the winning hole. In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, information regarding the setting value being displayed for confirmation is output to the hall computer installed on the gaming hall side via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1. , so that the hall clerk can understand that the confirmation display is in progress.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, there is monitoring for fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section, and overall monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor of the gaming area. I try not to run it. This is because in the confirmation display state, an authorized worker who displays the setting value confirmation is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the authorized worker who displays the setting value confirmation is committing fraud using a magnet. This is because there is no room to do so. In addition, when displaying confirmation of setting values, even if the authorized worker carrying the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, this will prevent it from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress interference with regular confirmation display work.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit and overall monitoring of fraudulent activities using the vibration sensor of the gaming area are performed. I try not to. This is because in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker who displays the confirmation display for the set value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and there is a possibility that someone other than the authorized worker who displays the confirmation display may commit fraudulent acts using vibration. This is because there is no In addition, even if an authorized worker who performs the confirmation display applies vibration when displaying the setting value confirmation, this will prevent it from being detected as a fraudulent act due to vibration, and prevent the legitimate confirmation display work from being detected. inhibition can be suppressed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the logic of the firing permission signal that informs the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that firing of the game ball B is permitted is not set. and prohibits the firing of game ball B. Thereby, even if a regular worker who performs confirmation and display of the set value touches the handle 195, the game ball B can be prevented from being fired, and it is possible to suppress interference with the regular confirmation and display work. Furthermore, even if the player operates the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B cannot be fired.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, there are winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, and the big winning opening 2005, and various gate parts (gates ) When the game ball B enters the ball, even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Note that the detection of the game ball B by the detection sensor may not be performed, or the detection signal itself from the detection sensor may not be input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is disabled, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the lottery, symbol change, and the detection of the game ball B Neither payout is performed, and as a result, even if the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value, , it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Although not shown, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the main control MPU 1310a inputs detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to each of the winning openings, gates, etc. At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B ejected from the out port 1008 is disabled, for example, the above-mentioned measurement by the base monitor 1310h regarding the game ball B ejected from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is performed. It becomes possible to exclude it from the target (target for addition to the number of outs counter), and the game ball B that remained in the game area 5a due to a sling (ball jam) etc. is detected in a confirmation display state and is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation where the output is counted (added to the out number counter).

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated, the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, the screen of the effect display device 1600, etc. The amount of light output from the light emitting member cannot be adjusted.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A confirmation display notification (confirmation display related notification) is being executed to notify that the display is in progress. The confirmation display notification includes a voice repeating ``Confirmation display in progress'', a message display saying ``Confirmation display in progress!'', and a lamp flashing in a color corresponding to the set value from 1 to 6 during the confirmation process. There is. This notification during confirmation display is a notification (performance) that is performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame open notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification is normally performed (display or voice saying "Frame is open", etc.), but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is not performed. The notification during the confirmation display is given top priority without performing the above. Note that the main body frame opening notification and the notification during confirmation display are executed in parallel, and the confirmation display notification is given priority over the main body frame opening notification, and the main body frame opening notification is performed after the confirmation display notification ends. The form can also be exemplified.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, in addition to the images, lamps, and outputs from the speaker of the effect display device 1600, notifications from the function display unit 1400 are also sent as the above-mentioned confirmation display notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a status display, a normal symbol display, a normal reservation display, a first special symbol display, a first special reservation number display, and a second special In addition to the symbol display, the second special reservation number display, and the round display, there is a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state). A confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED is provided to indicate that the confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display in the function display unit 1400 is turned on, and all the other LEDs of the display are turned off. Thereby, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to understand through the notification from the function display unit 1400 that the game will not proceed.

In addition, the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7 (this may be a period that includes the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) includes the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, when the game ball B wins a prize in a winning hole such as the normal winning hole 2003 or the big winning hole 2005, even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the game ball B cannot be detected. However, if such a detection signal is input, the firing of game ball B is not permitted due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Even though it is a period in which no game ball B is entered into the winning slot, a warning performance C is executed to notify that the game ball B is illegally entered into the winning slot. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the confirmation display notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, when executing the warning effect C, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing confirmation display notification or body frame opening notification.

In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, it is not possible to allow the firing of the game ball B or to input a detection signal when the game ball B enters the prize opening, and the game is stopped. Although it is in a state in which it is not possible to start, this state is maintained until the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed (timing t8). In other words, the period from timing t7 to timing t8 is a period in which no detection signal is input even if the game ball B is won in the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, and no illegal profits can be obtained. In addition, since there is a possibility that the body frame 4 may be subject to impact from closing the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, it is necessary to monitor fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor in the setting operation section, and to detect fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor in the gaming area. Monitoring, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation section, and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the gaming area are not yet executed and are in a standby state.

In addition, from timing t8 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, it is possible to launch the game ball B, and it is possible to play games such as symbol variations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. state, and begin monitoring for various types of fraudulent activity as explained above in [Regarding fraud monitoring during normal times]. Furthermore, even before the timing t6 when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the game ball B can be fired, and the pattern changes and the jackpot can be prevented. The state is set in such a state that games such as games and small winning games can be played, and monitoring for various fraudulent activities is started in accordance with the content explained in the above-mentioned [Regarding fraud monitoring in normal times].

Further, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a state of waiting for the start of the game. An image is displayed to notify you of this (game standby notification). Then, during a predetermined period from timing t8, after the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small win games, etc. are started on the screen of the effect display device 1600. An image is displayed to notify that the game is now available (gaming start notification).

In addition, under normal conditions when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a should not be in a state where the setting key is turned on, but if such a state is reached where the setting key is turned on. At this time, warning effects A and B are executed to notify that the setting key has been turned on in an unauthorized manner using images on the effect display device 1600, lamps, and outputs from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON (timing t1) while the symbol is changing normally, the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. Until then (timing t2), warning effect A is being executed. Similarly, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (timing t3) without symbol fluctuations being performed all the time, the setting key switch 1311a will be turned OFF until the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF. During this period (timing t4), warning effect B is executed. Further, the warning effects A and B are executed with priority over the effects currently being executed. That is, when the warning performances A and B are executed, the performance in progress is stopped and the warning performances A and B are executed with the highest priority, regardless of whether symbol variations are being performed or not. Although the warning performances A and B are executed in the same manner, they may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not a symbol variation is being performed.

Additionally, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during the period of monitoring for fraudulent acts caused by magnets or vibrations, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker will be used to display the magnetic or vibrations for a predetermined period of time. An abnormality occurrence effect is being executed to notify the user of an abnormal state caused by the occurrence of an abnormality. In addition, in the abnormality occurrence production, the content of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration) is determined depending on which of the setting operation section magnetic sensor, gaming area magnetic sensor, setting operation section vibration sensor, and gaming area vibration sensor detects the abnormality. whether the abnormality was detected), the location where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the gaming area 5a, the area where the third sorting device 2550 Is the area nearby?). Further, the abnormality occurrence performance is executed with priority over the performance that is currently being executed. That is, when executing the abnormality occurrence performance, the performance in progress is stopped and the abnormality occurrence performance is executed with the highest priority regardless of whether symbol variation is being performed or not.

In addition, in this example, the firing of the game ball B is not performed during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7). Although the logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 is not set, in consideration of checking the firing operation using the handle 195 in the confirmation display state, The logic of the firing permission signal may be set during that period so that the game ball B can be fired when the operator operates the handle 195. However, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), permission is limited to the firing of game ball B. It is desirable to prevent the game from proceeding unfairly by preventing the detection signal from being input even if the game ball B enters the various prize openings or gates (gates). .

In addition, in this example, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), the game ball B is not fired. The logic of the firing permission signal that conveys permission to the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 is not set, and the game ball B is not fired from timing t8 (or timing t7). However, if the handle 195 is being operated (touching the handle 195) before the game ball B is allowed to be launched, the handle 195 must be stopped once after the game ball B is allowed to launch. Unless the handle 195 is touched (operated) again after being released (contact detection is turned OFF), the game ball B will not be launched. That is, even if the contact of the handle 195 has been ON before timing t8, unless the contact detection for that handle 195 detects an edge that changes from OFF to ON after timing t8, the contact of the handle 195 that continues is The game ball B is restricted from being ejected by invalidating the contact of the game ball B. As a result, even if a regular worker who performs confirmation display of setting values touches the handle 195 when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, When the game ball B is closed, the game ball B is not shot out carelessly, and losses to the player can be surely prevented.

In addition, different from the above, in consideration of speeding up the start of the game based on the end of the confirmation display state, if the handle 195 has been operated before the launch of the game ball B is permitted, the handle 195 While continuing the contact with the handle 195, the continued contact with the handle 195 may be made valid so that the game ball B can be fired from the time when the game ball B is allowed to be fired. In such a case, prepare to launch the game ball B by operating the handle 195 before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and immediately after closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. You can now start playing.

In addition, in this example, the game ball B can be launched from the timing t8 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, and games such as symbol variations, jackpot games, and small win games can be played. Although it is assumed that the game can be played, it may be possible to play the game immediately at timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. In other words, from timing t7 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the game ball B can be fired, and games such as symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, and small win games can be played, and the above-mentioned [normal Monitoring of fraudulent activities may be performed in accordance with the content described in [About Monitoring of Fraudulent Acts]. In such a configuration, during the period from timing t7 to timing t8, the main body frame 4 is not closed with respect to the outer frame 2, but on the screen of the effect display device 1600, symbol fluctuations, jackpot games, small An image (game start notification) notifying that it is now possible to start a game such as a winning game may be displayed.

As another example, the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7 (this may be a period that includes the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8) includes the magnetic sensor 2010 and the vibration sensor. 3003 may be used to monitor fraudulent activity, but when an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, it may be configured such that the abnormal state is not notified. Also, under normal circumstances, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being carried out, the value of the magnet goto counter or vibration goto counter is incremented by 1, but from timing t6 to timing t7. During the confirmation display state that is the period of The configuration may be such that the values of the goto counter and the vibration goto counter are not added. Even with this configuration, even if the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display brings a magnet close to the user or applies vibration when displaying the setting value confirmation, fraud due to the magnet or vibration may occur. No notification or addition is performed as an act, and it is possible to prevent monitoring of fraudulent acts from becoming a hindrance when displaying confirmation of set values.

Note that the various processes related to the above-described confirmation display state may have various needs depending on the environment of the gaming parlor, so it may be possible to select and set them for each gaming parlor. For example, when the power is turned on with the operation of a normal RAM clear switch instead of the confirmation display state, a state is created in which an operator at the game parlor can select which setting to perform various processes related to the confirmation display state; When the confirmation display state occurs thereafter, various processes related to the confirmation display state are executed using the selected settings. As a result, in the game hall A, touching the handle 195 is set to be valid even though unauthorized monitoring is not monitored in the confirmation display state, and in the game hall B, unauthorized monitoring is set in the confirmation display state. It can be set to non-monitoring and to disable contact with the handle 195, depending on the needs of the game center, such as whether or not to check the firing operation using the handle 195 in the confirmation display state. You will be able to match it.

Next, a case will be described with reference to FIG. 235 about a case in which fraudulent activity is partially monitored during the setting value confirmation display. FIG. 235 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraudulent activity when fraudulent activity is partially monitored during setting value confirmation display. Here, the differences from the case where fraudulent activity is not monitored during the setting value confirmation display described above will be explained below.

In this example, for the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the setting value is displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), but the game ball B is not allowed to be fired and the game ball is placed in the winning slot. A special period is set in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when B wins a prize, and among the fraudulent acts, only fraudulent acts in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are installed are monitored. There is.

Specifically, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, while the game area magnetic sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activity, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is used to monitor the confirmation display state. We monitor for fraudulent activities. This is because in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who performs the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a. A person other than the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display may commit an illegal act by bringing a magnet close to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed, resulting in unauthorized changes to the setting values. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, the detection signal will not be input, and it will not be possible to obtain fraudulent profits. Since this is a period in which fraud is not allowed, there is no need to monitor fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor.

Note that the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section is used not only in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in the period up to timing t8, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. We monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, monitoring for fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section is performed in normal times, when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is in the confirmation display state.

Similarly, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, while the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activity, the setting operation vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity. We are monitoring their behavior. This is because in the confirmation display state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and a regular worker who performs the setting value confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a. A person other than the authorized worker who performs the confirmation display may perform an unauthorized act such as applying vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed, resulting in unauthorized changes to the setting values. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunction.

On the other hand, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, even if the game ball B is entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, the detection signal will not be input, and it will not be possible to obtain fraudulent profits. Since this is a period in which fraud is not allowed, there is no need to monitor fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

Note that the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit is used not only in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, but also in the period up to timing t8 when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. We monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation section can be carried out normally, when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Regardless of the confirmation display state, the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored.

Additionally, during the period including the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8 (the confirmation display state may be the period from timing t6 to timing t7), fraud using the setting operation section magnetic sensor is prohibited. Fraudulent behavior is monitored using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, but if these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the image on the performance display device 1600 will show whether the magnetic or vibration An abnormality occurrence effect A is being executed to notify that an abnormal state is caused by the occurrence of. In addition, in abnormality occurrence performance A, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the abnormality are detected depending on whether the setting operation part magnetic sensor or the setting operation part vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The location where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are installed is notified. When abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t7 (or timing t8), which is the end of the confirmation display state in which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, Abnormality occurrence performance A is forcibly terminated. This is because in the confirmation display state, the authorized worker who displays the setting value confirmation is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and when the setting value confirmation display is performed, the authorized worker who displays the confirmation display is operating the setting key switch 1311a. It is not possible to exclude the possibility that the magnet was unintentionally brought close or vibration was applied. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out using magnets or vibrations, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence performance A that is currently being performed is not forced. It is scheduled to end.

As mentioned above, during the period that includes the confirmation display state from timing t6 to timing t8, fraudulent activities are monitored using the setting operation section magnetic sensor and setting operation section vibration sensor. However, even during normal times outside of this period, we monitor fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, use the gaming area magnetic sensor to monitor fraudulent activity, and use the setting operation unit vibration sensor. We are monitoring fraudulent activities using vibration sensors in the gaming area. In addition, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during such normal times, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will indicate that an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration will occur for a predetermined period of time. An abnormality occurrence effect B is being executed to notify that something has happened. Here, in abnormality occurrence performance B, the image of the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence performance A, only the image of the performance display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurrence The performance is executed in a manner that is less conspicuous than the performance B. This is because in the confirmation display state, the person displaying the confirmation display for the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a, and when displaying the confirmation display for the setting value, the authorized worker performing the confirmation display is not intentionally This is because we cannot exclude the possibility that the magnet may have been brought too close or that vibration may have been applied. In addition, in abnormality occurrence production B, the content of the abnormality (magnetic or vibration) is determined depending on which of the setting operation section magnetic sensor, gaming area magnetic sensor, setting operation section vibration sensor, and gaming area vibration sensor detects the abnormality. whether the abnormality was detected), the location where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, the area in front of the gaming area 5a, the area where the third sorting device 2550 The system notifies the user whether the area is in the surrounding area or not.

Further, as described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from timing t5 to timing t8, the outer frame 4 is A main body frame open notification is executed to notify the user that the main body frame 4 is in an open state. In addition, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t6 to timing t7, the pattern display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the set value is confirmed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A confirmation display notification (confirmation display related notification) is being executed to notify that the display is in progress. After opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on to enter the confirmation display state, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame opening notification is In addition, when the setting operation section magnetic sensor or setting operation section vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is executed with priority over the confirmation display state. The abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over the confirmation display notification.

[25-4. Regarding modification of fraud monitoring while changing setting values]
Regarding the monitoring of fraudulent activities while changing settings, we explained above that fraudulent activities are not monitored while changing settings. good. A case in which fraudulent acts are partially monitored during the setting change of such setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236 is a time chart illustrating a monitoring state of fraudulent activity in a case where fraudulent activity is partially monitored while setting values are being changed. Here, differences from the case where fraudulent acts are not monitored during the setting change of the setting values described above will be explained below.

In the above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU 1310a starts the main control power-on process (see FIGS. 168 and 169), but turns off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4. Until then, the setting change processing in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change processing), and the subsequent steps are not completed during the period from timing t3 to timing t4. The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited from being performed, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. In other words, the main control side timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 170) is not started until the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, so the switch input processing in step S104 and the fraud detection in step S112 in the main control side timer interrupt processing are performed. The process, such as the firing permission signal setting process in step S113, is not executed and is in a standby state. In contrast, after the power is turned on and before starting the setting change process in step S37, at least the switch input process in step S104, the fraud detection process in step S112, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 are performed. The configuration may be such that the processing (same processing) is performed in advance. With such a configuration, in this example, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value is being changed (change permission state), but the firing of game ball B is not permitted. In addition, we set a special period in which the input of the detection signal is not valid when the game ball B enters the winning slot, and also prevents fraud from occurring in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are installed. We only monitor fraudulent activity.

Note that before starting the setting change process in step S37, a process corresponding to the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 (same process) is performed in advance, and if any fraudulent activity is detected, the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch is detected. In the case where only the area where 1311a is provided is monitored for fraudulent activity, in that process, as in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112, when the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2010 or the vibration sensor 3003 is input, It is determined that fraud is being committed using magnets or vibrations, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are incremented by 1. However, in the main control power-on process, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 and the setting change process in step S37 is completed (when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off in step S222 of the setting change process) After making the determination), in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. Therefore, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out using a magnet or vibration, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are added (incremented). By clearing the RAM at the end of the change permission state, the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are set (initialized) to 0 (zero) as an initial value. In this way, when the change permission state ends, the values of the magnetic goto counter and the vibration goto counter are initialized, but in the change permission state, the person who changes the setting value can press the setting key switch 1311a or the setting changeover button 1311b. We cannot rule out the possibility that the person making the setting change unintentionally brought the magnet close to the device or caused vibration when changing the settings. Therefore, even if it is determined that fraudulent activity is being carried out using magnets or vibrations, there is little need to judge that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the values of the magnet goto counter and vibration goto counter are set to the initial values. We are planning to make it a reality.

Specifically, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, while the game area magnetic sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activity, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activity. We monitor for fraudulent activities. This is because in the change permission state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting changeover button 1311b. However, a person other than the authorized worker who is responsible for changing the setting value may commit an illegal act by bringing a magnet close to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed, and the setting value may be changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunctions such as being overloaded.

On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if game ball B is entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, no detection signal is input, and it is possible to obtain illegal profits. Since this is a period in which fraud is not allowed, there is no need to monitor fraudulent activity using the gaming area magnetic sensor.

Note that the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section is used not only in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period up to timing t5 when closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. We monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, monitoring for fraudulent activities using the magnetic sensor of the setting operation section is performed in normal times, when the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the change is permitted or not.

Similarly, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the game area vibration sensor is not used to monitor fraudulent activity, while the setting operation vibration sensor is used to monitor fraudulent activity. We are monitoring their behavior. This is because in the change permission state, the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the authorized worker who changes the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a or the setting changeover button 1311b. However, a person other than the authorized worker who is responsible for changing the setting value may perform an illegal act by applying vibration to the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is installed, and the setting value may be changed illegally. This is to eliminate the possibility of malfunctions such as being overloaded.

On the other hand, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if game ball B is entered into the winning slot due to fraudulent activity, no detection signal is input, and it is possible to obtain illegal profits. Since this is a period in which fraud is not allowed, there is no need to monitor fraudulent activity using the game area vibration sensor.

Note that the setting operation part vibration sensor is used not only in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, but also in the period up to timing t5, when the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed. We monitor for fraudulent activities. In other words, monitoring for fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor of the setting operation section can be carried out normally, when the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, or when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. The area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided is always monitored regardless of whether the change is permitted or not.

In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the setting value is set by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. A setting change effect is running to notify you that the settings are being changed. Note that the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 (this may be a period that includes the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5) includes the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, when the game ball B wins a prize in a winning hole such as the normal winning hole 2003 or the big winning hole 2005, even if the main control MPU 1310a inputs a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the game ball B cannot be detected. However, if such a detection signal is input, the firing of game ball B is not permitted due to the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Even though it is a period in which no game ball B is entered into the winning slot, a warning performance C is executed to notify that the game ball B is illegally entered into the winning slot. This warning effect C is executed with priority over the setting change notification and the body frame opening notification. That is, when executing the warning effect C, the warning effect C is executed with the highest priority without performing setting change notification or body frame opening notification.

Additionally, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5 (the change permission state may be the period from timing t3 to timing t4), fraud using the setting operation section magnetic sensor is prohibited. Fraudulent behavior is monitored using the vibration sensor of the setting operation unit, but if these sensors detect the occurrence of magnetism or vibration, the image on the performance display device 1600 will show whether the magnetic or vibration An abnormality occurrence effect A is being executed to notify that an abnormal state is caused by the occurrence of. In addition, in abnormality occurrence performance A, the content of the abnormality (whether magnetism or vibration was detected) and the abnormality are detected depending on whether the setting operation part magnetic sensor or the setting operation part vibration sensor detects the abnormality. The location where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are installed is notified. Then, when abnormality occurrence effect A is executed, at timing t4 (or timing t5), which is the end of the change permission state when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, Abnormality occurrence performance A is forcibly terminated. This is because in the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b, and when changing the setting value, the official operator changes the setting value. It is not possible to exclude the possibility that a regular worker unintentionally brought the magnet close to the magnet or caused vibration. Therefore, even if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out using magnets or vibrations, there is little need to determine that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the abnormality occurrence performance A that is currently being performed is not forced. It is scheduled to end.

As mentioned above, during the period including the change permission state from timing t3 to timing t5, fraudulent activities are monitored using the setting operation section magnetic sensor and setting operation section vibration sensor. However, even during normal times outside of this period, we monitor fraudulent activity using the setting operation unit magnetic sensor, use the gaming area magnetic sensor to monitor fraudulent activity, and use the setting operation unit vibration sensor. We monitor fraudulent activities using vibration sensors in the gaming area. In addition, if the occurrence of magnetism or vibration is detected during such normal times, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker will indicate that an abnormal state due to the occurrence of magnetism or vibration will occur for a predetermined period of time. An abnormality occurrence effect B is being executed to notify that something has happened. Here, in abnormality occurrence performance B, the image of the performance display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used, whereas in the abnormality occurrence performance A, only the image of the performance display device 1600 is used, and the abnormality occurrence The performance is executed in a manner that is less conspicuous than the performance B. This is because in the change permission state, the authorized worker who changes the setting value is operating the setting key switch 1311a or the setting switch button 1311b, and when changing the setting value, the official operator changes the setting value. This is because it cannot be ruled out that a regular worker may have unintentionally brought the magnet close to the magnet or caused vibrations. In addition, in abnormality occurrence production B, the content of the abnormality (magnetism, vibration detected), the location where the abnormality was detected (whether it is the area where the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a is provided, or the area in front of the gaming area 5a, the third sorting device 2550 The system notifies the user whether the area is in the surrounding area or not.

In addition, as described above, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 during the period from timing t3 to timing t5 after the power is turned on, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker , executes a main body frame open notification to notify that the main body frame 4 is in an open state with respect to the outer frame 2. In addition, in the change permission state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4 after the power is turned on, the symbol display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the effect display device 1600 are used to A settings change notification (setting change related notification) is being executed to notify that settings are being changed. After opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on and the power is turned on to shift to a change permission state. The settings change notification is given priority over the open notification, and if the setting operation section magnetic sensor or setting operation section vibration sensor detects the occurrence of magnetism or vibration in the change permission state, the main body frame Abnormality occurrence effect A is executed with priority over open notification and setting change notification.

[26. [Variation example of changing settings such as winning probability]
In the above example, the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state is controlled based on the result of the special lottery, and the game ball B is accepted into the first V winning hole 2007 or the second V winning hole 2008 during the small winning gaming state. In this case, the settings for controlling the transition to the jackpot game state, such as the probability of winning, are changed, but as shown in FIG. Or even if the settings such as winning probability are changed so that even if the game ball B is accepted in the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008 during the small winning gaming state, the transition to the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. good. Hereinafter, a modification example of changing settings such as the winning probability in a pachinko machine in which the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are not provided will be described as a second embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment has, instead of the accessory prize opening 2006 of the pachinko machine 1 of the above-described example (the first V prize opening 2007 and the second V prize opening 2008 are arranged inside), A second large winning hole 2006A (inside which the first V winning hole 2007 and the second V winning hole 2008 are not arranged) is provided, and the other configurations are the same.

[27-1. Game content of second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. , ``Small win'', ``Time saving (time saving) win'', and ``Probability change (probability change) win'') A special lottery result is drawn. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested (derived) to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variable time). In this embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the second special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance into the second starting port 2004 is preferentially suggested (derived). do. Note that game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 without prioritizing (deriving) the special lottery result corresponding to the acceptance into the second starting port 2004 (priority variation). The special lottery results may be suggested (derived) in the same order (sequential variation), or the first special lottery results may be suggested (sequentially varied) in accordance with the acceptance into the first starting port 2002 and the results depending on the acceptance into the second starting port 2004. The second special lottery result may be suggested (derived) in parallel at the same time (simultaneous variation).

In addition, the special lottery results that are drawn when game balls B are accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "lost", "small hit", "2R definite strange jackpot", "15R sure strange jackpot". ”, “15R normal jackpot”, etc. In this embodiment, the second special lottery result includes a "small win", while the first special lottery result does not include a "small win". In addition, while both the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result include a "small win", the second special lottery result is a lottery where the "small win" is more likely to be won than the first special lottery result. The probability may be set high.

If the special lottery results (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are "small wins", the When a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.88 s) has elapsed after the two major prize openings 2006A are in an open state in which game ball B can be accepted, a "small winning" game in which game ball B is closed and cannot be accepted is played. executed. The second big prize opening 2006A is provided in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the center accessory 2500, so if a "small win" is drawn, you can hit "right" and enter the first guide. A game ball B is hit into the passage 2521. In addition, in the small winning game of the second embodiment, although the period in which the second big prize opening 2006A is open is shorter than that in the jackpot game, it is possible to continue hitting the game ball so that it flows down the first guide passage 2521. For example, at least one game ball B can enter the second big prize opening 2006A in one small winning game. In addition, during the small winning game, the gaming state before the start of the small winning gaming state (such as the probability change state and time saving state described below) is maintained, and after the small winning game, the gaming state before the starting of the small winning gaming state continues. .

The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are "15R guaranteed strange jackpot" or "15R regular jackpot" In this case, after the grand prize opening 2005 becomes open to accept the game balls B, a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined limit number (for example, 10 balls) has passed into the grand prize opening 2005. ) Acceptance of game ball B, if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that brings game ball B into a closed state that cannot be accepted is repeated 15 times (a "jackpot") The game is executed. If the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R normal jackpot", after the jackpot game ends, the lottery is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The variation time of the special symbol to suggest the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result to the player is determined by a predetermined number of variations (for example, a suggestion that is the sum of the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion). Until the number of times (100 times) is reached, the time is shortened from normal and the time until the next "win" is drawn is shortened to a "time saving state". In addition, if the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are "15R guaranteed strange jackpot", after the "jackpot" game ends, go to the first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 until the next "jackpot". In addition to shortening the variation time of the special symbols to suggest to the player the first special lottery result and second special lottery result drawn by accepting game ball B of , the first special lottery result and second special lottery result are Controlling the transition to a "probability variable state (high probability state)" that increases the probability that the special lottery result will be a "win".

When the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 are "2R guaranteed strange jackpot", the second big winning hole 2006A , after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.2 s) has passed after the game ball B is in the open state where it can be accepted, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is considered as one round) that brings the game ball B into the closed state where it cannot be accepted. A "jackpot" game is executed in which the "jackpot" is repeated twice. In addition, after the end of the "jackpot" game, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are drawn by accepting game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 until the next "jackpot" is reached. In addition to making the fluctuation time of the special symbols shorter than usual to suggest the result to the player, a "probability variable state (high probability state)" that increases the probability that the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result will be a "win" )” to control the transition.

The second big prize opening 2006A and the big prize opening 2005 are mainly on the flow path of the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500, so the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be made to be a player. When the second big winning hole 2006A and the big winning hole 2005 are in the open state, when the game ball B is accepted into the second big winning hole 2006A and the big winning hole 2005, the payout device 580 is controlled by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls B are paid out onto the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the second grand prize opening 2006A and the grand prize opening 2005 are capable of accepting game balls B, by making the second grand prize opening 2006A and the grand prize opening 2005 accept the game balls B, many game balls B can be received. can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

Note that in the guide passage group 2520 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is easier to perform the driving operation on the first guide passage 2521 side than on the second guide passage 2522 side, but on the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 Since the possibility of being accepted into the big prize opening 2005 is lower than that from the side, it is possible to allow the player to select which path to perform the winning operation, making it difficult for the player to get bored with a variety of games. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest. Moreover, only the game ball B hit into the first guide path 2521 side can be accepted into the second big prize opening 2006A.

In this embodiment, the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole When the game ball B is received in the starting slot 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the special lottery result, so the start of suggesting the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Ru. The maximum number of reserved special lottery results to be held is 4 for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than 4, Even if game balls B were accepted in 2004, they were discarded without holding the special lottery results. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest special lottery results. The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing a plurality of LEDs by repeatedly turning them on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then indicating the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs. Note that in the following, the flashing of the LED for a predetermined period of time to suggest the first special lottery result to the player will be referred to as "fluctuation display of the first special symbol", and the blinking of the LED for a predetermined time to indicate the second special lottery result to the player will be referred to as "fluctuation display of the first special symbol". The blinking of the LED for a predetermined period of time is sometimes referred to as the "fluctuating display of the second special symbol," and the lighting combination pattern of the LEDs that indicates the first special lottery result to the player is the "stop symbol of the first special symbol." The LED lighting combination pattern that indicates the second special lottery result to the player may be referred to as the "stop symbol of the second special symbol."

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as a effect image. The performance image that suggests the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is created by displaying three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols side by side in the left and right direction, and by varying each symbol row. are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols in the three stop-displayed pattern rows form a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "lose", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is completed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) occurs depending on the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time for suggesting the special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 (the pattern row changes and the final image is changed) (time until display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Furthermore, in addition to displaying a performance image for suggesting a special lottery result by the performance display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 also performs a performance operation on the performance operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result drawn. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect in which the player operates the touch operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the section 301. In the player participation type performance, the push operation section 303 can be raised by the operation button lift drive motor 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation section 301.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, the light guide plate effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back It is possible to perform light emitting effects, display effects, etc. using the front effect unit 3200, etc. as appropriate, and it is possible to entertain the players with various effects, and to prevent the players from losing interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 allows the player to perform the correct operation when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation that should be performed in a player participation type performance in which the touch operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 is operated. The player will be notified accordingly.

Further, when the game ball B is received in the normal prize opening 2003, a lottery is performed on the main control board 1310 to determine whether or not the second start opening door 2411 is to be opened in a predetermined pattern. Then, the normal lottery results are indicated to the player on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 s to 6000 s, also referred to as normal variable time). In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol for indicating to the player the normal lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 is set to "6000 seconds" in the normal state, while in the probability variable state and "0.1 s" in the time saving state.

In addition, the probability of winning a normal drawing (probability that the normal lottery result will be a "normal winning") is "10/11", and if the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003, in most cases it will be a "normal winning". "hit" and the second starting port door 2411 becomes open. In addition, when the normal lottery result is a "normal win", the period during which the second starting door 2411 is kept open is set to "0.1 s" in the normal state, and "2 s" in the probability variable state and time saving state. .0s”. Therefore, in the normal state, the second starting port door 2411 is only open at intervals of 6000 seconds at the shortest, and since the period in which it is open is extremely short, it is very difficult to receive the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. is said to be difficult. Thereby, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts aimed at receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state. On the other hand, in the variable probability state, the second starting port door 2411 is not only frequently opened but also remains open for a long period of time, making it easy to receive the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. . It should be noted that the probability of hitting a regular figure may be different between the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the time saving state (low probability time saving state), or the variable probability state (high probability time saving state). For example, in the normal state The probability of hitting a normal figure is set to ``1/11'', and the probability of hitting a normal figure is set to ``10/11'' during a time saving state or a variable probability state, and the acceptance of game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is made extremely difficult in a normal state. On the other hand, by making it easier to receive the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state or in the variable probability state, it is made easier to accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the time saving state or in the variable probability state. It may be possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at accepting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state while allowing the acceptance to occur frequently. In addition, while the probability of winning a regular figure is set to zero (0/11) in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state), the probability of winning a common figure is set to "10/11" in the time saving state or the variable probability state. ” or “11/11” to further suppress fraudulent acts aimed at receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

In this way, in the normal state, the acceptance of game balls B into the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs, and the suggestion of the first special lottery result based mainly on the acceptance of the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 (the first A variable display of special symbols) is performed. On the other hand, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, since the driving operation of the game ball B is performed aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 occurs frequently, and A second special lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the starting port 2004.

In addition, if game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the normal drawing result is suggested by receiving the gaming ball B into the normal winning slot 2003, the normal lottery result is suggested. Since it is not possible to start the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery, the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery is suspended until the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery drawn earlier is completed. The maximum number of normal lottery results to be held is 4 for the normal winning hole 2003, and for more than that, even if game ball B is accepted into the normal winning hole 2003, the normal lottery results will not be held. Instead, I try to discard it. In addition, instead of this example, the game ball B is accepted into the normal winning slot 2003 between the start of the normal lottery and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested. In such a case, the normal lottery results may be discarded without being suspended. As a result, it is further possible to prevent the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the normal winning hole 2003 and the second starting hole 2004 during the normal state, and the second special lottery is held during the normal state to win the small hit. This can be prevented, and fraudulent acts aimed at receiving the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 in the normal state can be further suppressed.

In addition, the suggestion of the normal lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning hole 2003 is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 in the same way as the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the normal lottery results. The normal lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 by flashing an LED different from the LED indicating the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off for a predetermined period of time, and then depending on the combination of lit LEDs, the normal lottery result is indicated. Suggest results.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the normal state, the game ball B is hit aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the first special ball B is hit based on the reception of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002. The lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of the first special symbol). In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" in the normal state, after the end of the jackpot game, the control shifts to the time saving state, and the game ball B is hit aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500. A second special lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. If a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 suggestions, which is the sum of the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached without a jackpot occurring in the time saving state, the time saving state is ended and the state returns to the normal state. Then, the game ball B is hit again aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the first special lottery result is suggested based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 (first special lottery result). (variable display of symbols) is performed.

In addition, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R probability variable jackpot" or "2R probability variable jackpot" during the normal state or time saving mode, the transition to the probability variable state (high probability state) is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, and the center accessory A game ball B is hit aiming at the right side of 2500, and a second special lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of a second special symbol) based on the reception of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. The variable probability state continues to be executed until the next jackpot occurs, and when the second special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" during the variable probability state, the control shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, and a jackpot occurs in the time saving state. When a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 suggestions, which is the sum of the first special lottery suggestion and the second special lottery suggestion) is reached without doing so, the time saving state is ended and the transition to the normal state is controlled.

Furthermore, when the second special lottery result becomes "15R probability variable jackpot" or "2R probability variable jackpot" during the probability variable state, the control is performed to shift to the probability variable state (high probability state) again after the end of the jackpot game. In this way, the variable probability state continues until the state becomes "15R normal jackpot", and when the state becomes "15R normal jackpot", the control is made to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, if only the first special lottery result is pending without the second special lottery result being held, or if there is no pending second special lottery result, game ball B is inserted into the first starting port 2002. If it is accepted, the first special lottery result is suggested (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) even when the time is short or the probability is variable. Then, when the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" during the time saving state or the probability variable state, the transition to the time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, and the first special lottery result becomes "15R normal jackpot" during the time saving state or the probability variable state. When the game becomes a "probable variable jackpot" or a "2R probable variable jackpot," the game is controlled to shift to a variable probability state after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the probability of a "small hit" as the second special lottery result (small hit probability) is set to be very high compared to the jackpot probability (for example, the probability of a jackpot in a probability variable state is 10%). (approximately twice as much). In addition, during the time saving state or the variable probability state, the acceptance of game balls B into the second starting port 2004 occurs frequently and the second special lottery is held, so small wins frequently occur and the second big prize is won. The mouth 2006A remains open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.88 seconds).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, small hits occur frequently in the second special lottery when the time is short or the probability is variable, and even if the jackpot does not occur, the number of prize balls that exceed the shot amount is gradually increased. This is possible, and the longer the time saving state or variable probability state lasts, the more prize balls can be won. Therefore, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, not only the number of game balls B does not decrease, but also the number of balls held by the player can be increased by the prize balls obtained by the small hits that occur. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game in the normal state in which the consumption of game balls B is large, and the game in the normal state where the consumption of game balls B is small, and even if the player does not win the jackpot due to the occurrence of a small hit, the ball held by the player is It is now possible to control the game to be in a completely different state from the game executed in the increasing time saving state and the variable probability state.

[27-2. Changing settings such as winning probability in second embodiment]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the second embodiment, the probabilities of jackpots, small wins, etc. that are changed according to set values will be explained.

In the second embodiment, as in the above-described example, a table is selected according to the set value as a table (a hit determination table, a jackpot symbol determination table, a small win symbol determination table, etc.) used in a special lottery or the like. Note that the tables used in the special lottery etc. are provided for each set value, and each table is set so that at least some of the values are different.

As shown in FIG. 238(A), in this embodiment, "big hit probability" and "small win probability" are set corresponding to each of setting values 1 to 6.

In addition, the jackpot probability (ratio of the jackpot judgment value that indicates winning the jackpot in the hit judgment table), which is common to the first special lottery and the second special lottery, is set to a different value for each set value, and usually The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and second special lottery in the state and time saving state (low probability state) is "1/319" with setting value 1, "1/309" with setting value 2, and "1/309" with setting value 3. Setting value 4 is "1/299", setting value 4 is "1/289", setting value 5 is "1/279", and setting value 6 is "1/269". In addition, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and second special lottery in variable probability state (high probability state) is "1/30" with setting value 1, "1/40" with setting value 2, and "1/40" with setting value 3. Setting value 4 is "1/50", setting value 4 is "1/60", setting value 5 is "1/70", and setting value 6 is "1/80".

In this way, in the normal state and time saving state (low probability state), the higher the setting value is, the higher the jackpot probability becomes, but in the variable probability state, the setting value becomes higher, contrary to the normal state and time saving state. The probability of hitting the jackpot becomes lower. That is, in the normal state and the time saving state, the jackpot probability of set value 6 is the highest, while in the variable probability state, the jackpot probability of set value 1 is the lowest. In addition, the jackpot probability is not limited to being proportional or inversely proportional to the set value, and in some cases, the jackpot probability set to a set value lower than the set value is higher than the jackpot probability set to an arbitrary set value. It may be set to be higher.

As shown in FIG. 238(A), the small win probability (ratio of the small win judgment value indicating that the small win was won in the hit judgment table) in the first special lottery is "0" for all setting values. In the normal state and short-time state (there is no possibility of winning a small hit), it is difficult to obtain a prize ball by winning a small hit. The ratio of the small hit judgment value indicating that you have won the prize) is set to ``1/3'', which is common to all setting values, and is a very high probability compared to the jackpot probability, so in the probability variable state or time saving state, the Hits occur frequently, making it easy to obtain prize balls.

In a variable probability state, the jackpot probability is lowest at a setting value of 6, so the occurrence of a jackpot is less likely to occur (delay) than with a low setting value, and as a result, the variable probability state will continue for a long time, so the setting value is high. Indeed, the number of small wins that occur before a jackpot increases. That is, the higher the setting value, the more prize balls can be won by small hits, and the next jackpot is also guaranteed, and the higher the setting value, the higher the degree of advantage. In other words, in the variable probability state, the next jackpot is guaranteed regardless of the setting value, but the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than a jackpot is different for each setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the more likely it is to hit the jackpot. The expected value of the number of prize balls that can be won other than that is increasing.

In addition, the continuation period of the variable probability state is not limited to the next jackpot, but is the same as the normal state and the time-saving state, the predetermined number of fluctuations (100 times of suggestions, including the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery). By configuring the game to end when the game reaches the maximum value, and by making the jackpot probability higher as the set value becomes higher, the higher the set value, the more likely the jackpot will occur, thereby increasing the advantage. It is also good (so-called number-of-time cut-off). In this case, although the next jackpot is not guaranteed, the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than a jackpot is different for each setting value, and the higher the setting value, the lower the number of prize balls that can be obtained other than a jackpot. Although the expected value increases, it is possible to realize a game in which the player expects a jackpot to occur before the end condition of the variable probability state is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the game's interest. In order to achieve this kind of gameplay, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and time-saving state is set so that there is no difference in setting (uniform at 1/319), Only the jackpot probabilities in the first special lottery and the second special lottery may be set differently as described above.

In addition, in realizing the gameplay of the second embodiment, in the case of a set value lower than a specific set value, the jackpot probability in the probability variable state is made higher than the small win probability in the second special lottery, In the case of a set value higher than a specific set value, the jackpot probability in the variable probability state may be made lower than the small win probability in the second special lottery. Specifically, for example, setting value 1 sets the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and second special lottery in the normal state and time saving state (low probability state) to "1/250" and setting value 2 to "240". Setting value 3 is "1/230", setting value 4 is "1/180", setting value 5 is "1/170", setting value 6 is "1/160", The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and second special lottery in variable probability state (high probability state) is "1/25" with setting value 1, "1/24" with setting value 2, and "1/24" with setting value 3. Setting value 4 is "1/23rd", setting value 4 is "1/18th", setting value 5 is "1/17th", setting value 6 is "1/16th", while the second special lottery For example, the winning probability (ratio of the small winning judgment value indicating that the small winning has been won in the winning judgment table) may be set to "1/20" which is common to all set values.

In such a configuration, with setting values 1 to 3, the probability of a small hit in the second special lottery is lower than the probability of a jackpot in a variable probability state, so the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state is While the number is relatively small, at setting values 4 to 6, the probability of a small win in the second special lottery is higher than the probability of a jackpot in a variable probability state, so the prize that can be obtained by a small win in a variable probability state The number of pitches will be relatively large. In particular, when the setting value is set to 4 or more, the jackpot probability becomes lower than the small hit probability in the variable probability state, making it difficult for the jackpot to occur, and the feeling of expectation that the variable probability state continues for a long time, and the possibility of winning many prizes due to small hits. It is possible to create a game that gives a sense of expectation that the ball can be won. Further, history information of the probability of a jackpot occurring in a variable probability state and the probability of a small win occurring in a variable probability state after the power is turned on is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM, etc.) of the peripheral control unit 1511. By displaying various winning probability information based on history information on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to make the player aware that the probability of a small hit is higher than the probability of a jackpot in a variable probability state, and the game By giving the player a feeling of expectation that ``the set value may be 4 or more'', it is possible to provide new enjoyment and interest not previously available while continuing the game in a variable probability state. In addition, by allowing players to experience that the variable probability state continues for a long time and that it is possible to win many prize balls by hitting a small hit in the variable probability state, the player will be able to think, ``Maybe the set value is 4 or more.'' It can also be recognized, and in this respect, it can add new fun and interest that has not been seen before. As described above, beyond a certain set value (set value 4 in this embodiment), the game becomes more interesting by transforming the game into a game where many prize balls can be won through small hits. further improvement can be achieved.

In addition, as another embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the first special lottery and the second special lottery increases as the set value becomes higher in the variable probability state, and as the set value increases, the probability of winning the jackpot in the second special lottery increases as the set value increases. The probability of a small hit may be increased. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 238(B), the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the second special lottery in the normal state and time-saving state (low probability state) is as follows: "1/319", setting value 2 is "1/309", setting value 3 is "1/299", setting value 4 is "1/289", setting value 5 is "1/279" , the setting value is 6, which is "1/269". In addition, the small hit probability in the variable probability state (high probability state) is "1 in 31.9" with setting value 1, "1 in 30.9" with setting value 2, and "29.9 minutes" with setting value 3. Setting value 4 is "1/28.9", setting value 5 is "1/27.9", and setting value 6 is "1/26.9". In this way, in the variable probability state, the jackpot probability for all set values is increased 10 times as compared to the normal state and the time saving state.

In addition, the small winning probability in the second special lottery is "1/7" with setting value 1, "1/6" with setting value 2, "1/5" with setting value 3, and "1/5" with setting value 4. 1/4'', setting value 5 is ``1/3'', and setting value 6 is ``1/2''. Therefore, with the setting value 1, one small win will occur every seven times the second special lottery is held, whereas with the setting value 6, one small win will occur every two times the second special lottery is held. The frequency of occurrence of small wins increases. In other words, with setting value 6, small hits occur more frequently than with setting value 1, making it easier to obtain prize balls due to small hits, and the higher the setting value, the more prizes can be obtained in variable probability conditions and time saving conditions. Expectations for the number of pitches are increasing.

In addition to changing the settings of the jackpot probability and small hit probability mentioned above, or without changing the settings of the jackpot probability and small hit probability, etc., the degree of advantage can be increased by varying the determination ratio of the jackpot type for each setting value. It may be changed. As described above, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second special lottery is mainly executed and a small win can occur, while in the normal state, the first special lottery is mainly executed and a small win cannot occur. Therefore, the degree of advantage changes depending on the duration of the variable probability state or time saving state.

In addition, even in the variable probability state, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of a jackpot is, as in the normal state and the time saving state. Alternatively, if the special lottery result is a "miss" during the variable probability state, a so-called fall lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state. Further, in this case, the fall probability (probability of ending the variable probability state) may be the same for each set value without being different, or the fall probability may be set to be different for each set value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 238(C), the probability of falling in the high probability state may be set to "1/100", which is common to all setting values, and in this case, the falling lottery result may end the variable probability state. Although the probability of jackpot does not differ depending on the setting value, as shown in FIG. 238(B), the higher the setting value is, the higher the jackpot probability is. The degree of advantage is changed by changing the degree of advantage, and the degree of advantage increases as the set value is higher.

Furthermore, the fall probability in the high probability state may be changed for each set value. For example, as shown in FIG. 238(D), the fall probability is "1/80" for setting values 1 and 2, "1/90" for setting values 3 and 4, and "1/90" for setting values 5 and 4. A value of 6 may be used as "1/100".

In this case, with the setting value 1, the probability of hitting the jackpot is "1 in 31.9," while the probability of falling is set to "1 in 80," making the probability of hitting the jackpot approximately 2.5 times higher than the probability of falling. On the other hand, with the setting value 6, the jackpot probability is "1/26.9", while the fall probability is "1/100", so the jackpot probability is about 3.7 of the fall probability. It is doubled. In other words, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, and the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot is, thereby increasing the probability of winning the jackpot before the falling lottery result that ends the variable state is obtained, so that the higher the set value, the higher the advantage. There is.

In addition, if a falling lottery result that ends the definite variable state is obtained during the definite variable state, the jackpot probability will be returned from the probability of the definite variable state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery will be held. The control to shorten the variation time of special symbols to indicate the result to the player may be continued, and in this case, the number of variations after the end of the jackpot game is set to a predetermined number (for example, the first special symbol). The control may be terminated and the control may be shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the number of suggestions (100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery) has been reached. That is, if a fall lottery result that ends the variable probability state is obtained during the variable probability state, the variable probability state may be terminated and the transition to the time saving state may be controlled. In addition, when a falling lottery result that ends a certain variable state is obtained, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game has already been a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery). ), the transition to the normal state may be controlled without the transition to the time saving state after the variable probability state is ended.

In addition, if a falling lottery result that ends the definite variable state is obtained during the definite variable state, the jackpot probability will be returned from the probability of the definite variable state (high probability) to the probability of the normal state (low probability), and the second special lottery result will be changed. The variation time of the special symbol for suggesting to the player may be returned to the normal variation time. That is, if a fall lottery result that ends the variable probability state is obtained during the variable probability state, the variable probability state may be terminated and the transition to the normal state may be controlled. In this case, the fall lottery may be performed even during the time saving state, and if a fall lottery result that ends the time saving state is obtained during the time saving state, the time saving state is ended and the transition is made to the normal state. It may also be controlled.

In the example shown in FIG. 238(E), after the transition to the variable probability state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type that causes the variable probability state to end when the special lottery result becomes "jackpot" is calculated. By changing it, the degree of advantage can be changed. Specifically, if the first special lottery result that is mainly executed in the normal state (low probability non-time saving state) is a "jackpot", the occurrence ratio of the jackpot type will be the same for all setting values, "15R Probable Variable Jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and "2R Probable Variable Jacket" where the number of prize balls acquired is smaller than "15R Probable Variable Jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the jackpot game is finished. The occurrence ratio of "jackpot" is "40/100", and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 suggestions, which is the sum of the suggestions of the first special lottery and the suggestions of the second special lottery) The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time saving state until reaching the time limit is "20/100".

On the other hand, if the second special lottery result, which is mainly executed in variable probability state and time saving state, is a "jackpot", the occurrence ratio of jackpot type is different for each setting value, and for setting value 1, The occurrence rate of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "45/100", and the number of prize balls acquired even though it is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game. The occurrence ratio of "2R definite strange jackpot" which is smaller than "15R definite strange jackpot" is "15/100", and after the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state is controlled until a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached. The occurrence ratio of "15R normal jackpot" is "40/100".

With setting value 2, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "46/100", and the occurrence rate of the "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is determined to be 46/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" in which the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``19/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions (100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the second special lottery) is "35/100."

With setting value 3, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "47/100", and the occurrence rate of the "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is determined to be 47/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" in which the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``23/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions (100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the second special lottery) is "30/100."

With setting value 4, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "48/100", and the occurrence rate of the "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is set to 48/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" in which the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``27/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to the time-saving state until the number of suggestions (100 times (combined with the suggestions of the second special lottery)) is reached is "25/100".

With the setting value 5, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "49/100", and the occurrence rate of the "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is determined to be 49/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" in which the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``31/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot", which is controlled to shift to the time-saving state until the number of suggestions (100 times (combined with the suggestions of the second special lottery)) is reached, is "20/100."

With the setting value 6, the occurrence ratio of "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is "50/100", and the prize of a "15R probability variable jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game is set to 50/100. The occurrence rate of a "2R fixed variable jackpot" where the number of balls acquired is smaller than the "15R fixed variable jackpot" is ``35/100'', and after the end of the jackpot game, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until reaching the number of suggestions (100 times, which is the sum of the suggestions of the second special lottery) is "15/100".

In this way, if the second special lottery result that is executed mainly in the variable probability state and the time saving state becomes a "jackpot", after the jackpot game ends, a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, the suggestion of the first special lottery and the second The occurrence rate of the "15R normal jackpot" which is controlled to shift to a time-saving state until it reaches 100 suggestions (total of the suggestions of the special lottery) is changed for each setting value, and the higher the setting value is, the more the "15R normal jackpot" occurs. By reducing the ratio, it becomes difficult to end the variable probability state. As a result, the higher the set value is, the more difficult it is for the variable probability state to end once the transition to the variable probability state is controlled, making it possible to increase the number of jackpots, and to increase the number of prize balls based on small hits that occur during the variable probability state. acquisition becomes possible. In other words, the higher the set value is, the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls that can be obtained in a variable probability state.

In addition, the higher the setting value is, the lower the occurrence rate of "15R regular jackpot" is, while the occurrence rate of "2R probability variable jackpot" is higher than that of "15R probability variable jackpot" to suppress the number of prize balls acquired. It is possible to prevent an excessive advantage from being given to a person.

[27-3. Setting value suggestion performance of second embodiment]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured such that the expected value of the prize balls that can be won in the variable probability state and the expected value of the number of small wins that can be won differ depending on the set value. Specifically, in FIG. 238(A), the jackpot probability in the probability variable state with the setting value 1 is set to "1/30", and the small hit probability is set to "1/3", so after the jackpot game ends, The expected number of small wins that can be won from when the probability variable state is controlled to when the next jackpot occurs is 9 times. In addition, in one small winning game, about one game ball B can enter the second big prize opening 2006A, so the expected value of prize balls that can be won in one small winning game becomes "15 balls". That is, when the set value is 1, the expected value of prize balls that can be won by small hits in a variable probability state is "135 balls" (9 times x 15 balls). Similarly, when the setting value is 2, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state is ``13 times x 15 balls'' = ``195 balls'', and when the setting value is 3, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability condition is ``195 balls''. The expected value of the possible prize balls is ``240 balls'' which is ``16 times x 15 balls'', and the expected value of the possible prize balls that can be obtained by small hits in the probability variable state when the setting value is 4 is ``19 times x 15 balls''. "285 balls", the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state when the setting value is 5 is "345 balls" of "23 times x 15 balls", and a small hit in a variable probability state when the setting value is 6 The expected value of prize balls that can be obtained is ``390 balls'' (26 times x 15 balls).

In addition, in Figure 238 (B), when the setting value is 1, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by small hits in the variable probability state is ``60 balls'' of ``4 times x 15 balls'', and when the setting value is 2, the expected value of prize balls that can be obtained by small hits is in the variable probability state. The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit is "75 balls" of "5 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in the probability variable state when the setting value is 3 is "5 times x 15 balls". x 15 balls'', ``75 balls'', setting value 4, the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by small hit in variable probability state is ``7 times x 15 balls'', ``105 balls'', setting value 5, The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls", and the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained by a small hit in a variable probability state is "135 balls" of "9 times x 15 balls". ``195 pitches'' (13 innings x 15 pitches).

In this way, depending on the setting value, the expected value of the prize balls that can be won by small hits in the variable probability state and the expected value of the number of small hits that can be won differ (in Fig. 238 (B), it is partially the same) Therefore, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a jackpot game, it is possible to estimate the setting value according to the number of prize balls acquired in the small win game or the number of small win wins until the next jackpot occurs. can. Note that a performance suggesting a set value (setting value suggestion performance) may be executed in accordance with the number of prize balls acquired in the small winning game, the number of winnings of the small winning, and the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 239, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a gauge section having six scales 1600d from 1 to 6 to correspond to six levels of setting values on the effect display device 1600 as a setting value suggestion effect, The scale between the gauge parts is colored according to the number of prize balls won (number of payouts) by winning into the second big prize opening 2006A, and as the number of prize balls won by small hits increases, the gauge part changes from the initial display mode to the next stage. Alternatively, the gauge section may be colored in different colors (increasing the number of colored displays between the scales), so that all the spaces between the scales on the gauge section are colored to indicate a high setting value. Specifically, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. It is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this initial display mode, on the premise that the number of prize balls won is "0", only the leftmost one of the six scales is displayed in color as the corresponding setting value. The character 1600b indicates to the player that the gauge section indicates the set value by displaying the message "What is the set value...?" in the speech bubble 1600c. .

Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 1 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 2. , Out of the six scales on the gauge section, the second scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first and second scales from the left side are displayed in color) to indicate that the "setting value is 2 or more". At the same time, "Maybe 2 or more?" is displayed in a speech bubble 1600c as a line for the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 2 or more (FIG. 239(B)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 2 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 3, , Out of the six scales on the gauge section, the third scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first to third scales from the left side are displayed in color) to indicate that the "setting value is 3 or more". At the same time, "Is it 3 or more?" is displayed in a speech bubble 1600c as a line for the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 3 or more (FIG. 239(C)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 3 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 4, , Out of the six scales on the gauge part, the fourth scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first to fourth scales from the left side are displayed in color) to indicate that the "setting value is 4 or more". At the same time, "4 or more!?" is displayed in the speech bubble 1600c as the character 1600b's line to more clearly suggest that the set value is 4 or more (FIG. 239(D)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 4 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 5. , Out of the six scales on the gauge part, the fifth scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (the first to fifth scales from the left side are displayed in color) to indicate that the "set value is 5 or more". At the same time, "Over 5??" is displayed in the speech bubble 1600c as a line for the character 1600b to more clearly suggest that the set value is 5 or more (FIG. 239(E)).

Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game exceeds the expected value at setting value 5 and falls within the range of the expected value at setting value 6. , out of the six scales on the gauge section, the sixth scale from the left side is further colored and displayed (all scales are displayed in color) to suggest that the "setting value is 6", and also to indicate the character 1600b. ``You did it! It might be 6!!!'' is displayed in the speech bubble 1600c as a line to more clearly suggest that the set value is 6 (FIG. 239(F)).

Then, after the state in which the sixth scale from the left of the six scales on the gauge part is displayed in color (the state in which all scales are displayed in color), the final stage of display has already been reached, so it is a jackpot. The next jackpot game is started without changing the display on the gauge section depending on the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the game, or the ending condition of the probability variable state is satisfied for those with ending conditions. Until then, all the scales will continue to be displayed in color.

In addition, with all six scales on the gauge section displayed in color, further setting suggestions may be made separately.For example, with all six scales on the gauge section displayed in color, a jackpot game When paying out a prize ball in a subsequent small winning game, the highest setting is confirmed to definitively inform the player that the highest setting (setting value 6) is based on the detection of the ball entering the second big winning hole 2006A. A special performance lottery may be conducted to execute the performance. Specifically, with all six scales on the gauge part colored and displayed, every time a ball is detected in the second grand prize opening 2006A, a special lottery will be held where you can win at 1/1000. By winning, you will receive a special mode audio output (message voice saying "Congratulations on setting 6!"), various lamp lights on the door frame 3 in the special mode (lamp lights in rainbow colors using 7 colors), and a production display device 1600. For example, a maximum setting confirmation effect consisting of a special display (message display of "Congratulations on setting 6!") at the same time is performed at the same time. In this way, by executing the highest setting confirmation effect with all the scales displayed in color, it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction with the effect related to the setting suggestion that was performed earlier, and to further improve the performance without making the player bored. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of satisfaction, and to further improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs before all the scales are colored and displayed, the display mode of the gauge part is cleared after the jackpot, and as a result, a jackpot occurs and the jackpot game Later, each time the control is changed to a variable state, a setting value suggestion effect is executed to suggest the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, so the actual setting value is estimated by statistics on the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect. You will be able to do this. In other words, if the variable probability state is executed only once, the number of prize balls obtained by small hits during this variable probability state may differ from the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained according to the setting value. Although it is difficult to determine, if you count the number of prize balls won by small hits for each probability change state between jackpots, the proportion around a specific number of prize balls will increase, so it is possible to calculate the number of prize balls as the expected value. By comparing, it becomes possible to infer the setting value. In this example, it can be inferred that the setting value that is most likely to be suggested in the setting value suggestion effects performed multiple times is the actual setting value.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the display mode of the gauge section may be taken over until the probability change state ends without clearing the display mode of the gauge section. In addition, in this case, the six scales on the gauge section are set as the expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained in one probability change state or the number of small hits that can occur in one probability change state according to the setting value. All the scales may not be colored in the probability change state of times. As a result, it is possible to suggest a setting value based on the number of winning balls, the number of small hits, etc. obtained in a state of variable probability over a long period of time, and therefore it is possible to improve the reliability of the suggested setting value.

In addition, the above-mentioned various setting value suggestion performances are executed by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the prize balls obtained by the small winning game that is executed in a variable probability state during the period from the end of the jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot. Because it is based on numbers and not actual settings, the suggested settings may differ from the actual settings. In addition, information regarding the setting value (setting value information) may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and in this case, the prize obtained in the small winning game after the jackpot game is sent as the setting value suggestion effect. In addition to the number of pitches, the setting value may be suggested based on setting value information. Specifically, when the number of prize balls obtained in a small winning game after a jackpot game exceeds the expected value of the setting value indicated by the setting value information, the suggestion form of the setting value suggestion performance is not changed. Alternatively, if the number of prize balls obtained in a small winning game after a jackpot game is less than the expected value of the setting value indicated by the setting value information, the setting value or setting value information indicated by the setting value information by lottery etc. The suggestion mode of the setting value suggestion performance may be changed in accordance with the setting value less than or equal to the setting value indicated by . With this configuration, the reliability of the setting value suggestion performance can be increased, and the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion performance can be drawn to attention.

In addition, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 grasps the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the jackpot game, and when the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the total number of prize balls exceeds the expected value for each setting value. However, the setting suggestion in the variable probability state is not limited to this form, and may be done as follows.

For example, when there is a six-stage gauge section as described above, each time the peripheral control section 1511 determines that the number of prize balls paid out due to a small hit has reached a certain value, one scale 1600d is colored. , the final stage of coloring the scale 1600d may indicate to the player that the setting is high. In this case, it is preferable that the coloring of the scale 1600d at the final stage is achieved using the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in the small winning game after the winning game with the setting value 6 as a guide. If the expected value of the number of prize balls paid out in a small winning game after a winning game with a value of 6 is "195 balls", the payout of "195 balls + α balls (α < 195)" is colored on the final stage scale 1600d. An example of this is timing the achievement.

In addition, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the number of times the second special lottery result has reached a certain value is not based on the prize balls paid out as a result of a small hit. By coloring the two scales 1600d, and achieving the final stage of coloring the scale 1600d (for example, when the number of times the second special lottery result is a small hit reaches 80), you can set it to high. It may also be possible to suggest something to the player. In this case, the difficulty of achieving this will change depending on the relationship between the jackpot probability and the small win probability in the variable probability state at the actually set setting value. Depending on the display status of the gauge section (for example, the situation where the final stage is reached with one more scale coloring), the result of the second special lottery may be a small hit rather than a jackpot, in anticipation of the setting value suggestion. It is also possible to provide a new game experience by focusing on the game.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a new game in which the setting value is estimated according to the number of prize balls won in the small winning game after the jackpot game and the number of wins in the small winning game when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled in a variable probability state. can provide sex.

[28. Overall configuration of game board of third embodiment]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5A of the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 240. FIG. 240 is a front view of the game board of the third embodiment. In the game area 5a of the game board 5A of the third embodiment, predetermined benefits (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, advantageous games that give the player an advantage) are provided to the player by accepting the game balls B. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, an accessory winning opening 2006, and a V winning opening 2009 are provided. Further, within the gaming area 5a, a gate 2003A is provided which opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern as the game ball B passes through. Furthermore, the game board 5A is provided with an out port 1008 for discharging the game ball B that has been hit into the game area 5a and flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a out of the game area 5a.

The game board 5A, like the game board 5 described above, includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. The game board 5A also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100, and a game played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling contents.

The game board 5A also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, a symbol display device 3630 disposed above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined symbol, and a peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning holes 2001 that are always open to accept game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning holes 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the gaming area 5a, a gate 2003A that is provided at further different positions within the gaming area 5a so that the game balls B can pass through, and A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the ball B passes through the gate 2003A, and a game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B or the acceptance of the game ball B to the V prize opening 2009, and the second special lottery result. A prize winning opening 2006 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004; , and a V prize opening 2009 in which a chance of acceptance is given to the game ball B received in the accessory prize opening 2006.

In addition, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and includes a center accessory 2600 having four general winning openings 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a big winning opening 2005, and a gaming A frame-shaped center upper accessory 2700 provided above the center lower accessory 2600 in the area 5a, and a gate 2003A provided to the right of the center lower accessory 2600 and the center upper accessory 2700 in the game area 5a. , a right attacker unit 2800 having a second starting opening 2004, an accessory winning opening 2006, and a V winning opening 2009.

The center accessory 2600 of the table unit 2000 enters the center lower warp entrance 2605 that opens upward to be able to receive the game ball B at the upper part near the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and the center lower warp entrance 2605. A center lower warp exit 2606 is provided for releasing the game ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the center accessory 2600 has a left out port 2607 and a right out port 2608 for discharging the game balls B in the game area 5a to the outside.

In addition, the center accessory 2600 includes a warp passage distribution device 2680 that distributes the game ball B that has entered the center lower warp entrance 2605 to any of a plurality of center lower warp exits 2606, and a warp passage distribution device 2680. and a center lower back unit 2630 that decorates the rear of the vehicle.

The center accessory 2700 of the front unit 2000 is formed into a frame shape, and has a center upper warp entrance 2701 into which the game ball B can enter, and releases the game ball B that has entered the center upper warp entrance 2701 into the frame. It is provided with a center upper warp exit 2702 and a stage 2703 that rolls the game ball B released from the center upper warp exit 2702 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a.

The right attacker unit 2800 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate 2003A through which a normal lottery result is drawn by passing the game ball B, a second starting port 2004 that opens and closes according to the drawn normal lottery result, and a first starting port 2002. A prize winning hole 2006 opens and closes according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second starting hole 2004, and a game ball B received in the prize winning hole 2006 is placed in the V winning hole 2009 or It has a right distribution device 2810 that distributes to any of the losing openings, and a V winning opening 2009 that opens and closes the big winning opening 2005 by receiving the game ball B.

The back unit 3000 includes a back production unit 3600 having a symbol display device 3630 capable of displaying a symbol suggesting a special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. We are prepared.

[28-1. Center servant]
Next, the center accessory 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 241 to 256 and the like. FIG. 241 is a front view of the center accessory of the front unit in the game board of the third embodiment, FIG. 242(a) is a perspective view of the center accessory seen from the front, and FIG. 242(b) is a front view of the center accessory It is a perspective view of the servant seen from behind. Fig. 243 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the front left decoration part of the center accessory, as seen from the front, and Fig. 243 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the front left decoration part of the center accessory. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. Figure 244 (a) is a front view of the front left decorative body of the center accessory, (b) is a perspective view of the front left decorative body seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the front left decorative body from the back. FIG. FIG. 245 is a front view showing the pattern of the front left decorative body. FIG. 246 is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 241. FIG. 247(a) is a front view showing the relationship between the front left decorative body and the front left decorative board, and FIG. 247(b) is a front view showing the relationship between the front left decorative body and the center accessory base.

FIG. 248 is a front view of the center lower back unit in the center accessory, FIG. 249(a) is a perspective view of the center lower back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 249(b) is a front view of the center lower back unit seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 250 is an exploded perspective view of the center lower back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 251 is an exploded perspective view of the center lower back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 252(a) is a perspective view of the center lower rear decorative body of the center lower rear unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 252(b) is a perspective view of the center lower rear decorative body of the center lower rear unit viewed from the back. FIG. 253 is a front view showing the developed design of the center lower back decoration. FIG. 254 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. 248. FIG. 255 is an explanatory diagram showing the attachment of the center lower rear decoration body to the center lower rear front cover in the center lower rear unit. FIG. 256 is a front view showing the arrangement of the center lower back decorative board in the center lower back unit.

The center accessory 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 at the lower part of the game area 5a. The center accessory base 2600 includes a frame-shaped center accessory base 2601 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a front left decorative body 2610 attached near the left end of the front surface within the frame of the center accessory base 2601. , a front left decorative board 2602 attached to the rear side of the center lower accessory base 2601 behind the front left decorative body 2610, and a front left decorative board 2602 installed between the front left decorative board 2602 and the center lower accessory base 2601. A reflector 2603 (see FIG. 243, etc.).

Furthermore, the center accessory 2600 includes four general winning openings 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a big winning opening 2005. Four general prize openings 2001 are provided in the center accessory base 2601. In addition, the center accessory 2600 has a center lower warp entrance 2605 that is always open upward and allows the game ball B to enter, and releases the game ball B that has entered the center lower warp entrance 2605 into the game area 5a. A center lower warp exit 2606 is provided.

The center accessory 2600 also has a left out port 2607 that opens at the left end of the upper side of the peripheral wall 2601c of the center accessory base 2601 and discharges the game ball B out of the gaming area 5a, and It is provided with a right out port 2608 that opens at the right end of the upper side and discharges the game ball B out of the game area 5a.

A plurality of center lower warp exits 2606 are provided. The plurality of center lower warp exits 2606 include a first warp exit 2606a that opens directly above the first starting port 2002, and a second warp exit 2606b that opens adjacent to both left and right sides of the first warp exit 2606a. , a first warp exit 2606a and a third warp exit 2606c that opens at a position away from the second warp exit 2606b to the left. The game ball B released from the first warp exit 2606a is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. Moreover, the game ball B released from the second warp exit 2606b may be received into the first starting port 2002. Furthermore, the game ball B released from the third warp exit 2606c is not received into the first starting port 2002.

Furthermore, the center lower accessory base 2600 includes a center lower rear unit 2630 that closes the frame of the center lower accessory base 2601 from the rear, and an attacker unit 2670 attached to the lower right corner of the center lower accessory base 2601. , the game ball B, which is attached within the frame of the center accessory base 2601 and enters the center lower warp entrance 2605, is sent to a plurality of center lower warp exits 2606 (first warp exit 2606a, second warp exit 2606b, third warp exit 2606). and an in-warp passage distribution device 2680 that distributes the distribution to either of the exits 2606c).

The attacker unit 2670 has a big prize opening 2005, and the warp passage distribution device 2680 has a first starting opening 2002.

The warp passage distribution device 2680 includes a first distribution device that distributes game balls B that have entered the center lower warp entrance 2605 to either the left or right, and a second distribution device that distributes game balls B that have been distributed to the left side by the first distribution device. A second sorting device that sorts the game balls to either the third warp exit 2606c side or the third sorting device side, and the game balls B sorted to the right by the first sorting device and the third sorting device by the second sorting device. A third sorting device is provided for sorting the game balls B sorted to the device side to either the first warp exit 2606a or the second warp exit 2606b. The game balls B distributed to the right side by the first distribution device are sent to the third distribution device through the center lower back ball passage member 2635 of the center accessory 2600.

[28-1a. Center base]
Next, the center accessory base 2601 of the center accessory base 2600 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 241 to 243, FIG. 246, and the like. The center accessory base 2601 is made of transparent synthetic resin. The center accessory base 2601 has a flat base plate 2601a with a part of the rear surface in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, an opening 2601b penetrating the base plate 2601a from front to back, and an opening 2601b in the base plate 2601a. It includes a peripheral wall portion 2601c that projects forward from the periphery, and a rear wall portion 2601d that projects backward from the base plate 2601a and is inserted into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100.

The left side and lower side of the base plate 2601a in the center accessory base 2601 are formed in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 and the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000. The upper side of the base plate 2601a extends upward near the left end. The right side of the base plate 2601a extends vertically downward from the upper end, and the vicinity of the lower end extends to the right. An attacker unit 2670 having a big prize opening 2005 is provided in a portion extending to the right of this base plate 2601a. The opening 2601b of the center accessory base 2601 is provided to the right of the center of the base plate 2601a.

The peripheral wall portion 2601c of the center accessory base 2601 is provided so as to surround the upper side and both left and right sides of the outer periphery of the opening 2601b, and is open downward. The upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2601c is highest at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5A, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the left and right outer sides. The left end of the upper side of the peripheral wall 2601c extends to the vicinity of the arcuate left side of the base plate 2601a, and the right end extends to the right side of the base plate 2601a. A left out port 2607 is provided at the left end of the top side, and a right out port 2608 is provided at the right end of the top side.

Further, the left side portion of the peripheral wall portion 2601c extends downward in an arc shape from the left end of the upper side portion along the left side of the base plate 2601a. The left side of this peripheral wall 2601c extends forward from a part that is a certain distance from the left side of the base plate 2601a, and when assembled into the game board 5A, the game ball B can flow between it and the inner rail 1002. A gap can be formed. Further, the right side of the peripheral wall 2601c extends vertically downward from the right end of the upper side along the right side of the base plate 2601a, and passes through the left side of the part where the attacker unit 2670 is attached to the lower side of the base plate 2601a. It extends to the vicinity.

The center accessory base 2601 includes a decorative body attachment part 2601e for attaching the front left decorative body 2610 to a part surrounded by the opening 2601b in the base plate 2601a and the upper and left sides of the peripheral wall part 2601c. ing. In addition, the center accessory base 2601 has a plurality of lens parts 2601f, which protrude in a columnar shape from the base plate 2601a and are provided in an arcuate manner at intervals in the vertical direction, in the decorative body attachment part 2601e, and each It includes an annular decorative part 2601g provided on the peripheral edge of the front surface of the lens part 2601f, and a connecting part 2601h protruding forward from the base plate 2601a so as to connect the respective lens parts 2601f. .

The lens portion 2601f is formed into a convex lens shape that bulges in the front-rear direction at a portion inside the annular decorative portion 2601g. The lens portion 2601f can irradiate the light from the LED 2602a that emits dots on the front left decorative board 2602 provided at the rear forward while suppressing the diffusion of the light due to the lens effect. The plurality of lens portions 2601f are provided at portions corresponding to the circular portions in the transparent pattern portion 2614c of the front left decorative body 2610.

The decorative portion 2601g includes a plurality of rows of protrusions extending in a radial line centered on the center of the circular lens portion 2601f in the circumferential direction. This decorative portion 2601g can diffuse the light from the LED 2602a of the front left decorative board 2602 provided at the rear and irradiate it forward. The decorative portion 2601g is provided at a portion corresponding to the circular portion of the transparent pattern portion 2614c of the front left decorative body 2610. The decorative portion 2601g can be seen from the front (player side) through the annular portion of the transparent pattern portion 2614c of the front left decorative body 2610, and gives a three-dimensional effect to the pattern of the decorative layer 2612 of the front left decorative body 2610. can be granted.

The lens portion 2601f, the decorative portion 2601g, and the connecting portion 2601h are located inside the three-dimensional portion 2615 that bulges forward of the front left decorative body 2610 when assembled to the game board 5A. In the center accessory base 2601, the rear side of the lens part 2601f and the connecting part 2601h that protrude forward from the base plate 2601a is recessed forward than the rear surface of the base plate 2601a, and the reflector 2603 is installed in the recessed part. inserted.

[28-1b. Front left decoration]
Next, the front left decorative body 2610 of the center accessory 2600 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 244 to 247 and the like. The front left decorative body 2610 is attached from the front to a decorative body mounting portion 2601e provided on the left outer side of the opening 2601b inside the peripheral wall portion 2601c of the center accessory base 2601. The front and left decorative bodies 2610 include a transparent base sheet 2611, a decoration layer 2612 applied to the back side of the base sheet 2611, and a base layer 2613 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 2612. (See Figure 245).

The base sheet 2611 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

As shown in FIG. 245, the decorative layer 2612 forms a pattern portion 2614 consisting of a pattern of a palm tree. This decorative layer 2612 is colored by silk printing or offset printing.

The pattern portion 2614 is formed by the decorative layer 2612, and includes a portion where the decorative layer 2612 is not intentionally provided inside the pattern. This pattern section 2614 includes a main pattern section 2614a that is the subject, a sub-picture section 2614b that is the background of the main pattern section 2614a, and a transparent pattern section that has a higher light transmittance than the main pattern section 2614a and the sub-image section 2614b. 2614c. The main picture part 2614a is a part of a palm tree picture in the foreground, and the sub picture part 2614b is a part of a palm tree picture in the back side.

The translucent pattern part 2614c has a main pattern part 2614a, which is a trunk part of a palm tree in the foreground, a circular part consisting of a central circular part, an annular part concentric with the circular part, and a circular part in the foreground. It is located at the joints of palm trees. The circular portions of the transparent pattern portion 2614c are provided between the nodes of the palm tree in the foreground, and a plurality of circular portions (six in this case) are provided in the longitudinal direction of the trunk. The transparent pattern portion 2614c is not provided with the decorative layer 2612 and is transparent. Therefore, when assembled into the center accessory 2600, the decorative portion 2601g of the center accessory base 2601 placed at the rear can be seen from the front through the annular portion of the circular portion of the transparent pattern portion 2614c. (See FIG. 247(b)).

The base layer 2613 is for improving the coloring of the decorative layer 2612. The base layer 2613 of this embodiment is gray and makes it difficult for light from the rear to pass through. Thereby, the light from the rear can make the transparent pattern section 2614c appear brighter than the main pattern section 2614a and the sub-picture section 2614b. This base layer 2613 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

Note that in FIG. 245, the cross-hatched areas are areas where no pattern is applied, and are transparent areas of the base sheet 2611 without the decoration layer 2612 and base layer 2613.

The front left decorative body 2610 also includes a flat plate portion 2615, a three-dimensional portion 2616 that bulges forward from the flat plate portion 2615, and a first mounting hole 2617 that is a circular hole passing through the flat plate portion 2615. , a second mounting hole 2618 which is an elongated hole that penetrates the flat plate portion 2615 at a different position from the first mounting hole 2617, and a positioning hole 2619 that penetrates the flat plate portion 2615. In other words, in the front left decorative body 2610, the flat plate portion 2615 extends outward in a flange shape from the solid portion 2616 that bulges forward.

The three-dimensional portion 2616 of the front left decorative body 2610 is provided at the main pattern portion 2614a of the pattern portion 2614. In other words, the palm tree in the foreground of the picture is three-dimensionally formed by the three-dimensional portion 2616.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 244(b), the boundary between the main pattern part 2614a (shaded area in the figure) and the sub-picture part 2614b is located on the solid part 2616 side, and the sub-picture part A portion of 2614b extends toward the solid portion 2616. In other words, the three-dimensional portion 2616 has a bulged portion that is slightly wider than the main pattern portion 2614a. In other words, the main pattern portion 2614a is formed smaller than the three-dimensional portion 2616.

To be more specific, when the peripheral edge of the palm tree pattern (main pattern portion 2614a) extends from the three-dimensional portion 2616 toward the flat plate portion 2615, the three-dimensional portion 2616 side near the portion of the pattern that is in contact with the flat plate portion 2615 extends. Since the flat plate part 2615 side of the pattern faces forward, the three-dimensional palm tree (design) looks unnatural, and the difference between the pattern and the three-dimensional part 2616 makes the three-dimensional palm tree (pattern) look unnatural. There is a problem that the three-dimensional decorative effect is reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the peripheral edge of the palm tree pattern (the boundary between the main pattern part 2614a and the sub-pattern part 2614b) is located on the solid part 2616 side, so that the main pattern part 2614a is The peripheral edge portion does not face forward due to the flat plate portion 2615. As a result, the palm tree pattern (main pattern portion 2614a) does not look unnatural, and the decorative effect of the three-dimensional main pattern portion 2614a and three-dimensional portion 2616 can be reliably exerted.

The first attachment holes 2617 are provided at two locations near the upper left corner and near the lower right corner of the flat plate portion 2615. The inner diameter of the first attachment hole 2617 is approximately twice the diameter of the threaded portion 2604a of the attachment screw 2604 (see FIG. 247). The second attachment hole 2618 is provided near the upper right corner of the flat plate portion 2615. The length of the short axis of the second attachment hole 2618 is approximately twice the diameter of the threaded portion 2604a of the attachment screw 2604 (see FIG. 247). Positioning hole 2619 is provided adjacent to first attachment hole 2617. The inner diameter of the positioning hole 2619 is approximately twice the diameter of the positioning protrusion 2601i that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center accessory base 2601. Therefore, when the front left decorative body 2610 is assembled to the center accessory 2600, it is attached with a predetermined amount of wobble (play) in the direction along the surface of the base plate 2601a.

Further, the first attachment hole 2617, the second attachment hole 2618, and the positioning hole 2619 are formed in the flat plate portion 2615 in which the sub-picture portion 2614b of the pattern portion 2614 is provided. That is, the first attachment hole 2617, the second attachment hole 2618, and the positioning hole 2619 are not provided in the main pattern portion 2614a (solid portion 2616). As a result, the mounting screw 2604 for mounting the front left decorative body 2610 to the center accessory base 2601 through the first mounting hole 2617 and the second mounting hole 2618 does not hide a part of the main pattern part 2614a. , the main pattern portion 2614a can be clearly seen by the player, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the main pattern portion 2614a can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the first mounting hole 2617, the second mounting hole 2618, etc. are provided in the flat plate part 2615, they are provided at a position away from the three-dimensional part 2616. The holes 2618 and the like (attachment screws 2604) can be made less noticeable, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

The front left decorative body 2610 of this embodiment is formed by applying a decorative layer 2612 and a base layer 2613 to a flat base sheet 2611 to form an intermediate product, and then heating the intermediate product to a predetermined temperature. After the three-dimensional portion 2616 is expanded by air pressure forming or vacuum forming, the outer periphery is trimmed (cut) and a first attachment hole 2617, a second attachment hole 2618, and a positioning hole 2619 are bored. Since the front left decorative body 2610 is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost than an injection molded product, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the front left decorative body 2610 can be easily manufactured, the front left decorative body 2610 having different pattern portions 2614, three-dimensional portions 2616, etc. can be easily manufactured. Therefore, by replacing the front left decorative body 2610 with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. , it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the front left decorative body 2610 of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the exterior, which increases the weight on the pachinko machine 1. can be reduced.

The thickness of the front left decorative body 2610 (base sheet 2611) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease, and there is a risk that it will not be possible to maintain the desired shape due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 2616, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Moreover, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a possibility that the three-dimensional part 2616 cannot be formed into a desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the weight of the front left decorative body 2610 This is to prevent it from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since this front left decorative body 2610 is formed using a thin base sheet 2611 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, this front left decorative body 2610 can be placed in the desired position depending on the relationship between the first attachment hole 2617, the second attachment hole 2618, and the attachment screw 2604, and the relationship between the positioning hole 2619 and the positioning protrusion 2601i. Since it is attached to the center accessory base 2601 with a certain amount of wobbling, it can cope with expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. This can prevent the front left decorative body 2610 from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

Further, since the front left decorative body 2610 is attached with a predetermined amount of wobble, it can be attached to the center accessory base 2601 even if the flat plate portion 2615 has undulations due to molding.

Furthermore, since the mounting screws 2604 that attach the front left decorative body 2610 to the center accessory base 2601 are screws with a seat, there is no concentration of force when the front left decorative body 2610 is installed, and the front left Decorative body 2610 can be attached in good condition.

By the way, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part is , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape, so it is attached to the rear surface of the three-dimensional part (three-dimensional part 2616). It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the front left decorative body 2610 of this embodiment, a flange-like flat plate part 2615 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid part 2616 that bulges forward, and the flat plate part 2615 is provided with a first mounting hole 2617 and a first mounting hole 2617. Since the second attachment hole 2618 and the like are provided, the three-dimensional portion 2616 in which the main pattern portion 2614a is provided can be attached to the center accessory base 2601.

Further, as described above, the front left decorative body 2610 of this embodiment has the first attachment hole 2617, the second attachment hole 2618, etc. in the flange-shaped flat plate portion 2615 extending outward from the three-dimensional portion 2616. Since the three-dimensional part 2616 does not have a mounting boss for attachment like an injection molded product, the shadow of the mounting boss will not be reflected on the three-dimensional part 2616 when light is irradiated from behind. , the entire three-dimensional portion 2616 can be uniformly decorated with light.

When the front left decorative body 2610 is assembled to the center accessory 2600, the LEDs 2602a of the front left decorative board 2602 are located behind the plurality of circular parts in the transparent pattern section 2614c of the pattern section 2614. (See Figure 247(a)). Thereby, by appropriately causing the LEDs 2602a of the front left decorative board 2602 to emit light, the circular portions in the transparent pattern portion 2614c of the front left decorative body 2610 can be decorated with light emission independently.

[28-1c. Front left decorative board]
Next, the front left decorative board 2602 of the center accessory 2600 will be described in detail. The front left decorative board 2602 is attached to a portion of the center accessory base 2601 behind the decoration mounting portion 2601e, and holds a reflector 2603 between it and the center accessory base 2601. A plurality of LEDs 2602a are mounted on the front surface of the front left decorative board 2602. The plurality of LEDs 2602a are provided one by one at positions corresponding to the plurality of lens portions 2601f of the center accessory base 2601.

The front left side decorative board 2602 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 2602a or the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the front left decorative board 2602, the front left decorative body 2610 can be decorated with brighter light. Furthermore, the LED 2602a on the front left decorative board 2602 is a full-color LED. Furthermore, the decorative board 2602 on the left side of the table uses ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) for letters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LED 2602a to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the front left decorative body 2610, and the decorative effect of the front left decorative body 2610 can be reliably exerted.

This front left decorative board 2602 allows the circular portions of the transparent pattern portion 2614c of the front left decorative body 2610 to be independently illuminated through the lens portion 2601f of the center accessory base 2601 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 2602a. It can be decorated with luminous light.

In addition, in the front left decorative board 2602, components that do not emit light other than the LED 2602a (for example, a connector, a resistor, an LED driver, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light emitting decoration. ing.

[28-2. Center bottom unit]
Next, the center lower back unit 2630 of the center accessory 2600 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 248 to 256 and the like. The center lower back unit 2630 is attached to the center accessory base 2601 so as to close the opening 2601b of the center accessory base 2601 from the rear. The center lower rear unit 2630 has a box-like shape with the front open and the front end is attached to the rear side of the center accessory base 2601. The center lower rear unit 2630 includes a unit base 2631 whose front end is attached to the rear side of the center accessory base 2601, and a center lower rear front cover which is attached from the front inside the unit base 2631. 2632, a center lower rear decorative body 2640 attached to the rear side of the center lower rear front cover 2632, and a center lower rear decorative board attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2631 and with a plurality of LEDs 2633a mounted on the front surface. 2633, a board cover 2634 attached to the unit base 2631 so as to cover the rear side of the center lower back decorative board 2633, and a center lower back sphere passage member 2635 attached to the front of the center lower back front cover 2632. , is equipped with.

The center lower back unit 2630 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front, and when assembled to the center accessory 2600, a warp passage distribution device 2680 is arranged inside. This center lower rear unit 2630 decorates the rear of the warp passage intra-distribution device 2680 with a center lower rear decoration body 2640.

The center lower back ball passage member 2635 of the center lower back unit 2630 is attached to the right of the opening 2632a on the front surface of the center lower back front cover 2632. The center lower back ball passage member 2635 guides the game ball B received from the first sorting device of the warp passage sorting device 2680 downward in a spiral shape, and then returns it to the third sorting device of the warp passage sorting device 2680. It is delivered to the sorting device.

[28-2a. unit base]
The unit base 2631 of the center lower back unit 2630 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory base 2601 so as to close the opening 2601b of the center accessory base 2601 from the rear. This unit base 2631 has a box shape with an open front and is made of a transparent member. When viewed from the front, the unit base 2631 has three openings 2631a penetrating the rear wall at positions to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and a through hole 2631b penetrating the rear wall to the left of the three openings 2631a. It has . The three openings 2631a are provided at the rear of the three-dimensional portion 2646 of the center lower back decorative body 2640. The through hole 2631b is for discharging heat from the warp passage distribution device 2680 and the like to the rear.

Further, the unit base 2631 has a pair of flat partitions 2631c extending forward from a portion between each of the three openings 2631a. The pair of partition parts 2631c are inserted into the solid part 2646 of the center lower back decoration body 2640 when assembled to the center lower back unit 2630, and are between the left and right Shisa of the character part in the main pattern part 2644a. It is located in The pair of partitions 2631c allows the character part and the Shisa part of the main pattern part 2644a to be decorated with light emission separately.

[28-2b. Center lower back front cover]
The center lower rear front cover 2632 of the center lower rear unit 2630 has both left and right ends attached to both left and right ends of the front end of the unit base 2631. The center lower back front cover 2632 has a transparent flat plate shape and is curved so that both left and right end surfaces face forward. It is located near the front of the rear wall (see Figure 254). The center lower back front cover 2632 has an opening 2632a into which the solid portion 2646 of the center lower back decorative body 2640 is inserted. The inner shape of the opening 2632a is slightly larger than the outer shape of the three-dimensional portion 2646. Further, the center lower back front cover 2632 has a through hole 2632b penetrating back and forth on the left side of the opening 2632a. The through hole 2632b is provided in a portion of the unit base 2631 in front of the through hole 2631b.

The center lower back front cover 2632 has support grooves 2632c recessed from the rear to the front on the outside of each of the left and right ends curved forward (see FIGS. 251 and 255). Both left and right edges of the center lower back decoration body 2640 are inserted into these support grooves 2632c in a loosely fitted state.

The center lower back front cover 2632 also has a plurality of mounting bosses 2632d that protrude rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape, and a positioning protrusion 2632e adjacent to the mounting bosses 2632d and protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape. are doing. The attachment bosses 2632d are provided at two locations, near the upper end and near the lower end, near the center in the left-right direction. The attachment boss 2632d protrudes rearward longer than the thickness of the center lower back decorative body 2640. The upper attachment boss 2632d is inserted into the first attachment hole 2647 of the center lower back decoration body 2640, and the lower attachment boss 2632d is inserted into the second attachment hole 2648 of the center lower back decoration body 2640. Further, the positioning protrusion 2632e is inserted into the positioning hole 2649 of the center lower back decorative body 2640.

Furthermore, the center lower back front cover 2632 has positioning portions 2632f that are provided in the left and right support grooves 2632c and extend back and forth. This positioning portion 2632f is inserted into the positioning slit 2650 of the center lower back decorative body 2640.

The center lower back front cover 2632 has the center lower back decoration 2640 attached to the rear side so that the pattern (picture portion 2644) of the center lower back decoration 2640 can be seen from the front. Furthermore, the center lower rear front cover 2632 can be attached with the center lower rear decorative body 2640 having a predetermined amount of wobble.

[28-2c. Center bottom decoration]
The center lower rear decoration body 2640 of the center lower rear unit 2630 is attached to the rear side of the center lower rear front cover 2632. The center lower back decoration body 2640 includes a transparent base sheet 2641, a decoration layer 2642 applied to the back side of the base sheet 2641, and a base layer 2643 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 2642. (See Figure 253).

The base sheet 2641 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

The decorative layer 2642 forms a predetermined pattern portion 2644, as shown in FIG. 253. This decorative layer 2642 is colored by silk printing or offset printing. The pattern formed by the pattern section 2644 has the characters "Fate no Michi" written vertically in a position to the right of the center in the horizontal direction, and "Shisa" on both the left and right sides of the characters. ing. In addition, there is an arc-shaped "rainbow" below the two Shisa and a "wave" below it. Furthermore, on both the left and right outer sides of Shisa, there are multiple "palm trees" and multiple "hydraulic patterns" that are long on the left and right.

The pattern portion 2644 is formed by the decorative layer 2642, and includes a portion where the decorative layer 2642 is not intentionally provided inside the pattern. This pattern section 2644 includes a main pattern section 2644a that is the subject, a sub-picture section 2644b that is the background of the main pattern section 2644a, and a translucent pattern section that has a higher light transmittance than the main pattern section 2644a and the sub-image section 2644b. 2644c. The main pattern part 2644a is the part of the characters "Fate no Michi" and the parts of "Shisa" on the left and right sides thereof, and the sub-picture part 2644b is the remaining parts.

The transparent pattern portion 2644c is a portion of the outline (white line) of a shisa dog, a palm tree, etc. in FIG. 253. This transparent pattern part 2644c is made by printing transparent ultraviolet curable ink as a decorative layer 2642, and then irradiating it with ultraviolet rays of different wavelengths to form irregular crepe-like wrinkles (so-called crepe printing). As a result, light from the front and rear can be diffused, and point emission of the rear LED 2633a can be suppressed to make the LED 2633a less noticeable. Although this transparent pattern portion 2644c is a decorative layer 2642, a base layer 2643 is not provided on the rear side.

The base layer 2643 is for improving the coloring of the decorative layer 2642. The base layer 2643 of this embodiment is not provided on the rear side of the transparent pattern portion 2644c. The base layer 2643 of this embodiment is white and can transmit light from behind. Thereby, the entire pattern portion 2644 can be made to look bright (light-emitting decoration) by light from the rear. This base layer 2643 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

Further, the center lower back decoration body 2640 has a flat plate portion 2645 having a flat plate shape, and a solid portion 2646 that bulges forward from the flat plate portion 2645. In other words, in the center lower back decorative body 2640, the flat plate portion 2645 extends outward in a flange shape from the solid portion 2646 that bulges forward.

The solid portion 2646 is inserted from the rear into the opening 2632a of the center lower back front cover 2632 so as to protrude more forward than the surrounding area of the opening 2632a on the front surface of the center lower back front cover 2632. In addition, the center lower back decoration body 2640 has a first mounting hole 2647 which is a round hole passing through the flat plate part 2645 and a second long hole which penetrates the flat plate part 2645 at a different position from the first mounting hole 2647. It has two mounting holes 2648, a positioning hole 2649 passing through the flat plate part 2645, and positioning slits 2650 provided at both left and right ends of the flat plate part 2645.

The three-dimensional portion 2646 of the center lower back decoration body 2640 is provided at the main pattern portion 2644a of the pattern portion 2644. In other words, the part of the character ``Road of Destiny'' in the picture and the ``Shisa'' on both sides thereof are three-dimensionally formed by the three-dimensional portion 2646.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 252(a), the boundary between the main pattern part 2644a (shaded area in the figure) and the sub-picture part 2644b is located on the solid part 2646 side, and the sub-picture part A portion of 2644b extends toward the solid portion 2646. In other words, the three-dimensional portion 2646 bulges out in a slightly wider area than the main pattern portion 2644a. In other words, the main pattern portion 2644a is formed smaller than the three-dimensional portion 2646.

To be more specific, when the peripheral edge of the character and Shisa pattern (main pattern part 2644a) extends from the solid part 2646 to the flat plate part 2645 side, the solid part 2646 side near the part of the pattern in contact with the flat plate part 2645 extends. Since the flat plate portion 2645 side of the pattern faces forward, the three-dimensional Shisa (design) looks unnatural, and the three-dimensional shape due to the pattern and the three-dimensional portion 2646 faces to the side. There is a problem that the decorative effect is reduced. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the peripheral edge of the Shisa pattern (the boundary between the main pattern part 2644a and the sub-pattern part 2644b) is located on the three-dimensional part 2646 side, so the peripheral edge of the main pattern part 2644a does not face forward due to the flat plate portion 2645. As a result, the picture of the shisa (main picture part 2644a) does not look unnatural, and the decorative effect of the three-dimensional main picture part 2644a and the three-dimensional part 2646 can be reliably exhibited.

The first attachment hole 2647 is provided near the center upper end of the flat plate portion 2645 in the left-right direction. The inner diameter of the first attachment hole 2647 is slightly larger than the diameter of the attachment boss 2632d of the center lower rear cover 2632. The second attachment hole 2648 is provided near the center lower end of the flat plate portion 2645 in the left-right direction, and has a long hole extending vertically. The length of the short axis of the second attachment hole 2648 is slightly larger than the diameter of the attachment boss 2632d. The positioning hole 2649 is provided adjacent to the first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648, respectively. The positioning hole 2649 adjacent to the first attachment hole 2647 is a round hole with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the positioning projection 2632e of the center lower back front cover 2632. On the other hand, the positioning hole 2649 adjacent to the second attachment hole 2648 is an elongated hole extending vertically, and the length of its short axis is slightly larger than the diameter of the positioning protrusion 2632e.

The positioning slit 2650 extends in the horizontal direction near the center in the vertical direction at both left and right ends of the flat plate portion 2645. The positioning slits 2650 are each opened outward in the left-right direction of the flat plate portion 2645. The vertical width of the positioning slit 2650 is slightly larger than the vertical width of the positioning portion 2632f of the center lower back front cover 2632.

Both left and right ends of the center lower rear decorative body 2640 are inserted from the rear into the support grooves 2632c of the center lower rear front cover 2632, and the mounting boss 2632d of the center lower rear front cover 2632 is inserted into the center lower rear decorative body 2640. Since it protrudes longer than the center lower back unit 2630, when it is assembled into the center lower back unit 2630, it is attached with a predetermined amount of wobble (play) in the vertical direction and the front-back direction.

In addition, since the center lower rear decoration body 2640 is attached to the mounting boss 2632d that protrudes rearward from the front center lower rear front cover 2632, the center lower rear decoration body 2640 is attached from the rear with a mounting screw (not shown). Therefore, the mounting screw does not hide a part of the picture part 2644, and the picture part 2644 can be seen in good condition by the player, and the decorative effect of the picture part 2644 is ensured. can be demonstrated.

Furthermore, since the center lower back decoration body 2640 has a portion attached to the center lower back front cover 2632 near the periphery, the attached portion can be made less noticeable, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Can be done.

In addition, since the center lower back decoration body 2640 has both left and right ends curved forward, in addition to the three-dimensional portion 2646, the curvature can also give a three-dimensional effect (a sense of depth), and the box-shaped inner surface The rear surface and both left and right sides can be decorated.

The center lower back decoration body 2640 of this embodiment is produced by applying a decorative layer 2642 and a base layer 2643 to a flat base sheet 2641 to form an intermediate product, and then heating the intermediate product to a predetermined temperature. After expanding the three-dimensional part 2646 by air pressure forming or vacuum forming, the outer periphery was trimmed (cut) and holes such as a first mounting hole 2647, a second mounting hole 2648, and a positioning hole 2649 were bored. It is something. Since the center lower back decoration body 2640 is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost compared to an injection molded product, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. .

Further, as described above, since the center lower back decorative body 2640 can be easily manufactured, it is possible to easily manufacture the center lower back decorative body 2640 having different pattern portions 2644, three-dimensional portions 2646, and the like. Therefore, by replacing the center lower back decoration body 2640 with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. At the same time, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the center lower back decoration body 2640 of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the outside, and it reduces the weight of the pachinko machine 1. increase can be reduced.

The thickness of the center lower back decorative body 2640 (base sheet 2641) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease, and there is a risk that it will not be possible to maintain the desired shape due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 2616, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Furthermore, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a risk that the three-dimensional portion 2646 may not be formed into a desired (molding mold) shape during molding by air pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the center lower back decorative body 2640 This is to prevent the weight from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since this center lower back decoration body 2640 is formed using the thin base sheet 2641 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, this center lower back decoration body 2640 has the relationship between the first mounting hole 2647 and the second mounting hole 2648 and the mounting boss 2632d, the relationship between the positioning hole 2649 and the positioning protrusion 2632e, and the positioning slit 2650. Due to the relationship between the positioning part 2632f and the relationship between the left and right ends and the support groove 2632c, it is attached to the center lower back front cover 2632 with a predetermined amount of wobble, so it can cope with expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. be able to. This can prevent the center lower back decorative body 2640 from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

In addition, since the center lower rear decorative body 2640 is installed with a predetermined amount of wobble, it can be attached to the center lower rear front cover 2632 even if the flat plate portion 2645 has undulations due to molding. .

Furthermore, since the mounting screws (not shown) that attach the center lower rear decorative body 2640 to the center lower rear front cover 2632 are seated screws, force is concentrated when the center lower rear decorative body 2640 is attached. There is no problem, and the center lower back decoration body 2640 can be attached in good condition.

By the way, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part is , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape. It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the center lower back decoration body 2640 of this embodiment, a flange-shaped flat plate part 2645 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid part 2646 that bulges forward, and the first attachment hole 2647 is inserted into the flat plate part 2645. Since the second mounting hole 2648 and the like are provided, the three-dimensional portion 2646 in which the main pattern portion 2644a is provided can be attached to the center lower back front cover 2632.

Further, as described above, the center lower back decoration body 2640 of this embodiment has a first attachment hole 2647, a second attachment hole 2648, etc. in the flange-shaped flat plate portion 2645 extending outward from the three-dimensional portion 2646. Since the three-dimensional part 2646 does not have a mounting boss for attachment like an injection molded product, the shadow of the mounting boss will not appear on the three-dimensional part 2646 when light is irradiated from behind. Therefore, the entire three-dimensional portion 2646 can be uniformly decorated with light.

When the center lower back decoration body 2640 is assembled to the center lower back unit 2630, the center lower back decoration board 2633 is located at the rear (see FIG. 256). As a result, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 2633a of the center lower back decorative board 2633, the pattern of the center lower back decoration 2640 can be decorated with light, and the transparent pattern portion 2644c of the pattern can be made glittery by chijimi printing. Can be decorated with bright light. Further, the left and right shisa and the central character in the three-dimensional portion 2646 can be decorated with light emission independently.

Further, the center lower back decoration body 2640 has a through hole 2651 penetrating back and forth on the left side of the three-dimensional portion 2646. The through hole 2651 is provided at a location where the front and back direction coincides with the through hole 2632b of the center lower back front cover 2632 when the center lower back decorative body 2640 is attached to the center lower back front cover 2632. This through hole 2651 is for dissipating heat from the warp passage distribution device 2680 and the like to the rear.

When the center lower back decoration body 2640 is assembled to the center accessory 2600, a warp passage distribution device 2680 is located in front of the first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648, and the warp passage distribution device 2680 is located in front of the first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648. The first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648 are hidden from view from the front by the separating device 2680.

[28-2d. Center lower back decorative board]
The center lower rear decorative board 2633 of the center lower rear unit 2630 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2631, and a plurality of LEDs 2633a are mounted on the front surface. Further, the center lower back decorative board 2633 has a through hole 2633b penetrating back and forth. The through hole 2633b is provided at a location that matches the through hole 2631b of the unit base 2631 in the front-back direction when assembled into the center lower back unit 2630. This through hole 2633b is for dissipating heat from the warp passage distribution device 2680 and the like to the rear.

The center lower back decoration board 2633 can decorate the center lower back decoration body 2640 by emitting light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 2633a mounted on the front surface.

The front surface of the center lower back decorative board 2633 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 2633a and the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the center lower back decoration board 2633, the center lower back decoration body 2640 can be decorated with brighter light. can. Further, the LED 2633a of the center lower back decorative board 2633 is a full color LED. Furthermore, the center lower back decorative board 2633 is printed with ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with other decorative boards and electronic components such as the LED 2633a to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the center lower back decoration body 2640, and the decorative effect of the center lower back decoration body 2640 can be reliably exhibited.

Note that in the center lower back decorative board 2633, non-light emitting components other than the LED 2633a (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light emitting decoration. being done.

[28-2e. Board cover]
The board cover 2634 of the center lower rear unit 2630 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2631 so as to cover the rear side of the center lower rear decorative board 2633. The board cover 2634 has a plurality of slits 2634a penetrating back and forth. The plurality of slits 2634a allow the heat generated in the center lower back decorative board 2633 to escape to the rear. In addition, some of the plurality of slits 2634a are provided at positions that coincide in the front-rear direction with the through holes 2631b of the unit base 2631 and the through holes 2633b of the center lower back decorative board 2633 when assembled into the center lower back unit 2630. The heat from the warp passage distribution device 2680 and the like can be released to the rear.

[28-3. Center superior]
The center accessory 2700 in the table unit 2000 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 at the upper part of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 240. The center accessory 2700 is formed into a frame shape, and the back production unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 placed behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2700 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B hit in the game area 5a cannot enter the frame. It looks like this.

The center accessory 2700 has a center upper warp entrance 2701 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a center upper warp entrance 2701 that allows the game ball B that has entered the center upper warp entrance 2701 to enter the center upper warp entrance 2701. A center upper warp exit 2702 that can be released and opens in the frame, and a stage 2703 that can release the game ball B released from the center upper warp exit 2702 into the gaming area 5a after rolling in the left and right direction. , is equipped with.

The stage 2703 of the center accessory 2700 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) that is slightly higher than both sides. This stage 2703 is tilted so that the part that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction and the lowest part on both left and right sides are lowered toward the front. From there, the game ball B can be released to a region above the center accessory 2600 in the game area 5a.

When the center upper accessory 2700 is assembled on the game board 5A, the raised part of the center of the stage 2703 in the left-right direction is located directly above the center lower warp entrance 2605 of the center lower accessory 2600. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central part of the stage 2703, it is accepted into the center lower warp entrance 2605 with a higher probability than the game ball B that has flown down the left outer side of the center accessory 2700.

When the center accessory 2700 is assembled on the game board 5A, there is a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B between the center accessory 2700 and the outer rail 1001 on the right side from a position on the left with respect to the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the outer peripheral surface. It is formed so as to be able to move along the outer rail 1001, and is inclined so that the right end is lowered along the outer rail 1001. Therefore, when the game ball B enters (is hit) into the gap, it will be sent to the right attacker unit 2800 provided on the right outer side of the center accessory 2700. That is, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so that the game ball B flows on the right side of the center accessory 2700 (so-called hitting to the right), the game ball B is hit into the right attacker unit 2800. Can be done.

[28-4. Right attacker unit]
The right attacker unit 2800 of the table unit 2000 is provided on the right outer side of the center lower accessory object 2600 and the center upper accessory object 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. The right attacker unit 2800 has a gate 2003A, a second starting opening 2004, an accessory winning opening 2006, and a V winning opening 2009. In addition, the right attacker unit 2800 has a right sorting device 2810 that distributes the game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 to either the V winning hole 2009 or the losing hole.

The right attacker unit 2800 is provided with a gate 2003A at the upper end through which the game ball B can pass, and below the gate 2003A, game balls are selected according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2003A. A second starting port 2004 is provided that can accept B. In addition, the right attacker unit 2800 is provided below the second starting port 2004 with an accessory prize that opens and closes according to a special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. A port 2006 is provided. The game ball B that is not accepted into the accessory prize opening 2006 is released from the lower end of the right attacker unit 2800 into the game area 5a.

Below the right attacker unit 2800, there is one general prize opening 2001 provided in the center accessory 2600, and a special prize which is drawn by lottery by receiving game balls B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. A grand prize opening 2005 is provided which opens and closes depending on the lottery result or the acceptance of the game ball B into the V winning opening 2009.

The game ball B received in the accessory winning hole 2006 is distributed to either the V winning hole 2009 or the losing hole by the right sorting device 2810.

[28-5. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 of the game board 5A will be explained. The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and open at the front, and a back presentation unit 3600 attached to the upper part of the back box 3010.

A peripheral control board box 1520 in which a peripheral control board 1510 is housed is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010. Furthermore, a panel relay board 1710 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010, which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

[28-6. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
The back effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 257 to 259 and the like. FIG. 257 is a front view of the back production unit in the back unit. FIG. 258(a) is a front view of the back decoration in the back presentation unit, and FIG. 258(b) is a perspective view of the back decoration seen from the front. FIG. 259 is a front view showing the back decoration body unfolded together with the pattern. The back production unit 3600 is installed inside a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100.

The back presentation unit 3600 includes a box-shaped back unit base 3601 that is installed in a back box 3010 and has an open front, and a back left decorative board that is installed spaced apart from side to side on the rear side of the back unit base 3601. 3602 and the back right decorative board 3603, the back decoration body 3610 installed in the back unit base 3601, and the pattern display device 3630 installed in the back unit base 3601 in front of the back decoration body 3610. , is equipped with.

The back unit base 3601 is attached to the top inside the back box 3010. The back decoration body 3610 decorates the inside of the back unit base 3601, and can be seen from the front through the frame of the center accessory 2700 when assembled on the game board 5A. The back unit base 3601 has a mounting surface portion 3601a extending vertically at both left and right ends of the front end and facing forward, and a columnar mounting surface portion 3601a extending forward from the mounting surface portion 3601a for a length longer than the thickness of the back decoration body 3610. It has a mounting boss 3601b and a positioning protrusion 3601c projecting forward from the mounting surface portion 3601a. The attachment boss 3601b is inserted into the attachment hole 3617 of the rear decorative body 3610. The positioning protrusion 3601c is inserted into the positioning hole 3618 of the back decorative body 3610.

The back left decorative board 3602 has a plurality of LEDs 3602a mounted on the front surface, and by causing the plurality of LEDs 3602a to emit light as appropriate, it is possible to decorate the left side of the back and rear decoration body 3610 with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The rear right decorative board 3603 has a plurality of LEDs 3603a mounted on the front surface, and by causing the plurality of LEDs 3603a to emit light as appropriate, the right side of the center of the back and rear decoration body 3610 in the left-right direction can be decorated with light.

The rear left decorative board 3602 and the rear right decorative board 3603 have their front surfaces coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LEDs 3602a and 3603a and from the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the rear left decorative board 3602 and the rear right decorative board 3603, the rear decorative body 3610 It can make the decoration more bright and luminous. Further, the LED 3602a and the LED 3603a of the rear left decorative board 3602 and the rear right decorative board 3603 are full-color LEDs. Furthermore, the back left decorative board 3602 and the back right decorative board 3603 have characters and symbols with high brightness and saturation to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LEDs 3602a and LED 3603a to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing using colored (for example, yellow) ink. This makes it possible to make characters and symbols less noticeable.

Note that in the rear left decorative board 3602 and the rear right decorative board 3603, members that do not emit light (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than the LEDs 3602a and 3603a are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and do not emit light. Care has been taken to ensure that it does not interfere with the decoration.

The symbol display device 3630 is formed in a hemispherical shape and has one seven-segment symbol display section 3631. This symbol display section 3631 displays symbols in a variable manner and then stops displaying them in accordance with a special lottery result that is drawn when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. This is for displaying a predetermined pattern indicating the special lottery result. For example, when the special lottery result is a "jackpot", the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed.

[28-6a. Back Decoration]
The back decoration body 3610 of the back presentation unit 3600 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 257 to 259. The back decoration body 3610 is attached within the back unit base 3601. This back decoration body 3610 is for decorating the rear and left and right sides of the symbol display device 3630. The back decoration body 3610 includes a transparent base sheet 3611, a decoration layer 3612 applied to the back side of the base sheet 3611, and a base layer 3613 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 3612. (See Figure 259).

The base sheet 3611 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

The decorative layer 3612 forms a predetermined pattern portion 3614, as shown in FIG. 259. This decorative layer 3612 is colored by silk printing or offset printing. The pattern formed by the pattern section 3614 has predetermined (hibiscus) "flowers" spaced apart from each other on the left and right, and also has "splashes of waves" that spread radially. Furthermore, it has a radial pattern as the overall background.

This picture part 3614 has a main picture part 3614a which is the main part, and a sub-picture part 3614b which is the background of the main picture part 3614a. The main pattern section 3614a includes the "flower" and "sea spray" sections and their surrounding sections, and the sub-picture section 3614b includes the remaining sections.

The base layer 3613 is for improving the coloring of the decorative layer 3612. The base layer 3613 of this embodiment is white and can transmit light from behind. Thereby, the entire pattern portion 3614 can be made to look bright (light-emitting decoration) by light from the rear. This base layer 3613 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

Further, the back decoration body 3610 includes a flat plate portion 3615 having a flat plate shape, and a solid portion 3616 that bulges forward from the flat plate portion 3615. In other words, in the rear decorative body 3610, the flat plate portion 3615 extends outward in a flange shape from the solid portion 3616 that bulges forward. Further, the back decoration body 3610 has a plurality of round attachment holes 3617 passing through the flat plate part 3615 and a plurality of positioning holes 3618 passing through the flat plate part 3615.

The three-dimensional portion 3616 of the back decoration 3610 is provided at the main pattern portion 3614a of the pattern portion 3614. In other words, the "flower" and "splash of waves" in the pattern are three-dimensionally formed by the three-dimensional portion 3616.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 258(b), the boundary between the main pattern part 3614a (shaded area in the figure) and the sub-picture part 3614b is located on the solid part 3616 side, and the sub-picture part A portion of 3614b extends toward the three-dimensional portion 3616. In other words, the three-dimensional portion 3616 has a bulged portion that is slightly wider than the main pattern portion 3614a. In other words, the main picture portion 3614a is formed smaller than the three-dimensional portion 3616.

To be more specific, when the peripheral edge of the flower and wave splash pattern (main pattern part 3614a) extends from the three-dimensional part 3616 toward the flat plate part 3615, the three-dimensional part 3616 in the vicinity of the flat part 3615 in the pattern is in contact with the flat part 3615. Since the flat plate portion 3615 side of the pattern faces forward, the three-dimensional flowers and wave spray (pattern) look unnatural, and the pattern and the three-dimensional portion 3615 side face to the side. There is a problem in that the three-dimensional decorative effect due to this is reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the peripheral part of the flower or wave splash pattern (the boundary between the main pattern part 3614a and the sub-pattern part 3614b) is located on the solid part 3616 side, the main pattern part 3614a The peripheral edge of the plate does not face forward due to the flat plate portion 3615. As a result, the pattern of flowers and water splashes (main pattern portion 3614a) does not look unnatural, and the decorative effect of the three-dimensional main pattern portion 3614a and three-dimensional portion 3616 can be reliably exhibited.

The attachment holes 3617 are provided near the periphery of the flat plate portion 3615, and are provided on both upper and lower edges near the center in the left-right direction, and on both left and right edges. The mounting hole 3617 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting boss 3601b of the back unit base 3601. The positioning hole 3618 is provided adjacent to the attachment hole 3617 provided near both left and right ends. The positioning hole 3618 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the positioning protrusion 3601c of the back unit base 3601. Since the mounting boss 3601b of the back unit base 3601 protrudes longer than the thickness of the back rear decorative body 3610 (flat plate part 3615), the back rear decorative body 3610 can be attached to the front and rear when assembled to the back presentation unit 3600. It is installed with a predetermined amount of wobble (play) in the direction.

Further, the attachment hole 3617 is formed in the flat plate portion 3615 in which the sub-picture portion 3614b of the picture portion 3614 is provided. In other words, the attachment hole 3617 is not provided in the main pattern portion 3614a (solid portion 2616). As a result, the mounting screw (not shown) for attaching the back decoration body 3610 to the back unit base 3601 through the mounting hole 3617 does not hide a part of the main pattern part 3614a, so that it is not visible to the player. The main pattern portion 3614a can be visually recognized in good condition, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the main pattern portion 3614a can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the mounting hole 3617 is provided near the periphery of the flat plate portion 3615, the mounting hole 3617 (mounting screw) can be made less noticeable, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

The back decoration body 3610 has an opening 3619 in the center in the left-right direction that penetrates from front to back. This opening 3619 is for attaching a symbol display device 3630 placed in front of the back decorative body 3610 to the back unit base 3601. This rear decorative body 3610 is provided with three-dimensional parts 3616 in three parts: a part spaced apart from the inner peripheral edge of the opening 3619 at the center in the left-right direction, and a part spaced apart from the said part in the left-right direction. (See Figure 258).

In the back decoration body 3610 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 258(b), a predetermined portion of the flat plate portion 3615 is bent. Specifically, the portion between the solid portion 3616 at the center in the left-right direction and the solid portions 3616 on both left and right sides thereof is bent diagonally so that the outside in the left-right direction is located forward. Furthermore, the portions outside the three-dimensional portions 3616 on both the left and right sides are bent so as to extend forward, and the distal ends thereof are bent so as to extend outward in the left and right direction. Thereby, in addition to the three-dimensional portion 3616, the bending also gives the pattern of the pattern portion 3614 a three-dimensional effect (a sense of depth).

The rear decorative body 3610 of this embodiment is formed by applying a decorative layer 3612 and a base layer 3613 to a flat base sheet 3611 to form an intermediate product, and then heating the intermediate product to a predetermined temperature. After expanding the three-dimensional part 3616 by air pressure forming or vacuum forming, the outer periphery is trimmed (cut), a mounting hole 3617, a positioning hole 3618, and an opening 3619 are formed, and then it is bent into a predetermined shape. It is something that Since the back decoration body 3610 is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost than an injection molded product, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the back decoration body 3610 can be easily manufactured, the back decoration body 3610 having different pattern portions 3614, three-dimensional portions 3616, etc. can be easily manufactured. Therefore, by replacing the back decoration body 3610 with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. , it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the back decoration body 3610 of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the exterior, which increases the weight applied to the pachinko machine 1. can be reduced.

Note that the thickness of the back decorative body 3610 (base sheet 3611) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease and there is a risk that the desired shape will not be maintained due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 3616, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Furthermore, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a possibility that the three-dimensional portion 3616 cannot be formed into a desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the weight of the rear decorative body 3610 This is to prevent it from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since this rear decorative body 3610 is formed using a thin base sheet 3611 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, this rear decorative body 3610 is attached to the back unit with a predetermined amount of wobble due to the relationship between the mounting hole 3617 and the mounting boss 3601b and the relationship between the positioning hole 3618 and the positioning protrusion 3601c. Since it is attached to the base 3601, it can respond to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. This can prevent the rear decorative body 3610 from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

Further, since the rear decoration body 3610 is attached with a predetermined amount of wobble, it can be attached to the rear unit base 3601 even if the flat plate portion 3615 has undulations due to molding.

Furthermore, since the mounting screws (not shown) that attach the rear decoration body 3610 to the rear unit base 3601 are seated screws, there is no concentration of force when the rear decoration body 3610 is installed. The rear decorative body 3610 can be attached in good condition.

By the way, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensionally shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die. , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape. It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the rear decoration body 3610 of this embodiment, a flange-like flat plate part 3615 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid part 3616 that bulges forward, and a mounting hole 3617 is provided in the flat plate part 3615. Therefore, the three-dimensional portion 3616 provided with the main pattern portion 3614a can be attached to the back unit base 3601.

Further, as described above, in the back decoration body 3610 of this embodiment, the mounting hole 3617 is provided in the flange-like flat plate portion 3615 extending outward from the solid portion 3616. Unlike injection molded products, there is no mounting boss for mounting, so when light is irradiated from behind, the shadow of the mounting boss does not appear on the three-dimensional section 3616, and the entire three-dimensional section 3616 emits light uniformly. It can be decorated.

When the rear decoration body 3610 is assembled into the rear production unit 3600, a rear left decorative board 3602 and a rear right decorative board 3603 are respectively located behind the three-dimensional parts 3616 on both the left and right sides (see FIG. 257). reference). Thereby, by appropriately lighting the plurality of LEDs 3602a of the rear left decorative board 3602 and the plurality of LEDs 3603a of the rear right decorative board 3603, the rear decorative body 3610 can be decorated with light.

Furthermore, when the rear decorative body 3610 is assembled to the game board 5A, the mounting hole 3617 near the top side is hidden from view from the front by the upper back decorative body 3640, and the mounting hole 3617 near the bottom side is hidden by the lower back decorative body. 3641, it is hidden from view from the front. Further, the mounting holes 3617 near both left and right ends of the back decoration body 3610 are located outside the frame of the center accessory 2700 and are hidden from view from the front by the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 240).

[29. Overall configuration of game board of fourth embodiment]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 260. FIG. 260 is a front view of the game board of the fourth embodiment. In the game area 5a of the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment, predetermined benefits (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, advantageous games that give the player an advantage) are provided to the player by accepting the game balls B. A general winning hole 2001, a first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole 2004, a big winning hole 2005, a prize winning hole 2006, and a V winning hole 2009 are provided. Furthermore, within the gaming area 5a, a gate 2003A is provided which opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern when the gaming ball B passes through. Furthermore, the game board 5B is provided with an out port 1008 for discharging the game ball B that has been hit into the game area 5a and flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a out of the game area 5a.

The game board 5B, like the game board 5 and the game board 5A described above, includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a front component 1000 on the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is attached and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. The game board 5B also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is used to play games by driving game balls B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 that controls the contents.

The game board 5B also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, a symbol display device 3730 disposed above the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined symbol, and a peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the gaming area 5a, a gate 2003A that is provided at different positions within the gaming area 5a so that the game balls B can pass through, Variable winning slot 2011 that can accept game ball B according to the normal lottery result that is drawn when ball B passes through gate 2003A, and game ball B that is drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting port 2002. A large prize opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of game balls B according to the first special lottery result, and a plurality of non-motorized variable prizes that make it possible to accept game balls B by accepting the game balls B into the variable prize opening 2011. and a mouth 2012.

In addition, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower part of the gaming area 5a, and includes a center lower accessory 2600 having four general winning openings 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003A, and a grand prize opening 2005. , a frame-shaped center upper accessory 2700 provided above the center lower accessory 2600 in the gaming area 5a, and a frame-shaped center upper accessory 2700 provided to the right of the center lower accessory 2600 and the center upper accessory 2700 in the gaming area 5a. It is equipped with a right winning opening unit 2900 having a variable winning opening 2011 and a non-electric variable winning opening 2012.

The center accessory 2600 of the table unit 2000 enters the center lower warp entrance 2605 which is open upward so as to be able to receive the game ball B at the upper part near the center in the left and right direction of the game area 5a, and the center lower warp entrance 2605. A center lower warp exit 2606 is provided for releasing the game ball B into the game area 5a. Moreover, the center accessory 2600 has a left out port 2607 and a right out port 2608 for discharging the game balls B in the game area 5a to the outside.

In addition, the center accessory 2600 includes a warp passage distribution device 2680 that distributes the game ball B that has entered the center lower warp entrance 2605 to any of a plurality of center lower warp exits 2606, and a warp passage distribution device 2680. and a center lower back unit 2630 that decorates the rear of the vehicle.

The center accessory 2700 of the front unit 2000 is formed into a frame shape, and has a center upper warp entrance 2701 into which the game ball B can enter, and releases the game ball B that has entered the center upper warp entrance 2701 into the frame. It is provided with a center upper warp exit 2702 and a stage 2703 that rolls the game ball B released from the center upper warp exit 2702 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a.

The right attacker unit 2800 of the front unit 2000 has a variable prize opening 2011 that opens and closes according to the normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B in the gate 2003A, and a game ball It has a plurality of non-electric variable winning holes 2012 that can accept B.

The back unit 3000 includes a back production unit 3700 having a symbol display device 3730 capable of displaying a symbol suggesting a special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002.

[29-1. Center servant]
Next, the center accessory 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 261 to 273 and the like. FIG. 261(a) is an exploded perspective view of the front left decoration part of the center accessory, as seen from the front, and FIG. 261(b) is an exploded perspective view of the front left decoration part of the center accessory. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. Figure 262 (a) is a front view of the front left decorative body of the center accessory, (b) is a perspective view of the front left decorative body seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the front left decorative body from the back. FIG. FIG. 263 is a front view showing the pattern of the front left decorative body. FIG. 264 is an enlarged sectional view of the front left decorative body of the center accessory cut horizontally. FIG. 265 is a front view showing the relationship between the front left decorative body and the front left decorative board.

FIG. 266 is a front view of the center lower back unit in the center accessory, FIG. 267(a) is a perspective view of the center lower back unit seen from the front, and FIG. 267(b) is a front view of the center lower back unit seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 268 is an exploded perspective view of the center lower back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 269 is an exploded perspective view of the center lower back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 270(a) is a perspective view of the center lower rear decorative body of the center lower rear unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 270(b) is a perspective view of the center lower rear decorative body of the center lower rear unit viewed from the back. FIG. 271 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 266. FIG. 272 is an explanatory diagram showing the attachment of the center lower back decoration to the center lower back front cover in the center lower back unit. FIG. 273 is a front view showing the arrangement of the center lower back decorative board in the center lower back unit.

The center accessory 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 at the lower part of the game area 5a. The center accessory base 2600 includes a frame-shaped center accessory base 2601 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a front left decorative body 2620 attached near the left end of the front surface within the frame of the center accessory base 2601. , a front left decorative board 2602 attached to the rear side of the center lower accessory base 2601 behind the front left decorative body 2620, and a front left decorative board 2602 installed between the front left decorative board 2602 and the center lower accessory base 2601. A reflector 2603 (see FIG. 261, etc.).

In addition, the center accessory 2600 includes four general winning openings 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate 2003A, and a big winning opening 2005. Four general prize openings 2001 are provided in the center accessory base 2601. In addition, the center accessory 2600 has a center lower warp entrance 2605 that is always open upward and allows the game ball B to enter, and releases the game ball B that has entered the center lower warp entrance 2605 into the game area 5a. A center lower warp exit 2606 is provided.

The center accessory 2600 also has a left out port 2607 that is open at the left end of the upper side of the peripheral wall 2601c of the center accessory base 2601 and discharges the game ball B out of the gaming area 5a, and It is provided with a right out port 2608 that opens at the right end of the upper side and discharges the game ball B out of the game area 5a.

A plurality of center lower warp exits 2606 are provided. The plurality of center lower warp exits 2606 include a first warp exit 2606a that opens directly above the first starting port 2002, and a second warp exit 2606b that opens adjacent to both left and right sides of the first warp exit 2606a. , a first warp exit 2606a and a third warp exit 2606c that opens at a position away from the second warp exit 2606b to the left. The game ball B released from the first warp exit 2606a is accepted into the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. Moreover, the game ball B released from the second warp exit 2606b may be received into the first starting port 2002. The third warp exit 2606c is located directly above the gate 2003A, and the game ball B released from the third warp exit 2606c has a high probability of passing through the gate 2003A and being accepted into the first starting port 2002. do not have.

Furthermore, the center auxiliary accessory 2600 includes a center lower back unit 2630 that closes the frame of the center auxiliary accessory base 2601 from the rear, and an attacker unit 2670 attached to the lower right corner of the center auxiliary accessory base 2601. , the game ball B, which is attached within the frame of the center accessory base 2601 and has entered the center lower warp entrance 2605, is sent to a plurality of center lower warp exits 2606 (first warp exit 2606a, second warp exit 2606b, third warp exit 2606). and an in-warp passage distribution device 2680 that distributes the distribution to either of the exits 2606c).

The attacker unit 2670 has a big prize opening 2005, and the warp passage distribution device 2680 has a first starting opening 2002.

The warp passage distribution device 2680 includes a first distribution device that distributes game balls B that have entered the center lower warp entrance 2605 to either the left or right, and a second distribution device that distributes game balls B that have been distributed to the left side by the first distribution device. A second sorting device that sorts the game balls to either the third warp exit 2606c side or the third sorting device side, and the game balls B sorted to the right by the first sorting device and the third sorting device by the second sorting device. A third sorting device is provided for sorting the game balls B sorted to the device side to either the first warp exit 2606a or the second warp exit 2606b. The game balls B distributed to the right side by the first distribution device are sent to the third distribution device through the center lower back ball passage member 2635 of the center accessory 2600.

[29-1a. Center base]
Next, the center accessory base 2601 of the center accessory base 2600 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 260, 261, 264, 265, and the like. The center accessory base 2601 is made of transparent synthetic resin. The center accessory base 2601 has a flat base plate 2601a with a part of the rear surface in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, an opening 2601b penetrating the base plate 2601a from front to back, and an opening 2601b in the base plate 2601a. It includes a peripheral wall portion 2601c that projects forward from the periphery, and a rear wall portion 2601d that projects backward from the base plate 2601a and is inserted into the opening 1102 of the game panel 1100.

The left side and lower side of the base plate 2601a in the center accessory base 2601 are formed in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 and the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000. The upper side of the base plate 2601a extends upward near the left end. The right side of the base plate 2601a extends vertically downward from the upper end, and the vicinity of the lower end extends to the right. An attacker unit 2670 having a big prize opening 2005 is provided in a portion extending to the right of this base plate 2601a. The opening 2601b of the center accessory base 2601 is provided to the right of the center of the base plate 2601a.

The peripheral wall portion 2601c of the center accessory base 2601 is provided so as to surround the upper side and both left and right sides of the outer periphery of the opening 2601b, and is open downward. The upper side of the peripheral wall portion 2601c is highest at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a when assembled to the game board 5A, and is inclined so as to become lower toward both the left and right outer sides. The left end of the upper side of the peripheral wall 2601c extends to the vicinity of the arcuate left side of the base plate 2601a, and the right end extends to the right side of the base plate 2601a. A left out port 2607 is provided at the left end of the top side, and a right out port 2608 is provided at the right end of the top side.

Further, the left side portion of the peripheral wall portion 2601c extends downward in an arc shape from the left end of the upper side portion along the left side of the base plate 2601a. The left side of this peripheral wall 2601c extends forward from a part that is a certain distance from the left side of the base plate 2601a, and when assembled into the game board 5A, the game ball B can flow between it and the inner rail 1002. A gap can be formed. Further, the right side of the peripheral wall 2601c extends vertically downward from the right end of the upper side along the right side of the base plate 2601a, and passes through the left side of the part where the attacker unit 2670 is attached to the lower side of the base plate 2601a. It extends to the vicinity.

The center accessory base 2601 includes a decorative body attachment part 2601e for attaching the front left decorative body 2620 to a part surrounded by the opening 2601b in the base plate 2601a and the upper and left sides of the peripheral wall part 2601c. ing. In addition, the center accessory base 2601 has a plurality of lens parts 2601f, which protrude in a columnar shape from the base plate 2601a and are provided in an arcuate manner at intervals in the vertical direction, in the decoration attachment part 2601e, and each It includes an annular decorative part 2601g provided on the peripheral edge of the front surface of the lens part 2601f, and a connecting part 2601h protruding forward from the base plate 2601a so as to connect the respective lens parts 2601f. .

The lens portion 2601f is formed into a convex lens shape that bulges in the front-rear direction at a portion inside the annular decorative portion 2601g. The lens portion 2601f can irradiate the light from the LED 2602a that emits point-like light on the front left decorative board 2602 provided at the rear forward while suppressing the diffusion of the light due to the lens effect. The plurality of lens portions 2601f are provided at a portion of the front left decorative body 2620 that corresponds to the transparent pattern portion 2614c (the portion of the Chinese numerals).

The decorative portion 2601g includes a plurality of rows of protrusions extending in a radial line centered on the center of the circular lens portion 2601f in the circumferential direction. This decorative portion 2601g can diffuse the light from the LED 2602a of the front left decorative board 2602 provided at the rear and irradiate it forward. The decorative portion 2601g is provided behind the circular portion of the front left decorative body 2620 where the transparent pattern portion 2614c (the portion with Chinese numerals) is provided.

The lens portion 2601f, the decorative portion 2601g, and the connecting portion 2601h are located inside the three-dimensional portion 2615 that bulges forward of the front left decorative body 2620 when assembled to the game board 5B. In the center accessory base 2601, the rear side of the lens part 2601f and the connecting part 2601h that protrude forward from the base plate 2601a is recessed forward than the rear surface of the base plate 2601a, and the reflector 2603 is installed in the recessed part. inserted.

[29-1b. Front left decoration]
Next, the front left decorative body 2620 of the center accessory 2600 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 262 to 265 and the like. The front left decorative body 2620 is attached from the front to a decorative body mounting portion 2601e provided on the left outer side of the opening 2601b inside the peripheral wall portion 2601c of the center accessory base 2601. The front and left decorative bodies 2620 include a transparent base sheet 2621, a decoration layer 2622 applied to the back side of the base sheet 2621, and a base layer 2623 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 2622. (See Figure 263).

The base sheet 2621 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

As shown in FIG. 263, the decorative layer 2622 forms a pattern portion 2624 consisting of a bamboo pattern. This decorative layer 2622 is colored by silk printing or offset printing.

The pattern portion 2624 is formed by the decorative layer 2622. This pattern section 2624 has a main pattern section 2624a as a main body, and a transparent pattern section 2624c having a higher light transmittance than the main pattern section 2624a. The main pattern portion 2624a is a portion of a bamboo pattern, and the transparent pattern portion 2624c is a portion of Chinese numerals inside a plurality of circular portions drawn on a bamboo trunk (culm).

The transparent pattern portion 2624c is a decorative layer 2622 that is printed with transparent ultraviolet curable ink and then irradiated with ultraviolet rays of different wavelengths to form irregular crepe-like wrinkles (so-called crepe printing). , can diffuse light from the front and rear. Although this transparent pattern portion 2624c is a decorative layer 2622, a base layer 2623 is not provided on the rear side.

The base layer 2623 is for improving the color development of the decorative layer 2622. The base layer 2623 of this embodiment is not provided on the rear side of the transparent pattern portion 2624c. The base layer 2623 of this embodiment is gray and makes it difficult for light from the rear to pass through. This allows light from behind to make the translucent pattern section 2624c appear brighter than the main pattern section 2624a. This base layer 2623 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

In addition, in the front-left decorative body 2620, the portion where no pattern is applied is a transparent portion where the decoration layer 2622 and the base layer 2623 are not provided, and the base sheet 2621 remains as it is.

The front left decorative body 2620 also includes a flat plate portion 2625 having a flat plate shape, a three-dimensional portion 2626 that bulges forward from the flat plate portion 2625, and a first mounting hole 2627 that is a round hole passing through the flat plate portion 2625. , a second mounting hole 2628 in the form of an elongated hole that penetrates the flat plate portion 2625 at a different position from the first mounting hole 2627, and a positioning hole 2629 that penetrates the flat plate portion 2625. In other words, in the front left decorative body 2620, the flat plate portion 2625 extends outward in a flange shape from the solid portion 2626 that bulges forward.

The three-dimensional portion 2626 of the front left decorative body 2620 is provided at the main pattern portion 2624a of the pattern portion 2624. In other words, the bamboo pattern is three-dimensionally formed by the three-dimensional portion 2626.

Note that, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 262(b), the boundary between the main pattern portion 2624a (shaded portion in the figure) and other portions (transparent portions) is located on the three-dimensional portion 2626 side. , a transparent portion extends toward the three-dimensional portion 2626 side. In other words, the three-dimensional portion 2626 has a bulged portion slightly wider than the main pattern portion 2624a. In other words, the main picture portion 2624a is formed smaller than the three-dimensional portion 2626.

To be more specific, when the peripheral edge of the bamboo pattern (main pattern part 2624a) extends from the three-dimensional part 2626 to the flat plate part 2625 side, the solid part 2626 side in the vicinity of the part of the pattern in contact with the flat plate part 2625 is lateral. However, since the flat plate part 2625 side of the pattern faces forward, the three-dimensional bamboo (pattern) looks unnatural, and the three-dimensional decoration by the pattern and the three-dimensional part 2626 There is a problem that the effectiveness decreases. In contrast, in this embodiment, the peripheral edge of the bamboo pattern (the boundary between the main pattern 2624a and the transparent part) is located on the three-dimensional part 2626 side, so the peripheral edge of the main pattern 2624a is The flat plate portion 2625 prevents it from facing forward. As a result, the bamboo pattern (main pattern portion 2624a) does not look unnatural, and the decorative effect of the three-dimensional main pattern portion 2624a and three-dimensional portion 2626 can be reliably exhibited.

The first attachment holes 2627 are provided at two locations near the upper left corner and near the lower right corner of the flat plate portion 2625. The inner diameter of the first attachment hole 2627 is approximately twice the diameter of the threaded portion 2604a of the attachment screw 2604 (see FIG. 265). The second attachment hole 2628 is provided near the upper right corner of the flat plate portion 2625. The length of the short axis of the second attachment hole 2628 is approximately twice the diameter of the threaded portion 2604a of the attachment screw 2604 (see FIG. 265). Positioning hole 2629 is provided adjacent to first attachment hole 2627. The inner diameter of the positioning hole 2629 is approximately twice the diameter of the positioning protrusion 2601i that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center accessory base 2601. Therefore, when the front left decorative body 2620 is assembled to the center accessory 2600, it is attached with a predetermined amount of wobble (play) in the direction along the surface of the base plate 2601a.

Further, the first attachment hole 2627, the second attachment hole 2628, and the positioning hole 2629 are formed in the flat plate portion 2625 where the sub-picture portion 2624b of the pattern portion 2624 is provided. That is, the first attachment hole 2627, the second attachment hole 2628, and the positioning hole 2629 are not provided in the main pattern portion 2624a (solid portion 2626). As a result, the mounting screw 2604 for mounting the front left decorative body 2620 to the center accessory base 2601 through the first mounting hole 2627 and the second mounting hole 2628 does not hide a part of the main pattern part 2624a. , the main pattern portion 2624a can be made visible to the player in a good condition, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the main pattern portion 2624a can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the first mounting hole 2627, the second mounting hole 2628, etc. are provided in the flat plate part 2625, since they are provided at a position away from the three-dimensional part 2626, the first mounting hole 2627, the second mounting hole 2628, etc. The holes 2628 and the like (attachment screws 2604) can be made less noticeable, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

The front left decorative body 2620 of this embodiment is formed by applying a decorative layer 2622 and a base layer 2623 to a flat base sheet 2621 to form an intermediate product, and then heating the intermediate product to a predetermined temperature. After expanding the three-dimensional portion 2626 by air pressure forming or vacuum forming, the outer periphery is trimmed (cut) and a first attachment hole 2627, a second attachment hole 2628, and a positioning hole 2629 are bored. Since the front left decoration body 2620 is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost than an injection molded product, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the front left decorative body 2620 can be easily manufactured, the front left decorative body 2620 having different pattern portions 2624, three-dimensional portions 2626, etc. can be easily manufactured. Therefore, by replacing the front left decorative body 2620 with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. , it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the front left decorative body 2620 of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the outside, which increases the weight on the pachinko machine 1. can be reduced.

The thickness of the front left decorative body 2620 (base sheet 2621) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease, and there is a risk that it will not be possible to maintain the desired shape due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 2626, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Furthermore, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a risk that the three-dimensional portion 2626 may not be formed into the desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the weight of the front left decorative body 2620 This is to prevent it from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since this front left decorative body 2620 is formed using a thin base sheet 2621 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, this front left decorative body 2620 can be placed in the desired position depending on the relationship between the first attachment hole 2627, the second attachment hole 2628, and the attachment screw 2604, and the relationship between the positioning hole 2629 and the positioning protrusion 2601i. Since it is attached to the center accessory base 2601 with a certain amount of wobbling, it can cope with expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. This can prevent the front left decorative body 2620 from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

Further, since the front left decorative body 2620 is attached with a predetermined amount of wobble, it can be attached to the center accessory base 2601 even if the flat plate portion 2625 has undulations due to molding.

Furthermore, since the mounting screws 2604 that attach the front left decorative body 2620 to the center accessory base 2601 are screws with a seat, there is no concentration of force when the front left decorative body 2620 is attached, and the front left Decorative body 2620 can be attached in good condition.

By the way, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part is , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape, so it is attached to the rear surface of the three-dimensional part (three-dimensional part 2626). It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the front left decorative body 2620 of this embodiment, a flange-like flat plate part 2625 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid part 2626 that bulges forward, and the flat plate part 2625 is provided with a first mounting hole 2627 and a flat plate part 2625. Since the second attachment hole 2628 and the like are provided, the three-dimensional portion 2626 in which the main pattern portion 2624a is provided can be attached to the center accessory base 2601.

Further, as described above, the front left decorative body 2620 of this embodiment has the first attachment hole 2627, the second attachment hole 2628, etc. in the flange-shaped flat plate portion 2625 extending outward from the three-dimensional portion 2626. Since the three-dimensional part 2626 does not have a mounting boss for attachment like an injection molded product, the shadow of the mounting boss will not be reflected on the three-dimensional part 2626 when light is irradiated from behind. , the entire three-dimensional portion 2626 can be uniformly decorated with light.

When the front left decorative body 2620 is assembled to the center accessory 2600, the LEDs 2602a of the front left decorative board 2602 are located behind the transparent transparent pattern part 2624c (the Chinese numeral part) of the pattern part 2624. (See Figure 265). Thereby, by appropriately causing the LEDs 2602a of the front left decorative board 2602 to emit light, the Chinese numeral portions in the transparent pattern portion 2624c of the front left decorative body 2620 can be decorated with light emission independently.

[29-1c. Front left decorative board]
Next, the front left decorative board 2602 of the center accessory 2600 will be described in detail. The front left decorative board 2602 is attached to a portion of the center accessory base 2601 behind the decoration mounting portion 2601e, and holds a reflector 2603 between it and the center accessory base 2601. A plurality of LEDs 2602a are mounted on the front surface of the front left decorative board 2602. The plurality of LEDs 2602a are provided one by one at positions corresponding to the plurality of lens portions 2601f of the center accessory base 2601.

The front left side decorative board 2602 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 2602a or the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the front left decorative board 2602, the front left decorative body 2620 can be decorated with brighter light. Further, the LED 2602a of the front left decorative board 2602 is a full color LED. Furthermore, the decorative board 2602 on the left side of the table uses ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) for letters and symbols to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LED 2602a to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the front left decorative body 2620, and the decorative effect of the front left decorative body 2620 can be reliably exerted.

This front left decorative board 2602 allows the transparent pattern portions 2614c (kanji numerals) of the front left decorative body 2620 to be independently illuminated through the lens portion 2601f of the center accessory base 2601 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 2602a. It can be used as a luminescent decoration.

In addition, in the front left decorative board 2602, components that do not emit light other than the LED 2602a (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light emitting decoration. ing.

[29-2. Center bottom unit]
Next, the center lower back unit 2630 of the center accessory 2600 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 266 to 273 and the like. The center lower back unit 2630 is attached to the center accessory base 2601 so as to close the opening 2601b of the center accessory base 2601 from the rear. The center lower rear unit 2630 has a box-like shape with the front open and the front end is attached to the rear side of the center accessory base 2601. The center lower rear unit 2630 includes a unit base 2631B that is attached to the rear side of the center lower accessory base 2601, and a center lower rear front cover that is attached from the front inside the unit base 2631B. 2632B, a center lower rear decorative body 2640B attached to the rear side of the center lower rear front cover 2632B, and a center lower rear decorative board attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2631B and with a plurality of LEDs 2633a mounted on the front surface. 2633, a board cover 2634 attached to the unit base 2631B so as to cover the rear side of the center lower back decorative board 2633, and a center lower back sphere passage member 2635 attached to the front of the center lower back front cover 2632B. , is equipped with.

The center lower back unit 2630 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front, and when assembled to the center accessory 2600, a warp passage distribution device 2680 is arranged inside. This center lower back unit 2630 decorates the rear of the warp passage intra-distribution device 2680 with a center lower back decoration body 2640B.

The center lower back ball passage member 2635 of the center lower back unit 2630 is attached to the front surface of the center lower back front cover 2632B from the right end toward the center. The center lower back ball passage member 2635 guides the game ball B received from the first sorting device of the warp passage sorting device 2680 downward in a spiral shape, and then returns it to the third sorting device of the warp passage sorting device 2680. This is what is delivered to the sorting device.

[29-2a. unit base]
The unit base 2631B of the center lower rear unit 2630 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory base 2601 so as to close the opening 2601b of the center accessory base 2601 from the rear. This unit base 2631B has a box shape with an open front and is made of a transparent member. The unit base 2631B has a through hole 2631b penetrating the rear wall when viewed from the front. The through hole 2631b is for discharging heat from the warp passage distribution device 2680 and the like to the rear.

[29-2b. Center lower back front cover]
The center lower rear front cover 2632B of the center lower rear unit 2630 has both left and right ends attached to both left and right ends of the front end of the unit base 2631B. The center lower rear front cover 2632B has a transparent flat plate shape, and is curved so that both left and right end surfaces face forward. When attached to the unit base 2631B, the inner part of the center lower rear cover 2632B is attached to the unit base 2631B. It is located near the front of the rear wall (see Figure 271). The center lower back front cover 2632B has a through hole 2632b penetrating back and forth. The through hole 2632b is provided in a portion of the unit base 2631B in front of the through hole 2631b.

The center lower back front cover 2632B has support grooves 2632c recessed from the rear to the front on the outside of each of the left and right ends curved forward (see FIGS. 271 and 272, etc.) . Both left and right edges of the center lower back decorative body 2640B are loosely inserted into these support grooves 2632c.

The center lower back front cover 2632B also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 2632d that protrude rearward from the rear surface in a cylindrical shape, and a positioning protrusion 2632e adjacent to the mounting bosses 2632d and protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape. are doing. The attachment bosses 2632d are provided at two locations, near the upper end and near the lower end, near the center in the left-right direction. The attachment boss 2632d protrudes rearward longer than the thickness of the center lower back decorative body 2640B. The upper attachment boss 2632d is inserted into the first attachment hole 2647 of the center lower back decoration body 2640B, and the lower attachment boss 2632d is inserted into the second attachment hole 2648 of the center lower back decoration body 2640B. Further, the positioning protrusion 2632e is inserted into the positioning hole 2649 of the center lower back decorative body 2640B.

Furthermore, the center lower back front cover 2632B has positioning portions 2632f that are provided in the left and right support grooves 2632c and extend back and forth. This positioning portion 2632f is inserted into the positioning slit 2650 of the center lower back decoration body 2640B.

This center lower back front cover 2632B has a center lower back decoration 2640B attached to the rear side so that the pattern (picture portion 2644) of the center lower back decoration 2640B can be seen from the front. Further, the center lower back front cover 2632B can attach the center lower back decorative body 2640B with a predetermined amount of wobbling.

[29-2c. Center bottom decoration]
The center lower rear decoration body 2640B of the center lower rear unit 2630 is attached to the rear side of the center lower rear front cover 2632B. The center lower back decoration body 2640B includes a transparent base sheet 2641, a decoration layer 2642 applied to the back side of the base sheet 2641, and a base layer 2643 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 2642. (See Figure 270(a)).

The base sheet 2641 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

The decorative layer 2642 forms a predetermined pattern portion 2644, as shown in FIG. 253. This decorative layer 2642 is colored by silk printing or offset printing. The pattern formed by the pattern section 2644 has the characters "Fate no Michi" written vertically in a position to the right of the center in the horizontal direction, and "Shisa" on both the left and right sides of the characters. ing. In addition, there is an arc-shaped "rainbow" below the two Shisa and a "wave" below it. Furthermore, on both the left and right outer sides of Shisa, there are multiple "palm trees" and multiple "hydraulic patterns" that are long on the left and right.

The pattern portion 2644 is formed by the decorative layer 2642, and includes a portion where the decorative layer 2642 is not intentionally provided inside the pattern. This pattern section 2644 includes a main pattern section 2644a that is the subject, a sub-picture section 2644b that is the background of the main pattern section 2644a, and a translucent pattern section that has a higher light transmittance than the main pattern section 2644a and the sub-image section 2644b. 2644c. The main pattern part 2644a is the part of the characters "Fate no Michi" and the parts of "Shisa" on the left and right sides thereof, and the sub-picture part 2644b is the remaining parts.

The transparent pattern portion 2644c is a portion of the outline (white line) of a shisa dog, a palm tree, etc. in FIG. 253. This transparent pattern part 2644c is made by printing transparent ultraviolet curable ink as a decorative layer 2642, and then irradiating it with ultraviolet rays of different wavelengths to form irregular crepe-like wrinkles (so-called crepe printing). As a result, light from the front and rear can be diffused, and point emission of the rear LED 2633a can be suppressed to make the LED 2633a less noticeable. Although this transparent pattern portion 2644c is a decorative layer 2642, a base layer 2643 is not provided on the rear side.

The base layer 2643 is for improving the coloring of the decorative layer 2642. The base layer 2643 of this embodiment is not provided on the rear side of the transparent pattern portion 2644c. The base layer 2643 of this embodiment is white and can transmit light from behind. Thereby, the entire pattern portion 2644 can be made to look bright (light-emitting decoration) by light from the rear. This base layer 2643 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

Further, the center lower back decoration body 2640B has a flat plate portion 2645 and does not have a three-dimensional portion 2646, unlike the center lower back decoration body 2640 in the game board 5A of the third embodiment. In addition, the center lower back decoration body 2640B has a first mounting hole 2647 that is a round hole that penetrates the flat plate portion 2645, and a second long hole that penetrates the flat plate portion 2645 at a different position from the first attachment hole 2647. It has two mounting holes 2648, a positioning hole 2649 passing through the flat plate part 2645, and positioning slits 2650 provided at both left and right ends of the flat plate part 2645.

The first attachment hole 2647 is provided near the center upper end of the flat plate portion 2645 in the left-right direction. The inner diameter of the first attachment hole 2647 is slightly larger than the diameter of the attachment boss 2632d of the center lower rear cover 2632B. The second attachment hole 2648 is provided near the center lower end of the flat plate portion 2645 in the left-right direction, and has a long hole extending vertically. The length of the short axis of the second attachment hole 2648 is slightly larger than the diameter of the attachment boss 2632d. The positioning hole 2649 is provided adjacent to the first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648, respectively. The positioning hole 2649 adjacent to the first attachment hole 2647 is a round hole with an inner diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the positioning projection 2632e of the center lower back front cover 2632B. On the other hand, the positioning hole 2649 adjacent to the second attachment hole 2648 is an elongated hole extending vertically, and the length of its short axis is slightly larger than the diameter of the positioning protrusion 2632e.

The positioning slit 2650 extends in the horizontal direction near the center in the vertical direction at both left and right ends of the flat plate portion 2645. The positioning slits 2650 are each opened outward in the left-right direction of the flat plate portion 2645. The vertical width of the positioning slit 2650 is slightly larger than the vertical width of the positioning portion 2632f of the center lower back front cover 2632B.

Both left and right ends of the center lower rear decorative body 2640B are inserted into the support grooves 2632c of the center lower rear front cover 2632B from the rear, and the mounting bosses 2632d of the center lower rear front cover 2632B are inserted into the center lower rear decorative body 2640B. Since it protrudes longer than the center lower back unit 2630, when it is assembled into the center lower back unit 2630, it is attached with a predetermined amount of wobble (play) in the vertical direction and the front-back direction.

In addition, since the center lower rear decorative body 2640B is attached to the mounting boss 2632d that protrudes rearward from the front center lower rear front cover 2632B, the center lower rear decorative body 2640B is attached from the rear with a mounting screw (not shown). Therefore, the mounting screw does not hide a part of the picture part 2644, and the picture part 2644 can be seen in good condition by the player, and the decorative effect of the picture part 2644 is ensured. can be demonstrated.

Furthermore, since the center lower rear decorative body 2640B has a portion attached to the center lower rear front cover 2632B near the periphery, the attached portion can be made less noticeable, and the same effects as described above can be achieved. Can be done.

The center lower back decoration body 2640B of this embodiment is made by applying a decorative layer 2642 and a base layer 2643 to a flat base sheet 2641 to form an intermediate product, and then trimming (cutting) the outer periphery and attaching the first Holes such as a hole 2647, a second mounting hole 2648, and a positioning hole 2649 are formed. Since the center lower back decoration body 2640B is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured relatively inexpensively, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the center lower back decorative body 2640B can be easily manufactured, the center lower back decorative body 2640B having different pattern portions 2644 can be easily manufactured. Therefore, by replacing the center lower back decoration body 2640B with a different pattern, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the center lower back decoration body 2640B of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the outside, and the weight on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. increase can be reduced.

The thickness of the center lower back decorative body 2640B (base sheet 2641) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. This is because if the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease, and there is a risk that the desired shape will not be maintained due to its own weight when installed. Further, if the thickness is thicker than this, the weight of the center lower back decoration body 2640B is prevented from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since this center lower back decoration body 2640B is formed using the thin base sheet 2641 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, this center lower back decoration body 2640B has the relationship between the first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648 and the attachment boss 2632d, the relationship between the positioning hole 2649 and the positioning protrusion 2632e, and the positioning slit 2650. Due to the relationship between the center lower back cover 2632B and the positioning portion 2632f, and the relationship between the left and right ends and the support groove 2632c, it can be attached to the center lower back front cover 2632B with a predetermined amount of wobble, so it can cope with expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. be able to. This can prevent the center lower back decorative body 2640B from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

Furthermore, since the mounting screws (not shown) that attach the center lower rear decoration body 2640B to the center lower rear front cover 2632B are seated screws, force is concentrated when the center lower rear decoration body 2640B is attached. There is no problem, and the center lower back decoration body 2640B can be attached in good condition.

When the center lower back decorative body 2640B is assembled to the center lower back unit 2630, the center lower back decorative board 2633 is located at the rear (see FIG. 273, etc.). As a result, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 2633a of the center lower back decoration board 2633, the pattern of the center lower back decoration body 2640B can be decorated with light emission, and the transparent pattern portion 2644c of the pattern can be made glittery by chijimi printing. Can be decorated with bright light. In addition, the left and right shisa and the characters in the center can be decorated with light emission independently.

Moreover, the center lower back decoration body 2640B has a through hole 2651 that penetrates from front to back. The through hole 2651 is provided at a location where the front and back direction coincides with the through hole 2632b of the center lower back front cover 2632B when the center lower back decorative body 2640B is attached to the center lower back front cover 2632B. This through hole 2651 is for dissipating heat from the warp passage distribution device 2680 and the like to the rear.

When the center lower back decoration body 2640B is assembled to the center accessory 2600, the warp passage distribution device 2680 is located in front of the first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648, and the warp passage distribution device 2680 is located in front of the first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648. The first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648 are hidden from view from the front by the separating device 2680.

[29-2d. Center lower back decorative board]
The center lower rear decorative board 2633 of the center lower rear unit 2630 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2631B, and a plurality of LEDs 2633a are mounted on the front surface. Moreover, the center lower back decorative board 2633 has a through hole 2633b penetrating back and forth. The through hole 2633b is provided at a location that matches the through hole 2631b of the unit base 2631 in the front-back direction when assembled into the center lower back unit 2630. This through hole 2633b is for dissipating heat from the warp passage distribution device 2680 and the like to the rear.

The center lower back decoration board 2633 can decorate the center lower back decoration body 2640B with light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs 2633a mounted on the front surface.

The front surface of the center lower back decorative board 2633 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 2633a and the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the center lower back decorative board 2633, the center lower back decorative body 2640B can be decorated with brighter light. can. Moreover, the LED 2633a of the center lower back decorative board 2633 is a full color LED. Furthermore, the center lower back decorative board 2633 is printed with ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with other decorative boards and electronic components such as the LED 2633a to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the center lower back decoration body 2640B, and the decorative effect of the center lower back decoration body 2640B can be reliably exhibited.

Note that in the center lower back decorative board 2633, non-light emitting components other than the LED 2633a (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light emitting decoration. being done.

[29-2e. Board cover]
The board cover 2634 of the center lower rear unit 2630 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2631B so as to cover the rear side of the center lower rear decorative board 2633. The board cover 2634 has a plurality of slits 2634a penetrating back and forth. The plurality of slits 2634a allow the heat generated in the center lower back decorative board 2633 to escape to the rear. In addition, some of the plurality of slits 2634a are provided at positions that coincide in the front-rear direction with the through holes 2631b of the unit base 2631B, the through holes 2633b of the center lower back decorative board 2633, etc. when assembled into the center lower back unit 2630. The heat from the warp passage distribution device 2680 and the like can be released to the rear.

[29-3. Center superior]
The center accessory 2700 in the table unit 2000 is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 at the upper part of the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 260. The center accessory 2700 is formed into a frame shape, and through the frame, the back effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2700 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, so that the game ball B hit in the game area 5a cannot enter the frame. It looks like this.

The center accessory 2700 has a center upper warp entrance 2701 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter, and a center upper warp entrance 2701 that allows the game ball B that has entered the center upper warp entrance 2701 to enter the center upper warp entrance 2701. A center upper warp exit 2702 that can be released and opens in the frame, and a stage 2703 that can release the game ball B released from the center upper warp exit 2702 into the gaming area 5a after rolling in the left and right direction. , is equipped with.

The stage 2703 of the center accessory 2700 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction. It is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) that is slightly higher than both sides. This stage 2703 is tilted so that the part that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction and the lowest part on both left and right sides are lowered toward the front. From there, the game ball B can be released to a region above the center accessory 2600 in the game area 5a.

When the center upper accessory 2700 is assembled on the game board 5B, the raised part of the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2703 is located directly above the center lower warp entrance 2605 of the center lower accessory 2600. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central part of the stage 2703, it is accepted into the center lower warp entrance 2605 with a higher probability than the game ball B that has flown down the left outer side of the center accessory 2700.

When the center accessory 2700 is assembled on the game board 5B, there is a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B between the center accessory 2700 and the outer rail 1001 on the right side from a position on the left with respect to the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the outer peripheral surface. It is formed so as to be able to move along the outer rail 1001, and is inclined so that the right end is lowered along the outer rail 1001. Therefore, when the game ball B enters (is hit) into the gap, it will be sent to the right attacker unit 2800 provided on the right outer side of the center accessory 2700. In other words, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a so that the game ball B flows on the right side of the center accessory 2700 (so-called right hit), the game ball B is hit into the right winning slot unit 2900. be able to.

[29-4. Right prize opening unit]
The right prize opening unit 2900 of the table unit 2000 is provided on the right outer side of the center lower accessory object 2600 and the center upper accessory object 2700 in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. The right winning hole unit 2900 has a variable winning hole 2011 and a plurality (here, four) of non-electric variable winning holes 2012. In addition, the right winning hole unit 2900 opens one non-electric variable winning hole 2012 or the remaining non-electric variable winning hole 2012 by the game ball B received in the variable winning hole 2011, and opens the game ball B. It has an opening/closing sorting device that allows it to accept.

The variable prize opening 2011 cannot accept the game ball B under normal conditions, but can accept the game ball B depending on the result of the normal lottery drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003A. becomes. The plurality of non-electrically variable winning ports 2012 are arranged in a vertical row. The non-electric variable winning hole 2012 is automatically (mechanically) opened by the weight of the game ball B received in the variable winning hole 2011. In addition, when the non-electric variable prize opening 2012 receives a predetermined number of game balls B in the open state, it automatically (mechanically) closes due to the weight of the received game balls B.

The right winning hole unit 2900 releases the game ball B that is not accepted into either the variable winning hole 2011 or the non-electric variable winning hole 2012 from the lower end above the area of the big winning hole 2005 of the center lower accessory 2600. be done.

[29-5. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 of the game board 5B will be explained. The back unit 3000 includes a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and opened at the front, and a back presentation unit 3700 attached to the upper part of the back box 3010.

A peripheral control board box 1520 in which a peripheral control board 1510 is housed is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010. Furthermore, a panel relay board 1710 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010, which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.

[29-6. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
The back effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 274 to 283 and the like. FIG. 274 is a front view of the back production unit in the back unit, FIG. 275(a) is a perspective view of the back production unit seen from the front, and FIG. 275(b) is a perspective view of the back production unit seen from the back. . FIG. 276 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 277 is an exploded perspective view of the back production unit disassembled and seen from the back. 278(a) is a front view of the back decoration in the back production unit, (b) is a perspective view of the back decoration seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the back decoration seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 279 is a front view showing the back decoration body together with a pattern.

FIG. 280 is a cross-sectional view taken along line II in FIG. 274. FIG. 281(a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear decoration body and the rear decoration lens as seen from the front, and FIG. 281(b) is an assembled state of the rear decoration body and the rear decoration lens. It is a perspective view seen from the front. FIG. 282 is a front view showing the relationship between the back decoration and the back decoration lens. FIG. 283 is a front view of the back rendering unit showing the arrangement of the rear back decorative board and the lower back decorative board. The back production unit 3700 is installed inside a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100.

The back production unit 3700 includes a box-shaped back unit base 3701 that is installed inside a back box 3010 and is open at the front and top, and is installed on the front of the rear wall of the back unit base 3701 and has a plurality of LEDs 3702a on the front. The mounted rear decorative board 3702, the frame-shaped rear decorative lens 3703 attached to the back unit base 3701 in front of the rear decorative board 3702, and the upper part of the rear decorative lens 3703 and the back unit. It includes an upper reflector 3704 attached to the back unit base 3701 so as to connect the upper part of the base 3701, and a frame-shaped back decoration body 3710 attached to the front side of the back rear decoration body lens 3703. .

The back production unit 3700 also includes a symbol display device 3730 that is installed in the back unit base 3701 on the front side of the back decoration body 3710 and can display a predetermined pattern, and a symbol display device 3730 that is attached to the back below and in front of the symbol display device 3730. The lower back base 3705 attached to the unit base 3701, the lower back decorative board 3706 attached to the front of the lower back base 3705 and on which a plurality of LEDs 3706a are mounted, and the front of the lower back decorative board 3706. A lower back decoration body 3707 is attached to a lower back base 3705 so as to cover the decorative body 3707.

The symbol display device 3730 has a symbol display section 3731 in which three 7-segment displays are arranged on the left and right. The symbol display device 3730 is for displaying a symbol (symbol row) indicating a special lottery result that will be drawn when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002.

[29-6a. Back unit base]
Next, the back unit base 3701 of the back production unit 3700 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277 and the like. The back unit base 3701 is attached above the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The back unit base 3701 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape that is elongated from side to side, and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front and upward. The back unit base 3701 is attached to the back box 3010 at both left and right end sides of the front end.

The back unit base 3701 has a stepped portion 3701a protruding forward near the lower end of the rear wall. The rear decorative lens 3703 is attached to the front surface of the stepped portion 3701a with the lower part of the rear surface thereof in contact with the front surface of the stepped portion 3701a. A rear decorative board 3702 is attached to the entire surface of the rear wall of the rear unit base 3701 above the stepped portion 3701a.

Further, the back unit base 3701 has a pair of cylindrical mounting portions 3701b that protrude forward in a rectangular tube shape from the left-right center portion of the stepped portion 3701a. A pair of cylindrical attachment portions 3701b, when assembled to the back production unit 3700, penetrate through the through hole 3703i of the back decoration lens 3703 and the through hole 3721 of the back decoration body 3710 and protrude forward at the front end. The lower back base 3705 is attached. The inner side of the cylindrical attachment portion 3701b on the right side in front view penetrates the rear wall of the back unit base 3701 toward the rear.

Further, the back unit base 3701 has a plurality of slits 3701c penetrating the rear wall back and forth. The plurality of slits 3701c are for dissipating heat from the plurality of LEDs 3702a, the plurality of pattern LEDs 3735, etc. mounted on the rear decorative board 3702 to the rear.

[29-6b. Decorative back board]
Next, the rear decorative board 3702 of the rear rendering unit 3700 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 276, 28, and the like. The rear decorative board 3702 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the rear unit base 3701 above the stepped portion 3701a. On the front surface of the rear decorative board 3702, a plurality of LEDs 3702a are mounted at a portion behind the decorative lens portion 3703g of the rear decorative lens 3703. By causing the plurality of LEDs 3702a to emit light, the decorative lens portion 3703g of the rear decoration lens 3703 (translucent pattern portion 3714c of the rear decoration body 3710) can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of LEDs 3702a are full color LEDs.

Further, on the front side of the rear decorative board 3702, a plurality of pattern LEDs 3735 are mounted on the rear side of each element of the three 7-segment displays in the pattern display section 3731 of the pattern display device 3730. Three symbol LEDs 3735 are provided in one element of the 7-segment display. By causing the plurality of symbol LEDs 3735 to emit light as appropriate, a predetermined symbol can be displayed in a 7-segment display.

Further, on the rear decorative board 3702, a plurality of in-frame LEDs 3736 are mounted in a region behind the region surrounded by each element of the 7-segment display in the pattern display section 3731. By appropriately lighting the plurality of frame LEDs 3736 and the plurality of pattern LEDs 3735, the entire pattern display section 3731 can be made to emit light, or a pattern different from the pattern in the 7-segment display can be displayed by emitting light. In addition, a plurality of decorative frame LEDs 3737 are mounted on the rear decorative board 3702 at a portion behind the decorative frame 3732. By causing the plurality of decorative frame LEDs 3737 to emit light as appropriate, the decorative frame 3732 can be decorated with light. The pattern LED 3735, the frame LED 3736, and the decorative frame LED 3737 are full-color LEDs.

The front surface of the rear decorative board 3702 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the mounted LED 3702a, pattern LED 3735, frame LED 3736, decorative frame LED 3737, and the front, brightening the entire front surface of the rear decorative board 3702. As a result, the rear decorative body 3710, the decorative frame 3732 of the pattern display device 3730, etc. can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the rear decorative board 3702 has electronic components such as the mounted LED 3702a, pattern LED 3735, frame LED 3736, decorative frame LED 3737, etc., and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with other decorative boards, such as brightness and It is applied by screen printing using ink of a highly saturated color (for example, yellow). This makes it possible to make characters and symbols less noticeable.

In addition, in the back rear decorative board 3702, members that do not emit light (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than the LED 3702a, the LED 3735 for the pattern, the LED 3736 for the frame, and the LED 3737 for the decorative frame are provided on the rear surface (back surface). Care has been taken not to interfere with the luminous decoration.

[29-6c. Back decoration lens]
Next, the back decorative lens 3703 of the back rendering unit 3700 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 280 to 283 and the like. The rear decorative lens 3703 is attached to the rear unit base 3701. The rear decorative lens 3703 has an outer periphery that is approximately the same size as the outer periphery of the back unit base 3701, and its shape when viewed from the front is a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right directions, and its four corners are chamfered.

The rear decorative lens 3703 has a peripheral edge part 3703a that is flat and open downward and has a U-shaped frame shape, and a curved part 3703b that extends inward and backward in a curved shape from the inner periphery of the peripheral edge part 3703a. It has a connecting portion 3703c that connects the lower ends of the curved portions 3703b, and an opening 3703d that is surrounded by the inner periphery of the curved portion 3703b and the upper side of the connecting portion 3703c and penetrates back and forth. . In other words, the rear decorative lens 3703 is open to the front and downward, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container in the front-rear direction with an opening 3703d passing through the rear wall.

The rear decorative lens 3703 is entirely transparent. When the back decoration lens 3703 is assembled to the back presentation unit 3700, the upper side of the connecting portion 3703c is located slightly above the upper surface of the stepped portion 3701a of the back unit base 3701, and the rear surface of the connecting portion 3703c is It is in contact with the front surface of the stepped portion 3701a. The opening 3703d has an inner shape that follows the outer shape of the decorative frame 3732 of the symbol display device 3730, and is larger than the outer shape of the decorative frame 3732. When assembled into the back presentation unit 3700, a part of the three-dimensional portion 3716 of the back decoration body 3710 is inserted through the opening 3703d, and the symbol display device 3730 (decoration frame 3732) is inserted through the opening 3703d.

The rear decorative lens 3703 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 3703e that protrude forward from the front surface of the peripheral edge 3703a in a cylindrical shape, and a projection that projects forward from the peripheral edge 3703a along the mounting bosses 3703e to be shorter than the mounting bosses. 3703f. Two protrusions 3703f are provided for each attachment boss 3703e, and are provided at symmetrical positions with respect to the central axis of the attachment boss 3703e. The attachment boss 3703e and the projection 3703f are also provided on the front surface of a bulge 3703h, which will be described later.

The attachment boss 3703e is inserted into the first attachment hole 3717 and the second attachment hole 3718 of the back decoration body 3710 from the rear. The rear surface of the rear decorative body 3710 comes into contact with the front surface of the protrusion 3703f. The distance from the front surface of the attachment boss 3703e to the front surface of the protrusion 3703f (the amount of protrusion of the attachment boss 3703e when based on the front surface of the protrusion 3703f) is slightly longer than the thickness of the rear decorative body 3710. The back decoration lens 3703 is attached to the back decoration 3710 in a state where it is separated (floating) from the front surface of the peripheral edge 3703a and with a predetermined amount of wobbling due to the attachment boss 3703e and the protrusion 3703f. Can be installed.

Further, the rear decorative lens 3703 has a plurality of decorative lens portions 3703g at intervals in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the curved portion 3703b. The plurality of decorative lens parts 3703g are provided radially around a predetermined position below the rear decorative lens 3703 at the center of the rear decorative lens 3703 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 282). The decorative lens portion 3703g is composed of a plurality of protrusions extending parallel to the tangent of a circle centered on the radial center. The decorative lens portion 3703g can be visually recognized from the front. These plurality of decorative lens parts 3703g are provided in a part that becomes the rear of the transparent pattern part 3714c of the back decoration body 3710 when assembled in the back production unit 3700, and are provided in the front part (player) through the transparent pattern part 3714c. side), and the transparent pattern portion 3714c can be decorated.

Further, the rear decorative lens 3703 includes a bulging portion 3703h that bulges forward at the center in the left-right direction of the connecting portion 3703c, and a pair of through holes 3703i that penetrate the bulging portion 3703h back and forth. have. The cylindrical attachment portion 3701b of the back unit base 3701 is inserted into the pair of through holes 3703i.

The back decoration lens 3703 can support the back decoration 3710 and transmits light from the plurality of LEDs 3702a mounted on the back decoration board 3702 to the front (toward the back decoration 3710 side). be able to.

[29-6d. Back Decoration]
Next, the back decoration body 3710 of the back presentation unit 3700 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 278 to 283 and the like. The rear decorative body 3710 is attached to the front side of the rear decorative body lens 3703. The back decoration body 3710B includes a transparent base sheet 3711, a decoration layer 3712 applied to the back side of the base sheet 3711, and a base layer 3713 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 3712. (See Figure 279).

The base sheet 3711 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

The decorative layer 3712 forms a predetermined pattern portion 3714, as shown in FIG. 279. This decorative layer 3712 is colored by silk printing or offset printing. The pattern formed by the pattern section 3714 has a pattern of cranes and pines on a radial background representing a morning sun. Since this pattern portion 3714 has a radial background, the radially extending portion of the pattern intersects with the outer periphery of the rear decorative body 3710, and the pattern changes along the outer periphery. ing. As a result, as will be described in detail later, even if the base sheet 3711 is pulled and the flat plate part 3715 is deformed in a wavy manner when the three-dimensional part 3716 is molded, the flat plate part 3715 can be It is possible to make the undulations in the portion 3715 less noticeable.

The pattern portion 3714 is formed by the decorative layer 3712, and also includes a transparent pattern portion 3714c where the decorative layer 3712 is not intentionally provided inside the pattern. The transparent pattern portion 3714c is colorless and transparent, and is not provided with the base layer 3713. The transparent pattern portion 3714c is a portion shown by cross hatching in FIG. 279. A decorative lens portion 3703g of the rear decorative lens 3703 is arranged behind the transparent pattern portion 3714c, and the decorative lens portion 3703g can be viewed from the front (player side) through the transparent pattern portion 3714c. can.

The base layer 3713 is for improving the color development of the decorative layer 3712. The base layer 3713 of this embodiment is not provided on the rear side of the transparent pattern portion 3714c. The base layer 3713 of this embodiment is white or gray and can transmit light from the rear. Thereby, the entire pattern portion 3714 can be made to look bright (light-emitting decoration) by light from the rear. This base layer 3713 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

Further, the rear decoration body 3710 has a flat plate portion 3715 having a flat plate shape, and a solid portion 3716 that bulges out to the rear of the flat plate portion 3715. In other words, in the rear decorative body 3710, the flat plate portion 3715 extends outward in a flange shape from the solid portion 3716 that bulges forward. The flat plate portion 3715 is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the back decoration body 3710 and is formed in a frame shape.

The three-dimensional portion 3716 extends inward and rearward from the inner periphery of the flat plate portion 3715 in a curved manner, and then extends rearward in a bent rectangular tube shape, and then its rear end bends inward to form a flat plate. It extends parallel to section 3715. The curved portion of the three-dimensional portion 3716 has a shape along the curved portion 3703b of the rear decorative lens 3703. Furthermore, the inner shape of the rectangular cylindrical portion inside the curved portion of the three-dimensional portion 3716 is a shape that follows the outer shape of the decorative frame 3732 of the pattern display device 3730, and the rear end side is the rear decorative lens 3703. It is formed smaller than the inner shape of the opening 3703d and slightly larger than the outer shape of the decorative frame 3732.

Further, the three-dimensional portion 3716 is inserted into the opening 3703d of the rear decorative lens 3703 from the front. When the rear decoration body 3710 is assembled to the rear production unit 3700, the portion of the three-dimensional portion 3716 extending rearward in the shape of a rectangular tube projects rearward through the opening 3703d of the rear decoration body lens 3703. and extends to near the front of the rear decorative board 3702 (see FIG. 280).

The back decoration body 3710 also has a first round mounting hole 3717 penetrating the flat plate portion 3715, and a second elongated hole penetrating the flat plate portion 3715 at a different position from the first mounting hole 3717. It has a mounting hole 3718.

The first attachment hole 3717 is provided at the center of the upper side of the frame-shaped flat plate portion 3715 in the left-right direction. The inner diameter of the first attachment hole 3717 is slightly larger than the diameter of the attachment boss 3703e of the back decoration lens 3703. The second attachment holes 3718 are provided on both left and right sides of the flat plate portion 3715, spaced apart from each other vertically. The second attachment hole 3718 is a long hole that is long from side to side. The length of the short axis of the second attachment hole 3718 is slightly larger than the diameter of the attachment boss 3703e. Note that the second attachment hole 3718 is also provided on the front surface of a bulging portion 3720, which will be described later. The second attachment hole 3718 in this part is a vertically long elongated hole.

This rear decoration body 3710 has a predetermined amount of wobble in the rear decoration body lens 3703 by inserting the mounting boss 3703e of the rear decoration body lens 3703 into the first attachment hole 3717 and the second attachment hole 3718. It can be installed with the In addition, since the flat plate part 3715 is located between the front surface of the attachment boss 3703e and the front surface of the protruding part 3703f, the rear decorative body 3710 is in a state where the flat plate part 3715 is separated (floating) from the front surface of the peripheral edge part 3703a. Then, it is attached to the rear decorative lens 3703. As a result, as will be described in detail later, even if the base sheet 3711 is pulled and the flat plate part 3715 is deformed in a wavy manner when the three-dimensional part 3716 is molded, the flat plate part 3715 will not touch the peripheral edge of the rear decorative lens 3703. Since it is spaced forward from 3703a, it can be attached to the back decoration lens 3703 via the first attachment hole 3717 and the second attachment hole 3718.

The rear decoration body 3710 also includes an opening 3719 penetrating the rear wall of the three-dimensional portion 3716 in the front and back, a bulging portion 3720 bulging forward from a portion below the opening 3719, and a bulging portion 3720 that bulges forward from a portion below the opening 3719. It has a pair of through holes 3721 penetrating back and forth in the front surface of the protruding portion 3720. The opening 3719 has an inner shape that follows the outer shape of the decorative frame 3732 of the symbol display device 3730, and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the decorative frame 3732. That is, the opening 3703d is formed in a size that does not allow the decorative frame 3732 of the symbol display device 3730 to pass through.

The bulging portion 3720 and the pair of through holes 3721 are formed to correspond to the bulging portion 3703h and the through hole 3703i of the rear decorative lens 3703. The bulging portion 3720 is formed so as to cover the upper surface side, both left and right side surfaces, and the front side of the bulging portion 3703h of the back decoration lens 3703 when assembled to the back rendering unit 3700. The cylindrical attachment portion 3701b of the back unit base 3701 is inserted into the pair of through holes 3721.

In addition, since the back decoration body 3710 has the first attachment hole 3717, the second attachment hole 3718, etc. provided in the flat plate portion 3715, they are provided at a position away from the three-dimensional portion 3716. The mounting hole 3717, the second mounting hole 3718, etc. (mounting screws) become less noticeable, allowing the player to see the pattern portion 3714 in good condition, and ensuring the decorative effect of the pattern of the pattern portion 3714. can be done.

The back decoration body 3710 of this embodiment is formed by applying a decoration layer 3712 and a base layer 3713 to a flat base sheet 3711 to form an intermediate product, and then heating the intermediate product to a predetermined temperature. After the three-dimensional portion 3716 and the bulging portion 3720 are bulged by pressure forming or vacuum forming, the outer periphery is trimmed (cut), and holes such as the first attachment hole 3717, the second attachment hole 3718, and the through hole 3721 are formed. It was drilled. Since the back decoration body 3710 is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost than an injection molded product, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the back decoration body 3710 can be easily manufactured, the back decoration body 3710 having different pattern portions 3714, three-dimensional portions 3716, etc. can be easily manufactured. Therefore, by replacing the back decoration body 3710 with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. , it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the back decoration body 3710 of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the exterior, which increases the weight applied to the pachinko machine 1. can be reduced.

Note that the thickness of the back decorative body 3710 (base sheet 3711) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease and there is a risk that the desired shape will not be maintained due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 3716, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Furthermore, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a risk that the three-dimensional portion 3716 cannot be formed into a desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the weight of the rear decorative body 3710 This is to prevent it from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since this rear decorative body 3710 is formed using a thin base sheet 3711 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, this rear decorative body 3710 has a peripheral edge due to the relationship between the first attachment hole 3717, the second attachment hole 3718, and the attachment boss 3703e, and the relationship between the flat plate portion 3715, the attachment boss 3703e, and the protruding portion 3703f. Since it is attached to the rear decoration lens 3703 in a state where it is separated (floating) from the front surface of the portion 3703a and has a predetermined amount of wobble, it can cope with expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. This can prevent the rear decorative body 3710 from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

In addition, since the rear decoration body 3710 has wobble in the front-rear direction and is mounted in a state floating from the rear decoration body lens 3703, even if the flat plate portion 3715 has undulations due to molding. , it can be attached to the rear decorative lens 3703.

Furthermore, since the mounting screw (not shown) that attaches the rear decoration body 3710 to the rear decoration body lens 3703 is a seated screw, there is no concentration of force when the rear decoration body 3710 is attached. Therefore, the rear decorative body 3710 can be attached in good condition.

By the way, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part is , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape, so it is attached to the rear surface of the three-dimensionally shaped part (three-dimensional part 3716). It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the rear decoration body 3710 of this embodiment, a flange-like flat plate part 3715 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid part 3716 that bulges forward, and the flat plate part 3715 is provided with a first mounting hole 3717 and a flat plate part 3715. Since the second attachment hole 3718 and the like are provided, the three-dimensional portion 3716 in which the main pattern portion 3714a is provided can be attached to the rear decorative lens 3703.

Further, as described above, the back decoration body 3710 of this embodiment has the first attachment hole 3717, the second attachment hole 3718, etc. in the flange-shaped flat plate portion 3715 extending outward from the three-dimensional portion 3716. Since the three-dimensional part 3716 does not have a mounting boss for attachment like an injection molded product, the shadow of the mounting boss will not be reflected on the three-dimensional part 3716 when light is irradiated from behind. , the entire three-dimensional portion 3716 can be uniformly decorated with light.

When the back rear decoration body 3710 is assembled to the back production unit 3700, the decorative lens portion 3703g of the back rear decoration body lens 3703 is located transparently behind the translucent pattern portion 3714c, and the back rear decoration body 3710 is located further rearward. A decorative board 3702 is located there. As a result, the decorative lens portion 3703g can be seen through the transparent pattern portion 3714c, giving a three-dimensional effect to the pattern portion 3714, and suppressing the decoration of the back decoration body 3710 from looking cheap. You can make it look better by doing so. Furthermore, by causing a plurality of LEDs 3702a mounted on the back back decoration board 3702 to emit light, the transparent pattern portion 3714c of the back back decoration body 3710 can be decorated with light emission through the decoration lens portion 3703g.

In addition, when the back decoration body 3710 is assembled to the back production unit 3700, the pattern display device 3730 is located inside the three-dimensional portion 3716, so the pattern portion 3714 formed by the decoration layer 3712 is placed on the outside of the pattern display device 3730. can be decorated. At this time, since the three-dimensional portion 3716 becomes larger outwardly as it goes from the rear end to the front end, a three-dimensional effect is imparted to the pattern in the pattern portion 3714, making the pattern display device 3730 stand out. Can be done.

By the way, it is possible to enhance the sense of luxury by using a metal foil layer or a metal vapor deposition layer as the decorative layer 3712 of the back decoration body 3710, but in this case, the three-dimensional part is formed by pressure forming or vacuum forming. When molding 3716, the elongation of the decorative layer 3712 made of metal foil or the like is smaller than the elongation of the base sheet 3711, which is the base material, so wrinkles may occur in the base sheet 3711 and the decorative layer 3712. , problems such as peeling of the decorative layer 3712 from the base sheet 3711 are likely to occur. On the other hand, in the back rendering unit 3700 of this embodiment, a decorative frame 3732 decorated with relief-like decoration with metallic luster is arranged inside the three-dimensional portion 3716 of the back decoration body 3710. The decoration with metallic luster can give a sense of luxury, reduce the cheap appearance of the pattern part 3714, and improve the appearance of the decoration by the back decoration body 3710 and the decoration frame 3732. This makes it possible to strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, when the rear back decorative body 3710 is assembled to the game board 5B, the second mounting hole 3718 provided in the bulging portion 3720 is hidden from view from the front by the lower back decorative body 3707 (see FIG. 274, etc.). ). In addition, the first attachment hole 3717 and the remaining second attachment hole 3718 of the back decoration body 3710 are located outside the frame of the center accessory 2700, and are hidden from view from the front by the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 260). ).

[29-6e. Pattern display device]
Next, the symbol display device 3730 of the back production unit 3700 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 275 to 277 and the like. The symbol display device 3730 has a symbol display section 3731 in which three 7-segment displays are arranged on the left and right, and is provided so as to be visible from the front through the frame of the center accessory 2700. This symbol display device 3730 is for suggesting to the player the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 by the combination of displayed symbols. The pattern display device 3730 is provided in a solid portion 3716 that protrudes rearward of the rear decoration body 3710, and its rear end is connected to an opening 3719 of the rear decoration body 3710 and an opening 3703d of the rear decoration body lens 3703. It is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the rear unit base 3701 through the rear unit base 3701.

The symbol display device 3730 includes a frame-shaped decorative frame 3732 on which a predetermined decoration is applied, a flat symbol display lens 3733 provided at the front end inside the decorative frame 3732, and a rear side of the symbol display lens 3733. A pattern reflector 3734 provided inside the decorative frame 3732 and a plurality of pattern LEDs 3735 mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3702 are provided.

In addition, the symbol display device 3730 is mounted on the front surface of the rear decorative board 3702, and includes a plurality of symbol LEDs 3735 for emitting light from each element of the 7-segment display arranged on the left and right, and each element of the 7-segment display. It is provided with a plurality of in-frame LEDs 3736 for emitting light from the surrounded area and a plurality of decorative frame LEDs 3737 for emitting decoration of the decorative frame 3732 (see FIG. 283).

The decorative frame 3732 has a three-dimensional relief decoration on its outer peripheral surface and front surface. A part of the decoration of the decorative frame 3732 is provided with a plating layer and has a metallic luster. Furthermore, at least a portion of the front surface of the decorative frame 3732 has translucency. The length of the decorative frame 3732 in the front-rear direction is approximately half the length of the back decoration body 3710 in the front-rear direction. A pattern display lens 3733 and a pattern reflector 3734 are inserted into the decorative frame 3732. The size of the rear end of the inner circumferential surface of the decorative frame 3732 is approximately the same as the size of the inner circumference of the opening 3719 of the back decoration body 3710. The decorative frame 3732 has a mounting portion that protrudes rearward from a portion inside the inner peripheral surface, and the mounting portion penetrates through the rear decorative board 3702 and is attached to the rear wall of the back unit base 3701. .

The symbol display lens 3733 is formed of a transparent member, and on the front surface, portions corresponding to the respective elements of the three 7-segment displays lined up left and right bulge forward in the shape of a convex lens. The symbol display lens 3733 has countless irregularities formed on its rear surface, and can diffuse light from the symbol LED 3735, frame LED 3736, etc. provided at the rear.

The symbol reflector 3734 has a plurality of holes penetrating it in the front and back direction, each corresponding to each element of the three 7-segment displays arranged on the left and right. As shown in FIG. 280, when the pattern reflector 3734 is assembled to the back presentation unit 3700, its front end is in contact with the rear surface of the pattern display lens 3733, and its rear end is in contact with the front surface of the back decoration board 3702. The light from the pattern LED 3735, in-frame LED 3736, and decorative frame LED 3737 is partitioned so that each element of the three 7-segment displays can be decorated with light emission independently. The pattern reflector 3734 is attached to the rear wall of the rear unit base 3701 with the rear decorative board 3702 sandwiched therebetween.

The pattern display device 3730 is provided inside the three-dimensional portion 3716 of the back decoration 3710 so that the pattern portion 3714 of the back decoration 3710 is in the background. In other words, the pattern display device 3730 is disposed at the center of the three-dimensional portion 3716, which is concave toward the center, so as to protrude forward, so that the pattern in the pattern portion 3714 of the back decoration body 3710 has a three-dimensional effect. It is possible to add a color to the image, and it can also be highlighted by the pattern portion 3714 to make it stand out.

In addition, since the decorative frame 3732 of the pattern display device 3730 is decorated with a relief-like decoration with metallic luster, the decoration with metallic luster imparts a sense of luxury to the pattern portion 3714 of the back decoration body 3710. This makes it possible to reduce the appearance of the picture part 3714 being cheap, and also to improve the appearance of the decoration by the rear decorative body 3710 and the decorative frame 3732, thereby strongly attracting the attention of the player. Can be done.

[29-6f. Lower back decoration]
Next, the lower back decorative body 3707 of the back presentation unit 3700 will be explained. The lower back decoration body 3707 is attached to the front surface of the lower back base 3705 which is attached to the back unit base 3701 in front of the symbol display device 3730. The lower back base 3705 to which the lower back decorative body 3707 is attached is a back unit base that penetrates the through hole 3703i of the back rear decorative body lens 3703 and the through hole 3721 of the back rear decorative body 3710 from the rear and protrudes forward. It is attached to the front surface of a pair of cylindrical attachment parts 3701b of 3701. The lower back decoration body 3707 is located near the lower end within the three-dimensional portion 3716 of the back rear decoration body 3710 when assembled to the back presentation unit 3700.

The lower back decorative body 3707 is formed in the shape of a box with an open rear end, and at least the front face is translucent. The lower back decorative body 3707 has a relief-like decoration applied to the upper part of the front surface. The lower back decoration body 3707 can be decorated with light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 3706a of the lower back decorative board 3706 attached to the front surface of the lower back base 3705.

The lower back decoration body 3707 is provided inside the three-dimensional part 3716 of the back and rear decoration body 3710, and can support the pattern of the pattern part 3714 of the pattern part 3714 by relief-like decoration, so that the pattern part 3714 does not look cheap. visibility can be reduced

Further, the front surface of the lower back decorative board 3706 provided behind the lower back decorative body 3707 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 3706a or the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the lower back decorative board 3706, the lower back decorative body 3707 can be decorated with brighter light. Further, the LED 3706a of the lower back decorative board 3706 is a full color LED. Furthermore, the lower back decorative board 3706 is printed with ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with other decorative boards and electronic components such as the LED 3706a to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the lower back decoration 3707, and the decorative effect of the lower back decoration 3707 can be reliably exerted.

[29-7. Features of game board]
Next, the features of the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment will be explained. Although the game board 5B will be described as an example here, the game board 5, game board 5A, and game board 5C also have the same effects as described below. In comparison with the game board 5A of the third embodiment, the game board 5B of this embodiment uses the game panel 1100, a part of the center lower accessory 2600, and the center upper accessory 2700 as common parts. Furthermore, in the center accessory 2600, the center accessory base 2601, front left decorative board 2602, reflector 2603, attacker unit 2670, and warp passage distribution device 2680 are common parts. Furthermore, in the center lower back unit 2630 of the center accessory 2600, the center lower back decorative board 2633, the board cover 2634, and the center lower back ball passage member 2635 are common parts. This suppresses an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, in the game board 5B, compared to the game board 5A which has many common parts as described above, the front left decorative body 2620 is the center lower back decoration in contrast to the front left decorative body 2610 in the center accessory 2600. The center lower back decoration body 2640B is different from the body 2640, and the back effect unit 3700 is different from the back effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, respectively. These front left decorative body 2620, center lower back decorative body 2640B, back production unit 3700, etc. are very conspicuous parts on the game board 5B, so even though there are many common parts, there are only a few non-common parts. Due to the presence of the parts, the game board 5A and the game board 5B are different models of pachinko machine 1 with completely different impressions.

As mentioned above, the front and left decorative bodies 2620, the center lower back decorative body 2640B, and the back and rear decorative bodies 3710 of the back direction unit 3700 are made of inexpensive pneumatic molded products, so all you need to do is replace them. With this, the impression of the game board 5B (game board 5A) can be greatly changed, and costs associated with model changes, minor changes, etc. can be reduced. In addition, since pneumatic molded products are inexpensive, it is possible to attach different decorations depending on the production lot of the game board 5B (game board 5A), shipping destination, special specifications such as campaigns, etc. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that meets the needs of players and game halls, and a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

[30. Configuration of main parts of game board of fifth embodiment]
Next, the configuration of the main parts of the game board 5C of the fifth embodiment will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 284. FIG. 284 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the game board of the fifth embodiment, cut horizontally and viewed from above. The game board 5C of this embodiment includes a transparent flat game panel 1110 in which a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven is provided on the front side, and a predetermined decoration provided on the front side of the game panel 1110. The game includes a front decoration 2050, which is provided with a predetermined decoration, and a back decoration 3050, which is provided so as to be visible from the front through a transparent game panel and has a predetermined decoration. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back decoration body 3050 is supported by the back box 3010.

The game board 5C is attached to a back box 3010, and also includes a support member 3060 to which a back decoration 3050 is attached to the front surface, and a plurality of support members 3060 attached to the support member 3060 to decorate the back decoration 3050 with light emission. and a back decorative board 3061 on which the LEDs 3061a are mounted.

Furthermore, the game board 5C is attached to the back box 3010 behind the game panel 1110, and receives the game ball B received in the prize opening 2051 of the front decoration body 2050, and then displays the back decoration body 3050 and the back decoration board. 3061 and a ball discharge passage member 3063 that penetrates the support member 3060, guides the ball to the rear of the support member 3060, and discharges the ball downward.

In addition, the ball discharge passage member 3063 is not limited to one that guides the game ball B received in the prize opening 2051 to the rear of the support member 3060 and discharges it downward. For example, the game ball B received in the prize opening 2051 may be guided into the interior of the three-dimensional portion 3056 through the opening 3058 of the back decoration 3050, and may be discharged downward inside the three-dimensional portion 3056. As a result, the internal space of the three-dimensional section 3056 can be effectively utilized, and since the ball discharge passage member 3063 does not protrude to the rear of the support member 3060, the space behind the support member 3060 can be relatively widened. This makes it easy to install another performance device.

[30-1. Front decoration]
Next, the front decoration 2050 on the game board 5C will be explained in detail. The front decoration body 2050 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1110 so that it partially overlaps with the back decoration body 3050 when viewed from the front. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the surface decoration body 2050 has a relief-like three-dimensional decoration, at least a part of which has translucency, and a part of which has a plating layer with metallic luster. is provided.

The front decoration 2050 has a decoration related to the decoration of the back decoration 3050, and with the transparent game panel 1110 in between, the front decoration 2050 shows the player a decoration with a sense of depth and unity with the back decoration 3050. be able to.

Note that the front decoration body 2050 may have a sticker with a pattern pasted on it, may not have a plating layer with metallic luster, or may have a translucent property. You don't have to.

Moreover, the front decoration body 2050 has a prize opening 2051 that can receive the game ball B. In the front decoration body 2050, the front surface of the prize opening 2051 is also decorated in the same manner as described above. The rear end side of the prize opening 2051 in the front decoration body 2050 is inserted into a through hole 1111 penetrating the game panel 1110 back and forth, and extends rearward to the vicinity of the rear surface of the game panel 1110. The game ball B received in the winning hole 2051 passes through the through hole 1111 of the game panel 1110, is delivered to the ball discharge passage member 3063 of the back unit 3000, is detected by a winning hole sensor (not shown), and is sent downward. be discharged.

[30-2. Back decoration]
Next, the back decoration body 3050 of the game board 5C will be explained in detail. The back decoration body 3050 is attached to the front surface of a support member 3060 attached to the back box 3010. The back decoration 3050 is provided so as to partially overlap the front decoration 2050 when viewed from the front. The back decoration 3050 is decorated with a decoration related to the decoration of the front decoration 2050, and with the transparent game panel 1110 in between, the back decoration 3050 shows the player a decoration with a sense of depth and unity with the front decoration 2050. be able to.

The back decoration body 3050 has a transparent base sheet 3051, a decoration layer 3052 applied to the back side of the base sheet 3051, and a base layer 3503 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 3052. .

The base sheet 3051 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

The decorative layer 3052 is formed with a predetermined pattern colored by silk printing or offset printing.

The base layer 3053 is for improving the color development of the pattern of the decorative layer 3052. The base layer 3053 of this embodiment is white or gray and can transmit light from behind. Thereby, the entire pattern (decoration layer 3052) can be made to look bright (light-emitting decoration) by light from the rear. This base layer 3053 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

Further, the back decoration body 3050 has a flat plate portion 3055 having a flat plate shape, and a solid portion 3056 that bulges forward from the flat plate portion 3055. In other words, in the back decoration body 3050, the flat plate portion 3055 extends outward like a flange from the solid portion 3056 that bulges forward.

Further, the back decoration body 3050 has a mounting portion 3057 provided with a first mounting hole that is a round hole passing through the flat plate portion 3055 and a second mounting hole that is an elongated hole passing through the flat plate portion 3055. The first mounting hole and the second mounting hole of the mounting portion 3057 include a cylindrical mounting boss projecting forward from the support member 3060, or a threaded portion of a mounting screw that is screwed into the screw hole of the support member 3060. etc. are inserted. Thereby, when assembled to the game board 5C, the back decoration body 3050 is attached with a predetermined amount of play. Note that the mounting portion 3057 may be provided with a positioning hole that allows the back decoration body 3050 to be positioned to some extent with respect to the support member 3060.

Furthermore, the back decoration 3050 has an opening 3058 penetrating back and forth in a portion of the three-dimensional portion 3056 that is behind the winning opening 2051 of the front decoration 2050. A front end portion of a ball discharge passage member 3063 that penetrates the support member 3060 and the back decorative substrate 3061 from the rear and projects forward is inserted into the opening 3058 from the rear. When assembled to the game board 5C, the winning opening 2051 of the front decoration 2050 is located in front of the opening 3058 of the back decoration 3050, and the opening 3058 is closed from the front by the decoration on the front of the winning opening 2051. The player is unable to see the player.

At least a portion of the mounting portion 3057 of the back decoration body 3050 is provided on the flat plate portion 3055 at an outer portion of the peripheral edge of the three-dimensional portion 3056 on the side far from the center of the gaming area 5c. In other words, the mounting portion 3057 is provided at a portion of the flat plate portion 3055 opposite to the center of the gaming area 5c with the three-dimensional portion 3056 in between. In other words, the mounting portion 3057 is provided at a position farther from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 than the three-dimensional portion 3056 of the flat plate portion 3055, and It is provided at a position that is blocked by the three-dimensional portion 3056 with respect to the line of sight. Thereby, the mounting screws 3062 that attach the back decoration body 3050 to the support member 3060 are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

The back decoration body 3050 of this embodiment is produced by applying a decoration layer 3052 and a base layer 3053 to a flat base sheet 3051 to form an intermediate product, and then heating the intermediate product to a predetermined temperature and then applying pressure to the base sheet 3051. After the three-dimensional portion 3056 is expanded by molding or vacuum forming, the outer periphery is trimmed (cut) and holes for the attachment portion 3057 such as a first attachment hole and a second attachment hole are bored. Since the back decoration body 3050 is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost than an injection molded product, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the back decoration body 3050 can be easily manufactured, it is possible to easily manufacture back decoration bodies 3050 with different patterns of the decorative layer 3052, shapes of the three-dimensional portions 3056, etc. Therefore, by replacing the back decoration body 3050 with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the back decoration body 3050 of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the exterior, and the increase in weight applied to the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can be reduced.

Note that the thickness of the back decoration body 3050 (base sheet 3051) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease and there is a risk that the desired shape will not be maintained due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 3056, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Further, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a possibility that the three-dimensional portion 3056 cannot be formed into a desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the weight of the back decoration body 3050 increases. This is to prevent it from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since this back decoration body 3050 is formed using the thin base sheet 3051 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, the back decoration body 3050 is attached to the support member 3060 with a predetermined amount of play due to the relationship between the attachment portion 3057, the support member 3060, the attachment screws 3062, etc., and therefore expands and contracts due to environmental changes. can correspond to This can prevent the back decoration body 3050 from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

In addition, since the back decoration body 3050 has backlash in the front-rear direction and is attached to the support member 3060 with backlash, even if the flat plate portion 3055 has undulations due to molding. , can be attached to the support member 3060.

Furthermore, since the mounting screws 3062 that attach the back decoration 3050 to the support member 3060 are seated screws, there is no concentration of force when the back decoration 3050 is attached, and the back decoration 3050 can be mounted in a good condition. Can be installed in any condition.

By the way, it is possible to enhance the sense of luxury by using a metal foil layer or a metal vapor deposition layer as the decorative layer 3052 of the back decoration body 3050, but in this case, the three-dimensional part 3056 is formed by pressure forming or vacuum forming. When molding, since the elongation of the decorative layer 3052 made of metal foil or the like is smaller than the elongation of the base sheet 3051, which is the base material, wrinkles may occur in the base sheet 3051 and the decorative layer 3052. Problems such as peeling of the decorative layer 3052 from the base sheet 3051 are likely to occur. On the other hand, in the game board 5C of the present embodiment, the front decoration 2050 with metallic luster is arranged on the front surface of the transparent game panel 1110 in front of the back decoration 3050, so that the metallic luster is reduced. It is possible to give a sense of luxury to the parts that have the decorative layer 3052, to reduce the appearance of the pattern of the decorative layer 3052 being cheap, and to improve the appearance of the decoration by the back decoration body 3050 and the front decoration body 2050. , can strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part can be , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape, so it is attached to the rear surface of the three-dimensionally shaped part (three-dimensional part 3056). It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the back decoration body 3050 of this embodiment, a flange-like flat plate part 3055 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid part 3056 that bulges forward, and a mounting part 3057 is provided on the flat plate part 3055. Therefore, the three-dimensional portion 3056 can be attached to the support member 3060.

Further, as described above, in the back decoration body 3050 of this embodiment, the mounting portion 3057 is provided on the flange-like flat plate portion 3055 extending outward from the three-dimensional portion 3056. Unlike molded products, there is no mounting boss for mounting, so when light is irradiated from behind, the shadow of the mounting boss does not appear on the three-dimensional part 3056, and the entire three-dimensional part 3056 is decorated with light emitting light uniformly. can be done.

When the back decoration body 3050 is assembled to the game board 5C, a back decoration board 3061 is located behind the three-dimensional portion 3056. Thereby, by causing the LED 3061a of the back decoration board 3061 to emit light as appropriate, the back decoration body 3050 can be decorated with light emission.

[30-3. Back decorative board]
Next, the back decorative board 3061 of the game board 5C will be explained in detail. The back decoration board 3061 is attached to the front surface of the support member 3060 at a position behind the three-dimensional portion 3056 of the back decoration body 3050. The back decorative substrate 3061 is formed in a size that closes the open rear end of the three-dimensional portion 3056, and is provided so as to be located inside the three-dimensional portion 3056. The back decoration board 3061 has a plurality of LEDs 3061a mounted on the front surface to decorate the back decoration body 3050 with light emission.

The front surface of the back decorative board 3061 is coated with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 3061a or the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the back decoration board 3061, the back decoration body 3050 can be decorated with brighter light. Further, the LED 3061a of the back decorative board 3061 is a full color LED.

Furthermore, the back decorative board 3061 is printed with ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with other decorative boards and electronic components such as the LED 3061a to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the back decoration 3050, and the decorative effect of the back decoration 3050 can be reliably exerted.

This back decoration board 3061 can decorate the back decoration body 3050 with light emission by causing a plurality of LEDs 3061a to emit light as appropriate, and also allows the front decoration body 2050 to be decorated with light emission through the back decoration body 3050 and the transparent game panel 1110. Can be done.

In addition, in the back decoration board 3061, components that do not emit light other than the LED 3061a (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light-emitting decoration. There is.

[31. Overall configuration of game board of sixth embodiment]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5D of the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 285. FIG. 285 is a front view of the game board of the sixth embodiment. The game board 5 of the sixth embodiment has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven when the player operates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The gaming area 5a includes a general prize opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening 2004, which provide a predetermined benefit (for example, payout of a predetermined number of gaming balls B) to a player who receives a gaming ball B. , a grand prize opening 2005, and a second grand prize opening 2006A. Furthermore, within the gaming area 5a, a gate 2003A is provided which opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in a predetermined opening/closing pattern when the gaming ball B passes through. Furthermore, the game board 5B is provided with an out port 1008 for discharging the game ball B that has been hit into the game area 5a and flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a out of the game area 5a.

The game board 5D, like the game board 5 described above, includes a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. It includes a transparent plate-like game panel 1110 that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1110 that is within the game area 5a. The game board 5D also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1110, and a game played by driving a game ball B into the game area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 that controls the contents.

The game board 5D also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player, and a game panel. a peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1110; a performance display device 1600 located at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined performance image; and a performance display device 1600 installed on the front side of the game panel 1110. It further includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1110.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game balls B hit in the gaming area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the gaming area. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls B at different positions within the gaming area 5a, a gate 2003A that is provided at different positions within the gaming area 5a so that the game balls B can pass through, A second starting port 2004 that can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn when the ball B passes through the gate 2003A, and a game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a grand prize opening 2005 and a second grand prize opening 2006A that can accept game balls B according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting ball B.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a starting port unit 2100 that is installed directly above the lower end of the gaming area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the gaming area 5a and has a first starting port 2002, and a front side of the starting port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is installed along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as seen and has three general prize openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300, and a first attacker unit 2400A which is provided on the right side in front view of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and has a second starting port 2004 and a big prize opening 2005. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500A is provided above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and a first attacker is located to the right of the center accessory 2500A. A second attacker unit 2400B is provided above the unit 2400A and has a second big prize opening 2006A.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided with one general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center accessory 2500A and above the second attacker unit 2400B, and a gate 2003A is provided above the general winning opening 2001. ing.

The center accessory 2500A of the front unit 2000 is formed into a frame shape, and includes a warp entrance 2507 through which the game ball B can enter, and a warp exit 2508 through which the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2507 is released into the frame. It includes a stage 2509 that rolls the game ball B released from the warp exit 2508 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. The center of the stage 2509 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, and when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2509 into the gaming area 5a, it is received into the first starting port 2002 with a high probability.

The back unit 3000 is provided in the upper part of the game area 5a, and includes a back upper production unit 3900 that is provided so that most parts can be seen from the front so as to pass through the frame of the center accessory 2500A. ing.

[31-1. Behind the scenes production unit]
Next, the back upper presentation unit 3900 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5D will be explained in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 286 to 299 and the like. FIG. 286 is a front view of the back top production unit in the back unit, FIG. 287(a) is a perspective view of the back top production unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 287(b) is a back top production unit in the back unit. It is a perspective view seen from behind. Figure 288 is an exploded perspective view of the back and top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 289 is an exploded perspective view of the back and top production unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the back. be. FIG. 290(a) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit seen from the front, and FIG. 290(b) is a perspective view of the back upper production unit seen from the back. FIG. 291 is an exploded perspective view of the back top decoration unit of the back top production unit, as seen from the front, and FIG. 292 is an exploded perspective view of the back top decoration unit of the back top production unit, as seen from the rear. be.

Further, FIG. 293 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 286. FIG. 294 is a front view of the front support lens and the back decoration sheet of the back decoration unit in the back decoration unit. FIG. 295(a) is a front view of the back upper left decorative body and the back upper right decorative body of the back upper decoration unit in the back upper production unit, and FIG. 295(b) is a front view of the back upper left decorative body and the back upper right decorative body. (c) is a perspective view of the back upper left decorative body and the back upper right decorative body viewed from behind. FIG. 296 is a front view showing the back upper left decorative body and the back upper right decorative body together with a pattern. FIG. 297 is a front view of the rear support lens of the upper back decoration unit in the upper back presentation unit. FIG. 298 is a front view showing the back upper production unit in the back unit 3000 together with a pattern. FIG. 299 is a front view of the back and upper presentation unit showing the arrangement of the back and front decorative boards.

The back upper presentation unit 3900 of the back unit 3000 is installed near the front end of the back box 3010 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 288 and 289, the back top presentation unit 3900 includes a back top front rotating decorative body 3901 having a shaft 3901a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back top front rotating decorative body 3901. A back upper decoration unit 3930 extending from side to side through which an axis shaft 3901a passes through the center in the left and right direction, and a plurality of first LEDs 3903a and second LEDs 3903b provided at the rear of the back upper decoration unit 3930 and a plurality of first LEDs 3903a and second LEDs 3903b on the front side. The mounted back upper front decorative board 3903 and the back upper decorative unit 3930 which is provided behind the back upper front decorative board 3903 and is attached to the front side, and the shaft 3901a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3901. A unit base 3904 rotatably supported.

In addition, the rear upper production unit 3900 has a rear cover 3905 attached to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3904 and a rotation axis on the rear surface of the rear cover 3905 between the front unit base 3904. A back upper front rotation drive motor 3906 is installed so as to protrude into the space of , and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3907 is attached to the rotation shaft of the back upper front rotation drive motor 3906 and meshes with the drive gear 3907. a rotating gear 3908 which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft 3901a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3901 and has a detection piece 3908a protruding forward; and a back upper front decorative board 3903. A rear rotation detection sensor 3909 is attached to the rear surface and is capable of detecting the detection piece 3908a of the rotating gear 3908.

In addition, the back upper production unit 3900 includes a back lift/lower drive motor 3910 which is attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3905 so that its rotating shaft protrudes into the space between the front unit base 3904, and a back lift/lower drive motor 3910. A spur gear-shaped motor gear 3911 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3910, a gear portion 3912a meshing with the motor gear 3911, and a portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3912a pass through the rear cover 3905. an elevating cam gear 3912 that is rotatably attached to the rear cover 3905 and has a drive pin 3912b that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape, and a detection piece 3912c that protrudes forward from near the outer periphery of the gear portion 3912a; , a back up/down detection sensor 3913 that is attached to the rear surface of the back upper/front decorative board 3903 and can detect the detection piece 3912c of the up/down cam gear 3912, and an up/down cam gear 3912 on the tip side where the back up/down rotation decorative body 3917 is provided. A rear ascending and descending decoration unit 3914 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3905 around an axis in the front and back direction so as to be raised and lowered by the revolution of the drive pin 3912b of the rear cover 3905; A spring 3915 is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3905, which biases the spring 3914 to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward, and restricts the upward movement of the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3914. A rod-shaped regulating member 3916 is provided.

The back up/down decoration unit 3914 includes a back top and rear decoration body 3918 through which a shaft (not shown) protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back top and rear rotation decoration body 3917, and a back top and rear decoration body 3918. A back upper and rear decorative board 3919 (see FIG. 293) provided at the rear of the rear decorative body 3918 and having a plurality of LEDs 3919a mounted on the front surface; is attached to the front surface, and an elevating unit base 3920 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3904 and rotatably supports the back upper and rear rotating decorative body 3917.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 293, the back up/down decoration unit 3914 includes a back up/down rotation drive motor 3921 attached to the front surface of the up/down unit base 3920 so that its rotating shaft projects rearward; A drive gear 3922 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rotating shaft of the rotary drive motor 3921, and a first transmission gear 3923 in the form of a spur gear is engaged with the drive gear 3922 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3920. A second transmission gear 3924 in the shape of a spur gear is engaged with the first transmission gear 3923 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3920. A rotating gear 3925 in the form of a spur gear is attached to the rear end of the shaft of the body 3917.

Furthermore, the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3914 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the lifting/lowering unit base 3920 so as to cover the driving gear 3922, the first transmission gear 3923, the second transmission gear 3924, and the rotating gear 3925 from behind. 3926, and a motor cover 3927 attached to the front surface of the lifting unit base 3920 so as to cover the rear up-and-down rotation drive motor 3921 from the front.

The back top and front rotating decorative body 3901 of the back top presentation unit 3900 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower, and has translucency. The shaft 3901a that protrudes rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotating decoration body 3901 passes through the back upper decoration unit 3930, the back upper front decoration board 3903, and the unit base 3904, and connects the unit base 3904 and the rear cover. 3905.

The back top decoration unit 3930 includes a back top middle decoration body 3931 provided at the center in the left-right direction, and a back top left decoration body 3940A and a back top right decoration body provided on both left and right sides of the back top middle decoration body 3931. 3940B, a front support lens 3932 and a rear support lens 3933, which are provided behind the back upper middle decoration body 3931 and support the back upper left decoration body 3940A and the back upper right decoration body 3940B, and the front support lens 3932. and a back decorative sheet 3935 attached to the upper front surface of the screen.

The back top front decorative board 3903 extends left and right over substantially the entire length of the back top decoration unit 3930 in the left and right direction. The back upper front decorative board 3903 can decorate the back upper front rotating decorative body 3901 by emitting light by causing the plurality of first LEDs 3903a to emit light, and can decorate the back upper left decorative body by causing the plurality of second LEDs 3903b to emit light. 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be decorated with light emission. The plurality of first LEDs 3903a and second LEDs 3903b mounted on the back top and front decorative substrates 3903 are full-color LEDs.

The unit base 3904 has through holes 3904a into which the back upper rotation detection sensor 3909 and the back up/down detection sensor 3913 attached to the rear surface of the back upper front decorative board 3903 are inserted. The rear cover 3905 has a cylindrical support shaft 3905a that is coaxial with the shaft 3901a of the back top and front rotating decorative body 3901 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface, and a circular arc shape through which the drive pin 3912b of the elevating cam gear 3912 is inserted. It has an extended slit 3905b. The support shaft 3905a of the rear cover 3905 is for rotatably supporting the back lifting/lowering decoration unit 3914, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3920a of the lifting unit base 3920.

The detection piece 3908a of the rotating gear 3908 is detected by the back rotation detection sensor 3909 that penetrates the through hole 3904a of the unit base 3904 and protrudes rearward. In the elevating cam gear 3912, a gear portion 3912a is formed in a semicircular arc shape, and a drive pin 3912b that protrudes rearward is provided at a portion that bulges outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3912a. The drive pin 3912b of the lifting cam gear 3912 passes through the slit 3905b of the rear cover 3905 and is slidably inserted into the slit 3920b of the lifting unit base 3920 of the back lifting decoration unit 3914. Further, the detection piece 3912c of the elevation cam gear 3912 is detected by a back elevation detection sensor 3913 that penetrates the through hole 3904a of the unit base 3904 and protrudes rearward.

The back up-and-back rotating decorative body 3917 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom flower, and has translucency. The back top and back decoration body 3918 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top and back rotation decoration body 3917 front and back, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It has a decoration shaped like a tree. The entire back upper and rear decorative body 3918 has translucency. The back upper and rear decoration board (not shown) allows the back upper and rear rotating decoration body 3917 and the back upper and rear decoration body 3918 to be decorated with light by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LEDs on the upper and lower back decorative boards are full-color LEDs.

The elevating unit base 3920 has a shaft hole 3920a that penetrates back and forth on the base end side (right end side in front view) and into which the support shaft 3905a of the rear cover 3905 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable, and a shaft hole 3920a that is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3920a. It has an elongated slit 3920b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3920a. A drive pin 3912b of the lifting cam gear 3912 is slidably inserted into the slit 3920b of the lifting unit base 3920. The motor cover 3927 has a decoration resembling a cherry blossom flower formed on its front surface.

Next, the movements of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3901, the back upper rear rotating decorative body 3917, and the back rising/lowering decorative body unit 3914 in the back upper presentation unit 3900 will be explained. In the normal state of the back top production unit 3900, the detection piece 3908a of the rotating gear 3908 attached to the shaft 3901a of the back top and front rotation decoration body 3901 is detected by the back top rotation detection sensor 3909, and the back The upper front rotating decorative body 3901 is in a state with one petal facing upward (see FIG. 286, etc.). In this state, when the drive gear 3907 is rotated by the back top and front rotation drive motor 3906, the back top and front rotation decorative body 3901 can be rotated around the axis in the front and back direction via the rotation gear 3908.

In addition, in a normal state, the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3914, which is provided with the back up-and-back rotating decoration 3917 on the tip side, extends in the left-right direction, and the entire unit excluding the tip side is It is located at the rear of the upper back decoration unit 3930 and is in a retracted position where it cannot be seen from the front (see FIG. 286). Note that the portion of the back ascending/descending decoration unit 3914 that protrudes to the left from the back top decoration unit 3930 is not visible from the front when assembled on the game board 5D (see FIG. 285).

In the back upper direction unit 3900, when the back up/down drive motor 3910 rotates the up/down cam gear 3912 via the motor gear 3911 in a normal state, the back up/down decoration unit 3914 opens the shaft hole 3920a of the up/down unit base 3920. It can be rotated counterclockwise around the center. As a result, the tip side of the rear ascending and descending decoration unit 3914 is located below the back upper decoration unit 3930 than the center, and the rear upper and rear rotating decorations 3917 and the like can be viewed from the front. can.

By driving the back up-and-back rotation drive motor 3921 when the back up-and-back rotation decoration 3917 is visible from the front, the back up-and-back rotation decoration 3917 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction. .

[31-2. Decorative unit on the back]
Next, the upper back decoration unit 3930 in the upper back presentation unit 3900 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 288 to 292 and the like. The back upper decoration unit 3930 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3904 at the rear of the back upper front rotating decoration body 3901. The back top decoration unit 3930 includes a back top middle decoration 3931 provided at the center in the left-right direction, and a back top left decoration unit 3930 that is provided on both left and right sides of the back top middle decoration 3931 and has a three-dimensional resemblance to a hibiscus flower. Decorative body 3940A, back upper right decorative body 3940B, front support lens 3932 and rear which are provided behind the back upper middle decorative body 3931 and support the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B. It has a support lens 3933 and a back decorative sheet 3935 attached to the upper front surface of the front support lens 3932.

The back top and middle decoration body 3931 is made by stacking two cherry blossom flowers of the same size as the back top and front rotation decoration body 3901 one above the other, and then rotating them so that the rear petals are positioned between the front petals. It is shaped like a. The back upper and middle decorative body 3931 passes through the front support lens 3932 and is attached to the rear support lens 3933. This back top and middle decorative body 3931 has translucency.

[31-2a. Back top left decoration and back top right decoration]
Next, the back upper left decoration body 3940A and the back upper right decoration body 3940B in the back upper decoration unit 3930 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 295, 296, and the like. The back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are supported by being sandwiched from front and rear by a front support lens 3932 and a rear support lens 3933. The back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B consist of a transparent base sheet 3941, a decorative layer 3942 applied to the back side of the base sheet 3941, and a lower back decorative body 3940A applied to the back side of the decorative layer 3942. It has a geological formation 3943 (see Fig. 296).

The base sheet 3941 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

As shown in FIG. 296, the decorative layer 3942 forms a pattern portion 3944 consisting of a pattern of a hibiscus flower. This decorative layer 3942 is colored by silk printing or offset printing.

The pattern portion 3944 is formed of the decorative layer 3942, and includes a portion within the pattern where the decorative layer 3942 is not intentionally provided. This pattern section 3944 includes a main pattern section 3944a that is the subject, a sub-picture section 3944b that is the background of the main pattern section 3944a, and a translucent pattern section that has a higher light transmittance than the main pattern section 3944a and the sub-image section 3944b. 3944c. The main pattern portion 3944a is a portion of a hibiscus flower pattern, and the sub pattern portion 3944b is a portion of a radial pattern and a border around the hibiscus flower.

Note that in this embodiment, the base layer 3943 is not provided behind the hibiscus petal portion and the circular portion at the tip of the style in the main pattern portion 3944a, but instead a light diffusion layer is provided. ing. The light diffusion layer is printed with transparent ultraviolet curing ink and then irradiated with ultraviolet rays of different wavelengths to form irregular crepe-like wrinkles (so-called crepe printing), which diffuses light from behind. This allows parts such as flower petals to be decorated with light with uniform brightness, and it is also possible to suppress point light emission from the second LED 3903b at the rear, making the second LED 3903b less noticeable.

The radial pattern of the sub-pattern portion 3944b is a line centered on the center of the back-top-front rotating decorative body 3901 when assembled into the back-top presentation unit 3900 when viewed from the front. The radial lines of the sub-picture section 3944b correspond to the radial sub-picture section 3935b of the upper back decorative sheet 3935, which will be described later. A portion of the sub-picture portion 3944b above the three-dimensional portion 3946 can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent portion 3935c of the upper back decorative sheet 3935 (see FIG. 298). Therefore, while the radial lines of the sub-picture section 3935b of the back top decorative sheet 3935 appear on the front side and in a position away from the center, the sub-pictures of the back top left decorative body 3940A and the back top right decorative body 3940B Since the radial lines of the portion 3944b are visible on the back side and close to the center, it is possible to create an illusion that the radial lines extend to the back (backward) toward the center, giving a three-dimensional effect. You can make it look better.

Since the sub pattern portion 3944b has a radial pattern, the radially extending portion of the pattern intersects with the outer periphery of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, and The pattern changes along the periphery. As a result, as will be described in detail later, even if the base sheet 3941 is pulled and the flat plate part 3945 is deformed in a wavy manner when the three-dimensional part 3946 is molded, the flat plate part 3945 can be It is possible to make the undulations in the portion 3945 less noticeable.

The transparent pattern portions 3944c are provided radially in the radial pattern portions as the sub-pattern portions 3944b. The transparent pattern portion 3944c is not provided with the decorative layer 3942 and is transparent. Therefore, when assembled into the back top effect unit 3900, the white front surface of the back top front decorative board 3903 disposed at the rear can be viewed from the front at the transparent pattern portion 3944.

The base layer 3943 is for improving the coloring of the decorative layer 3942. The base layer 3943 is provided in the hibiscus leaf and style portion of the main pattern portion 3944a and in the sub pattern portion 3944b. In other words, the base layer 3943 is not provided in the petal portion and the tip portion of the style of the hibiscus. The base layer 3943 of this embodiment is gray and makes it difficult for light from the rear to pass through. This allows the petals to appear brighter than other parts due to the light coming from behind. This base layer 3943 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

In addition, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B include a flat plate portion 3945, a solid portion 3946 that bulges forward from the flat plate portion 3945, and a circular shape that passes through the flat plate portion 3945. It has a mounting hole 3947 and a positioning hole 3949 passing through the flat plate part 3945. In other words, in the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, the flat plate portion 3945 extends outward like a flange from the periphery of the solid portion 3946 that bulges forward.

The solid portions 3946 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are provided at the main pattern portion 3944a of the pattern portion 3944. In other words, the flowers and leaves of the hasbiscus in the picture are three-dimensionally formed by the three-dimensional portion 3946.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 295(b), the boundary between the main pattern part 3944a (shaded area in the figure) and the sub-picture part 3944b is located on the solid part 3946 side, and the sub-picture part A portion of 3944b extends toward the solid portion 3946. In other words, the three-dimensional portion 3946 bulges out in a slightly wider area than the main pattern portion 3944a. In other words, the main pattern portion 3944a is formed smaller than the three-dimensional portion 3946.

To be more specific, when the periphery of the hibiscus flower pattern and leaves (main pattern part 3944a) extends from the three-dimensional part 3946 toward the flat plate part 3945, the three-dimensional part near the part of the pattern that is in contact with the flat plate part 3945 While the 3946 side faces to the side, the flat plate part 3945 side of the pattern faces forward, so the three-dimensional hibiscus flowers and leaves (the pattern) look unnatural, and the pattern and the three-dimensional pattern look unnatural. There is a problem that the three-dimensional decorative effect created by the portion 3946 is degraded. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the peripheral part of the hibiscus flower and leaf pattern (the boundary between the main pattern part 3944a and the sub-pattern part 3944b) is located on the three-dimensional part 3946 side. The peripheral edge portion of 3944a does not face forward due to flat plate portion 3945. As a result, the pattern of hibiscus flowers and leaves (main pattern portion 3944a) does not look unnatural, and the decorative effect of the three-dimensional main pattern portion 3944a and three-dimensional portion 3946 can be reliably exhibited.

When the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are assembled into the back upper presentation unit 3900, the flat plate portion 3945 is located between the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933 (Fig. 293 ). Furthermore, most of the three-dimensional portion 3946 protrudes forward through the opening 3932e of the front support lens 3932.

The inner diameter of the attachment hole 3947 is sufficiently larger than the diameter of the attachment boss 3933e of the rear support lens 3933. The inner diameter of the positioning hole 3949 is approximately twice the diameter of the positioning projection 3933f of the rear support lens 3933 that projects in a cylindrical shape. Therefore, when the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are assembled to the back upper production unit 3900, they have a predetermined amount of wobbling (play) in the direction along the surface of the rear support lens 3933 and in the front and back directions. Installed with.

Further, the attachment hole 3947 and the positioning hole 3949 are formed in the flat plate portion 3945 in which the sub-picture portion 3944b of the pattern portion 3944 is provided. That is, the attachment hole 3947 and the positioning hole 3949 are not provided in the main pattern portion 3944a (solid portion 3946). As a result, the mounting screws (not shown) for attaching the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B to the rear support lens 3933 through the mounting hole 3947 can hide a part of the main pattern part 3944a. Therefore, the player can clearly see the main picture part 3944a, and the decorative effect of the picture of the main picture part 3944a can be reliably exerted.

Furthermore, since the mounting holes 3947 and the like are provided in the flat plate part 3945, they are provided at a position away from the three-dimensional part 3946, and when assembled to the back top presentation unit 3900, the rear of the back top decoration sheet 3935. It is located at the location of Thereby, the mounting holes 3947 and the like (mounting screws) can be made less noticeable, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

The back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B of this embodiment are formed by applying a decorative layer 3942, a base layer 3943, and a light diffusion portion to a flat base sheet 3941 to form an intermediate product. After heating the intermediate product to a predetermined temperature and expanding the three-dimensional part 3946 by pressure forming or vacuum forming, the outer periphery was trimmed (cut) and a mounting hole 3947 and a positioning hole 3949 were bored. It is something. Since the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are manufactured by the method described above, they can be manufactured at a lower cost than injection molded products, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, since the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be easily manufactured, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper The right decorative body 3940B can be easily manufactured. Therefore, by replacing the back top left decoration body 3940A and back top right decoration body 3940B with different patterns and shapes, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and create a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts players' attention. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to provide and can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B of this embodiment are formed of thin sheet-like members, so they can be made lighter than they appear from the outside. An increase in the weight of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

The thickness of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B (base sheet 3941) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease, and there is a risk that it will not be possible to maintain the desired shape due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 3946, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Furthermore, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a possibility that the three-dimensional portion 3946 cannot be formed into a desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the back upper left decorative body 3940A and This is to prevent the weight of the back upper right decorative body 3940B from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are formed using the thin base sheet 3941 as a matrix, they expand and contract (expand and contract) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B have the relationship between the mounting hole 3947 and the mounting boss 3933e, the relationship between the positioning hole 3949 and the positioning protrusion 3933f, and the flat plate portion 3945. Due to the relationship between the rear surface of the front support lens 3932 and the front surface of the rear support lens 3933, the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933 are attached to the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933 with a predetermined amount of wobble, which prevents environmental changes. It can accommodate expansion and contraction due to This can prevent the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

In addition, since the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are attached with a predetermined amount of wobble, even if the flat plate portion 3945 has undulations due to molding, the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933 and the center accessory base 2601.

Furthermore, since the mounting screws that attach the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B to the rear support lens 3933 are seated screws, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are There is no concentration of force when they are attached, and the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be attached in good condition.

By the way, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part is , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape. It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B of the present embodiment, a flange-shaped flat plate portion 3945 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid portion 3946 bulging forward. 3945 is provided with a mounting hole 3947, etc., and the flat plate portion 3945 is loosely fitted between the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933, so the three-dimensional portion 3946 on which the main pattern portion 3944a is provided is attached. be able to.

Further, as described above, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B of this embodiment have mounting holes 3947 etc. in the flange-like flat plate portion 3945 extending outward from the solid portion 3946. Since the three-dimensional part 3946 does not have a mounting boss for attachment like an injection molded product, the shadow of the mounting boss will not be reflected on the three-dimensional part 3946 when light is irradiated from behind. , the entire three-dimensional portion 3946 can be uniformly decorated with light.

When the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are assembled to the back upper production unit 3900, the second LED 3903b of the back upper front decorative board 3903 is located behind the main pattern part 3944a in the pattern part 2614. (See Figure 299). Thereby, by appropriately emitting light from the second LED 3903b of the back top front decorative board 3903, the main pattern portions 3944a of the back top left decoration body 3940A and the back top right decoration body 3940B can be decorated with light emission, respectively. .

[31-2b. Front support lens]
Next, the front support lens 3932 in the upper back decoration unit 3930 of the upper back rendering unit 3900 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 294 and the like. The front support lens 3932 is attached to the front surface of the rear support lens 3933 so as to sandwich the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B. The front support lens 3932 is formed of a transparent member. The front support lens 3932 includes a flat plate-shaped front plate portion 3932a extending left and right, a lower horizontal peripheral wall portion 3932b extending rearward from both left and right sides and a lower side of the front plate portion 3932a, and a lower horizontal peripheral wall portion 3932b extending rearward from the upper side of the front plate portion 3932a. It has an upper peripheral wall part 3932c extending to the upper peripheral wall part 3932c, and a flat upper front plate part 3932d extending upward from the front end of the upper peripheral wall part 3932c in parallel with the front plate part 3932a.

The front support lens 3932 is formed into a container shape that is open to the rear and has shallow front and back sides, by a front plate portion 3932a, a lower horizontal peripheral wall portion 3932b, and the like.

Further, the front support lens 3932 has a pair of openings 3932e that penetrate the front plate portion 3932a in the front and back directions. A pair of openings 3932e are provided near both left and right ends of the front plate portion 3932a. The pair of (left and right) openings 3932e are formed to have a size slightly larger than the outer periphery of the solid portion 3946 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B. The solid portions 3946 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are inserted into these openings 3932e from the rear.

In the front plate portion 3932a of the front support lens 3932, a back upper and middle decoration body 3931 is arranged at a portion between a pair of openings 3932e. The lower lateral circumferential wall portion 3932b and the upper circumferential wall portion 3932c extend in the circumferential direction with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and are provided with a plurality of protrusions extending back and forth on their outer surfaces. The upper front plate portion 3932d extends left and right, and a back upper decorative sheet 3935 is attached to the front surface.

When the front support lens 3932 is assembled to the back upper production unit 3900, a predetermined amount (back upper left decorative body 3940A and back upper right decorative body 3940B (See FIG. 293). By positioning the flat plate portions 3945 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B in the gaps, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are held in a state with a predetermined amount of wobble. Can be installed.

[31-2c. Rear support lens]
Next, the rear support lens 3933 in the upper back decoration unit 3930 of the upper back rendering unit 3900 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 297 and the like. The rear support lens 3933 has the front support lens 3932 attached to the front side with the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B in between, and is also attached to the front surface of the unit base 3904. The rear support lens 3933 is formed of a transparent member.

The rear support lens 3933 includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped substrate portion 3933a, a central lens 3933b provided at the center of the substrate portion 3933a, and a pair of side lenses 3933c provided on both left and right outer sides of the central lens 3933b. and a plurality of LED accommodating portions 3933d that penetrate front and rear in the center lens 3933b and into which the first LEDs 3903a of the back upper and front decorative substrates 3903 are inserted from the rear.

Further, the rear support lens 3933 has a mounting boss 3933e that projects forward in a cylindrical shape at a portion above the pair of side lenses 3933c on the front surface of the substrate portion 3933a, and the mounting boss 3933e is located at a different position on the front surface of the substrate portion 3933a. It has a positioning protrusion 3933f that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape.

The substrate portion 3933a of the rear support lens 3933 is formed in a size that can be inserted from the rear into the container-shaped front support lens 3932 that is open to the rear, and the lower side and both left and right sides are below the front support lens 3932. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the horizontal peripheral wall portion 3932b. Further, the upper side of the substrate portion 3933a extends upward from the upper side of the front plate portion 3932a of the front support lens 3932, and is located behind the upper front plate portion 3932d.

As shown in the figure, the central lens 3933b has an outer shape that resembles a cherry blossom flower so as to correspond to the back-top-front rotating decorative body 3901. The front side of the central lens 3933b is recessed rearward from the front surface of the substrate portion 3933a, and the rear surface side protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the substrate portion 3933a. The central lens 3933b has a plurality of rectangular prisms formed on its front side. Further, the rear surface side of the central lens 3933b is formed flat and parallel to the rear surface of the substrate portion 3933a. The central lens 3933b reflects the light emitted from the inner peripheral surface of the LED housing part 3933d in the direction along the surface of the substrate part 3933a forward to the back upper and middle decorative body 3931 side (front side). It can be radiated.

The pair of side lenses 3933c are provided at the front surface of the substrate portion 3933a at positions corresponding to the three-dimensional portions 3946 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B. The side lens 3933c has a front side that projects further forward than the front surface of the substrate portion 3933a, and a rear side that is recessed forward than the rear surface of the substrate portion 3933a. The side lens 3933c has a flat front surface parallel to the front surface of the substrate portion 3933a. Further, on the rear surface side of the side lens 3933c, a circular lens is formed at a portion in front of the second LED 3903b of the back upper front decorative board 3903, and a plurality of prisms are formed to surround the lens. has been done. Thereby, the light from the second LED 3903b can be widely diffused and radiated forward (to the three-dimensional portions 3946 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B).

The attachment boss 3933e has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the attachment hole 3947 of the back upper left decoration body 3940A and the back upper right decoration body 3940B, and is inserted into the attachment hole 3947 from the rear. The distance from the front surface of the mounting boss 3933e to the front surface of the substrate portion 3933a is slightly longer than the thickness of the flat plate portion 3945 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B. For the rear support lens 3933, insert the mounting boss 3933e into the mounting hole 3947 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, and then screw in the mounting screw (not shown) attached to the seat from the front. Accordingly, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be attached with a predetermined amount of wobble in the direction along the surface of the base plate portion 3933a and in the front-rear direction.

When the rear support lens 3933 is assembled to the back upper production unit 3900, a predetermined amount (back upper left decorative body 3940A and back upper right decorative body 3940B) is attached between the front plate part 3932a and the base plate part 3933a of the front support lens 3932. (See FIG. 293). By positioning the flat plate portions 3945 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B in the gaps, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are held in a state with a predetermined amount of wobble. Can be installed.

[31-2d. Decorative back sheet]
Next, the upper back decoration sheet 3935 of the upper back decoration unit 3930 in the upper back production unit 3900 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 294, 298, and the like. The upper back decorative sheet 3935 is attached to the front surface of the upper front plate portion 3932d of the front support lens 3932. The back upper decorative sheet 3935 has a plurality of main pattern sections 3935a imitating cherry blossoms, and a sub-pattern section 3935b consisting of a plurality of radial lines serving as the background of the main pattern section 3935a. In the back upper decorative sheet 3935, a predetermined pattern is composed of a main pattern portion 3935a and a sub pattern portion 3935b.

The main pattern section 3935a and the sub-picture section 3935b are formed by printing. The radial lines of the sub-picture portion 3935b are lines centered on the center of the back-top-front rotating decorative body 3901 when viewed from the front. The plurality of radial lines of the sub-picture section 3935b are provided so as to correspond to the positions of the radial lines in the sub-picture section 3944b of the pattern section 3944 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B ( See Figure 298). The sub-picture section 3935b, which is made up of a plurality of radial lines, is provided with regular printing areas and hologram printing areas alternately.

Further, the upper back decorative sheet 3935 has a transparent portion 3935c in which the main pattern portion 3935a and the sub pattern portion 3935b are not provided. The upper portions of the patterns (sub-pattern portions 3944b) of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be visually recognized through these transparent portions 3935c (see FIG. 298).

This back top decorative sheet 3935, when assembled into the back top presentation unit 3900, decorates the upper part of the back top front rotation decoration body 3901, the back top left decoration body 3940A, and the back top right decoration body 3940B. Further, the sub-picture portions 3944b of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B provided at the rear can be visually recognized through the transparent portion 3935c. At this time, the radial lines of the sub-picture part 3935b of the back top decorative sheet 3935 appear on the front side and in a position away from the center, whereas the back top left decoration 3940A and the back top right decoration 3940B Since the radial lines of the sub-picture section 3944b are visible at the back and close to the center, it is possible to create an illusion that the radial lines extend to the back (backward) toward the center, creating a three-dimensional effect. You can add it to make it look better.

[31-2e. Back top and front decorative board]
Next, the upper and lower back decoration boards 3903 of the upper back presentation unit 3900 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIG. 299 and the like. The back upper front decorative board 3903 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3904 behind the back upper decorative unit 3930 (rear support lens 3933). The back upper front decorative substrate 3903 is formed to have a smaller size than the outer circumference of the rear support lens 3933.

On the front surface of the back upper front decorative board 3903, a plurality of first LEDs 3903a are mounted on the rear part of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3901, and the three-dimensional display of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B is mounted. A plurality of second LEDs 3903b are mounted behind the portion 3946. Among the plurality of first LEDs 3903a, those that are square when viewed from the front are top-view type LEDs that emit light forward, and those that are rectangular when viewed from the front are those that emit light in a direction parallel to the front surface of the back upper front decorative board 3903. It is a side view type LED that emits light. These first LEDs 3903a are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3933d of the rear support lens 3933, and irradiate light onto the inner peripheral surface of the LED accommodating portion 3933d. Further, the second LED 3903b is a top view type LED that emits light forward. These first LED 3903a and second LED 3903b are full color LEDs.

The front surface of the back upper front decorative substrate 3903 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the first LED 3903a and second LED 3903b and the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the back top and front decorative board 3903, the back top and front rotating decorative body 3901 and The back upper left decorative body 3940A, the back upper right decorative body 3940B, etc. can be decorated with brighter light.

Furthermore, the rear top and front decorative boards 3903 have characters and symbols of high brightness and saturation (for example, , yellow) by screen printing using ink. This makes it possible to make characters and symbols less noticeable through the back top front rotating decoration 3901, the back top left decoration 3940A, and the back top right decoration 3940B. 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can reliably exhibit the decorative effect.

This back upper front decorative board 3903 can decorate the back upper front rotating decorative body 3901 with light emission via the back upper middle decorative body 3931 by appropriately causing the plurality of first LEDs 3903a to emit light. Further, by appropriately causing the plurality of second LEDs 3903b to emit light, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be decorated with light.

Note that in the back top and front decorative board 3903, members that do not emit light (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than the first LED 3903a and the second LED 3903b are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and do not interfere with the light emitting decoration. Care has been taken to ensure that this does not occur.

[32. Overall configuration of slot machine]
Next, the overall configuration of the slot machine 9 will be explained with reference to FIG. 300. Figure 300 is a front view of the slot machine. The slot machine 9 includes a box-shaped housing unit (not shown) that is installed in a game hall or the like and has an open front, a gaming unit 3800 housed in the housing unit, and a gaming unit 3800 that is viewed from the front. It mainly includes a door unit 3810 (first embodiment) that opens and closes the opening on the front surface of the housing unit so as to be visible.

Although not shown, the housing unit includes a box-shaped housing body, a main control unit for controlling the game, a payout unit for storing and paying out medals as game media, and a main control unit. It is equipped with a power supply unit for supplying power to the player, payout unit, etc., and a switch unit for turning the power on and off and setting game content. The main control unit, dispensing unit, power supply unit, and switch unit are installed within the housing body.

The game unit 3800 includes three reels 3801 each having a symbol row from a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and arranged on the left and right, a reel drive mechanism (not shown) that rotates the three reels 3801 independently, and A unit base for mounting two reels 3801 and a reel drive mechanism (not shown) in a housing unit.

In the door unit 3810 of the first embodiment, the lower part of the front surface in the vertical direction protrudes forward, and the upper surface of the protruding part has an input slot 3811 for inserting medals as game media, and an input slot 3811 for inserting medals as game media. A production button 3812 located at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front on the left side of 3814.

Further, the door unit 3810 has three stop buttons 3815 arranged in a row on the left and right in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and three stop buttons 3815 arranged on the left side of the stop button 3815 when viewed from the front on the upper part of the entire surface of the portion that projects forward. and a starting lever 3816.

Furthermore, the door unit 3810 includes a top cover unit 3820 provided above the portion projecting forward, and a rear effect unit 3840 attached to the rear side of the top cover unit 3820. The top cover unit 3820 has a left side decoration unit 3821 and a right side decoration unit 3822 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions. The post-production unit 3840 includes a production display device 3841 capable of displaying a predetermined production image.

[32-1. Top cover unit]
Next, the top cover unit 3820 in the door unit 3810 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 300 to 304 and the like. FIG. 301(a) is a front view of the left side decoration unit of the top cover unit in the door unit of the first embodiment of the slot machine, and FIG. 301(b) is a perspective view of the left side decoration unit seen from the front. c) is a perspective view of the left side decoration unit seen from behind. FIG. 302 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 303 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 304 is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 301(a).

The top cover unit 3820 is provided above a portion of the door unit 3810 that protrudes forward, where the slot 3811, the MAX bet button 3813, and the like are provided. The top cover unit 3820 covers the three reels 3801 of the gaming unit 3800 so that they can be visually recognized from the front.

The top cover unit 3820 includes a left side decoration unit 3821 and a right side decoration unit 3822 that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and a top cover 3823 that covers the front of the left side decoration unit 3821 and the right side decoration unit 3822. have. The top cover 3823 also covers the area between the left side decoration unit 3821 and the right side decoration unit 3822, and makes the three reels 3801 provided at the rear and the effect display device 3841 of the post-effect unit 3840 visible from the front. Can be done.

The left side decoration unit 3821 and the right side decoration unit 3822 are formed approximately symmetrically, and here, the left side decoration unit 3821 will be explained in detail as an example, and the detailed explanation of the right side decoration unit 3822 will be omitted. do.

The left side decorative unit 3821 of the top cover unit 3820 includes a vertically long side unit base 3824 attached to the main body of the door unit 3810 (not shown), and a side unit base 3824 attached to the rear side of the side unit base 3824. A side rear decorative member 3825 extending rearward from the outer side in the left and right direction of the base 3824, a side decorative board 3826 attached to the front surface of the side unit base 3824 and having a plurality of LEDs 3826a mounted on the front surface, and a side decorative board 3826. A triangular prism-shaped transparent support lens 3827 that is attached to the front surface of the side unit base 3824 so as to cover the front side of the side unit base 3824 and has a pointed front end side, and a front end support member 3828 that is attached to the front end of the support lens 3827. and a partition member 3829 attached within the support lens 3827.

In addition, the left side decoration unit 3821 includes a side inner decoration body 3830A supported along a surface facing inward in the left-right direction (right side in this case) of a triangular prism-shaped support lens 3827, and an outer side in the left-right direction of the support lens 3827. and a side exterior decoration body 3830B supported along the surface facing.

The inner side decoration body 3830A and the outer side decoration body 3830B of the left side decoration unit 3821 have translucency, and can be decorated with light by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 3826a of the side decoration board 3826 to emit light.

[32-1a. Side unit base]
The side unit base 3824 of the left side decorative unit 3821 will be described in detail. The side unit base 3824 extends vertically and is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the main body (not shown) of the door unit 3810 near the left end. The side unit base 3824 extends vertically and has a flat rear medial support piece 3824a and a rear medial support piece 3824a extending forward from the left and right inner and outer sides (here, the right and left sides), respectively. It has a piece 3824b (see FIG. 304, etc.).

The rear inner support piece 3824a extends diagonally outward in the left-right direction so as to be parallel to the front surface of the inner lens plate portion 3827a of the support lens 3827 when assembled to the left side decoration unit 3821. The rear outer support piece 3824b extends in the front-rear direction. When this side unit base 3824 is assembled to the left side decorative unit 3821, there is a predetermined amount of gap between the rear inner support piece 3824a and the rear outer support piece 3824b and the support lens 3827 (the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side A gap larger than the thickness of the base sheet 3831 of the outer decoration body 3830B is formed. The flat plate portions 3835 of the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B are inserted into the gaps.

Further, the side unit base 3824 has a plurality of ribs 3824c that extend rearward from the rear surface of the rear inner support piece 3824a and are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction. The plurality of ribs 3824c reinforce the rear inner support piece 3824a.

Further, the side unit base 3824 has a plurality of recesses 3824d, which are recessed toward the surface side and open toward the front end side, on the inner surfaces of each of the rear inner support piece 3824a and the rear outer support piece 3824b. . The positioning projections 3828d of the support lens 3827 are inserted into the plurality of recesses 3824d.

[32-1b. Side decorative board]
The side decoration board 3826 of the left side decoration unit 3821 will be described in detail. A plurality of LEDs 3826a are mounted on the front surface of the side decorative board 3826. The side decorative board 3826 is attached to the front surface of the side unit base 3824 at a portion between the rear inner support piece 3824a and the rear outer support piece 3824b. The side decoration board 3826 is attached to the side unit base 3824 so as to be located inside the support lens 3827 when assembled to the left side decoration unit 3821.

The side decoration board 3826 can decorate the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B with light emission by appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 3826a to emit light. In addition, the side decorative board 3826 allows the plurality of LEDs 3826a to emit light as appropriate, so that the portions above and below the partition member 3829 in the inner side decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B can be independently separated from each other. Can be decorated with light emitting lights separately.

The front surface of the side decorative board 3826 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 3826a or the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the side decorative board 3826, the inner side decoration 3830A and the outer side decoration 3830B can be decorated with brighter light. can be done. Further, the LED 3826a of the side decorative board 3826 is a full color LED. Furthermore, the side decorative board 3826 is printed with ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LED 3826a and other decorative boards to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the side inner decoration 3830A and the side outer decoration 3830B, and the decorative effect of the side inner decoration 3830A and the side outer decoration 3830B can be reliably exerted.

In addition, in the side decoration board 3826, non-light-emitting members (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than the LED 3826a are provided on the rear surface (back surface), so that they do not interfere with the light-emitting decoration. There is.

[32-1c. Support lens]
The support lens 3827 of the left side decoration unit 3821 will be described in detail. The support lens 3827 is attached to the front surface of the side unit base 3824, and is for supporting the back surfaces of the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B. The support lens 3827 has a triangular prism shape that extends vertically, has one vertex facing forward, and is formed in a box shape with a rear surface open to the rear. The support lens 3827 is formed to be colorless and transparent.

The support lens 3827 is connected to a vertically long flat inner lens plate portion 3827a forming a side surface facing inward in the left-right direction (right side in this case) of the triangular prism, and to the front end side of the inner lens plate portion 3827a. A vertically long flat outer lens plate portion 3827b forming a side surface facing outward in the left-right direction (left side in this case) connects the upper end sides of the inner lens plate portion 3827a and the outer lens plate portion 3827b. It has a flat top plate part 3827c and a flat bottom plate part 3827d that connects the lower end sides of the inner lens plate part 3827a and the outer lens plate part 3827b. The support lens 3827 is formed into a box shape open to the rear by an inner lens plate part 3827a, an outer lens plate part 3827b, a top plate part 3827c, and a bottom plate part 3827d.

The inner lens plate portion 3827a is provided diagonally so that the front end side is located outward in the left-right direction (here, to the left) with respect to the rear end side. That is, when the inner lens plate portion 3827a is assembled into the left side decorative unit 3821, it is provided to be inclined with respect to the front surface of the side decorative board 3826. The inner lens plate portion 3827a has a flat surface, and is provided with countless fine lenses in the shape of a hexagonal pyramid on its back surface (inner surface). Thereby, the light from the plurality of LEDs 3826a of the side decoration board 3826 can be widely diffused, and the entire side interior decoration body 3830A can be uniformly decorated with light.

The outer lens plate portion 3827b is provided parallel to the front-rear direction so that the front end side is located approximately in front of the rear end side. That is, the outer lens plate portion 3827b is provided substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the side decorative board 3826 when assembled to the left side decorative unit 3821. The outer lens plate portion 3827b has a flat surface, and has a plurality of vertically long triangular grooves arranged on the back surface (inner surface). As a result, the plurality of longitudinally long grooves can easily guide the light from the plurality of LEDs 3826a of the side decoration board 3826 forward, and the entire side outer decoration body 3830B can be uniformly decorated with light emission. .

Further, the support lens 3827 has a plurality of positioning protrusions 3827e protruding from the surfaces of the inner lens plate portion 3827a and the outer lens plate portion 3827b. The positioning protrusion 3827e protruding from the inner lens plate portion 3827a protrudes forward and is inclined with respect to the surface of the inner lens plate portion 3827a. The positioning protrusion 3827e protruding from the outer lens plate part 3827b protrudes to the left and is perpendicular to the surface of the outer lens plate part 3827b. The plurality of positioning protrusions 3827e are inserted into the positioning holes 3837 of the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B when assembled into the left side decoration unit 3821. The plurality of positioning protrusions 3827e are formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the positioning hole 3837, and can position the inner side decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B with a predetermined amount of wobble. can.

The tips of the positioning protrusion 3827e of the inner lens plate part 3827a and the positioning protrusion 3827e near the rear end of the outer lens plate part 3827b are inserted into the recessed part 3824d of the side unit base 3824. The tip of the positioning protrusion 3827e on the front end side of the outer lens plate portion 3827b is inserted into the recess 3828e of the front end support member 3828.

Furthermore, the positions and numbers of the plurality of positioning protrusions 3827e are different between the inner lens plate portion 3827a side and the outer lens plate portion 3827b side. This prevents the inner side decoration body 3830A and the outer side decoration body 3830B from being attached by mistake when assembling the left side decoration unit 3821.

Further, the support lens 3827 has a plurality of concave portions 3827f that are concave toward the rear near the front end of the inner lens plate portion 3827a. The positioning protrusion 3828d of the front end support member 3828 is inserted into the recess 3827f when the left side decorative unit 3821 is assembled.

When this support lens 3827 is assembled to the left side decoration unit 3821, the rear end portion that is open to the rear is closed by the side decoration substrate 3826. Since the inner lens plate portion 3827a of this support lens 3827 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the side decorative board 3826, a portion of the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 3826a mounted on the side decorative board 3826 is The light can be reflected toward the outer lens plate portion 3827b, and the side outer decoration body 3830B can be decorated with bright light through the outer lens plate portion 3827b provided substantially perpendicularly to the side decoration substrate 3826.

In addition, since the front surface of the side decorative board 3826 that closes the rear end of the support lens 3827 is painted white, the light from the plurality of LEDs 3826a is diffusely reflected inside the support lens 3827, and the outside The side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B attached to the side decoration body 3830A can be decorated with bright light.

[32-1d. Front end support member]
The front end support member 3828 of the left side decoration unit 3821 will be described in detail. The front end support member 3828 extends vertically and is attached to the front end side of the support lens 3827. The front end support member 3828 has a V-shaped groove recessed from the rear. The front end support member 3828 includes a front inner support piece 3828a that is vertically long and has a flat plate shape, and a front inner support piece 3828a that is inclined so that the rear end side is located inward in the left-right direction (rightward in this case) with respect to the front end side. It has a vertically long flat front outer support piece 3828b extending rearward from the front end side of the piece 3828a. The front end support member 3828 is formed with a front inner support piece 3828a and a front outer support piece 3828b in a shape having a V-shaped groove recessed from the rear.

Further, the front end support member 3828 protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from a portion where the front inner support piece 3828a and the front outer support piece 3828b are in contact, and has a plurality of attachment portions 3828c for attaching to the front end of the support lens 3827. have. The front end support member 3828 is attached to the support lens 3827 so as to cover the front end side of the support lens 3827 from the front. When this front end support member 3828 is assembled to the left side decorative unit 3821, a predetermined amount of gap (side inner A gap larger than the thickness of the base sheet 3831 of the decorative body 3830A and the side outer decorative body 3830B is formed. The flat plate portions 3835 of the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B are inserted into the gaps.

Furthermore, the front end support member 3828 has a plurality of positioning protrusions 3828d that protrude rearward from the rear end of the front inner support piece 3828a, and the inner surface of the front outer support piece 3828b is recessed toward the surface side, and the rear end side is open to the rear. It has a recessed portion 3828e. The positioning protrusion 3828d projects rearward from the inner edge of the front inner support piece 3828a. The positioning protrusion 3828d is inserted into the positioning hole 3837 of the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B when assembled to the left side decoration unit 3821. The tip of the positioning protrusion 3828d is inserted into the recess 3827f of the support lens 3827. When assembled into the left side decoration unit 3821, the positioning protrusion 3827e on the front end side of the outer lens plate portion 3827b of the support lens 3827 is inserted into the recess 3828e.

When assembled into the left side decoration unit 3821, the front end support member 3828 can support the front end edges of the inner side decoration body 3830A and the outer side decoration body 3830B with a predetermined amount of wobble.

[32-1e. Inner side decoration and outer side decoration]
The inner side decoration 3830A and the outer side decoration 3830B of the left side decoration unit 3821 will be described in detail. The side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B are arranged on the surface sides of the inner lens plate part 3827a and the outer lens plate part 3827b of the support lens 3827, respectively, and both ends in the front and rear direction are connected to the side unit base 3824 and the support lens. 3827, supported by a support lens 3827 and a front end support member 3828. The inner side decoration 3830A and the outer side decoration 3830B have the same basic configuration, with only slight differences in shape, decoration, etc.; therefore, the inner side decoration 3830A will be described as an example below.

The side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) includes a transparent base sheet 3831, a decoration layer 3832 applied to the back side of the base sheet 3831, and a base layer applied to the back side of the decoration layer 3832. 3833 (see FIG. 302).

The base sheet 3831 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

Decoration layer 3832 has metallic luster of a predetermined color. The decorative layer 3832 has a transparent portion 3832a that has a higher light transmittance than other portions. This decorative layer 3832 is colored by metal vapor deposition, silk printing, or offset printing.

The base layer 3833 is for improving the color development of the decorative layer 3832. The base layer 3833 of this embodiment is not provided on the rear side of the transparent portion 3832a. The base layer 3833 of this embodiment is white and allows light to easily pass through from behind. Thereby, the entire decorative layer 3832 can be made to look bright by the light from the rear, and the transparent portion 3832a can be made to shine. This base layer 3833 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

In addition, the side interior decoration body 3830A includes a flat plate portion 3835 having a flat plate shape, a three-dimensional portion 3836 that bulges forward from the flat plate portion 3835, and a circular positioning hole 3837 that penetrates the flat plate portion 3835. have. In other words, the flat plate portion 3835 extends outward from the outer peripheral edge of the three-dimensional portion 3836 in a flange shape. The three-dimensional part 3836 of the side interior decoration body 3830A is formed in a relief shape similar to a vine wrapped around a pillar seen in Greek architecture, and has a predetermined character decoration at the lower part. This three-dimensional portion 3836 is composed of a plurality of relatively small surfaces. In this embodiment, the three-dimensional portion 3836 is colored by the decorative layer 3832.

The three-dimensional portion 3836 character portion is provided at the lower portion partitioned by the partition member 3829. In other words, the partition member 3829 is provided at a height between the vine part and the character part in the three-dimensional part 3836. This partition member 3829 allows the upper part (vine part) and lower part (letter part) of the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) to be decorated with light emission independently.

A plurality of positioning holes 3837 are provided on the front end side and the rear end side of the flat plate portion 3835 so as to be spaced apart in the vertical direction. The positioning projection 3827e of the support lens 3827 and the positioning projection 3828d of the front end support member 3828 are inserted into the positioning hole 3837. The positioning hole 3837 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the positioning protrusion 3827e and the positioning protrusion 3828d. Therefore, when the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) is assembled to the left side decoration unit 3821, the inner side decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) is moved by a predetermined amount in the direction along the surfaces of the inner lens plate portion 3827a and the outer lens plate portion 3827b of the support lens 3827. It is installed with some wobbling (play).

At this time, the positioning protrusion 3827e on the rear end side of the support lens 3827 has its tip inserted into the recess 3824d of the side unit base 3824, and the positioning protrusion 3827e on the front end side has its tip inserted into the front end support member 3828. It is inserted into the recess 3828e. Further, the tip of the positioning protrusion 3828d of the front end support member 3828 is inserted into the recess 3827f of the support lens 3827. This prevents the flat plate portion 3835 of the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) from moving outward beyond the tips of the positioning projections 3827e and 3828d and coming out of the positioning hole 3837. The inner side decoration 3830A (the outer side decoration 3830B) will not come off.

In addition, when the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) is assembled to the left side decoration unit 3821, the front end side of the flat plate portion 3835 has a front end support in which a gap larger than the thickness of the base sheet 3831 is formed. The support lens 3827 and the side unit base 3824 are inserted between the member 3828 and the support lens 3827, and a gap larger than the thickness of the base sheet 3831 is formed on the rear end side of the flat plate portion 3835. is inserted into. Therefore, the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) has a predetermined amount of wobble (play) in the direction perpendicular to the surfaces of the inner lens plate portion 3827a and the outer lens plate portion 3827b of the support lens 3827. installed.

Furthermore, the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) has a plurality of slits 3838 cut out from the outside (end side) on the front end side and the rear end side of the flat plate portion 3835. There is. The ribs 3824c of the side unit base 3824 and the mounting portion 3828c of the front end support member 3828 are inserted into these slits 3838 with some play.

Further, in the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B), positioning holes 3837 and the like are formed in the flat plate portion 3835. In other words, positioning holes 3837 and the like are not provided in the three-dimensional portion 3836. As a result, the positioning holes 3837 and the like do not hide part of the decoration of the three-dimensional part 3836, and the decoration of the three-dimensional part 3836 can be clearly seen by the player. It is possible to reliably exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration.

The inner side decoration body 3830A (the outer side decoration body 3830B) of this embodiment is formed by applying a decoration layer 3832 and a base layer 3833 to a flat base sheet 3831 to form an intermediate product, and then applying the intermediate product to a predetermined shape. After the three-dimensional portion 3836 is bulged by air pressure molding or vacuum molding in a heated state, the outer periphery is trimmed (cut) and a positioning hole 3837 is bored. Since the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost compared to an injection molded product, and there is no increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, since the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) can be easily manufactured, the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body) having different decoration layers 3832, three-dimensional parts 3836, etc. body 3830B) can be easily manufactured. Therefore, by replacing the inner side decoration 3830A (outer side decoration 3830B) with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to play and can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it looks from the outside, and the slot The increase in weight applied to the machine 9 can be reduced.

The thickness of the inner side decorative body 3830A and the outer side decorative body 3830B (base sheet 3831) is within the range of 0.2 mm to 0.6 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease, and there is a risk that it will not be possible to maintain the desired shape due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 3836, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Furthermore, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a risk that the three-dimensional portion 3836 may not be formed into the desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the side interior decoration body 3830A and side This is to prevent the weight of the exterior decoration body 3830B from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since this inner side decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) is formed using the thin base sheet 3831 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, this inner side decorative body 3830A (side outer decorative body 3830B) has the relationship between the positioning hole 3837, the positioning protrusion 3827e, and the positioning protrusion 3828d, the thickness of the flat plate portion 3835, the side unit base 3824, and the support. Due to the relationship between the gap with the lens 3827 and the gap between the support lens 3827 and the front end support member 3828, it can be installed with a predetermined amount of wobble, so it can cope with expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. . This can prevent the inner side decorative body 3830A (the outer side decorative body 3830B) from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

In addition, since the inner side decorative body 3830A (the outer side decorative body 3830B) is installed with a predetermined amount of wobble, even if the flat plate portion 3835 has undulations due to molding, the surface of the support lens 3827 Can be mounted on the side.

In the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) of this embodiment, a metal vapor deposition layer is used for the decoration layer 3832, and the metallic luster of the metal vapor deposition can enhance the sense of luxury, and the slot machine 9 can improve the appearance of By the way, when a metal vapor deposited layer is used for the decorative layer 3832, when the three-dimensional part 3836 is formed by pressure forming or vacuum forming, the metal vapor deposited layer is Since the elongation of the decorative layer 3832 is small, wrinkles are likely to occur in the base sheet 3831 and the decorative layer 3832, and the wrinkles may reduce the decorative effect of the decorative layer 3832 and the three-dimensional portions 3836. On the other hand, in the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) of this embodiment, the three-dimensional portion 3836 protruding forward is constituted by a plurality of relatively small surfaces, so that It is possible to make wrinkles less noticeable, suppress deterioration in appearance, and fully exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative layer 3832 and the three-dimensional portion 3836. Therefore, the metallic luster caused by metal vapor deposition in the decorative layer 3832 can be reduced. It is possible to give a sense of luxury through the decoration, and it is possible to reduce the cheap appearance of the decoration by the decoration layer 3832 and the three-dimensional part 3836, and to improve the appearance of the side inner decoration 3830A (side outer decoration 3830B). It is possible to provide a slot machine 9 (gaming machine) that can be improved and that can strongly attract the interest of players.

By the way, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part is , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape, so it is attached to the rear surface of the three-dimensional part (three-dimensional part 3836). It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the side interior decoration body 3830A (side exterior decoration body 3830B) of this embodiment, a flange-shaped flat plate portion 3835 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid portion 3836 that bulges forward. Since positioning holes 3837 and the like are provided in , a three-dimensional part 3836 having three-dimensional decoration can be attached thereto.

Further, as described above, in the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) of this embodiment, the flange-shaped flat plate portion 3835 extending outward from the solid portion 3836 is supported by the side unit base 3824. It is designed to be loosely fitted between the lens 3827 and between the support lens 3827 and the front end support member 3828, and the three-dimensional part 3836 is provided with a mounting boss for mounting like an injection molded product. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the back surface, the shadow of the attachment boss is not reflected on the three-dimensional portion 3836, and the entire three-dimensional portion 3836 can be uniformly decorated with light.

When the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) is assembled into the left side decoration unit 3821, the side decoration board 3826 is located at the rear (see FIG. 304, etc.). Thereby, by making the plurality of LEDs 3826a of the side decoration board 3826 emit light as appropriate, the inner side decoration body 3830A (the outer side decoration body 3830B) can be decorated with light emission, and the transparent portion 3832a of the decoration layer 3832 can be It can be decorated with brighter light than other parts. Further, the upper part (the part of the vine) and the lower part (the part of the characters) of the side inner decoration body 3830A (the side outer decoration body 3830B) can be decorated with light emission independently.

[32-2. Post production unit]
Next, the post-effect unit 3840 in the door unit 3810 will be described in detail. The rear effect unit 3840 is provided behind the top cover unit 3820, and is provided so as to be visible from the front (player side) through between the left side decoration unit 3821 and the right side decoration unit 3822. The post-production unit 3840 includes a production display device 3841 capable of displaying a predetermined production image.

[33. Overall configuration of slot machine having door unit of second embodiment]
Next, the overall configuration of the slot machine 9 having the door unit 3810A of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 305. FIG. 305(a) is a front view of the slot machine having the door unit of the second embodiment in a normal state, and FIG. 305(b) is a front view of the slot machine of FIG. FIG. This slot machine 9 consists of a box-shaped housing unit (not shown) that is installed in a game hall or the like and has an open front side, a gaming unit 3800 housed in the housing unit, and a gaming unit 3800 with the front facing open. It mainly includes a door unit 3810A that opens and closes the front opening of the housing unit so as to be visible from the outside.

Although not shown, the housing unit includes a box-shaped housing body, a main control unit for controlling the game, a payout unit for storing and paying out medals as game media, and a main control unit. It is equipped with a power supply unit for supplying power to the player, payout unit, etc., and a switch unit for turning the power on and off and setting game content. The main control unit, dispensing unit, power supply unit, and switch unit are installed within the housing body.

The game unit 3800 includes three reels 3801 each having a symbol row from a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and arranged on the left and right, a reel drive mechanism (not shown) that rotates the three reels 3801 independently, and A unit base for mounting two reels 3801 and a reel drive mechanism (not shown) in a housing unit.

In the door unit 3810A of the second embodiment, the lower part of the front surface in the vertical direction protrudes forward, and the upper surface of the protruding part has an input slot 3811 for inserting medals as game media, and an input slot 3811 for inserting medals as game media. A production button 3812 located at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front on the left side of 3814.

Further, the door unit 3810A has three stop buttons 3815 arranged in a row from side to side in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and three stop buttons 3815 arranged on the left side of the stop button 3815 when viewed from the front, on the upper part of the entire surface of the portion that projects forward. and a starting lever 3816.

Further, the door unit 3810A includes a top cover unit 3820A provided above a portion projecting forward, a front effect unit 3850 attached to the rear side of the top cover unit 3820A, and a front effect unit 3850 attached to the rear of the front effect unit 3850. and a post-production unit 3860 attached to the side.

The top cover unit 3820A is provided above the forwardly protruding portion of the door unit 3810A where the slot 3811, the MAX bet button 3813, and the like are provided. The top cover unit 3820A covers the three reels 3801 of the gaming unit 3800 so that they can be visually recognized from the front. Additionally, the top cover unit 3820 includes a left side decoration unit 3821A and a right side decoration unit 3822A that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and a top cover 3823 that covers the front of the left side decoration unit 3821A and the right side decoration unit 3822A. It has . The top cover 3823 also covers the area between the left side decoration unit 3821A and the right side decoration unit 3822A, and the three reels 3801 provided at the rear, the front production unit 3850, and the rear production unit 3860 can be seen from the front. It is said that

The front presentation unit 3850 is attached to the rear side of the top cover unit 3820A, and has a front decoration body 3851 that can be raised and lowered. The front decoration body 3851 is provided so as to be visible from the front through between the left side decoration unit 3821A and the right side decoration unit 3822A. The front decorative body 3851 is formed in a shape resembling sunglasses. In the normal state, the front decoration body 3851 is located in a raised position moved upward, and makes the decoration lens 3865 of the rear effect unit 3860 provided at the rear invisible from the front (see FIG. 305(a)). reference). The front decorative body 3851 moves from the raised position to the lowered position depending on the gaming state. When the front decorative body 3851 is in the lowered position, the decorative lens 3865 of the rear effect unit 3860 provided at the rear becomes visible from the front, which can indicate to the player that an opportunity has arrived (FIG. 305). b)).

The rear effect unit 3860 is attached to the rear side of the front effect unit 3850, and has a rear decoration body 3880 imitating a predetermined character. The rear decoration body 3880 is provided above the three reels 3801. In the normal state, the upper part (decorative lens 3865) of the rear decorative body 3880 is made invisible by the front decorative body 3851 located at the front, and the front decorative body 3851 moves to the lowered position depending on the gaming state. Then, the upper part (decorative lens 3865) becomes visible.

[33-1. Post production unit]
Next, the rear effect unit 3860 of the door unit 3810A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 306 to 312 and the like. 306 is a front view of the rear effect unit in the door unit of the second embodiment, FIG. 307(a) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 306 seen from the front, and (b) is a rear view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 306. It is a perspective view of the production unit seen from behind. FIG. 308 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit shown in FIG. 306, viewed from the front, and FIG. 309 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit shown in FIG. 306, viewed from the back. FIG. 310 is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 306. 311(a) is a front view of the rear decorative body of the rear effect unit in FIG. 306, (b) is a perspective view of the rear decorative body seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the rear decorative body from the back. FIG. FIG. 312 is a front view showing the arrangement of decorative boards in the rear effect unit of FIG. 306.

The rear effect unit 3860 is attached to the rear side of the front effect unit 3850. The rear effect unit 3860 includes a rear unit base 3861 attached to the rear side of the front effect unit 3850, a rear upper decorative board 3862 attached to the upper part of the front of the rear unit base 3861, and a lower side of the rear upper decorative board 3862. A lower rear decorative board 3863 provided in A rear decoration body 3880 imitating a predetermined character is attached to the rear unit base 3861 so as to cover the front side of the rear decoration body 3880, and a decorative lens 3865 is arranged on the front side of the rear decoration body 3880 and attached to a reflector 3864. ing.

In addition, the rear production unit 3860 includes a frame-shaped reel frame 3866 attached below the rear lower decorative board 3863 on the front surface of the rear unit base, and a frame decorative board attached to the rear side of the reel frame 3866. 3867, and a rear lower left decorative body 3868 and a rear lower right decorative body 3869, which are attached near both left and right ends of the front surface of the reel frame 3866, respectively. The lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869 are formed in a shape imitating the fingers of a predetermined character.

The reel frame 3866 has a rectangular frame shape that is long from side to side, and is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of the three reels 3801 when viewed from the front when assembled into the slot machine 9. The reel frame 3866 has translucency. The frame decoration board 3867 has a plurality of first LEDs 3867a for decorating the reel frame 3866 with light emission, and a plurality of second LEDs 3867b for decorating the rear lower left decoration body 3868 and the rear lower right decoration body 3869 with light emission on the front side. (See Figure 312). The frame decorative board 3867 is composed of four decorative boards arranged in a square frame shape.

Furthermore, the rear production unit 3860 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit base 3861, and includes a peripheral control board box 3871 in which the peripheral control board 3870 is housed, and a door attached to the rear surface of the rear unit base 3861. It includes a unit relay board 3872 and a board cover 3873 attached to the rear unit base 3861 so as to cover the rear side of the door unit relay board 3872.

[33-1a. Rear unit base]
Next, the rear unit base 3861 of the rear effect unit 3860 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 308 to 310 and the like. The rear unit base 3861 is attached to the rear side of the front production unit 3850. The rear unit base 3861 has a box shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is shallow in the front and back direction, and is open at the front and top. The rear unit base 3861 has a rectangular through hole 3861a extending from front to back and extending from side to side, below the center of the rear wall in the vertical direction. The three reels 3801 are visible from the front through this through hole 3861a.

The rear unit base 3861 also has a plurality of support portions 3861b that protrude forward in a cylindrical shape at the upper left and right corners of the front surface of the rear wall and at the left and right outer portions near the upper end of the through hole 3861a. and an attachment boss 3861c which projects from the front surface of the support part 3861b in a cylindrical shape and has a diameter smaller than that of the support part 3861b. The attachment boss 3861c protrudes slightly longer than the thickness of the flat plate portion 3885 of the rear decoration body 3880. A rear decoration body 3880 is attached to this attachment boss 3861c.

[33-1b. Upper rear decorative board]
Next, the rear upper decorative board 3862 of the rear effect unit 3860 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 308 to 310, FIG. 312, and the like. The rear upper decorative board 3862 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the rear unit base 3861 above the center in the vertical direction. The rear upper decorative board 3862 has a rectangular outer shape that is long from side to side. The rear upper decorative board 3862 of this embodiment is composed of three boards arranged on the left and right.

The rear upper decorative board 3862 has a plurality of first LEDs 3862a for emitting decoration on the decorative lens 3865 and a plurality of second LEDs 3862b for emitting decoration on a portion of the rear decoration body 3880 other than the decorative lens 3865 on the front side. has been implemented. The second LED 3862b is provided at the rear of the solid portion 3886 of the rear decoration body 3880. The first LED 3862a and the second LED 3862b are full color LEDs.

The front surface of the rear upper decorative board 3862 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LEDs 3862a and 3862b and the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the rear upper decorative board 3862, the rear decorative body 3880 and decorative lenses 3865 can be decorated with light emitting light. can be done. In addition, the rear upper decorative board 3862 has characters and symbols written in ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LEDs 3862a and LED 3862b to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing using. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the rear decoration body 3880 and the decorative lens 3865, and the decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3880 and the decorative lens 3865 can be reliably exerted.

Note that in the upper rear decorative board 3862, non-emitting members (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than the LEDs 3862a and 3862b are provided on the rear surface (back surface), so that they do not interfere with the luminous decoration. is being done.

[33-1c. Lower back decorative board]
Next, the lower rear decoration board 3863 of the rear effect unit 3860 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 308 to 310, FIG. 312, and the like. The lower rear decorative board 3863 is attached to a portion below the upper rear decorative board 3862 on the front surface of the rear wall of the rear unit base 3861. The lower rear decorative board 3863 has a rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side. The lower rear decorative board 3863 of this embodiment is composed of two boards separated at the center in the left-right direction.

The lower rear decorative board 3863 is provided near both left and right ends, and includes a plurality of first LEDs 3863a for illuminating the vicinity of the upper ends of the lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869, and a plurality of first LEDs 3863a on both the left and right sides. A plurality of second LEDs 3863b are mounted on the front surface to decorate the vicinity of the lower end of the rear decoration body 3880 by being provided inside the first LEDs 3863a. The second LED 3863b is provided at the rear of the three-dimensional portion of the rear decoration body 3880. The first LED 3863a and the second LED 3863b are full color LEDs.

The front surface of the lower rear decorative board 3863 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LEDs 3863a and 3863b and the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the lower rear decorative board 3863, the lower part of the rear decorative body 3880 and the lower rear left decorative body 3868 And the vicinity of the upper end of each of the rear lower right decorative bodies 3869 can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the rear lower decorative board 3863 has letters and symbols written in ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LEDs 3863a and LED 3863b to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing using. As a result, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the rear decoration body 3880, the rear lower left decoration body 3868, and the rear lower right decoration body 3869. The decorative effect of the body 3869 can be reliably exhibited.

In addition, in the lower rear decorative board 3863, non-emitting members (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than the LEDs 3863a and 3863b are provided on the rear surface (back surface), so that they do not interfere with the luminous decoration. is being done.

[33-1d. Reflector]
Next, the reflector 3864 of the post-effect unit 3860 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 308 to 310 and the like. The reflector 3864 is attached to the front surface of the rear unit base 3861 in front of the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the lower rear decorative board 3863. The reflector 3864 is attached so that a gap is formed between the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the lower rear decorative board 3863. This gap makes it easier for heat to escape from the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the lower rear decorative board 3863.

The reflector 3864 has a plurality of partition walls 3864a whose inner periphery is formed into a predetermined shape and penetrates from the front and back, and a plurality of through holes 3864b which penetrate from the front and back. The partition wall 3864a is formed in a shape that follows the letters of the decorative lens 3865 or a part of the pattern (the character's mouth) of the rear decoration 3880. These partition walls 3864a allow only desired portions of the decorative lens 3865 and the rear decoration body 3880 to be decorated with light.

A decorative lens 3865 is attached to the front end of the reflector 3864. When the reflector 3864 is assembled to the rear effect unit 3860, it is formed so that a gap larger than the thickness of the rear decoration body 3880 is created between the reflector 3864 and the decorative lens 3865, and this gap allows the rear decoration body 3880 to move forward and backward. It can be supported with some wobbling.

[33-1e. Decorative lens]
Next, the decorative lens 3865 of the post-production unit 3860 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 306 to 310 and the like. The decorative lens 3865 is provided in front of the rear decorative body 3880 and is attached to the front end of the reflector 3864 through the opening 3888 of the rear decorative body 3880.

The decorative lens 3865 is formed into a flat plate shape, and includes a lens portion 3865a that is transparent, a decorative portion 3865b that has metallic luster, and a plurality of mounting portions 3865c that protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape. have. The lens portion 3865a is formed in the shape of the letters "MAX". The decorative portion 3865b is provided outside the characters formed by the lens portion 3865a. The decorative portion 3865b is composed of a metal foil or a plating layer formed by metal vapor deposition.

The decorative lens 3865 is configured such that each letter of "MAX" is decorated with light emission independently by the first LED 3862a of the rear upper decorative board 3862 and the reflector 3864.

The decorative lens 3865 can give a sense of luxury to the pattern part of the rear decorative body 3880 by the decorative part 3865b having metallic luster, and can reduce the appearance of the pattern part 3884 to be cheap. In addition, the decorative lens 3865 can surprise the player with the metallic shine of the decorative portion 3865b when the front decorative body 3851 moves from the raised position to the lowered position and becomes visible from the front. To strongly attract the interest of players, to make the players think that something good is going to happen, to increase expectations for the game, and to suppress a decline in interest. Can be done.

The decorative lens 3865 is disposed in front of the flat portion 3886a of the solid portion 3886 of the rear decorative body 3880, and a plurality of mounting portions 3865c protruding rearward pass through the opening 3888 of the rear decorative body 3880 from the front to attach to the reflector. Attached to the front end of the 3864. This decorative lens 3865 is provided at a portion of the rear decoration body 3880 corresponding to the position of the eyes of a pattern portion 3884 imitating the face of a predetermined character.

[33-1f. Rear decoration]
Next, the rear decoration body 3880 of the rear effect unit 3860 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 311 and the like. The rear decoration body 3880 is attached to the front surface of the rear unit base 3861 so as to cover the front side of the reflector 3864. The rear decoration body 3880 includes a transparent base sheet 8881, a decoration layer 3882 applied to the back side of the base sheet 3881, and a base layer 3883 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 3882. (See Figure 311(b)).

The base sheet 3881 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, high-impact polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

The decorative layer 3882 forms a pattern portion 3884 consisting of a pattern of a predetermined character's face. This decorative layer 3882 is colored by silk printing or offset printing.

The pattern portion 3884 is formed by the decorative layer 3882. This picture part 3884 has a main picture part 3884a which is the main part, and a sub-picture part 3884b which is the background of the main picture part 3884a. The main picture part 3884a is a part of the face of a predetermined character, and the sub picture part 3884b is a part outside the face of the character. In the main pattern portion 3884a, a partition wall 3864a of the reflector 3864 is provided behind each of the boundary of the part corresponding to the position of the eyes on the face of a predetermined character and the boundary of the part of the mouth pattern. Although not shown in the drawings, the pattern part 3884 of this embodiment has a light transmittance level in the main pattern part 3884a except for the part corresponding to the eyes of the character and the part of the mouth pattern. It has a plurality of dot-shaped light-transmitting parts with high brightness.

The base layer 3883 is for improving the color development of the decorative layer 3882. The base layer 3883 in this embodiment is white or gray. Thereby, the pattern portion 2614 can be made to look brighter due to the light coming from behind. Note that the base layer 3883 is not provided behind the transparent part of the main pattern part 2614a, and light from the rear is irradiated (leaked) from the transparent part to the front, so that the main pattern part 2614a can be made to shine brightly. This base layer 3883 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

The rear decorative body 3880 also includes a flat plate portion 3885, a three-dimensional portion 3886 that bulges forward than the flat plate portion 3885, a circular mounting hole 3887 penetrating the flat plate portion 3885, and a three-dimensional portion. 3886 and an opening 3888 penetrating at a predetermined portion. The flat plate portions 3885 are provided on both left and right outer sides of the three-dimensional portion 3886 from both left and right end edges. In other words, in the rear decorative body 3880, the flat plate portion 3885 extends outward in a flange shape from the solid portion 3886 that bulges forward.

The solid portion 3886 of the rear decoration body 3880 is provided at the main pattern portion 3884a of the pattern portion 3884. In other words, the facial part of a predetermined character in the picture is three-dimensionally formed by the three-dimensional portion 3886. The three-dimensional portion 3886 of this embodiment has a gradual change in shape (change in unevenness) and is rounded as a whole.

In the rear decoration body 3880 of this embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. A portion of the sub-picture portion 3884b extends toward the three-dimensional portion 3886. In other words, the three-dimensional portion 3886 bulges out in a slightly wider area than the main pattern portion 3884a. In other words, the main pattern portion 3884a is formed smaller than the three-dimensional portion 3886.

To be more specific, when the peripheral edge of the face pattern (main pattern part 3884a) of a predetermined character extends from the three-dimensional part 3886 toward the flat plate part 3885, the three-dimensional part in the vicinity of the pattern in contact with the flat plate part 3885 While the 3886 side faces to the side, the flat plate part 3885 side of the picture faces forward, so the three-dimensional character's face (picture) looks unnatural, and the picture and the three-dimensional part 3886 There is a problem in that the three-dimensional decorative effect due to this is reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the peripheral part of the character's face picture (the boundary between the main picture part 3884a and the sub-picture part 3884b) is located on the three-dimensional part 3886 side. The peripheral edge portion does not face forward due to the flat plate portion 3885. As a result, the picture of the character's face (the main picture part 3884a) does not look unnatural, and the decorative effect of the three-dimensional main picture part 3884a and the three-dimensional part 3886 can be reliably exerted.

Furthermore, the three-dimensional portion 3886 has a flat portion 3886a formed parallel to the surface of the flat plate portion 3885 on the outer periphery at a portion corresponding to the position of the eyes on the face of a predetermined character. The flat portion 3886a projects further forward than other portions of the three-dimensional portion 3886. Further, the outer circumference of the flat portion 3886a is formed to have the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative lens 3865. A decorative lens 3865 is placed in front of this flat portion 3886a. Further, the flat portion 3886a is not provided with the decorative layer 3882 and the base layer 3883, and remains transparent as the base sheet 3881. A plurality of openings 3888 are provided in the flat portion 3886a, and the attachment portion 3865c of the decorative lens 3865 passes through the openings 3888 from the front and is attached to the reflector 3864.

The attachment holes 3887 are provided at the four corners of the flat plate portion 3885 (rear decoration body 3880). The inner diameter of the attachment hole 3887 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the attachment boss 3861c of the rear unit base 3861. A mounting boss 3861c that protrudes longer than the thickness of the flat plate portion 3885 is inserted into the mounting hole 3887. Further, the mounting portion 3865c of the decorative lens 3865 is inserted through the opening 3888, and a gap larger than the thickness of the flat plate portion 3885 is formed between the decorative lens 3865 assembled by the mounting portion 3865c and the reflector 3864. . Thereby, when the rear decoration body 3880 is assembled to the rear effect unit 3860, it is attached with a predetermined amount of play.

Further, the rear decoration body 3880 has a plurality of through holes 3889 penetrating back and forth near the lower ends of the flat plate portions 3885 on both left and right sides. These through-holes 3889 are located in front of the first LED 3863a of the lower rear decorative board 3863, and allow a large amount of light from the first LED 3863a to be irradiated forward, so that the lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869 The upper part of the can be decorated with bright light.

Further, the attachment hole 3887 is formed in the flat plate portion 3885 where the sub-picture portion 3884b of the pattern portion 3884 is provided. That is, the attachment hole 3887 is not provided in the main pattern portion 3884a (solid portion 3886). As a result, the mounting screw (not shown) for attaching the rear decoration body 3880 to the rear unit base 3861 through the attachment hole 3887 does not hide a part of the main pattern part 3884a, and the main part is not visible to the player. The pattern portion 3884a can be visually recognized in good condition, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the main pattern portion 3884a can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the mounting holes 3887 and the like are provided at the corners of the flat plate portion 3885, they are provided at a position away from the three-dimensional portion 3886, so that the mounting holes 3887 (mounting screws) can be made less noticeable. The same effects as described above can be achieved.

The post-decoration body 3880 of this embodiment is made by applying a decoration layer 3882 and a base layer 3883 to a flat base sheet 3881 to form an intermediate product, and then heating the intermediate product to a predetermined temperature using a compressed air. After the solid portion 3886 is expanded by molding or vacuum forming, the outer periphery is trimmed (cut) and a mounting hole 3887, an opening 3888, etc. are formed. Since the rear decoration body 3880 is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost than an injection molded product, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the rear decoration body 3880 can be easily manufactured, rear decoration bodies 3880 (for example, rear decoration body 3880A) having different pattern portions 3884, three-dimensional portions 3886, etc. can be easily manufactured. Can be done. Therefore, by replacing the rear decoration body 3880 with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the rear decoration body 3880 of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the outside, and the increase in weight applied to the slot machine 9 can be reduced. can be reduced.

Note that the thickness of the rear decoration body 3880 (base sheet 3881) is within the range of 0.4 mm to 1.2 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease and there is a risk that the desired shape will not be maintained due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 3886, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Moreover, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a possibility that the three-dimensional part 3886 cannot be formed into a desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the weight of the rear decoration body 3880 increases. This is to prevent it from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since the rear decoration body 3880 is formed using the thin base sheet 3881 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. After this, the decorative body 3880 has a predetermined amount of wobble due to the relationship between the mounting hole 3887 and the mounting boss 3861c, and the relationship between the opening 3888, the reflector 3864, and the decorative lens 3865, as described above. Because it is attached, it can respond to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. This can prevent the rear decoration body 3880 from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

In addition, the rear decoration body 3880 is attached with a predetermined amount of wobbling and is attached to the tip of the support portion 3861b protruding forward from the rear wall of the rear unit base 3861, and the rear decoration body 3880 is attached to the flat plate portion 3885. Since the portion other than the hole 3887 is floating in the air, it can be attached to the rear unit base 3861 even if the flat plate portion 3885 has undulations due to molding.

Furthermore, since the mounting screws (not shown) that attach the rear decoration body 3880 to the rear unit base 3861 are seated screws, there is no concentration of force when the rear decoration body 3880 is installed, and the rear decoration The body 3880 can be attached in good condition.

By the way, it is possible to enhance the sense of luxury by using a metal foil layer or a metal vapor deposition layer as the decorative layer 3882 of the rear decoration body 3880, but in this case, the three-dimensional part 3886 is formed by pressure forming or vacuum forming. When molding, since the elongation of the decorative layer 3882 made of metal foil or the like is smaller than the elongation of the base sheet 3881, which is the base material, wrinkles may occur in the base sheet 3881 and the decorative layer 3882. Problems such as peeling of the decorative layer 3882 from the base sheet 3881 are likely to occur. On the other hand, in the rear effect unit 3860 of the present embodiment, a decorative lens 3865 having a decorative part 3865b with metallic luster is arranged on the front surface of the three-dimensional part 3886 of the rear decoration body 3880. The glossy decorative part 3865b can give a sense of luxury, reduce the cheap appearance of the pattern part 3884, and improve the appearance of the decoration by the rear decoration body 3880 and the decorative lens 3865. , can strongly attract the attention of players.

In addition, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part can be , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet member is stretched to form the desired shape, so it is attached to the rear surface of the three-dimensional part (three-dimensional part 3886). It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the rear decoration body 3880 of this embodiment, a flange-like flat plate part 3885 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid part 3886 that bulges forward, and a mounting hole 3887 is provided in the flat plate part 3885. Therefore, the three-dimensional portion 3886 provided with the main pattern portion 3884a can be attached to the rear unit base 3861.

Further, as described above, in the rear decoration body 3880 of this embodiment, the mounting hole 3887 is provided in the flange-like flat plate portion 3885 extending outward from the three-dimensional portion 3886, and the three-dimensional portion 3886 has an injection hole 3887. Unlike molded products, there is no mounting boss for mounting, so when light is irradiated from behind, the shadow of the mounting boss will not appear on the three-dimensional part 3886, and the entire three-dimensional part 3886 will be uniformly decorated with light. can be done.

When the rear decoration body 3880 is assembled to the rear effect unit 3860, the first LED 3862a and the second LED 3862b of the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the second LED 3863b of the lower rear decorative board 3863 are located behind the three-dimensional part 3886, respectively. (See Figure 312). Further, the first LED 3863a of the lower rear decorative board 3863 is located at the rear near the lower end of the flat plate portion 3885 on both the left and right sides. Therefore, when the first LED 3862a of the rear upper decorative board 3862 is made to emit light appropriately, the lens portion 3865a of the decorative lens 3865 can be decorated with light through the transparent flat portion 3886a of the three-dimensional portion 3886. At this time, the partition wall 3864a of the reflector 3864 allows the letters "MAX" on the decorative lens 3865 to be decorated with light emission independently.

Further, by appropriately lighting the second LED 3862b of the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the second LED 3863b of the lower rear decorative board 3863, the portion of the three-dimensional portion 3886 other than the flat portion 3886a can be decorated with light. At this time, when the second LED 3862b and the second LED 3863b located behind the character's mouth part in the main picture part 3884a of the picture part 3884 are made to emit light, the partition wall 3864a of the reflector 3864 causes only that part to be illuminated. Can be decorated with light. In other parts of the main pattern part 3884a, when the second LED 3862b and the second LED 3863b are emitted, the presence of a plurality of point-like transparent parts creates a luminescent decoration that sparkles when the player's eye position moves. can be shown to others.

Furthermore, when the first LED 3863a of the lower rear decorative board 3863 is made to emit light, the upper parts of the lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869 are illuminated brightly through the through hole 3889 penetrating near the lower end of the flat plate portion 3885. It can be decorated.

Furthermore, when the rear decoration body 3880 is assembled to the slot machine 9, the upper mounting hole 3887 is hidden from view from the front by the left side decoration unit 3821A and the right side decoration unit 3822A (see FIG. 305). . Further, the lower mounting hole 3887 is hidden from view from the front by the lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869.

[33-1g. Rear lower left ornament and rear lower right ornament]
Next, the rear lower left decorative body 3868 and the rear lower right decorative body 3869 of the rear effect unit 3860 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 306 to 309 and the like. The lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869 are attached to the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the frame-shaped reel frame 3866. The lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869 are formed into a three-dimensional shape imitating a finger with the thumb raised in a predetermined character. The rear lower left decorative body 3868 and the rear lower right decorative body 3869 have translucency.

In the rear lower left decorative body 3868 and the rear lower right decorative body 3869, the first LED 3863a of the lower rear decorative board 3863 is arranged behind the part imitating the thumb, and the frame decoration is arranged behind the other parts. A second LED 3867b of the board 3867 is arranged. The lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869 can be decorated with light by appropriately lighting the first LED 3863a of the lower rear decorative board 3863 and the second LED 3867b of the frame decorative board 3867.

Note that the front surface of the frame decorative board 3867 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 3867a and the front, making the entire front of the frame decorative board 3867 brighter, making the rear lower left decorative body 3868 and the rear lower right decorative body 3869 brighter. Can be decorated with light. Furthermore, the LED 3867a of the frame decorative board 3867 is a full-color LED. Furthermore, the frame decorative board 3867 has characters and symbols printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LED 3867a to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. As a result, letters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869, and the decorative effect of the lower rear left decorative body 3868 and the lower rear right decorative body 3869 can be exerted reliably. be able to.

In addition, in the frame decoration board 3867, components that do not emit light (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than the LED 3867a are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and consideration has been made so that they do not interfere with the light-emitting decoration. There is.

[34. Overall configuration of slot machine with door unit of third embodiment]
Next, the overall configuration of the slot machine 9 having the door unit 3810B of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 313. FIG. 313(a) is a front view of the slot machine having the door unit of the third embodiment in a normal state, and FIG. 313(b) is a front view of the slot machine of FIG. FIG. This slot machine 9 consists of a box-shaped housing unit (not shown) that is installed in a game hall or the like and has an open front side, a gaming unit 3800 housed in the housing unit, and a gaming unit 3800 with the front side open. It mainly includes a door unit 3810B that opens and closes the front opening of the housing unit so as to be visible from the outside.

Although not shown, the housing unit includes a box-shaped housing body, a main control unit for controlling games, a payout unit for storing and paying out medals as game media, and a main control unit. It is equipped with a power supply unit for supplying power to the player, payout unit, etc., and a switch unit for turning the power on and off and setting game content. A main control unit, a payout unit, a power supply unit, and a switch unit are installed inside the housing body.

The gaming unit 3800 includes three reels 3801 each having a symbol row from a plurality of symbols on the outer peripheral surface and lined up on the left and right, a reel drive mechanism (not shown) that rotates the three reels 3801 independently, and A unit base for mounting two reels 3801 and a reel drive mechanism (not shown) in a housing unit.

In the door unit 3810B of the third embodiment, the lower part of the front surface in the vertical direction protrudes forward, and the upper surface of the protruding part has an input slot 3811 for inserting medals as game media, and an input slot 3811 for inserting medals as game media. A production button 3812 located at the center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front on the left side, a MAX bet button 3813 located to the left of the production button 3812, and a 1 bet button located slightly to the left behind the MAX bet button 3813 3814.

Further, the door unit 3810B has three stop buttons 3815 arranged in a row from side to side in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and three stop buttons 3815 arranged on the left side of the stop button 3815 when viewed from the front, on the upper part of the entire surface of the portion that protrudes forward. and a starting lever 3816.

Further, the door unit 3810B includes a top cover unit 3820A provided above a portion projecting forward, a front presentation unit 3850 attached to the rear side of the top cover unit 3820A, and a front presentation unit 3850 attached to the rear of the front presentation unit 3850. and a post-production unit 3860 attached to the side.

The top cover unit 3820A is provided above the forwardly protruding portion of the door unit 3810B where the slot 3811, the MAX bet button 3813, etc. are provided. The top cover unit 3820A covers the three reels 3801 of the gaming unit 3800 so that they can be visually recognized from the front. Additionally, the top cover unit 3820 includes a left side decoration unit 3821A and a right side decoration unit 3822A that are spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and a top cover 3823 that covers the front of the left side decoration unit 3821A and the right side decoration unit 3822A. It has . The top cover 3823 also covers the area between the left side decoration unit 3821A and the right side decoration unit 3822A, and the three reels 3801 provided at the rear, the front production unit 3850, and the rear production unit 3860 can be seen from the front. It is said that

The front presentation unit 3850 is attached to the rear side of the top cover unit 3820A, and has a front decoration body 3851 that can be raised and lowered. The front decoration body 3851 is provided so as to be visible from the front through between the left side decoration unit 3821A and the right side decoration unit 3822A. The front decorative body 3851 is formed in a shape resembling sunglasses. In a normal state, the front decoration body 3851 is located in a raised position moved upward, and makes the decorative lens 3865 and side decorative lens 3875 of the rear effect unit 3860 provided at the rear invisible from the front (Fig. 313(a)). The front decoration body 3851 moves from the raised position to the lowered position depending on the gaming state. When the front decorative body 3851 is in the lowered position, the decorative lens 3865 and side decorative lens 3875 of the rear effect unit 3860 provided at the rear become visible from the front, which can indicate to the player that an opportunity has arrived. Yes (see Figure 313(b)).

The rear effect unit 3860 is attached to the rear side of the front effect unit 3850, and has a rear decoration body 3880A imitating a predetermined character. The rear decoration body 3880A is provided above the three reels 3801. In the normal state, the upper part (decorative lens 3865 and side decorative lens 3875) of the rear decorative body 3880A is made invisible by the front decorative body 3851 located at the front. When the lens moves to the lowered position, the upper part (decorative lens 3865 and side decorative lens 3875) becomes visible.

[34-1. Post production unit]
Next, the rear effect unit 3860 of the door unit 3810B will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 314 to 320 and the like. 314 is a front view of the rear effect unit in the door unit of the third embodiment, FIG. 315(a) is a perspective view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 314 seen from the front, and (b) is a rear view of the rear effect unit of FIG. 314. It is a perspective view of the production unit seen from behind. FIG. 316 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit shown in FIG. 314, viewed from the front, and FIG. 317 is an exploded perspective view of the rear effect unit shown in FIG. 314, viewed from the back. FIG. 318 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 314. 319(a) is a front view of the rear decorative body of the rear effect unit in FIG. 314, (b) is a perspective view of the rear decorative body seen from the front, and (c) is a front view of the rear decorative body seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 320 is a front view showing the arrangement of decorative boards in the rear effect unit of FIG. 314.

The rear effect unit 3860 is attached to the rear side of the front effect unit 3850. The rear effect unit 3860 includes a rear unit base 3861 attached to the rear side of the front effect unit 3850, a rear upper decorative board 3862 attached to the upper part of the front of the rear unit base 3861, and a lower side of the rear upper decorative board 3862. a rear lower decorative board 3874 provided in and attached to the rear unit base 3861; a reflector 3864 provided in front of the rear upper decorative board 3862 and the rear lower decorative board 3874 and attached to the rear unit base 3861; a rear decoration body 3880A imitating a predetermined character and attached to the rear unit base 3861 so as to cover the front side of the rear decoration body 3880A; A pair of side decorative lenses 3875 are provided on the front surface of the body 3880A and are arranged on both left and right outer sides of the decorative lens 3865 and attached to the reflector 3864.

The rear effect unit 3860 also includes a frame-shaped frame decoration body 3876 attached to the front side of the rear unit base below the rear lower decorative board 3863, and a frame-shaped frame decoration body 3876 attached to the rear side of the frame decoration body 3876. It includes a decorative substrate 3877 and a frame decoration 3878 attached above the inside of the frame on the front surface of the frame decoration 3876.

The frame decoration body 3876 has a rectangular frame shape long from side to side, and is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of the three reels 3801 when seen from the front when assembled in the slot machine 9. The frame decoration body 3876 has translucency. The frame decoration board 3877 has a plurality of LEDs 3877a mounted on the front surface to decorate the frame decoration body 3876 with light emission (see FIG. 320). The frame decorative board 3877 is composed of four decorative boards arranged in a square frame shape.

The front surface of the frame decorative board 3877 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 3877a or the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the frame decoration board 3877, the frame decoration body 3876 can be decorated with brighter light. Furthermore, the LED 3877a of the frame decorative board 3877 is a full-color LED. Furthermore, the frame decorative board 3877 is printed with ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LED 3877a and other decorative boards to be mounted. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the frame decoration 3876, and the decorative effect of the frame decoration 3876 can be reliably exerted.

In addition, in the frame decoration board 3877, components that do not emit light other than the LED 3877a (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light-emitting decoration. There is.

The length of the frame decorative body 3878 in the left-right direction is the same as the length of the frame decorative body 3876 in the left-right direction. The frame top decoration body 3878 is decorated with light by a plurality of LEDs 3874a mounted on the front surface of the rear lower decoration board 3874 through the rear decoration body 3880A.

Furthermore, the rear production unit 3860 is attached to the rear surface of the rear unit base 3861, and includes a peripheral control board box 3871 in which the peripheral control board 3870 is housed, and a door attached to the rear surface of the rear unit base 3861. It includes a unit relay board 3872 and a board cover 3873 attached to the rear unit base 3861 so as to cover the rear side of the door unit relay board 3872.

[34-1a. Rear unit base]
Next, the rear unit base 3861 of the rear effect unit 3860 will be explained in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 316 to 318 and the like. The rear unit base 3861 is attached to the rear side of the front presentation unit 3850. The rear unit base 3861 has a box shape of a rectangular parallelepiped that is shallow in the front and back direction, and is open at the front and top. The rear unit base 3861 has a rectangular through hole 3861a extending from front to back and extending from side to side, below the vertical center of the rear wall. The three reels 3801 are visible from the front through this through hole 3861a.

The rear unit base 3861 also has a plurality of support parts 3861b that protrude forward in a cylindrical shape at the upper left and right corners of the front surface of the rear wall and at the left and right outer sides near the upper end of the through hole 3861a. and an attachment boss 3861c that projects from the front surface of the support portion 3861b in a cylindrical shape and has a diameter smaller than that of the support portion 3861b. The attachment boss 3861c protrudes slightly longer than the thickness of the flat plate portion 3885 of the rear decoration body 3880A. A rear decoration body 3880A is attached to this attachment boss 3861c.

[34-1b. Upper rear decorative board]
Next, the rear upper decorative board 3862 of the rear effect unit 3860 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 316 to 318, FIG. 320, and the like. The upper rear decorative board 3862 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the rear unit base 3861 above the center in the vertical direction. The rear upper decorative board 3862 has a rectangular outer shape that is elongated from side to side. The rear upper decorative board 3862 of this embodiment is composed of three boards arranged on the left and right.

The rear upper decorative board 3862 has a plurality of first LEDs 3862a for emitting decoration on the decorative lens 3865 and a plurality of second LEDs 3862b for emitting decoration on a portion of the rear decoration body 3880 other than the decorative lens 3865 on the front side. has been implemented. The second LED 3862b is provided at the rear of the solid portion 3886 of the rear decoration body 3880. The first LED 3862a and the second LED 3862b are full color LEDs.

The front surface of the rear upper decorative board 3862 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LEDs 3862a and 3862b and the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the rear upper decorative board 3862, the rear decoration body 3880A, decorative lens 3865, etc. can emit brighter light. It can be decorated. In addition, the rear upper decorative board 3862 has characters and symbols written in ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the LEDs 3862a and LED 3862b to be mounted and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing using. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the rear decoration body 3880A, the decorative lens 3865, etc., and the decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3880A, the decorative lens 3865, etc. can be reliably exerted.

Note that in the rear upper decorative board 3862, members that do not emit light (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) other than the LEDs 3862a and 3862b are provided on the rear surface (back surface), so that they do not interfere with the light-emitting decoration. is being done.

[34-1c. Lower back decorative board]
Next, the rear lower decorative board 3863 of the rear effect unit 3860 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 316 to 318, FIG. 320, and the like. The lower rear decorative board 3874 is attached to a portion below the upper rear decorative board 3862 on the front surface of the rear wall of the rear unit base 3861. The lower rear decorative board 3874 has a rectangular shape that is elongated from side to side. The lower rear decorative board 3874 of this embodiment is composed of two boards separated at the center in the left-right direction.

The rear lower decoration board 3874 has a plurality of LEDs 3874a mounted on the front surface to decorate the lower edge of the rear decoration body 3880A with light emission and to decorate the upper frame decoration body 3878 with light emission. LED 3874a is a full color LED.

The front surface of the lower rear decorative board 3874 is coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist can reflect light from the LED 3874a or the front, and by brightening the entire front surface of the lower rear decorative board 3874, the frame decorative body 3878 can be decorated with brighter light. In addition, the letters and symbols on the rear lower decorative board 3874 are printed using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as the mounted LED 3874a and other decorative boards. It is applied by screen printing. Thereby, characters and symbols can be made less noticeable through the frame decoration 3878, and the decorative effect of the frame decoration 3878 can be reliably exerted.

Note that in the rear lower decorative board 3874, members that do not emit light other than the LED 3874a (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface (back surface), and care has been taken so that they do not interfere with the light emitting decoration. ing.

[34-1d. Reflector]
Next, the reflector 3864 of the post-effect unit 3860 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 316 to 318 and the like. The reflector 3864 is attached to the front surface of the rear unit base 3861 in front of the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the lower rear decorative board 3874. The reflector 3864 is attached so that a gap is formed between the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the lower rear decorative board 3874. This gap makes it easier for heat to escape from the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the lower rear decorative board 3874.

The reflector 3864 has a plurality of partition walls 3864a whose inner periphery is formed into a predetermined shape and penetrates from the front and back, and a plurality of through holes 3864b which penetrate from the front and back. The partition wall 3864a is formed in a shape that follows the letters of the decorative lens 3865, or a shape that follows a portion of a constant width upward from the lower end of the rear decorative body 3880A (the upper side of the frame-top decorative body 3878). These partition walls 3864a allow only the decorative lens 3865 and frame decoration 3878 to be decorated with light.

A decorative lens 3865 and a side decorative lens 3875 are attached to the front end of the reflector 3864. When the reflector 3864 is assembled to the rear decoration unit 3860, it is formed so that a gap larger than the thickness of the rear decoration body 3880A is formed between the decorative lens 3865 and the side decoration lens 3875. 3880A can be supported with some wobbling in the front-rear direction.

[34-1e. Decorative lens]
Next, the decorative lens 3865 of the post-production unit 3860 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 to 318 and the like. Decorative lens 3865 is provided in front of rear decoration body 3880A, and is attached to the front end of reflector 3864 through opening 3888 of rear decoration body 3880A.

The decorative lens 3865 is formed into a flat plate shape, and includes a lens portion 3865a that is transparent, a decorative portion 3865b that has metallic luster, and a plurality of mounting portions 3865c that protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape. have. The lens portion 3865a is formed into the letters "MAX". The decorative portion 3865b is provided outside the characters formed by the lens portion 3865a. The decorative portion 3865b is composed of a metal foil or a plating layer formed by metal vapor deposition.

The decorative lens 3865 is configured such that each letter of "MAX" is decorated with light emission independently by the first LED 3862a of the rear upper decorative board 3862 and the reflector 3864.

The decorative lens 3865 can give a sense of luxury to the pattern part of the rear decorative body 3880A by the decorative part 3865b having metallic luster, and can reduce the appearance of the pattern part 3884 to be cheap. In addition, the decorative lens 3865 can surprise the player with the metallic shine of the decorative portion 3865b when the front decorative body 3851 moves from the raised position to the lowered position and becomes visible from the front. To strongly attract the interest of players, to make the players think that something good is going to happen, to increase expectations for the game, and to suppress a decline in interest. Can be done.

The decorative lens 3865 is arranged in front of the flat part 3886a of the solid part 3886 of the rear decoration body 3880A, and a plurality of attachment parts 3865c projecting rearward penetrate from the front through an opening 3888 provided in the solid part 3886. and is attached to the front end of reflector 3864. This decorative lens 3865 is provided at a portion of the rear decoration body 3880A corresponding to the position of the eyes of a pattern portion 3884 imitating the face of a predetermined character.

[34-1f. Side decorative lens]
Next, the side decorative lens 3875 of the post-production unit 3860 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 to 318 and the like. The decorative lenses 3865 are provided on both left and right outer sides of the decorative lens 3865 in front of the rear decorative body 3880A, and are attached to the front end of the reflector 3864 through the opening 3888 of the rear decorative body 3880.

The side decorative lens 3875 is formed into a flat plate shape, has a metallic luster on the outer periphery, is translucent on the inside, and has a predetermined logo character in line with the concept of the slot machine 9. is formed. The area on the outer periphery having metallic luster is composed of a metal foil or a plating layer formed by metal vapor deposition. The side decorative lens 3875 is decorated with light emission by the second LED 3862b of the rear upper decorative board 3862.

The side decorative lens 3875 can give a sense of luxury to the pattern part of the rear decorative body 3880A together with the decorative lens 3865 due to the metallic luster on the outer periphery, and can reduce the appearance of the pattern part 3884 being cheap. . The side decorative lenses 3875 are disposed in front of both left and right outer sides of the flat portion 3886a of the solid portion 3886 of the rear decorative body 3880A, and are attached to the front end of the reflector 3864 through the opening 3888 of the rear decorative body 3880A.

[34-1g. Rear decoration]
Next, the rear decoration body 3880A of the rear effect unit 3860 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 319 and the like. The rear decoration body 3880A is attached to the front surface of the rear unit base 3861 so as to cover the front side of the reflector 3864. The rear decoration body 3880A includes a transparent base sheet 3881, a decoration layer 3882 applied to the back side of the base sheet 3881, and a base layer 3883 applied to the back side of the decoration layer 3882. (See Figure 319(b)).

The base sheet 3881 is made of heat-resistant materials such as polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, high-impact polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride. It is formed into a sheet shape from plastic resin.

The decorative layer 3882 forms a pattern portion 3884 consisting of a pattern of a predetermined character's face. This decorative layer 3882 is colored by silk printing or offset printing.

The pattern portion 3884 is formed by the decorative layer 3882. This picture part 3884 has a main picture part 3884a which is the main part, and a sub-picture part 3884b which is the background of the main picture part 3884a. The main picture part 3884a is a part of the face of a predetermined character, and the sub picture part 3884b is a part outside the face of the character. In the pattern portion 3884, a reflector 3864 is placed behind the boundary of the part corresponding to the eye position on the face of a predetermined character and at a position at a predetermined height from the lower side (position of the upper side of the frame decoration body 3876). A partition wall 3864a is provided. Although not shown in the drawings, the pattern section 3884 of this embodiment has a main pattern section 3884a in which the remaining region excluding the region corresponding to the character's eyes and the region from the lower side to a predetermined height, It has a plurality of point-like transparent parts with high light transmittance.

The base layer 3883 is for improving the color development of the decorative layer 3882. The base layer 3883 in this embodiment is white or gray. Thereby, the pattern portion 2614 can be made to look brighter due to the light coming from behind. Note that the base layer 3883 is not provided behind the transparent part of the main pattern part 2614a, and light from the rear is irradiated (leaked) from the transparent part to the front, so that the main pattern part 2614a can be made to shine brightly.
Furthermore, the base layer 3883 is not provided in a region of the pattern portion 3884 ranging from the lower side to a predetermined height (a region behind the frame decoration 3878). Thereby, the upper frame decoration 3878 can be brightly decorated with light by the light from the plurality of LEDs 3874a of the lower rear decoration board 3874 through the rear decoration 3880A. This base layer 3883 is formed by silk printing or offset printing.

In addition, the rear decoration body 3880A includes a flat plate portion 3885, a solid portion 3886 that bulges forward from the flat plate portion 3885, a circular mounting hole 3887 penetrating the flat plate portion 3885, and a solid portion 3886. 3886 and an opening 3888 penetrating at a predetermined portion. The flat plate portion 3885 is provided on both left and right outer sides of the three-dimensional portion 3886 from both left and right end edges. In other words, in the rear decoration body 3880A, the flat plate portion 3885 extends outward like a flange from the solid portion 3886 that bulges forward.

The solid portion 3886 of the rear decoration body 3880A is provided at the main pattern portion 3884a of the pattern portion 3884. In other words, the facial part of a predetermined character in the picture is three-dimensionally formed by the three-dimensional portion 3886. The three-dimensional portion 3886 of this embodiment has a gradual change in shape (change in unevenness) and is rounded as a whole.

In the rear decoration body 3880A of this embodiment, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. A portion of the sub-picture portion 3884b extends toward the three-dimensional portion 3886. In other words, the three-dimensional portion 3886 bulges out in a slightly wider area than the main pattern portion 3884a. In other words, the main pattern portion 3884a is formed smaller than the three-dimensional portion 3886.

To be more specific, when the peripheral edge of the face pattern (main pattern part 3884a) of a predetermined character extends from the three-dimensional part 3886 toward the flat plate part 3885, the three-dimensional part in the vicinity of the pattern in contact with the flat plate part 3885 While the 3886 side faces to the side, the flat plate part 3885 side of the picture faces forward, so the three-dimensional character's face (picture) looks unnatural, and the picture and the three-dimensional part 3886 There is a problem in that the three-dimensional decorative effect due to this is reduced. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the peripheral part of the character's face picture (the boundary between the main picture part 3884a and the sub-picture part 3884b) is located on the three-dimensional part 3886 side. The peripheral edge portion does not face forward due to the flat plate portion 3885. As a result, the picture of the character's face (the main picture part 3884a) does not look unnatural, and the decorative effect of the three-dimensional main picture part 3884a and the three-dimensional part 3886 can be reliably exerted.

Furthermore, the three-dimensional portion 3886 has a flat portion 3886a formed parallel to the surface of the flat plate portion 3885 on the outer periphery at a portion corresponding to the position of the eyes on the face of a predetermined character. The flat portion 3886a projects further forward than other portions of the three-dimensional portion 3886. Further, the outer circumference of the flat portion 3886a is formed to have the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative lens 3865. A decorative lens 3865 is placed in front of this flat portion 3886a. Further, the flat portion 3886a is not provided with the decorative layer 3882 and the base layer 3883, and remains transparent as the base sheet 3881. Parts of a plurality of openings 3888 are provided in the flat portion 3886a, and the attachment portion 3865c of the decorative lens 3865 passes through the openings 3888 from the front and is attached to the reflector 3864. Further, openings 3888 are provided on both left and right outer sides of the flat portion 3886a, and the side decorative lens 3875 is attached to the reflector 3864 through the openings 3888.

The attachment holes 3887 are provided at the four corners of the flat plate portion 3885 (rear decoration body 3880A). The inner diameter of the mounting hole 3887 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting boss 3861c of the rear unit base 3861. A mounting boss 3861c that protrudes longer than the thickness of the flat plate portion 3885 is inserted into the mounting hole 3887. Further, the mounting portion 3865c of the decorative lens 3865 is inserted through the opening 3888, and a gap larger than the thickness of the flat plate portion 3885 is formed between the decorative lens 3865 assembled by the mounting portion 3865c and the reflector 3864. Ru. Thereby, when the rear decoration body 3880A is assembled to the rear effect unit 3860, it is attached with a predetermined amount of play.

Further, the attachment hole 3887 is formed in the flat plate portion 3885 where the sub-picture portion 3884b of the pattern portion 3884 is provided. In other words, the attachment hole 3887 is not provided in the main pattern portion 3884a (solid portion 3886). As a result, the mounting screw (not shown) for attaching the rear decoration body 3880A to the rear unit base 3861 through the attachment hole 3887 does not hide a part of the main pattern part 3884a, and the main part is not visible to the player. The pattern portion 3884a can be visually recognized in good condition, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the main pattern portion 3884a can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, since the mounting holes 3887 and the like are provided at the corners of the flat plate portion 3885, they are provided at a position away from the three-dimensional portion 3886, so that the mounting holes 3887 (mounting screws) can be made less noticeable. The same effects as described above can be achieved.

The post-decoration body 3880A of this embodiment is produced by applying a decoration layer 3882 and a base layer 3883 to a flat base sheet 3881 to form an intermediate product, and then applying pressure to the intermediate product while heating it to a predetermined temperature. After the solid portion 3886 is expanded by molding or vacuum forming, the outer periphery is trimmed (cut) and a mounting hole 3887, an opening 3888, etc. are formed. Since the rear decoration body 3880A is manufactured by the method described above, it can be manufactured at a lower cost than an injection molded product, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the rear decoration body 3880A can be easily manufactured, the rear decoration body 3880A (for example, the rear decoration body 3880) having different pattern portions 3884, three-dimensional portions 3886, etc. can be easily manufactured. Can be done. Therefore, by replacing the rear decoration body 3880A with a different pattern or shape, it is possible to easily change the model or design, and it is possible to easily provide a pachinko machine 1 that easily attracts the attention of players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress an increase in cost.

As described above, the rear decoration body 3880A of this embodiment is formed of a thin sheet-like member, so it can be made lighter than it appears from the outside, and the increase in weight applied to the slot machine 9 can be reduced. can be reduced.

Note that the thickness of the rear decoration body 3880A (base sheet 3881) is within the range of 0.4 mm to 1.2 mm. If the thickness is thinner than this, the overall strength and rigidity will decrease and there is a risk that the desired shape will not be maintained due to its own weight when installed, and depending on the shape of the three-dimensional part 3886, there is a risk of tearing. It is. Furthermore, if the thickness is thicker than this, there is a possibility that the three-dimensional portion 3886 cannot be formed into the desired (molding mold) shape during molding by pressure molding, vacuum molding, etc., and the weight of the rear decoration body 3880A increases. This is to prevent it from becoming unnecessarily heavy.

Since the rear decoration body 3880A is formed using the thin base sheet 3881 as a matrix, it expands and contracts (expands and contracts) due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity. As described above, the decorative body 3880A has a predetermined amount of wobble due to the relationship between the mounting hole 3887 and the mounting boss 3861c, the relationship between the opening 3888, the reflector 3864, and the decorative lens 3865, etc. Since it can be attached with a 25mm diameter, it can respond to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes. This can prevent the rear decoration body 3880A from being pulled or compressed and deformed due to expansion and contraction due to environmental changes.

In addition, the rear decoration body 3880A is attached with a predetermined amount of wobbling, and is attached to the tip of the support portion 3861b protruding forward from the rear wall of the rear unit base 3861. Since the portion other than the hole 3887 is floating in the air, it can be attached to the rear unit base 3861 even if the flat plate portion 3885 has undulations due to molding.

Furthermore, since the mounting screws (not shown) that attach the rear decoration body 3880A to the rear unit base 3861 are seated screws, there is no concentration of force when installing the rear decoration body 3880A, and the rear decoration body 3880A is attached to the rear unit base 3861. The body 3880A can be attached in good condition.

By the way, it is possible to enhance the sense of luxury by using a metal foil layer or a metal vapor deposition layer as the decorative layer 3882 of the rear decoration body 3880A, but in this case, the three-dimensional part 3886 is formed by pressure forming or vacuum forming. When molding, since the elongation of the decorative layer 3882 made of metal foil or the like is smaller than the elongation of the base sheet 3881, which is the base material, wrinkles may occur in the base sheet 3881 and the decorative layer 3882. Problems such as peeling of the decorative layer 3882 from the base sheet 3881 are likely to occur. On the other hand, the rear effect unit 3860 of the present embodiment has a decorative part 3865b of the decorative lens 3865 having metallic luster, an outer peripheral part of the side decorative lens 3875, etc. on the front surface of the three-dimensional part 3886 of the rear decoration body 3880A. Because of this arrangement, the part with the metallic luster can give a sense of luxury and can reduce the appearance of the pattern part 3884 being cheap. The appearance of the 3875 decoration can be improved, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

In addition, when injection molding is used as a method for forming a decorative body having a three-dimensional shaped part, it is easy to form the desired shape with a molding die, so that the rear surface of the three-dimensional shaped part can be , a mounting boss for attaching a decorative body, etc. can be formed. On the other hand, when pressure forming or vacuum forming is used, a heated sheet-like member is stretched to form the desired shape, so it is attached to the rear surface of the three-dimensional part (three-dimensional part 3886). It was not possible to form a boss or the like. On the other hand, in the rear decoration body 3880A of this embodiment, a flange-like flat plate part 3885 is extended from the outer periphery of the solid part 3886 that bulges forward, and a mounting hole 3887 is provided in the flat plate part 3885. Therefore, the three-dimensional portion 3886 provided with the main pattern portion 3884a can be attached to the rear unit base 3861.

Further, as described above, in the rear decoration body 3880A of this embodiment, the mounting hole 3887 is provided in the flange-like flat plate portion 3885 extending outward from the solid portion 3886, and the solid portion 3886 has an injection hole 3887. Unlike molded products, there is no mounting boss for mounting, so when light is irradiated from behind, the shadow of the mounting boss will not appear on the three-dimensional part 3886, and the entire three-dimensional part 3886 will be uniformly decorated with light. can be done.

When the rear decoration body 3880A is assembled into the rear effect unit 3860, the first LED 3862a and the second LED 3862b of the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the LED 3874a of the lower rear decorative board 3874 are located behind the three-dimensional part 3886, respectively. (See Figure 320). Therefore, when the first LED 3862a of the rear upper decorative board 3862 is made to emit light appropriately, the lens portion 3865a of the decorative lens 3865 can be decorated with light through the transparent flat portion 3886a of the three-dimensional portion 3886. At this time, the partition wall 3864a of the reflector 3864 allows the letters "MAX" on the decorative lens 3865 to be decorated with light emission independently.

Further, by appropriately lighting the second LED 3862b of the upper rear decorative board 3862 and the LED 3874a of the lower rear decorative board 3874, the portion of the three-dimensional portion 3886 other than the flat portion 3886a can be decorated with light. At this time, if the second LED 3862b located behind the side decorative lens 3875 emits light, the side decorative lens 3875 can be decorated with light. In addition, by causing the LED 3874a of the lower rear decorative board 3874 to emit light as appropriate, only the frame upper decorative body 3878 can be decorated with light by the partition wall 3864a of the reflector 3864 via the rear decorative body 3880A. In other parts of the main pattern part 3884a, when the second LED 3862b is made to emit light, due to the presence of a plurality of point-like transparent parts, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the player can see a luminous decoration that sparkles. Can be done.

Furthermore, when the rear decoration body 3880A is assembled to the slot machine 9, the upper mounting hole 3887 is hidden from view from the front by the left side decoration unit 3821A and the right side decoration unit 3822A (see FIG. 313). . Further, the lower mounting hole 3887 is hidden from view from the front by the frame top decoration 3878.

[34-2. Features of door unit]
Next, the features of the door unit 3810B of the third embodiment will be explained. Note that although the door unit 3810B will be described as an example here, the door unit 3810 and the door unit 3810A also have the same effects as described below. When compared with the door unit 3810A of the second embodiment, the door unit 3810B of this embodiment has a top cover unit 3820A, a front direction unit 3850, a rear direction unit base 3861 of a rear direction unit 3860, a rear upper decorative board 3862, and a rear lower side. A decorative board 3874, a frame decorative board 3877, a decorative lens 3865, etc. are common parts. Note that although the lower rear decorative board 3863 and the lower rear decorative board 3874 and the frame decorative board 3867 and the frame decorative board 3877 have different symbols, they are the same parts.

On the other hand, in the door unit 3810B, compared to the door unit 3810A which has many common parts as described above, the rear decoration body 3880A is different from the rear decoration body 3880, and the rear lower left decoration body 3868 and the rear lower right decoration body are Frame decoration 3876 and frame top decoration 3878 are different from No. 3869. Further, although the reflectors 3864 have the same reference numerals, they are not shared parts and are different from each other. These rear decoration body 3880A, frame decoration body 3876, etc. are very conspicuous parts in door unit 3810B, so even though there are many common parts, there are a few non-common parts. It is a slot machine 9 of a different model with a completely different impression from the door unit 38105B.

As mentioned above, the rear decoration body 3880A is a pneumatic molded product that is inexpensive to manufacture, so the impression of the door unit 3810B (door unit 3810A) can be greatly changed just by replacing the rear decoration body 3880A. , it is possible to reduce costs associated with model changes, minor changes, etc. In addition, since air pressure molded products are inexpensive, it is possible to attach different decorations depending on the manufacturing lot of the door unit 3810B (door unit 3810A), the shipping destination, special specifications such as campaigns, etc. Therefore, it is possible to provide a slot machine 9 that meets the needs of players and game halls, and a highly appealing slot machine 9 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

[35. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiments]
The center lower back front cover 2632 and the center lower back front cover 2632B of the center lower accessory base 2601 in the center lower accessory base 2600 of the game board 5A and the game board 5B of this embodiment, the back unit base 3601 of the back production unit 3600, and the back The rear decorative lens 3703 of the production unit 3700, the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933 in the upper back production unit 3900 of the game board 5D, and the side unit bases in the left side decoration unit 3821 and right side decoration unit 3822 of the slot machine 9. 3824, the support lens 3827, the front end support member 3828, and the rear unit base 3861 of the rear effect unit 3860 correspond to the support member of the present invention.

In addition, in this embodiment, the front left decorative body 2610 and the front left decorative body 2620 of the center accessory 2600, the center lower back decorative body 2640 and the center lower back decorative body 2640B of the center lower back unit 2630, and the back of the back direction unit 3600. Rear decoration body 3610, back rear decoration body 3710 of back production unit 3700, back upper left decoration body 3940A and back upper right decoration body 3940B of back upper production unit 3900, inside side of left side decoration unit 3821 and right side decoration unit 3822 The decoration body 3830A, the side outer decoration body 3830B, the rear decoration body 3880 of the rear effect unit 3860, and the rear decoration body 3880A correspond to the decoration body of the present invention.

Further, in this embodiment, the decorative layer 2612 of the front left decorative body 2610, the decorative layer 2622 of the front left decorative body 2620, the decorative layer 2642 of the center lower back decorative body 2640 and the center lower back decorative body 2640B, and the back back decoration The decorative layer 3612 of the body 3610, the decorative layer 3712 of the back rear decorative body 3710, the decorative layer 3942 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, the inner side decorative body 3830A and the outer side decorative body 3830B. The decoration layer 3832, the rear decoration body 3880, and the decoration layer 3882 of the rear decoration body 3880A correspond to the decoration portion of the present invention.

Furthermore, the opening 2632a of the center lower back front cover 2632 and the opening 3703d of the back decoration lens 3703 in this embodiment correspond to the opening 3932e of the front support lens 3932 and the through hole of the present invention, respectively. .

[36. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the center accessory 2600 of the game board 5A of the third embodiment (the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment), the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620) is The round-shaped first mounting hole 2617 (first mounting hole 2627) allows the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620) to be positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the center accessory base 2601. When the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620) made of sheet material expands or contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc. inside the pachinko machine 1, the second mounting hole 2618 (second mounting hole 2628) has a hole shape. Based on the first mounting hole 2617 (first mounting hole 2627), the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620) expands and contracts within the range of the long hole of the second mounting hole 2618 (second mounting hole 2628). The front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620) can be attached to the center accessory base 2601 in an expandable and contractable state. Therefore, since the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620) is not partially stretched or compressed, wrinkles or cracks do not occur in the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620). Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative layer 2612 (decorative layer 2622) of the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620) can be reliably exhibited. Not only can the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 be improved by the decoration, but also the decoration of the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620) can entertain the players, and can suppress a decrease in the player's interest. can.

In addition, in the center lower back unit 2630 of the center lower accessory 2600 in the game board 5A of the third embodiment (the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment), the circle of the center lower back decoration 2640 (center lower back decoration 2640B) is The hole-shaped first mounting hole 2647 allows the center lower back decorative body 2640 (center lower back decorative body 2640B) to be positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the center lower back front cover 2632 (center lower back front cover 2632B). When the center lower back decoration body 2640 (center lower back decoration body 2640B) made of a sheet material expands or contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc. inside the pachinko machine 1, the elongated second attachment hole 2648 allows the first attachment hole to be fixed. Based on the hole 2647, expansion and contraction of the center lower back decoration body 2640 (center lower back decoration body 2640B) can be accommodated within the range of the elongated hole of the second mounting hole 2648. The rear decoration body 2640B) can be attached to the center lower rear front cover 2632 (center lower rear front cover 2632B) in an expandable and retractable state. Therefore, since the center lower back decoration 2640 (center lower back decoration 2640B) is not partially stretched or compressed, the center lower back decoration 2640 (center lower back decoration 2640B) may have wrinkles or cracks. This does not occur, and the decorative effect of the decorative layer 2642 of the center lower back decoration body 2640 (center lower back decoration body 2640B) can be reliably exhibited. ) can improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and the decoration of the center lower back decoration body 2640 (center lower back decoration body 2640B) can entertain the players, thereby reducing the player's interest. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in the back production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment, the round-shaped first attachment hole 3717 of the back decoration body 3710 allows the back decoration to be attached to the back decoration body lens 3703. The body 3710 can be positioned at a predetermined position, and when the back decoration body 3710 made of a sheet material expands or contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc. inside the pachinko machine 1, the second attachment hole 3718 has a long hole shape. The back decoration body 3710 can be expanded and contracted within the range of the elongated hole of the second attachment hole 3718 with the first attachment hole 3717 as a reference, and the rear decoration body lens Can be installed on 3703. Therefore, the rear decoration body 3710 is not partially stretched or compressed, so wrinkles or cracks do not occur in the rear decoration body 3710, and the decoration layer 3712 of the rear decoration body 3710 is decorated. The effect can be reliably exhibited, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the rear decoration body 3710, and the player can be entertained by the decoration of the rear decoration body 3710. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the top cover unit 3820 of the door unit 3810 in the slot machine 9, a side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) made of a sheet material having a decoration layer 3832 in a left side decoration unit 3821 and a right side decoration unit 3822. is installed in a state where it can expand and contract due to the gap between the side unit base 3824 and the support lens 3827, the gap between the front end support member 3828 and the support lens 3827, etc., so the temperature, humidity, etc. inside the pachinko machine 1 may change. At times, the inner side decorative body 3830A (the outer side decorative body 3830B) can expand and contract with respect to the support lens 3827 and the like. Therefore, since the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) is not partially stretched or compressed, wrinkles or cracks do not occur in the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B). Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative layer 3832 of the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) can be reliably exhibited, and the decoration of the side inner decoration body 3830A (side outer decoration body 3830B) makes the slot machine 9 more attractive. Not only can the appearance be improved, but also the player can be entertained by the decoration of the side inner decoration 3830A (side outer decoration 3830B), and a decline in player interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the rear effect unit 3860 of the door unit 3810A of the second embodiment (the door unit 3810B of the third embodiment) in the slot machine 9, the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A ) is attached to the rear unit base 3861 in an expandable and retractable state by the mounting boss 3861c of the rear unit base 3861, so when the temperature or humidity inside the slot machine 9 changes, the rear decoration is attached to the rear unit base 3861. The body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A) can be expanded and contracted. Therefore, since the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A) is not partially stretched or compressed, wrinkles or cracks do not occur in the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A), and the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A) is not partially stretched or compressed. The decorative effect of the decorative layer 3882 of the body 3880 (rear decorative member 3880A) can be reliably exhibited, and the appearance of the slot machine 9 can be improved by the decoration of the rear decorative member 3880 (rear decorative member 3880A). , the player can be entertained by the decoration of the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A), and a decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, front left decoration 2610, front left decoration 2620, center lower back decoration 2640, center lower back decoration 2640B, back back decoration 3610, back back decoration 3710, side inner decoration 3830A , the side outer decoration 3830B, the rear decoration 3880, and the rear decoration 3880A can be attached in an expandable state, so the shapes of these decorations may be distorted during manufacturing. Even if the temperature at the time of assembly is different from the temperature at the time of assembly, the center lower back front cover 2632, the center lower back front cover 2632B, the back unit base 3601, the back rear decorative lens 3703, the side unit base 3824, Decorative bodies can be attached to supporting members such as the supporting lens 3827, the front end supporting member 3828, and the rear unit base 3861, reducing the number of defective decorative bodies and reducing costs incurred by the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9. can suppress the increase in

In addition, front and left decorations 2610, front and left decorations 2620, center lower back decorations 2640, back and rear decorations 3610, back and back decorations 3710, inner side decorations 3830A, outer side decorations 3830B, back decorations 3880, In the decorative body such as the rear decorative body 3880A, the decorative layer 2612, the decorative layer 2622, the decorative layer 2642, the decorative layer 3612, the decorative layer 3712, the decorative layer 3832, and the decorative layer 3882. Since at least a part of the decorative portion includes the three-dimensional portion 2616, three-dimensional portion 2626, three-dimensional portion 2646, three-dimensional portion 3616, three-dimensional portion 3716, three-dimensional portion 3836, and three-dimensional portion 3886, the three-dimensional decorative portion The decorative effect can be further enhanced, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9 can strongly attract the attention of players, and have a high appeal to players. Machine 9 can be provided.

Furthermore, when molding the solid portion 2616, the solid portion 2626, the solid portion 2646, the solid portion 3616, the solid portion 3716, the solid portion 3836, and the solid portion 3886, the solid portion 2616, the solid portion 2626, the solid portion 2646, the solid portion 3616, The parts outside the three-dimensional part 3716, three-dimensional part 3836, and three-dimensional part 3886 (flat plate part 2615, flat plate part 2625, flat plate part 2645, flat plate part 3615, flat plate part 3715, flat plate part 3835, and flat plate part 3885) are wavy. Even if the front and left decorations 2620, center lower back decoration 2640, back and rear decorations 3610, back and rear decorations 3710, inner side decorations 3830A, outer side decorations 3830B, back decorations 3880, and rear A decorative body such as the decorative body 3880A is extendable and retractable, and includes a center lower rear front cover 2632, a center lower rear front cover 2632B, a back unit base 3601, a back rear decorative body lens 3703, a side unit base 3824, and a support lens 3827. , the front end support member 3828, and the rear unit base 3861, the decorative body can be attached to the support members without any problem as described above, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Also, the first part of the center lower back decorative body 2640 (center lower back decorative body 2640B) of the center lower back unit 2630 in the center lower accessory 2600 of the game board 5A of the third embodiment (the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment) The center lower back front cover 2632 is attached to the attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648, and the first attachment hole 3717 and the second attachment hole 3718 of the back decoration body 3710 in the back production unit 3700 of the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment. Since the cylindrical mounting boss 2632d of the (center lower back front cover 2632B) and the cylindrical mounting boss 3703e of the back decoration lens 3703 are inserted, the center When the lower back decoration body 2640 (center lower back decoration body 2640B) or the back rear decoration body 3710 expands or contracts, the second attachment hole 2648 or the second attachment hole 3718 is opened or closed based on the first attachment hole 2647 or the first attachment hole 3717. The pachinko machine 1 that can accommodate the expansion and contraction of the center lower back decoration body 2640 (center lower back decoration body 2640B) and the back rear decoration body 3710 within the range of the long hole of can be converted into

In addition, the first attachment hole 2647 and the second attachment hole 2648 of the center lower back decoration body 2640 (center lower back decoration body 2640B) of the center lower back unit 2630 and the first attachment hole of the back rear decoration body 3710 in the back direction unit 3700 Since the mounting boss 2632d of the center lower back front cover 2632 (center lower back front cover 2632B) and the mounting boss 3703e of the back decoration lens 3703 are inserted into the hole 3717 and the second mounting hole 3718, the first mounting When the mounting boss 2632d and the mounting boss 3703e are inserted into the hole 2647, the first mounting hole 3717, the second mounting hole 2648, and the second mounting hole 3718, the center lower back front cover 2632 (center lower back front cover 2632B) and the back The center lower back decoration 2640 (center lower back decoration 2640B) and the rear back decoration 3710 can be temporarily attached to the decoration lens 3703, and the effort required for assembly can be reduced.

Furthermore, the three-dimensional part 2646 of the center lower back decoration body 2640 of the center lower back unit 2630 in the center accessory 2600 of the game board 5A of the third embodiment, and the back of the back effect unit 3700 of the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment. The solid portion 3716 of the rear decorative body 3710 is inserted into the opening 2632a of the center lower back front cover 2632 and the opening 3703d of the back decorative body lens 3703, and the solid portion 2646 and the solid portion 3716 By passing through the openings 2632a and 3703d, the parts of the center lower back decoration body 2640 and back rear decoration body 3710 that are outside the peripheries of the three-dimensional parts 2646 and three-dimensional parts 3716 become the center lower back front cover 2632 and the back rear. Since it comes into contact with the decorative lens 3703, the periphery of the solid portion 2646 and the solid portion 3716 can be supported by the center lower back front cover 2632 and the back decorative lens 3703, and the solid portion 2646 and the solid portion 3716 can be supported. It can be positioned at a desired position (the positions of the opening 2632a and the opening 3703d).

In addition, in the center lower back unit 2630 of the center lower accessory 2600 of the game board 5A of the third embodiment (the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment), the left and right of the center lower back decoration 2640 (the center lower back decoration 2640B) The edges of both ends are installed by loosely fitting into the support groove 2632c of the center lower rear front cover 2632 (center lower rear front cover 2632B), and the center lower rear decoration body 2640 (center lower rear decoration body 2640B) is attached. Since the edges of the center can move within a certain range within the support groove 2632c, the center lower back decoration body 2640 (center lower back decoration body 2640B) can be attached in an expandable and retractable state by the support groove 2632c, and as described above. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that exhibits effects.

Furthermore, since the edge of the center lower rear decorative body 2640 (center lower rear decorative body 2640B) is loosely fitted into the support groove 2632c of the center lower rear front cover 2632 (center lower rear front cover 2632B), The center lower rear decorative body 2640 (center lower rear decorative body 2640B) can be easily attached to the center lower rear front cover 2632 (center lower rear front cover 2632B), and the labor required for assembly is simplified. Cost increases can be suppressed.

In addition, in the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment, the peripheral parts of the first attachment hole 3717 and the second attachment hole 3718 in the back decoration body 3710 of the back production unit 3700 are connected to the protrusion 3703f of the back decoration body lens 3703. By abutting against each other, the rear decorative lens 3703 can be attached with a gap formed between the lens 3703 and the peripheral edge 3703a of the lens 3703. As a result, even if the rear decoration body 3710 is distorted in a wavy manner due to expansion and contraction due to temperature, humidity, etc. in the pachinko machine 1 during manufacturing, the back decoration lens 3703 side of the distortion can be replaced with the peripheral edge 3703a etc. formed by the protrusion 3703f. By positioning the back decoration body 3710 in the gap between the two, it is possible to attach the rear decoration body 3710 to the rear decoration body lens 3703, and to allow distortion, thereby preventing the back decoration body 3710 from being a defective product. In addition, the back decoration body 3710 can be attached to the back decoration body lens 3703 in an expandable state, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. It is possible to reliably provide a pachinko machine 1 that plays the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the three-dimensional portion 3946 on which the predetermined pattern of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B in the back upper production unit 3900 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5D is decorated with a predetermined pattern, It is inserted into the opening 3932e of the transparent front support lens 3932 from the rear and protrudes forward, and since the transparent part of the front support lens 3932 is not located in front of the three-dimensional part 3946, it cannot be viewed from the front (player side). The three-dimensional part 3946 can be clearly seen, and the decorative effect of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B (three-dimensional part 3946) can be further enhanced by the pattern applied to the three-dimensional part 3946. The decorative effects of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be fully exhibited. In addition, a back top decorative sheet 3935 is provided on the front support lens 3932 with a pattern (sub pattern portion 3935b) corresponding to the pattern (sub pattern portion 3944b) of the back top left decorative body 3940A and the back top right decorative body 3940B. The transparent front support lens 3932 makes it difficult to see the border between the patterns on the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B and the pattern on the back upper decorative sheet 3935. The patterns of the back top left decoration 3940A and the back top right decoration 3940B can be expanded and made larger by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3935, thereby attracting the player's interest more strongly. To provide a pachinko machine 1 which can further enhance the decorative effect of a body 3940A, a back upper right decorative body 3940B, and a back upper decorative sheet 3935, improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and has high appeal to players. Can be done.

In the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, the three-dimensional portion 3946 is inserted into the opening 3932e of the front support lens 3932, so that the front support is provided by the three-dimensional portion 3946 and the periphery of the opening 3932e. Relative movement of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B in the direction along the front plate portion 3932a of the lens 3932 can be restricted within a certain range. Further, in the flat plate portion 3945 extending outward from the three-dimensional portion 3946 in the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, the front plate portion 3932a of the front support lens 3932 is located on the front side, and The substrate portion 3933a of the rear support lens 3933 is located on the rear side, and since the gap between the front plate portion 3932a and the substrate portion 3933a is larger than the thickness of the flat plate portion 3945, the front support lens 3932 and the rear With respect to the support lens 3933, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can also move in the front-rear direction within the range of the gap. Therefore, when the temperature, humidity, etc. inside the pachinko machine 1 changes, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can expand or contract with respect to the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933. Therefore, since the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are not partially stretched or compressed, wrinkles and cracks occur in the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B. Therefore, the decorative effects of the three-dimensional portions 3946 and patterns of the back top left decoration body 3940A and the back top right decoration body 3940B can be reliably exhibited, and the decorations of the back top left decoration body 3940A and the back top right decoration body 3940B are This not only makes it possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, but also to entertain the players through the decorations of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, thereby suppressing a decline in player interest. can.

In addition, since the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933 are attached to sandwich the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B in a movable state, the back upper left decorative body 3940A is Even if the shape of the back upper right decorative body 3940B is distorted or the temperature at the time of manufacture is different from the temperature at the time of assembly, the back upper left decorative body 3940A may be attached to the front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933. and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be attached, which reduces the possibility that the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B become defective products, and suppresses an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. .

In addition, the gap between the front plate part 3932a of the front support lens 3932 and the base plate part 3933a of the rear support lens 3933, between which the flat plate parts 3945 of the back upper left decoration body 3940A and the back upper right decoration body 3940B are located, is replaced by a flat plate. Since the thickness is larger than that of the portion 3945, even if the flat portion 3945 is distorted in a wavy manner during molding of the three-dimensional portion 3946, the flat portion 3945 can be positioned between the front plate portion 3932a and the base plate portion 3933a. The front support lens 3932 and the rear support lens 3933 allow the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B to be attached without any problem.

Furthermore, since the flat plate portions 3945 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B are provided with a pattern that changes in the circumferential direction of the flat plate portions 3945, the flat plate portions 3945 are undulated by the molding of the three-dimensional portion 3946. Even when the ball is being hit, the undulations can be made difficult to notice by changing the pattern, and the decorative effect of the pattern can be easily exhibited.

Furthermore, when the plurality of second LEDs 3903b of the back upper front decorative board 3903 provided behind the rear support lens 3933 emit light, the light is diffused by the side lenses 3933c of the rear support lens 3933, and the light is diffused by the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back Since the rear surface of the three-dimensional portion 3946 of the upper right decorative body 3940B is illuminated, the three-dimensional portions 3946 of the upper left decorative body 3940A and the upper right decorative body 3940B can be illuminated brightly and uniformly, and the player It is possible to show the luminescent decorations of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B that can strongly attract the attention of It is possible to entertain the players, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the players' interest.

In addition, since the light from the second LED 3903b of the back upper front decorative board 3903 is diffused by the side lens 3933c of the rear support lens 3933, the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body are viewed from the front (player side). When looking at 3940B, the light source of the second LED 3903b that emits light in dots can be made difficult to see, and the patterns on the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be made to have uniform brightness. By performing the luminescent decoration, the decorative effect of the luminescent decoration of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be fully exhibited.

In addition, a part of the back upper decorative sheet 3935 is positioned in front of the flat plate portions 3945 of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, and a transparent part is provided in the pattern of the back upper decorative sheet 3935 to the rear. The pattern on the flat plate part 3945 of the back top left decoration body 3940A and the back top right decoration body 3940B is made transparent by providing a part of the pattern on the flat plate part 3945 of the back top left decoration body 3940A and the back top right decoration body 3940B. The front surface of the front decorative board 3903 is made visible, and the pattern of the back top decorative sheet 3935, the pattern of the back top left decorative body 3940A and the back top right decorative body 3940B (flat plate part 3945), and the pattern of the back top front decorative board 3903 can be seen. Since the front color (different color from the pattern etc. of the back upper decorative sheet 3935) appears to overlap as it moves away from the rear, the patterns of the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B. It is possible to show the player a depth of decoration that cannot be obtained by using only the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B. The decorative effect of the back upper right decorative body 3940B can be further enhanced, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the decorations by the back upper left decorative body 3940A and the back upper right decorative body 3940B, which increases the player's interest. It is possible to suppress the decrease in .

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the front and left decorations 2610 of the center accessory 2600 on the game board 5A, the center lower back decoration 2640 of the center lower back unit 2630, the back and rear decorations 3610 of the back production unit 3600, and the game board 5A. The front and left decorations 2620 of the center accessory 2600 on the board 5B, the back decoration 3050 on the game board 5C, the inside side decorations 3830A of the left side decoration unit 3821 and the right side decoration unit 3822 on the door unit 3810 of the slot machine 9, and Side exterior decoration body 3830B, rear decoration body 3880 of the rear production unit 3860 in the door unit 3810A, and rear decoration body 3880A of the rear production unit 3860 in the door unit 3810B (hereinafter, the front left decoration body 2610 is taken as a representative thereof, (It is also simply referred to as the front left decorative body 2610, etc., and the same name or similar structure is written as ~, etc.), the rear side of the decorative layer 2612 etc. provided on the rear side of the transparent base sheet 2611 etc. has a high brightness. Since the base layer 2613 etc. made of a color (white or gray) is provided, the design (design portion 2614 etc.) of the decorative layer 2612 etc. can be brightened by the base layer 2613 etc., and the color development of the design can be improved. You can make the pattern look beautiful. At this time, since at least a part of the decorative layer 2612 etc. is bulged out to form the three-dimensional part 2616, etc., the pattern of the decorative layer 2612 etc. is made three-dimensional by the three-dimensional part 2616 etc., and the front left decorative body 2610 The decorative effect can be further enhanced. In addition, since the front surface of the front left decorative board 2602 etc. provided behind the front left decorative body 2610 etc. is colored with high brightness (white), the pattern of the decorative layer 2612 etc. can be passed through the front left decorative board 2602 etc. It is possible to suppress the front side of the image from being reflected, and the patterns of the decorative layer 2612 and the like can be shown in good condition. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the decorative effect of the patterns of the decorative layer 2612, etc. in the table left decorative body 2610, etc., so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted by seeing the beautiful pattern, and the player's interest in the display is enhanced. It is possible to enjoy the decorations such as the left decorative body 2610, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9 can be improved by the front left decorative body 2610 etc., which have a high decorative effect, and the pachinko machine has high appeal to players. Machine 1 (slot machine 9) can be provided.

Furthermore, when a plurality of LEDs 2602a etc. mounted on the front left decorative board 2602 etc. behind the front left decorative body 2610 etc. are made to emit light, a base layer 2613 etc. of a bright color is provided on the rear surface of the decorative layer 2612 etc. Therefore, the base layer 2613 etc. can diffuse the light from the LED 2602a etc. and prevent the point-like light sources such as the LED 2602a from being seen from the player side. A pattern on the body 2610 or the like can be decorated with light emitting light using the decorative layer 2612 or the like. At this time, since the decorative layer 2612 etc. has a transparent pattern part 2614c etc. which has a higher light transmittance than other parts, the LED 2602a etc. of the front left decorative board 2602 etc. provided at the rear can be used. When the light is emitted, parts such as the transparent pattern part 2614c of the pattern of the decorative layer 2612 etc. become brighter than other parts, so that the player can see a luminous effect in which the pattern shines brilliantly, and the game The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the patterns of the front left decorative body 2610, etc., and the player can also enjoy the patterns, and a decline in player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the front left decorative body 2610 etc., the base layer 2613 etc. are made of a high brightness color, and the front surface of the table left decorative board 2602 etc. is also made of a high brightness color, so that the front left decorative body 2610 etc. ( A part of the light irradiated to the base layer 2613 etc. is reflected toward the front left decorative substrate 2602 etc. side by the base layer 2613 etc., and the light reflected from the base layer 2613 is reflected on the base layer 2613 etc. on the front side of the front left decorative substrate 2602 etc. It will be reflected to the 2613 mag side. Therefore, a part of the light from the LED 2602a etc. is repeatedly reflected between the base layer 2613 etc. and the front left decorative substrate 2602 etc., so that a part of the light from the LED 2602a etc. becomes brighter overall, making it relatively difficult to see point light sources such as the LED 2602a, and at the same time, it is possible to make the patterns of the front left decorative body 2610, etc. brighter and more luminous, which increases player interest. It is possible to display light-emitting decorations such as the front-left decorative body 2610 that can attract people, and it is also possible to let players enjoy the light-emitting decorations such as the front-left decorative body 2610, thereby suppressing a decrease in player interest. can be done.

In addition, in the table left decorative body 2610 etc., a base layer 2613 etc. of a bright color is provided on the rear surface of the decorative layer 2612 etc., so as the base layer 2613 etc., the pattern of the decorative layer 2612 etc. By painting different parts with different colors with the same brightness and different light transmittance, when the LEDs 2602a etc. of the front left decorative board 2602 etc. provided at the rear are emitted, the patterns of the decorative layer 2612 etc. The brightness of the luminescent decoration can be varied depending on the area. As a result, when the front left decorative body 2610 is decorated with light, it is possible to add sharpness to the pattern, which can strongly attract the attention of the player, and improve the decorative effect of the front left decorative body 2610. can be increased.

Furthermore, a three-dimensional portion 2616, etc. is provided on the front left decorative body 2610, etc., and when the three-dimensional portion 2616, etc. is bulged forward, the rear surface of the three-dimensional portion 2616, etc. and the LED 2602a, etc. of the front left decorative board 2602, etc. As the distance from the player increases, the area illuminated by the LED 2602a, etc. in the three-dimensional section 2616, etc. becomes wider, and the light from the LED 2602a, etc. spreads, making it difficult to see the point light source from the front (player side). Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 (slot machine 9) that can uniformly decorate the front and left decorative bodies 2610 and the like with light, thereby reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, in the front left decorative body 2610 etc., since the transparent pattern portion 2614c etc. are provided in the decorative layer 2612 etc., when the color of the light from the LED 2602a etc. of the front left decorative board 2602 etc. is changed, Since the color of the light emitted from the transparent pattern part 2614c etc. to the player side also changes, the atmosphere of the pattern decorated with light emission can be greatly changed by changing the luminescent color of the transparent pattern part 2614c etc. This allows the player to be surprised by fully demonstrating the effect of the light-emitting display using the front left decorative body 2610, etc., and also allows the player to see a variety of light-emitting effects, thereby keeping the player from getting bored. By making it difficult to play, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the front left decorative body 2610 and the like, since the transparent pattern portion 2614c and the like are provided on the decorative layer 2612 and the like, if the base layer 2613 and the like are not provided on the rear surface of the transparent pattern portion 2614c, etc., Since the base layer 2613 etc. is not provided in the transparent pattern part 2614c etc., when the LED 2602a etc. of the rear front left decorative board 2602 etc. are not emitting light, the transparent pattern part 2614c etc. in the decorative layer 2612 etc. The color development of the parts becomes low, and parts such as the transparent pattern part 2614c appear dark. On the other hand, when the LEDs 2602a and the like of the rear front left decorative board 2602 and the like are emitted, parts such as the transparent pattern part 2614c in the decoration layer 2612 etc. are decorated with light emitting brighter than other parts. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of light emission (on/off) of the LED 2602a, etc. on the front left decorative board 2602, the appearance of the pattern on the decorative layer 2612, etc. (pattern section 2614, etc.) can be greatly changed. The light-emitting decoration such as the body 2610 can surprise the player, make the player think that something good is going to happen, and increase expectations for the game, as well as make the player have fun. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest in playing the game.

In addition, in the front left decorative body 2610 etc., since the front left decorative board 2602 etc. is provided with a character identification part 7a of a high brightness color (yellow), the front left decorative body 2610 etc. Even if the transparency of the decorative body 2610 etc. is high, the character identification portion 7a of the front left decorative board 2602 etc. can be made less noticeable from the front (player side), improving the appearance of the front left decorative body 2610 etc. be able to.

In addition, in the front left decorative body 2610 etc., the character identification part 7a is provided on the front left decorative board 2602 etc. in a color different from the color of the front surface, so it is possible to assemble the front left decorative board 2602 etc. When assembling the slot machine 9), the operator can determine whether or not it is a desired decorative board by simply looking at the character identification portion 7a provided on the front left decorative board 2602, etc. Not only can you easily search for the desired front left decorative board 2602, etc., but also the character identification section 7a makes it easier to notice if the front left decorative board 2602, etc. to be installed is incorrect, reducing assembly errors and reducing the effort required for assembly work. can be facilitated.

Furthermore, in the front left decorative body 2610 and the like, functional parts (e.g., connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear surface of the front left decorative board 2602, so the functions can be viewed from the front (player side). The parts are not visible, and it is possible to avoid poor appearance due to functional parts being visible through the front left decorative body 2610, thereby improving the appearance of the front left decorative body 2610 (pachinko machine 1 or slot machine 9). be able to.

In addition, in the table left decorative body 2610 etc., functional parts (for example, connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) are provided on the rear side of the table left decorative board 2602 etc. Since these functional parts are not visible from the side), there is no need to color them in bright colors (white or yellow) to make them inconspicuous compared to when they are placed on the front. Functional parts can be used, the effort of coloring the functional parts can be omitted, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 (slot machine 9) can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the front left decorative body 2610 and the like include a three-dimensional three-dimensional part 2616, etc., which is a bulged part of the thin base sheet 2611, etc., and a three-dimensional three-dimensional part 2616, etc. extending from the periphery of the three-dimensional part 2616, etc. A decorative layer 2612 (picture part 2614, etc.), it is possible to make the main pattern part 2614a, etc. stand out with the sub-picture part 2614b, etc., and the main pattern part 2614a, etc. becomes three-dimensional with the three-dimensional part 2616, etc., so that it can be used as front left decoration. The body 2610 etc. can be made more conspicuous, and the decorative effect of the front left decorative body 2610 etc. can be further exhibited. Therefore, the front left decorative body 2610 etc. with a high decorative effect can be used to strongly attract the attention of players. ), and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 etc. that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the base layer 2613 etc. is provided on the side opposite to the pattern side of the decorative layer 2612 etc., the color development of the design of the decorative layer 2612 etc. can be improved by the base layer 2613 etc. The decorative effect of the decorative body 2610 and the like can be further enhanced. Further, depending on the color of the base layer 2613 (for example, white), the entire front and left decorations 2610 and the like can be brightly decorated with light emitted by light irradiated from the back side of the front and left decorations 2610 and the like. Furthermore, by providing the base layer 2613 etc. partially, the base layer 2613 etc. is provided in the part where the base layer 2613 etc. is not provided by the light irradiated from the back side of the front left decorative body 2610 etc. Since the light-emitting decoration can be made brighter than the illuminated portion, the appearance of the front left decorative body 2610 etc. can be greatly changed between when the light-emitting decoration is not applied and when the light-emitting decoration is applied. As a result, the light-emitting decorations such as the front-left decorative body 2610 can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the attention of the players, and the light-emitting decorations such as the front-left decorative body 2610 can make a strong impact on the player. It is possible to keep players entertained, and to suppress a decline in player interest.

In addition, since the base sheet 2611 etc. are transparent, when light is irradiated from behind to the front left decorative body 2610 etc., the light will not be attenuated in the base sheet 2611 etc., and the pattern created by the decorative layer 2612 etc. can be decorated with bright light, and the decorative effect of the front left decorative body 2610 and the like can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the base sheet 2611 and the like are made transparent, and the decorative layer 2612 and the like are provided on the back side of the base sheet 2611 and the like (three-dimensional portion 2616 and the like), so that the decorative layer 2612 and the like are passed through the transparent base sheet 2611 and the like. The pattern side is visible. As a result, the decorative layer 2612 etc. (picture portion 2614 etc.) are protected by the transparent base sheet 2611 etc., so even if a player or other members come into contact with the front left decorative body 2610 etc. The decorative layer 2612 and the like will not peel off, and the decorative effect of the decorative layer 2612 and the like can be reliably exhibited, and the durability of the front left decorative body 2610 and the like can be increased.

Furthermore, since the base sheet 2611 and the like are made of thermoplastic resin, their shape can be easily changed by heating. Since the three-dimensional portion 2616 and the like are formed by pressure molding or vacuum molding, the cost for molding the three-dimensional portion 2616 and the like (front left decorative body 2610, etc.) can be reduced compared to injection molding. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and the like.

In addition, since the front left decorative body 2610 etc. are formed from the thin base sheet 2611 etc., the amount of material required for the front left decorative body 2610 etc. can be reduced, and the amount of material required for the front left decorative body 2610 etc. can be reduced. Cost increases can be suppressed.

In addition, in the table left decorative body 2610 etc., the decoration layer 2612 etc. is configured by the main pattern part 2614a etc. which is centered by the three-dimensional part 2616 etc. and the sub-pattern part 2614b etc. which is the outside thereof. The decoration (main pattern part 2614a, etc.) and the background decoration (sub pattern part 2614b, etc.) can be realized with one front left decoration body 2610, etc., reducing the cost for decoration of the pachinko machine 1 etc. be able to.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the front and left decorations 2610 of the center accessory 2600 on the game board 5A (the center lower back decoration 2640 of the center lower back unit 2630, the back and rear decorations 3610 of the back production unit 3600) , the main pattern part 2614a (main pattern part 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a), and a predetermined pattern is applied to the outside of the main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a). 3614a), the sub-picture section 2614b (sub-picture section 2644b, sub-picture section 3614b) has a sub-picture section 2614b (sub-picture section 2644b, sub-picture section 3614b) that is different from the main symbol section 2614a. (Main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a) can be made to stand out by making the pattern stand out. The pattern of the sub-picture portion 3614b) can improve the appearance of the three-dimensional portion 2616 (three-dimensional portion 2646, three-dimensional portion 3616), which can strongly attract the attention of players, and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. At this time, a main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a) consisting of a predetermined pattern is provided inside the periphery of the solid portion 2616 (solid portion 2646, solid portion 3616). In other words, since the main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a) consisting of a predetermined pattern is provided inside the periphery of the three-dimensional portion 2616 (the three-dimensional portion 2646, three-dimensional portion 3616), the predetermined pattern can be does not appear to protrude from the solid portion 2616 (solid portion 2646, solid portion 3616) toward the flat plate portion 2615 (flat plate portion 2645, flat plate portion 3615), and the main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a) Because the peripheral edge of the pattern does not face forward due to the flat plate portion 2615 (flat plate portion 2645, flat plate portion 3615), the pattern in the main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a) will not look unnatural. It can be shown to players without any discomfort. On the other hand, since the main pattern part 2614a (main pattern part 2644a, main pattern part 3614a) is provided inside the periphery of the three-dimensional part 2616 (three-dimensional part 2646, three-dimensional part 3616), the main pattern part 2614a (main pattern part 3614a) A part of the sub-picture section 2614b (sub-picture section 2644b, sub-picture section 3614b) provided outside the section 2644a, main picture section 3614a) is located on the side of the solid section 2616 (solid section 2646, solid section 3616). However, as described above, since the main pattern part 2614a (main pattern part 2644a, main pattern part 3614a) stands out, the sub pattern part 2614b (sub pattern part 2644b, sub pattern part 3614b) is not noticeable, so even if a part of the sub-picture section 2614b (sub-picture section 2644b, sub-picture section 3614b) rests on the solid section 2616 (solid section 2646, solid section 3616) side, the overall appearance of the decorative member is poor. It won't happen. Therefore, the decoration by the main pattern part 2614a (main pattern part 2644a, main pattern part 3614a), sub pattern part 2614b (sub pattern part 2644b, sub pattern part 3614b), and solid part 2616 (solid part 2646, solid part 3616) is Since it can be displayed without any discomfort to the player, the decorative effect of the front left decorative body 2610 (the center lower back decorative body 2640, the back rear decorative body 3610) can be reliably exhibited, and the player's interest is increased. It is possible to strongly attract the player, and also allows the player to enjoy the decoration by the front and left decorations 2610 (the center lower back decoration 2640 and the back and rear decorations 3610), thereby suppressing the player's loss of interest. be able to.

In addition, in the front left decorative body 2620 of the center lower accessory 2600 on the game board 5B, a predetermined picture is attached to a three-dimensional part 2626 that bulges out from the flange-like flat plate part 2625 and is formed three-dimensionally by the main picture part 2624a. In addition, since the main pattern part 2624a has a sub-picture part 2624b with a different pattern from the main pattern part 2624a on the outside of the main pattern part 2624a, the sub-pattern part 2624b makes the pattern of the main pattern part 2624a stand out. Therefore, the appearance of the three-dimensional part 2626 can be improved by the patterns of the main pattern part 2624a and the sub-picture part 2624b, which can strongly attract the attention of players, and also improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. At this time, a main pattern portion 2624a consisting of a predetermined pattern is provided inside the periphery of the three-dimensional portion 2626. In other words, since the main pattern portion 2624a consisting of a predetermined pattern is provided inside the periphery of the three-dimensional portion 2626, the predetermined pattern does not protrude from the three-dimensional portion 2626 toward the flat plate portion 2625, and the main pattern portion Since the peripheral edge of the main pattern part 2624a (picture) does not face forward due to the flat plate part 2625, the pattern in the main pattern part 2624a does not look unnatural and can be presented to the player without any discomfort. On the other hand, since the main picture part 2624a is provided inside the periphery of the solid part 2626, a part of the sub-picture part 2624b provided outside the main picture part 2624a is located on the solid part 2626 side. However, as mentioned above, since the main pattern part 2624a is conspicuous, the sub-picture part 2624b is relatively inconspicuous, so even if a part of the sub-picture part 2624b covers the three-dimensional part 2626 side, The appearance of the front left decoration body 2620 as a whole does not deteriorate. Therefore, it is possible to make the decorations by the main pattern part 2624a, the sub-picture part 2624b, and the three-dimensional part 2626 look natural to the player, so that the decorative effect of the front left decoration body 2620 can be reliably exhibited. , it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, and it is also possible to allow the player to enjoy the decoration by the front left decorative body 2620, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Furthermore, the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A) of the rear production unit 3860 in the door unit 3810A (door unit 3810B) of the slot machine 9 is formed three-dimensionally by bulging out from the flange-like flat plate part 3885. The three-dimensional portion 3886 has a predetermined pattern applied to it by the main pattern portion 3884a, and has a sub pattern portion 3884b with a pattern different from the main pattern portion 3884a on the outside of the main pattern portion 3884a. Since the pattern part 3884b can make the pattern in the main pattern part 3884a stand out, the pattern in the main pattern part 3884a and the sub pattern part 3884b can improve the appearance of the three-dimensional part 3886, which attracts the player's attention. It is possible to provide a slot machine 9 that strongly attracts players, improves the appearance of the slot machine 9, and has high appeal to players. At this time, a main pattern portion 3884a consisting of a predetermined pattern is provided inside the periphery of the three-dimensional portion 3886. In other words, since the main pattern section 3884a consisting of a predetermined pattern is provided inside the periphery of the three-dimensional section 3886, the predetermined pattern does not protrude from the three-dimensional section 3886 toward the flat plate section 3885, and the main pattern section Since the peripheral edge of 3884a (picture) does not face forward due to the flat plate portion 3885, the pattern of main pattern portion 3884a does not look unnatural and can be presented to the player without any discomfort. On the other hand, since the main picture part 3884a is provided inside the periphery of the three-dimensional part 3886, a part of the sub-picture part 3884b provided outside the main picture part 3884a is located on the three-dimensional part 3886 side. However, as mentioned above, since the main pattern part 3884a is conspicuous, the sub-picture part 3884b is relatively inconspicuous. The overall appearance of the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A) does not deteriorate. Therefore, it is possible to display the decorations by the main pattern part 3884a, the sub-picture part 3884b, and the three-dimensional part 3886 without any sense of discomfort to the player, so that the decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A) can be reliably displayed. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and also allows the player to enjoy the decoration by the rear decoration body 3880 (rear decoration body 3880A), thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest. can be done.

In addition, a flange-shaped flat plate part 2615 (flat plate part 2625, Since the flat plate part 2645, flat plate part 3615, flat plate part 3885) are provided, the front left decorative body 2610 (front left When the decoration body 2620, the center lower back decoration body 2640, the back decoration body 3610, the rear decoration body 3880, and the rear decoration body 3880A) are attached to the desired members, the three-dimensional parts 2616 (three-dimensional parts 2626, three-dimensional parts 2646, three-dimensional parts Since there is no need to provide a cylindrical mounting boss on the back side of the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620, center lower back decorative body 2640, back rear decorative body 3610, rear decoration When light is irradiated from the rear to the body 3880, rear decoration body 3880A), the shadow of the mounting boss will not be reflected on the back side of the solid portion 2616 (solid portion 2626, solid portion 2646, solid portion 3616, solid portion 3886). Instead, the three-dimensional parts 2616 (three-dimensional parts 2626, three-dimensional parts 2646, The three-dimensional portion 3616, three-dimensional portion 3886) can be illuminated and decorated in good condition, and the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620, center lower back decorative body 2640, back rear decorative body 3610, rear decorative body 3880, It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine 9 that further enhances the decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3880A) and reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, the main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2624a, main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a, main pattern portion 3884a) is replaced by the three-dimensional portion 2616 (three-dimensional portion 2626, three-dimensional portion 2646, three-dimensional portion 3616, three-dimensional portion 3886). Since it is provided in an area inside the periphery, the main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2624a, main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a, main pattern portion 3884a) is applied and the thin sheet material is heated by compressed air. The three-dimensional parts 2616 (three-dimensional part 2626, three-dimensional part 2646, three-dimensional part 3616, three-dimensional part 3886) are formed by molding or vacuum forming to form the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620, center lower back decorative body 2640, back rear). After forming the decoration body 3610, rear decoration body 3880, rear decoration body 3880A), the molding conditions (for example, heating temperature, molding temperature, Due to differences in the positioning accuracy of the sheet material, humidity, molding time, etc.), the three-dimensional portion 2616 (three-dimensional portion 2626, three-dimensional portion 2646, three-dimensional portion 3616, three-dimensional portion 3886) and the main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2624a, Even if the position is misaligned with the main picture part 2644a, main picture part 3614a, main picture part 3884a), the misalignment is 3884a) to the periphery of the solid portion 2616 (solid portion 2626, solid portion 2646, solid portion 3616, solid portion 3886), the main pattern portion 2614a (main pattern portion 2624a, main pattern portion 2644a, main pattern portion 3614a, main pattern portion 3884a) are partially located outside the solid portion 2616 (solid portion 2626, solid portion 2646, solid portion 3616, solid portion 3886). 2645, flat plate portion 3615, flat plate portion 3885) side. Therefore, it is not necessary to precisely manufacture the front and left decorations 2610 (front and left decorations 2620, center lower back decoration 2640, back and rear decorations 3610, rear decorations 3880, and rear decorations 3880A), but to roughly manufacture them. Therefore, the cost for manufacturing the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620, center lower back decorative body 2640, back rear decorative body 3610, rear decorative body 3880, rear decorative body 3880A) is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9 that have the above-mentioned functions and effects at low cost.

In addition, since the three-dimensional parts 2616 (three-dimensional parts 2626, three-dimensional parts 2646, three-dimensional parts 3616, three-dimensional parts 3886) are formed by pressure molding, vacuum forming, etc., the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620, center lower The cost of the back decoration 2640, the back decoration 3610, the rear decoration 3880, and the rear decoration 3880A) can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9 can be suppressed.

In addition, a flange-shaped flat plate part 2615 (flat plate part 2625, A flat plate part 2645, a flat plate part 3615, a flat plate part 3885) are provided, and a front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620, center lower back decorative body 2640, back rear decorative body 3610, rear decorative body 3880, rear decorative body 3880A) are attached to the desired members, so the three-dimensional parts 2616 (three-dimensional parts 2626, three-dimensional parts 2646, three-dimensional parts 3616 , three-dimensional part 3886), there is no need to separately provide a cylindrical mounting boss on the back side of the front left decorative body 2610 (front left decorative body 2620, center lower back decorative body 2640, back rear decorative body 3610, rear decorative body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A) can be reduced and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the game board 5C, the predetermined decoration (picture) and the three-dimensional part 3056 of the back decoration 3050 can be seen through the transparent game panel 1110, and at the same time, the back decoration can be seen on the front side of the game panel 1110. In front of 3050, the decoration of front decoration 2050 corresponding to the decoration of back decoration 3050 can be seen. At this time, in the transparent game panel 1110, the light and scenery inside the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are reflected in the front, so that the back decoration 3050 is reflected in a thin haze through the transparent game panel 1110. This will give an illusion that the back decoration 3050 is located further away than the actual distance. Since it is possible to further impart a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect), the decorative effect of the back decoration 3050 and the front decoration 2050 can be further enhanced, which strongly attracts the attention of the players and suppresses a decrease in interest. In addition, it is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Moreover, the back decoration body 3050 and the front decoration body 2050 are made to have translucency, and when light is irradiated forward from the LED 3061a of the back decoration board 3061 behind the back decoration body 3050, the back decoration body 3050 and The surface decoration body 2050 can be decorated with light emission. Further, a through hole 1111 penetrating back and forth is provided in the game panel 1110 behind the front decoration body 2050, and an opening 3058 that coincides with the through hole 1111 is provided in the back decoration body 3050. As a result, the light irradiated from the back to the front of the back decoration 3050 passes through the opening 3058 and the through hole 1111 and is directly irradiated to the front decoration 2050. can be decorated with light emitting light with similar brightness. For this reason, the luminescent decoration of the back decoration body 3050 and the front decoration body 2050 can improve the appearance of the decoration by the back decoration body 3050 and the front decoration body 2050, and improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players, and also to strongly attract the attention of players, allowing players to enjoy the decorations made of the back decoration body 3050 and the front decoration body 2050. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the front decoration 2050 of the back decoration 3050 is attached to the support member 3060 at a portion (attachment portion 3057) that is difficult to see from the front, making the attachment portion 3057 (attachment screw 3062) difficult to see from the front. Therefore, since the mounting portion 3057 can be seen from the front, it is possible to avoid deteriorating the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a, improve the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a, and also make the back decoration 3050 The decorative effect of the decoration by the front decoration body 2050 can be further enhanced, and the appearance of the Pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed and a Pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, since the front decoration body 2050 is attached so as to hide the through hole 1111 that passes through the front and back of the game panel 1110 from the front, and the back decoration body 3050 is provided with an opening 3058 that matches the through hole 1111. , Since the through hole 1111 of the game panel 1110 and the opening 3058 of the back decoration 3050 can be hidden by the front decoration 2050, the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a is deteriorated because the through hole 1111 and the opening 3058 are visible. It is possible to avoid this, improve the appearance of the inside of the game area 5a, and further enhance the decorative effect of the decoration by the back decoration 3050 and the front decoration 2050, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. At best, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Further, as described above, since the back decoration body 3050 is provided with an opening that matches the through hole 1111 of the game panel 1110, and the game ball B passes through the through hole 1111 of the game panel 1110, the through hole 1111 Since the game ball B that has passed through can be discharged to the rear of the back decoration body 3050 through the opening 3058, the game ball B that has passed through the through hole 1111 is discharged through the space between the game panel 1110 and the back decoration body 3050. There's no need. Therefore, the front surface of the back decoration body 3050 can be brought as close as possible to the rear surface (front decoration body 2050) of the game panel 1110, thereby enhancing the sense of unity of decoration between the back decoration body 3050 and the front decoration body 2050. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that fully exhibits the decorative effects of the decorations of the back decoration body 3050 and the front decoration body 2050 and reliably achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the back effect unit 3600 of the game board 5A, a translucent material is provided on the front side of the back decoration body 3610, which has a three-dimensional portion 3616 that bulges forward and is decorated with a predetermined pattern. Since the pattern display device 3630 is provided with a pattern display section 3631 having a three-dimensional relief-like decoration, the back decorative body 3610 is decorated with the relief-like decoration of the pattern display device 3630. The three-dimensional portion 3616 and the symbol display device 3630 allow the player to see a deep decoration. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a three-dimensional decoration that cannot be obtained only with the pattern of the back decoration 3610, and it is possible to reduce the appearance of the pattern of the back decoration 3610 to be cheap. The decorative effect can be further enhanced, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the decoration by the rear decoration body 3610 and the symbol display device 3630, and a decline in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the back effect unit 3700 of the game board 5B, a decorative frame 3732 with metallic luster and a transparent frame 3732 are placed on the front side of the back decoration body 3710, which has a three-dimensional portion 3716 that bulges out to the rear and has a predetermined pattern. Since the symbol display device 3730 is provided with a symbol display lens 3733 (pattern display portion 3731) having a characteristic and has a three-dimensional relief-like decoration, the decorative frame 3732 of the symbol display device 3730 and The back decoration body 3710 can be decorated with relief-like decoration, and the three-dimensional part 3716 and the symbol display device 3730 can show the player a deep decoration. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a three-dimensional decoration that cannot be obtained with the pattern of the rear decoration body 3710 alone, and the pattern of the rear decoration body 3710 can be prevented from looking cheap. The decorative effect can be further enhanced, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the decoration by the rear decoration body 3710 and the symbol display device 3730, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the game board 5C, a transparent front decoration 2050 is provided on the front side of a back decoration 3050 that has a three-dimensional portion 3056 that bulges forward and is decorated with a predetermined pattern. The back decoration 3050 can be decorated by the decoration of the front decoration 2050, and the three-dimensional part 3056 and the front decoration 2050 can show the player a deep decoration. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a three-dimensional decoration that cannot be obtained only with the pattern of the back decoration 3050, and it is possible to reduce the cheap appearance of the pattern of the back decoration 3050, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the back decoration 3050. In addition, the back decoration 3050 and the front decoration 2050 can strongly attract the attention of the players, and can prevent the players from losing interest.

Further, in the door unit 3810A and the rear effect unit 3860 of the door unit 3810B, the front side of the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A, which have a three-dimensional portion 3886 that bulges forward and is decorated with a predetermined pattern, has a metallic luster. Since the decorative lens 3865 and the side decorative lens 3875 are provided, which have a decorative part 3865b having a transparent lens part 3865b and a lens part 3865a having a translucent property and are decorated in a three-dimensional relief shape, the decorative lens 3865 is The decorative portion 3865b and the relief-like decoration can decorate the rear decorative body 3880 and the rear decorative body 3880A, and the three-dimensional portion 3886 and the decorative lens 3865 can show the deep decoration to the player. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a three-dimensional decoration that cannot be obtained with only the patterns of the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A, and it is possible to reduce the appearance of cheapness of the patterns of the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A. In this way, the decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3880 or the rear decoration body 3880A can be further enhanced, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted by the decoration by the rear decoration body 3880 or the rear decoration body 3880A and the decorative lens 3865. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest.

In addition, in the back production unit 3600 of the game board 5A, a symbol display device 3630 having a translucent symbol display section 3631 and decorated with a three-dimensional relief shape is placed behind the back surface on which a predetermined pattern is applied. Since it is provided so as to cover the front of the opening 3619 penetrating through the decoration body 3610, the outer periphery of the three-dimensional pattern display device 3630 can be decorated with the pattern of the three-dimensional part 3616 of the back decoration body 3610. The rear decorative body 3610 can improve the appearance of the symbol display device 3630, and can further enhance the decorative effect of the symbol display device 3630, strongly attracting the player's interest and suppressing a decline in interest. be able to.

In addition, in the back production unit 3700 of the game board 5B, a pattern display device 3730 having a decorative frame 3732 with metallic luster and decorated with a three-dimensional relief shape is connected to a back decoration unit 3700 having a predetermined pattern. 3710 so as to cover the front of the opening 3719 penetrating the three-dimensional part 3716, the outer periphery of the three-dimensional pattern display device 3730 can be decorated with the pattern of the three-dimensional part 3716 of the back decoration body 3710. The rear decorative body 3710 can improve the appearance of the symbol display device 3730, and can further enhance the decorative effect of the symbol display device 3730, thereby strongly attracting the player's interest and preventing a decrease in interest. It can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the game board 5C, the front decoration 2050 having metallic luster and translucency is arranged to cover the front of the opening 3058 penetrating the three-dimensional part 3056 of the back decoration 3050 with a predetermined pattern. Therefore, the outer periphery of the three-dimensional front decoration body 2050 can be decorated with the pattern of the three-dimensional part 3056 of the back decoration body 3050, and the appearance of the front decoration body 2050 can be improved by the back decoration body 3050. , the decorative effect of the front decoration body 2050 can be further enhanced, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the rear effect unit 3860 of the door unit 3810A and the door unit 3810B, a decorative lens 3865 having a decorative portion 3865b with metallic luster and decorated with a three-dimensional relief shape is attached after a predetermined pattern is applied. Since it is provided so as to cover the front side of the opening 3888 that penetrates the three-dimensional part 3886 of the decorative body 3880 and the rear decorative body 3880A, the outer periphery of the three-dimensional decorative lens 3865 is covered with the outer circumference of the three-dimensional decorative lens 3865. It can be decorated with the pattern of the three-dimensional part 3886, and the appearance of the decorative lens 3865 can be improved by the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A, and the decorative effect of the decorative lens 3865 can be further enhanced. It is possible to strongly attract the attention of people and prevent them from losing interest.

Furthermore, the opening 3619 of the back decoration body 3610 of the game board 5A, the opening 3719 of the back decoration body 3710 of the game board 5B, the opening 3058 of the back decoration body 3050 of the game board 5C, the door unit 3810A, and the door unit 3810B. The openings 3888 of the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A of the rear production unit 3860 are respectively connected to the pattern display device 3630, the lower back decoration body 3707 and the pattern display device 3730, the front decoration body 2050, the decorative lens 3865 and the side decoration lens. 3875 from the front, openings 3619, 3719, 3058, and 3888 are not visible from the player's side; By being visible, the back decoration 3610 and the pattern display device 3630, the back decoration 3710, the lower back decoration 3707 and the pattern display device 3730, the back decoration 3050 and the front decoration 2050, the back decoration 3880 and the back decoration 3880A, the decorative lens 3865, and the side decorative lens 3875 can be prevented from becoming unsightly. 3730, the back decoration body 3050, the front decoration body 2050, the back decoration body 3880, the rear decoration body 3880A, the decorative lens 3865, and the side decoration lens 3875, and the decorative effect can be reliably exhibited, and the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine The appearance of the machine 9 can be improved, and a pachinko machine 1 and a slot machine 9 that are highly appealing to players can be provided.

In addition, since the symbol display device 3730 and the decorative lens 3865 have a decorative frame 3732 and a decorative portion 3865b with metallic luster, the light inside the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9 are installed, By reflecting the light inside the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine 9, the light etc. inside the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine 9 is reflected, making it shine and can be used for decoration by the back decoration body 3710, the pattern display device 3730, the rear decoration body 3880, the rear decoration body 3880A, and the decorative lens 3865. To give a sense of luxury and to further enhance the decorative effect of the back decoration 3710, the pattern display device 3730, the back decoration 3880, the rear decoration 3880A, and the decorative lens 3865, and to strongly attract the attention of players. In addition, it is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9 that are highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the pattern display device 3630, the pattern display device 3730, and the decorative lens 3865 include the pattern display portion 3631, the pattern display portion 3731, the pattern display lens 3733, and the lens portion 3865a, the back decoration body 3610, the back When the rear decoration body 3710, the rear decoration body 3880, and the rear decoration body 3880A are irradiated with light from behind in order to be decorated with light, the light passes through the opening 3619, the opening 3719, and the opening 3888 to the pattern display device 3630 and the pattern. The display device 3730 and the decorative lens 3865 are illuminated, and the symbol display section 3631 of the symbol display device 3630, the symbol display section 3731 and symbol display lens 3733 of the symbol display device 3730, and the lens section 3865a of the decorative lens 3865 are illuminated. It can be decorated. Therefore, the back decoration body 3610 and the pattern display device 3630, the back decoration body 3710 and the pattern display device 3730, the back decoration body 3880, the rear decoration body 3880A, and the decorative lens 3865 can be illuminated and decorated by light from the rear. Therefore, the decorative effect of the back decoration body 3610 and the pattern display device 3630, the back decoration body 3710 and the pattern display device 3730, the back decoration body 3880, the back decoration body 3880A, and the decorative lens 3865 can be further enhanced, and the above-mentioned It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 and a slot machine 9 that can more easily produce their effects.

In addition, the pattern display device 3630, the pattern display device 3730, the decorative lens 3865, etc. are connected to the opening 3619 of the back decoration body 3610, the opening 3719 of the back decoration body 3710, the rear decoration body 3880, and the opening of the rear decoration body 3880A. 3888, to the rear unit base 3601, rear unit base 3701, and rear unit base 3861 provided at the rear of the rear decoration body 3610, rear decoration body 3710, rear decoration body 3880, and rear decoration body 3880A, respectively. Therefore, the opening 3619 and the opening are arranged so as to cover the opening 3619 of the back decoration body 3610, the opening 3719 of the back decoration body 3710, the opening 3888 of the back decoration body 3880 and the back decoration body 3880A from the front. The pattern display device 3630, the pattern display device 3730, the decorative lens 3865, etc. can be attached to the back unit base 3601, the back unit base 3701, and the rear unit base 3861 through the opening 3888 and the function and effect described above. It is possible to realize a pachinko machine 1 and a slot machine 9 that reliably play the game.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the center accessory 2600 of the game board 5A, the front left decorative body 2610 and the center lower back decorative body 2640 each have a picture part 2614 and a picture part 2644 on which a predetermined picture is applied. Since it has a solid part 2616 and a solid part 2646 that bulge out to the front, the pattern part 2614 and the pattern part 2644 and the solid part 2616 and the solid part 2646 form the front left decorative body 2610 and the center lower back decorative body. The appearance of the pachinko machine 2640 can be improved, and the decorative effect of the front left decorative body 2610 and the center lower back decorative body 2640 can be enhanced to strongly attract the attention of players. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a good appearance and is highly appealing to players. When the LEDs 2602a and 2633a mounted on the front left decorative board 2602 and the center lower back decorative board 2633 provided behind the front left decorative body 2610 and the center lower back decorative body 2640 emit light, the pattern portion 2614 and Because the three-dimensional portion 2616 and the three-dimensional portion 2646 are decorated with light emission together with the pattern portion 2644, the linear transparent pattern portion 2614c and the transparent pattern portion 2644c provided in the three-dimensional portion 2616, the three-dimensional portion 2646, etc. shine brightly. , it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the pattern shines brilliantly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the patterns of the front left decorative body 2610 and the center lower back decorative body 2640, and the player can also see the pattern. It is possible to keep players entertained, and to suppress a decline in player's interest.

In addition, in the center accessory 2600 of the game board 5B, the front left decorative body 2620 which has a picture part 2624 on which a predetermined picture is applied has a three-dimensional part 2626 that bulges forward. The pattern portion 2624 and the three-dimensional portion 2626 can improve the appearance of the front left decorative body 2620, enhance the decorative effect of the front left decorative body 2620, and strongly attract the player's attention. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with high appeal to players. Then, when the LED 2602a mounted on the front left decorative board 2602 provided behind the front left decorative body 2620 is made to emit light, the three-dimensional part 2626 as well as the pattern part 2624 are also decorated with light, and at the same time, the three-dimensional part 2626 etc. Since the provided linear transparent pattern portion 2644c shines brightly, the player can see a luminous effect in which the pattern shines brilliantly, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the pattern of the front left decorative body 2620. At the same time, it is possible to let the player enjoy the pictures, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the center lower back unit 2630 of the center lower accessory 2600 of the game board 5B, when the LED 2633a mounted on the center lower back decoration board 2633 provided at the rear of the center lower back decoration body 2640B is lit, a picture is displayed. At the same time that the portion 2644 is decorated with light, the transparent pattern portion 2644c shines brightly, so that the player can see a luminous effect in which the pattern shines brightly, and the player's attention is drawn to the pattern of the center lower back decoration body 2640B. It is possible to strongly attract the players, and it is also possible to let the players enjoy the pictures, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the players' interest.

In addition, in the back effect unit 3700 of the game board 5B, the back decoration body 3710 which has a pattern part 3714 on which a predetermined pattern is applied has a three-dimensional part 3716 that bulges backward, so that the pattern The part 3714 and the three-dimensional part 3716 can improve the appearance of the rear decoration body 3710, enhance the decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3710, and strongly attract the player's attention. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by decoration, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with high appeal to players. When the LED 3702a mounted on the rear decorative board 3702 provided at the rear of the rear decorative body 3710 emits light, the three-dimensional portion 3716 as well as the pattern portion 3714 are decorated with light, and at the same time, the three-dimensional portion 3716 and the like are decorated with light. Since the provided transparent transparent pattern part 3714c shines brightly, the player can see a luminous effect in which the pattern shines brilliantly, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the pattern of the rear decoration body 3710. At the same time, it is possible to let the player enjoy the pictures, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Further, in the door unit 3810 of the slot machine 9, the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B, each having a decorative layer 3832 with a predetermined pattern, have a three-dimensional portion 3836 that bulges toward the front. Therefore, the decoration layer 3832 and the three-dimensional portion 3836 can improve the appearance of the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B, and the decorative effect of the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B can be improved. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of players by increasing the appearance of the slot machine 9, and the appearance of the slot machine 9 can be improved by the three-dimensional decoration, thereby providing a slot machine 9 that is highly appealing to players. . When the LED 3826a mounted on the side decoration board 3826 provided behind the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B is made to emit light, the three-dimensional part 3836 is also decorated with light emission together with the decoration layer 3832. Since the linear decorative layer 3832 provided on the three-dimensional portion 3836 etc. shines brightly, the player can see a luminous effect in which the pattern shines brightly, and the player's attention is drawn to the side interior decoration 3830A and the side The pattern of the external decoration body 3830B can be strongly attracted to the player, and the player can enjoy the pattern, thereby preventing the player from losing interest.

In addition, in the rear effect unit 3860 of the door unit 3810A and the door unit 3810B of the slot machine 9, the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A each have a pattern portion 3884 on which a predetermined pattern is applied, and the rear decoration body 3880A has a bulge forward. Since the three-dimensional portion 3886 is provided, the appearance of the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A can be improved by the pattern portion 3884 and the three-dimensional portion 3886, and the decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A is improved. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of players by increasing the appearance of the slot machine 9, and the appearance of the slot machine 9 can be improved by the three-dimensional decoration, thereby providing a slot machine 9 that is highly appealing to players. . When the second LED 3862b of the rear upper decorative board 3862 and the second LED 3863b of the lower rear decorative board 3863 provided behind the rear decorative body 3880 and the rear decorative body 3880A are made to emit light, the three-dimensional part 3886 as well as the pattern part 3884 also emit light. At the same time as the light-emitting decoration is applied, the dot-shaped light-transmitting parts provided in the three-dimensional part 3886 etc. shine brightly, so the player can see the light-emitting effect in which the pattern shines brightly, and the player's attention is drawn to the post-decoration. The patterns on the body 3880 and the rear decorative body 3880A can be strongly attracted to the players, and the players can enjoy the patterns, thereby suppressing a decrease in the player's interest.

In addition, the center lower back decoration body 2640 of the game board 5A, the front left decoration body 2620, the center lower back decoration body 2640B of the game board 5B, the side inner decoration bodies of the left side decoration unit 3821 and right side decoration unit 3822 of the slot machine 9. 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B are provided with a transparent pattern part 2624c, a transparent pattern part 2644c, and a transparent part 3832a that can diffuse light, so that the LED 2602a of the rear front left decorative board 2602, the center lower back decoration By diffusing the light from the LED 2633a of the board 2633 and the LED 3826a of the side decorative board 3826 by the light diffusion part, the transparent pattern part 2624c, the transparent pattern part 2644c, and the transparent part 3832a can be made to shine, and the game can strongly attract people's attention.

In addition, since the light emitting means is an LED, and the light is emitted in a dotted manner, when the position of the player's eyes moves while the decorative body is decorated with light, the transparent part provided in a line in the pattern part will cause The light appears to be twinkling, allowing the player to see a light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) that can more strongly attract the player's attention, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing a drop in interest. can.

In addition, the LED 2602a of the front left decorative board 2602 of the center accessory 2600, the LED 2633a of the center lower back decorative board 2633, the LED 3826a of the side decorative board 3826, the second LED 3862b of the upper rear decorative board 3862, and the second LED of the lower rear decorative board 3863 Since the LED 3863b emits light in a dotted manner, the front left decoration body 2610, the center lower back decoration body 2640, the front left decoration body 2620, the center lower back decoration body 2640B, the side inner decoration body 3830A, the side outer decoration body 3830B, and the rear decoration. When the position of the player's eyes moves while the body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A are decorated with light, the pattern portion 2614, the pattern portion 2644, the pattern portion 2624, the pattern portion 2644, the decorative layer 3832, the pattern portion 3884 , light appears to twinkle due to the transparent parts of the transparent pattern part 2614c, the transparent pattern part 2644c, the transparent pattern part 2624c, the transparent part 3832a, and the transparent part of the pattern part 3884, which are provided in a linear or dotted manner. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration (light-emitting effect) that can more strongly attract the player's interest, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a drop in interest.

Furthermore, in the center lower rear unit 2630 and the door unit 3810, the transparent pattern part 2644c and the transparent part 3832a are formed in a linear shape with a predetermined width, so that the LED 2633a of the rear center lower rear decorative board 2633 and the side When the LED 3826a of the decorative board 3826 is made to emit light, the transparent pattern portion 2644c and the transparent portion 3832a shine brightly in a linear manner in the pattern portion 2644 and the decorative layer 3832 that are decorated with light, and the pattern portion 2644 and the decoration layer 3832 shine brightly. Since the transparent pattern part 2644c and the transparent part 3832a can be made conspicuous in the layer 3832, depending on whether or not the LED 2633a and the LED 3826a emit light, the center lower back decoration 2640, the center lower back decoration 2640B, the side inner decoration 3830A, and the side The appearance of the outer decoration body 3830B can be greatly different, and the player can enjoy the light emitting effect by the center lower back decoration body 2640, the center lower back decoration body 2640B, the side inner decoration body 3830A, and the side outer decoration body 3830B. In addition to this, by making the center lower back decoration body 2640, the center lower back decoration body 2640B, the side inner decoration body 3830A, and the side outer decoration body 3830B light-emitting decoration, there is something good for the player. This can increase expectations for the game and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the door unit 3810A, since the transparent portions of the rear decoration body 3880 and the pattern portion 3884 of the rear decoration body 3880A are formed in a plurality of dots, the second LED 3862b of the rear upper decorative board 3862 and the rear When the second LED 3863b of the lower decorative board 3863 is made to emit light, the transparent part in the pattern part 3884 decorated with light will shine brightly in a dotted manner, making the transparent part in the pattern part 3884 noticeable. Depending on whether or not the LED 3862b and the second LED 3863b emit light, the appearance of the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A can be greatly different, and the player can enjoy the light emission effect by the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A. In addition, by decorating the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A with light emitting decoration, it is possible to make the player think that something good is going to happen, heighten the expectation for the game, and increase the interest. The decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, the front and left decorative substrates 2602 of the center accessory 2600, the center lower back decorative substrate 2633, the back and rear decorative substrates 3702 of the back direction unit 3700, the side decorative substrates 3826 of the left side decorative units 3821 and the right side decorative units 3822, and the rear Since the front surfaces of the boards such as the rear upper decorative board 3862 and the rear lower decorative board 3863 of the production unit 3860 are white, the front center lower back decoration from the LED 2602a, LED 2633a, LED 3702a, LED 3826a, second LED 3862b, second LED 3863b, etc. Decorative bodies such as the body 2640, the front left decorative body 2620, the center lower back decorative body 2640B, the back and rear decorative bodies 3710, the inner side decorative bodies 3830A and the outer side decorative bodies 3830B, the rear decorative bodies 3880 and the rear decorative bodies 3880A are irradiated. Of the light reflected backward by the decorative body, the light reflected backward by the decorative body can be reflected forward by the white front surface of the board. The rear decoration body 3710, the side inner decoration body 3830A, the side outer decoration body 3830B, the rear decoration body 3880, and the rear decoration body 3880A can be decorated with brighter light, which increases the appeal of attracting players' attention more strongly. It is possible to provide expensive pachinko machines 1 and slot machines 9.

In addition, part of the pattern includes a transparent pattern part 2614c, a transparent pattern part 2644c, a transparent pattern part 2624c, a transparent pattern part 3714c, a transparent part 3832a, a rear decoration 3880, and a pattern part 3884 in the rear decoration 3880A. Since a transparent part such as a light-transmitting part is provided, when the light from the LED 2602a, LED 2633a, LED 3702a, LED 3826a, second LED 3862b, second LED 3863b, etc. is changed, the light is irradiated from the transparent part to the player side. The color of the light also changes, and the transparent pattern part 2614c, the transparent pattern part 2644c, the transparent pattern part 2624c, the transparent pattern part 3714c, the transparent part 3832a, the pattern part in the rear decoration body 3880 and the rear decoration body 3880A By changing the luminous color of the transparent part of 3884, the atmosphere of the luminescently decorated picture can be greatly changed. The light emitting effect of the body 3710, the inner side decoration 3830A, the outer side decoration 3830B, the rear decoration 3880 and the rear decoration 3880A can be fully exhibited to surprise the player, and the player can On the other hand, it is possible to show a variety of light emitting effects, making it difficult for players to get bored and suppressing a drop in interest.

Furthermore, since light can be diffused in the transparent pattern part 2624c, the transparent pattern part 2644c, and the transparent part 3832a, the light can be diffused through the transparent pattern part 2624c, the transparent pattern part 2644c, and the transparent part 3832a, and 2620, the members provided at the rear of the center lower back decoration body 2640, the center lower back decoration body 2640B, the side inner decoration body 3830A, and the side outer decoration body 3830B can be made difficult to see from the player side, and the rear It is possible to prevent the appearance of the pattern from becoming unsightly due to the visible parts of the pattern, and to fully exhibit the decorative effect of the pattern, thereby ensuring that the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9 exhibit the above-mentioned effects. can be provided.

In addition, since the transparent pattern part 2624c and the transparent pattern part 2644c are formed by irradiating and curing a transparent ultraviolet curing resin (ink) with ultraviolet rays, the front left decorative body 2620 and the center lower back decoration If a transparent ultraviolet curable resin (ink) is applied to the transparent pattern portion 2624c of the body 2640 and the center lower back decoration body 2640B, and the portion where the transparent pattern portion 2644c is provided, and then ultraviolet rays are irradiated to the portion, irregularities occur. Since it cures with crepe-like wrinkles formed, the transparent wrinkles can diffuse light. Therefore, the transparent pattern portion 2624c and the transparent pattern portion 2644c can be easily provided on the front left decorative body 2620, the center lower back decorative body 2640, and the center lower back decorative body 2640B, and the pachinko machine has the above-mentioned effects. 1 can be reliably realized, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B are provided with a light diffusion part that diffuses light by metal vapor deposition, it is easy to install the light diffusion part in the side inner decoration body 3830A and the side outer decoration body 3830B. This makes it possible to reliably realize the slot machine 9 that achieves the above-mentioned effects, and also to suppress an increase in the cost of the slot machine 9.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back production unit 3700 of the game board 5B includes a picture part 3714 on which a predetermined picture is applied and a transparent picture part 3714c that allows the rear to be seen. In addition, in a thin plate-shaped back decoration body 3710 having a three-dimensional part 3716 in which at least a part of the pattern part 3714 and the transparent pattern part 3714c bulges rearward, the back decoration is applied through the transparent pattern part 3714c. Since the decoration of the decorative lens portion 3703g of the back decoration lens 3703 attached to the rear surface of the body 3710 can be seen, it is visible through the pattern and three-dimensional portion 3716 of the back decoration body 3710 and the transparent pattern portion 3714c. With the decorative lens portion 3703g of the rear decorative lens 3703, a deep decoration can be shown to the player. In addition, since the decorative lens portion 3703g behind the transparent pattern portion 3714c of the rear decorative body 3710 in the rear decorative lens 3703 can diffuse light, the decorative lens portion 3703g reflects light from the front. The light from the rear can be guided and diffused, and the transparent pattern portion 3714c of the rear decoration body 3710 can be made to shine with the rear decoration body lens 3703. . For this reason, it is possible to show the player a decoration that cannot be obtained only with the pattern of the rear decoration body 3710, so that the pattern of the rear decoration body 3710 can be prevented from looking cheap, and the decorative effect of the pattern can be improved. The decoration of the rear decoration body 3710 and the rear decoration lens 3703 can strongly attract the attention of players, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, making it possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the decorative lens portion 3703g behind the transparent pattern portion 3714c of the rear decorative body 3710 in the rear decorative lens 3703 is formed so that light can be diffused, the decoration of the rear decorative lens 3703 is Since the rear part of the rear rear decoration lens 3703 can be made difficult to see through the lens part 3703g, it is possible to suppress the appearance from becoming poor due to the rear part of the rear rear decoration lens 3703 being visible through the decorative lens part 3703g. The decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3710 and the rear decoration lens 3703 can be fully exhibited.

Further, since the rear decoration lens 3703 is attached to the rear surface of the rear decoration body 3710, and the rear decoration lens 3703 can be positioned with respect to the rear decoration body 3710, the back decoration lens 3703 can be positioned at the rear side of the transparent pattern portion 3714c. The decorative lens portion 3703g of the rear decorative lens 3703 can be reliably positioned at the rear decorative lens 3703, and the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects can be realized.

In addition, a rear decoration lens 3703 is attached to the rear surface of the rear decoration 3710, and the rear decoration 3710, which is formed into a thin plate shape that is easily deformed, is supported (held) by the rear decoration lens 3703. Therefore, by holding the rear decoration body 3710 in a desired shape, the decorative effect of the pattern etc. of the rear decoration body 3710 can be reliably exhibited, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-mentioned functions and effects can be provided. can be provided.

In addition, since the rear decoration body 3710 is provided with a three-dimensional portion 3716 that bulges out so as to form a space on the opposite side, the weight of the rear decoration body 3710 is reduced despite the three-dimensional shape. be able to. Therefore, there is no need to increase the strength and rigidity of the back side decoration lens 3703, back unit base 3701, etc. to which the back side decoration body 3710 is attached, so it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and also to suppress the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. To make it easier to provide the rear decoration body 3710 and the rear rear decoration body lens 3703 at desired positions in the pachinko machine 1, and to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the rear decoration body 3710 and the rear rear decoration body lens 3703. Can be done.

Here, the effects of the back decoration body 3050 of the game board 5C of the fifth embodiment will be mainly described, and the game board 5A of the third embodiment, the game board 5B of the fourth embodiment, and the slot machine It goes without saying that 9 also has the same effects as described below. According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back decoration body 3050 of the game board 5C of the fifth embodiment, at least a part of the decoration layer 3052 on which a predetermined pattern is applied is a three-dimensional part that bulges forward. 3056, the flat plate part 3055 extends outward in a flange shape, and is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 on the side opposite to the center side of the gaming area 5a with respect to the solid part 3056 of the flat plate part 3055. Since the mounting portion 3057 for attaching to the support member 3060 is provided at the part where the three-dimensional portion 3056 is located between the player and the player, the mounting portion 3057 and the player are The three-dimensional portion 3056 protrudes between the three-dimensional portions 3056 and is blocked by the three-dimensional portion 3056, thereby making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the mounting portion 3057 (attachment screw 3062). Therefore, the mounting portion 3057 can prevent the appearance of the pattern by the decorative layer 3052 and the decoration by the three-dimensional part 3056 from becoming poor, and the decorative effect of the back decoration body 3050 can be reliably exhibited, and the back decoration The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the body 3050, and the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with high appeal to players.

In addition, since the attachment portion 3057 is provided in a portion of the flat plate portion 3055 of the back decoration body 3050 where the decoration layer 3052 is not provided, a part of the pattern formed by the decoration layer 3052 is attached by the attachment portion 3057 (attachment screw 3062). The entire pattern can be shown to the player in good condition without being obstructed, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the player enjoy the pictures and prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, since the back decoration body 3050 is provided with the three-dimensional portion 3056 that bulges forward in at least a portion of the decorative layer 3052, the three-dimensional portion 3056 can strongly attract the player's interest. On the other hand, since the attachment part 3057 is provided in a part of the flat plate part 3055 that projects outward from the three-dimensional part 3056 in the form of a flange, the attachment part 3057 is relatively attached to the part compared to the three-dimensional part 3056. It is possible to reduce people's interest. Therefore, even if the mounting part 3057 (mounting screw 3062) is visible from the player's side, the mounting part 3057 will not be noticeable regardless of the presence or absence of the decorative layer 3052 in that part, and the mounting part 3057 will protect the It is possible to prevent the decorative effect of the decorative body 3050 from decreasing, and it is possible to fully exhibit the decorative effect of the back decorative body 3050 and achieve the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, in the back decoration body 3050, at least a portion of the decorative layer 3052 is bulged forward to form a three-dimensional portion 3056, so that a predetermined pattern is formed three-dimensionally. In other words, the three-dimensional portion 3056 bulging forward in a predetermined shape is patterned (colored) by at least a portion of the decorative layer 3052, so that the decorative effect of the back decoration body 3050 is enhanced. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, to strongly attract the interest of players, and to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, in the back decoration body 3050, since the mounting portion 3057 is provided on the flat plate portion 3055 extending outward from the solid portion 3056 bulging forward, the mounting portion 3057 on the flat plate portion 3055 is provided. The attachment portion 3057 can be provided at a portion that is difficult to see from the player side by extending the portion that is difficult to see from the player side, and the attachment portion 3057 can be provided at the portion that is difficult to see from the player side. , it is possible to reliably realize the pachinko machine 1 that has the above-mentioned functions and effects.

Furthermore, in the back decoration body 3050, since the mounting portion 3057 is provided on the flat plate portion 3055 extending outward from the solid portion 3056 bulging forward, the support member 3060 is attached to the rear surface of the solid portion 3056. There is no need to provide a detachable part, and it can be attached to the support member 3060 using the attachment part 3057 of the flat plate part 3055, which makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and to bulge out forward. A high decorative effect can be exhibited by the three-dimensional portion 3056, and a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a back decoration body 3050 having a high decorative effect can be reliably provided.

In addition, a mounting portion 3057 is provided on the flat plate portion 3055 extending outward from the three-dimensional portion 3056, and since there is no part on the rear surface of the three-dimensional portion 3056 that can be attached to the support member 3060, light is emitted from the rear. Even if irradiated, the shadow of the parts and members related to the mounting part 3057 will be projected onto the part of the mounting part 3057, and the shadow will not be projected on the rear surface of the three-dimensional part 3056, and the back decoration body 3050 (three-dimensional 3056) can be decorated with light in a good condition, and the decorative effect of the back decoration body 3050 can be reliably exhibited.

Furthermore, the three-dimensional part 3056 of the back decoration body 3050 is made to bulge out to the front so that a space is formed at the rear, and the space behind the three-dimensional part 3056 is not filled with resin, so that the three-dimensional part 3056 is not filled with resin. Despite its shape, the weight of the back decoration body 3050 can be reduced. Therefore, there is no need to increase the strength and rigidity of the support member 3060 to which the back decoration body 3050 is attached (further, the part to which the support member 3060 is attached (for example, the back box 3010)), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. This can be suppressed, and the back decoration body 3050 can be easily provided at a desired position within the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the back decoration body 3050.

In addition, since the back decoration body 3050 is formed only from a sheet-like member and the space behind the three-dimensional portion 3056 is not filled with resin, the effort required to manufacture the back decoration body 3050 can be simplified. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the back decoration body 3050, the mounting portion 3057 can be made difficult to see due to the three-dimensional portion 3056 bulging forward, so it is necessary to provide a separate member from the back decoration body 3050 to hide the mounting portion 3057. Therefore, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention, as shown below. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 and the slot machine 9, but the invention is not limited to this, and the game machine is a pachislot machine or a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. The invention may also be applied to gaming machines, and in this case as well, the same effects as described above can be achieved. Furthermore, it can be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which the player does not touch the game balls B, and to game machines called managed game machines.

[37. Example regarding ROM of peripheral control board]
Next, an example regarding a ROM socket 1530 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

Generally, unauthorized modifications to gaming machines are made to the main control unit 1300, but unauthorized modifications may be made to the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a hall's business could be disrupted by illegally altering image information to make a miss look like a win. In addition, the effect image has copyright (right to maintain its identity), and modification by a third party is not permitted.

By the way, a peripheral control section 1511 and a performance display control section 1512 are mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, and these control sections execute a control program stored in a ROM and control the image data and audio stored in the ROM. The performance is controlled based on various performance data such as data. The ROM is sometimes mounted in a ROM socket so as to be replaceable, and there is a risk that unauthorized modifications may be made targeting the ROM socket. Further, the ROM socket on the peripheral control board 1510 did not contribute to suppressing unauthorized modification to the peripheral control board 1510.

321 is a perspective view of a ROM socket arranged on the peripheral control board according to the embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 322 is a front view of the ROM socket, FIG. 323 is a top view of the ROM socket, and FIG. 324 is a top view of the ROM socket. is a side view of the ROM socket, FIG. 325 is a bottom view of the ROM socket, and FIG. 326 is a side view showing the ROM socket mounted on a peripheral control board.

The ROM socket 1530 of this embodiment is arranged on the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 326. The ROM installed in the ROM socket 1530 is accessed by the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512, and stores control programs and various effect data related to effect control. Further, the ROM is a land grid array (LGA) type ROM. Note that the package type is not limited to this, and may be a small outline package (SOP) type ROM having gull-wing-shaped terminals on the outside of the package.

[Configuration of ROM socket 1530]
The ROM socket 1530 includes a base portion 1531 in contact with the peripheral control board 1510 and a main body portion 1533 provided on the base portion 1531. The base portion 1531 and the main body portion 1533 are fixed by soldering.

In this embodiment, the base portion 1531 is constituted by a printed circuit board 1531, and the main body portion 1533 is an IC socket 1533 into which the LGA type ROM described above can be mounted. Further, on the side of the printed circuit board 1531 on which the IC socket 1533 is mounted, a pad is provided to which the terminal of the IC socket 1533 is soldered, and is fixed by soldering.

[Base part (printed circuit board 1531)]
The printed circuit board 1531 has a thickness of 1.6 mm and has a four-layer structure.The printed circuit board 1531 uses a black resist, which is the same color as the resin forming the IC socket 1533, and appears to be colored black. Also, when viewed from above, the printed circuit board 1531 appears to protrude from the IC socket 1533 to the left and right in the drawing, but the area of the pad that determines the amount of protrusion can be further reduced to bring it as close to the size of the IC socket 1533 as possible. Can be done.

A plurality of soldering terminal portions 1532 are provided on the side and bottom surfaces of the printed circuit board 1531 so as to extend from the side surfaces to the bottom surface and are fixed and electrically connected to lands provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by soldering. ing. The soldering terminal portion 1532 can be configured, for example, by an end surface through hole provided on the side surface of the printed circuit board, and wiring electrically connected to the end surface through hole and formed so as to span the bottom surface. That is, the ROM socket 1530 is fixed and electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 at its end face and bottom face.

[Body part (IC socket 1533)]
The IC socket 1533 is made of black resin as described above, and the ROM is mounted between the wall portions 1533A that stand on the front side (the viewpoint side in FIG. 322) and the back side, and between the two wall portions 1533A. a pair of left and right fixing parts 1534 for fixing the ROM to be mounted, a ROM connection terminal 1537 for electrically connecting to the terminal of the ROM to be mounted on the top surface of the bottom part 1533B; A terminal is provided on the back side to be electrically connected to the ROM connection terminal 1537 and to be fixed to the printed circuit board 1531 by soldering. Note that a ROM mounting area 1539 indicated by a dashed line is formed between the wall portions 1533A.

The left and right fixing parts 1534 are pivotally supported by the wall part 1533A and are configured to open outward. With the fixing part 1534 open outward, a ROM can be installed in the ROM installation area 1539.

The fixing portion 1534 has a locking convex portion 1535. The locking convex portion 1535 engages with a locking recess 1536 provided in the main body portion 1533 when the fixing portion 1534 is closed. In the closed state, the fixing part 1534 presses down the ROM mounted in the ROM mounting area 1539 from above to bring the terminals of the ROM into stable contact with the ROM connection terminals 1537. Note that the ROM installed in the ROM socket 1530 is disengaged from the locking recesses 1536 by pushing the locking protrusions 1535 laterally inward from both sides with a special jig, and the left and right fixing portions 1534 are released. It opens outward and can be removed.

[Peripheral control board 1510]
The peripheral control board 1510 is a board with a thickness of 1.2 mm and a six-layer structure, and the wiring that connects the electronic components uses not only the surface layer of both sides but also the inner layer to electrically connect the electronic components. . A land for soldering is provided in the area where the ROM socket 1530 is mounted, and as shown in FIG. In order to insert a dedicated jig outside the side wall 1533A, an area 1538 is provided on the peripheral control board 1510 where mounting of components is prohibited. Additionally, lands are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 on which electronic components including connector members forming a circuit are mounted.

[Implementation example]
Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the ROM socket 1530 described above is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

FIG. 321 is a perspective view of the ROM socket 1530 arranged on the peripheral control board 1501 according to the embodiment of the present invention. A land for mounting a ROM socket 1530 provided on the control board 1501 is soldered and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. The area where the ROM socket is mounted is electrically connected to the land and connected to electronic components constituting an electronic circuit including a connector member mounted around the ROM socket 1530 and on the back side of the peripheral control board 1510. Wiring is provided for this purpose. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 has a thickness of 1.2 mm and has a six-layer structure, which is thinner than the printed circuit board 1531 of the base part constituting the ROM socket 1530. Wiring that connects electronic components uses not only the surface layers on both sides, but also the inner layers to electrically connect the electronic components. The ROM installed in the ROM socket 1530 is an important electronic component, and the wiring that connects it to other electronic components is also important. The important wiring is routed to the surface where the ROM socket is mounted and is hidden by the ROM socket 1530 itself to prevent unauthorized modification.

Further, as described above, the printed circuit board 1531 that is the base part is 1.6 mm thick and has a four-layer structure, but like the peripheral control board 1510, it connects the ROM socket 1530 and the peripheral control board. The wiring for this is done using not only the surface layers on both sides, but also the inner layers. For the surface that comes into contact with the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring is made into a solid pattern without forming blind vias connecting the surface and the inner layer and through-hole vias penetrating between the surface and other surfaces. It is wired to the soldering terminal portion 1532. If this is electrically connected to the land connected to the GND wiring provided on the peripheral control board 1510, it can also be effective as a noise countermeasure. Regarding the GND terminal of the ROM itself, the pad on which the IC socket 1533 into which the ROM is mounted is connected to the soldering terminal section 1532 using blind vias and buried vias (vias connecting inner layers), and It is electrically connected to the GND wiring. Note that since the peripheral control board 1510 also uses a multilayer board and has blind vias and through-hole vias formed therein, its surface is also electrically insulated using black resist.

[Another example]
In this way, when using the wiring of the peripheral control board 1510 as a concealing member, it is preferable to have an electronic component (ROM installed in the ROM socket 1530) and wiring connected to the electronic component. The concealing member for concealing the wiring of the board 1510 may be a printed circuit board 1531 that is simply a base portion placed on the peripheral control board 1510. It is preferable that an electronic circuit be formed on the printed circuit board, but it may also be disguised as a dummy electronic circuit with electronic components mounted thereon so that it is not recognized as a member provided for concealment. . Further, as a concealing member for concealing the wiring of the peripheral control board 1510, a printing material such as resist or silk placed on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 can also produce a similar concealing effect. Note that the wiring formed on the printed circuit board is formed by foil punching, so it has unevenness, but if it is a resist, it is better to adjust the thickness by applying two coats to eliminate the unevenness. In this way, the ROM socket 1530 is placed over the important wiring of the peripheral control board 1510, making it impossible to see or touch the wiring from the outside, thereby concealing the wiring and preventing unauthorized modification. A deterrent effect can be obtained.

In this way, important parts of the peripheral control board 1510 are hidden by arranging the ROM socket 1530 with the main body 1533 formed of an easy-to-process material such as resin on the peripheral control board 1510. The IC socket 1533 is a relatively large component when viewed as an electronic component, and is made of a material that is easy to process, so it is possible to use it as a cover to hide unauthorized electronic components. .

Therefore, a pad is provided on the bottom part 1533B of the IC socket 1533, which is the main body part, for electrically connecting the ROM connection terminal 1537 and the soldering terminal part 1532 provided on the printed circuit board 1531. The IC socket 1533 of this embodiment differs from conventional IC sockets in the following points.

For example, if the number of terminals of the ROM mounted in the ROM socket 1530 and the number of terminals of the soldering terminal section 1532 are the same, the terminals correspond one-to-one, so the ROM connecting terminals 1537 on the same side on the left and right and the soldering terminal portion 1532 are connected. However, if the number of terminals in the soldering terminal section 1532 is different (even if they are the same), in some terminals, the ROM connection terminal 1537 and the soldering terminal section 1532 on opposite sides are connected, A wiring 1533C for this purpose is embedded so as to traverse the bottom portion 1533B from left to right, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 321, 323, and 326, for example. Unless you know the internal structure of the ROM socket 1530 (particularly the structure of the IC socket 1533 that is the main body part 1533), you will not know where in the bottom part 1533B the wiring that crosses the bottom part 1533B from left to right is embedded. Therefore, if a person committing fraud attempts to modify the part hidden in the ROM socket 1530 of the peripheral control board 1510 and punches a hole in the bottom part 1533B of the ROM socket 1530, the wiring 1533C will be damaged and the production control will be disabled. It will not work properly.

[Another example]
Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the wiring for connecting the ROM connection terminal 1537 and the soldering terminal part 1532 is embedded in the bottom part 1533B of the main body part 1533; , without embedding the wiring for connecting the ROM connection terminal 1537 and the soldering terminal part 1532, in other words, the IC socket 1533 which is the main body part has the conventional structure, and the ROM connection terminal 1537 and the soldering terminal part 1532 are soldered instead. Wiring may be formed so as to cross from left to right on the upper surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board 1531, which is the base portion, so as to be connected to the terminal portion 1532. Similarly, unless you know the internal structure of the ROM socket 1530 (the structure of the printed circuit board 1531, which is the base portion 1531 in this embodiment), you will not know where the wiring that crosses from left to right is located. Therefore, if a person who commits unauthorized acts attempts to modify the hidden portion of the ROM socket 1530 of the peripheral control board 1510 by drilling a hole in the bottom 1533B of the ROM socket 1530, the wiring on the top surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board 1531 may be damaged. will be damaged and the production control will not be performed properly.

In this way, by constructing the ROM socket 1530 such that the printed circuit board 1531 serving as a base member is sandwiched between the peripheral control board 1510 and the IC socket 1533 into which the ROM is installed, the main body can be mounted with an IC. In the case of the socket 1533, it can be said that the structure is effective in compensating for its weakness in ease of processing.

Furthermore, as described above, by configuring the printed circuit board 1531 and the IC socket 1533 in the same color, the ROM socket 1530 can be made to look like a single integrated component, making it highly resistant to destruction. . In fact, the printed circuit board 1531 may be made of a harder material (for example, polyphenylene sulfide, which is a hard resin) to increase its resistance to destruction.

The thickness of the printed circuit board 1531 may be as thick as necessary to form the soldering terminal portion 1532 for soldering to the peripheral control board 1510, but as shown in FIG. It may be as thick as a meter. By making the printed circuit board 1531 thicker, it can be brought closer to the top surface of the peripheral control board box 1520, and it is more noticeable than components mounted directly on the peripheral control board surface, which can facilitate the discovery of unauthorized tampering. It also deters fraud. In addition, since ROM is an important component and is removable, an identification sticker may be affixed to the surface of the ROM for management purposes, but in that case, the visibility of the identification sticker affixed to the ROM can be improved. . Note that it is preferable that the peripheral control board box 1520 at a position facing the identification sticker not be provided with anything that impedes the visibility of the identification sticker, such as a heat radiation hole.

Note that the mounting prohibited area 1538 may be provided not only at the outer central portions of the front and rear side walls 1533A of the ROM socket 1530, but also at other locations around the ROM socket 1530 (for example, around the entire circumference). In this way, by providing the mounting-prohibited area 1538 around the ROM socket 1530 (for example, outside the front and back side walls 1533A), it is easy to cause modification to the ROM socket 1530 (i.e., on the peripheral control board 1510). This makes it easier to discover abnormalities in the portion (far from the connection point of the ROM socket 1530), which has the effect of deterring unauthorized modification.

As mentioned above, it was stated that the size of the printed circuit board 1531 can be made as close as possible to the size of the IC socket 1533, but when viewed from above, it looks like one integral part; When viewed from the side, the thicker the part, the more noticeable it is compared to other parts, which helps prevent fraud.
[Difference with BGA]

Here, like the ROM socket 1530 of this embodiment, there is a BGA type integrated circuit in which a semiconductor chip is arranged on a multilayer board and electrically connected to a printed circuit board at a terminal pitch different from that of the semiconductor chip. However, in a BGA package, terminals (balls) for electrical connection with wiring on a printed circuit board are arranged in a grid pattern at equal intervals. On the other hand, in the ROM socket 1530 of this embodiment, soldering terminal portions 1532 for electrically connecting to a printed circuit board are arranged in a row on each side on the left and right sides. Therefore, in a BGA type integrated circuit, it is not possible to freely arrange wiring under the area of the printed circuit board in which the integrated circuit is arranged. The problem of concealing parts and suppressing unauthorized modification cannot arise.

In addition, the reason why the multilayer board is exposed in a BGA package depends on the chip size and the number of pads on the chip; the more pads and the number of chip input/output signals, the more balls there are, and the more The size of the board also increases. It is not necessary to cover and harden the entire multilayer board with resin; it is sufficient to cover only the parts that need to be protected, such as semiconductor chips and bonding wires, with resin, and as a result, the board appears exposed. On the other hand, the base portion 1531 of the ROM socket 1530 of this embodiment is not made to be obvious at first glance as a printed circuit board, but the protrusion of the base portion 1531 from the main body portion 1533 is made small, and the base portion 1531 and the main body portion 1533 are By using the same color (black, which is the color of the main body 1533, rather than green, which is commonly used in BGA packages), it appears to be one integral part, increasing the effectiveness of suppressing unauthorized modification. ing.

[38. Example regarding components mounted on main control board]
Next, an example regarding components mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described.

In consideration of unauthorized modification to the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine, there are restrictions on the parts mounted on the main control board 1310 (for example, the type and size of the parts). However, it is expected that the restrictions will be relaxed to allow surface mount components to be mounted on the main control board 1310 instead of conventional leaded components. Surface-mounted components for general industry are becoming smaller and smaller to the point where they are difficult to see with the naked eye, and if small components that are difficult to see are mounted on the main control board 1310, it becomes difficult to detect unauthorized modification, leading to unauthorized modification. There is a risk of modification.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may be bent due to the heat inside the gaming machine, and the surface mount components mounted on the main control board 1310 may fall off. In particular, the possibility of falling off increases as components become smaller and the soldering area decreases.

Furthermore, in gaming machines that are provided with a setting function for changing the winning probability, there is a factor that causes the main control board 1310 to bend. For example, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are configured as one printed board, force is applied to the main control board 1310 by operating the setting key switch 1311a or the setting change button 1311b, causing the main control board 1310 to bend. Sometimes it happens. If surface-mounted components fall off due to board flexure, the gaming machine may malfunction, or even if it does not malfunction, noise resistance may be reduced, and the gaming machine may no longer be able to demonstrate its original performance.

In order to prevent the surface mount components from falling off due to board flexure, it is possible to increase the soldering area and soldering locations of the surface mount components to firmly mount the surface mount components on the main control board 1310.

Therefore, in this embodiment, we propose a structure of surface mount components that is difficult to induce unauthorized modification even when mounted on the main control board 1310 and can reduce the possibility of falling off.

FIG. 328 is a perspective view of the surface mount components mounted on the main control board 1310, and FIG. 329 shows (A) a plan view, (B) a front view, and ( C) Bottom view.

The component 1330 mounted on the main control board 1310 of this embodiment includes a base portion 1331 and one or more chip components 1335 mounted on the base portion 1331. The base portion 1331 is constituted by a printed circuit board, and a pad 1333 to which a terminal of the chip component 1335 is soldered is provided on the side of the printed circuit board on which the chip component 1335 is mounted. 1333 by a method such as soldering and mechanically fixed.

The base portion 1331 is preferably a printed circuit board with a thickness of 1.6 mm and a two-layer structure, and on the side and bottom surfaces of the printed circuit board 1531 are provided on the main control board 1310 so as to extend from the sides to the bottom surface. A plurality of soldering terminal portions 1332 are provided which are fixed and electrically connected to the lands by soldering. The soldering terminal portion 1332 and the pad 1333 are connected by a wiring 1334. The soldering terminal portion 1332 can be configured, for example, by an end surface through hole provided on the side surface of the printed circuit board, and a pattern electrically connected to the end surface through hole and formed on the bottom surface. That is, the surface mount component 1330 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 at its end face and bottom face, and is mechanically fixed.

The chip component 1335 may be a passive component such as a chip resistor or a chip capacitor, or an active component such as a chip diode or a chip transistor. The chip components 1335 constituting one surface mount component 1330 may be of the same type, and may be used for the same function (for example, an RC filter, a bypass capacitor, etc.) or may be used for different functions. Also, the chip component 1335 may be of a different type. Preferably, the chip components 1335 have the same size as the surface mount component 1330 when viewed from the component mounting surface (plan view side in FIG. 329). That is, even if the chip components 1335 constituting one surface mount component 1330 have different heights (thicknesses), it is preferable that the areas (length x width) of the components are the same.

Since one or more chip components 1335 are mounted on the base portion 1331, the area of the base portion 1331 is larger than the mounting area of the chip components 1335 to be mounted.
In this way, the surface mount component 1330, which is a specific electronic component, has a base portion 1331, on which a small chip component that is difficult to see can be mounted and recognized as a single chip component that is apparently larger. .

A resin mold covering the chip component 1335 may be provided on the component mounting surface side of the base portion 1331, as shown by the broken line in FIG.

330, 331, and 332 are plan views of other examples of surface mount components 1330 mounted on main control board 1310.

In the surface mount component 1330 shown in FIG. 330, four chip components 1335 are mounted on a base portion 1331, and the terminals of each chip component 1335 are connected to different soldering terminal portions 1332. Furthermore, in the surface mount component 1330 shown in FIG. 331, one chip component 1335 is mounted on a base portion 1331, and the terminals of each chip component 1335 are connected to different soldering terminal portions 1332A and 1332B. Further, a dummy soldering terminal portion 1332C to which the chip component 1335 is not connected is provided. The dummy soldering terminal portion 1332C is provided on the same side of the base portion 1331 as the electrically connected soldering terminal portions 1332A and 1332B, but unlike the soldering terminal portion 1332D, it is electrically connected to the soldering terminal portions 1332A and 1332B. The connected soldering terminal parts 1332A and 1332B may be provided on different sides of the base part 1331. In this way, the number of chip components 1335 mounted on the surface mount component 1330 may be one or two or more.

In the surface mount component 1330 shown in FIG. 332, two chip components 1335 are mounted on a base portion 1331, and one terminal of each chip component 1335 is connected to a different soldering terminal portion 1332E, 1332F. , the other terminal is connected to one soldering terminal portion 1332G. Further, a dummy soldering terminal portion 1332H to which the chip component 1335 is not connected is provided. The surface mount component 1330 shown in FIG. 332 is suitable for, for example, a resistor that pulls up an input terminal or a capacitor connected to ground.

Furthermore, even if the chip components 1335 are connected to all the soldering terminal parts 1332 as shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, only some of the soldering terminal parts 1332 are connected as shown in FIGS. 332 and 331. A chip component 1335 may be connected to.

333 and 334 are diagrams showing the main control board 1310 on which the surface mount components of this embodiment are mounted.

On the main control board 1310, surface mount components 1330A to 1330C of this embodiment, a plurality of integrated circuits (ICs) 1340A to 1340C, and other components not shown are mounted. Nine chip capacitors 1335 are mounted on the surface mount component 1330A. Each of the chip capacitors 1335 connects the power terminal of the integrated circuit 1340A, 1340B and the ground by a short distance (for example, the shortest distance), and is mounted near each integrated circuit 1340A, 1340B, It functions as a bypass capacitor and reduces noise superimposed on the power supply and input to the integrated circuits 1340A and 1340B. The chip capacitors 1335 that are not connected to the integrated circuits 1340A and 1340B may be used as part of another circuit (for example, an RC filter).

Chip resistors and chip capacitors, which are typically chip components that have electrodes at two locations on both ends in the length direction, have electrodes at three locations, two locations on one lengthwise side and one location on the other lengthwise side. The surface mount component 1330, which is a specific electronic component, has a base portion 1331, which is more fragile than a chip transistor, which is typically a chip component with alternating electrodes, since it has two electrodes on both ends. After mounting a fragile chip component on the main control board 1310, the base portion 1331 on which this chip component is mounted can be further mounted on the main control board 1310, thereby eliminating the fragility of the chip component having electrodes at both ends in the length direction. can do.

In addition, like the surface mount component 1330D shown in FIG. 334, when the necessary minimum number (for example, two) of chip capacitors 1335 are mounted, the soldering terminal part 1332 that is not connected to the chip capacitor 1335 is used as a dummy terminal to connect to the main control. The mounting pattern on the board 1310 may be soldered. By providing the dummy terminal on the base portion 1331 in this manner, it is possible to suppress the deflection of the substrate.

Three chip capacitors 1335 are mounted on the surface mount component 1330B, and three chip resistors 1335 are mounted on the surface mount component 1330C. One terminal of each chip capacitor 1335 of the surface mount component 1330B is connected to the input of the integrated circuit 1340C, and the other terminal is connected to ground. Further, one terminal of each chip resistor 1335 of the surface mount component 1330C is connected to an input of the integrated circuit 1340C, and the other terminal is connected to an input terminal 1350. By configuring an RC filter using a capacitor and a resistor and connecting it to the input of the integrated circuit 1340C, noise superimposed on the signal input to the integrated circuit 1340C can be reduced. In this way, by mounting circuits that are relatively close together and require similar functions and performance, a small chip component that would be difficult to see as a single component becomes a single functional component that looks larger. It can be recognized as

As explained above, since the surface mount component 1330 of this embodiment has one or more chip components 1335 mounted on the base portion 1331, the risk of unauthorized modification even with small chip components is reduced, and the fairness of the game can be ensured. .

In addition, by increasing the soldering area and soldering locations of components, surface mount components can be firmly mounted on the main control board 1310, reducing the possibility of surface mount components falling off due to board flexure, and improving the noise resistance of the gaming machine. Malfunctions can be suppressed and gaming machines can demonstrate their original performance.

Further, a mounting prohibited area may be provided around the surface mount component 1330 in which mounting of other components is prohibited. This mounting-prohibited area makes it easier to discover abnormalities in parts that are likely to trigger modification to the surface mount component 1330, and has the effect of deterring unauthorized modification.

Note that since the surface mount component 1330 of this embodiment has a larger area than the chip component and is placed on the main control board 1310, the wiring on the main control board 1310 can be hidden. The main control board 1310 is provided with important wiring through which signals related to the jackpot lottery flow, and is easily targeted by those who try to illegally obtain game balls. For this reason, by hiding such important wiring with surface mount components, those who are trying to illegally obtain game balls will be unable to see the important wiring, making it difficult to obtain signals from the wiring, and , prevents unauthorized modification of the wiring.

In addition, in the gaming machine, for example, when a jackpot lottery is won, a jackpot game is performed in which the jackpot is opened and closed continuously, and a drive circuit for driving a solenoid that opens and closes the jackpot is also implemented on the main control board 1310. A large current is required to drive the device, and the drive circuit itself becomes a heat source. The main control board 1310 has a lower mounting density of electronic components than other control boards in order to increase the ease of detecting fraud, and the impact on other electronic circuits within the sealed main control board box 1320 was not significant. . However, in the case of downsizing by using surface mount components, it is conceivable to make the minimum necessary holes in the main control board box 1320 to dissipate heat.

As mentioned above, surface mount components for general industry have been miniaturized to a size that is difficult to see with the naked eye, and small parts that are difficult to see are being used. For example, in the case of a chip capacitor 1335, Although there are relatively large surface mount components, there is a limited range of capacitance options, and it may not be possible to select the optimal capacitance for the function required by the electronic circuit.

For example, if we consider a round hole (approximately 0.78 mm in diameter) from which an electronic component with a surface area of 6 mm squared cannot protrude, for example, in JIS standard 0603 size, it is 0.6 mm (length) x 0.3 mm (width). ) x 0.3 (thickness), so there is a risk of it flying out.

On the other hand, according to the present invention, the size of the part is determined by the size of the base part 1331, so in this case, if the size of the part is larger than the hole (0.78 mm or more on a side), if the part is missing, Even if it is, there is no risk of it jumping out from the hole, and it can be found inside the main control board box 1320.

This is particularly useful for single chip components, and can be configured as a gaming machine as described below.
``A gaming machine in which a plurality of electronic components are mounted on a game control board that can control the progress of the game, and the game control board is housed in a sealed board box having sealing means, The specified electronic component includes a base part and a surface mount type electronic component, and the base part includes a pad for mounting the surface mount type electronic component, and a pad mounted on the pad and the game control board. and a connection terminal for connecting the wiring to a pad connected to the electronic component mounted on the game control board, and "A gaming machine characterized by its large size"

[40. Examples regarding errors occurring in peripheral control boards]
A gaming machine displays a moving image as an effect during a game. The display of this moving image is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. The peripheral control board 1500 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 composed of a microcomputer centered on a processor to control light emitting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and a command signal (command) transmitted from the peripheral control unit 1511. ), and has an effect display control section 1512 constituted by a video display processor to control the effect image and sound effect.

On the other hand, the gaming machine has an error notification function, which notifies an error that occurs in communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1500, and the error that occurs in the communication between the peripheral control board 1500 and the effect display control part 1512. An error that occurs in communication between the two is notified (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-68524). For failure analysis when a failure occurs in a gaming machine, notification is made in different ways depending on the location of the error.

[40-1. Configuration of peripheral control board 1510]
FIG. 335 is a diagram showing details of the configuration of peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 168.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control CPU 1541, a peripheral control ROM 1542, a peripheral control RAM 1543, an input/output port 1544, and the like. The main control board 1310 is connected to the input port 1544.

The peripheral control CPU 1541 controls the display, sound, and light effects of the effect display device 1600 based on effect control command signals (commands) for displaying symbols transmitted from the main control board 1310. The peripheral control ROM 1542 is a nonvolatile memory that stores control programs executed by the peripheral control CPU 1541 and data accessed during program execution.The peripheral control RAM 1543 temporarily stores work data and flags used by the peripheral control CPU 1541 when executing programs. It is a volatile memory that is stored permanently.

Data transmission and reception between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control unit 1511 is performed by one-way communication from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 cannot refer to information held by the main control board 1310.

The performance display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 includes a performance display control CPU (VDP) 1551, a performance display control ROM 1552, a performance display control RAM 1553, an image processor (VDP) 1556, a sound generator 1557, and an input/output port. 1554 etc. Note that one or both of the image processor (VDP) 1556 and the sound generator 1557 may be provided integrally with the performance display control CPU 1551. A peripheral control unit 1511 is connected to the input/output port 1554.

The performance display control ROM 1552 is a non-volatile memory in which control programs executed by the performance display control CPU 1551 and data accessed during program execution are stored.The performance display control RAM 1553 stores work data used by the performance display control CPU 1551 when executing the program. This is a volatile memory in which information and flags are temporarily stored. The character ROM 1555 is a nonvolatile memory in which character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stored. The image processor (VDP) 1556 reads the display data stored in the character ROM 1555 at a predetermined timing, stores it in the storage area corresponding to the layer of the video memory 1558 so that the symbols overlap in a predetermined order, and displays the display data in the effect display device. 1600. The video memory 1558 is a memory that stores display data displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the contents of the image data stored in the video memory 1558 are rewritten, the display contents (frame images) of the effect display device 1600 are changed. Be changed.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes lamps (LEDs) that produce light emitting effects in the back and front effect unit 3200, motors and solenoids that operate the accessories (movable objects) provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, and lights that operate the main body frame 4. A lighting device such as a lamp (LED) that produces light emission is connected. A performance display device 1600, various speakers 462, 464, 622, etc. are connected to the performance display control unit 1512. Note that various speakers 462, 464, and 622 may be connected to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Next, commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained. Main control board 1310 sends commands to peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, the main control board 1310 sets necessary information in the transmission command storage area and issues an interrupt at timings such as when a winning is started, when a special symbol starts to fluctuate, when a special symbol fluctuates stops, and when a jackpot occurs. A command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 for each process.

The peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the command received from the main control board 1310 is appropriate, and if the received command is inappropriate, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is not performed, and the error display command is displayed as an effect. It is transmitted to the control unit 1512 to notify the effect display device 1600 of the error. If the inappropriateness of the command is minor in terms of type or number of commands, an error display command is added to the command received from the main control board 1310 and sent to the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect in the effect display device 1600 is changed. An error may be notified in the performance display while the display is started.

When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines a performance pattern (special symbol variation performance displayed on the performance display device 1600, sounds output from various speakers, lighting patterns of various lamps), a performance pattern command indicating the determined performance pattern is issued. is transmitted to the effect display control section 1512.

The effect display control unit 1512 causes the image processor (VDP) 1556 to write necessary image data into the video memory 1558 based on the effect pattern command received from the peripheral control unit 1511, and configures each frame image of the animation image. The animation is sequentially outputted to the effect display device 1600, and the effect moving image is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Next, commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 will be explained. The commands sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 are, for example, during the initial screen display, during a customer waiting demonstration (standby demonstration), when a special symbol starts changing, when a special symbol is confirmed, and when a special symbol is displayed. There are times when the pattern is being determined, when the jackpot starts demonstration, when the jackpot medium/large prize opening is opened, when the jackpot medium/large prize opening is closed, when the winning end demonstration occurs, and when the jackpot ends demonstration ends.

Among these, commands transmitted in connection with the special symbol variation display game will be explained.

The commands sent at the start of special symbol variation include commands for the number of symbols stored, communication check, number of productions, production selection state, variation additional information, production pattern, and character production. The command for the number of symbols stored is a command that indicates the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. The communication check command is a command for confirming the normality of communication. The performance number command is a command indicating the number of games (or remaining number of games) in a specific game state. The effect selection state command is a command that indicates the type of data that serves as a reference for selection of a variation pattern table when determining a variation pattern in order to select a production of a specific game state. The variation additional information command is a command indicating an additional performance (for example, suggestion of jackpot expectation level) pattern of a predetermined performance time to be added to the determined variation pattern. The production pattern command is a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol. The character performance command is a command that indicates a performance by a character during the special symbol variation display game.

As a command when a special symbol is determined, there is an effect pattern stop command that is sent to stop the variation of the effect of the special symbol.

Commands sent from the peripheral control section 1511 to the effect display control section 1512 are sent at interrupt timing to the peripheral control CPU 1541. That is, the command stored in the command transmission storage area is transmitted from the peripheral control section 1511 to the effect display control section 1512 at the interrupt timing input to the peripheral control CPU 1541 every predetermined period (for example, 500 μs). When the effect display control unit 1512 receives the command from the peripheral control unit 1511, it transmits a reception response command to the peripheral control unit 1511 indicating that the command has been successfully received.

The peripheral control section 1511 stores the command received from the effect display control section 1512 in the command reception storage area. The received command is taken out from the command reception storage area at the timing of interrupting the peripheral control CPU 1541 (for example, at every predetermined period such as 500 μs).

Next, communication error factors that occur in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. For example, the following error occurs in communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510.
1) The series code of the power-on status command does not match the series code definition output by the symbol-related setting tool, or is an unauthorized series code, or is received with the fluctuation start status command and starting opening winning command. The series code does not match the series code received with the status command at power-on 2) The combination of the variation pattern command at the start of variation and the symbol command at the start of variation is inappropriate 3) The symbol information of the symbol command at the start of variation and the symbol stop command 4) There is an error in the win/loss check of the model-specific symbol matching process, or an error in the probability change/non-probability change check of the model-specific symbol matching process, or an error in the temporary stop pattern check of the model-specific pattern matching process. Abnormality 5) Some commands sent as a set are missing 6) Commands sent as a set time out

Here, a "series" refers to a group of gaming machines that have a similar appearance but different specifications. Since the specifications can be changed only by changing the peripheral control ROM 1542, effect display control ROM 1552, and character ROM 1555 mounted on the peripheral control board, it can be developed in a short period of time, and it can be developed later as a machine with different specifications. Although it may be shipped, if you install the wrong ROM, certain effects will be performed in an unintended manner. For this reason, it is necessary to effectively prevent misinstallation of various ROMs in gaming machines within the series and prevent them from being leaked onto the market.

1) Series code mismatch occurs when the ROM attached to the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control ROM 1542 of the peripheral control unit 1511) and the ROM attached to the main control board 1310 are of different series, that is, they are originally connected to each other. When the power is turned on, a communication error is immediately displayed to detect incorrect ROM installation. The details of the notification format will be described later, but errors are detected at the point where the power is turned on in order to save time during the inspection process.

3) Inconsistency in symbol information is when the symbol information of the symbol command at the start of fluctuation received at the start of fluctuation and the symbol information of the symbol stop command received at the time of stopping the symbol do not match, and in this case, the initial symbol unique to the model I am trying to stop the special symbol. For example, when the symbol information of the fluctuation start symbol command originally determined by lottery on the main control board 1310 is a symbol of "3", "7", or "1" indicating a loss, the surroundings of the peripheral control board 1510 If the model-specific initial symbols stored in the control ROM 1542 are "1," "2," and "3," "1," "2," and "3" are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, when an abnormality occurs in communication, in addition to displaying a communication error immediately as in the case 1) described above, when an abnormality occurs in communication, It is preferable to include a form in which a communication error is displayed when the count value reaches a predetermined value.

Regarding the inconsistency of the main symbol (the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400), in addition to the match or mismatch of the symbol information at the time of fluctuation start and at the time of symbol stop, which is determined when the symbol is stopped, the fluctuation start It is determined whether or not the command at the start of variation is appropriate, specifically, whether the 2) variation pattern command at the start of variation, symbol command at the start of variation, and state command at the start of variation are an appropriate combination. However, in cases where the symbol information at the start of fluctuation is abnormal and the symbol information at the time the symbol stops is normal, in either case, there is an abnormality in the symbol information at the start of fluctuation. However, since the abnormality is judged to be duplicated, it is determined that the abnormality at the start of fluctuation is one abnormality in communication, and when the symbol stops, even though the initial symbol unique to the model is displayed, this is not communicated. Inconsistencies are eliminated without determining that an abnormality has occurred.

In cases like 1) mentioned above, it is also a hardware abnormality and needs to be dealt with immediately, but in the case of an event such as a software malfunction due to temporary noise, it is not immediately dealt with and the event may repeat. Once the error has occurred, the decision will be made to the same level as a hardware abnormality, and the communication error will be clearly notified, and the game will be allowed to continue unless it is a fatal cause.

In addition, in order to avoid giving players any sense of distrust, for example, if there is an abnormality in the command at the start of the fluctuation described above, the symbol fluctuation itself may be changed at high speed (i.e., the symbol that is transparent through the background may be scrolled at high speed). However, if a discrepancy occurs between the symbol information when the symbol stops and the symbol information at the start of variation, the symbol information is connected to the main control board 1310 without high-speed variation due to an abnormality in communication. This eliminates the inconsistency in which the symbols change at high speed in the effect display device 1600 even though the symbols have stopped changing on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 whose display is controlled.

4) The model-specific symbol matching process is a symbol matching process performed after the decorative symbol drawing for each special symbol variation display pattern, and is based on the symbol type determined for each special symbol variation display pattern and the function display unit 1400. This is a process of determining whether or not the symbols of the special lottery result match the decorative symbols that are stopped in the special symbol variation display game on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, the following determination is performed.
・Win/Loss: Determine whether the decorative pattern is a double hit based on variation in loss (including loss in reach), non-probable variation, potential probability, sudden probability, and small probability. In addition, if the number is zero, set a fixed deviation number.
- Probable variation/non-probable variation: If the decorative pattern is a set of 3 or 7, it is determined whether the symbol type is a time saving unlimited next probability variation. In addition, when the decorative pattern is a set of 3 or 7 in a case other than the time saving unlimited next time probability change, a fixed scatter is set.
・Reach: Determine whether the left and right symbols are the same due to loss variation. Also, it is determined whether the left and right symbols are different due to reach fluctuations.
・Temporary stop pattern: It is determined whether the temporary stop pattern used for chance rolls, pseudo-runs, etc. is a pattern that the player recognizes as a win.
・Details of reach symbol: Determine whether the left and right symbols are the middle symbol +1.
・Chance roll: Determine whether a chance roll is rolled when a chance roll should be rolled.

Specifically, the missing command in 5) is determined by the following method. Determination of omission is performed after a predetermined time (33.336ms x 2) after receiving the variation pattern command at the start of variation.If another command is received without receiving the variation pattern command at the start of variation, the timing Reset the predetermined time using , and perform the operation after the predetermined time.
・If the fluctuation pattern command at fluctuation start, the symbol command at fluctuation start, the state command at fluctuation start, and the symbol stop command are received in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, it is normal, and after a predetermined time, each device (e.g. , a lamp control section (not shown), an audio control section (not shown), and a production display control section 1512). Regarding 6) timeout, if various commands cannot be received even after a set predetermined time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in communication and a communication error command is sent to each device.
・If the fluctuation pattern command at fluctuation start, the state command at fluctuation start, and the symbol stop command are received in the prescribed order within a predetermined time, but the symbol command at fluctuation start is not received, the command will be sent to each device after the predetermined time has elapsed. It then determines that one abnormality has occurred in communication and additionally sends a communication error command.
・If the variation pattern command at variation start, symbol command at variation start, and symbol stop command are received in the prescribed order within a predetermined time, but the status command at variation start is not received, the predetermined period of time has elapsed in the same way as described above. Later, a command related to the received fluctuation is transmitted to each device, and it is determined that one abnormality has occurred in communication, and a communication error command is additionally transmitted.
・If the fluctuation pattern command at fluctuation start, the symbol command at fluctuation start, and the state command at fluctuation start are received in the prescribed order within a predetermined time, but the symbol stop command is not received, the command will be sent to each device after the predetermined time has elapsed. It determines that one abnormality has occurred in communication and sends a communication error command to each device.
- If a variation start pattern command is not received, but a variation start symbol command is received, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in communication once, and a communication error command is sent to each device.
- If the variation pattern command at the start of variation and the symbol command at the start of variation are not received, but the symbol stop state command is received, neither the command related to variation nor the communication error command will be sent. Therefore, neither the symbol variation of the special lottery in the function display unit 1400 nor the decorative symbol of the special symbol variation display game in the performance display device 1600 starts to vary.

Note that an error occurring in the peripheral control unit 1511 is canceled in the following cases, for example.
・Receives a pattern stop command from the main control board 1310 ・Receives a fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation from the main control board 1310 ・Receives jackpot-related commands from the main control board 1310 (for example, between the jackpot OP start command and the state command at the end of jackpot operation) command)

Next, an error that occurs in communication between the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512 in the peripheral control board 1510 will be explained. For example, the following error occurs in communication between the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512.
1) The series code of the power-on status command does not match the series code definition output by the symbol-related setting tool, or is an unauthorized series code, or is received with the fluctuation start status command and starting opening winning command. The series code does not match the series code received with the status command at power-on 2) The combination of the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation and the symbol stop command is inappropriate 3) The symbol information of the symbol command at the start of fluctuation and the symbol of the symbol stop command Information mismatch 4) An abnormality in the win/loss check of the model-specific symbol matching process, or an error in the probability variation/non-probability variation check of the model-specific symbol matching process, or an error in the temporary stop symbol check of the model-specific symbol matching process 5 ) Some of the commands sent as a set are missing 6) Commands sent as a set time out The above 1) to 5) are communication errors that occur in the communication between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 described above. It is a factor. In other words, the effect display control section 1512 also checks for errors in the same way as the peripheral control section 1511.

1) Series code mismatch occurs when the ROM attached to the peripheral control section 1511 (peripheral control ROM 1542) and the ROM attached to the effect display control section 1512 (effect display control ROM 1552) are of different series. To immediately display a communication error to detect incorrect attachment when power is turned on.

The discrepancy in the symbol information in 3) is caused by the symbol information of the symbol command at the start of variation transmitted from the main control board 1310, transferred to the effect display control unit 1512, and received at the start of variation, and the symbol information of the symbol stop command received when the symbol is stopped. This is a case where the information does not match, and in this case, it is not necessary to stop the special symbol with the initial symbol unique to the model so that a communication error does not occur. This is because even if a communication error occurs due to the determination when the symbols are stopped, the next special symbol variation will start, so the special symbol variation display game will stop at the special lottery stop symbol in the function display unit 1400 and the special symbol variation display game in the effect display device 1600. This is because the decorative pattern that has been added will not match. Furthermore, if the symbol information at the start of variation is an incorrect value and the symbol information at the time the symbol stops is inconsistent, communication errors are counted at the start of variation and at the time of stop of the symbol.

Specifically, the missing command in 5) is determined by the following method. The determination of omission is made after a predetermined time (33.336 ms x 2) after receiving the fluctuation start fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and transferred to the effect display control unit 1512, and the fluctuation start fluctuation pattern command is If another command is received without receiving the command, the predetermined time is reset at that timing, and the command is executed after the predetermined time. Further, the completion of transmission of the variation pattern command at the start of variation is a state command at the start of variation that is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and transferred to the effect display control unit 1512. Regarding 6) timeout, if various commands cannot be received even after the set predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the communication.
- If the variation pattern command at the start of variation, the symbol command at the start of variation, the state command at the start of variation, and the symbol stop command are received in a predetermined order within a predetermined time, it is determined to be normal.
・If the variation pattern command at the start of variation, the state command at the start of variation, and the symbol stop command are received in the predetermined order within the specified time, but the symbol command at the start of variation is not received, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the communication. to decide.
・If the variation pattern command at the start of variation, the symbol command at the start of variation, and the symbol stop command are received in the specified order within a predetermined time, but the state command at the start of variation is not received, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the communication. to decide.
・If the fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation, the symbol command at the start of fluctuation, and the state command at the beginning of fluctuation are received in the specified order within the specified time, but the symbol stop command is not received, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the communication. to decide.
- If the variation pattern command at the start of variation is not received, but the symbol command at the start of variation is received, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in communication once.

The effect display control unit 1512 receives all commands sent from the main control board 1310 and transferred to the effect display control unit 1512, but receives commands sent from the peripheral control unit 1511 to the effect display control unit 1512. If not, or if the commands sent from the peripheral control unit 1511 to the effect display control unit 1512 are insufficient, the effect display control unit 1512 performs a variable display with a predetermined special symbol on the effect display device 1600.

4) The model-specific symbol matching process is a symbol matching process performed after the decorative symbol drawing for each special symbol variation display pattern, and is based on the symbol type determined for each special symbol variation display pattern and the function display unit 1400. This is a process of determining whether the symbols of the special lottery result match the decorative symbols that are stopped in the special symbol variation display game on the performance display device 1600, and specifically, the following determination is performed.
・Win/Loss: Determine whether the decorative pattern is a double hit based on loss variation (including reach loss), non-probable variation win, potential sure hit, sudden sure hit, and small hit. In addition, if the number is zero, set a fixed deviation number.
- Probable variation/non-probable variation: If the decorative pattern is a set of 3 or 7, it is determined whether the symbol type is a time saving unlimited next probability variation. In addition, when the decorative pattern is a set of 3 or 7 in a case other than the time saving unlimited next time probability change, a fixed scatter is set.
・Reach: Determine whether the left and right symbols are the same due to change in loss. Also, it is determined whether the left and right symbols are different due to reach fluctuations.
・Temporary stop pattern: It is determined whether the temporary stop pattern used for chance or pseudo-run is a pattern that the player recognizes as a hit.
・Details of reach symbol: Determine whether the left and right symbols are the middle symbol +1.
・Chance roll: Determine whether a chance roll is rolled when a chance roll should be rolled.

Note that an error occurring in the effect display control section 1512 is canceled in the following cases, for example.
・Receives a symbol stop command from the peripheral control unit 1511 ・Receives a fluctuation pattern command at the start of fluctuation from the peripheral control unit 1511 ・Receives jackpot-related commands from the peripheral control unit 1511 (for example, between the jackpot OP start command and the state command at the end of jackpot operation) When a communication error cancellation command is received from the peripheral control unit 1511 (the timing to send the communication error cancellation command from the peripheral control unit 1511 is when 300 seconds have passed after the communication error occurred)

Alternatively, the communication error may not be displayed even if one error occurs, but the number of communication errors may be counted and a communication error may be displayed when the number of communication errors reaches a predetermined number. Furthermore, the display contents of communication errors may be changed depending on the number of communication errors. It is best to count the number of communication errors each time one error factor occurs (if two error factors occur in one command transmission, it is counted as two times), and even if you add up all the error factors, , may be counted for each error factor. The number of communication errors to be counted may be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day) or by operating a RAM clear switch.

The error display timing may be changed for each error factor. For example, if the series codes of the power-on state command, the variation start state command, and the start-up winning command, which are the cause of the error in 1) mentioned above, do not match, the communication error screen may be displayed from the first time. For other error causes, a communication error message is displayed in the corner of the effect display device 1600 until a predetermined number of times (for example, the fourth time) (see FIG. 337), and once the predetermined number of times is exceeded (for example, after the fifth time) It is preferable to display the fact that there is a communication error using a screen (see FIG. 336).

A communication error can also occur due to a malfunction due to noise, so if there is a possibility of a simple malfunction, a communication error message will be displayed in the corner of the effect display device 1600, and if the communication error occurs repeatedly (for example, 5 times in one day) ), there is a high possibility that the hardware has failed, and a conspicuous error display is desirable. Furthermore, the display mode may be changed for each error factor.

Further, it is preferable that the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512 in the peripheral control board 1510 individually count a predetermined number of times. Then, under the authority of the control unit that has reached the predetermined number of times, it is preferable to immediately notify that there is a high possibility of hardware failure. In particular, when the function of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 is left on the peripheral control board, and the function of the effect display control unit 1512 is separated for each board and laid out independently, the effect display control unit 1512 There is a concern that the harness that connects the production display control board and the peripheral control board with a connector may be affected by noise, but it is possible to make early improvements in the way the harness is routed.

When displaying a communication error using the entire screen after multiple communication errors have been detected, in order to make the communication error screen less noticeable, a special symbol is displayed until the full screen communication error is displayed (for example, until the fourth time). It is best to change the image at high speed (a state in which a pattern that allows the background to be transparent is scrolled at high speed).

Also, the background to high-speed fluctuations is that unlike cases like 1) mentioned above, which are hardware abnormalities that need to be dealt with immediately, events such as software malfunctions caused by temporary noise need to be dealt with immediately. Unless it is a fatal cause, it is best to leave the background as it was when the communication error occurred so that the player can continue playing without feeling uncomfortable, and it is better to express it additionally as shown in Figure 337, which will be described later. .

Next, a notification mode when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained. First, in this embodiment, an error occurs in communication between two boards or control units, such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, or the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 in the peripheral control board 1510. When an error occurs, the effect display device 1600 can be used to display that an error has occurred in communication between boards in a manner that allows the location of the error to be identified. That is, in this embodiment, when an error occurs in communication between the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510, and when an error occurs in communication between peripheral control section 1511 and effect display control section 1512. The notification mode is different between the two.

For example, when an error occurs in communication, as shown in FIG. 336, the entire screen of the effect display device 1600 is used to display the fact that there is a communication error and an error code, and the location of the error is indicated by the display position of the error code. Be identifiable. At this time, although the variable display of the decorative symbols of the special symbol variable display game on the performance display device 1600 is stopped, it is preferable to continue displaying the special lottery on the function display unit 1400. Note that the display of the special lottery on the function display unit 1400 is stopped at the timing of transmitting the symbol stop command.

Specifically, in the case of a communication error that occurs between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 336(A), an error code is displayed to the left of the communication error display ( If a communication error occurs between the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512 (first error display), as shown in FIG. 336(B), an error code will be displayed to the right of the communication error display. is displayed (second error display). Furthermore, if a communication error occurs between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and a communication error occurs between the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512, as shown in FIG. 336(C). It is recommended to display a plurality of error codes (two on both the left and right sides) (third error display).

When the display of the special lottery on the function display unit 1400 stops while the communication error is being displayed, the effect display device 1600 does not confirm the special symbol while displaying the communication error, but displays a predetermined background according to the state at that time, Alternatively, display a fixed default background.

FIG. 337 is a diagram showing another display mode of communication errors. The error display may be displayed unobtrusively to the player, and it is preferable to display the error in a small size at the corner of the display screen (for example, lower left, lower right, upper left, upper right) instead of displaying the error on the entire screen. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols of the special symbol variable display game on the performance display device 1600 may be continued, or the variable display of the decorative symbols may be stopped. When continuing the variable display of the decorative pattern, the pattern that passes through the background is changed at high speed as described above. Even if the variable display of decorative symbols is stopped, the display of the special lottery on the function display unit 1400 continues. Note that the variable display of decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 and the display of the special lottery on the function display unit 1400 are stopped at the timing of transmission and reception of the symbol stop command.

For example, in the case of a communication error that occurs between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a triangular error display is displayed at the bottom left of the screen, and an error message is displayed on the right side of the error display, as shown in FIG. 337(A). Display the code (another example of the first error display). In the case of a communication error that occurs between the peripheral control unit 1511 and the effect display control unit 1512, a triangular error display is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and an error message is displayed on the right side of the error display, as shown in FIG. 337(B). Display the code (another example of the second error display). Furthermore, if a communication error occurs between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and a communication error occurs between the peripheral control section 1511 and the effect display control section 1512, as shown in FIG. 337(C). It is preferable to display a plurality of error displays (two on both the left and right sides) (another example of the third error display). The color of the triangular error display may be changed depending on the location where the communication error occurs. For example, the expression can be changed using the positions of the four corners or by changing the color depending on whether a communication error has been determined with a command related to starting port 1 or a communication error with a command related to starting port 2.

Although not shown, error displays (especially error codes) are unnecessary information unrelated to the performance for the player, and should be displayed in such a way that they cannot be seen when using a performance display device that displays the performance. This often involves changing the display position of the error display itself (for example, lower left, lower right, upper left, upper right), changing the color of the error display, or adding a symbol (○●△▲□■) along with the error display to indicate the location of the error. ＋＊※ etc.) should be displayed.

[41. Examples of visualization area and movable body operation securing area]
Next, we will introduce the production using game balls of the ball tank 552 and tank rail 553 provided on the upper rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the pachinko machine 1, the movable body movement securing area for securing the movable body movement area, and An example of a pachinko machine that allows various checks and inspections to be easily made without removing the game board from the front of the pachinko machine will be described.

In gaming machines, decorative members and movable members (accessories) provided on the gaming board perform effects as the game progresses. Further, on the upper rear side of the main body frame base, a ball tank to which game balls are supplied from the island equipment and an external terminal board for electrically connecting with the island equipment are provided. The external terminal board outputs a signal that notifies the hall computer of an abnormality in the gaming machine, and since this is important for the security of pachinko machines, it is difficult for those who intend to play illegal games to attempt to connect unauthorized equipment. There is.

Further, on the upper rear side of the main body frame base, there are provided a ball tank to which game balls are supplied from the island equipment, and a tank rail that guides the game balls from the ball tank to the payout unit. Furthermore, a back unit housing a control board is provided on the back side of the game board, and it is possible for a fraudulent operation to be carried out on this control board to obtain a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is important to prevent unauthorized access to the back unit.

In such game machines, decorative members and movable parts (accessories) are installed in a limited space in the game area, so the patterns of movement and performance are limited, and the performance can become stale, leading to a decline in interest. This may lead to In particular, when the decorative member protrudes from the periphery of the game area, the movable range of the movable member becomes narrower, and the movement pattern of the movable member becomes limited.
In addition, in such game machines, grooves are provided on the bottom of the ball tank and tank rail in order to remove dust that adheres to the game balls, and it is necessary to periodically clean the dust that falls from these grooves. be. However, since the dust that separates from the game balls accumulates on the back side of the game panel (for example, on top of the back cover), it is necessary to open the main body frame from the outer frame and determine whether maintenance such as cleaning is necessary. .

In addition, since the back unit of the gaming machine is covered by a back cover and attached to the back side of the game board, it is necessary to open the main body frame from the outer frame in order to check whether the back cover is closed. be.

Furthermore, since the external terminal board is attached to the back side of the upper part of the game board, it is necessary to open the main body frame from the outer frame in order to check the connection state of the external terminal board.

Therefore, in the embodiments of the present invention, it is possible to suppress the decline in gaming interest, to make it easier to judge whether or not maintenance of the gaming machine is necessary, to make it easier to judge whether the back cover is closed, and to make it easier to judge whether the back cover is closed or not. The purpose is to make it easier to determine whether or not there is fraud regarding the board.

338 and 339 are schematic diagrams showing a longitudinal section of the pachinko machine 1, mainly showing the configuration around the game panel 1100 (game board 5). As described above, the game panel 1100 is made of a transparent resin material, and has a plurality of obstacle nails planted therein. A front unit 2000 is attached to the front side of the game panel 1100, and a performance display device 1600, which is arranged at the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined performance image, and a back unit 3000 are attached to the rear side. It is attached. The back unit 3000 is covered with a transparent resin back box (unit base) 3010 on its back, top surface, bottom surface, and side surfaces. The back unit 3000 is composed of a control device and a display device to be mounted, and forms a unit main body. The back unit 3000 has the above-mentioned back box 3010, and with respect to the back box 3010, decorative bodies (the back front decoration 3601 of the back front direction unit 3600, the back center direction A decorative body of the unit 3200, a decorative body of the back rear effect unit 3100), and one or more movable bodies (back rear movable decorative body 3120, back right movable decorative body 3320, back upper movable decorative body 3410) are provided. ing. The movable body is normally housed in the upper part of the back unit 3000 (preferably in a place hidden behind a decorative body and cannot be seen from the front), and moves to come out in front of the effect display device 1600 during operation. (See Figures 151 to 157). That is, the movable body is accommodated between the decorative bodies, and the decorative body has a hole portion in which the movable body is housed. Note that the movable body may be accommodated in a gap between a plurality of decorations attached to the front side of the game panel 1100 (a recessed portion of a decoration formed by a plurality of decorations). That is, the decorative body is placed at a position avoiding the space in which the movable body is accommodated.

These holes and gaps function as an upper visibility area that makes the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 visible, and the dispensing base provided at the top of the back unit 3000 can be seen through the transparent back box 3010. Unit 550 is visible. The holes and gaps allow the movable body to rise to the top of the back unit 3000 (the position of the back box 3010), and the movable body is accommodated in these holes and gaps in the initial position, and is attached to the decorative body. You will be hidden in the shadows. The inner surface of the back box 3010 may be exposed in this hole or gap. In other words, since the movable range of the movable body can be increased, the movable body can be moved in various ways, and highly interesting performance movements can be realized. It will function as an operation guaranteed area. Furthermore, a cutout portion may be provided in the back box 3010 at a position corresponding to the movable body. That is, the dispensing base unit 550 may be visually recognized through the notch of the back box 3010. By providing a notch in the back box 3010, the operating range of the movable body can be further widened.

In addition, these holes and gaps are provided in positions that are hidden behind decorative members and cell sheets when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front from the player's side, so that when the player dares to look above the gaming area 5a. It is only visible to the public.

A top plate 551a that constitutes a part of the dispensing base unit 550 is provided on the upper part of the back box 3010, and at least a part of the top plate 551a is transparent (shown in white in FIGS. 338 and 339). (the part shown), the upper part of the top plate 551a is transparent and can be visually recognized.

Next, an outline of the configuration of the payout base unit 550 provided at the upper part of the back box 3010 will be described. As shown in the longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 338, the payout base unit 550 is provided with a tank 552 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment are stored. Therefore, when the movable body is in operation (lowering), when looking at the upper right side from the playing area 5a on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the bottom surface of the tank 552 is visible through the back box 3010 and the top plate 551a. There is.

The tank 552 may be provided on the upper part of the back unit 3000 as shown in FIG. 338, or may be provided by combining the first tank part 552m on the upper side of the back unit 3000 and the second tank part 552n on the back side as shown in FIG. may be configured. Since the bottom surface of the second tank section 552n of the tank 552 is located below the bottom surface of the first tank section 552m, the second tank section 552n is connected to the tank rail 553, and game balls flow out toward the payout unit 560. . The tank 552 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment, and static electricity is generated due to friction between the game balls and the inner surface of the tank 552. For this reason, the tank 552 may be formed of conductive resin. However, since the conductive resin is a colored resin (generally black) because it contains a conductive filler, the inside of the tank 552 cannot be viewed from below. For this reason, if all or at least a part of the bottom of the tank 552 and tank rail 553 is made of a transparent resin material (the part shown in white in FIGS. 338 and 339), the game balls stored in the tank 552 and the tank The game ball flowing down the rail 553 can be visually recognized. Both the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 function as payout ball supply means, but the tank rail 553 allows the game balls from the tank 552 to flow down to the downstream side, and the game balls from the tank 552 to flow downward. In order to receive the liquid, it is preferable to provide a groove-shaped passage starting from the boundary with the tank 552 and downstream from this point.

Further, when the tank 552 has a shape as shown in FIG. 339, not only the bottom surface of the first tank section 552m but also a portion (for example, the front side surface and the bottom surface) of the second tank section 552n on the back side of the rear unit 3000 can be visually recognized. As such, at least a portion of the back box 3010 may be configured to be transparent. Note that the entire back box 3010 may be transparent, or a portion necessary for viewing the tank 552 may be transparent.

In the example shown in FIG. 338, a part of the bottom surface of the tank 552 is made of a transparent resin material. You can also create it with By making the front side of the tank 552 also from a transparent resin material, the visible area of the tank 552 from the front side of the game area 5a can be widened. Although an example has been shown in which the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are provided above the top plate 551a, these are arranged so that the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are located directly above the back unit 3000 without intervening the top plate 551a. may be provided.

Also, depending on the shape of the tank 552, a tank rail 553 that allows the game balls to flow down from the tank 552 to the payout unit 560 is attached to the top of the back unit 3000, and the tank 552 and tank rail 553 allow the game balls to flow down from the tank 552 to the payout unit 560. It functions as a dispensing ball supply means. When looking at the upper left side of the gaming area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is visible through the holes and gaps in the decoration, the back box 3010, and the top plate 551a. Furthermore, a side visibility area is provided on the left side of the gaming area 5a by holes and gaps in the decoration, and a tank is provided on the left side of the pachinko machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side visibility area. The ball channel between 553 and the dispensing unit 560 and the dispensing unit 560 may be made visible. In this way, when the movable body is in operation (for example, when descending or moving horizontally), the structure of the base unit 550, including the tank 552, the tank rail 553, and the external terminal board 558, is such that the decorative body is not disposed. It is visible through the transparent portions of the back box 3010 and the top plate 551a from the holes and gaps that are the areas (see FIG. 342).

Although the movable body mainly operates during the game, the movable body is moved to the lowest operating position ( For example, a mode (for example, an inspection mode) may be provided in which the robot is lowered to the lowest position. In addition, when the movable body initially moves to the lowest operating position when the power is turned on, the stopping time at the maximum operating position is increased (for example, 3 seconds), and during the stopping time at the maximum operating position, the upper part of the gaming area 5a is peeked. This may be the time when the payout base unit 550 becomes visible.

Further, the light emitted from the top of the pachinko machine 1 passes through the gap between the game balls and the transparent portion of the bottom surface of the tank 552. In particular, when the movable body is in operation, light emitted from the top of the pachinko machine 1 passes through the transparent portion of the top plate 551a and the upwardly visible area, and enters into the top of the gaming area 5a. Normally, the movable body operates during a performance where the expectation level for a jackpot is high, during a jackpot game, and also during a predetermined number of games after the jackpot game (for example, in a gaming state advantageous to the player such as ST). A large amount of balls are paid out to the player. For this reason, a large flow is generated in which a large number of game balls stored in the tank 552 move, and the position of the gap between the game balls stored in the tank 552 changes with time. The light irradiated from the player and inserted into the upper part of the game area 5a fluctuates, causing movement in the light.

Further, when the movable body is in operation, the movable body and the decorative body emit light, so that the light from the movable body and the decorative body is reflected on the game balls in the tank 552, bringing flickering light to the game area 5a. In particular, it is possible to provide a light emitter or decoration that illuminates the upper part of the game area 5a without illuminating the direction of the game area 5a, and to reflect the light from the decoration by the game balls in the tank 552 and the tank rail 553. This brings flickering light to the gaming area 5a. Therefore, for example, it is possible to provide an effect using flickering light, such as light reflected or refracted on the surface of water. For example, if you want to make it look like koi are swimming in a pond, you can make it look like the light shining on the water surface is shimmering in the water. Note that, instead of a movable body or a decorative body, a dedicated lamp may illuminate the dispensing base unit 550 (tank 553, tank rail 553).

Note that the movable body is not limited to one that simply moves in front of the effect display device 1600, but also a special object that moves upward to approach the tank 552 or tank rail 553 after moving in front of the effect display device 1600. A device including a movable part may also be adopted. By moving the special movable part closer to the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (closer to the visible area), the player's line of sight can be guided upward where the ball tank 552 and the like are installed. In addition, a light emitting means such as an LED may be mounted on this special movable part to irradiate light to the game balls in the tank 552 and the tank rail 553. In this case, the movable body having the special movable part By combining the light emission effect with the effect of reflected light from the game balls received by the game balls in the tank 552 and the tank rail 553, an unprecedented new effect can be realized and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It becomes like this.

Even if the special movable part has a light emitting part and irradiates the game ball with the light emitted by itself, the special movable part has a reflection part and reflects the light emitted by other lamps and irradiates the game ball with it. Good too. The light from the special movable part is irradiated onto the game balls in the tank 552 and the tank rail 553, and the light decoration effect by the game balls in the tank 552 and the like can be enhanced.

The special movable part only needs to be moved to a position where it irradiates light onto the game balls in the tank 552 and tank rail 553 during operation, and in addition to the above-mentioned form in which it moves upward from the initial position, it can rotate and irradiate light. A configuration in which the direction is changed to face upward may also be used. Furthermore, even if the special movable part itself does not move, the optical path to the tank 552 and tank rail 553 is blocked by another movable body in the normal state, and when the special movable part moves, the movement of the movable body causes The light path may be connected so that the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be irradiated.

It is preferable that the special movable part is difficult to see due to other parts of the movable body in a normal state (for example, an initial state), and becomes easily visible when the movable body moves. Moreover, the special movable part may be difficult to see due to other parts of the movable body even in the operating state. Moreover, the special movable part may emit light when the movable body is in operation, or may emit light in the normal state.

As mentioned above, the light that the special movable part irradiates on the game ball is reflected by the game ball, and when the movable body is in operation, it passes through the transparent part of the top plate 551a and the upper visibility area, and illuminates the game area 5a. Insert it into the top. Normally, the movable body operates during performances where expectations for a jackpot are high, during a jackpot game, and further during a predetermined number of games after the jackpot game. For example, in a jackpot state, a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player and the movement of the game balls in the tank 552 becomes intense, causing the light irradiated to the tank 552 to fluctuate, causing movement in the light and creating a sparkling effect. arise. In addition, in a game state advantageous to the player such as a high probability state (for example, during a change in probability) or ST, the time saving function increases the number of game balls that enter the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the movement of the game balls in the tank 552 increases. As a result, the light irradiated onto the tank 552 fluctuates, causing movement in the light and creating a glittering effect. Furthermore, in the high probability state, the frequency of operation of the movable body increases, so there is an increased chance that the light reflected by the game balls in the tank 552 will enter the game area 5a. In this way, when the game balls stored in the tank 552 move, the direction of light reflection changes, so the light emitted from the movable body and reflected by the game balls in the tank 552 fluctuates, causing the light to move. It is perceived as sparkling.

Further, although the game balls in the tank 552 reflect light, the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 may be provided with a reflective member that reflects light irradiated from below (ie, from the game area 5a side). As a result, decoration is performed using dynamic light from the game balls moving within the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 and static light from the reflective member, making it possible to create more diverse decorations.

Further, the movable body may perform a performance operation by switching between a first special expectation level effect in which light is emitted in a standby position (for example, in a non-operating state such as an initial position) and a second special expectation level effect in which light is emitted in an operating position. At this time, by setting the light emitting time of the second special expectation level effect longer than the first special expectation level effect, and using it in conjunction with the effect of light transmitted through the gaps between the game balls in the tank 552 or reflected by the game balls, The types of performances can be increased and highly anticipated performances can be executed. In addition, in the second special expectation performance, it is possible to notify that a specific game state will be entered by a special light emission mode (for example, a rainbow light emission mode that indicates a winning that only appears in the second special expectation level performance).

Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a reflective portion made of metal plating or the like on at least a portion of the upper and front surfaces of the movable body. In the normal state, this reflective part is located at a position close to the tank 552 in the visible area (that is, a position close to the back cover), and the reflective part directs the light reflected by the game balls in the tank 552 further toward the player. Decoration may also be achieved by reflection. Note that the reflective portion may be provided on both the top surface and the front surface, or may be provided on either the top surface or the front surface. Further, when the movable body is in operation, the reflecting portion is preferably moved to a position where it reflects light in the direction of the tank 552. Furthermore, a reflective portion may be provided not on the movable body but on a decorative member fixedly provided at a position close to the tank 552 to reflect the light from the game balls in the tank 552 toward the player. When a decorative member having a reflective portion is fixedly provided near the tank 552, the decorative member is difficult to see from the player due to the movable body in the normal state, but is easily visible when the movable body is operated. It is recommended to set it in Then, by irradiating the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 with reflected light from the reflective part of the decorative member, which has become easier to see when the movable body moves, the light decoration by the reflected light of the decorative member that suddenly appears. Combined, it becomes possible to improve the interest of moving body movement performance.

Up to this point, two modes have been described, one in which the tank 552 is irradiated with light from above and the other in which light is irradiated from below. However, even when the tank 552 is irradiated with light from below, Light from ceiling lights in the hall may enter the tank 552. For this reason, an opaque covering part is provided above (upper part) of the transparent part of the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 through which light passes at least from above to below, to prevent light from entering the tank 552 and the tank rail 553. It is a good idea to provide By covering all or part of the tank 552 and tank rail 553 with this cover part, light entering the tank 552 and tank rail 553 from above is blocked, and light from the above-mentioned game board side is blocked. Only this will be reflected by the game balls in the tank 552 and tank rail 553. In other words, unnecessary light is prevented from entering from the island equipment side, and unintended light is prevented from leaking from the tank 552 and tank rail 553 to the game board side, and the effect of light from the game board side is improved. You will be able to perform to your full potential. Note that it is preferable to use a material with low light reflectance, such as black resin, as the impermeable cover that blocks this light.

Further, a covering portion made of white or fluorescent resin or metal with high light reflectance may be provided above (upper part) of the tank 552 and the tank rail 553. As a result, the light from the game board side is not reflected by the game balls in the tank 552 or the tank rail 553, and the light passing upward through the gap between the game balls is reflected by the cover toward the game board side. This makes it possible to use the game board properly without leaking light from the game board side. Note that both the above-mentioned non-light-transmitting cover portion and the cover portion made of a material with relatively high light reflectance may be used. In this case, an opaque covering part (particularly a covering part made of black resin with low light reflectance) is provided for the tank 552 where a large amount of game balls stay, and a small amount of game balls stays in the tank 552 compared to the tank 552. If the tank rail 553 where the player stays is provided with a cover made of a material with a relatively high light reflectance, the effect can be suitably performed using light from the game board side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 allows the game balls from the tank 552 to flow down a long path in the horizontal direction, the tank rail 553 has an opaque covering part (particularly a black material with low light reflectance). A covering part made of resin) and a covering part made of a material with a relatively high light reflectance are provided to vary the degree of light reflection depending on the covering part within the same tank rail 553. This also makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this way, since the gap between the game balls in the tank 552 changes depending on the movement of the game balls in the tank 552, the radiation is emitted from the top of the pachinko machine 1, passes through the gap between the game balls, and is inserted into the top of the game area 5a. The light appears to be flickering. Furthermore, since the direction of light reflection changes depending on the movement of the game balls in the tank 552, the light emitted from the movable body and reflected by the game balls in the tank 552 appears to waver. As a result, the light moves and is perceived as sparkling. In this way, by providing transparent parts in the upper visibility area (holes and gaps in the decorative body), the bottom of the tank 552, and the top plate 551a, the light that enters the play area 5a is shimmered, creating an unprecedented new effect. You can make a performance.

The back cover 640 is configured so that it can be opened from the back side. As shown in FIG. 338, a gap may be left between the abutting portion of the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a in consideration of ventilation of the electronic equipment in the back unit 3000, and as shown in FIG. 640 and the top plate 551a may be overlapped to prevent foreign matter from being inserted into the back unit 3000. Further, the contact portions may be provided at the upper and lower ends of the back cover 640 as shown in FIG. 338, or the back cover 640 may be folded into the top plate 551a as shown in FIG. Good too. Further, when the upper part of the back cover 640 is folded back as shown in FIG. 340, the folded back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may be in contact with each other.

The contact portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a is difficult to see from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is normally hidden by a movable body, so it does not interfere with the player's play, but it is movable. During the lowering movement of the body, by looking at the upper side of the gaming area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, you can see through the upper visibility area and the side visibility area without opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2. The contact portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a can be visually recognized, and the open/closed state of the back cover 640 can be confirmed. In particular, when the upper part of the back cover 640 is folded back and the folded back cover 640 is configured to abut against the top plate 551a, the folding line of the folding and the contact line where the ends abut are parallel to each other. It is recommended to configure it as follows. In other words, if an illegal foreign object is inserted when the ends are brought into contact at the same time, the fold line and the contact line will not be parallel, and the parts that are parallel in the normal state will have a different shape, causing a sense of discomfort. This makes it easier for hall staff to discover fraud during inspections.

Further, when looking above the gaming area 5a from the player's side, the abutment portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may be provided at a position where it overlaps with another member. Further, when looking above the gaming area 5a from the player's side, the abutting portion between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may be provided in a position hidden behind other members. For example, when the back cover 640 is normally closed, certain components may not be visible through the upper visibility area. In this way, if an unauthorized foreign object or the like is inserted into the contact area between the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a, a feeling of discomfort will occur due to the difference from the normal state, and the hall staff may detect unauthorized objects during inspection. Easier to discover.

A rib may be provided at the end of the back cover 640 so that when the back cover 640 is closed, the position matches the rib provided on the back cover 640, making it easy to see that the back cover 640 is closed normally. . This rib may be provided to structurally reinforce the back cover 640, or may be provided as a mark for confirming the opening/closing status. An explicit mark (for example, a colored part) is provided at the end of the back cover 640, and when the back cover 640 is closed, the position matches the mark (colored part) provided on the back cover 640, so that the back cover 640 is normal. It may be possible to make it easier to understand that the site is closed.

Further, as shown in the longitudinal cross-sectional view of FIG. 341 (cross-sectional view at a different position from FIG. 338), the payout base unit 550 is provided with a tank rail 553 that guides game balls from the tank 552 to the payout unit 560. Therefore, when the movable body is in operation (lowering), when looking at the upper left side from the playing area 5a on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the tank rail 553 is visible through the upper visibility area, the back cover 640, and the top plate 551a. It is visible. The tank rail 553 has holes that open downward on the bottom surface (for example, the left and right ends of the bottom surface) and are wide enough to prevent the game ball from falling (portions shown in white in FIG. 341), so that the game ball can roll down the tank rail 553. By moving the ball, dirt adhering to the game ball falls downward through the hole. Debris that has fallen from the groove of the tank rail 553 accumulates on the top plate 551a. In other words, the top plate 551a functions as a dust receptacle where dust accumulates, and maintenance such as regular cleaning is desirable. Therefore, the top plate 551a is preferably made of a colorless and transparent resin so as not to obstruct the visibility of the accumulated dust. In this way, by making the top plate 551a visible from the gaming area 5a, it is possible to determine whether or not the top plate 551a needs to be cleaned without opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Note that the concept of "dust" in this specification includes all foreign matter such as smaller dust that can adhere to game balls.

Note that without providing the top plate 551a, the top surface of the back box 3010 is positioned below the tank rail 553, so that the outer top surface collects trash that has fallen from the tank rail 553, and the back box 3010 functions as a trash receptacle. It may be configured to do so. Further, the back cover 640 folded back onto the top surface of the back box 3010 may function as a garbage receiving section, or the external top surface of the back cover 640 may be positioned below the tank rail 553 and function as a garbage receiving section. Alternatively, the back cover 640 and the top plate 551a may be positioned below the tank rail 553 and both may function as a dirt receiving section.

The dust receiving portion of the top plate 551a cannot be seen when looking at the front of the pachinko machine 1, and is usually hidden by a movable body, so it does not spoil the aesthetic appearance of the pachinko machine 1 for the player. During the lowering operation of the movable body, by looking above the gaming area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the dust receiving part of the top plate 551a can be seen through the upper visibility area without opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2. can be easily recognized.

Further, a tank rail 553 can be visually recognized behind the garbage receiving part of the top plate 551a, which can be seen by looking into the upper side of the gaming area 5a on the back side of the center accessory 2500 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. If the tank rail 553 is made of opaque resin, the dust receiving portion will be dark and the dust will blend into the background color, making it difficult to visually recognize the dust accumulated on the top plate 551a. For this reason, by making the tank rail 553 and the tank 552 located around it from transparent resin, the area where the garbage accumulates will be illuminated by the ceiling lights of the game hall, and the area behind the garbage will be illuminated by the game balls. Since it is metallic in color, it is easy to see whether there is trash or not and how much it has accumulated. Furthermore, since the game balls are in motion while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, they can be easily distinguished from stationary garbage. Note that it is better to make the garbage receiving section colorless and transparent so that it is easy to discover the accumulated garbage.However, if the garbage receiving section is made transparent, when the movable body moves downward during the game, the player will be able to see the accumulated garbage. The player may be able to see the garbage that is being left behind, which may lead to a decrease in interest in the game. For this reason, by constructing the trash receptacle with colored transparent resin, it is possible to suppress the visual recognition of trash by the player during the game, but when cleaning the trash, for example, the hall clerk can use a light to illuminate the colored resin. The accumulation of dust in the transparent dust receiving part can be easily checked, and the demands of both players and parlors can be met.

Furthermore, as shown in the vertical cross-sectional view of FIG. 341, the payout base unit 550 is provided with an external terminal board 558 that electrically connects with the island equipment and the hall computer and outputs signals related to the operation of the gaming machine. It will be done. Therefore, when the movable body is in operation (lowered), when looking at the upper left side from the playing area 5a on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the external terminal board can be seen through the upper visibility area, through the back box 3010 and the top plate 551a. 558 is visible. The external terminal board 558 may be attached within the case to constitute an external terminal board unit, and the external terminal board unit may be visible. Note that the external terminal board unit may include only the external terminal board 558.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, it is preferable that the external terminal board 558 is installed at an angle so that the cable connection part can be seen from the front side of the gaming area 5a through the upper visibility area. By making the cable connection part visible from the front side of the gaming area 5a, it is possible to determine whether the communication line to the hall computer is disconnected. For example, as shown in FIG. 341, it is preferable that the external terminal board 558 with the cable connection portion provided on the rear surface be installed tilted to the rear so that the cable connected to the rear surface can be seen from the gaming area 5a. Further, although not shown, the external terminal board 558, which has a cable connection section on its top surface, is preferably installed tilted forward so that the cable connected to its top surface can be seen from the gaming area 5a.

The external terminal board 558 outputs a signal to notify the hall computer of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1, and since it is important for the security of the pachinko machine 1, a person attempting to play an illegal game cannot connect an unauthorized device. I have something to plan. Therefore, by making the external terminal board 558 visible from the gaming area 5a through the upper visible area, it is possible to determine whether or not there is any fraud regarding the external terminal board 558 without opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2.

Further, although not shown, the locking unit 650 may be made visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the left side visibility area of the gaming area 5a when the movable body moves. For this reason, when the movable body operates and comes out from behind the decoration body on the left side to the gaming area 5a, if you look at the left side of the gaming area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, you will see the locking unit 650 (especially the door frame). A service hook 652 and an outer frame hook 653) are visible. In this way, when the movable body is moved, the locking unit 650 is made visible to the left from everyone in the gaming area 5a from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, so it is possible to determine whether the key is tampered with or not.

In addition to the external terminal board 558, a board for effect control may be arranged above the back box 3010. If multiple boards are visible through the upper visibility area when looking from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the external terminal board 558 that hall employees should check should be made in a different form from the other boards, so that they can be checked. It is preferable that the external terminal board 558 be easily inspected by making it possible to clearly distinguish the target board. For example, the colors of the resists on the external terminal board 558 and other substrates may be changed, or white silk printing may be applied to the entire surface of the substrate.

When white silk printing is performed on the entire surface of the board, the reflectance of light by the board increases, so the effect of reflecting the light that is emitted from the game board side and passes through the gaps between the game balls and returns it to the game board side is increased. can get. Furthermore, a substrate with white silk printing may be provided on the inner surface of the back box (unit base) 3010 to enhance the decorative effect of light. By providing the substrate at the very edge of the inner surface of the back box (unit base) 3010, the placement of decorative members is not hindered.

[42. Example of abnormality detection due to vibration]
Next, an example regarding an abnormality detected by a sensor will be described. The island equipment for installing the game machine 1 in a game hall (hall) is generally made of wood, and its strength varies depending on the game hall. Therefore, when a strong force or impact is applied to the island equipment, the level of vibration that the gaming machine 1 receives differs. Furthermore, since the gaming machines 1 are installed side by side on the island equipment, the levels of vibration received by the gaming machines installed at both ends and the gaming machines installed in the center are different.

On the other hand, if the vibration sensor 3003 provided in the gaming machine 1 detects a vibration of a predetermined level or higher, it is assumed that the player has applied an impact to the gaming machine 1, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine 1, and the game is stopped. .

Therefore, depending on the installation environment of the gaming machine 1, the vibration sensor 3003 may frequently detect vibrations, and the player may be disadvantaged due to interruption of the game. Furthermore, when the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 are opened from the outer frame 2 and closed, the door frame 3 is forcefully pushed into the outer frame 2, so nearby game machines 1 may detect vibrations. In particular, since the gaming machines 1 are installed in two rows back to back on the island equipment, the opening and closing of the door frame 3 of the gaming machines 1 installed on the back side cannot be visually observed, and only shocks and vibrations are detected by the gaming machines 1. , and an abnormality in the gaming machine 1 may be detected.

Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the vibration detection level depending on the installation environment of the gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, an example of a gaming machine in which the level at which a vibration sensor detects an abnormality can be changed will be described.

FIG. 343 is a diagram showing the connection between the vibration sensor 3003 and the main control board 1310 of this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the vibration sensor 3003 and the main control board 1310 are connected via a relay board 1720. Note that the signal from the vibration sensor 3003 may be input to the panel relay board 1710 without providing the relay board 1720 separately from the panel relay board 1710 as in the embodiment described above. The vibration sensor 3003 has a power terminal, a GND terminal, and an output terminal, and outputs a voltage that changes according to the vibration detection level from the output terminal. The vibration sensor 3003 is composed of, for example, an LC oscillator and a conductor weight, and the output frequency of the LC oscillator changes as the position of the weight changes. The vibration sensor 3003 converts frequency into voltage and outputs a voltage signal according to a change in frequency. Further, the vibration sensor 3003 may use a piezoelectric element.

The signal level output from the vibration sensor 3003 of this embodiment changes in proportion to the voltage of the sensor power supply. That is, even if the vibration level applied to the vibration sensor 3003 is the same, if the sensor power supply voltage is low, the sensor output voltage will be low, and if the sensor power supply voltage is high, the sensor output voltage will be high. In this way, the sensitivity of vibration sensor 3003 changes depending on the change in power supply voltage. Sensor power is constantly applied to the vibration sensor 3003 while the gaming machine 1 is in operation, that is, when an abnormality due to vibration is to be detected.

The sensor power supply is also input to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 has monitoring means for monitoring whether there is any abnormality in the sensor power supply voltage. This monitoring means is composed of, for example, a comparator into which a threshold voltage is input, monitors the voltage of the sensor power supply set by the switch SW1 described later, and displays the monitoring result (that is, the setting of the sensitivity of the vibration sensor 3003). It may also be displayed on the device 1600.

The sensitivity of the vibration sensor 3003 may be displayed by a predetermined operation (for example, a predetermined operation such as pressing the production operation section 301 five times in succession during demonstration display). Further, the sensitivity of the vibration sensor 3003 is preferably displayed on the effect display device 1600 (or setting display 1310g, base monitor 1310h) in a manner that does not interfere with the game (for example, in a small size at the corner of the screen). By displaying the sensitivity of the vibration sensor 3003 on the effect display device 1600, the setting of the sensitivity of the vibration sensor 3003 can be confirmed without opening the door frame 3. The sensitivity of the vibration sensor 3003 may be displayed on the setting display 1310g or the base monitor 1310h.

In addition, the main control board MPU 1311 detects that the sensor power supply voltage has become lower than the threshold voltage due to the output of the comparator, and determines that this is an abnormality in which vibrations of a strength that should originally be detected cannot be detected. It is also possible to report an error. This error may be output from the external terminal board 558.

Note that the function of monitoring the sensor power supply voltage may be provided not in the main control board 1310 but in the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 344 is a diagram showing the configuration of relay board 1720.

The relay board 1720 is housed inside a cover that can be opened and closed (for example, inside a back cover 640 that covers the peripheral control device 1500 and the like). It is preferable that this cover can be opened and closed around the open side of the door frame 3 into a state where the relay board 1720 is covered and a state where it is not covered. By setting the opening/closing axis of the cover that covers the relay board 1720 to be centered on the open side of the door frame 3, the cover of the relay board 1720 cannot be opened unless the door frame 3 is opened wide, and the relay board 1720 cannot be accessed. Unauthorized operation of switch SW1 provided on substrate 1720 can be suppressed.

Although not shown in the relay board 1720 of FIG. 344, as shown in FIG. Detection signals from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 2010 are also input to the main control board via the relay board 1720. For the various sensors that have been installed, a separate relay board is provided, and only the circuit components related to adjustment or only the adjustment switch are mounted on the board, and the sensor is installed in a position where it can be operated by opening the cover mentioned above. Good too.

Note that the sensitivity level of the vibration sensor 3003 when the power is turned on is determined by the voltage generated according to the state of the switch SW1 that is adjusted when the power is turned on. Then, by inputting this voltage to the main control board, digitizing it with an A/D converter, for example, and referring to the digital value that corresponds to the sensitivity level stored in advance, the CPU can control the sensitivity level at power-on. Recognize. Then, the digitized value is periodically monitored, and changes in the sensitivity level are recognized by referring to the digitized value thereafter. For example, when displaying the sensitivity level in the adjustment process on the effect display device 1600, it is transmitted as a command to the peripheral control device, the received peripheral control device analyzes the command, and displays the sensitivity level on the effect display device 1600. Can be done. On the other hand, if the change in the sensitivity level is determined to be an unauthorized adjustment operation, an abnormality notification image can be displayed on the effect display device. However, if these factors coexist, an abnormality notification image will be displayed even if the hall clerk who is in charge of sensitivity adjustment makes appropriate adjustments. Therefore, the sensitivity level is displayed only for a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and after the predetermined period, an abnormality notification image is displayed, indicating that an unauthorized adjustment has been made.

A power supply (for example, 35V) is input to the relay board 1720, and circuit components related to generating and adjusting the voltage applied to the vibration sensor 3030 include a plurality of resistors R1 to R7, a Zener diode D1, a switch SW1, a shunt regulator IC1, and It has a capacitor C1.

The power input from the sensor power terminal of the relay board 1720 is converted to a predetermined voltage (for example, 20V) by the Zener diode D1.

The switch SW1 is a three-pole, double-throw, three-contact, two-circuit switch, and selectively connects the common terminal to terminals 1, 2, and 3. Note that the switch SW1 of this embodiment does not use one circuit, and may be a three-pole, single-throw type. Further, the switch SW1 is a non-shorting type in which the terminals are not connected during switching. A common terminal C of the switch SW1 is connected to GND. The voltage V0 converted by the Zener diode D1 is input to the terminal 1 of the switch SW1 via the resistors R2, R3, and R4, and is input to the terminal 2 of the switch SW1 via the resistors R2, R3, and R5. It is input to terminal 3 of switch SW1 via R3 and R6. Further, a resistor R7 is provided to connect the connection point between the resistors R3 and R4 and GND, and the resistor R7 is connected in parallel with the resistors R4, R5, and R6.

The switch SW1 has a state 1 in which the common terminal C and the terminal 1 are connected, a state 2 in which the common terminal C and the terminal 2 are connected, and a state 2 in which the common terminal C and the terminal 3 are connected by operating the operation part (slider or lever). It is possible to switch between state 3. By looking at the position of the operating section of the switch SW1, the state of the switch SW1, that is, the currently set sensitivity can be confirmed.

A shunt regulator IC1 is connected to the sensor power line. A reference voltage VREF obtained by dividing the voltage V0 converted by the Zener diode D1 by the resistors R2 to R7 is input to the reference terminal REF of the shunt regulator IC1, and the shunt regulator IC1 reduces the voltage V0 to the reference voltage VREF. The sensor power is generated by controlling the current flowing between the cathode and anode.

A smoothing capacitor C1 is provided in parallel with the shunt regulator IC1 to reduce and smooth the ripple contained in the output of the shunt regulator IC1.

Therefore, in state 1 where the common terminal and terminal 1 are connected, the voltage V0 converted by the Zener diode D1 is divided by the resistors R2, R3, R6, and R7, and the reference voltage VREF of the shunt regulator IC1 is V0×( R6×R7)/((R6+R7)×(R2+R3+((R6×R7)/(R6+R7)))). Similarly, in state 2, the reference voltage VREF is V0×(R5×R7)/((R5+R7)×(R2+R3+((R5×R7)/(R5+R7))))), and in state 3, the reference voltage VREF is , V0×(R4×R7)/((R4+R7)×(R2+R3+((R4×R7)/(R4+R7)))). In this way, by changing the resistance values of resistors R6, R5, and R4, the reference voltage VREF of the shunt regulator IC1 changes, the sensor power supply voltage changes, and the output voltage of the vibration sensor 3030, that is, the sensitivity of the vibration sensor 3030 changes. .

Further, as described above, since the switch SW1 is a non-shorting type, the terminals are not connected during switching, and the resistors R4 to R6 become open. Therefore, if the resistor R7 is not provided, the power supply voltage V0 will not be divided by the resistance when the switch SW1 is switched, the reference voltage VREF will become V0, and the sensor power supply voltage will become V0. As the sensor power supply voltage increases, the sensor output voltage also increases, so there is a possibility that vibration will be erroneously detected when switching the switch SW1. In this embodiment, by providing the resistor R7, the sensor power supply voltage does not increase even during switching of the switch SW1, and the increase in the sensor output voltage from the vibration sensor 3003 can be suppressed.

By providing R7, even if the worst case scenario is that switch SW1 is defective, the land comes off due to stress during adjustment, or it stops functioning due to component failure, the applied voltage determined by the ratio with R3 will still be applied. Therefore, if the sensitivity level at this time is set to high sensitivity, at least the hole will not be damaged. As mentioned above, the sensitivity level can be checked for a predetermined period when the power is turned on, but if there is a malfunction, the sensitivity level will not change with adjustment, indicating that the switch SW1 is malfunctioning. It can be assumed that this may be the case.

Although the adjustment of the detection level of the vibration sensor 3003 has been described so far, in addition to the vibration sensor 3003, there is also a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects a magnet close to the gaming machine 1 and a magnetic sensor 2010 that detects radio waves irradiated to the gaming machine 1. For radio wave sensors (not shown) whose sensitivity can be adjusted by the voltage applied to the sensor, the detection level can be adjusted by a similar circuit. In particular, by using a shunt regulator IC, variations in sensitivity between gaming machines can be minimized. In addition, when using a non-shorting type switch that can be switched in stages as an adjustment means, by always applying an appropriate voltage, individual differences among the person making the adjustment can be minimized. Stable detection level adjustment is possible.

[43. Other aspects of the invention disclosed herein]
Among the inventions disclosed in this specification, representative aspects of the invention other than those described in the claims include the following.

Means 1: In a gaming machine,
``A decorative body made of a sheet material having a decorative part with a predetermined decoration and attached to a support member in an expandable state,
A gaming machine characterized by the following:

Here, the predetermined "decoration" includes "decoration imitating a predetermined character in line with the concept of the game machine," "decoration body imitating a predetermined item in line with the concept of the game machine," and "decoration imitating a predetermined item in line with the concept of the game machine." Examples include "decoration imitating a predetermined background or scene in accordance with the concept," "decoration such as a predetermined logo or lines in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine," and "geometric pattern."

In addition, "decorative parts" are defined as "those formed in three-dimensional form with a single color or color pattern corresponding to the decoration", and "those formed in a flat plane with a single color or color pattern corresponding to the decoration". Examples include "Something that exists".

Furthermore, examples of the "supporting member" include "a member provided on the front side of the decorative body so that the decorative portion can be viewed from the front", "a member provided on the rear side of the decorative member", and the like.

In addition, as for the configuration in which the decoration is installed in an expandable state, it can be installed by forming an elongated mounting hole in the decorative body and inserting a cylindrical mounting boss on the support member or a mounting screw into the mounting hole. "A support member in which a support groove with a gap larger than the thickness of the decoration is formed, and the edge of the decoration is loosely fitted (inserted) into the support groove to be attached." A device in which a mounting hole is formed in the body and a mounting boss that is longer than the thickness of the decorative body is formed in the support member, and the mounting boss is inserted into the mounting hole for installation. A device in which a protrusion protruding from a support member is brought into contact with the periphery of the support member to form a gap between the support member and the support member is attached.

By the way, when a decorative body made of a sheet material expands and contracts during manufacturing or due to temperature, humidity, etc. inside a gaming machine, if the expansion and contraction is uneven, the surface of the sheet may be distorted in a wavy manner. In the case where the decorative body is clamped and attached as in the technique of Patent Document 1, if the decorative body is distorted in a wavy manner, the decorative body has to be stretched and clamped, making it difficult to attach the decorative body. There was such a problem. Additionally, if the decoration is distorted, the overall thickness of the decoration increases, making it impossible to hold the decoration, and the decoration must be treated as a defective item and replaced with a good one. However, there was a problem in that the cost of the gaming machine increased.

In the configuration of means 1, the gaming machine is provided with a decorative body made of a sheet material having a decorative portion with a predetermined decoration and attached to the support member in an expandable and contractable state. be.

As a result, the decorative body made of a sheet material having a decorative portion is attached to the supporting member in an expandable state, so that when the temperature or humidity inside the gaming machine changes, the decorative body can expand and contract with respect to the supporting member. can do. Therefore, since the decorative body is not partially stretched or compressed, wrinkles or cracks do not occur in the decorative body, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion of the decorative body can be reliably exerted. The appearance of the game machine can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body, and the player can be entertained by the decoration of the decorative body, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the decorative body can be attached in an expandable and contractable state, even if the shape of the decorative body is distorted during manufacturing or the temperature at the time of manufacturing is different from the temperature at the time of assembly, the supporting member The decorative body can be attached to the game machine, which reduces the possibility that the decorative body becomes a defective product and suppresses an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In addition, the decorative body has a first mounting hole in the shape of a round hole for being attached to the support member, and a second attachment hole in the shape of a long hole provided at a position away from the first attachment hole for being attached to the support member. , may be further included. Thereby, since the first attachment hole is round, the decoration can be positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the support member by attaching the decoration to the support member through the first attachment hole. In addition, since the second mounting hole is shaped like a long hole, when the decoration expands or contracts due to changes in the temperature or humidity inside the game machine, the second mounting hole is used as a reference point and the decoration body expands or contracts within the range of the second mounting hole. It is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that can respond to the expansion and contraction of the decoration and has the above-mentioned effects.

Further, a part of the edge of the decoration may be attached by loosely fitting into the support groove of the support member. As a result, since at least a part of the edge of the decorative body is loosely fitted into the support groove of the support member, the edge of the decorative body can move within a certain range within the support groove, so that the support The groove allows the decorative body to be attached in an expandable and contractable state, and it is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that provides the above-mentioned functions and effects.

In addition, if the edge of the decoration is loosely fitted into the support groove of the support member, the decoration can be easily attached to the support member, simplifying the labor required for assembly and reducing costs. can suppress the increase in

Furthermore, the decoration is attached to the support member with the peripheral portion of the portion to be attached to the support member abutting the protrusion of the support member, thereby forming a gap between the decorative body and the support member. Also good. As a result, even if the decoration is distorted in a wavy manner due to expansion and contraction due to temperature and humidity inside the game machine during manufacturing, the support member side of the distortion can be positioned in the gap between the protrusion and the support member, so that the decoration can be It is possible to attach the decoration to the support member and allow distortion, which reduces the possibility of the decoration becoming a defective product and suppressing an increase in the cost of the game machine. The body can be attached to the support member in an expandable and contractable state, and a gaming machine that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

Further, the decorative body may further include a three-dimensional portion in which at least a portion of the decorative portion bulges out to form a three-dimensional shape. As a result, since at least a part of the decorative part of the decorative body has a three-dimensional part, the decorative effect can be further enhanced by the three-dimensional decorative part, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can strongly attract the interest of players and is highly appealing to players.

In addition, when the decoration has a three-dimensional part, even if the parts outside the three-dimensional part become wavy and distorted when the three-dimensional part is molded, the decoration can be attached to the support member in an expandable and contractable state. As described above, the decorative body can be attached to the support member without any problem, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, when the decorative body has a three-dimensional portion, the three-dimensional portion of the decorative body may be inserted into the through hole of the support member. As a result, since the three-dimensional part of the decoration is inserted through the through hole of the support member, the part of the decoration outside the periphery of the three-dimensional part comes into contact with the support member. The peripheral edge of the three-dimensional part can be supported, and the three-dimensional part can be positioned at a desired position (the position of the through hole).

In addition, when the decorative body has a first round mounting hole and a second elongated mounting hole, the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole of the decorative body have a cylindrical shape on the support member. The mounting bosses may be inserted respectively. As a result, the cylindrical mounting bosses of the support member are inserted into the first round mounting hole and the second elongated mounting hole to attach the decoration to the support member. When the decorative body expands and contracts due to changes in the temperature and humidity inside the machine, the expansion and contraction of the decorative body can be accommodated within the range of the elongated hole of the second mounting hole, with the first mounting hole as a reference, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. It is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that plays the following.

Also, if the mounting bosses of the support member are inserted into the first and second mounting holes of the decorative body, if the mounting bosses of the support member are inserted into the first and second mounting holes of the decorative body, , the decorative body can be temporarily attached to the support member, and the effort required for assembly can be reduced.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
“The decorative body is
a first round attachment hole for attachment to the support member;
It is characterized in that it further includes a second mounting hole in the form of an elongated hole, which is provided at a position apart from the first mounting hole, and is mounted to the support member.

Here, a mounting boss in which the support member protrudes in a cylindrical shape may be inserted into the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole, or a threaded portion of a mounting screw may be inserted into the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole. Moreover, it is desirable that the second attachment hole be a long hole that is long in the same direction as the straight line connected to the predetermined first attachment hole.

According to the configuration of means 2, the decorative body has a round first mounting hole for mounting on the support member, and a long hole provided at a position away from the first mounting hole for mounting on the support member. The device further includes a second mounting hole.

Thereby, since the first attachment hole is round, the decoration can be positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the support member by attaching the decoration to the support member through the first attachment hole. In addition, since the second mounting hole is shaped like a long hole, when the decoration expands or contracts due to changes in the temperature or humidity inside the game machine, the second mounting hole is used as a reference point and the decoration body expands or contracts within the range of the second mounting hole. It is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that can respond to the expansion and contraction of the decoration and has the above-mentioned effects.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or 2,
“The decorative body is
A portion of the edge is loosely fitted into the support groove of the support member.

According to the configuration of means 3, a part of the edge of the decoration is loosely fitted into the support groove of the support member.

As a result, since at least a part of the edge of the decorative body is loosely fitted into the support groove of the support member, the edge of the decorative body can move within a certain range within the support groove, so the support The groove allows the decorative body to be attached in an expandable and contractable state, and it is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that provides the above-mentioned functions and effects.

In addition, since the edges of the decorative body are loosely fitted into the support groove of the support member, the decorative body can be easily attached to the support member, and the labor required for assembly is simplified. Cost increases can be suppressed.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
“The decorative body is
The part to be attached to the support member is attached to the support member with a gap formed between it and the support member by the peripheral portion of the part being attached to the support member coming into contact with the protrusion of the support member. It is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 4, the peripheral part of the part to be attached to the support member contacts the protrusion of the support member, so that the decoration is attached to the support member with a gap formed between the decoration and the support member. It is designed so that it can be installed.

As a result, even if the decoration is distorted in a wavy manner due to expansion and contraction due to temperature and humidity inside the game machine during manufacturing, the support member side of the distortion can be positioned in the gap between the protrusion and the support member, so that the decoration can be It is possible to attach the decoration to the support member and allow distortion, which reduces the possibility of the decoration becoming a defective product and suppressing an increase in the cost of the game machine. The body can be attached to the support member in an expandable and contractable state, and a gaming machine that provides the above-mentioned effects can be reliably realized.

Means 5: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 4,
“The decorative body is
It is characterized in that it further includes a three-dimensional portion in which at least a portion of the decorative portion bulges out and is three-dimensionally formed.

Here, the three-dimensional portion may bulge toward the front side or may bulge toward the back side. Moreover, the three-dimensional part can be formed by pressure molding, vacuum molding, press molding, or the like.

By the way, when a decorative body made of sheet material has a bulging three-dimensional part, if pressure forming or vacuum forming is used as a method for forming the three-dimensional part, the shape and size of the three-dimensional part will change. In some cases, a portion of the sheet material outside the three-dimensional portion may be pulled during molding, causing the portion to be distorted in a wavy manner.

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative body further includes a three-dimensional portion in which at least a portion of the decorative portion bulges out and is formed three-dimensionally.

As a result, since at least a part of the decorative part of the decorative body has a three-dimensional part, the decorative effect can be further enhanced by the three-dimensional decorative part, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can strongly attract the interest of players and is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the decorative body has a three-dimensional part, even if the parts outside the three-dimensional part become wavy and distorted when the three-dimensional part is molded, the decorative body can be attached to the support member in an expandable and contractable state. Therefore, as described above, the decorative body can be attached to the support member without any problem, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of means 1 to 5,
“The decorative body is
The three-dimensional portion is inserted into the through hole of the support member.

According to the configuration of means 6, the three-dimensional part of the decoration is inserted into the through hole of the support member.

As a result, since the three-dimensional part of the decoration is inserted through the through hole of the support member, the part of the decoration outside the periphery of the three-dimensional part comes into contact with the support member. The peripheral edge of the three-dimensional part can be supported, and the three-dimensional part can be positioned at a desired position (the position of the through hole).

In addition, when the decorative body is attached to the rear side of the transparent support member, the three-dimensional part is inserted into the through hole of the support member, and the three-dimensional part protrudes forward than the support member. Since the part can be seen from the front without passing through the transparent support member, the three-dimensional part can be more easily seen, and the decorative effect of the three-dimensional part can be fully exhibited.

Means 7: In any one configuration from means 2 to means 6,
“The decorative body is
A cylindrical mounting boss of the support member is inserted into the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole, respectively.

According to the configuration of means 7, the cylindrical attachment bosses of the support member are inserted into the first attachment hole and the second attachment hole of the decorative body, respectively.

As a result, the cylindrical mounting bosses of the support member are inserted into the first round mounting hole and the second elongated mounting hole to attach the decoration to the support member. When the decorative body expands and contracts due to changes in the temperature and humidity inside the machine, the expansion and contraction of the decorative body can be accommodated within the range of the elongated hole of the second mounting hole, with the first mounting hole as a reference, and the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. It is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that plays the following.

Additionally, by inserting the mounting bosses of the support member into the first and second mounting holes of the decoration, the decoration can be temporarily attached to the support member, reducing the effort required for assembly. .

Furthermore, if the mounting boss is made to protrude longer than the thickness of the decorative body, the decorative body will be able to move in the direction in which the mounting boss protrudes. It is possible to cope with the distortion of the decorative body in a wavy manner due to the expansion and contraction caused by the expansion and contraction, and it is possible to realize a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Means 8: In a gaming machine,
``A decorative part with a predetermined decoration, a three-dimensional part in which at least a part of the decorative part bulges out and is formed three-dimensionally, a first round-shaped mounting hole, a first mounting hole from the first mounting hole. a decorative body made of a sheet material having a long hole-shaped second mounting hole provided at a remote position;
A cylindrical mounting boss inserted into the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole of the decorative body, a through hole through which the three-dimensional part is inserted, and a part of the edge of the decorative body are loosely fitted. The decorative body includes at least one of a support groove and a protrusion that abuts peripheral portions of the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole to form a gap between the decorative body and the decorative body. and a support member to which the holder is attached in an expandable and retractable state.

According to the configuration of the means 8, the gaming machine includes a decorative portion having a predetermined decoration, a three-dimensional portion in which at least a portion of the decorative portion bulges out and is formed three-dimensionally, and a first round hole-shaped portion. A decorative body made of a sheet material having a mounting hole and a second long-hole-shaped mounting hole provided at a position away from the first mounting hole, and inserted into the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole of the decorative body, respectively. A cylindrical mounting boss to be inserted, a through hole through which the three-dimensional part is inserted, a support groove into which a part of the edge of the decorative body is loosely fitted, and the peripheral parts of the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole. The decorative member has at least one protrusion that forms a gap between the decorative member and the decorative member, and a support member to which the decorative member is attached in an expandable and retractable state.

As a result, the round-shaped first mounting hole allows the decorative body to be positioned at a predetermined position relative to the support member, and the elongated second mounting hole allows the decorative body to be positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the support member. When the decoration body made of sheet material expands and contracts, the expansion and contraction of the decoration body can be accommodated within the range of the elongated hole of the second attachment hole based on the first attachment hole, and the decoration body is supported in an expandable and contractable state. Can be attached to parts. Therefore, since the decorative body is not partially stretched or compressed, wrinkles or cracks do not occur in the decorative body, and the decorative effect of the decorative portion of the decorative body can be reliably exerted. The appearance of the game machine can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body, and the player can be entertained by the decoration of the decorative body, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the decorative body can be attached in an expandable and contractable state, even if the shape of the decorative body is distorted during manufacturing or the temperature at the time of manufacturing is different from the temperature at the time of assembly, the supporting member The decorative body can be attached to the game machine, which reduces the possibility that the decorative body becomes a defective product and suppresses an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In addition, since at least a part of the decorative part of the decorative body has a three-dimensional part, the three-dimensional decorative part can further enhance the decorative effect, improve the appearance of the gaming machine, and improve the appearance of the gaming machine. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can strongly attract the interest of players and has high appeal to players.

Furthermore, even if the parts outside the three-dimensional part become wavy and distorted when the three-dimensional part is molded, the decoration can be attached to the support member in an expandable state, so as mentioned above, the decoration can be attached to the support member without any problem. It can be attached to the device, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, if the cylindrical mounting bosses of the support member are inserted into the first and second mounting holes of the decoration, the decoration may expand or contract due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc. inside the gaming machine. At times, the expansion and contraction of the decoration can be accommodated within the range of the elongated hole of the second attachment hole with the first attachment hole as a reference, and it is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Also, if the mounting bosses of the support member are inserted into the first and second mounting holes of the decorative body, if the mounting bosses of the support member are inserted into the first and second mounting holes of the decorative body, , the decorative body can be temporarily attached to the support member, and the effort required for assembly can be reduced.

Furthermore, when the three-dimensional part of the decoration is inserted into the through-hole of the support member, by inserting the three-dimensional part into the through-hole, the part of the decoration outside the periphery of the three-dimensional part comes into contact with the support member. Since they are in contact with each other, the peripheral edge of the three-dimensional part can be supported by the support member, and the three-dimensional part can be positioned at a desired position (the position of the through hole).

In addition, when at least a part of the edge of the decoration is loosely fitted into the support groove of the support member, the edge of the decoration can move within a certain range within the support groove. The support groove allows the decorative body to be attached in an expandable and retractable state, and it is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned functions and effects.

In addition, if the edge of the decoration is loosely fitted into the support groove of the support member, the decoration can be easily attached to the support member, simplifying the labor required for assembly and reducing costs. can suppress the increase in

Furthermore, when the peripheral parts of the first mounting hole and the second mounting hole in the decorative body come into contact with the protrusions of the supporting member, the decorative body can be mounted with a gap formed between the decorative body and the supporting member. Even if the decorative body is distorted in a wavy manner due to expansion and contraction due to temperature, humidity, etc. during manufacturing or inside the game machine, the decorative body can be supported by positioning the supporting member side of the distortion in the gap between the supporting member and the protrusion. It is possible to attach the decorative body to a component and allow distortion, which reduces the possibility of the decorative body becoming a defective product and suppresses an increase in the cost of the game machine. It is possible to reliably realize a gaming machine that can be attached to the support member in an expandable and retractable state and has the above-mentioned effects.

Means 9: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 8,
The gaming machine is
a game area where game media is driven in by a player's operation;
a plurality of receiving ports arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving gaming media;
The pachinko machine is characterized in that it is equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the reception of the game media into the receiving port.

Here, the "acceptance opening" includes "a general winning opening that is always open in the gaming area" and "an advantageous gaming state that is always open in the gaming area and gives the player an advantage by accepting gaming media." ``Starting prize opening (starting opening) where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate ``Variable prize openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory prize openings, etc.)'', ``Normal lottery drawn when gaming media passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the gaming area. Depending on the result, the game media can be placed in a specific area (e.g. gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Depending on the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the variable start, game media can be accepted, and a special lottery is held to determine whether accepting the game media will generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Winning slot (variable starting slot)", "V winning slot that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game media received in the accessory winning slot is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " Examples of advantageous gaming states that give the player an advantage include a grand prize opening or a prize winning opening that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to accept game media.

In addition, a "pachinko machine" includes "a lottery means for conducting a special lottery to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting gaming media into the starting slot, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. a special lottery result display means for variably displaying the special symbols according to the change and then displaying the special symbols, and displaying a special lottery result drawn according to the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols; and an advantageous gaming state in the special lottery result display means. an advantageous gaming state generating means that opens and closes the big winning opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state when the special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called DigiPachi machine), A distributing means for distributing game media accepted into the slot, and when the game media distributed by the distributing means is received in the V prize opening, the accessory prize opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to give the player an advantage. An advantageous gaming state generating means that generates an advantageous gaming state (so-called Hanemono machine)", "Has a grand prize opening and a prize winning opening, and is drawn by drawing by accepting gaming media into the starting opening. The grand prize opening or the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern according to the special lottery results, and when the game media accepted in the prize winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the prize winning opening or the prize winning opening is set in a predetermined manner. A device equipped with an advantageous gaming state generating means that opens and closes in a pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (a so-called multifunction machine).

According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine has a gaming area into which gaming media are driven in by the player's operation, a plurality of receiving slots that are arranged in the gaming area and can receive gaming media, and a gaming machine into the receiving slot. The pachinko machine is equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with the acceptance of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the effects of the above-mentioned means can be achieved.

Means 10: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 8,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of rotation bodies each having a plurality of designs;
a starting operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies when operated by a player after inputting the game medium;
a plurality of stop operation units for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all of the rotation bodies whose rotation is stopped by a player operating a plurality of stop operation parts, respectively. characterized by something.

Here, the term "slot machine" refers to "a machine in which the number of active lines for determining the combination of stopped symbols changes depending on the number of gaming media (medals) used in one game" and "a machine with multiple spinning bodies. A system in which an internal lottery is performed at the start of the rotation, and benefits are given that are advantageous to the player depending on the combination of stopped symbols and the internal lottery results drawn."The effective line for determining the combination of stopped symbols is fixed. Examples include "It has been done." In addition, "Benefits" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", "Assist Time ( AT)", etc.

According to the configuration of the means 10, the gaming machine includes a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a starting operation section that rotates each of the plurality of rotating bodies when operated by a player after inputting game media. , a plurality of stop operation parts for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a plurality of stop operation parts for respectively stopping the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating bodies whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation parts, respectively. The slot machine is equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the effects of the above-mentioned means can be achieved.

Means 11: In any one of the structures from means 1 to means 8,
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, a "fusion machine" that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine is a symbol array consisting of a plurality of symbols that is activated by the operation of a starting operation part (for example, an operation lever) after inserting a plurality of game media. is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the variation of the symbol row is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, a stop button), and game media are paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, or benefits advantageous to the player (for example, , advantageous gaming conditions). In addition, if the stop operation section is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol row may be stopped in response to the elapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. As a result, in a fusion machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, any of the effects of the above-mentioned means can be achieved.

A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
A peripheral control board on which a circuit constituting the peripheral control means is mounted is provided with a concealing member that conceals a part of the wiring constituting the circuit,
The concealing member has a base portion disposed in contact with the peripheral control board,
A gaming machine characterized in that circuit components are mounted on the upper side of the base portion.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, a part of the wiring constituting the circuit can be hidden by the base part, and can be mimicked by the circuit components mounted on the base part.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The concealing member has a base portion disposed in contact with the peripheral control board, and a main body portion disposed on the base portion and on which circuit components are mounted,
The base portion is a printed circuit board provided with wiring that electrically connects the circuit component and the peripheral control board.

According to the aforementioned game machine whose base portion is a printed circuit board, wiring can be formed.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The wiring formed on the lower surface of the printed circuit board is a solid pattern.

According to the aforementioned gaming machine in which the wiring is in a solid pattern, noise countermeasures can be taken.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The lower surface of the printed circuit board is covered with an insulating film.

According to the aforementioned game machine whose lower surface is covered with an insulating film, electrical connection with the peripheral control board can be prevented.

A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
The circuit constituting the peripheral control means includes a circuit component that is mounted in a removable socket,
The socket, into which the circuit component is mounted, is mounted on the upper side of a base member disposed in contact with the side control board.

According to this gaming machine, if the base part is damaged and the performance control is not performed normally, it is also possible to prevent unauthorized performance control from being performed.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The base member is a printed circuit board provided with wiring that electrically connects the circuit component and the peripheral control board.

According to the aforementioned game machine whose base portion is a printed circuit board, wiring can be formed.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The wiring of the printed circuit board is formed at least on the upper surface.

According to the aforementioned game machine in which the wiring is formed on the top surface, the wiring can be hidden by the socket.

A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game;
peripheral control means for controlling performances in the game based on instructions from the main control means;
The peripheral control board on which the circuit constituting the peripheral control means is mounted is provided with a specific member that improves the visibility of the circuit components constituting the circuit.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to improve the visibility of circuit components that constitute a circuit using specific members.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The peripheral control board is housed in a peripheral control board box,
A circuit component is mounted above the specific member.

According to the aforementioned gaming machine in which the circuit components are mounted on the upper side of the specific member, the circuit components can be placed close to the top surface of the peripheral control board box.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
A mounting prohibited area is provided around the specific member on the peripheral control board in which mounting of circuit components is prohibited.

According to the above-described gaming machine in which a region where mounting of circuit components is prohibited is provided around a specific member, abnormalities around the specific member can be easily noticed.

A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game,
The main control means is configured such that electronic components constituting an electronic circuit that controls the progress of the game are mounted on a game control board, and the game control board is housed in a sealed board box having a sealing means,
The specific electronic component among the electronic components includes a base portion and a plurality of surface mount type electronic components mounted on the base portion,
The base portion is
a pad for mounting each of the plurality of surface mount type electronic components;
a connection terminal for connecting the specific electronic component to the game control board;
and a wiring connecting the pad and the connection terminal,
The plurality of surface mount type electronic components have the same area,
The base portion is characterized in that it is larger than the mounting area of the plurality of surface mount type electronic components.

According to this gaming machine, since one or more chip parts 1335 are mounted on the base part 1331, the possibility of unauthorized modification even with small chip parts is reduced, and the fairness of the game can be ensured.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The plurality of surface mount type electronic components are characterized in that they are electronic components used for the same function in the electronic circuit configured on the game control board.

In this way, by mounting circuits that are relatively close together and require similar functions and performance, a small chip component that would be difficult to see as a single component becomes a single functional component that appears larger. This makes it possible for inspection agencies to conduct reliable inspections, making it easier to discover unauthorized modifications.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The plurality of surface mount type electronic components are:
A capacitor (for example, a bypass capacitor) that connects the power supply terminal of the integrated circuit arranged on the game control board and the ground pattern over a short distance,
It is characterized in that it is arranged near a power supply terminal of the integrated circuit.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The plurality of surface mount type electronic components are capacitors that connect the input terminal of the integrated circuit arranged on the game control board and the ground pattern, and the input terminal of the integrated circuit is connected to the input terminal of the integrated circuit through a resistor. It is characterized in that a signal input to the game control board is connected to constitute a CR filter.

A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
A main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning/losing lottery in the game,
The main control means has electronic components constituting an electronic circuit for controlling the progress of the game and an operating means mounted on a game control board, and has a sealing means such that the operating part of the operating means faces the outside. The game control board is housed in a sealed board box in which an opening is formed,
The game control board is equipped with an operation means that can be operated by a person,
The specific electronic component among the electronic components includes a base portion and a plurality of surface mount type electronic components mounted on the base portion,
The base portion is
a plurality of pads for mounting each of the plurality of surface mount type electronic components;
a plurality of connection terminals for connecting the specific electronic component to the game control board;
The device is characterized by having a wiring connecting the pad and the connection terminal.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The plurality of surface mount type electronic components have the same area and are surface mount type electronic components including two electrodes that can be mounted on the pads provided on the base portion. .

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The base portion is characterized in that it includes a connection terminal that is not electrically connected to the plurality of electronic components.

A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Display control means for controlling a display device based on a command output by the game control means;
Between the game control means and the display control means, the command output by the game control means is received, and a command to determine whether the received command is appropriate or not and send it to the display control means. comprising a transmission means;
The gaming machine characterized in that the display control means controls the display of the display device based on the command transmitted from the command transmission means, and displays an error when the command is inappropriate.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized in that the command transmitting means is a control means for controlling an effect using sound and light.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the received command is inappropriate, the command transmission means adds an error notification command to the command and transmits the command to the display control means.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
A gaming machine, wherein the display control means displays a first error based on the received error notification command.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The display control means includes:
a first error display based on the error notification command;
a second error display different from the first error display if the received command is inappropriate;
If the received command is inappropriate and the error notification command is added, selectively displaying a third error display different from the first error display and the second error display. A gaming machine with special features.

A gaming machine that provides gaming value to players,
a game control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Display control means for controlling a display device based on a command output by the game control means,
The display control means includes:
comprising appropriateness determination means for determining whether the command output by the game control means is appropriate;
A gaming machine characterized in that when the number of commands determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determining means satisfies a predetermined condition, an error is displayed on the display device.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The game machine is characterized in that the nonconformity determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the cumulative value of the number of times the inappropriateness is determined reaches a predetermined value, and displays an error on the display device.

Between the game control means and the display control means, the command output by the game control means is received, and a command to determine whether the received command is appropriate or not and send it to the display control means. comprising a transmission means;
The command transmitting means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the cumulative value of the number of times the received command is determined to be inappropriate reaches a predetermined value, and adds an error notification command to the command to control the display. send commands to the means;
The gaming machine characterized in that the display control means displays an error on the display device based on the command transmitted from the command transmission means.

a game board having a game area;
A game machine having a main body frame to which the game board is attached,
In the main body frame,
A payout means for paying out game balls to a player;
A put-out ball supply means for supplying game balls to the put-out means is provided,
The game board is
a game panel in which the game area is provided;
Decorative means provided on the rear side of the gaming panel to decorate the gaming machine;
a visualization area that makes the put-out ball supply means visible without being obstructed by the decoration means;
A game machine characterized in that game balls present in the put-out ball supply means can be visually recognized from the player side of the game panel through the visible area.

A game board with a play area,
a main body frame to which the game board is attached;
A gaming machine having a back unit provided on the rear side of the gaming board,
In the main body frame,
A payout means for paying out game balls to a player;
A put-out ball supply means for supplying game balls to the put-out means is provided,
The back unit is
unit base,
a fixed decorative member attached to the unit base;
a movable body that is attached to the unit base and operates between an initial position and an operating position below the dispensing ball supply means;
A gaming machine characterized in that a movable body operation ensuring area in which the unit main body portion is exposed is provided at a portion of the fixed decorative member that is close to the movable body when the movable body is at the initial position.

A game board provided with a game area;
a main body frame to which the game board is attached;
A gaming machine having a back unit provided on the rear side of the gaming board,
In the main body frame,
A payout means for paying out game balls to a player;
A put-out ball supply means for supplying game balls to the pay-out means;
a dust receiving part for collecting dust discharged from the hole provided in the dispensing ball supplying means;
The back unit is
unit base,
Decorative means provided on the unit base to decorate the gaming machine;
a visualization area that makes the dirt receiving part visible without being obstructed by the decoration means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the garbage accumulated in the garbage receiving section is visible from the player side of the gaming panel through the visible area.

A game board with a play area,
A gaming machine comprising a back unit provided on the rear side of the gaming board,
a control device that controls the operation of the gaming machine;
a back unit cover that covers the control device and can be opened and closed;
The back unit is
unit base,
Decorative means provided on the unit base to decorate the gaming machine;
a visualization area that allows the opening/closing status of the back unit cover to be visually recognized without being obstructed by the decoration means;
A gaming machine characterized in that at least a portion of the back unit cover is visible from the player's side of the gaming panel through the visible area.

A game board with a play area,
A gaming machine comprising a back unit provided on the rear side of the gaming board,
A gaming machine comprising an output means for outputting a signal regarding the operation of the gaming machine to the outside,
The back unit is
unit base,
Decorative means provided on the unit base to decorate the gaming machine;
a visualization area that makes the output means visible without being obstructed by the decoration means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the output means is visible from the player side of the gaming panel through the visible area.

a detection means provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine and detecting an action performed on the gaming machine;
and adjustment means for adjusting the operation of the detection means,
The adjustment means is capable of setting sensitivity to an event detected by the detection means based on predetermined conditions,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the sensitivity of the detection means to the detected event is adjusted according to the settings made by the adjustment means.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized in that the sensitivity of the detecting means is adjusted in accordance with settings made by the adjusting means when the gaming machine is powered on.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
The detection means has a characteristic that sensitivity changes depending on the supply voltage supplied to the detection means,
The gaming machine includes monitoring means for monitoring the supply voltage supplied to the detection means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the monitoring means determines that there is an abnormality when the supply voltage changes to a different value from the value at power-on.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
comprising a cover member that covers the adjustment means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the cover member has a hinge on the door opening side of the gaming machine, and is opened and closed by rotating around the hinge between a state in which the adjusting means is covered and a state in which it is not covered.

a detection means provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine and detecting an action performed for the gaming;
and adjustment means for adjusting the operation of the detection means,
The sensitivity of the detection means is adjusted by the supply voltage supplied to the detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the adjustment means is a switch capable of changing the supply voltage supplied to the detection means.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
a supply voltage switching circuit including the changeover switch;
A gaming machine characterized in that the supply voltage switching circuit always supplies the supply voltage to the detection means.

The aforementioned gaming machine,
A gaming machine characterized in that the adjustment means is capable of checking the sensitivity of the detection means.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5A Game board 5B Game board 5a Game area 9 Slot machine 2000 Table unit 2600 Center accessory 2601 Center accessory base (support member)
2601a Base plate 2601e Decorative body attachment part 2601i Positioning protrusion 2610 Front left decorative body (decorative body)
2611 Base sheet 2612 Decoration layer (decoration part)
2613 Base layer 2614 Pattern portion 2615 Flat plate portion 2616 Three-dimensional portion 2617 First mounting hole 2618 Second mounting hole 2619 Positioning hole 2620 Front left decorative body (decorative body)
2621 Base sheet 2622 Decoration layer (decoration part)
2623 Base layer 2624 Pattern portion 2625 Flat plate portion 2626 Solid portion 2627 First mounting hole 2628 Second mounting hole 2629 Positioning hole 2630 Center lower back unit 2631 Unit base 2631B Unit base 2632 Center lower back front cover (support member)
2632B Center lower back front cover (support member)
2632a Opening (through hole)
2632c Support groove 2632d Mounting boss 2632e Positioning protrusion 2632f Positioning part 2640 Center lower back decorative body (decorative body)
2640B Center lower back decorative body (decorative body)
2641 Base sheet 2642 Decoration layer (decoration part)
2643 Base layer 2644 Pattern part 2645 Flat plate part 2646 Three-dimensional part 2647 First mounting hole 2648 Second mounting hole 2649 Positioning hole 2650 Positioning slit 3600 Back direction unit 3601 Back unit base (support member)
3601a Mounting surface part 3601b Mounting boss 3601c Positioning protrusion 3610 Back decoration body (decoration body)
3611 Base sheet 3612 Decoration layer (decoration part)
3613 Base layer 3614 Pattern part 3615 Flat plate part 3616 Three-dimensional part 3617 Mounting hole 3618 Positioning hole 3700 Back direction unit 3701 Back unit base 3703 Back rear decoration lens (support member)
3703a Peripheral part 3703b Curved part 3703c Connecting part 3703d Opening part (through hole)
3703e Mounting boss 3703f Projection 3710 Back decoration body (decoration body)
3711 Base sheet 3712 Decoration layer (decoration part)
3713 Base layer 3714 Pattern part 3715 Flat plate part 3716 Three-dimensional part 3717 First mounting hole 3718 Second mounting hole 3719 Opening part 3720 Swelling part 3810 Door unit 3810A Door unit 3810B Door unit 3820 Top cover unit 3820A Top cover unit 3821 Left side decoration Unit 3822 Right side decoration unit 3824 Side unit base (supporting member)
3827 Support lens (support member)
3828 Front end support member (support member)
3830A Side interior decoration (decoration)
3830B Side outer decoration (decoration)
3831 Base sheet 3832 Decoration layer (decoration part)
3832a Transparent part 3833 Base layer 3835 Flat plate part 3836 Three-dimensional part 3837 Positioning hole 3860 Rear effect unit 3861 Rear unit base (support member)
3861c Mounting boss 3880 Rear decoration body (decoration body)
3880A Rear decoration (decoration)
3881 Base sheet 3882 Decoration layer (decoration part)
3883 Base layer 3884 Pattern part 3885 Flat part 3886 Three-dimensional part 3887 Mounting hole 3888 Opening part

Claims (1)

A plurality of electronic components constituting an electronic circuit for controlling games are equipped with a control board fixed with solder,
A special electronic component among the electronic components constituting the electronic circuit is fixed by solder to a special board different from the control board, and the special board is housed together with the control board in a sealed board box having a sealing means. In gaming machines that are
The special electronic component is a surface mount type electronic component,
The special board is
a plurality of pads to which electrodes of the plurality of special electronic components are fixed with solder;
The special electronic component has a plurality of connection terminals for electrically connecting via solder to any of the electronic components constituting the electronic circuit provided on the control board,
the pad and the connection terminal are electrically connected;
At least the special electronic components of the same type among the plurality of special electronic components are arranged side by side in the same direction and soldered to the pads at predetermined intervals when the surface fixed by solder to the special board is viewed from above. A gaming machine characterized in that the pad is formed so as to be fixed with .

Images